RAJASTHAN RAJYA VIDYUT PRASARAN NIGAM LIMITED

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

CONSTRUCTION OF GRID SUB-STATIONS

SUPPLY & ETC PROJECT

UNDER SPECIFICATION

RVPN/SE (Proc-II)/XEN-V/A-III /BN- 9016002518)

VOLUME –II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL WORKS (EHV GRID SUB-STATION)

Vol-II, Sec-I; General Technical requirements of equipment

SECTION-I

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS OF EQUIPMENT

1
Vol-II, Sec-I; General Technical requirements of equipment

INDEX
S. No. PARTICULARS PAGE NO.
1.0 SCOPE 3
2.0 SALIENT FEATURES OF 132/33 kV GRID SUB-STATIONS 3
3.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS 4
4.0 STANDARDS 5
5.0 REQUIREMENT AND QUANTITY 5
6.0 DRAWING AND DATA 5
7.0 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS / SPECIFICATION 6
8.0 COMPLETION PERIOD 6
9.0 RATES 6
10.0 QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT FOR CONTRACTOR’S 7
SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT / MATERIALS
11.0 TYPE TESTS 14
12.0 CIVIL WORKS OF 132/33 kV GRID SUB-STATIONS 15
13.0 DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFICATION 15
14.0 BILL OF MATERIAL FOR CONSTRUCTION OF 132/33 KV 15
GRID SUB-STATIONS

2
Vol-II, Sec-I; General Technical requirements of equipment

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CONSTRUCTION OF 132/33 KV GRID SUB-

STATIONS ON SUPPLY &ETC BASIS

1.0 SCOPE:

1.1 This section covers the basic technical requirements in respect of Design,
Engineering, Supply of material/equipments for construction of 132/33 kV Grid Sub-
stations along with installation, erection, testing & commissioning of the same and
execution of Civil works as per specification &RVPN's layout design on Supply &ETC
basis. The details of the GSS covered in the bid are detailed in the bid document
(Volume-I).

All the required design, engineering and drawings for construction, testing &
commissioning of 132/33 kV Grid Sub-stations shall be in bidder's scope. The bidder
shall quote their proposals strictly conforming to the technical specification details,
design as specified in this specification. Any offer based on the alternate design shall
not be considered.
The equipments to be supplied, erected & commissioned against this specification are
required for vital installations where continuity of service is very important. The design,
materials and manufacture of the equipments as well as the erection, testing &
commissioning work shall therefore be of the highest order to ensure continuous and
trouble free service over the years. The items/equipments to be supplied shall be new
& complete with all parts, accessories necessary for their effective, trouble-free
operation. Such parts, accessories will be deemed to be within the scope of the
bidder, irrespective of whether they are specifically indicated in the
commercial/technical specifications, order or not.

2.0 SALIENT FEATURES OF 132/33 kV GRID SUB-STATIONS:

(I) DESIGN PARAMETERS:

S. No. Parameters For 132 kV For 33kV

system system
1. Nominal system voltage 132 kV 33 kV
2. Highest system voltage 145 kV 36 kV
3. System Short Circuit Current 40 kA 31.5 kA
4. Basic Insulation Level 650 kVp 170 kVp
5. One Minute Power Frequency voltage 275 kVrms 70 kV rms
6. Creepage Distance (Min.) (25mm/KV) 3625 mm 900 mm
7. Frequency Variation ----------+/- 3% -----------
8. Voltage variation ----------+/- 10%-----------
9. Earthing -------- Solidly Earthed ----
(II) BUS ARRANGEMENT:

S. No. Description BUS / BAY Configuration

1. 132 kV Main Bus Twin ACSR ZEBRA
2. 132 kV Auxiliary Bus Single ACSR ZEBRA
3. 132 kV Line Bay Single ACSR PANTHER
4. 132 kV Transformer I/C Bay Single ACSR PANTHER
5. 132 kV Bus-coupler Bay Single ACSR PANTHER
6. 33 kV Main Bus Twin ACSR ZEBRA
7. 33 kV Auxiliary Bus Single ACSR ZEBRA
8. 33 kV Line Bay Single ACSR PANTHER
9. 33 kV Transformer I/C Bay Twin ACSR ZEBRA

3
Vol-II, Sec-I; General Technical requirements of equipment

S. No. Description BUS / BAY Configuration

10. 33 kV Bus-coupler Bay Twin ACSR ZEBRA
11. Transformer Jack Bus Twin ACSR ZEBRA

(III) AUXILIARY SUPPLY:

The sub-station auxiliary supply is normally met through a system having the following
parameters. The auxiliary power for station supply, including the equipment drive,
lighting etc. shall be designed for the specified parameters asunder. The DC supply for
the instrumentation and PLCC system shall also confirm the parameters as indicated
in the following table:

Normal Variation in Frequency Phase/W Neutral Connection

Voltage Voltage (in Hz.) ire
415V +/- 10% 50 +/- 5% 3/4 wire Solidly Earthed
240V +/- 10% 50+/- 5% 1/2 wire Solidly Earthed
110V 95V to 120V DC -- Isolated 2-wire system
50V - DC -- 2 wire system (+) Earthed

Combined variation of voltage and frequency shall be limited to +/- 10%.

(IV) SAFETY CLEARANCE:

132 kV 33 kV
3800 mm 2800 mm

“Safety clearance” is the minimum clearance to be maintained in air between the live
part of the equipment on one hand and earth or another piece of equipment or
conductor (on which it is necessary to carry out the work) on the other.

(V) GROUND CLEARANCE: For safety of personnel moving in the switchyard with tools
and Plant.

132 kV 33 kV
4600 mm 3700 mm

3.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:

Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory

operation under the following tropical conditions:

S. No. Parameters Specified Value / limit

1. Peak ambient Air Temperature in shade 50 Deg.C
2. Minimum ambient Air Temperature (-) 5 Deg.C.
3. Maximum relative humidity(%). 90 %
4. Minimum relative humidity(%) 10 %
5. Height above main sea level Less than 1000 Meters
6. Dust storms are liable to occur during the March to July
period
7. Average No. of thunder storm days/annum 40 days
8. Average annual rainfall (mm) 10 to 100 (depending upon area )
9. Average No. of months of tropical 4 months
monsoon conditions
10. Seismic level horizontal acceleration 0.3g

4
Vol-II, Sec-I; General Technical requirements of equipment

4.0 STANDARDS:

4.1 All the items/equipments to be designed, supplied and erected/commissioned against

this specification shall conform to the latest revision of the Indian Standards. However,
the relevant standards to which the individual equipment shall confirm have also been
mentioned in the technical specification of respective equipment.

4.2 The equipments/work covered under this specification shall also comply with the
requirements of the latest Electricity Act and the Indian Electricity Rules and any other
applicable statutory provisions, rules and regulations.

5.0 REQUIREMENT AND QUANTITY:

5.1 The scope and quantity of work covered in this specification are broadly indicated in the
in the scope of works. The works involved comprise of the following:

(A) Design, engineering, testing at the manufacturer's works and supply of all
materials / equipments as specified in BOM required for the 132/33 kV Grid sub-
stations.

(B) Supply of materials and execution of Civil works as specified in the specification
and BoM, including foundations, earthmat laying, along with construction of cable
trenches, Control Room Building (including electrification), road work, etc. within
the sub-stations & Electrification in Sub-stations.

(C) Successful Erection, Testing and commissioning of all Sub-station equipments.

5.2 The various items of work are described very briefly in the appropriate Schedule of
BPS/[Link] various items of the BPS/BOQ shall be read in conjunction with the
corresponding sections in the Technical Specifications including amendments and,
additions, if any. The Bidder’s quoted rates shall be based on the description of
activities in the BPS as well as other necessary operations required to complete the
works detailed in these Technical Specifications.

5.3 All measurements for payment shall be in S.I. units, lengths shall be measured in
meters corrected to two decimal places. Areas shall be computed in square meters &
volume in cubic meters rounded off to two decimals.

5.4 The weight of structures is available in the specification so as to enable the bidder to
work out the cost estimates thereof based on BoM. The supporting structures for Circuit
Breakers are to be supplied along with the Circuit Breakers.

6.0 DRAWINGS AND DATA:

6.1 The electrical drawings indicating the Layout plan and Single Line Diagram of the
proposed 132/33 kV Grid Sub-stations and the Earthmat (indicative) are enclosed in
the specification. All the items & equipments indicated in the drawings, unless
otherwise stated shall be considered covered in the bidder's scope.

6.2 Earthmatdesign: The earthmat drawing (for tender purpose only) of proposed Grid Sub-
stations is enclosed in the specification. The bidder shall develop the drawings as per
actual requirement, in consultation with RVPN and arrange laying of Earthmat as per
the actual approved drawing. The equipment earthing and connection to the earthmat
will be in the bidder's scope. The constructional details for laying are enclosed in this
specification.

5
Vol-II, Sec-I; General Technical requirements of equipment

6.3 The drawings of switchyard structures and equipments structures namely Column /
Beam,CT, CVT, PT, LA, Isolators etc shall be provided by RVPN.

6.4 Detailed design/drawing of Control Room Building is indicated in specification. All such
materials shall be procured as per these drawings.

6.5 The power connectors and hardware shall be suitable for withstanding the Short Circuit
current level as mentioned in the equipment specification.

7.0 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS / SPECIFICATION:

7.1 The technical particulars / specification in respect of the various equipments / material
to be supplied are available in the specification. The general technical specification for
switchyard, bay equipment erection, testing & commissioning are also been provided.

7.2 DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL (FOR MATERIAL, EQUIPMENTS & WORKS):

The successful bidder shall submit all the relevant GTP and drawings for approval
within 30 days from the date of issue of letter of Intent (LOI)/Award (LOA). These
drawings shall be submitted to the Purchaser in 2 copies. The approval/comments on
the drawings will normally be conveyed within 4 weeks from the date of
submission/receipt of drawings whichever is later. Thereafter, 2 sets of the revised
drawings shall be supplied by the contractor to the purchaser for final approval.

7.3 CONTRACTUAL DRAWINGS AND MANUALS:

The contractor shall supply 3 sets of all final (approved) as built drawings as well as in
2 sets of CDs for RVPN's future reference. These drawings shall incorporate all the
corrections/ modifications, if any, carried out during and/or after drawing approval. The
contractor shall furnish 3 sets of commissioning and maintenance instruction manuals
as well as in 2 sets of CDsin respect of each of the equipment supplied by him against
this contract. These manuals shall be supplied in neatly bound volumes. Out of above,
two sets of all above drawings & manuals & 1 set of CDshall be supplied to the
consignee and one set each to the purchaser.

8.0 COMPLETION PERIOD:

All the works including supply of material/equipments, its erection, testing &
commissioning and execution of Civil works against this specification shall be
completed as per specification. Time being the essence of the contract, timely
completion of the work is imperative. Any delay in completion will lead to recovery from
the defaulter as per provision of the specification.

9.0 RATES:
9.1 The rates quoted shall include minor details which are obviously and fairly intended,
and which may not have been included in these documents but are essential for the
satisfactory completion of the various works.

9.2 The rate quoted shall be inclusive of all plant equipment, men, material skilled and
unskilled labour etc. essential for satisfactory completion of various works.

6
Vol-II, Sec-I; General Technical requirements of equipment

10.0 QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT FOR CONTRACTOR’S SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT /

MATERIALS:

10.1 Turnkey contractor may propose the name of manufacturers/vendors from the
approved vendor list or additional vendor(s) for the items of supply. But the proposed
additional vendor(s) must meet the following minimum criteria, herein listed for the
item. Failure to comply with this requirement will result in rejection of the
manufacturers/vendors.

S. No. Equipment/Material Minimum experience required

1 (a) Minimum 50% of the total quantity (Same
or higher rating) in any one year during last
Supply of all the items as five financial years in any STU/ CTU/ PSU’s
per BOQ (Central/ State)/TBCB as on the date of
approval of the manufacturer/vendor.

(b) Satisfactory performance certificate of 1

(One) years from Utilities (i.e. STU/ CTU/
PSU’s (Central/ State)/TBCB) as on date of
approval of manufacturer/vendor.

(c) An undertaking from the manufacturer that

they are not blacklisted or debarred by any
utility/Govt. agency.

The period of validity of Type test for the items indicated in CEA guidelines shall be
considered.

10.2 LIST OF APPROVED VENDORS:

S. No. Name of Equipment/Material Name of Vendor

1. 145 kV Circuit Breaker 1) M/s HEIL (Formaly ABB, India Ltd., Vadodara)
2) M/s CGPISL, Nashik
3) M/s Siemens Ltd., Aurangabad
2. 36 kV Circuit Breaker 1) M/s ABB India Ltd., Nashik
2) M/s CGPISL, Nashik
3) M/s Siemens Ltd., Mumbai
4) M/s Schneider Electric Infrastructure Ltd.,
Vadodara
5) M/s SHREEM Electric Ltd., Jaisingpur (MH)
6) M/s STELMEC, Ltd. Mumbai
3. Power & Control Cables 1) M/s JAIDEO Enterprises, Jaipur
2) M/s INCOM Wires & Cables Ltd., New Delhi
3) M/s ALPHA Communication Ltd., Ghaziabad
4) M/s MAHARAJA Cables, New Delhi
5) M/s INSUCON Cables and Conductors Pvt. Ltd.,
Jaipur
6) M/s DECO Industries, Delhi
7) M/s ASHOKA Industries, Jaipur
8) M/s Cords Cables, Bhiwadi
4. 132 kV C&R Panels 1) M/s DANISH Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
2) M/s POPULAR Switchgear Pvt. Ltd., Vadodara
3) M/s VENSION Electric Pvt. Ltd., Bangalore
4) M/s AARTECH Solonics Ltd., Bhopal

7
Vol-II, Sec-I; General Technical requirements of equipment

S. No. Name of Equipment/Material Name of Vendor

5) M/s SIEMENS Ltd., Thane
6) M/s GE T&D India Ltd., Chennai
7) M/s TECHUP, Trichy
8) M/s MANGAL UDYOG, Jaipur
9) M/s Nelumbo Technologies Pvt. Ltd., Noida
5. 33 kV C&R Panels 1) M/s DANISH Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
2) M/s POPULAR Switchgear Pvt. Ltd., Vadodara
3) M/s HERTZ Electronics, Indore
4) M/s AARTECH Solonics Ltd., Bhopal
5) M/s STELMEC, Ltd. Mumbai
6) M/s SYSTEM Electronics Laboratory, Jabalpur
7) M/s TENCO Systems & Switchgears Pvt. Ltd.,
Indore
8) M/s MANGAL Udyog, Jaipur
9) M/s PYROTECH Electronics Pvt. Ltd., Udaipur
6. POWER Transformers 1) M/s Transformers & Rectifiers (India) Ltd.,
Ahmadabad
2) M/s Technical Associates Ltd., Lucknow
3) M/s ECE Industries Ltd., Sonepat
4) M/s ATLANTA Electricals Pvt. Ltd., Anand
5) M/s BBL, New Delhi
6) M/s BHEL, Jhansi
7) M/s VOLTAMP Transformers, Ltd., Vadodara
7. Sub-Station Transformers 1) M/s Fatehpuria Transformers and Switchgears
(P) Ltd., Jaipur
2) M/s Steadfast Power System Pvt. Ltd., Gurgaon
3) M/s Vijay Electricals Ltd., Hyderabad
4) M/s Technical Associates Ltd., Lucknow
5) M/s DANISH, Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
6) M/s STAR-DELTA Transformer Ltd., Bhopal
7) M/s United Transformers, Jaipur
8. 120 kV Lightning Arresters 1) M/s CGPISL, Nashik
2) M/s ELEKTROLITES (Power), Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
3) M/s LAMCO IndustriesPvt. Ltd., Hyderabad
4) M/s OBLUM Electricals Pvt. Ltd., Hyderabad
9. 30 kV Lightning Arresters 1) M/s ELEKTROLITES (Power), Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
2) M/sOBLUM Electricals Pvt. Ltd., Hyderabad
3) M/s SHREEM Electric, Kohlapur
4) M/s LAMCO IndustriesPvt. Ltd., Hyderabad
10. 110 V Tubular Lead Acid Battery 1) M/s EXIDE Industries Ltd., Kolkata
set
2) M/s Aaj- Accumulators Pvt. Ltd., Kolhapur
11. Battery Charger 1) M/s RS Power Systems Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
2) M/s THYCON Industries, Jaipur
3) M/s Radetron, Jaipur
12. DC Distribution Board 1) M/s Mangal Udyog, Jaipur
2) M/s Dusad Electricals, Jaipur
3) M/s Power Consultants, Jaipur
4) M/s DANISH Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
5) M/s Radetron, Jaipur
13. Marshalling Kiosk 1) M/s SELMORE Engineers, Jaipur
2) M/s Mangal Udyog, Jaipur

8
Vol-II, Sec-I; General Technical requirements of equipment

S. No. Name of Equipment/Material Name of Vendor

3) M/s Power Consultants, Jaipur
4) M/s Chetani Electrical Equipments, Jaipur
5) M/s Radetron, Jaipur
14. LT Switchgear Board 1) M/sPower Consultants, Jaipur
2) M/s Mangal Udyog, Jaipur
3) M/s Dusad Electricals, Jaipur
4) M/s DANISH Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
5) M/s Sanhit Automation Bhiwadi
6) M/S Ultima Switchgear Ltd, Delhi
15. 145 kV Isolators 1) M/sELKTROLITES (Power) Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
2) M/s FARADY Electricals Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
3) M/s Engineers Enterprise, Jaipur
4) M/s Topline Industries (Raj.), Bikaner
5) M/s Excel Associates Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
6) M/s DUSAD Electricals, Jaipur
7) M/s Kanti Prashad Mittal, Meerut (U.P.)
16. 36 kV Isolators 1) M/s ELKTROLITES (Power) Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
2) M/s FARADY Electricals Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
3) M/sExcel Associates Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
4) M/s Abhinav Industries, Jaipur
5) M/s Engineers Enterprise, Jaipur
6) M/s Topline Industries (Raj.), Bikaner
7) M/s DUSAD Electricals, Jaipur
8) M/s Kanti Prashad Mittal, Meerut (U.P.)
17. 145 kV Solid Core Insulators 1) M/s ADITYA Birla Insulators, Halol (Guj.)
2) M/s MODERN Insulators Ltd., Abu Road
3) M/s SARVANA Global Energy Ltd., Cuddalore
(Tamilnadu)
4) M/s Insulators & Electricals Company,
Mandideep (M.P)
18. 2x24 kV Post Insulators 1) M/s Topline Ceramics Pvt. Ltd., Bikaner
2) M/s Bhatinda Ceramics (P) Ltd., Bathinda
19. 145 kV Current Transformer 1) M/s Vishal Transformers & Switchgears (P) Ltd.,
Meerut
2) M/s Heptacare Power Industries Pvt. Ltd.,
Meerut
3) M/s SCT Ltd., Ghaziabad
4) M/s Mehru Electrical & Mechanical Engineers
(P), Ltd., Bhiwadi
20. 36 kV Current Transformers 1) M/s Vishal Transformers & Switchgears (P) Ltd.,
Meerut
2) M/s Heptacare Power Industries Pvt. Ltd.,
Meerut
3) M/s Electricfield Company, Jammu
4) M/s Kapco Electric Pvt. Ltd., Noida
5) M/s Mehru Electrical & Mechanical Engineers
(P) Ltd., Bhiwadi
6) M/s Apoorv Electric Pvt. Ltd., Indore
21. 145 kV Capacitor Voltage 1) M/s CGPISL, Nashik
Transformers
2) M/s SIEMENS Ltd., Aurangabad
3) M/s ABB India Ltd., Vadodara

9
Vol-II, Sec-I; General Technical requirements of equipment

S. No. Name of Equipment/Material Name of Vendor

4) M/s BHEL, Bhopal
5) M/s Mehru Electrical & Mechanical Engineers
(P), Ltd., Bhiwadi
22. 36 kV Potential Transformers 1) M/s Vishal Transformers & Switchgears (P), Ltd.,
Meerut
2) M/s Heptacare Power Industries Pvt. Ltd.,
Meerut
3) M/s Electricfield Company, Jammu
4) M/s Kapco Electric Pvt. Ltd., Noida
5) M/s GE T&D India Ltd., Jaipur
23. Sub-station Structures 1) M/s Shri Ashutosh Engineering Industries,
Raipur
2) M/s Nandan Steels and Power Ltd., Raipur
3) M/s Brahampuri Steels Ltd., Jaipur
4) M/s Arihant Engineering Works, Jaipur
5) M/s Nexo Industries Pvt. Ltd., Ludhiana
6) M/s Ratna Engineering Works Raipur
7) M/s Anil Steels Pvt. Ltd., Kundali (Sonepat)
8) M/s N. L. Engineers Pvt. Ltd. Mohali
9) M/s R. S. Infra-Transmission Ltd., Jaipur
10) M/s VSP Enterprises Pvt. Ltd., Ganaur
(Sonepat)
11) M/s Telecom Network Solutions, Noida
12) M/s Pragati Electrocom Pvt. Ltd., Gurgaon
13) M/s SoluxGalfab Pvt. Ltd., Kolkata
14) M/s Accords Communication Pvt. Ltd.,
Phatehganj, Baroda
15) M/s Salasar Techno Engineering (P), Ghaziabad
16) M/s Associate Power Structure (P), Vadodara
17) M/s NAMDHARI INDUSTRIAL TRADERS (P)
Ltd., Ludhiana
18) M/s Shri Krsna Urja Project Ltd., Jaipur
19) M/s. Madhav Udyog Pvt Ltd, Mandi Gobindgarh,
Punjab
24. ACSR Conductor ‘PANTHER' 1) M/s AGARWAL General EngineeringWorks
(Pvt.) Ltd., Jaipur
2) M/s PREM Cables (P) Ltd., Pali
3) M/s Venkateswara Wires Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
4) M/s Rajasthan Cables &Conductors Pvt. Ltd.,
Jaipur
5) M/s NECCONPower &Infra Limited, Jaipur
6) M/s LUMINOIndustries Ltd., Kolkata
7) M/s DYNAMIC Cables LTD., Jaipur
8) M/s JSK Industries Pvt Ltd., Mumbai
9) M/s Rajasthan Transmission Wires Pvt. Ltd.,
Jaipur
10) M/s Mahaveer Transmission Ltd., Dehradun

25. ACSR Conductor 'ZEBRA' 1) M/s AGARWAL General Engineering Works Pvt.
Ltd., Jaipur
2) M/s PREM Cables Pvt. Ltd., Pali
3) M/s VENKATESWARA wires Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur

10
Vol-II, Sec-I; General Technical requirements of equipment

S. No. Name of Equipment/Material Name of Vendor

4) M/s RAJASTHAN Cables & Conductors Pvt.
Ltd., Jaipur
5) M/s NECCON Power & Infra Ltd., Jaipur
6) M/s LUMINO IndustriesLtd., Kolkata
7) M/s DYNAMIC Cables Ltd., Jaipur
8) M/s RAJ. Transmission Wires Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
9) M/s Mahaveer Transmission Ltd., Dehradun
26. 7/3.15 mm GSS Earthwire 1) M/s HIMACHAL Wire Industries Pvt. Ltd.,
Kangra
2) M/s BAJRANG Wire Products (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
Jaipur
3) M/s NIRMAL Wire Pvt. Ltd., Kolkata
4) M/s KRITIKA Wire Pvt. Ltd., Kolkata
5) M/s Geekay Wires Pvt. Ltd., Hyderabad
6) M/s Bedmutha Industries Ltd., Nashik
27. INSULATORS
(a) Porcelain Long Rod 1) M/s MODERN Insulators Ltd., Abu Road
(b) Disc 1) M/s BHEL, Amethi (UP)
2) M/s WSI, Chennai
3) M/s Aditya Birla Insulators, Hoogly (WB)
4) M/s Suraj Ceramics Industries, Bikaner
5) M/s Imperial Ceramics Pvt. Ltd., Bikaner (70kN
only)
6) M/s Shreeji Power & Insulators P. Ltd., Kutch
(Guj.) (70kN only)
7) M/s Bikaner Ceramics Pvt. Ltd., Bikaner
28. Substation Hardware and 1) M/s EXCEL ASSOCIATES Pvt. Ltd., Jaipur
connectors for ACSRConductor &
Earthwire
2) M/s RAJASTHAN TRANSMAT P. Ltd., Jaipur
3) M/s PREMIER POWER PRODUCTS
(CALCUTTA) P. Ltd., Kolkata
4) M/s S.R. ELECTRICAL Pvt Ltd., Howrah
5) M/s Electromech&Transtech Pvt. Ltd., Kolkata
6) M/s Aluminum Electricals Industries, Banaras
29. Bolts & Nuts 1) M/s Nexo Industries Pvt. Ltd., Ludhiana
2) M/s A.V. Forgings, Mohali
3) M/s Ravi Engineers, Amritsar
4) M/s Karamtara Fasteners, Mumbai.
5) M/s Deepak Fasteners, Ludhiana.
6) M/s Forex Fasteners, Ludhiana
7) M/s Garg Fasteners, Ludhiana
8) M/s Techman India, Chandigarh
9) M/s A.S.P. [Link].,Howrah
10) M/s Millenium structures (India) Ltd., Indore
11) M/s Sterling olts (P) Ltd., Howrah
12) M/s G.K.W. Ltd., Howrah
13) M/s Pankaj International, Ludhiana
14) M/s Bharat Industries, Howrah
15) M/s Precision Auto Engineers, Ludhiana
16) M/s J.C. Fasteners Limited, Rohtak
17) M/s DFL International Limited, Ludhiana

11
Vol-II, Sec-I; General Technical requirements of equipment

S. No. Name of Equipment/Material Name of Vendor

18) M/s Remax (India), Ludhiana
19) M/s Bharati Overseas, Ludhiana
20) M/s Anishika Fasteners Pvt Ltd., Nagpur
21) M/s Precision Fasteners Limited, Mumbai
22) M/s HR Steel Industries, Howrah
23) M/s N. L. Engineers [Link]., Mohali
24) M/s G.S. Castings, Kurukshetra
25) M/s Nishant Steel Industries, Ludhiana
26) M/s Roshan Impax Pvt. Ltd., Ludhiana
27) M/s Indian Steel and Wire Products Ltd.,
Jamshedpur
28) M/s Namdhari Industrial Traders (P), Ltd.,
Ludhiana
30. Washers / Spring Washers 1) M/s Nexo Industries Pvt. Ltd., Ludhiana
2) M/s Springlock Industries, Vadodara
3) M/s Chempromech Engineers, Nagpur
4) M/s Forbes & Gokak Ltd., Mumbai
5) M/s Navin Metal Industries, Kolkata
6) M/s Forex Fasteners, Ludhiana.
7) M/s Ravi Engineers, Amritsar
8) M/s RoshanImplex Pvt. Ltd., Ludhiana
9) M/s Pankaj International, Ludhiana
10) M/s Millenium structures(India) Ltd., Indore
11) M/s Anand Bolts, Ludhiana
12) M/s A.V. Forgings,Mohali
13) M/s Garg Fasteners,Ludhiana
14) M/[Link].,Mohali
15) M/s G.S. Castings, Kurukshetra
16) M/s Namdhari Industrial Traders (P), Ltd.,
Ludhiana
31. 48 V VRLA Battery set 1) M/s NED ENERGY Ltd., Hyderabad
2) M/s AMARA RAJA BATTERIES Ltd., Triputi
3) M/s Exide Industries Pvt. Ltd., Kolkata
32. 48 V SMPS Battery Charger 1) M/s S. M. CREATIVE ELECTRONICS Ltd., Delhi
2) M/s PUNJAB COMMUNICATIONS Ltd., Mohali
3) M/s StatconEnergia PVT. Ltd., Noida
4) M/s Delta Electronics India Pvt. Ltd., Rudrapur
(Utrakhand)
33. Insulating Rubber Mat 1) M/s Premier Polyfilm Ltd., Ghaziabad
2) M/s Marvel Vinyls Ltd., New Delhi
34. Safety Helmet 1) M/s P. N. Safetech (P) Ltd., New Delhi
2) M/s Vinayaka Enterprises, Jaipur
3) M/s Gaurav Gems, Jaipur
4) M/s Udyogi International Pvt Limited
35. Rubber Hand Gloves 1) M/s Classic Industries, Jodhpur
2) M/s Elektro Equipments, Ajmer
3) M/s Dahanu Rubber Gloves Mfg. Co., Thane
36. Fibre Glass Ladder 1) M/s E-safe Enterprises, Jodhpur
(Plastic moulded)
37. Fibre Glass Discharge Earthing 1) M/s E-safe Enterprises, Jodhpur
Rod
38. Fire Extinguisher 1) M/s Hitech Industries, Rajkot

12
Vol-II, Sec-I; General Technical requirements of equipment

S. No. Name of Equipment/Material Name of Vendor

2) M/s Intime Fire Appliances (P) Ltd., Mumbai
39. Furniture 1) M/s Godrej
2) M/s Zuari
3) M/s Featherlite
40. Earthing Material 1) M/s Namdhari Industrial Traders (P), Ltd.,
Ludhiana
2) M/s H. S. Engineering Works, Ghaziabad
3) M/s Bhrampuri Steels, Jaipur
4) M/s KhyatiIspat Pvt. Ltd., Raipur
5) M/s SanvijayRolling & Engineering Ltd., Nagpur
6) M/s Royal Ispat Udyog, Mandi, Gobindgarh,
Punjab
7) M/s Madhur Iron & Steel (I) Pvt. Ltd., Bhilai
41 Coupling Device (Phase to Ground) 1) M/s Puncom, Mohali
2) M/s Zanith Transformers & Switchgears Pvt. Ltd,
Sonipat.
42. Carrier Set (without Protection 1) M/s Puncom, Mohali
coupler)
2) M/s Hitachi, Banglore (ABB)
43. 75 Ohm HF coaxial cable 1) M/s Maharaja cables, Bhiwadi
44. Wavetrap 0.2mH/1000A 1) M/S GE T&D
2) M/S Quality Power, Sangli, Maharastra.
45. Insulation Tester 1) M/s. Megger

11.0 TYPE TESTS:

11.1 Each equipment/item offered for supply against this specification shall be of a design
which is already type tested as per the latest relevant standards and the requirements
specified in this specification.

11.2 The equipment shall be supplied from the same manufacturing works, where from the
sample unit was manufactured and successfully type tested as per the relevant
Standards (IS / IEC).

11.3 In the event of Order, the Contractor shall furnish the latest type test certificates from a
a Govt. approved/ NABL accredited laboratory / ILAC i.e. International Laboratory
Accreditation Co-operation (in case of foreign laboratories) or the type test certificate
from in-house laboratory of manufacturer shall also be accepted provided the
laboratory is accredited by National Accreditation Body of the country and tests have
been witnessed by a representative of NABL accredited laboratory / Power Utility
(wherever specified in Technical Specification for particular item) for all the type tests;
wherever prescribed in the relevant latest editions of Indian Standards/International
Standards, for approval. The type test certificates should not be older than 07
(SEVEN) / 10 (TEN) years (as per requirement of particular items mentioned in the
technical specification) as on the date of Technical bid opening for which the date of
conducting of test shall be considered. However, no separate type test charges shall
be paid to the bidder.

11.4 Type test reports as per Clause 11.2 above for equipments/items manufactured by any
of the approved vendors need not be submitted along with the offer. The type test
reports of equipment / item shall be submitted for approval to RVPN, before

13
Vol-II, Sec-I; General Technical requirements of equipment

commencement of supply. Any delay on account of furnishing type test reports for
approval shall not be considered for extension in completion period of the project.

11.5 If the type tests are more than 07/10year old, then the bidder has to arrange for type
testing the equipment/item at no extra cost to RVPN.

11.6 Further, in the event of any discrepancy in the test reports i.e. any test report not
acceptable due to any design/ manufacturing changes(including substitution of
components) or due to non-compliance with the requirement stipulated in the
Technical Specification or any/all additional type tests not carried out, same shall be
carried out without any additional cost implication to RVPN.

11.7 Not-withstanding anything stated above, the RVPN’s decision regarding type tests will
be final and binding on the bidder.

12.0 CIVIL WORKS OF 132/33 kV GRID SUB-STATIONS:

Civil works of proposed 132/33 kV Grid Sub-stations shall be carried out by the
contractor as per attached specification.

13.0 DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFICATION:

In case, the bidder desires to deviate from this specification on any account, the details
of such deviations alongwith the reasons and justifications thereof shall be brought out
clearly in the Schedule of Deviations (Schedule-K). Unless brought out specifically in
the schedule of Deviations, the offers shall be treated to be conforming to the
requirements of the specification in all respects.

14.0 BILL OF MATERIAL FOR CONSTRUCTION OF 132/33 KV GRID SUB-STATIONS:

14.1 The Bill of Material for Supply and ETC & Civil part for construction of Grid Sub-
stations is detailed at Schedule- B.

14
 INDEX
SECTION PARTICULARS
I GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS OF EQUIPMENTS
II GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF EQUIPMENTS/MATERIAL
III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ERECTION, TESTING &
COMMISSIONING OF GRID SUB-STATIONS
IV DRAWINGS
Vol-II, Sec-II; General Technical specification of equipments/material

SECTION-II

GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF EQUIPMENTS/MATERIAL

1
Vol-II, Sec-II; General Technical specification of equipments/material
INDEX
S. No. PARTICULARS
1.0 250 KVA, 33/.415 KV STATION TRANSFORMER
2.0 145 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER
3.0 145 KV ISOLATOR
4.0 145 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER
5.0 145 KV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
6.0 120 KV LIGHTNING ARRESTER
7.0 132 KV C&R PANEL
8.0 132 KV SOLID CORE POST INSULATORS
9.0 36 KV VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER
10.0 36 KV ISOLATOR
11.0 36 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER & POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
12.0 30 KV LIGHTNING ARRESTER
13.0 33 KV C&R PANEL
14.0 2X24 KV POST INSULATORS
15.0 110 V BATTERY SET
16.0 110 V BATTERY CHARGER
17.0 DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
18.0 LT SWITCHGEAR BOARD
19.0 CONTROL AND POWER CABLE
20.0 MARSHALLING KIOSK
21.0 SUB-STATION HARDWARE, CLAMPS & CONNECTORS
22.0 SUB-STATION STRUCTURES
23.0 LED LIGHTING
24.0 GSS EARTH WIRE; 7/3.15 mm
25.0 MS STEEL SECTIONS
26.0 ACSR CONDUCTOR "PANTHER"
27.0 ACSR CONDUCTOR "ZEBRA"
28.0 48V BATTERY SET
29.0 48 V BATTERY CHARGER
30.0 TESTING & MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
31.0 MECHANICAL FOAM TYPE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
32.0 DRY POWDER TYPE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
33.0 CO2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER
34.0 FIRE BUCKETS
35.0 DESKTOP COMPUTER & PRINTER
36.0 INSULATING RUBBER MAT
37.0 HAND GLOVES
38.0 SAFETY HELMET
39.0 PLASTIC MOULDED LADDER
40.0 EARTHING ROD
41.0 WAVE TRAP
42.0 COUPLING DEVICE
43.0 CO-AXIAL CABLE
44.0 CARRIER SETS
45.0 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
46.0 BFD
47.0 DCU, RTU

2
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 250 KVA 33/0.415 KV SUB-STATION

TRANSFORMERS

1.01 SCOPE:

This specification covers the design, manufacture, stage inspection and testing at the manufacturer's
works before dispatch, supply and delivery at the destination stations in Rajasthan, of the transformer
having ratings as mentioned in the bid specification.

The transformers shall be of copper wound 250KVA, 33/0.415 kV, 3 phase, natural cooled, double
wound, core type construction, oil immersed and shall be suitable for outdoor service as step-down
transformers.

1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

The intention of the specification is to provide information for the design of the above mentioned
transformers to be fully suitable in every respect for the functions designated. It is required that the
supplier in accepting the contract agrees to furnish all apparatus, appliance and material whether
specifically mentioned or not, but which may be found necessary to complete, perfect, or test any of
the herein specified units in compliance with the requirements implied in this specification without
extra charges.

1.02.1 All terminal screws, studs, nuts and bolts shall be in accordance with the Indian Standards.

1.02.2 All electrical and mechanical equipment shall be designed and manufactured so that no
damage will result from transportation, installation and operation of the equipment under the climatic
conditions specified in the specification to which it will be subjected.

1.02.3 All materials used shall conform to this specification and appropriate standards and shall be
new in all respects.

1.02.4 Consideration may be given to alternatives which the supplier considers advisable by reason
of his own manufacturing requirements and experiences, provided descriptive matter is submitted
and the recommended device or arrangement equal to or superior to that required by the
accompanying specification and if the purchaser is convinced of the quality and/or superiority of
the equipment.

1.03 STANDARDS:

The transformers, their accessories and fittings, transformer oil, etc. shall conform to the latest edition
of the following standards (as amended upto date) except where specified otherwise in this
specification:
1. Transformer IS:2026 and IS-1180 (Part-1)2014:
Outdoor type oil immersed Distribution
Transformers upto and including 2500
KVA,33 KV
2. Transformer oil IEC:60296 / IS1866
3. Bushings IS: 2099, 3347, 8603
4. Fittings and accessories for transformers IS:3639
5. Code of practice for selection installation & IS:10028
maintenance of transformer
6. Guide for loading of oil immersed transformers IS:6600
7. Method of impulse voltage testing IS:2070

1
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

1.03.1 Equipment meeting the requirements of any other authoritative standards which ensures a
quality equal to or better than that as per the standards mentioned above, shall also be acceptable.
Where the equipment conforms to any other standards, salient points of difference between the
standards adopted and the specified standards shall be clearly brought out.

1.04 TYPE AND RATING:

1.04.1 The transformers shall be of copper wound 250 KVA, 33/0.415 KV, 3 phase, natural cooled,
double wound, core type construction, oil immersed and shall be suitable for outdoor service as step-
down transformers (At times however these may be required to work under reversal of power also).

1.04.2 The transformers may be required to run in parallel with existing transformers of the similar
capacity. The technical particulars of transformers required are as under:

1. Maximum continuous rating at reference 250 KVA

ambient temperature
2. Frequency 50 Hz
3. No. of phases 3 phase
4. Rated primary Voltage on principal tap 33 KV
5. Rated secondary Voltage 0.415 KV
6. Winding connections
a). HV side Delta
b). LV side Star
c). Vector group reference Dyn11
7. Type of cooling ONAN
8. Percentage impedance at normal voltage & 4.5 %
75 deg.C average winding temp. between
HV-LV with tolerance as per ISS.
9. Off circuit tap changer Having 6 equal step (7 Position of 2.5 %
each to have voltage variation of + 5% to -
10% on HV side).
10. Max. current density for HV & LV 3 Amp/mm sq (for Cu wound)
including tapped winding
11. Neutral unbalance Current Not exceeding 2.0%
12. Type of terminal Vertical take off type suitable for ACSR
"Panther" conductor on HV sides & suitable
for connecting cable thimble 300 [Link] cable
on LV side

1.05 EFFICIENCY:

The percentage loading for the max. efficiency shall be clearly stated at unity power factor as well as
0.8 p.f.

1.06 INSULATION:

1.06.1 The dielectric strength of the winding, given insulation and the bushings shall conform to the
values given in IS:2026 ([Link])/1981 (or its latest amendment) for highest system voltage of 36
KV,1.1 KV and shall be suitable for the following impulse test\power frequency test voltages.

SYSTEM VOL. [Link] VOL. IMPULSE TEST VOL. PF TEST VOL.

33 KV 36 KV 170 KVp 70 KV
0.415 KV 1.1 KV ------- 2.5 KV
2
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

1.07 TEMPERATURE RISE:

Each transformer shall be capable of operating continuously at their normal rating without exceeding
temperature rise limits as specified below:
Type of [Link] External Cooling
Cooling Medium (Air)
Winding (Temp. rise ONAN 45 0 C When the oil
measured by resistance circulation is natural
method) non-directed
Oil (Temp. rise measured by As above 40 0 C -----------------
thermometer method)

The maximum ambient temperature for which the transformer shall be designed, shall be 500 C.

The transformer shall be capable of being over loaded in accordance of IS:6600/ 1972.

i) Bushing and its terminal connectors shall have minimum continuous current rating corresponding to
120% rated current of transformer at lowest tap.

1.08 PARALLEL OPERATION:

The transformers covered by this specification are to run in parallel with transformers which are either
already installed or are being installed (for same rating) and as such the characteristics of the
transformers covered in this specification for the substation will be identical so as to enable these
transformers to run in parallel.

1.09. IMPEDANCES:

The recommended percent impedance at 750 C for 250 KVA shall be 4.50%

1.10. GUARANTEES:

1.10.1 The supplier are required to offer the transformers having no load losses and load losses not
exceeding the following values without any positive tolerance.

1. No load loss at rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency 450 Watts (Max.)
2. Total Loss at 50 % load at rated current, rated voltage, rated freq. and 989 Watts (Max.)
75 Deg.C
3. Total Loss at 100 % load at rated current, rated voltage, rated freq. and 2902.5 Watts (Max.)
75 Deg.C

The above specified values of losses are maximum guaranteed as per BIS Energy Efficient level-2,
without any positive tolerance.

Note:- The BIS-Certificate level-2 rating transformers as per IS-1180 (Part-1) 2014 shall be furnished
by the supplier before commencement of supplies. The supplies shall be availed only after furnishing
of BIS Certification level-2 by the supplier from Bureau of Indian Standard and any delay in arranging
BIS-Certificate for level-2 shall be on supplier’s account.

The transformer could also be rejected if excess losses are less than above limits but calculations
suggest that there is not enough margins in the temp. rise values to be contained within permissible
limits to absorb such losses unless temp. rise test is repeated on the transformer free of cost.

3
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

1.10.2 The following recoveries shall be made for the excess losses upto the prescribed limits as
above.

(i) Recovery for excess of no load losses : @ Rs 3,32,000 per KW

(ii) Recovery for excess of load losses : @ Rs 1,36,000 per KW.

For fraction of a KW, the recoveries shall be made on pro rata.

The supplier shall provide the design details of core assembly showing the construction details, core
diameter, nett/ gross sectional area of the core assembly, thickness of lamination etc. The information
must also be given in respect of volts per turn at principal tap for normal voltage. The loss curves for
type/grade of steel laminations being used for core shall also be provided.

1.11 COOLING:

1.11.1 Each transformer shall be provided with ONAN type cooling.

1.11.2 The ONAN cooling of the transformers shall be by natural circulation of air while the
circulation of oil shall be effected by natural convection, the maximum oil flow being assured by a
method whereby the return flow of cooled oil is made to enter the tank at a level coinciding with the
bottom of the hot columns of oil thus avoiding centre heads of cold oil at the bottom of the tank. Out
flow shall be arranged to coincide as nearly as possible with the hot oil level at the top of the tank so
that the total available difference will be fully employed in circulating the oil round the shortest
possible paths.

1.11.3 The windings of the transformers shall be designed to deliver continuously rated KVA
corresponding to ONAN cooling.

Radiators shall be provided for cooling purpose. These shall be directly mounted on the tank on both
sides in a balanced manner & not on one side only.

1.12 TRANSFORMER CORE:

1.12.1 The core shall be built up with thin lamination of high grade, non ageing, low loss,
high permeability, cold rolled, grain oriented silicon steel specially suitable for transformer core.
The particulars of laminated steel to be employed/used shall be furnished along with DC
magnetization, B-H and iron loss curves and grade of CRGO Core material indicating nomenclature
along with thickness of lamination, specific core loss etc.

1.12.2 If required after being sheared the laminations shall be treated to remove all burrs and
shall be reannealed to remove all residual stresses. Atleast one side of each lamination shall be coated
with a double baked enamel insulation coating which will not deteriorate due to pressure and the
action of hot oil. The nature of insulation shall be specified.

1.12.3 Every care shall be exercised in selection, treatment and handling of core steel to
ensure that as for as practicable, the laminations are flat and finally assembled core is free from
distortion.

1.12.4 The design of the magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid discharges, development
of short circuit paths within itself or to the earthed clamping structure and the production of flux
components at right angles to the plane of the laminations which may cause local heating.

1.12.5 The core shall be rigidly clamped to ensure adequate mechanical strength and to
prevent vibration during operation. The core/clamping bolts shall not pass through Core/Yoke and
clamping structure shall be so constructed that eddy currents will be minimum.
4
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

1.12.6 The core shall be provided with lugs suitable for lifting the complete core and coil
assembly of the transformer. The core and the coil shall be so fixed in tank that shifting will not occur
when the transformer is moved or during a short circuit.

1.12.7 FLUX DENSITY:

The maximum flux density in any part of the core and yoke at rated voltage and frequency shall be
such that the flux density with +12.5% combined voltage and frequency variation from rated voltage
and frequency shall not exceed 1.9 Tesla.
(Note:The design calculations in support of flux density shall be furnished by the manufacturer).

No load current shall not exceed 2% of the full load current and will be measured by energising the
transformer at rated voltage and frequency. Increase of 12.5% of rated voltage shall not increase the
no load current by 5% of the full load current.

1.13 WINDING:

1.13.1 The windings shall be so designed that all coil assemblies of identical voltage ratings shall be
inter changeable and field repairs to the windings can be made readily, without special equipment.
The coils shall be supported between adjacent sections by insulating spacers and bracers. Bracings
and other insulation used in the assembly of the windings shall be arranged to ensure a free circulation
of the oil and to reduce hot spots in the windings. The windings shall be designed to reduce to a
minimum the out of balance forces in the transformer at all ratios. The double paper covering
insulation shall be used in HV & LV coils.

1.13.2 The insulation of the coils shall be suitable to develop the full electrical strength of the
windings. All materials used in the insulation and assembly of the windings shall be insoluble, non
catalytic, and chemically inactive in the hot transformer oil, and shall not soften or otherwise be
adversely effected under the operating conditions.

1.13.3 All threaded connections shall be provided with locking facilities. All leads from the
windings to the terminal board and bushings shall be rigidly supported to prevent injury from
vibration. Guide tubes shall be used where practicable.

1.13.4 The windings shall be clamped securely in place so that they will not be displaced or
deformed during short circuits. The assembled core and windings shall be vacuum dried and suitably
impregnated. The Copper conductor used in the coil structure shall be best suited to the requirements
and all permanent current carrying joints in the windings and the leads shall be welded or braced
except compression type which may be used for terminal connections. Bolted connection may be used
at the bushings and at terminal board with suitable locking device. The drying out procedure of the
core coil assembly shall be indicated.

1.13.5 The material used for insulation and coils shall be of best quality and if desired, invoices and
manufacturers test certificates shall be furnished.

1.14 FAULT WITHSTANDING CAPACITY OF WINDINGS:

All the windings shall be suitably designed to withstand short time rating for not less than 2 seconds.
The max. temp. attained for short time rating shall not exceed 250 degree C.

1.15 INSULATING OIL:

1.15.1 The oil for first filling shall be supplied with each transformer. The oil shall be EHV grade-I
and shall comply IEC:60296 with latest amendments.
5
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

1.15.2 Particular attention shall be paid to deliver the oil for topping up free from moisture having
uniform quality throughout in the non-returnable new steel drums.

1.15.3 The quantity of oil for first filling of each transformer shall be stated. Quantity of oil required
for filling of conservator and radiators shall be stated in the guaranteed technical particulars.

1.15.4 The transformer oil purchased from M/s. Savita Chemical, M/s. Apar, M/s. Raj Lubrichem,
M/s. Raj Petroleum and M/s. Lubrichem shall only be supplied. Invoice and test certificates of
manufacturer of transformer oil shall have to be furnished as and when desired by the Nigam.

1.16 TANK:

1.16.1 The transformer tank and cover shall be fabricated from good commercial grade low carbon
steel suitable for welding and of adequate plate thickness. The tank and cover shall be of welded
construction. All seams shall be welded and where practicable they shall be double welded. The
transformer tank shall have sufficient strength to withstand without permanent distortion.

1.16.2 Atleast one manhole/inspection cover with a welded flange and a bolted cover shall be
provided on the tank cover. The manhole shall be of a sufficient size to afford easy access to the lower
ends of the bushings, terminals etc.

1.16.3 All bolted connections to the tank shall be fitted with suitable oil tight gaskets which shall
give satisfactory service under the operating conditions. Special attention shall be given to the
methods of making the hot oil tight joints between the tank and the cover as also between the cover
and the bushing and all other outlets to esure that the joints can be remade satisfactorily and with ease,
with the help of semi-skilled labour. Where compressible gaskets are used, steps shall be provided to
prevent over compression. Suitable guides shall be provided for positioning the various parts during
assembly or dismantling.

1.16.4 Lifting eyes or lugs shall be provided on all the parts of the transformers requiring
independent handling during assembly or dismantling. In addition the transformer tank shall be
provided with lifting lugs and bossess properly secured to the sides of the tank, for lifting the
transformer either by cranes or by jacks.

1.16.5 The design of the tank, the lifting lugs and bosses shall be such that the complete transformer
assembly filled with oil can be lifted with the use of these lugs without any damage or distortions. The
tank shall be provided with two suitable copper alloy, lugs for the purpose of groundings.

1.16.6 The exterior of transformer tank shall be thoroughly given one primary coats & two finishing
coats of durable oil and weather resistant paints of enamel. The colour of the finishing coats shall be
dark admiralty grey confirming to colour code number 320 of IS.

1.16.7 The plate thickness for tank construction for side plates shall be minimum 5 mm and for
top & bottom plates it shall be minimum 6 mm.

1.17 UNDER CARRIAGE :

1.17.1 The transformer tank shall be supported on a structural steel base equipped with forged steel or
cast steel, flat uni-directional rollers suitable for moving the transformer completely filled with oil.

1.17.2 Pulling eyes shall be provided to facilitate moving the transformer and they shall be suitably
braced in a vertical direction so that bending does not occur when the pull has a vertical component.

1.18 OFF LOAD TAP CHANGER MECHANISM:

6
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

1.18.1 The off circuit tap changer shall be of high quality and robust in construction. It shall be
located at a convenient position so that it can be operated from ground level by a standing operator.
The handle of OCTC shall be provided with a locking arrangement. Thus enabling the OLTC to be
locked in position. Arrangement for indicating of tap position shall also be provided. It shall be
suitable for local manual operations. The tap changer shall be capable of permitting parallel operation
with other transformer of the same type. When one unit is in parallel with another of same type as
mentioned in clause No.1.07 under normal condition, the tap changer shall not become out of step.

1.18.2 The OCTC shall be capable of carrying rated MVA on all taps. The breaking capacity of the
OCTC shall be compatible with the highest system voltage and current based on maximum over
loading permissible under IS:6600 -1972 (150% of rated this) Step voltage of OCTC shall not be less
than 115% of 2.5% of the nominal phase voltage of the HV winding and rated through current of
OCTC at this voltage will not be less than 150% of rated current of HV winding at lowest tap.

1.18.3 Off circuit tap changing arrangement shall be either by means of an externally operated
switch with mechanical blocking device and a position indicator arrangement for pad-locking shall be
provided.

1.19 OIL PRESERVING SYSTEM:

1.19.1. Oil preserving equipment shall be conventional conservator tank type. The minimum oil level
in the conservator tank shall not be below the level of the bushing flanges.

1.19.2. Oil conservator tank shall be located well clear of the bare connection of the transformer
terminals. The conservator tank shall have adequate capacity between highest and lowest permissible
levels to meet the requirement of expansion of the total cold oil volume in the transformer and cooling
equipment from min. ambient temperature to highest oil temp. as desired.

1.19.3 The total volume of the conservator shall be min. 10% of the total quantity of oil in
transformer.
The inside diameter of the pipe connecting the conservator to the main tank should be 25 to
50 mm and it should be projected into the conservator so that its end is at least 20 mm above the
bottom of the conservator so as to create a sump for collection of impurities. The minimum oil level
corresponding to -50 C should be above the sump level.

1.20 BUSHINGS:

1.20.1 All main winding and neutral leads shall be brought out through outdoor type bushings. The
electrical characteristics of bushing shall be in accordance with IEC-137 as well as IS-3347/8603 and
IS-2099 and IS 7421. The bushing shall be rated for highest voltage and current rating of the
respective windings. The current ratings of bushing shall be atleast 150% of the rated current at
minimum tap to permit overloading. The creaepage distance shall not be less than 25 mm per KV.

1.20.2. The bushings shall have high factor of safety against leakage to ground and shall be so located
as to provide adequate electrical clearances between bushings and between the bushings and ground
parts. The spacing between the bushings shall be adequate to utilize full flashover strength preventing
flashover between the phases or between phase and ground parts under all conditions of operation.

1.20.3. All bushings shall be equipped with suitable solder less terminals of approved type. The type
and size shall be specified. All external current carrying contact surfaces shall be placed adequately.

1.20.4. Bushings of identical voltage ratings shall be interchangeable.

7
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

1.20.5. Special adjustable arcing horns shall be provided with HV bushing. Each bushing shall be so
co-ordinate with the transformer insulation that all flashover occur outside the tank.

1.20.6. All porcelain used in bushings shall be of the wet process homogeneous impervious to
moisture and free from cavities or other flaws and throughout verified and smoothly glazed. The
glazing shall be of the uniform colour and free from blisters, burns and other defects. All bushings
shall have puncture strength greater than the dry flashover voltage.

1.21. CENTRE OF GRAVITY.

The center of gravity of the assembled transformer shall be low and as near the vertical center line as
possible. The transformer shall be stable with or without oil. If the center of gravity is eccentric
relative to track either with or without oil its location shall be shown in the outline drawing.

1.22. FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES:

The each transformer shall be provided with the following fittings and accessories:
i) 150 mm dial type thermometer for oil.
ii) One oil drain cum sampling valve for main tank with plug or core plate of suitable size with
locking arrangement.
iii) One filter valve located at the top of the tank on the LV side. The opening of this valve shall be
baffled to prevent aeration of oil.
iv) One filter valve located near the bottom of the tank on the HV side of the
transformer with suitable locking arrangement.
v) Air release device. It shall be of adequate capacity and shall be provided to
release the trapped air during/after filling of the oil.
vi) Explosion vent (Pressure release device)
vii) Fixed radiators for cooling as per clause 1.11.
viii) An oil conservator having detachable end plates, with following provisions.
a) One oil filling hole with plug and drain valve on the conservator.
a) One PLAIN oil level gauge having painted/embossed marking as min., normal, and max. oil
level.
b) Silica gel breather with Oil seal and Dehydrating agent.

ix) Eye bolts and lugs on all parts for ease of handling.
x) Two grounding terminals as per clause No.1.16.5.
xi) Rating, Diagram and terminal marking plates:

Rating, diagram and terminal marking plates of stainless steel or brass for transformers and other
accessories giving details as per IS-2026 shall be provided. Purchase order reference, date of dispatch,
weight of all important items, no load & load loss figures and postal addresses. Performance
guarantee shall also be indicated.

xii) Bimetallic terminal connectors suitable for "ACSR Panther" for HV bushing and
terminals suitable for connecting cable thimble of 300 [Link] cable on LV side.
xiii) HV bushing with adjustable arcing horns 3 Nos. and 4 Nos. LV bushing
xiv) Triple pole type off load tap changer as per [Link].1.18.
xv) Rollers :
Transformers shall be provided with Four numbers of flat bi-directional rollers.
xvi) Skids :
xvii) Hauling Eyes :
Hauling eyes shall be provided on all the four sides of the transformer base.

xviii) Jacking Pads :

8
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

Four, sturdy jacking pads shall be provided for lifting complete transformer to enable rotation of its
wheels through 90 degree for pulling on transformer tank. Lifting height and safe capacity of jacks.

xix) Lifting Lugs:

Two sets of forged or tested mild steel plate lifting lugs, one set for top cover, core and coil
assembly and other set of complete transformer shall be provided. Lifting lugs shall be of adequate
strength and size for attaching steel rope slings. Should lugs for lifting complete transformer be
located on the base, sling guides shall be provided on cover.
xx) Inspection Covers:

One inspection covers of sufficient size for access to the interior of the tank shall be provided on the
cover. The inspection covers shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangements.

All type of valves shall be of gun metal except radiator shut off valves which may be of cast
iron/steel. All valves shall be provided either with blind companion flanges or with pipe plugs for
protection.

1.23 FACTORY ASSEMBLY AND TESTS:

1.23.1 The transformer shall be completely assembled and tested at the Factory. It shall be at the
option of the purchaser to send a representative(s) for carrying out stage inspection and various tests
during actual manufacture and assembly of transformer(s) so as to satisfy regarding the quality of
product and material being used. The meters & instruments used for measurement of losses shall be
of accuracy class 0.5 or better.

All Type and Routine tests as per specification are to be conducted and no deviation in respect of
conducting these tests will be acceptable. If purchaser selects to send a representative, all tests shall be
carried out in his presence.

1.23.2 STAGE INSPECTION:

The supplier shall offer all the transformers for stage inspection. The stage inspection will particularly
include the following tests/ checks besides the general routine tests to be conducted during
manufacturing stages as per manufacturer's standard practice. No deviation shall be acceptable.

i) Physical inspection/checking of winding insulating material, core material and other

accessories/ fittings of transformer.
ii) Measurement of core area, cross sectional area of winding(s), number of turns in each
winding of one transformer out of the offered lot.
iii) Measurement of thickness of tank plates (Bottom and sides) and to conduct pressure &
vacuum tests as per CBIP manual for transformer tests to ensure the adequate strength of tank plates
on one tank out of the offered lot. For remaining tanks manufacturer’s test certificates are to be
furnished.
iv) Selection of sample of core material from assembled core of one transformer out of the
offered lot of transformers and sealing by Inspecting Officer for checking of specific loss at 1.6 tesla,
magnetizing characteristics(B-H curve) and thickness from Govt. approved/ Govt. recognized testing
lab by supplier. The inspecting officer will measure thickness of core lamination during stage
inspection.
The value of specific core loss of core sample taken during core building measured at Govt. approved/
recognized lab shall be indicative & for reference purpose only. The transformer shall be considered
acceptable as per the provisions of specification based on the losses measured during final
inspection/testing.

v) Visual and dimensional check during assembly stage of core.

9
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

vi) High voltage test (2KV,50Hz for one minute) between all core-bolts if provided and agreed to
frame bars/fishplates etc. and Ferro-magnetic steel of core.

vii) Check on completed core for measurement of Iron losses.

Note: The stage inspection of a particular unit shall be considered complete when all the steps stated
in the stage inspection are carried out for that particular unit.

1.23.3 ROUTINE TESTS :

Each completed transformer shall be subjected to following routine tests as per IS:2026 Part.I & III
(latest amendment). If the bidder desires, he may not fix radiators on transformers (other than the one
which is to be type tested) during routine testing. However, in that case, radiator manufacturer's test
certificate shall be furnished for reference of inspecting officer with undertaking that supplier shall be
responsible for proper alignment/fixing of radiator on transformer at site.

a) Measurement of resistance of each winding.

b) Measurement of turns ratio between HV-LV windings at each tap.
c) Checking of polarity and phase relation-ships for each winding.
d) Measurement of no load loss and no load current.
e) Positive phase sequence impedance/short circuit impedance between HV-
LV windings on minimum, maximum and normal taps.
f) Separate source voltage withstand test.
g) BDV test on transformer oil as per 1.15.4.
h) Induced over voltage withstand test.
i) Measurement of neutral unbalance current.
j) Regulation at rated load at unity and 0.80 lagging power factor.
k) Load losses measured at rated frequency by applying voltage sufficient to
produce the rated relevant current in one winding with the other winding short circuited.
l) Measurement of insulation resistance.
m) The total losses shall comprise of the No Load Losses, load losses at rated
output duly converted at 75 degree C average winding temperature and shall also be indicated in the
test report. Load losses shall be that corresponding to rated load on HV & LV winding.
n) Routine dielectric tests as per IS:2026 (Part.I & III), 1981.
o) Check complete transformer against approved outline drawing, provision
for all fittings, finish oil level etc.
p) Pressure test
Plain tanks- The transformer tank with welded/ bolted cover shall be tested at a pressure of 35 kPa
above atmosphere pressure maintained inside the tank for 10 minute. There should be no leakage at
any point.

q) Oil leakage test

The assembled transformer for non-sealed and sealed type with all fitting including bushing in
position shall be tested at a pressure equivalent to twice the normal head measured at a base of the
tank for 8 h. There should be no leakage at any point. Tank with corrugatations shall be tested for oil
leakage test a pressure of 15 kPa measured at the top of the tank for 6h. There should be no leakage at
any point.

r) Tests on transformer oil as per IS:1866-2000 table-1 (Latest

amended)Test report from CPRI/ ERDA for testing as per table-1 of IS:1866-2000.

1.23.4 TYPE TESTS:

10
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

One transformer (Complete in all respects) selected at random, shall be subjected to the following
type tests. Type tested unit shall be guaranteed for satisfactory normal use.

a) Dielectric test: The lightning impulse test alongwith chopped wave test shall be made in
accordance with IS: 2026 ([Link]), 1981 (latest amended) on complete transformer i.e. on all the
three limbs of the transformer on HV. The tests on three phases of high voltage winding of
transformers shall be performed on extreme tapings and the principal tapping respectively i.e. one
terminal will be with minimum tap other with maximum and third with principal tap position.

b) Temperature rise test: It shall be conducted as per IS:2026/77 [Link] at min tap (having max.
current) by feeding sum of maximum guaranteed no load losses and load losses relevant to min. tap.
(having maximum current).

c) Oil leakage test as per CBIP manual.

d) Short circuit test: The bidder is required to furnish detailed short circuit test report as per
applicable IS:2026 (as amended from time to time) and as per provision of BIS-1180 (BIS Energy
Efficient level-2) for the test conducted at CPRI/ERDA, against earlier order of RVPNL or any other
power utilities on transformer of similar rating and design as quoted with same guaranteed NO load
and Load losses and percentage impedance at normal tap. The duration of each short circuit shot
should be at least 0.25 second. The short circuit test reports so furnished should not be older than 5
(five) years. In absence of short circuit test report as above, the supplier shall have to arrange short
circuit test at CPRI/ERDA, on one transformer (Complete in all respects) selected at random at
their own cost.

The short circuit test in absence of valid short circuit test report shall also be arranged by the
bidder at CPRI/ ERDA. If facility to conduct impulse test in NABL accredited lab is not available
with the transformer manufacturer, then the same shall also be arranged by the supplier at Govt./
Govt. approved/ Govt. recognized laboratory accredited by NABL for the tests conducted at their
cost. In that event, the transformer shall be sealed by purchaser's representative at firm's works for
sake of identification during above type test. These tests shall also be witnessed by purchaser's
representative at CPRI/ ERDA/ Govt./ Govt. approved / Govt. recognized laboratory accredited by
NABL. These test reports shall be arranged by the supplier for which no extra charges shall be paid.

If the short circuit test is arranged then no load and load losses shall also be measured at CPRI/
ERDA, the losses measured shall be considered as final for the purpose of calculating penalty for
excess losses if any found on higher side.

e) Pressure test:

For non- sealed and sealed type transformers, the transformer tank subjected to air pressure of 80 kPa
for 30 min and Vacuum of 500 mm of mercury for 30 min. the permanent deflection of flat plate, after
pressure/Vacuum has been released, shall not exceed the values given below.

Length of Plate Deflection

Up to 750 mm 5.0 mm
751 mm to 1250 mm 6.5 mm
1251 mm to 1750 mm 8.0 mm
Above 1751 mm 9.0 mm

[Link] The bidder shall provide the following test reports after inspection:

11
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

a) Test report from Govt./Govt. approved/ Govt. recognized lab. for the core material
sample of one transformer drawn during stage inspection of core building for measurement of
specific losses at 1.6 tesla, magnetization characteristics and thickness.
b) Test report from CPRI/ ERDA for oil sample drawn from the tank of transformer
selected at random for testing as per table-1 of IS:1866-2000.
[Link] The Bidder shall provide the manufacturers routine test certificate for bought out items
to the Inspecting Officer during inspection.

1.24 TYPE TEST CERTIFICATE AND BIS-CERTIFICATE:

A. The following valid type test(s) reports of Station transformers/ Distribution transformers
having shall be furnished in respect of the equipment of similar or higher rating, type tested from
Govt. approved lab or manufacturers lab at works accredited by NABL for the tests conducted,
duly witnessed by Govt. agency or officers of any electricity board/Nigam. These type tests
certificates should not be older than Five (5) years. Date of test certificate shall be considered as the
date on which test was conducted on the equipment.

i) Lightning impulse alongwith chopped wave test as per IS-2026 ([Link]) latest on complete
transformer i.e. on all three limbs of HV of the transformer .

ii) Temperature rise test.

B. The supplier should be a Manufacturer having BIS-Certificate for level-2 rating for the
bid item as per IS-1180 (Part-1) 2014. The valid BIS-Certificate shall be furnished.

1.25 TESTS AT SITE:

After erection at site all transformer(s) shall be subjected to the following tests:
i) Insulation resistance test.
ii) Ratio and polarity test.
iii) Dielectric test on oil.

In case the equipment is not found as per the requirements of the purchase order, all expenses incurred
during site testing will be to the bidder’s account and the material shall be replaced by him at site, free
of cost.

1.26 FURTHER TESTS:

The purchaser reserves the right of having other reasonable tests carried out at his own expenses either
before dispatch or during performance guarantee period from Govt. approved/ Govt. recognized lab.
to ensure that the transformer complies with the requirements of this specification after due intimation
to the supplier. In case the equipment is not found meeting the requirement of PO/ specification, all
expenses incurred for such testing will be on supplier’s account and the material shall be replaced by
the supplier at site free of cost.

1.27 TEST REPORTS:

After all tests have been completed, 03 certified copies of each test report shall be furnished. Each
report shall supply the following information.

i) Complete identification data including serial number of the transformer.

ii) Method of application, where applied duration and interpretation of results for each tests.
iii) Temperature data corrected to 75 degree C including ambient temperature.

12
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

1.28 FREQUENCY AND SYSTEM VOLTAGE:

The transformer shall be suitable for continuous operation with a frequency variation of plus minus
3% from normal of 50 cycles per second without exceeding the specified temperature rise. The
highest system rated voltage shall be 36 KV. However, the flux density requirements shall be as per
clause 1.12.7.

1.29 DRAWINGS:

1.29.1 The drawings and the technical literature list below shall be submitted:

i) General outline drawings showing front, side elevations and plan views of the transformer and
all accessories and external features with detailed dimensions, net and shipping weight, crane lift for
undertaking and for erection/ removal of bushing, size of lifting and pulling eyes, HV & LV terminal
clearances, live terminal to ground clearances, quantity of insulating oil etc.

ii) Core assembly drawing showing complete constructional details and flux density calculations
& details of insulation.

iii) Drawings giving details of name plate & terminal marking and connection diagrams.

iv) Drawings of bimetallic terminal connectors with test certificates.

Thermal/dynamic calculations to provide transformers capability to withstand short circuit under

worst conditions.

1.29.2 In the event of an order the supplier shall also supply 3 sets of the above drawings/documents
listed at 1.29.1, based on final design to the purchaser for approval. The purchaser will review the
drawings and return one copy to the contractor.

1.29.3 Each drawing returned by the purchaser will be stamped (a) "Generally Approved" or (b) "
Generally approved subject to observation". In case of (b), the inspecting officer shall verify at the
time of inspection that care have been taken for the observations.

1.29.4 Any shop work done prior to approval of the drawing shall be at the supplier's risk. The
supplier shall make all such changes in the design as are considered necessary to make the equipment
conform to the provisions and intent of this specification without any additional cost to the purchaser.

1.29.5 Each drawing shall be identified by a drawings number and each subsequent resubmission/
revision or addition to the drawings or procedure. All drawings shall be thoroughly checked for
accuracy and completeness and signed or initialed by a responsible officer of the contractor.

1.29.6 Checking and approval of the drawings by the purchaser is for the benefit of the supplier and
shall not relieve supplier of full responsibility for ensuring correct interpretation of design drawings
and specifications or for completeness and accuracy of the shop drawings and relevant specifications.

1.29.7 All drawings shall be in English language and dimensions in metric system

1.30. IMPORTANT NOTES:

1. The Tolerance in weight and Dim. of the transformer shall not be more than (+/-) 5%.

2. Minimum external electrical clearance after mounting the bi-metallic terminal connectors in
position shall be maintained as under:

13
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

VOLTAGE MEDIUM CLEARANCE

PHASE TO PHASE PHASE TO EARTH

33 KV AIR 350 mm 320 mm

0.415 KV AIR 75 mm 55 mm

3. Make of each accessories/components shall be clearly and invariably indicated in the GTP/bill of
material. Further, following make(s) of bought out items are acceptable to the department.

i) Bushings. - WSI/Modern Insulator(MIL) / ABIL / BHEL / CJI

ii) Bimetallic terminal connector - Milind Engineering/Vinayak/Best&Crompton/ Nootan
iii) OFF circuit tap changer - Alwaye
iv) Oil temperature indicator - Press & forge / precimeasure / ATVUS /
Sukrut Udyog / Perfect control.

However other makes of bought out items are also acceptable, if it is of “ISI mark” or type tested
for which supplier shall furnish attested Photostat copy of valid ISI certificate / type test report from
Govt. approved/ recognized lab. The type test report should not be older than 7 years as on the date of
submission of same.

14
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS for 250KVA, 33/0.415 KV Station Transformer

S No. Particulars Unit

1 Manufacturer's name :
a) Postal address.
b) Works address.

c) Contact person.
1(a) Type, make & country of origin.
2(A) Rated voltages.
a) Voltage between phase on HV side at no load
b) Voltage between phase on LV side at no load
2(B) Rated current:
a) Rated HV current
b) Rated LV curent
3 Continuous Maximum rating (CMR) under peak
ambient air temperature 50 Deg.C with temp. rise
as per item 7
4 a) Over load for time of one hour
b) 20% overload duration
c) 10% overload duration
5 Method of connections:
i) H.V.
ii) L.V.
6 Vector group reference.
7 [Link] obtained by the transformer when
run at the max. continuous rating at a peak
ambient [Link] 50 Deg.C
a) Of winding by resistance
b) Of oil by thermometer
c) Hottest spot temp.
8 Type of cooling.
9 Indoor/Outdoor installation.
10 Range of voltage variation.
11 % Variation of steps & No. of steps/positions.
12 Is volts/turn constant regardless of tap position.
13 Magnetising current in Amp. & power factor at
rated voltage and frequency.
14 Max. Guaranteed No load loss at rated current,
rated frequency & rated voltage
15 Max. Guaranteed Total loss at 50% Load at rated
current, rated voltage and rated frequency at a ref.
temp. of 75 0 c
Max. Guaranteed Total loss at 100% Load at
current, voltage, rated frequency at 75 deg. C.
Max. total guaranteed loss at max. current, rated
voltage and rated freq. at 75 deg. C (for heat run
test only)
16a) Resistance of H.V. winding per phase at 75 deg. C.
([Link] normal tap)
15
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

b) Resistance of L.V. Winding per phase at

75deg.C.
17 a) Efficiency at 75 deg. C.
a) Unity power factor.
i) 100% load
ii) 75% load
iii) 50% load
iv) 25% load
b) Maxm. efficiency & corresponding %age loading
at which occurs
c) At 0.8 power factor.
i) 100% load
ii) 75% load
iii) 50% load
iv) 25% load
18 Reactance drop at rated current & rated frequency
19 Impedance drop on full load at 75 deg. C
a) At normal Tap.
b) At max Tap.
c) At min. tap.
20 Duration of thermal short circuit with reference to
impedance voltage(Sec)
21 Regulation on full load:
a) at unity power & [Link] 75 deg. C (%)
b) at 0.8 power factor & temp of 75 deg. C (%)
22 Impulse strength on 1.2/50 µs in KV (Peak)
i) Of H.V. winding
ii) Of L.V. winding
23 Power frequency withstand voltage of
i) HV winding KV rms KV rms
ii) LV winding KV rms KV rms
24 Minm. clearance to earth.
a) of Primary winding. (mm)
i) in oil
ii) out of oil
b) of Secondary winding.(mm)
i) in oil
ii) out of oil
c) Width oil duct between (mm)
i) Core & LV
ii) LV & HV
iii) Out of oil.
25 Whether oil temperature indicator with alarm
contacts provided
26 Make, type & size of oil temperature indicator
27 Make, type & size of plane oil level gauge
28 No. of breathers provided & type thereof
29 Type of dehydrating agent used for breathing &
quantity
30 Outline dimensions.
i) Over all height. mm
16
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

ii) Over all length. mm

iii) Over all breadth. mm
31 Tank Dimensions.
i) Height. mm
ii) Length. mm
iii) Breadth. mm
32 Weights in Kg of
a) Transformer core.
b) Copper KG
c) Transformer core coils & insulations
d) Tank and fittings
e) Oil
f) Transformer complete with oil
33 Oil.
a) Qty. required for first filling
i) Total
ii) In radiators
iii) In conservator
b) Class and specification to which it conforms
c) Make ,type,& brief description
34 Particulars of tap changing device/tap changer.
a) Make, type & brief description
b) Is an indication arrangement fitted to show the
voltage which the tap in circuit gives off.
c) Can it be locked in position
d) Position of tap changing wheel on the
transformer.
e) % variation of OFF load tap changing switch
f) No. of steps/position.
35 Accessories and list of fittings with each
transformer
36 i) Minimum electrical clearance between phases
a) H.V. mm
b) L.V. mm
ii) Minimum taught string electrical clearance
between phase-earth in air
a) H.V. mm
b) L.V. mm
37 Whether painting at site is required and provided

38 Maximum out of balance force in windings on

short circuit with external reactance zero.
39 i) Magnetising current and power factor at 110%
rated voltage and rated frequency in Amps.
ii) Neutral unbalanced current.
40 No load loss at 110% of rated voltage and rated
frequency in KW
41 a) [Link] density at normal voltage and Lines/cm sq
frequency.
b) Maxm. flux density110% of normal voltage and Lines/cm
frequency Sq
c) Time capability of the transformer to withstand
110% of normal voltage and frequency
17
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

42 WINDING DETAILS.
a) Max. current density in winding
i) H.V. winding Amps./[Link]. (all parts including
tapped winding min. tap)
ii) L.V. winding amps./[Link].
b) No. of HV coils/phase
c) No. of LV coils/phase
d) No. of turns/coil (HV)
e) No. of turns/coil (LV)
f) Weight of HV coil Kg.
g) Weight of LV coil Kg.
h) Voltage per coil (HV)
i) Voltage per coil (LV)
43 Type of transformer shell or core
44 Type of winding ;
a) H.V.
b) L.V.
45 Type of axial coil supports
46 Type of radial coil supports
47 Type of Insulation used.
a) Core Bolts.
b) Core washers
c) Core laminations.
48 End clearance from top of HT coil to yokes
49 Cooling arrangement.
a) Nos. of radiators on HV side
b) Nos. of radiators on LV side
50 Material used for gasket.
51 Fittings and parts to be detached for transport
52 Material and size of relief outlet diaphragm
53 Type of Tank.
54 Thickness of mild steel plate used for the
constructions of tank
i) Side Walls. mm
ii) Top cover. mm
iii) Bottom plate. mm
55 Type of Insulation used.
a) HV Conductor.
b) LV Conductor.
c) LV to core.
d) LV to HV.
e) Tapings.
f) Tapping connections.
56 Section of copper used.
a) for HV winding mm sq.
b) for LV winding mm sq.
57 Type terminal arrangement.
58 Grade of core laminations used with its thickness (Watt/Kg)
and its specific core loss
59 i) Make & Type of bushing.
a) H.V.
b) L.V.

18
 Tech. Spec_250KVA_Station Transformer

c) Neutral
ii) Creepage distance of bushing.
60 Reference No. and voltage class to which the
bushing conform.
a) H.V.
b) L.V.
c) Neutral
61 State whether the transformer comply fully with
this specification and its requirement

(Signature of Supplier/Bidder with Seal)

19
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 145 KV SF6 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1.01 SCOPE :

This specification covers the design, engineering. manufacture, assembly, Inspection and
testing at manufacturer's works, supply, delivery & commissioning of SF6 Gas type
145 KV circuit breakers complete with all accessories, structure, mandatory spares for
its satisfactory operation at the various grid sub stations of the Rajasthan Power System.

1.02 STANDARDS :

The Circuit Breaker shall comply with the requirements of latest issue of following
specifications, except where specified otherwise. Breakers meeting any other authoritative
standard, which ensures an equal or better quality than the standards mentioned are also
acceptable.

1. IS:13118- Specification for circuit breaker.

2. IS:2629 - Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing of iron and steel.
3. IEC-62271-100-2008- IEC specification for alternating current circuit breaker latest
revision.
4. IEC-60376- 2005- Specification and acceptance for supply of Sulpher Hexafloride.
5. IS:2099/IS:5621- High voltage bushing/hollow insulator.
6. IS:2062 – Specification for GI / SS Nut Bolt, Washer.
7. IS – 2147 Degree of protection for enclosures for LV switchgear & control gear.

Consideration shall also be given by the purchaser to alternative offers which supplier
considers advisable by reason of his own manufacturing requirements and experience
provided descriptive matter, literature and complete certificate are submitted pointing out
that the equipment / devices/ arrangement as offered are equal or superior to that required
by the accompanying specification with full justification.

1.03 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS :

The circuit breakers shall have the following ratings / principal parameters:

1. Number of poles : 3
2. Installation : Outdoor
3. No. of phases : 3
4. Rated voltage : 145 kV
5. Rated frequency : 50 C/S
6. Rated normal current : 1250 A
7. Capacity to interrupt short circuit current : 40 kA at 145 kV
under worst conditions
8. Rated duration of short circuit : 3 sec.
9. Rated line charging breaking current : 50A over voltage not more than
2.5pu
10. Making capacity (Peak) : 100 kA
11. Small inductive breaking current : As per IEC-62271-100-2008
with latest amendments, if any
12. Transient recovery voltage for terminal faults : As per IEC-62271-100-2008

1
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

with latest amendments, if any

13. Rated characteristics for short line faults
a) Standard value of TRV of the supply : As per IEC-62271-100-2008
circuit for short line faults with latest amendments, if any
b) Standard value of rated line characteristics : -------- do ---------
for short line faults
c) Standard value of transient recovery : -------- do ---------
voltage for out of phase breaking
14. Automatic rapid reclosing : 3 ph.
15. Duty cycle : O-0.3 sec.- CO-3min-CO
16. Basic insulation level : 650 kVP
17. Total breaking time for any current upto the : 60 ms (shorter break time shall
rated breaking current (not more than 3 be preferred)
cycles)
18. Difference in the instant of closing/opening of
contacts
a) Within a pole : As per IEC: 62271-100 with
latest amendments, if any
b) Between poles : As per IEC: 62271-100 with
latest amendments, if any
19. Rated out of phase breaking current : 10 kA
20. Number of operation(Mechanical) : 2000 Operations (Min.)
21. Power frequency withstand voltage : 275 kV rms
22. No. of trip coils : 2 Nos. per breaker
23. Control circuit voltage : Compatible for both 110 &
220VDC
24. First pole to clear factor : 1.3 (Min.)
25. Clearances: :
a) Ground clearance of lowest live terminal to : 4600 mm
ground level
b) Min. clearance of lowest part of support : 2750 mm
insulator and ground level
c) Inter-pole spacing : 2160 mm
d) Min. creepage distance of insulator : 3625 mm
bushing

Any bidders offering lesser clearance than those specified above would substantiate the
same with adequate information on impulse test withstand capability of equipment.

1.04 GENERAL-TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS :

The circuit breakers to be offered shall be of SF6 type complete with all accessories and with
mounting structures with foundation bolts, control block, terminal connectors, operating
mechanism, copper piping, connectors, valves, marshalling box, compressors(if applicable),
compressed air receivers (if applicable), gas monitoring instruments etc. complete in all
respect. The breaker shall be furnished as complete unit with all piping and equipment in
place and all internal wiring installed and terminated in the mechanism housing and the
equipment shall be complete in all respect. All the individual circuit breaker poles, SF-
6 monitoring devices, and interconnecting pipe lines shall be provided with valves or Self

2
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

sealing couplings (DILO) at all open ends of SF-6 gas connections, so that disconnection at
any end of the above does not result in the problem of leakage of SF-6 gas. Ends of
interconnecting pipe lines connected to density monitor cum pressure gauge which if supplied
in pre assembled condition shall not be treated as open end.

1.05 SF6 CIRCUIT BREAKERS :

1.05.01 SF6 Circuit Breakers shall consist of three identical single pole units each of
multi-chamber design using SF6 gas in a single pressure and puffer type interrupting
arrangement. The interrupting chambers of a pole shall be electrically and mechanically
connected and one three phase breaker shall have three independent electro-pneumatic
charged or spring of solenoid operated devices. SF6 gas conforming to IEC-60376- 2005
shall be used in the interrupting units at such a pressure that the breaker does not require
any complex auxiliary circuit for pressure and temperature controls special heating system
and special compressor etc., suitable gas filling and pressure monitoring arrangement
alongwith safety plan shall be provided for each interrupting units separately or in common
for number of breaking units of a pole or in common for all the three poles if the gas of all
the poles is connected to each other.

1.05.02 Insulation to earth of the circuit breaker shall be independent of SF6 pressure.
Suitable measures shall be adopted in the individual interrupting units to achieve
requisite degree of dryness for SF6 and to absorb its decomposition products. SF6 gas
filling should not develop dangerous over pressure inside the interrupting unit within the
temperature rise limits to be encountered in service.

SF6 gas filling in the interrupting units should work in the closed circuit without any
exhaust to the open air after performing opening or closing operations. Time period in
terms of number of operations at fault, number of years of normal service after which gas
filling needs replacement shall be stated in the Bid.

1.05.03 Facilities shall be provided to reduce the gas pressure within the circuit breaker
to a value not exceeding 8 mili bars within 4 hours or less. Each circuit breaker shall be
capable of withstanding this degree of vacuum without distortion or failure of any part.

SF6 gas for first filling of each circuit breaker plus 20% extra in suitable non-returnable
cylinders shall be included in the scope of supply and the complete specification of the
SF6 gas proposed to be utilized alongwith make shall be submitted alongwith Bid. Bidders
may supply gas of the makes other than the quoted makes in the event of non availability of
the gas of quoted makes with prior approval of the purchaser. The bidder shall submit
manufacturer's test certificate of test of SF6 gas as per IEC/IS before the supply of breaker.

1.05.04 The high pressure cylinders in which the SF6 gas shall be supplied and stored at
site shall comply with the requirements of following standards and regulations :
i) IS:4379 Identification of the contents of industrial gas cylinders.
ii) IS:7285 Seamless manganese steel cylinders for permanent and high pressure
liquefiable gases.
iii) Indian boiler regulations :

3
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

1.06 RECOVERY VOLTAGE AND POWER FACTOR :

The circuit breaker shall be capable of interrupting at its terminals rated power with
recovery voltage equal to the rated maximum line to line service voltage at rated
frequency and at a power factor not exceeding 0.15. Photostat copies of the type test
certificates alongwith Oscillograph records shall be submitted in support of the circuit
breakers capability to interrupt rated short circuit current without Undue damage. Such tests
will be carried out in accordance with the latest edition of IEC-62271-100-2008/IS-13118.

The breakers shall be capable of satisfactory operation even under conditions of phase
opposition that may arise due to faulty synchronizing. The maximum power which the
breaker can satisfactorily interrupt under phase opposition shall be stated in the Bid.
Necessary type test certificates as per IEC-62271-100-2008/IS-13118 and its latest
amendments to prove the capability of the breaker in this regard shall be furnished
alongwith the Bid.

1.07 LINE CHARGING CURRENT INTERRUPTING CAPACITY :

The circuit breakers shall be designed so as to be capable of interrupting line charging current
without undue rise in the voltage on the supply side and without any re-strike and without
showing signs of undue strains. The guaranteed over voltage which will not be exceeded
while interrupting the following currents shall be stated in the Bid. The line charging
current is 50 Amps. for 145 kV breakers.

The over voltage caused while interrupting the above charging currents shall preferably
not exceed 2.5 P.U. The results of the test conducted alongwith copies of the oscillegraphs
to prove the ability of the breakers to interrupt these and lower line charging current values
shall be furnished with the Bid.

1.08 TRANSFORMER CHARGING CURRENT BREAKING CAPAICTY :

The breaker shall be capable of interrupting small inductive currents such as those
occurring while switching off unloaded transformers, without giving rise to undue over
voltage without re-strike. Preferably the max. over voltage shall not be more than 2.5 P.U.

1.09 SHUNT CAPACITOR SWITCHING CAPACITY :

The maximum rating of single bank of shunt capacitors which can be switched by the
circuit breakers without re-strikes shall be stated in the Bid alongwith over voltage
occurring during such switching. The over voltage caused while interrupting the aforesaid
capacitors shall not exceed 2.5 P.U.

1.10 BREAKING CAPACITY FOR KILOMETERIC FAULT :

The circuit breaker shall be capable of satisfactorily interrupting the short line faults also.
Standard values or rated lines characteristics for short line faults shall be as per latest
edition of IEC-62271-100-2008 and test certificates shall be furnished to prove the capacity
of the breaker to interrupt short line faults without any undue damage.

4
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

1.11 AUTOMATIC RAPID RECLOSING :

The Circuit Breaker shall be suitable for three pole Re-closing for 145 kV Circuit Breakers
per schedule of requirements. The operating duty of the circuit breaker shall be as follows:

O - 0.3 sec. - CO - 3 min. - CO

If the dead time of the circuit breaker is adjustable the limits of adjustment shall be as
stated in the Bid. Total re-closing time shall not exceed 20 cycles.

1.12 TEMPERATURE RISE:

The max. temperature attained by any part of the equipment when in service at site,
under continuous full load conditions, and in the climatic conditions, shall not exceed
the permissible limits fixed in the latest edition of IEC-62271-100-2008/IS13118
specifications. When the standards specify the limit of temperature rise these shall not be
exceeded when corrected for the difference between ambient temperature at site and the
ambient temperature specified in the specifications. The correction proposed shall be
stated in the Bid and shall be subject to approval of the purchaser. In case the
equipment not covered by the approved standards the temperature rise of any part under
above conditions shall be according to IS/IEC standards.

1.13 INSULATION OF CIRCUIT BREAKER :

Insulation to ground, insulation between open contacts and the insulation between phases of
the completely assembled circuit breaker shall be capable of withstanding satisfactorily
dielectric test voltage corresponding to the basic insulation level of 650 kVP for 145 kV
breakers.

1.14 INSULATING SUPPORTS :

The basic insulation level of the external insulator supports shall be 650 kVP for 145 kV
breakers and shall be suitable for installation in normally polluted atmosphere. The
porcelain used shall be homogenous, and free from cavities or other flaws. They shall be
designed to have ample insulation mechanical strength and rigidity for satisfactory
operation under conditions specified above. All bushings of identical ratings shall be inter
changeable. The puncture strength of the bushing shall be greater than the flashover value.
The bushing shall be entirely free from radio disturbance when operating at a voltage upto
10% above rated voltage and shall also be free from external and internal corona. Make of
Bushings shall be WSI/BHEL/ Modern/ ABI. Any other make quoted should be supported by
relevant type test reports as per IS 5621 for hollow insulators and following test as per IS
2099 for bushing.
i) LIV test.
ii) HVPF (Wet)

The test should be got conducted at a NABL accredited Laboratory / ILAC i.e International
Laboratory accreditation corporation (in case of foreign laboratory). Such type test reports
should not be older than 10 years as on the date of bid opening. For this purpose date of
conducting type test will be considered.

5
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

NOTE: For the type test reports conducted at CPRI/ERDA/IIT Madras, the requirement for
NABL LOGO shall not be insisted upon.

1.15 OPERATING MECHANISM :

The circuit breakers shall be designed for remote control from the control room but
provision shall also be made for local electrical control.

The operating mechanism shall be spring charging type and shall be trip-free as defined
in IEC-62271-100-2008. The mechanism shall perform satisfactorily the re-closing duty
cycles indicated in clause No. 1.11. 145 kV Circuit Breakers shall be gang operated. All
working parts in the mechanism shall be of corrosion resistant material and all bearings
which require greasing shall be equipped with pressure grease fittings. The mechanism shall
be strong, positive quick in action and shall be removable without disturbing the other
parts of the circuit breakers. The mechanism of the breaker shall be such that the failure of
any spring will not prevent tripping on faults and will not cause tripping or closing, without
faults.

Provision to open the Breaker Mechanically shall be available. Each circuit breaker shall
have mechanical open, close indicator in addition to facilities for remote electrical
indication.

The operating mechanism along with its accessories shall be mounted in a weather proof
cabinet with hinged doors located near the breakers. The local control switch and the
breaker position indicator shall be provided in this cabinet.

The control circuit be designed to operate on both 110 V DC and 220 VDC for 145 kV
breaker. The closing and opening coils shall be designed to operate satisfactorily at control
voltages within the limit prescribed under latest version of IEC-62271-100-2008 or other
relevant standard at the Normal voltage. A heater shall be provided in the cabinet to prevent
moisture condensation.

Power supply for auxiliaries will be available at 415 V, 3 phase/ 230 V, 1 phase, 50 Cycles.

Two independent trip coils shall be provided on each breaker of 145 kV Circuit Breaker for
reliability view point. It is intended to have continuous type of pre-closing and post
closing trip circuit supervision through auxiliary relays and suitable resistors to be connected
in series with each trip coil for the purpose. All the trip coils shall therefore, be designed
keeping in view the above requirement.

It shall be possible to lock the circuit breaker operating apparatus box /switch cubicle in
the open as well as close position of the breaker.

The operating mechanism shall be trip free as per IEC-62271-100-2008 and shall have
anti hunting feature.

A mechanical position indicator for ON/OFF condition of the circuit breaker shall also be
provided on each breaker pole or switch cubicle/apparatus box in addition to
electrical or pneumatic type of indications.

6
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

SF6 Gas Density Monitor : The SF6 gas density monitor alongwith pressure gauge of
suitable range shall be provided for continuous monitoring the gas pressure inside the breaker
poles. The Density monitor shall have three sets of pressure switches with temperature
compensated feature, one for initiating alarm and two for lock outs as preset value.

1.16 APPARATUS BOX :

All the control equipment’s immediately connected with the operation of the circuit breaker
shall be installed in an outdoor type, weather, vermin and splash proof strong cubicle
having suitable number of hinged doors so as to afford easy access for all equipment’s
mounted inside.
Apparatus box shall be fabricated from heavy gauge CRCA Sheet steel of at least 3mm
thick. Positive locking arrangement with lock(s) shall be provided on the front doors to
check unauthorized operation. The cubicle shall be either hot dip galvanized or synthetic
enamel or powder coated painted or of another approved design and construction so as to be
suitable for use under tropical conditions at site. The breaker / cabinet shall contain the
following equipment’s wherever required in addition to any other equipment’s required
for satisfactory operation of the Circuit Breakers.
1. Control selector switch for local / remote electrical operation.
2. Control switch for local electrical operation.
3. Pressure switches / density monitor with alarm contacts for signaling high/low
pressure.
4. Relief and drain cocks.(for pneumatic type)
5. Non return and stop valves.
6. Temperature compensated Pressure switches for locking circuit breakers, opening
closing and re-closing under low pressure.
7. Circuit breaker mechanical ON/OFF position indicator .
8. Anti pumping device.
9. Trip coils and closing coils.
10. Indicating lamps for various operations of LED type.
11. A heating element complete with a rotary switch/toggle Switch/any other design
accepted by RRVPNL.
12. MCCB/MCB/ switches and fuses for controlling AC and DC supplies.
13. A power plug.
14. A light point.
15. Wiring for the cabinet.
16. A terminal board with suitable number of numbered terminals.
17. Cable glands for various power and control cables.
18. Operation counter.
19. Rating and diagram plate in accordance with clause No. 1.27 incorporating the
month and year of manufacturing.
20. Control selector switch to have either automatic spring charging arrangements or
manual dependent spring charging arrangements/ any other design accepted by
RRVPNL.
21. A switch for supply to motor in case of motor operated spring charging mechanism
and a motor starter with thermal O/C relay/MCB.
22. Gas density monitor.
23. Gas pressure gauge.
24. Gas feeding valve with adaptor.

7
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

25. The number of terminals provided shall be adequate enough to wire out all contact
and control circuit plus 24 terminals spares for owners use.
26. Any other item to complete the job.
27. Mechanical Operation arrangement.

All fixtures, nuts, bolts, etc. for mounting the breaker on supporting structure or on a
nearby plinth shall be supplied by the Bidder. Apparatus box shall be equipped with
number of cables glands for receiving PVC insulated power and control cable necessary
for control and operation of circuit breakers.

1.17 AUXILIARY SWITCHES :

Each circuit breaker shall be provided with necessary number of auxiliary switches both of
the normally open and normally closed types for satisfactory operation of the breaker
and for operation ON/OFF indicators on the control panel. In addition, 8 Nos. normally
open & 8 Nos. normally closed contacts, shall also be provided with each circuit breaker
as spare for various interlocking, auto re-closing schemes and remote position indication.

The total number of auxiliary switches thus provided and the rating of each contacts shall
be clearly stated. The leads from auxiliary switch contacts shall be brought to a terminal
board installed inside the auxiliary switch housing and suitable cable glands shall be
provided for terminating PVC insulated control cables.

The bidder shall clearly state in the bid whether the NO/NC contacts are of normal design or
of make before break and vice versa type.

1.18 MOTORS:

Motors shall be “Squirrel Cage” three phase induction or universal type motors of sufficient
size capable of satisfactory operation for the application and duty as required for the driven
equipment.
In case Motor is DC type, it shall be equipped with appropriate rectifier to operate the
motor with input AC power supply. The supplier will supply two additional spare
rectifiers per circuit breaker free of cost, if DC type motor is offered/supplied.

1.19 TERMINAL CONNECTORS :

Terminal connectors (Rigid type) for horizontal and vertical take-off suitable for
TWIN/SINGLE ACSR Zebra Conductors for 145 kV Circuit breaker shall be supplied.
Suitable terminal earth connector suitable pads for earthing connections shall also be
supplied.

Bidder shall furnish type test report for STC test and temperature rise test of the
terminal connector of the type and make offered preferably along with Bid or at the time
of order execution from a NABL accredited laboratory /ILAC i.e. International Laboratory
Accreditation Cooperation (in case of foreign laboratory) Such type test certificate should not
be older than 10 years as on the date of technical bid opening. For this purpose date of
conducting type test will be considered.
NOTE: For the type test reports conducted at CPRI/ERDA/IIT Madras, the requirement for
NABL LOGO shall not be insisted upon.

8
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

1.20 MOUNTING STRUCTURES:

(a) The circuit breakers shall be suitable for mounting on steel structures. The prices of
circuit breaker shall be quoted inclusive of mounting structures. Necessary connecting
materials such as clamps bolts, nuts washers etc. and fixing bolts for mounting the
equipment on supporting structure wherever required shall also be in scope of supply.
These structures shall be suitable for earth quake. Parameters for foundation & impulse
withstand shall also be provided.

(b) The height of supporting structures shall be provided such that ground clearance of
lowest live terminal to ground level is available as specified in Item no. 25(a) of clause
1.03. The plinth level of the foundation for the support structure shall be 300 mm above
ground level.

(c) In case the mechanism box /control cubicle of the breaker is not at working height
from ground then a suitable arrangement shall be made and supplied as a part of the
supporting structures so that operation and maintenance personnel can easily work on the
mechanism.

1.21 INTERLOCKS :

Necessary interlocks to prevent the closing or opening of the breakers under low
pressure and devices for initiating alarm shall be provided. Provision shall also be made
to enable (mechanical or electrical) interlocking with the isolator associated with the
breaker to prevent the opening or closing of the isolator when the breaker is closed etc.
Details of interlock provided shall be clearly stated in the Bid.

1.22 INSPECTION & TESTING :

a) 145 kV SF-6 Circuit Breakers and accessories shall be subjected at Maker's works
before dispatch to following routine tests/Acceptance tests as per IEC-62271-100-2008 on
25% quantity of the offered lot for established suppliers and 100% inspection of the offered
lot for un-established suppliers as per relevant standards in the presence of purchaser's
inspecting officer /representative. Moreover, suppliers have to furnish the in house routine
test reports for the complete offered lot with the inspection report.
i) One minute power frequency voltage withstand dry test on main circuit.
ii) Voltage withstand test on control and auxiliary circuit of 2 kV for 1 minute duration.
iii) Measurement of resistance of main circuit.
iv) Mech. operation test.
v) Design and visual checks.
vi) Gas leakage test.
vii) Tightness test. (As per IEC-62271-100-2008).

b) Type tests: The bidder shall furnish valid and authenticated Type test certificates for
following type tests from a NABL accredited laboratory /ILAC i.e. International Laboratory
Accreditation Cooperation ( in case of foreign laboratory) of same voltage class with same
operating principle and design of bided material / equipment. Such type test certificate should
not be older than 10 years as on the date of technical bid opening. For this purpose date of
conducting type test will be considered.

9
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

The type test certificate from in house laboratory of Bidding firm even if it is a Govt.
approved / Govt. recognized/ NABL accredited / ILAC accredited shall not be accepted in
case of their own Bid. This will not apply if biding firm is Govt. company / Public Sector
Undertaking.
NOTE: For the type test reports conducted at CPRI/ERDA/IIT Madras, the requirement for
NABL LOGO shall not be insisted upon.

1) Dielectric tests.
a) Lightning Impulse voltage test.
b) One minute power frequency test(wet and dry ).
2) Radio interference voltage test.
3) Temperature rise test.
4) Short time withstand current test.
5) Mechanical operation test.
6) IP-55 test (for cubicle /control cabinet) .
7) Basic short circuit test duties.
8) Short line fault tests(L-75 & L-90).
9) Out of phase making and breaking test.
10) Single phase short circuit test.
11) Capacitive current switching test.
a) Line charging current test.
b) Single capacitor bank current switching test.
12) Seismic test.
13) Measurement of resistance of main circuit.
14) Tightness test (As per IEC-62271-100-2008).
15) EMC test if applicable (As per IEC-62271-100-2008).
16) Any other mandatory type tests not specified above but covered as per amendments/
latest edition of relevant IS/IEC.

Note:- Capacitive current switching test if conducted as per IEC-62271-100-2008 shall be

for Class C2 breakers.

c) Tests on Bought out item: Tests are not required to perform on bought out
equipment’s /items like motor ,CAP Unit etc at the works of manufacturer. Furnishing test
certificate of these makes from the original equipment manufacturer shall be deemed to be
satisfactory evidence.

1.23 GUARANTEED AND TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :

Guaranteed Technical particulars shall be furnished in prescribed format alongwith the

drawings / documents for approval. The specification and acceptance of new Sulphur Hexa-
floride gas is to be given as per relevant IS for above rating.

1.24 DRAWINGS LITERATURE AND MANUALS:

In addition to any other drawing which the bidder may like to submit to show the
arrangement and merits of the offered equipment, the following drawings shall be
submitted:
a) General out lines/dimensions of C.B.
b) Detailed drawing of breakers unit.

10
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

c) Pneumatic/electrical connection between the breaker poles and control equipment.

d) Apparatus box.
e) Schedule & wiring diagram for 1/3 [Link]-reclosing.
f) Pneumatic/electric schematic of compressed air plant (if applicable)
g) Terminal connector.
h) Support structure.

Illustrative & descriptive literature of circuit breakers shall also be furnished.

1.25 METAL PARTS :

All ferrous parts of equipment’s shall be heavily hot dip galvanized. Bolts, nuts, screws.
pins, washers etc. used in these equipment’s shall also be galvanized/ stainless steel. The
galvanizing should conform to IS:2629-1966.

All current carrying parts shall be of non-ferrous metal or alloys and shall be designed to
limit sharp points, edges and sharp faces.

1.26 SPECIAL TOOLS AND PLANTS :

The Bidder shall supply one set of special tools and plants if required for initial erection
and subsequent maintenance of the equipment offered for every three Nos. circuit breakers
free of cost. The items covered in the special tools and plant shall also be mentioned in the
Bid.

1.27 RATING PLATE :

1.27.01 A Circuit Breaker and its operating device shall be provided with a weather and
corrosion proof rating plate(s) marked with technical particulars etc. including the following:

a) Manufacturer's name or trade mark by which it may be readily identified.

b) [Link]. of and type designation, making it possible to get all the relevant information
from the manufacturer.
c) Month and year of manufacture.
d) Rated voltage.
e) Rated insulation level.
f) Rated frequency.
g) Rated normal current.
h) Rated short circuit breaking current.
i) Rated duration of short circuit.
j) First pole to clear factor.
k) Rated auxiliary DC supply voltage of closing and opening devices.
l) Rated pressure of SF6 for operation and interruption.
m) Rated supply voltage and frequency of auxiliary circuits.
n) Reference of PO No. & Date
o) Guarantee period
p) Contact e-mail address and Toll free No. for after sales service.

11
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

1.27.02 The coils of operating devices shall have a reference mark permitting the data
to be obtained from the manufacturer.

1.27.03 The rating plate shall be about 1000-1300 mm above ground level or readable from
a suitable platform which shall be provided by the bidder on the structure at a height not more
than 750 mm from the ground level by maintaining the required electrical clearance, so that
it is visible in position of normal service and installation.

1.28.1 Terminal blocks used shall be for 2.5 [Link] control cable and should be stud (Brass)
type only.
1.28.2 Some of the wiring of Circuit Breaker has been standardized in separate TBs.
The Bidder should adhere to the standardized wiring as per Annexure-W 2.

1.29 TRAINING TO RVPN STAFF :

Training to RVPN Engineers & Technical staff should be provided free of cost at the
manufacturer’s works, if RVPN nominates their personnel for such training during currency
of contract. Traveling expenses including lodging & boarding charges shall be borne by
RVPN.

1.30 SPARE PARTS:

The spare, required for servicing/troubleshooting/overhauling of SF6 Circuit Breakers, shall
be supplied directly by the manufacturer only.

1.31 BASE DETAILS OF 145 KV SF6 CIRCUIT BREAKER:

The base of 145 kV SF6 Circuit Breaker shall be as below:

Where:
A = 250 mm
B = 400 mm
C = 2400 mm
Foundation bolt Size/Length = M24/750 mm

***********

12
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 145 kV SF6 CIRCUIT

BREAKER AGAINST
[Link] PARTICULARS UNIT 145 KV SF6 Gas Circuit Breakers
1 a) Name of Manufacture
b) Name of collaborator

2 Manufacturer's type designation

(a) Reference standard
(b) Type
(c) Service
(d) Pole

3 Rated voltage kV

4 Rated frequency Hz

5 Normal Current rating under site Amp.

conditions at 500 C ambient
temperature.

0
6 Temperature rise in current carrying C.
parts at rated current and the Max.
temp. attained by any part over an
0
ambient of 50 C

7 Rated breaking capacity

(a) Symmetrical kA rms
(b) Asymmetrical kA rms
(c) Is it possible to increase the Yes / No
rupturing capacity at later date

8 Rated short ckt. making current kAp

9 Rated small inductive breaking Amp

current

10 Rated transient recovery voltage for

terminal faults.
a) Rated characteristics for short line kVp
faults.
b) Values of TRV for short line faults kVp

11 First pole to clear factor.

12 Rated operating sequence

13 Short time current rating for 3 sec. kA rms

14 a) Rated out of phase breaking kA

current.
b) Values of TRV for out of phase kVp
breaking.

15 Opening time ms

13
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

[Link] PARTICULARS UNIT 145 KV SF6 Gas Circuit Breakers

16 Difference in the instant of closing ms
/opening of contracts between poles.

17 Total break time in milli second at

rated interrupting capacity
a) At 10% rated interrupting capacity. ms
b) At 30% rated interrupting capacity. ms
c) At 60% rated interrupting capacity. ms
d) At 100% rated interrupting ms
capacity.
e) Max. break time at any interrupting ms
capacity upto rated capacity.

18 Max. Arcing time in any test duties ms

19 Make time (closing time) ms

20 Min. reclosing time at full load ms

interrupting capacity from the instant
of trip coil energisation.

21 Min. dead time for :

a) 3 Phase reclosing. ms
b) Single phase reclosing. ms
c) Limits of adjustment of dead time ms
for 3 phase closing.
d) Limits of adjustment of dead time ms
for 1 phase closing.

22 Is the breaker suitable for single

phase / 3 phase reclosing.

23 Data on transient recovery voltage:

a) Amplitude factor.
b) Phase factor.
c) Natural frequency.
d) Rate of rise of recovery voltage kV/µs

24 a) Is this breaker restrike free. Yes / No

b) Type of device if any, used to limit
RRRV.

25 Max. interrupting capacity under kA

phase opposition

26 Max. line charging current breaking Amp.

capacity without the over voltage
exceeding 2.5 times the rated phase
to neutral voltage.

27 Max. line charging current breaking Amp.

capacity and corresponding over
voltage recorded in test:
a) Supply side.
b) Line side.

14
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

[Link] PARTICULARS UNIT 145 KV SF6 Gas Circuit Breakers

28 Max. cable charging current breaking Amp.

capacity and corresponding over
voltage:
a) Supply side.
b) Line side.

29 a) Max. shunt capacitor bank Amp.

switching capacity (single bank)
b) Max. over voltage for capacitor kV
breaking :
i) Supply side.
ii) Line side.
c) Rated back to back capacitor Amp.
bank breaking current.
d) Rated capacitor bank inrush kAp
making current.

30 Kilometric fault level. MVA

31 Dry one minute power frequency

withstand test voltage for complete
circuit breaker.
a) Between terminals with circuit kV rms
breaker contacts open
b) Between live terminal and kV rms
grounded object.

32 a) Max. over voltage on switching pu

transformer on no load and
charging current.
b) Reactor loaded transformer pu
interrupting capacity and
corresponding surge O/V.

33 1.2/50 Full wave impulse withstand

test voltage for complete circuit
breaker.
a) Between terminals with breaker kVp
contacts open.
b) Between live terminal & kVp
grounded object

34 Bushings or Insulator:
a) i) Make.
ii) Type.
b) Dry 1 minute power freq. kV rms
withstand test voltage for
bushings
c) Dry flash over value kV rms
d) Wet flash over value kV rms
e) 1.2/50 Impulse withstand voltage kVp
f) Creepage distance mm
g) Puncture value of bushing under
oil
h) Weight of bushing including oil. Kg.

15
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

[Link] PARTICULARS UNIT 145 KV SF6 Gas Circuit Breakers

35 Minimum. clearance in air

a) Phase to phase (centre to centre) mm
b) Lowest live terminal to ground mm
level in the S/S
c) Lowest part of the support mm
insulator to ground

36 No. of poles of circuit breaker. Nos

37 No. of breaks per phase Nos

38 Voltage distribution between

different breaks

39 Voltage grading device if any used.

40 Total length of break per phase mm

41 Main contacts:
a) Type of main contacts
b) Whether main contacts silver Yes / No
plated
c) Thickness of silver plating
d) Material of main contact
e) Contact pressure. Kg/[Link].

42 Auxiliary contact:
a) Type of auxiliary contact
b) Material of auxiliary contact
c) Whether the main & isolating Yes / No
contacts are silver plated or not.
d) Thickness of silver coatings, if mm
provided
e) Contact pressure Kg/[Link].

43 Total Nos. of auxiliary contacts

provided including spare contacts.
a) Opening Nos.
b) Closing Nos.
c) Those adjustable with respect to Nos.
the position of main contacts.

44 Type of operating mechanism

a) Opening
b) Closing
c) Whether the circuit breaker is trip
free or fixed trip & whether it is
with lockout preventing closing.

45 Tripping & closing control circuit VDC

voltage

46 No. of trip coils. Nos.

16
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

[Link] PARTICULARS UNIT 145 KV SF6 Gas Circuit Breakers

47 a) Power required for trip coil at Watt.

110/220 VDC.
b) Power required for closing coil at Watt.
110/220 VDC
c) Power required by other Watt.
auxiliaries at control voltage.

48 a) Make of SF6 Gas

b) Normal pressure of SF6 gas BAR
inside circuit breaker

49 Minimum operating pressure of SF6 BAR

gas

50 Pressure at which gas pressure will

0
give at 20 C.
a) Alarm. BAR
b) Tripping impulse. BAR
c) Lockout. BAR

51 Qty. of SF6 gas per breaker / pole Kg.

52 Qty. of absorbent per pole. Kg.

53 No. of operations after which SF6

gas replacement is necessary.
a) 100% rupturing capacity Nos
b) 50% rupturing capacity Nos
c) 10% rupturing capacity Nos
d) At rated current Nos

54 Qty. of SF6 gas required for each 3 Kg.

pole circuit breaker.

55 No. of operations breaker is capable Nos

of performing without inspection,
replacement of contacts and other
main parts with normal current
breaking.

56 No. of operations breaker is capable Nos

of performing without inspection,
replacement of contacts and other
main parts at 100% rated fault
current breaking capacity.

57 No. of operation at rated current after Nos

which routine inspection of breaker
is necessary.

58 No. of operation at full rupturing Nos

capacity after which routine
inspection of breaker is necessary.

17
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

[Link] PARTICULARS UNIT 145 KV SF6 Gas Circuit Breakers

59 No. of operation after which main
and aux. contacts replacement is
necessary:
a) At full rupturing capacity. Nos
b) At 50% rated rupturing capacity. Nos
c) At 10% rated rupturing capacity. Nos
d) At rated current. Nos

60 Governing standard to which circuit

breakers shall be manufactured.

61 Weight of complete breaker Kg.

(Including structure weight).

62 a) Weight of supporting structure. Kg.

b) Over all dimensions. mm

63 Static loading of the circuit breaker. DAN

64 Impact loading of the circuit breaker. DAN

65 Mounting flange details.

66 Motor
a) Make
b) Wattage. W
c) Rated voltage. V
d) Protection equipment provided

67 Over Voltage :
a) While interrupting line charging
current
b) Transformer charging current.
c) Switching of shunt capacitor.

68 Whether special tool and tackles

offered, if yes their details.

69 Whether these special tools and

tackles are essentially required.
70 Whether costs of special tools and
tackles is inclusive in the breaker
cost, if not how much.

71 Whether base of 145 kV SF6 CB is as

per provision of Tech. Specification
(Yes / No)

NOTE: The content and order of particulars of the GTP shall not be changed by bidder.

Signature
Name & Designation with Seal

18
 Tech. Spec. 145 kV SF6 CB

Annexure-W2

STANDARD WIRING ON TB OF 132 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER

Description Ferrule Marking TB No. & Position
Control DC 1 Positive K1 RX1-01
Control DC 1 Negative K2 RX1-02
Control DC 2 Positive K51 RX1-03
Control DC 2 Negative K52 RX1-04
Positive for Remote Closing K21 RX1-05
Remote Closing Command K31 RX1-06
Positive for Remote Trip TC1 K53 RX1-07
Remote Trip TC 1 Command K55 RX1-08
Positive for Remote Trip TC2 K57 RX1-09
Remote Trip TC 2 Command K59 RX1-10
Protection Trip TC 1 K3A RX1-11
Protection Trip TC 2 K53A RX1-12
Positive for Pre close Supervision TC1 K9 RX1-13
Negative for Pre close Supervision TC1 K11 RX1-14
Positive for Pre close Supervision TC2 K61 RX1-15
Negative for Pre close Supervision TC2 K63 RX1-16
Positive for CB OFF Status to REF or any other Relay K101 RX1-17
CB OFF Status to REF or any other Relay K192 RX1-18
Positive for CB OFF Status to Diff./Dist. or any other Relay K101 RX1-19
CB OFF Status to Diff./Dist. or any other Relay K39 RX1-20

Positive for Indication L1 CX1-01

CB OFF Lamp Indication L3 CX1-02
Positive looping L1 CX1-03
CB ON Lamp Indication L5 CX1-04
Positive loop for Indication L1 CX1-05
CB OFF Semaphore Indication L7 CX1-06
Positive loop for Indication L1 CX1-07
CB ON Semaphore Indication L11 CX1-08
Positive loop for Indication L1 CX1-09
CB Auto Trip Lamp Indication L13 CX1-10
Positive loop for Indication L1 CX1-11
CB Spring Charge Lamp Indication L9 CX1-12
Positive For Annunciation LC CX1-13
Low SF6 Gas Pressure Alarm L214 CX1-14
Positive loop for Annunciation LC CX1-15
Low SF6 Gas Pressure Lockout -1 L216 CX1-16
Positive loop for Annunciation LC CX1-17
Low SF6 Gas Pressure Lockout -2 L213 CX1-18
AC Supply 1 Phase (Phase) H1 CX1-19
AC Supply 1 Phase (Neutral) H2 CX1-20

Note: Terminal / ferrules not applicable shall be left unutilized

19
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 145 kV, 1250 AMP., DOUBLE BREAK, BANGING
TYPE, MOTOR OPERATED ISOLATORS SCOPE (HARDWARE ONLY)

1.0 SCOPE:-

This specification covers design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, inspection and

testing at manufacturer's own works, packing and delivery with all fittings, accessories and
auxiliary equipments at site(s)/store(s) of 145kV,1250A Motorised Isolators with & without
Earth Switch & tandem type required for installation at 132 kV Grid Sub-Stations in
Rajasthan.

2.0 STANDARDS :

Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification,the rating as well as performance

and testing of the isolators/isolators with earth switch their accessories and fittings shall
conform to the latest revisions and amendments of the following standards:
_________________________________________________________________________
[Link]. STANDARD NO. TITLE
_________________________________________________________________________
1. IS:9921 : Alternating Current Isolators
(Disconnectors) and Earthing Switches.

2. IEC:129 : -----------do----------------

3. IS :13947 : Degree of Protection Provided by Enclosure.

4. IS:4691 : -------------do---------------

5. IS:325 : Three Phase Induction Motors.

6. IS:4722 : Rotating Electrical Machines.

7. IS:2629 : Recommended Practice for Hot Dip Galvanising of Iron and Steel

8. IS:4759 : Hot Dip Galvanisation Coating on Structural Steel.

9. IS:2633 : Method of Testing Uniformity Of Coating on Zinc Coated Articles

10. IS:1573 : Electroplated Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.

11. IS:6735 : Spring Washers.

12. IS :2016 : Plain Washers.

13. IS:5561 : Electrical Power Connectors.

(Terminal Connectors)

14. -- : Indian Electricity Rules.

15. IS:9530 : Recommended Practice for Silver Plating.

16. BS:2816 : Testing of Silver Plating Thickness.

17. IS:5925 : Recommended Practice for Silver Plating for General

Engineering Purposes.

1
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative National or International

Standards, which ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned
above, will also be acceptable. When the equipment offered conforms to other standards
salient points of difference between standards adopted and the standards specified in
this specification shall be clearly brought out.

3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS : As specified in the bid document.

3.1. AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY :

3.1.1. The offered 145 kV Isolator under this specification shall be suitable for the following
auxiliary power supplies.

a) Power Device (like drive motors) : 415V,3 Ph, 4 wire, 50 [Link] grounded AC supply

b) AC control and protective devices lighting fixtures, space heaters and FHP motors:
240 V, 1 Ph 2 wire 50 Hz neutral grounded, AC supply.

c) DC alarm, control and protective devices: 220/110 V DC, 2-wire.

Each of the foregoing supplies shall be made available by the Purchaser at the terminal
point for each equipment for operation of accessories and auxiliary equipment. Bidder
scope shall include supply of cable glands, Terminal boxes, etc. The above supply
voltages may vary as below and all devices shall be suitable for continuous operation over
entire range of voltages.

i) AC supply :- Voltage -15% to +10%.

Frequency + or - 5%.
ii) DC supply :- Voltage -15% to +10%.

4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS :

The equipment covered in this specification shall meet the technical requirements listed below:

4.1. FOR 145 KV ISOLATORS:-

S. No. TECHNICAL PARAMETER 145 KV

1. Rated Frequency : 50 Hz
2. System Neutral Earthing : Effectively Earthed
3. No. of Phases (Poles) : 3 Phases
4. Temperature Rise : As per relevant IS/ IEC
publication/Specification
5. Safe Duration of overload
a) 150% of rated current : 5 Minutes
b) 120% of rated current : 30 Minutes
6. Class : Outdoor
7. Type of Isolator : Double Break, Centre post
Rotating, Banging type
8. Rated voltage : 145 kV rms
9. Rated normal current : 1250A rms
10. Rated short time withstand current of Main : 31.5 kA rms
Switch & Earth Switch for 1 second duration

2
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

S. No. TECHNICAL PARAMETER 145 KV

11. Rated peak withstand current : 80 kA peak
12. Rated short circuit making current of Earth : 80 kA peak
Switch
13. Basic insulation level
i) 1.2/50 micro second lightning impulse
withstand voltage(+ve or -ve polarity).
a) To earth and between poles : 650 KVp
b) Across isolating distance- One terminal : 750 KVp
subjected to lightning impulse and opposite
terminal earthed
ii) Rated 1 minute power frequency withstand
voltage
a) Across isolating distance : 315 kV rms
b) To earth and between poles : 275 kV rms
14. Min. creepage distance of support and rotating : 3625 mm
Insulators
15. Phase to Phase spacing for installation (centre : 3000 mm
to centre)
16. Minimum clearances
a) Phase to earth : 1500 mm
b) Isolating distance between poles of same : 1700 mm
phase (centre to centre)
17. Rating of auxiliary contacts : 10 A at 220 V DC / 110V
DC with breaking capacity of
2 Amp. DC with time
constant not less than 20ms
18. Climatic conditions : As specified in the document
19. Rated mechanical terminal load : As per relevant Standards
20. Operating time : 12 sec. or less
21. Rated magnetising / capacitive current make/ : 0.7 Amps./rms
break
22. RIV at 1 Mhz & 1.1 x rated phase to earth : 1000 micro volts
voltage
23. Min. thickness of silver coating on contacts : 40 microns

5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS :

5.1. DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT :

5.1.1. The 145kV Isolators covered by this specification shall be Centre Post Rotating,
Double Break, Banging type (horizontal break having double break per phase)
without and with single vertical fork and lift type earthing blade per pole suitable for
fixing on either side of the poles and Tandem type. The motorized isolators shall be
gang operated and the blades shall rotate in the horizontal plane. The isolators shall
be provided with proper studs for the perfect leveling of all the phases of the
[Link] shall be provided on the support structures for fixing
the operating mechanism for the earth blades. The isolators shall be so designed
that addition of earth switch on one or both sides shall be possible in future.

5.1.2. Complete isolators with all the necessary items for successful operation shall be
supplied including but not limited to the following :

3
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

[Link]. Isolators assembled with isolator blades (main and earth), complete base
frame, linkages, operating mechanism etc.

[Link]. One central control cabinet for each isolator with all the required electrical devices
mounted therein and necessary terminal blocks for termination shall be
provided.

5.1.3. The isolators/earth switch shall be complete with base channel boxes suitable for
mounting post insulators. It shall be supplied with suitable clamps, bolts, nuts and
washers for mounting.

5.1.4. The detailed drawing and bill of material of supporting structure suitable for these
isolators shall be supplied. Although supporting structures are not in the scope
of supply of this specification.

5.1.5. The three phase motorised isolator and earth switch shall be manufactured out of the
best grade of material suitable for the weather conditions prevailing in the Rajasthan.

5.1.6. All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized. All bearings in the current path except
those specifically designed as high pressure contact shall be shunted by flexible
copper connector of suitable cross section.

5.1.7. The insulator of isolators and earth switch shall be so arranged that leakage current
will pass to earth and not between terminals of the same pole or between poles.

5.1.8. It shall not be possible after final adjustments have been made for any part of the
mechanism to be displaced to any point of travel so as to allow improper
functioning when the switch is operated.

5.1.9. The isolators with all accessories should have all requisite fittings ready for
mounting them on supporting structures. all hardwares for fixing accessories on the
purchaser's support structure shall be included in the scope of supply with
isolators.

5.2. DUTY REQUIREMENTS :

5.2.1. The isolator and earth switch shall be capable to withstand the rated mechanical
terminal load and electromagnetic forces without impairing their operation reliability.
The rated mechanical load shall be given in the bid offer. The earth switch isolator
shall be such that they cannot come out of their open or close position by gravity,
wind pressure, vibrations or accidental touching of the operating rod. Suitable
electrical and mechanical interlock shall be provided to prevent closing of earth
switch when isolator is closed and also prevent closing of isolator when earth switch
is closed. Isolators and earth switches shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic
and thermic effects of the maximum possible short circuit current of the systems
in their closed position. The isolators shall be so designed that they do not open
under the influence of short circuit current.

5.2.2. The isolator shall be capable of making/breaking normal currents when no voltage
difference occurs across the terminals of each pole of isolator on account of make/
break operation.

5.2.3. The isolator shall be capable of making/breaking magnetizing current of 0.7 A at

0.15 power factor and capacitive current of 0.7 A at 0.15 power factor.

4
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

5.2.4. Isolator and earth switches shall be able to bear on the terminals the total forces
including wind loading and electrodynamic forces on the attached conductor without
impairing reliability or current carrying capacity.

5.3. BASE CHANNEL :

5.3.1. The compound structure of base channel boxes of isolator shall be fabricated from
two numbers of MS channels of at least 125 x 65 mm size for 145kV Isolators.
The base channels of the frame should face inside towards each other. They should
be welded (not bolted) using adequate bracing at a maximum 500 mm interval to
make the frame rigid. The centre to centre distance between the channels shall be as
per attached drawing of the structure.

5.3.2. For 145kV Isolators total 4 elliptical holes of 18 mm x 50 mm shall be provided so

that the frame of the Isolator can be mounted on the structure without any
modification. For 145kV Isolators the centres of 4 ellipitical holes for fixing the
frame on structure shall be at distance of 615mm/as per the enclosed drawing of
the structure from the centre line of the frame on both sides and both channel. Two
independent 12 mm thick earthing plates of size 100 x 100 mm shall be provided
on the base for bolting the earthing flat of 100 x 12 mm size. Two holes of 15 mm
diameter shall be provided on these plates.

5.4. OPERATING MECHANISM :

5.4.1. The three phase 145kV isolators shall be remote controlled from the control room.
Provision shall be made for local motor control also. Operating mechanism shall also
be equipped with local manual operating device intended for emergency operation
when motor operating mechanism becomes in-operative. Additional electromagnetic
type interlock shall be provided on the manual operating handle so as to prevent the
operation of isolator manually or electrically when the corresponding circuit breaker is
ON. Suitable interlock shall be provided such that during manual operation
,electrical operation shall be automatically rendered inoperative by interrupting the
power supply.

5.4.2. Manual operating mechanism through crank and reduction worm gear shall be
provided for earth switch. The Manual operating handle shall be at a height of 1150
mm above ground level. The operating handle shall be provided with insulation layer
for operator safety.

5.4.3. The operating mechanism shall provide quick , simple and effective operation. The
design of manual operation shall be such that one man shall be able to operate the
isolator without undue effort. The operating mechanism shall be suitable to hold the
disconnector in CLOSE OR OPEN position and prevent operation by gravity, wind,
short circuit forces , seismic forces, vibration, Shock, accidental touching etc.

5.4.4. Limit switches for control shall be fitted on the Isolator/ earth switch shaft within the
cabinet to sense the open and close positions of the isolators and earth switches.
Limit switches shall also have three (3) spare contacts for Purchaser’s use for
indication and control circuits.

5.4.5. It shall not be possible, after final adjustment has been made, for any part of the
mechanism to be displaced at any point in the travel sufficient enough to cause
improper functioning of the isolator when the isolator is opened or closed at any
speed. All holes in cranks, linkage etc., having moving pins shall be drilled to

5
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

fit accurately so as to maintain the minimum amount of slack and lost-motion in the
entire mechanism.

5.4.6. A local/remote selector switch and a set of open and close push buttons shall be
provided onthe control cabinet of the isolator to permit its operation through local
or Remote push buttons.

5.4.7. Provision shall be made in the control cabinet to disconnect power supply to prevent
local/remote power operation.

5.4.8. Each motor operated mechanism shall be subjected to blocked rotor test.

5.4.9. A vertical down pipe operating shaft not less than 1.75 meters for 145kV Isolators
to suit mounting height of structure and supported on ball or roller bearing in its shaft
shall be provided.

5.4.10. Each rotating insulator stool of isolator shall have taper roller bearing at top and ball
bearing at other end. The thickness of plate required for fixing of the rotating stool
shall be atleast 10 mm for 145kV Isolators. Four (4) Nos. holes of 18mm diameter
on this plate of the stool at a PCD of 184 mm & minimum clearance of 23 mm from
the hole centre for 145kV Isolators for fitting the post insulators shall be provided.
The vertical distance between bearings should be minimum 150 mm centre to centre.
The bearings shall be of atleast75 mm shaft diameter. The bearings shall be of
reputed make eg. SKF, HMT, NBC, TATA. The leveling plate on which the fixed
insulator is mounted shall have a minimum thickness of 12 mm. The bolts provided
for leveling shall have a minimum diameter of 20 mm. Additional bearing assemblies,
channels etc wherever required for avoiding the fouling of operating mechanism with
the structure & for smooth operation of the Isolators, shall be provided free of cost by
the supplier.

5.4.11. The entire mechanical load shall be suspended on taper roller bearing. The bearing
shall be adjustable and accessible for dismantling in the field. The rotating
insulator shall be mounted on a housing with bearing housing. The bearing housing
shall be weather proof and facilities for lubrication of bearing shall be provided. The
housing shall be made of pressure die cast aluminum with smooth surfaces suitably
machined for seating the bearings. Two nos. of bearings with adequate shaft
diameter and distance between the bearings shall be provided to avoid wobbling
during operations.

5.4.12. All other friction locations shall be provided with bearings, bushes, joints, springs etc.
and shall be so designed that no lubrication shall be required during service.
Complete details of bearings, bushes, housing, greasing etc. shall be furnished
with the bid. The earthing switch shaft shall also be provided with necessary
bearings.

5.4.13. The down operating pipe (Two Nos. i.e. one number of main switch and one for earth
switch) and phase coupling pipe shall not be less than 50mm and 32mm nominal
bore respectively. All G.I pipes used in operating mechanism of isolators and earth
switch shall be of class B as per relevant IS. The operating pipe shall be terminated
into a suitable swivel or universal type joint at both ends between the insulator
bottom bearing and the operating mechanism to take care of marginal angular
misalignment at site.

5.4.14. Each phase of isolator shall be provided with a rigid base fabricated from steel
sections. The base shall be suitable for mounting on support structures. Fabrication,

6
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

welding etc., shall be done by suitable jig, power press and templates to avoid
deviations during production. Details of dimensions of sections, jig templates and
device used for production of the base shall be furnished with the bid.

5.5. CONTROL CABINET :

The control cabinet of the operating mechanism shall be made out of 12 SWG hot dip
galvanized sheet steel and shall be weather and dust proof. Hinged door shall be
provided with pad locking arrangement. Sloping rain hood shall be provided to cover
all sides. 15 mm thick neoprene or better type of gaskets shall be provided on the
door and the top side entry of operating rod to ensure degree of protection of at
least IP-55 as per IS:13947. Separate cabinet made out of 12 SWG hot dip
galvanized sheet steel shall be provided with each earth switch operating
mechanism. The cabinet for both main and earth switch shall be mounted on
galvanized support structure with adjustment for horizontal and vertical alignment.
The support structure with suitable hardware is also in the scope of supply. Details of
these arrangements along with the size of the cabinet shall be furnished with the
bid.

5.6. MOTOR:

The motor shall be suitable for 3 phase, 415 V A.C supply with variations as
specified in this specification. It shall be totally enclosed type if mounted outside
the control cabinet. The motor shall withstand without damage stalled torque for at
least three times the duration of tripping device. The motor shall, in all other respects,
conform to the requirement of IS-325. The make of motor shall be CROMPTON/ABB/
SIEMENS only.

5.7. GEAR:

The isolator may be required to operate occasionally, with considerably long idle
intervals . Special care shall be taken for selection of material for gear and
lubrication of gears to meet this requirement. The worm gears shall be made out of
bronze or any other better material and lubricated for life with graphite or better
quality non draining and non hardening type grease. Wherever necessary automatic
relieving mechanism shall be provided. Complete details of components , material,
grade, self lubricating arrangement, grade of lubricants, details of jig, fixtures and
devices used for quality check, shall be furnished by the bidder in his offer.

5.8. GLAND PLATE AND GLANDS :

A removable gland plate with double compression type brass cable glands shall be
provided with each operating mechanism for terminating all cables. Two (2) no. of
32 mm and one (1) no. of 25 mm for earth switch operating mechanism and three
(3) nos. of 32 mm and one (1) no. of 25 mm for main operating mechanism glands
shall be provided.

5.9. CONTROL CIRCUITS:

Control device shall store OPEN and CLOSE command even if the corresponding
switch is momentarily pressed until the command is fully executed and the
components get de-energised after execution. Failure of auxiliary power supply or
loose contact shall not cause faulty operation.

7
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

5.10. LIMIT SWITCH:

Limit switches shall be of reputed make. Auxiliary switch shall not be used as Limit
switch. Details of make, rating and type of limit switch shall be furnished in the bid
offer.

5.11. OVERLOAD AND SINGLE PHASING PREVENTER:

Suitable relay/device shall be provided to prevent overloading of the motor. Single

phase preventer shall be provided to operate on open circuiting of any phase and
shall trip off the motor and disconnect the control supply. The motor shall be
protected by using separate single phasing preventer and overload relay. These shall
also be used to cut-off the control supply of the operating mechanism. Complete
details of the devices shall be furnished in the bid offer.

5.12. CONTACTOR:

The contactor shall be suitable for making and breaking stalled motor current. The
contactor shall be suitable for operating at 110V DC as well as 220 V D.C. or
three phase 415V A.C. with suitable inter-locking D.C. relay to cut off A.C. supply
to the motor in accordance with the interlocking scheme. Two nos. of contactors
shall be provided for each motor for OPEN and CLOSE operation respectively. One
contactor shall be provided for the electrical interlocking system. A timer shall be
provided for providing alarm and opening the control circuit in case the isolator does
not perform the operation in the specified time. Make, type, rating and details of
the contactor shall be furnished in the bid offer.

5.13. AUXILIARY SWITCH :

5.13.1. The isolators shall be provided with snap type auxiliary switch with all contact visible
and replaceable to facilitate adjustment/ inspection in the field. Each operating
mechanism box shall be equipped with Twelve Nos. of NO andTwelve Nos. of NC
auxiliary switches exclusively for Purchaser's use. Eight pairs of NO and Eight pairs
of NC contacts shall be provided in the auxiliary switch box for each operating
mechanism for earth switch. The contacts of auxiliary switches shall be silver
plated. The auxiliary switches shall be of reputed make and of best quality. Auxiliary
switches other than snap type shall not be accepted. The bidder shall get the
sample of snap type auxiliary switch approved from the RVPN/purchaser before
approval of drawings of isolators.

5.13.2. The auxiliary switches and auxiliary circuits shall be capable of carrying the current
of atleast 10 Amps. continuously with adequate breaking capacity.

5.13.3. Auxiliary switches shall be capable of breaking atleast 2A in a 220 V D.C/110 V D.C
circuit with a time constant of not less than 20 milliseconds.

5.13.4. The R.M.S withstand voltage shall be 2 KV for one minute. The auxiliary switches
shall be positively driven in both direction by rigid members. The insulating material
for the auxiliary switches shall be ceramic or other non-cracking material.

5.13.5. The auxiliary switches shall be actuated by a cam or similar arrangement directly
mounted on the isolator operating pipe and shall be without any intermediate
levels, linkages etc., to ensure fool proof operation.

8
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

5.13.6. The auxiliary switches which are installed on the frame of isolator shall be suitably
protected from accidental arcing from the main circuit. A drawing of auxiliary switch
included in the scope of supply shall be furnished with the bid offer. The auxiliary
switch contacts shall be accessible when the isolator is live and signaling for
open will not take place unless moving contacts have fully separated.

5.14. SPACE HEATERS:

Space heater suitable for 1 phase 240V AC supply shall be provided for motor
operated operating mechanism to prevent condensation. A switch and fuse /link
shall be provided in the operating mechanism.

5.15. TERMINAL BLOCK AND WIRINGS :

Each operating mechanism shall be provided with 1100 V grade stud type terminal
block. All auxiliary switches, interlocks and other terminals shall be wired upto
terminal block .The terminal block shall have at least 20% extra terminals. All wiring
shall be carried out with 1100V grade insulated 2.5 [Link] copper wires.

5.16. ARCING HORNS :

The arcing horns provided on the isolators shall be capable of breaking the
magnetizing current of the transformers up to the capacity of 100 MVA. The arcing
horns shall close before the main contacts close and open after the main contacts
are separated. Arcing horns shall be made of liberally rated renewable rod type .The
diameter of the arcing horn's rod shall be at least 10 mm made out of G.I.M.S.

5.17. INTERLOCKING :

5.17.1. Each earth switch shall be mechanically interlocked with the associated isolator so as
to prevent closing of the earthing blades when the main blades are in a closed
position and vice-versa. The interlocking arrangement shall be strong and robust.
Each isolator shall also be provided with electrical interlocking (of the approved type)
between isolator and associated circuit breaker so that isolator may not be operated
on load, i.e, when the circuit breaker is in closed position.

5.17.2. The earth switches, wherever provided, shall be constructionally interlocked so that
the earth switch can be operated only when the isolator is open and not vice-versa.
The constructional interlocks shall be built-in construction of isolator and shall be in
addition to the electrical and mechanical interlocks provided in the operating
mechanism.

5.17.3. In addition to the constructional interlock, isolator and earth switches shall have
provision to prevent their electrical and manual operation unless the associated
and other interlocking conditions are met. All these interlocking shall be of failsafe
type. Suitable individual interlocking coil arrangements shall be provided. The
interlocking coil shall be suitable for continuous operation both on 110V DC and
220V DC supply so that it may not have to be changed to DC Battery Voltage
available at Sub-Station(s).

5.17.4. Castel type keyed switches with solenoid operated locking pin and one auxiliary
contact shall be provided for the interlocking scheme. It shall not be possible to
operate the isolator or earth switch manually without fitting this key on shutters

9
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

provided on the openings for inserting operating crank. It shall not be possible to
operate the isolator electrically unless this key is re- fitted in the switch.

5.18. INTERIOR ILLUMINATION:

A switch, HRC fuse and holder suitable for a 240 V Lamp shall be provided in the
Control Cabinet.

5.19. POWER SOCKET:

A single phase 240V, 15A power socket and switch shall be provided in the motor
operated operating mechanisms of the isolator.

5.20. CONTROL AND AUXILIARY SUPPLY:

A 3 phase switch with HRC fuses for phases and link for neutral shall be provided for
power supply and a 2 way switch with HRC fuses shall be provided for control
supply in the motor operated mechanism of the isolator.

5.21. ACCESSORIES :

The accessories to be provided on the isolator shall include butnot be limited to the
following:

5.21.1. POSITION INDICATOR :

A position indicator to show whether the isolator is in ON or OFF position.

5.21.2 COUNTER BALANCE SPRINGS/COUNTER WEIGHTS :

Counter balance springs, cushions etc. shall be provided to prevent impact at the
end of travel both on opening and closing of the isolator. The springs shall be
made of durable and non-rusting type alloy. Counter weights shall be provided on the
earth blades for balancing so that the operations are carried out smoothly.

5.22. NAME AND RATING PLATE :

Isolators and earthing switches and their operating devices shall be provided with a
name plate. The name plate shall be weather proof and corrosion proof. It shall be
mounted in such a position that it shall be visible in the position of normal service
and installation. It shall carry the following information duly engraved or punched on
it.

5.22.1. ISOLATOR BASE :

Name of Purchaser:
Name of Manufacturer:
PO No.:
Type Designation:
Manufacturer's serial number:
Rated voltage:
Rated normal current:
Rated short time current (rms) and duration:
Rated short time peak current (kAp):
Weight:

10
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

5.22.2. EARTHING SWITCH :

Name of purchaser:
Name of Manufacturer:
PO No.:
Type Designation:
Manufacturer's serial number:
Rated voltage:
Rated short time current (rms) and duration:
Rated short time peak current (kAp):
Weight:

5.22.3 OPERATING DEVICE :

Name of purchaser:
Name of Manufacturer:
PO No.:
Type Designation:
Reduction gear ratio:
A.C. Motor:
i) Rated auxiliary voltage:
ii) Starting current:
iii) Designation of AC Motor as perIS:4722:
iv) Starting Torque at 80% of supply voltage:
v) Pre travel in degrees after cutting of supply:
Total operating time in seconds:
i) CLOSE operation - electrical
ii) OPEN Operation - electrical
iii) ------do------ - manual
Space Heater:
Rated voltage and power:

Auxiliary contacts:
i) Rated current (Amps):
ii) No. of contacts used (NC & NO):
iii) No. of free contacts (NC & NO):

Terminal blocks and wiring:

i) Rated current:
ii) Voltage grade and type:

5.23. PADLOCKING DEVICE :

All isolators and earthing switches shall be provided with padlocking device to permit
locking of the isolator and earthing switch in both fully openand fully closed positions.
Isolator and earthing switch shall be arranged to be interlocked electrically also.

5.24. SIGNALING :

5.24.1. Signaling of the close position shall not take place unless the movable contact has
set in a position in which the rated normal current, the peak withstand current and
the short time withstand current can be carried safely.

11
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

5.24.2. Signaling of the open position shall not take place unless the movable contact has
reached the position such that the clearance between the male and female contacts
is at least 80% of the isolating distance.

5.25. FORK AND LIFT TYPE EARTHING BLADES :

5.25.1. The isolators controlling the transmission lines shall be equipped with earthing
blades. The earth blades in the isolators shall be vertical fork and lift type with
provision of reduction gear box mechanism for easy make and break operation of
the earth switch and provided with counter weights for balancing. The earthing
blades shall be manually operated in a similar manner to main isolator. Fixing
arrangements shall be provided on the base frame of the isolators such that the
earth blade can be fitted on both sides and both ends of the male and female
contacts so that opening direction of the isolators can be kept the same for any
combination of location of earth blade. The banging type earth switch shall not be
acceptable. The earth switch shall be so designed that while operation the earth
blade shall lift first and then enters the fixed contact in second stage through
reduction gear mechanism.

5.25.2. Flexible copper connections shall be provided between earth blades and the frame
which shall have a cross-section of atleast 200 sq. mm and shall be tinned or
suitably treated against corrosion.

5.25.3. The frame of each isolator and earthing switch shall be provided with two reliable
earthing terminals for connections to the purchaser's earthing conductor /flat so also
clamping screws suitable for carrying specified short time current. Flexible ground
connections shall be provided for connecting each earthing blade and operating
handle of earth switch and isolator to the earthing flat. The diameter of clamping
screw shall be at least [Link] connecting point shall be marked with "Earth"
symbol.

5.25.4. The Material of earthing male and female contacts shall be same as those of main
male and female contacts respectively. The earth switch shall be type tested and
cross sectional area of earthing blades and contacts shall not be less than 50% of
cross sectional area of main blades and contacts respectively. The earthing blades
shall have the same short time current rating (thermal and dynamic) as that of main
blades. The material of components and cross section of earth switch blade shall be
either exactly same or superior than that of earth switch got type tested for short
circuit test. If the earth switch is not type tested than the cross sectional area of earth
switch blade and contacts shall be same as of main switch.

5.26. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION :

5.26.1. Full particulars of design, manufacture, jig template and quality control devices
developed for manufacture of the equipment offered in respect of but not limited to
the following, shall be furnished with drawings and descriptions alongwith the bid.

i) Contacts, material, current density etc.

ii) Design of contact pressure.
iii) Contact support and fixing arrangement on isolators.
iv) Operating mechanism, clamps, locks etc.,
v) Bearings, housing of bearings, bushes etc.,
vi) Balancing of heights.
vii) Coupling pipes, joints, connection adjustments.
viii) Base plates.

12
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

ix) Down pipe guides and joints.

x) Brass bushes and bearings at various joints.
xi) Operating mechanism, type of gear, aux. switch, size and thickness of box,
degree of protection, gland plate, gland etc.
xii) Nuts, bolts and fasteners.
xiii) Interlocking devices.

Offers without the above information or with incomplete information shall not be considered.

5.27. FASTENERS :

All the bolts, nuts, washers etc. require for assembling the equipment and for fixing
them on the structures including for fixing of post insulators on the base plate/base
frame are included in the scope of supply. Nuts, bolts and washers of 5/8” and higher
size shall be hot dip galvanized. Nuts, bolts and washers of less than 5/8" size shall
be of stainless steel when used on current carrying live parts and nickel plated brass
in other parts.

5.28. CONTACTS:

5.28.1. The contacts, terminal arrangement and terminal pad of the isolator shall be made
out of hard drawn electrolytic copper having liberal cross section to withstand the
rated normal current and fault levels. The contacts of isolators shall be reverse loop
type, heavy duty, self aligning, high pressure contacts of modern design. The
contacts surface shall be silver plated having minimum thickness of 40 microns.
The switch blades shall be made from tubular section of hard drawn electrolytic
copper having suitable diameter and wall thickness. The contact surface shall be
wiped during closing and opening operations to remove any film, oxide coating etc.
Wiping action shall not cause scouring for abrasion of surfaces. Fabrication of
contact shall be made with suitable jig to avoid deviations during production.
Details of size and shape of contacts, springs, back plate, fixing arrangements
design of contact pressure, life of contacts, limit of temperature rise etc, shall be
furnished alongwith the bid. The moving contacts of tubular section shall be so
dimensioned as to carry the rated current. Bi-metallic strip of 1 mm thickness shall
be used for all connections between copper and aluminum parts. The stopper
provide in the jaw should be of Teflon/Fibre or any other material having high
heat resistance & water resisting quality.

5.28.2. The current density shall be less than1.6 Amp. per [Link] in the male and female
contacts & terminal pad. The current density in all other parts of Isolator shall be
less than 2.5 A/[Link] for copper and 1.0 A/[Link] in Aluminium. The supporting
calculation showing current density without& with holes for overlapping shall be
furnished with bid offer.

5.28.3. The male and female contacts assemblies and blades should ensure:

a) Electrodynamic withstand ability during short circuit.

b) Thermal withstand ability during short circuit.
c) Constant contact pressure even when the live parts of the insulator stack are
subject to tensile stresses due to linear expansion of connected bus bar or
flexible conductor either because of temperature variation or strong winds.
d) Wiping action during closing and opening.
e) Self alignment ensuring smooth closing of the switch.

13
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

5.29. MOUNTING OF FIXED CONTACTS :

The fixed contacts shall be mounted on a block or channel welded to 10 mm thick

M.S. plate with holes for fixing on insulators. Slots shall be provided for marginal
adjustment of height of contacts. Suitable device shall be provided to prevent
dashing. Fabrication, welding etc. shall be done in suitable jig to avoid deviations
during production. The fixed and moving contact arms shall be fitted on the post
insulators for which purpose the fixing plates shall have four tapped holes of 16 mm
diameter at 127 mm PCD.

5.30. TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT :

The terminal of isolators shall be connected to the fixed contacts. The terminal shall
be made out of hard drawn electrolytic copper and shall have minimum cross-section
of 780.00 Sq. mm. The terminal pad shall be suitable for connection to aluminium
connector through bimetallic strip. The terminal arrangement for connection shall
be suitable for horizontal and vertical take-off.

5.31. TERMINAL CONNECTORS :

5.31.1. Each isolator shall be provided with bi-metallic rigid self grooved bolted type terminal
connectors suitable for Single/Twin Panther/Zebra ACSR conductor. The terminal
connector shall be suitable for horizontal and vertical takeoff. The terminal
connectors shall have ratings as that of isolator's current rating or higher. The
current density in terminal connector shall not exceed 1.0 Amp./[Link].

5.31.2. The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements :

a) The terminal connectors shall be designed most liberally for current ratings
and shall be manufactured and tested as per IS: 5561 for tensile strength
,temperature rise and short circuit current withstand test.

b) All casting shall be pressure die casting free from blow holes, surface blisters,
cracks and cavities. All sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and
rounded off.

c) No part of clamp shall be less than 10mm thick.

d) All ferrous parts shall be of stainless steel.

e) For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy linear of minimum thickness of 2 mm

shall be cast integral with aluminium body.

f) All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have

minimum contact resistance.

g) Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with the

requirements stipulated in IS:5561.

5.31.3. The bimetallic strip of standard quality having thickness of at least 1 mm shall be
used to avoid galvanic corrosion.

14
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

5.32. ASSEMBLY :

The isolator shall be fully assembled at the works of the supplier and operations shall
be carried out on it to ascertain that all parts fit correctly and function satisfactorily.

5.33. TEMPERATURE RISE :

The temperature of the moving blades, contacts, terminal arrangement, terminal pad
and terminal connectors and other parts of the isolator shall not exceed the limits as
specified in the IS:9921 while carrying full load current at maximum ambient
temperature of 50 degree C and other site conditions as mentioned in the
specification instead of an ambient temperature of 40 degree C as mentioned in
relevant IS.

6.0 TYPE TESTS :

6.1. Certified copies of following type test reports as Per IS:9921 (Part-IV) complete in
all respect alongwith certified drawings clearly showing the material, components
and cross sectional area of all current carrying parts shall be furnished alongwith
the bid with the confirmation that material, components and cross sectional area of
all current carrying parts will be either exactly same or superior than that of isolators
got type tested of which type test reports are being furnished. The type test
certificates should not be older than 10(Ten) years as on the date of technical
bid opening.

a) Test to verify insulation level.

b) Temperature rise test.
c) Milivolt dropt test/Measurement of resistance test.
d) Rated peak withstand and Rated short time current withstand test on
isolator.
e) Rated peak withstand and Rated short time current withstand test on earth
switch.
f) Test to prove satisfactory operation & mechanical endurance.
g) Rated peak withstand and short time current withstand test on Terminal
Connector suitable for twin zebra ACSR conductor as per IS:5561
h) Degree of protection test provided by Enclosure as per IS:13947.
i) Test on Auxiliary Switch

6.2. In case of bought out items, the type test reports in favour of manufacturer of
bought out items may be accepted.

7.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING :

7.1. ROUTINE AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS :

In the event of an order, the following tests as per relevant standards shall be got
conducted in presence of purchaser’s representative .The supplier will have to
furnish valid calibration certificates of all testing equipments issued from
Govt./Govt. approved agency to purchaser representative before offering the
material for purchaser inspection. The bidder shall enclose copy of invoices of raw
material and bought out items as listed at Clause No.12.0 along with the inspection
report.

a) Voltage test on control and auxiliary circuit of isolators as per IS:9921

([Link]) on all offered Isolators.

15
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

b) Measurement of resistance of main circuit of isolator as per IS:9921

([Link]) on all offered isolators.

c) Mechanical Operation test on one isolator of each type and rating with
available post insulators selected at random out of each offered lot for
inspection.

d) Mechanical Endurance test shall be done as acceptance test on one isolator

of each type and rating with available post insulators selected at random out of
each offered lot for inspection. Mechanical endurance test shall be conducted
on the main switch as well as earth switch of one isolator of each type and
rating. Damaged contacts shall not be acceptable in any case. The contacts
of isolators which have undergone this test shall be silver plated again by
the supplier before dispatch.

e) Verifications of dimensions a per approved drawings/Schedule of Guaranteed

Technical Particulars on one isolator of each type and rating selected at
random out of each offered lot for inspection.

f) Temperature rise test after fitting terminal connectors on one isolator of each
type and rating selected at random out of each offered lot for inspection. The
test shall be carried out at maximum ambient temperature of 50 Deg.C.
instead of 40 Deg.C. as mentioned in relevant IS.

g) The galvanized components shall be tested for preece test as per IS:2633 of
one Isolator of each type and rating selected at random out of each offered
lot for inspection.

h) The Measurement of thickness of silver plating as per BS:2816 at supplier's

works or at an approved testing laboratory on one piece(either moving or fixed
contact) of isolator of each type and rating selected at random out of each
offered lot for inspection.

7.2. The purchaser reserve the right to have the all tests carried out at his own cost by
an independent agency ,wherever there is dispute regarding the quality of
material, and will claim reimbursement from the supplier, in case the material as a
result of such test/tests is not found conforming to the requirement of the
specification.

7.3. All the tests (as mentioned at Clause 7.1) and Inspection shall be made at the
place of manufacturer unless otherwise especially agreed upon by the bidder and
purchaser at the time of purchase. The bidder shall afford the inspection officer(s)
representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities without charges, to satisfy him
that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification.

7.4. Inspection and acceptance of any material under the specification by the
purchaser, shall not relieve the bidder of his obligation of furnishing material in
accordance with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if
the material is found to be defective. The bidder shall keep the purchaser informed in
advance, about manufacturing programme so that arrangements can be made for
inspection

8.0 TOLERANCE ON TEST RESULTS :

16
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

The tests shall be conducted as per relevant ISS.

9.0 SITE TESTS :

The purchaser reserves the right to carry out any site tests as may be decided at his
own cost and will claim reimbursement from the supplier ,in case the material as a
result of such test/tests is not found conforming to the prescribed specification.

10.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS/OTHER INFORMATION:

Guaranteed technical particulars as per Schedule-GTP shall be furnished.

11.0 DRAWINGS:

11.1. The bidder shall submit the bill of material and fully dimensional drawings of the
offered isolators, their accessories, clearly showing the full details of material
components and cross sections of moving blade, male and female contacts, details
of terminal arrangement ,terminal pad, terminal connectors, auxiliary switch box,
level adjustment devices, electrical and mechanical interlocking, operating
mechanism showing the make, number and type of bearings, bearing shaft
diameter, nominal diameter and thickness of various G.I pipes, earth switch, blades,
contacts and earth connectors and earth switch operating mechanism etc. to be
supplied.

The following drawings are to be supplied as part of the contract:

1. Drawing showing the overall dimensions of isolator/Isolator cum earth switch in

open as well as in close position, clearances, terminal connectors, operating
mechanism, auxiliary switch box, base channels etc. alongwith bill of material
showing make, type, material and quantity of each component/part with
mass/weight etc..

2. Sectional views and descriptive details of items such as heights, phase

coupling pipes, base plate, operating shaft, guides, swivel joint operating
mechanism and its components etc.,

3. Drawing showing detailed dimensions of all current carrying parts.

4. Drawing showing mounting details of isolators on supporting structures .

5. Drawing of electrical interlocking and wiring diagram.

6. Name and rating plate diagram as per IS:9921.

7. Dimensional drawing of auxiliary switches.

8. Descriptive literature of isolator / isolator cum earth switch construction.

9. Quality assurance plan adopted for manufacture of isolator/isolator cum earth

switch specified in the specification.

11.2. The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the
approved drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written
approval of the Purchaser. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with
the equipment prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at the Supplier's risk.

17
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

Approval of drawings/work by Purchaser shall not relieve the Supplier of his

responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of
the latest revision of applicable standards, rules and codes of practices.

12.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

The bidder shall invariably furnish following information alongwith his offer, failing
which his offer may be liable for rejection.

i) Statement giving list of important raw materials, including but not limited to:
a) Copper.
b) Steel.
c) Springs.
d) Bearings.
e) Nuts & Bolts.
f) Operating mechanism and its components such as motor, gear, auxiliary
switch, terminal block, interlocks etc.

ii) Names of sub suppliers for the raw materials, list of standards according to
which the raw materials are tested, list of tests normally carried out on raw
materials in the presence of bidder’s representative, copies of test certificates
etc.

iii) Information and copies of test certificates as in (i) above in respect of bought
out items/accessories.

iv) List of manufacturing facilities available.

v) Level of automation achieved and list of areas where manual processing still
exists.

vi) List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections.

vii) Special features provided in the equipment to make it maintenance free.

viii) List of testing equipments available with the bidder for final testing of
equipment and test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type, special,
acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.

The successful bidder shall submit following information to the purchaser:

a) List of raw materials as well as bought out items/accessories and the

name of sub-suppliers selected from the list furnished .

b) Type test certificates of the raw material and bought out accessories.

The successful bidder shall submit the routine test certificates of bought out
items/accessories at the time of routine testing of the fully assembled isolator.

18
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

13.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS MANUALS :

13.1. The supplier shall provide operation and maintenance instructions manuals of
isolator to the purchaser and also to consignee alongwith requisite detailed drawings
of the isolator covered by this specification. The manuals shall be bounded and shall
include all necessary information and drawings to enable all items of the isolators
to be maintained, dismantled, adjusted and re-assembled by the purchaser's staff
together with suitable sectional drawings and part list.

13.2. After commissioning of the isolator, the supplier will be responsible for issuing any
necessary amendment in the operation and maintenance instructions manuals as
may be required.

13.3. The purchaser may send to the supplier notice covering items of equipment not
included in the contract but which are officially associated with the isolator and
earth switches being supplied so far as operation is concerned. The supplier shall
reproduce these notes and embody them in his own manuals.

13.4. Copies of operation and maintenance instructions manuals shall be furnished free of
cost.

14.0 PACKING, MARKING AND FORWARDING :

14.1. All parts of isolator like base channel, auxiliary switch box etc. shall have
manufacturer mark. The fixed contacts and moving blades / male contacts of each
isolator shall be packed in wooden box and all other parts shall be packed as per
manufacturer's practice.

14.2. The equipment shall be packed in crates suitable for vertical/horizontal transport, as
the case may be and suitable to withstand handling during transport and outdoor
storage during transit. The Supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the
equipment during transit due to improper and inadequate packing. The easily
damageable material shall be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate
caution symbols. Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting
hooks etc., shall be provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases
shall be supplied by Supplier without any extra cost.

14.3. Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the
following information:
a) Name of the consignee.
b) Details of consignment.
c) Destination.
d) Total weight of consignment.
e) Handling and unpacking instructions.
f) Bill of material indicating contents of each package.

15.0 COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT :

All fittings, accessories or material which may have not been specifically mentioned
in this specification, but which are usual or necessary for the equipment shall be
deemed to have been included in this specification. All equipments shall be complete
in all respect.

19
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

16.0 LATENT DEFECTS, ERRORS AND OMISSIONS :

Any material/equipment or part thereof that develops defects, errors or omissions

in the apparatus ,not disclosed prior to the final acceptance by the purchaser but
occur or are disclosed during the guarantee period, shall be corrected promptly.
The equipment or part thereof shall be replaced by the supplier free of charges and
all expenses for the transportation, handling, installation of such replacement or any
other incidental charges shall be borne by the supplier.

IMPORTANT NOTES:

1. In case the current density in particular current carrying part after excluding area
of holes and without adding area of other overlapped part is found to be more than
its specified maximum current density then at holes/overlapped portions the current
density of the part shall be calculated by considering/adding the following
effective area:

a) Cross sectional area of part excluding area of holes.

b) Cross sectional area of other part excluding area of holes divided by the
ratio of required maximum current density of other part and same part. For
same material this ratio shall be one.

In case the current density in particular current carrying part after excluding area of holes
and without adding area of other overlapped part is found to be more than its specified
maximum current density then the requirement of current density at holes/overlapped
portions shall be considered as fulfilled if following condition is satisfied:

"Maximum current density specified for the part (d1) x its cross sectional area (excluding
area of holes in the part) (a1) + Maximum current density specified for other joining part
(d2) x its cross sectional area (excluding area of holes in the joining part) (a2) shall be
greater than or equal to the rated current of the isolator".

20
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

Schedule- GTP
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 145kV, 1250A
MOTORISED ISOLATORS WITH & WITHOUT EARTH SWITCH

Name of Firm:

S. No. PARTICULARS 145kV, 1250A ISOLATORS

1 i. Name of Manufacturer
ii Manufacture's type and designation
2. Standard (s) according to which Isolators are
manufactured
3. Maximum design voltage at which the
Isolator can operate (kV)
4. Rated value and Characteristics
i. Number of poles
ii. Number of breaks per pole
iii. Class
iv. Rated voltage (kV)
v. Continuous current ratings
a) Nominal (Amps.)
b) Under site conditions (Amps.)
5. De-rating factor for specified site condition
6. Rated frequency (Hz.)
7. Maximum current that can be safely
interrupted by the isolator
i. Inductive (A & % PF)
ii. Capacitive (A & % PF)
8. Rated insulation level :
i. Lightning impulse withstand voltage (kV peak)
a. To earth and between poles
b. Across the isolating distance
ii. One minute power frequency withstand
voltage (kV rms)
a. To earth and between poles (kV rms)
b. Across the isolating distance (kV rms)
9. Rated short time withstand current for
i. One Second (kA rms)
ii. Three Seconds (KA rms)
10. Rated peak withstand current (kAp)
11. Milivolt drop test voltage between
i. Contacts
ii. Terminals of each phase
12. Overall dimensions and other information.
A. Material, dimensions and min. cross sectional
area
a. Female Contact
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq.
mm
b. Male contact
i. Material and grade

21
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

S. No. PARTICULARS 145kV, 1250A ISOLATORS

ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq.
mm
c. Terminal Pad/arrangement
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
d. Terminal Connector
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
e. Earth Switch Male Contacts
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq.
mm
f. Earth switch Female Contacts
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensional and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
g. Arcing Horns
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
h. Flexible earthconnectors for Isolators
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
i. Flexible earth connectors for earth switch
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
j. Springs
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
k. Contact Support
i. Material, size and length of channel
ii. Material and size of plate
l. Rain hood
i. Material, grade and size
B) Max. current density at the minimum cross-
sections of
a. Female contact (A/Sq. mm)
b. Male contact (A/Sq. mm)
c. Terminal Pad (A/Sq. mm)
d. Terminal Connector (A/Sq. mm):
13 Constructional features:
i. Mass of Manual operated isolator Hardware in
(Kg.)
a) Without earth blade
b) With single earth blade
c) Tandem Type
ii. Mass of motor operated isolator hardware in(Kg.)
a) Without earth blade
b) With single earth blade
c) Tandem Type
iii. Minimum clearance in air in closed position of
switch (mm)
a. Between adjacent poles of different phases
(Center to Center)

22
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

S. No. PARTICULARS 145kV, 1250A ISOLATORS

b. Between live parts and earth.
iv. Minimum clearance in air in open position of
switch (mm)
a. Between poles of same phase (Center to
center)
b. Between adjacent poles of different phases.
v. Height of center line of terminal pad above
ground level.
14. Rated mechanical terminal load
i. Load along the terminal connector side (Kg.)
ii. Load across the terminal connector side (Kg)
15. Torque required to operate the switch (Kg-m)
16. Contact zone
i. Horizontal deflection (mm)
ii. Vertical deflection (mm)
iii. Total amplitude of longitudinal movement w.r.t.
conductor supporting fixed contact (mm)
17. Operating mechanism
i. Type of operating mechanism
ii. Material, size and thickness of Auxiliary Switch
Box
a. For Isolators
b. For Earth switch
iii. Degree of protection
iv. Type, size and no. of cable glands
v. Whether removable gland plate provided
vi. Make, Nos. and type (snap type required)of
auxiliary switch contacts (silver plated) used for
a. Isolators
b. Earth switch
vii Size & material of gasket
viii Whether auxiliary switch is ISI marked
18. i. Nominal bore of GI pipes (Medium class) used
for
a. Down operating pipe (mm)
b. Connecting pipe for adjacent poles (mm)
c. Operating handle (mm)
ii. Length of operating down pipe (mm)
iii. Length of operating handle (mm)
iv. Height of operating handle above ground level
v. Tandem pipe
a. Size class and No. of pipes
b. Size of shackle screw
c. No. of bearings/bushes and its material and size
19. Type of universal/swivel joint
i. Between bearing and down pipe
ii. Between down pipe and operating mechanism
20. i. Type of bearings with make, no. and size used
for
a. Rotating insulator base assembly.
b. Operating mechanism
ii. Minimum dia. of shaft of bearing assembly for

23
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

S. No. PARTICULARS 145kV, 1250A ISOLATORS

mounting the post insulator(mm)
a. At bearings
b. Above bearings
iii. Min. vertical distance between bearings (min.
150mm center to center required)
iv. Whether lubricating nipple is provided.
21. Make, material and size of bearing housing
22. Min. thickness of rotating stool i.e. insulator base
plate (mm)
23. a. Minimum thickness of levelling plate on which
bearing housing is mounted (minimum 12mm
required)
b. Minimum diameter of bolts provided for
levelling (minimum 20mm required)
24 i. Base channels
a. Size, Nos. and length of base channel (mm)
b. Overall size (mm)
c. Total weight (Kgs.)
d. Distance of centers of elliptical fixing holes of
size 18mm x 50mm on base channel from the
center line of the frame (mm). (As per Clause
no. 5.3 of Technical Specification)
e. Whether base channel of the frame
i. Faces inside
ii. Welded (not bolted) using adequate bracings at a
min. 500mm interval.
iii. Size and no. of earthing plates provided on the
base for bolting the earthing flat of 100 x 12mm
size and dia of holes.
25. Type of contacts
26. Thickness of silver coating on contacts
27. Length of silver plating on
i. Moving contacts
ii. Fixed contacts
28. Max. temperature rise of following current
carrying parts when carrying rated current
continuously over an ambient of 50oC instead
of 40oC mentioned in relevant IS.
i. Male contact with silver plating
ii. Female contacts with silver plating
iii. Terminal pad
iv. Bimetallic terminal connector
v. Springs
29. Make, type, rating and quantity of
i. Motors
ii. Gears
iii. Limit Switches
iv. Contactors
v. Overload relay
vi. Single Phase Preventer
vii Auxiliary switch
viii. Terminal blocks

24
Tech Spec for 145 kV Isolator

S. No. PARTICULARS 145kV, 1250A ISOLATORS

ix. Insulated wires
x. HRC Fuses
xi. Pole discrepancy relay
xii. Timer
xiii Space heaters
xiv Interlocks
30. Terminal connectors
a. Clamp body
i. Alloy composition
ii. Plating if any
iii. Dimensions
iv. Area at min. cross-section (Sq. mm)
b. Bolts and nuts size
i. Alloy composition
ii. Tensile strength
c. Type of washers used
d. Material of braids
e. Temp. rise when carrying rated current at 50oC
ambient (deg.C)
f. Weight of each type of clamp
31. Nuts and Bolts
i. Size, material and grade in live parts
ii. - do –
in terminal connectors
iii. - do -
in other parts
32. Locking arrangement of operating mechanism
33. Type of interlocking arrangement provided
a. Between Isolator and associated breaker
(suitable for operation at 110V DC as well as
220V DC.)
b. Between isolator and earth switch
34. Isolator hardware shall be suitable for
assembly with Insulator having
i. Bottom metal fitting (Nos. dia. of holes and PCD
to be indicated /mentioned)
ii. Top metal fitting (Nos. dia. of tapped holes and
PCD to be indicated/mentioned)
35. Whether Isolator hardware is complete with all
accessories.

25
 VOLUME-II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR OUTDOOR LIVE TANK TYPE 145 kV CURRENT

TRANSFORMERS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.0 The following items are proposed to be purchased against this BN-

145 kV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:

--------------------------------------------
(i) Ratio 250-500/1A,3C (0.2s Class)
(ii) Ratio: 500/1A, 3C (0.2s Class)

This section covers the design, manufacture assembly, testing at manufacturer’s work before dispatch, supply
and delivery of single phase, 50Hz, oil immersed or SF6 gas filled, self cooled, hermetically sealed out-door
live tank type 145 kV current transformers for installation at various grid substations of Rajasthan.
Consideration may be given to alternatives which the supplier consider advisable by reason of his own
manufacturing requirements and experiences, provided descriptive matter/test certificates are submitted
pointing out the recommended device or arrangement equal to or superior to that required by this
specification and if the purchaser is convinced of the quality and/or superiority of the equipment. These
equipments shall be suitable for installation in system with neutral effectively grounded.

1.1 STANDARDS:
The design, manufacture and testing of various equipments covered by this specification shall comply with
the latest issue of following and other applicable standards except the value wherever specified shall be
considered relevant:-
IS: 16227 Requirement for Instrument Transformer / Current Transformer
IS:2705 (Part-1) Specification for current transformers.
IS:5621 Specification for Hollow porcelain bushing
IS:2099 Specification for Bushings.
IS:5561 Specification for Electric power connectors
IS: 335 Specification for New Insulating oils
IS:4201 Application Guide for Current transformers.
IS:10601 Dimensions of terminals for high Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear
IEC: 61869- Specification for current transformers
IS: 376 - Specification and acceptance for supply of Sulphure hexafluoride
IS:2633- Specification for method for testing uniformity of Coating on Zinc Coated Articles.

Equipments and material conforming to alternative internationally recognized standard(s) which ensure(s)
quality equal or better than the Indian standard(s) mentioned above should also be acceptable. In case the
tenderer wishes to offer equipment conforming to other standard they shall furnish English Translation of
the relevant standard.

1.2 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:

The climatic conditions under which the equipment will be required to operate satisfactorily are as under:-

The equipment offered by you shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian standard specifications
except where stated otherwise in the order. Special care shall be taken in the design and manufacture
equipment to take into account the tropical conditions such as high temperature, excessive humidity, dust
and salt-laden atmosphere as detailed below:-

(i) Maximum Ambient Air Temperature : 50 Deg. C.

(ii) Maximum daily average Ambient Temperature : 45 Deg. C.
(iii) Maximum yearly weighted Ambient Temperature : 35 Deg. C.
(iv) Minimum Ambient Air Temperature : (-) 5 Deg. C.
(v) Maximum relative humidity : 90%
(vi) Minimum relative humidity : 10%
(vii) Height above main sea level : Less than 1000 meters
(viii) Dust storms are liable to occur during the period : March to July
(ix) Average No. of thunder storm days per annum : 40 days
(x) Average annual Rainfall : 10 to 100 cm
(xi) Average No. of tropical monsoon conditions : 4Months(June to Sept.)
(xii) Seismic level horizontal acceleration : 0.3g
(xiii) Degree of Pollution : Heavy
(xvi) Intensity of solar radiation : 1.0 kW/Sq.M
(xv) Maximum wind load : 195 kg/Sq.M

1.2.1 TROPICAL TREATMENT:

All the equipment shall be suitably designed and treated for normal life and satisfactory operation under the
hot and humid tropical climate conditions specified under clause 1.2 above shall be dust and vermin proof.
All the parts and surface which are subject to corrosion shall be made of such material and shall be provided
with such protective finish as would protect the Equipment installed from any injurious effect of excessive
humidity.
You shall supply all such minor accessories required for the completion of supply which have either not been
specifically mentioned in this specification or your tender offer.

1.3 145 kV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:

1.3.1. The 145 kV Current Transformers shall be single phase, oil immersed or SF6 gas filled, self cooled,
hermetically sealed Live Tank type suitable for the service conditions indicated above complete in all respect
and conforming to the latest standards at clause No. 1.1 and modern practice of design and manufacturer.

1.3.2. The cores shall be high grade non-ageing, laminated silicon steel of low hysteresis losses and high
permeability to ensure accuracy at both normal and over current.

1.3.3. The current transformers shall be hermetically sealed to eliminate breathing and prevent air and
moisture from entering the tank. The method adopted for hermetically sealing clearly be stated in detail in the
offer. These shall be provided with oil level indicator/sight glass with marking of maximum, normal and
minimum level for oil filled CTs or with SF6 pressure gauge for SF6 filled CTs and suitable pressure relieving
devices capable of releasing abnormal internal pressure where ever necessary. Sealing arrangement for oil/SF6
gas filling/drain valve/plug/hole shall be provided to avoid leakage/pilferage of oil/SF6 gas. The
arrangement provided shall be indicated in the bid.

1.3.4 The offered 145 kV CTs shall be live tank type only.

1.4. PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL PARTICLARS OF CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

 S. Particulars 145kV CT
No.
1 Type of CT / installation Single phase, oil immersed or SF6 gas filled,
hermetically sealed, live tank type, outdoor
type.
2 Type of mounting Pedestal(400x400)mm
3 Suitable for system frequency 50Hz
4 Nominal system voltage 132KV rms
5 Highest system voltage 145kVrms
6 Current ratio (i) Ratio: 1000/1A, 3C (0.2s class)
(ii) Ratio 250-500/1A,3C(0.2s Class)
(iii) Ratio: 250-500/5A,3C(0.2s Class)
(iv) Ratio: 500/1A, 3C (0.2s Class)
7 Method of earthing of system Effectively earthed
8 Rated continuous thermal current (Amps) CT shall be thermally rated for 200% of rated
maximum primary current for 15 minutes &
120% of rated continuous current. However,
the temperature rise test shall be carried out
at 120% of rated primary current.
9 Acceptable limit of temperature rise over As per ISS 2705
maximum ambient temperature of 50deg.
centigrade for continuous operation at rated
current.
10 Acceptable partial discharge level As per IEC: 61869
11 1.2/50 Micro seconds lightening impulse voltage 650KV (Peak)
12 one minute dry power frequency withstand 275KV rms
voltage for primary winding
13 One minute power frequency high voltage 3KV rms
withstand requirement for primary winding
(winding sections if having more than one
section) and secondary winding

14 Total creepage distance of porcelain housing 3625mm

15 Rated short time withstand current for one 40 kA rms
second duration
16 Rated dynamic withstand current 100 kA Peak

17 Maximum creepage factor for hollow porcelain 4

insulator.

18 Value of tan delta at Um/√3 0.003 (Max) without any temperature

correction (For new)
≤ 0.005 without any temperature
correction (with in guarantee period)
1.5. CORE WISE DETAILS OF 145 kV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

(A.) 145 kV CURRENT TRANSFORMER (0.2s Class)

(i) Ratio: 250-500/1A, 3C (0.2s class)

No. of Core Application Rated Class of Max. Min. Knee Max. Sec.
Cores No. burden Accuracy Instrument point voltage winding
Security at 75 Deg C resistance at
Factor at lowest 75 Deg. C
tap Ohm. at
lowest tap
3 1 Differential - PS -- 650V 2.5
Protection
2 Protection - PS -- 650V 2.5
3 Metering 10 VA 0.2S 5 -- --

(ii) Ratio: 500/1A, 3C (0.2s class)

No. of Core Application Rated Class of Max. Min. Knee Max. Sec.
Cores No. burden Accuracy Instrument point voltage winding
Security at 75 Deg C resistance at
Factor at lowest 75 Deg. C
tap Ohm. at
lowest tap
3 1 Differential -- PS -- 650V 2.5
Protection
2 Protection -- PS -- 650V 2.5
3 Metering 10 VA 0.2S 5 -- --

NOTE: - The accuracy of 0.2 should be maintained up to & including total burden of 50VA on both the windings.

1.6. TEMPERATURE RISE FOR ALL CLASS CURRENT TRANSFORMERS.

The limits of temperature rise of the windings, external surface of the core and other parts of the current
transformers when carrying a primary current equal to the rated continuous thermal current at the rated
frequency and with rated burden shall be governed by the provisions of latest issue of IS:2705 (Part-I). The
corresponding temperature rise for the terminal connector shall not exceed at rated continuous thermal
current of the CT beyond the limits prescribed in IS: 5561/1970 or latest issue.

1.7. CORES & WINDINGS FOR ALL CLASS CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:

1.7.1 The current transformers core to be used for metering and instrumentation shall be of the accuracy class
as specified, the saturation factor (instrument security factor) of this core shall be low enough so as not to
cause any damage to measuring instruments in the event of maximum short circuits current Mu-metal or such
other equivalent Ferro magnetic material shall be used for this purpose. Instrument security factor shall not
exceed to 5 on all transformation ratios.

1.7.2 The current transformer cores to be used for protective relaying shall be of specified class of accuracy.
The core shall be designed for minimum specified knee point voltages.
1.7.3. The rating of the secondary winding shall be as per clause No. 1.0 of this specification. The secondary
terminals shall be brought out in a weather proof secondaryterminal box fitted with a hinged/bolted door on
the side of current transformer for easy access and shall be provided with short circuiting arrangement.
Required transformation ratios can be achieved in any manner but in case of multiple ratio CTs it must be
selected from the secondary winding, but the current transformers will have to satisfy the requirement of
rated VA burden. Class of accuracy, short time thermal current etc. as specified in clause No.1.4 and 1.5 at all
transformation ratios. The minimum knee point voltage and maximum secondary winding resistance shall
correspond to the lowest ratio. The secondary terminal box shall be provided with necessary glands with
removable gland plate for control cables. The secondary terminal box shall conform to IP-55 test.
1.7.4 Primary winding shall be made out of high conducting copper the design density for short circuit
current as well conductivity for primary winding shall meet the requirement of IS:2705/1992 or its latest
issue. However, for primary winding current density corresponding to the rated short time current shall not
exceed 160Amps/Sq. mm. Suitable insulated copper wire of electrolytic grade shall be used for secondary
winding. The bidder should furnish details of primary winding e.g. number of primary turns, cross-section,
short time current density and normal continuous rated current density in the primary winding so as to meet
the requirement of relevant ISS. Windings shall have high mechanical strength for safety against short circuit
stresses.

1.7.5. The shape of external metal parts shall ensure that rain water runs off and there is no stagnation.

1.7.6. The CTs shall be of robust design, tested quality and reliable in operation. Only pure high grade paper
wound evenly under controlled conditions and impregnated with mineral oil under vacuum shall be used for
the main insulation.

1.8. GALVANISING AND PAINTING AND TANK DETAILS:

All ferrous parts of 145 kV CTs exposed to atmosphere including tank and secondary terminal box shall be
hot dipped galvanized as per relevant Indian Standard. Minimum thickness of sheet should be 3mm. Welded
joints have to be minimized to avoid the possibility of oil leakage. In any case welding in horizontal plane
shall be avoided.

1.9. FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES FOR ALL CLASS CTs:

The CTs shall be provided with the following fittings and accessories:
(i) Three Nos. bimetallic terminal connectors with each CTs suitable for horizontal and vertical
take off. The thickness of bi-metallic strip/sleeve shall be of min 2mm.

(ii) Oil level indicator/sight glass with marking of maximum, normal and minimum level for oil
filled CTs or with SF6 pressure gauge for SF6 filled CTs.

(iii) Pressure release device, if design recommended.

(iv) Expansion chamber or suitable type of device for absorbing variation in volume of oil/SF6 gas
due to change in temperature of oil/SF6 gas.

(v) Oil/SF6 filling /drain valve/plug/ hole with sealing arrangement. All other required
accessories/arrangement shall be provided for SF6 gas filled CTs.

(vi) Lifting lugs/holes.

(vii) Weather proof secondary terminal box fitted with hinged/bolted door and complete with
terminals and short circuit arrangement. The Secondary box hinged/bolted door shall have
sealing arrangement.

(viii) Two Nos. earthing terminals.

(ix) Name and rating plate, showing details of connection diagram.

 (x) Test Tap for tan delta measurement.

(xi) Caution plate for test tap for tan delta.

1.10. INSULATING OIL/SF6 GAS:

The quantity of insulating oil/SF6 gas for first filling in each current transformers and complete specification
of the oil/SF6 gas shall be stated in the bid. The oil shall be EHV Grade transformer oil and conform to the
requirements of latest issue of IS:335. The SF6 gas shall conform to the requirements of latest issue of IS:376.
The Instrument Transformers shall be supplied duly filled in with EHV insulating oil/SF6 gas and shall be
hermetically sealed.

1.11. BUSHINGS:

The bushings shall be made of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high mechanical and dielectric strength.
Glazing of porcelain shall be of uniform brown or dark brown colour with smooth surface, arranged to shed
away rain water or condensed water particles. The bushings shall have ample insulation, mechanical strength
and rigidity for the conditions under which they will be used.

The bushing shall be of standard make such as WSI/BHEL/MIL/BIRLA NGK/IEC/CJI only and shall
conform to the relevant latest IS:5621 & IS:2099. The make and catalogue No. creepage and creepage factor
and other bushing details be clearly stated in the GTPs. Pressure of Nitrogen or any other inert gas used
above the oil level to permit expansion or contraction of oil along with device to detect any leakage if any
shall be stated in the bid. Any other make quoted should be supported by relevant type test reports as per IS-
5621 and following tests as per IS-2099:-
(i) LIV test
(ii) HVPF (wet) test

Polymer bushing having type test(s) as per IEC-61462 are also acceptable.

The tests should be got conducted at laboratory accredited by NABL/ International Laboratory Accreditation
Cooperation Mutual Recognition Arrangement (ILAC-MRA) signatory agency (in case of foreign laboratory),
accredited for the tests conducted, such type test certificates should not be older than 7 years as on the date
of bid opening. For this purpose, date of conducting of type test will be considered.

1.12. TERMINAL CONNECTORS:

The 145 kV current transformers shall be supplied with bimetallic terminal connectors for both ends suitable
for ACSR single/Twin Zebra conductor as per requirement given below and confirming to IS-5561.

1. 145kV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:

---------------------------------------------
(i) Ratio 250-500/1A, 3C - ACSR Single Zebra.
(ii) Ratio: 500/1A, 3C - ACSR Single Zebra

Each terminal connector shall be suitable for single/Twin Zebra for both horizontal and vertical take off
arrangement. The terminal connectors should be suitable for withstanding the 200% of continuous maximum
primary current for 15minutes. The instrument transformer shall also be provided with two Nos. earthing
terminals of adequate size protected against corrosion and metallically clean. Bimetallic strips or sleeves of
suitable thickness (Minimum 2mm) to prevent bimetallic corrosion shall be provided as a part of the terminal
connector. The firm will furnish valid type test certificates for terminal Connectors. The tenderer will furnish
valid type test reports for short time current test and temperature rise test for quoted terminal connectors of
the type and make offered preferably along with tender or at the time of order execution got conducted at
laboratory accredited by NABL/ International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation Mutual Recognition
Arrangement (ILAC-MRA) signatory agency (in case of foreign laboratory), accredited for the tests
conducted. However, same will not be insisted if Terminal connectors of make MILIND /NOOTAN
/MEGHA /VINAYAK TRANSMISSION are supplied with CTs. The type test certificates should not be
older than 7 years as on the date of technical bid opening. For this purpose, date of conducting of type test
will be considered.

1.13. DRAWING AND MANUALS:

1.13.1 The following drawings/technical literature of the equipments covered by this specification shall be
furnished by the bidders along with their bids:-

1. Outline general arrangement and sectional drawings showing all dimensions and weight of each item and
foundation details.
2. Drawing showing inside details.
3. Diagram of connections showing details of primary and secondary windings.
4. Name /rating plate diagram.

1.13.2 INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL:

The successful bidder shall have to supply 10 sets of operating and maintenance instructions manuals, along
with the erection manual and requisite drawing of the equipment covered by this specification. One set of
drawing and a manual shall also be sent along with each consignment to respective consignees.

1.13.3 NAME /RATING PLATE:

All items of the equipment included in this specification shall be provided with rating plates as per relevant
standards. Rating plate and terminal marking shall be as per relevant IS. Purchase order/BN-90150023xx
reference and contact e-mail address / mobile no. shall also be given.

1.14. TESTS:

1.14.1 Each equipment covered under this specification shall comply with and shall be subjected to all
routine/acceptance tests prescribed in the relevant Indian Standard Specification/IEC as mentioned in Clause
1.1 as above.

1.14.2 (i) The certified copies of tests reports conducted at govt. approved lab / at laboratory accredited by
NABL/ International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation Mutual Recognition Arrangement (ILAC-MRA)
signatory agency (in case of foreign laboratory), accredited for the tests conducted of all type tests as per
relevant latest standard mentioned under Volume-II clause 1.1 in respect of similar rating and design of bided
equipment (voltage class wise) included in this specification along with terminal connector(if offered other
than approved make) shall be furnished to adjudge the technical suitability along with the bid. The bidder
shall furnish necessary calculations on the basis of STC test report furnished above to prove the CTs of
offered ratios are capable to withstand the specified short circuit level. Bids without type test reports and
supporting calculations for short circuit level are likely to be rejected. No charges for above type test reports
shall be paid. The type test reports shall not be older than 10 years from the date of technical bid opening
under this BN. For this purpose, date of conducting of type test will be considered.

The type tests are detailed as hereunder:-

(a) Short time current test.
(i) On CT of accuracy class 0.2s or better if offered CT is of 0.2s class
(b) Lightning impulse voltage withstand test.
(c) Temperature rise test.
(d) High voltage power frequency (wet) withstand test.
(e) Seismic withstand test (As per IEC 62271-2).
(f) Mechanical Test (with minimum cantilever load as per IS/IEC latest amendments)
(g) Internal Arc Fault test for 145 kV and above voltage rating (not applicable for CT with Polymer
Insulator)

NOTE:-If the porcelain weather casing/bushing has been subjected to this test separately, the requirement of
HVPF (Wet) test shall be deemed to have been complied.

(g) Type test as per IEC-61869 and its latest amendments:

(i) Chopped lightning impulse withstand test on primary winding.
(ii) Radio Interference Voltage test.
(iii) Multiple Chopped Impulse test on primary winding (600 Consecutive Impulses).

(ii) In the event of order, temperature rise test, Multiple Chopped Impulse test(100 Consecutive Impulses),
Thermal stability test, Temperature coefficient test and instrument security current test shall be carried
out once on one CT of each ratio and voltage class in the presence of the purchaser’s representative
without extra charges. All the above tests should be conducted on same CT and after these tests the CT
has to be subjected at all Routine tests including Partial Discharge. The ISC test shall be carried out on all
transformation ratios. However, one CT of each ratio along with terminal connector from each lot shall
be tested at 200% of the rated maximum primary current for 15minutes.

“DGA test shall be got carried out on a sample of oil taken (Before and after test) from the CT which has
been subjected to all the tests including temperature rise test. The sample shall be taken in the presence of the
Inspecting Officer and sealed by him. The test shall be got carried out at CPRI/ERDA”. This test is being
proposed to assess the effect of the heating of the insulation during the test.

(iii) In the event of order, the bidder may have to get the equipment type tested (except temperature rise
and instrument security current test) as per requirement of relevant ISS, on one sample of each
voltage class of first lot comprising minimum 25% of order quantity in the presence of the purchaser's
representative. The bidder shall quote charges for following Type test which shall not be considered for
bid evaluation:

(A) Type test as per IS-2705 Pt-I/1992 and its latest amendments
(i) Short time current test.
(ii) L I V withstand test.
(iii) High voltage power frequency (Wet) withstand test.
(B) Type test as per IEC-61869 and its latest amendments
(i) Chopped lightning impulse withstand test on primary winding.
(ii) Radio Interference Voltage test.
(iii) Multiple Chopped Impulse test on primary winding (600 Consecutive Impulses).

1.14.3 (i) Following routine tests as per relevant standard shall be carried out on each equipment covered by
this specification in the presence of purchaser's representative free of cost by successful bidder.

(A) Tests as per IS-2705 Pt-I/1992 and its latest amendments

 (i) Verification of terminal marking and polarity.
(ii) Power frequency dry withstand tests on primary windings.
(iii) Power frequency dry withstand tests on secondary windings.
(iv) Over voltage inter-turn test.
(v) Determination of error or other characteristics according to the requirement of the appropriate
design or accuracy. Accuracy test i.e determination of error (ratio & phase angle errors) shall be
conducted on 100% ordered quantity in NABL accredited/In-house NABL accredited labs or mobile
labs with NABL accreditation for ascertaining the class of accuracy, before conducting acceptance
tests.

(B) Tests as per IEC-61869 and its latest amendments

(i) Partial discharge tests.
(ii) Measurement of Capacitance & Dielectric dissipation factor at Um/√3. At factory/works tests the Tan
Delta shall not exceed 0.3% (at Um/√3, without any temperature correction), up to 0.1% deviation
between factory and site results among CT’s will be acceptable (i.e. the value of Tan Delta at site shall not
exceed 0.4% at Um/√3, without any temperature correction). The same shall not exceed 0.5% (without
any correction) at the end of guarantee period, if tan delta value of CTs exceed prescribed limit of 0.5%
without any temperature correction, within guarantee period, it will be considered as failure within
guarantee period. The bidder has to replace failed CTs within guarantee period without any cost
implication to RVPN.

Measurement of Capacitance & Dielectric dissipation factor also be carried out at 1.05*Um/√3. At
factory/works tests, the Tan Delta value shall not be more than 0.001 increases from what measured at
Um/√3 (without any temperature correction).
The above test(s) shall be conducted on 100% ordered quantity.
In case of any dispute raised by the supplier regarding tan delta value measured by RVPN at
site, the supplier may arrange the testisting from Gov’t approver Lab / Lab accrediated by
NABL witout any cost implication to RVPNL.

All test reports shall be submitted and got approved by the purchaser before dispatch of the equipment. In
addition to the routine tests, all PS class CTs as per sampling plan below shall be tested in presence of
Inspection Officer to prove guaranteed values of minimum knee point voltage, turn ratio test, secondary
winding resistance etc. The estimated magnetization curve for Ps core shall be furnished with bid.

(ii) SAMPLING: - The routine/acceptance test shall be conducted on 30% quantity of offered lot for
established suppliers & 100% inspection of offered lot for un-established suppliers.
1.14.4 SITE TESTS:

All winding & paper insulation should be only in dust free controlled atmosphere, under positive air pressure.
Dust & ingress of foreign particles are the main root cause of partial discharge & eventual failure of CTs.

The purchaser reserves the right to carry out any site tests as he may decide at his own cost and will claim
reimbursement from the supplier, in case the material as a resultant of such test/tests is found not
conforming to the prescribed specification/ ISS /Purchase order.

1.15. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

Guaranteed technical particulars as per schedule-GTP shall be furnished along with the bid. Bids not
accompanied by guaranteed technical particulars are liable to be rejected.

1.16. MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP:

All material used in the manufacture of aforesaid equipment shall be of best quality and capable of
satisfactory operation under climatic conditions mentioned in clause No. 1.2 above. The workmanship shall
be of the highest grade and the entire manufacture in accordance with the best modern engineering practice.

1.17. COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT:

Any fittings, accessories or apparatus which may not have been specifically mentioned in this specification
but which are usual or necessary for the equipment shall be deemed to have been included in this
specification and in the scope of supply of bidder. All equipments shall be completed in all respect.

1.18 PERFORMANCE PERIOD:

The performance of equipment i.e. 145 kV Current Transformers shall be guaranteed for a period of
60 months from the date of supply of last consignment.

1.19. LATENT DEFECTS ERRORS AND OMISSIONS:

Any material/equipments or parts thereof that develops defects, errors or commissions in the apparatus, not
disclosed prior to the final acceptance by the purchaser but disclosed during the guarantee period shall be
corrected promptly the apparatus or parts thereof shall be replaced by the supplier free of charge and all
expenses for the transportation, handling, installation of such replacement or any other incidental charges
shall be borne by the supplier.

1.20. SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENTS/PRICES AND DELIVERIES:

1.20.1 The bidders shall quote/offer the quantity w.r.t. bided quantity along with other confirmations and
delivery in the Bid Proposal Form& Schedule-DEL respectively.
1.20.2 Bidders must submit all the schedules duly completed in all respects with the bids.
1.21. DEVIATIONS:
Any deviations from the provisions of Volume I& II of this specification shall be clearly listed and brought
out separately in schedule-DEV-A & B "technical deviations from the specification" and "commercial
deviations from the specification" mentioning of deviations as where in bid will not be consider as deviation.
Printed terms & conditions if any, attached will not be considered. Otherwise, it will be presumed that
equipments offered are strictly conforming to this specification.

1.22. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

The bidders are required to furnish the quality assurance plant along with their bid, which is to be followed by
the supplier during manufacturing of the equipment. The list of raw material used along with their sub
suppliers and type test reports of raw material & brought out items be furnished along with the offer.
 VOLUME-II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 145 kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (0.2

CLASS)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.0The following items are proposed to be purchased against this BN- 901500xxxx

1.1 SCOPE :-
This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly and testing at manufacturer's works before
despatch, supply and delivery of single phase, 50 Hz. Oil immersed, self-cooled outdoor type 145 kV
Capacitor Voltage Transformers for installation at various Grid Sub Stations of Rajasthan. The equipment
shall be suitable for installation in system with neutral effectively grounded. The equipment should be
complete in all respect and to the entire satisfaction of the purchaser. It will however be the responsibility
of the supplier to supply all apparatus, appliances and material whether specifically mentioned or not but
which may be found necessary to complete the equipment as well as for the perfect operation of the
equipment.

1.2 STANDARDS:

The design, manufacture and testing of various equipment’s covered by this specification shall
comply with the latest issue of the following standards except the value(s) wherever specified
shall be considered relevant.

a) IEC-61869Part-1- General requirement of Instrument Transformers

b) IEC-61869- Part-5 Additional requirements for Capacitor Voltage Transformers
c) IS 16227 1 & 5
d) IEC-60358- Part- 1, 2 & 3
e) IS/IEC 62155 Specification for Hollow porcelain Bushing
f) IS/IEC 60137
g) IS:5547 Application guide for capacitor voltage transformers.
h) IS:5561 Specification for electric power connectors.
i) IS:335 Specification for new insulating oil.
j) IS:3070 Specification for lightning arrestors for A. C. System.
k) IS:4146 Application guide for voltage transformers.
l) IS:3347 Dimension of Porcelain transformer bushings.
m) IS:2071 Method of high voltage testing
n) IS:2165 Insulation Co-ordination for equipment for 100KV & above.
o) IS:2633 specification for ferrous metal galvanization.
p) IEC 867

1.3 Equipment’s and material conforming to alternative internationally recognized standard(s) which ensure(s)
quality equal or better than the Indian standard(s) mentioned above should also be acceptable. In case the
tenderer wishes to offer equipment conforming to other standard they shall furnish English Translation of
the relevant standard.

1.4 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:

The climatic conditions under which the equipment will be required to operate satisfactorily are as
under:-

The equipment offered by you shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian standard specifications
except where stated otherwise in the order. Special care shall be taken in the design and manufacture
equipment to take into account the tropical conditions such as high temperature, excessive humidity, dust
and salt-laden atmosphere as detailed below:-
(i) Maximum Ambient Air Temperature : 50 Deg. C.
(ii) Maximum daily average Ambient Temperature : 45 Deg. C.
(iii) Maximum yearly weighted Ambient Temperature : 35 Deg. C.
(iv) Minimum Ambient Air Temperature : (-) 5 Deg. C.
(v) Maximum relative humidity : 90%
(vi) Minimum relative humidity : 10%
 (vii) Height above main sea level : Less than 1000 meters
(viii) Dust storms are liable to occur during the period : March to July
(ix) Average No. of thunder storm days per annum : 40 days
(x) Average annual Rainfall : 10 to 100 cm
(xi) Average No. of tropical monsoon conditions : 4Months(June to Sept.)
(xii) Seismic level horizontal acceleration : 0.3g
(xiii) Degree of Pollution : Heavy
(xvi) Intensity of solar radiation : 1.0 kW/Sq.M
(xv) Maximum wind load : 195 kg/Sq.M

1.5 GENERAL DESCRIPTION FOR 145 KV CAPACITOR VOLTAGETRANSFORMERS.

1.5.1 The capacitor voltage transformer shall be suitable for line to ground connection. It shall beformed
by two independent main parts, a capacitor potential divider column and an electromagnetic unit,
assembled together to constitute a complete CVT unit.

1.5.2 The capacitor potential divider shall consists of series connected capacitors fully immersed in
insulating oil having high dielectric constant and high chemical stability contained in a hermetically
sealedporcelain housing. An intermediate tapping shall be provided for supply to theelectromagnetic unit. The
capacitor shall serve as capacitor potential divider as well as coupling capacitor.

1.5.3 The electromagnetic unit shall be contained in a separate oil filled welded steel tank, which shall also form
the mounting of the capacitor column. The Earthing link / connection shall exist between upper
portion and bottom portion of the tank which is separated by an ‘O’ ring or gasket. The electromagnetic
unit shall comprise of intermediate potential transformer (whose primary is fed from the intermediate
tapping from the capacitor potential divider), a compensating reactor, a damping device, a surge voltage
arrester, etc. The secondary terminals of the electromagnetic unit shall be brought out in a weather
proof box outside the steel tank housing of the electromagnetic unit. Screwed connections shall not be
accepted. Internal connections should have lock nut or locking feature to prevent loosening of studs.
The terminal box shall be hot dip galvanised. The terminal box shall have 2 nos. Cable glands of 25mm
size for receiving Control cables and hinged door provided with locking arrangement. The door shall
have suitable arrangement to check the ingress of moisture into the terminal box. HRC fuses 16Amp
rating shall be provided in the secondary terminal box. The rating, type and make of fuses provided shall
be indicated in the bid as well as in the drawings. Necessary oil level indicator, oil filling and sampling
valves /suitable arrangement shall be provided on the tank. Connection diagram, rating plate and two
grounding pads of size 75  50 mm, protected against corrosion and metallically clean, shall also be
provided on the tank.

1.5.4 (a) PORCELAIN HOUSING:

The details of location and type of joint, if provided, on the porcelain, shall be furnished by the
supplier along with the offer. The housing shall be made of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high
mechanical and dielectric strength. Glazing of porcelain shall be of uniform brown or dark brown
colour with a smooth surface arranged to shed away rain water or condensed water particles (fog). The
profile of porcelain shall be aerodynamic type as per IEC-815.

(b) Details of attachment of metallic flanges to the porcelain shall be brought out in the offer.
(c) The metal tanks shall have bare minimum number of welded joints so as to minimise possible
locations of oil leakage. The metal tank shall be made out of steel / stainless steel / aluminium alloy,
depending on the requirement. Welding in Horizontal plane is to be avoided as welding at this location
may give way due to vibrations during transport resulting in oil leakage. Supplier has to obtain specific
approval from purchaser for any horizontal welding used in the bottom tank.

1.5.5 The grounding connection of the potential divider shall preferably be let out of the steel case through a
suitable bushing. When the CVT is not to be used for carrier coupling, the grounding connection shall
be earthed through a suitable grounding switch or link. The details of grounding switch must be clearly
shown in the drawing.

1.5.6 All ferrous parts of CVT including tank and secondary terminal box shall be hot dip galvanised as per
IS: 2633 (latest amendments). Bolts, nuts, screws, pins, washers etc, used in the equipment shall also be
 galvanised either hot dip or electrically. All current carrying parts shall be of non ferrous metals or
alloy and shall be designed to limit sharp points, edges, etc.

1.6 DESIGN REQUIREMENT FOR 145 KV CVTs:

1.6.1 The CVT shall confirm to the standards given in clause No.1.2 and technical particulars at "Appendix
– A" and shall be suitable to use as measuring unit as well as a coupling capacitor for the power line
carrier communication network i.e. voice communication, carrier, protective relaying, telemetering and
teleprinting service over one or more carrier channels in 40 KHz to 500 KHz frequency range. The
CVT shall be provided with an insulated low voltage terminal for connection to H.F. coupling unit.
The CVTs shall have an inductive reactance (HF Choke) connected preferably between intermediate
voltage terminal and primary of EMU to minimize attenuation to the carrier frequencies. The details of
H.F choke shall be clearly mentioned in the drawing for CVT.
1.6.2 Each capacitor voltage transformer shall be suitable for connection directly to the bus or line without
the use of auxiliaries such as isolating switch / fuse. The capacitor of the unit shall be so designed that
application of lightning impulse voltage of the magnitude as per relevant standard shall not damage the
internal working of elements or cause a change in their electrostatic capacitance.
1.6.3 The intermediate potential transformer shall be of oil immersed self cooled design and shall be suitable
for metering, relaying and synchronizing services. The core of this transformer shall be made of non
ageing, cold rolled, laminated, electrical grade silicon steel having low hysteresis loss and high
permeability so as to ensure high accuracy at normal as well as at over voltage. The primary winding
shall be connected through a reactor suitable for compensating any increase in the intermediate
tapping point voltage at all loadings and upon the rated burden.
1.6.4 (a)The CVT shall be provided with a suitable device so that ferro-resonance and other oscillations due to
saturation of iron core of transformer or due to any inductance connected in parallel with it and
initiated by either over voltages on the network side or by opening of the short circuited primary or
secondaries, are practically zero for no burden to rated burden. Oscillations of the secondary voltages
which may rise as a result of breakdown of primary voltage due to short circuits shall not affect the
proper working of protective relays. The design of the compensating reactor and the intermediate
potential transformer as well as of the damping device, inserted in the winding of the intermediate
transformer shall be such that ferro-resonance should not occur.
(b)The Capacitor voltage divider shall be capable of being used over complete carrier frequency
bandwidth. The value of capacitance shall be suitably chosen for reliable wide band carrier operation.

1.6.5 WINDING:
[Link] The primary of the potential device shall be connected to a suitable tap of the capacitor potential
divider. The secondary of the intermediate potential transformer shall be provided with three separate
windings, each rated for 110/√3 volts.
[Link] The rated output burden of the secondary windings and the accuracy class at 25% to 100% burden for
protection cores and metering core shall be as per the table below.

No. Burden / Accuracy Core – 1 Core – 2 Core – 3 Simultaneous

Class Protection Protection Metering Burden
1. 145 kV CVTs
a) Burden (VA) 25 25 25 50
b) Accuracy Class 3P 3P 0.2 --

1.6.6. TEMPERATURE RISE:

The CVT shall be designed to limit the temp. of winding and other parts as specified in the standards,
when corrected for the difference between temperature prevailing at site and temperature specified by
the standards. The temperature rise at 1.2 times rated primary voltage and at rated frequency and rated
burden shall not exceed the limits specified above and the temperature rise at 1.5 times rated primary
voltage when applied for 30 seconds shall not exceed the limits as mentioned in the relevant standards.

1.7 INSULATION:
The CVT shall withstand satisfactorily electric test voltages corresponding to the values mentioned in
the relevant Indian Standards.
1.8 INSULATING OIL:
Insulating oil to be used for first filling in each equipment shall be of EHV grade and shall confirm to
IS-335/IEC-60296. Non-PCB based synthetic insulating oil conforming to IEC 60867 shall be used in
the capacitor units of CVT. The CVT shall be supplied duly filled with insulating oil and shall be
hermetically sealed.

1.9 TERMINAL CONNECTORS:

All the CVTs required shall be provided with one number each of solder less, clamp type aluminium
alloy terminal connector of suitable size (ACSR PANTHER for 145 kV CVTs). Each terminal
connector shall be suitable for both horizontal and vertical connections. The terminal connector
should have spring washer and double nut provision in each bolt. The nuts and bolts shall be hot dip
galvanised. The spring washers shall be electro galvanised. The CVTs shall also be provided with two
Nos. earthing pads of size 7550 mm protected against corrosion and metallically clean.

1.10 BUSHING / INSULATORS:

The bushing / insulators shall be of standard make such as WSI / BHEL / MIL / Birla NGK /
IEC/CJI. The make and catalogue No., total creepage distance, protected creepage distance and other
details be clearly stated in the GTP.

1.11 TYPE OF MOUNTING:

The CVTs shall be suitable for mounting on both steel structures and concrete pedestals.

1.12 DRAWINGS / MANUALS:

1.12.1 DRAWINGS:
The following dimensional drawings, in addition to the other special characteristic drawings /
literature, shall be submitted along with the bid. In absence of these drawings bid shall be treated as
incomplete and will not be considered.
i)Out line dimensional drawings showing general arrangement and loading data of the equipment.
ii)Drawings showing inside details (vertical sectional view of equipment).
iii)Drawings showing details of terminal connectors with number of bolts and washers.
iv)Drawings showing details of mounting arrangement.
v)Drawings of connection diagrams showing the details of secondary terminals.
vi) Technical and descriptive literature explaining constructional features and the details of the
equipments.
vii)Name / rating plate.
viii)Drawings depicting magnetization curve for each of the secondaries.
ix) Accuracy curves for CVTs will be supplied with each CVT of frequency ranges (GTP point No.33).
x) Drawing for hollow porcelain insulators indicating all details.

1.12.2 INSTRUCTION MANUAL:

At least six copies of operation, maintenance and erection manuals shall be supplied to this office one
month prior to the shipment of the equipment. One copy of operation, maintenance and erection
manuals shall be supplied along with each CVT. The manuals shall be bound volumes and shall
contain all the drawings and information required for erection, operation and maintenance of the
equipment. Besides other things the manuals should also include the following particulars:
i)Marked erection prints identifying the components of the equipment with assembly drawings.
ii)Details dimensions, assembly & description of the auxiliaries.
iii) List of spare parts.

1.13 INSPECTION& TESTING:

1.13.1 TYPE TEST
(i) 145 kV CVTs shall comply with the requirement of the following type tests as per IEC-61869 &
IS 16227/ other relevant standards:

1. Ferro – resonance test.

2. Transient response test.
3. Temperature rise test
4. Impulse voltage test
5. Chopped lightning impulse test.
 6. High frequency capacitance and equivalent series resistance measurements in the range of the
temperature category.
7. Stray capacitance and stray conductance measurements of the low voltage terminal.
8. A. C. voltage test, wet.
9. Partial discharge test
10. Determination of temperature coefficient.
11. Determination of errors or other characteristics according to the requirements of the
appropriate designation or accuracy class.
12. Short circuit withstand capability test.
13. Cantilever test.

(ii) The certified copies of tests reports conducted at govt. approved lab / at laboratory accredited by
NABL/ International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation Mutual Recognition Arrangement
(ILACMRA) signatory agency (in case of foreign laboratory), accredited for the tests conducted
of all type tests as per relevant latest standard mentioned under Volume-II clause 1.2 in respect of
similar rating and design of bided equipment (voltage class wise) included in this specification. No
charges for above type test reports shall be paid. The type test reports shall not be older than 10
years from the date of technical bid opening under this BN. For this purpose, date of conducting
of type test will be considered.

1.13.2 ROUTINE TEST

The CVTs shall be subjected before despatch to stipulated routine test at manufacturers work’s during
the process of manufacture visiting inspector or any other representative of purchaser may examine
this record.

1.13.3 INSPECTION
(i)No equipment shall be despatched from its point of manufacturer unless the material has been
satisfactorily inspected and cleared.

(ii)The inspection of the equipment shall be got carried out by the purchaser in accordance to the
relevant standards. The following routine tests shall be carried out on all the CVTs in the presence of
the Inspecting Officer nominated by RVPN.
1. Verification of terminal marking and polarity.
2. Determination of errors or other characteristics according to the requirements of the
appropriate designation or accuracy class.
3. Power frequency dry withstand test on primary winding.
4. Power frequency dry withstand test on secondary windings.
5. Capacitance measurements before and after high voltage test.
6. Capacitor loss measurement before and after high voltage test.
7. A. C. voltage test between low voltage terminal and earth terminal.
8. Partial discharge test.
9. Sealing test / visual check for leakage.
10. Test on the electromagnetic unit: Induced A. C. voltage test on primary and secondary
windings.
11. Checking of the rating plate.

(iii) Inspection and acceptance of any quantity of equipment shall in no way relieve the supplier
from his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification and this shall not
prevent subsequent rejection if such equipment is later on found defective.

(iv) SAMPLING: - The routine/acceptance test shall be conducted on 100% offered lot.

1.14 NAME / RATING PLATE:

All items of the equipment included in this specification shall be provided with rating plates as per
relevant standards. Rating plate and terminal marking shall be as per relevant IS. Purchase
order/BNreference and contact e-mail address / mobile no. shall also be given.
1.15 SITE TESTS:
The purchaser reserves the right to carry out any site tests as he may decide at his own cost. In case
equipment is not found as per purchase order all expenses incurred during site testing will be to the
supplier's account and material will be replaced by the supplier at site, free of cost including the
transportation, handling, installation and any incidental charges shall be borne by the supplier.

1.16 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The bidder shall furnish all the guaranteed technical particulars as called for in schedule - I. Any other
particulars considered necessary by the bidder may also be given in addition to those listed in Schedule
- I. The bids lacking in supply of requisite information as called for may be rejected as incomplete.

1.17 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP:

All materials used in the manufacture of aforesaid equipment shall be of best quality and capable of
satisfactory operation under climatic conditions mentioned in clause 1.4 of the specification. The
workmanship shall be of the highest grade and the entire manufacture shall be in accordance with the
best modern engineering practice.

1.18 COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT:

All fittings accessories or apparatus which may have not been specifically mentioned in this
specification but which are usual or necessary for the completeness of the equipment shall be deemed
to have been included in this specification.

1.19 LATENT DEFECTS, ERRORS AND OMISSIONS:

Any material / equipment or parts thereof that developed defects, errors or omissions in the
apparatus, not disclosed prior to the final acceptance by the purchaser but disclosed during the
guarantee period, shall be corrected promptly, or the apparatus or part thereof shall be replaced by the
supplier free of charge and all expenses for the transportation, handling, installation of such
replacement or any other incidental charges if any shall be borne by the supplier.

1.20 DEVIATIONS:
Any deviation from the provisions of this bid documentVolume-I, II shall be clearly listed and brought
out separately in Schedule -DEV.

1.21 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

The bidders are required to furnish the quality assurance plan along with their bid, which is to be
followed by the supplier during manufacturing of the equipment. The list of raw material used along
with their sub suppliers and type test reports of raw material & brought out items be furnished along
with the offer.
 APPENDIX – I
TECHNICAL AND OTHER PARTICULARS OF 145 kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERS
S. No. PARTICULARS 145 kV CVTs
1 NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE 132 kV

2 HIGHEST SYSTEM VOLTAGE. 145 kV

3 RATED SYSTEM FREQUENCY/PHASE 50 Hz / 3 PHASE

4 TYPE OF EARTHING EFFECTIVELY EARTHED

5 TYPE OF MOUNTING PEDESTAL TYPE (400X400 MM)

6 NO. OF PHASES FOR CVTs SINGLE PHASE

7 NO. OF SECONDARY WINDING OF THREE

POTENTIAL DEVICE.

8 RATED SECONDARY VOLTAGE :

i) WINDING - I 110 / √3V
ii) WINDING -II 110 / √3V
iii) WINDING -III 110 / √3V
9 RATED OUTPUT OF EACH
SECONDARY WINDING.
i) WINDING - I 25 VA
ii) WINDING -II 25 VA
iii) WINDING -III 25 VA

10 CLASS OF ACCURACY & PURPOSE

OF EACH SECONDARY WINDING:
i) WINDING - I 3P FOR PROTECTION
ii) WINDING - II 3P FOR PROTECTION
iii) WINDING - III 0.2 FOR METERING

11 TRANSFORMATION RATIO:
i) WINDING - I 132 kV 110 V
------ -----
√3 √3
ii) WINDING -II 132 kV 110 V
------ -----
√3 √3
iii) WINDING -III 132 kV 110 V
------ -----
√3 √3
12 MAX. TEMPERATURE RISE. WITHIN LIMITS AS PER IS: 3156
(LIMITS OF TEMPERATURE RISE (LATEST AMENDMENT
OF WINDING) ISSUED THEREOF)
13 MAX. RATIO (VOLTAGE) ERRORS. WITHIN LIMITS AS PER IS: 3156
(LATEST AMENDMENT
ISSUED THEREOF)

14 MAX. PHASE DISPLACEMENT --- do ---

ERRORS.
15 VOLTAGE FACTOR 1.2 CONTINUOUS &
1.5 FOR 30 SECONDS.

16 RATED INSULATION LEVEL:

a) 1.2/50 u.s. IMPULSE 650 kV (PEAK)
WITHSTAND VOLTAGE.

b) ONE MINUTE POWER 275 kV (RMS)

FREQUENCY WITHSTAND VOLTAGE.

17 RATED CAPACITANCE. 4400 pf

(WITH TOLERANCE +10% AND -5%)

18 VALUE OF STRAY CAPACITANCE

AND STRAY CONDUCTANCE IN THE
CARRIER FREQUENCY RANGE OF
40 TO 500 KHZ FOR COMPLETE
CVT BETWEEN LOW VOLTAGE
TERMINAL AND EARTH TERMINAL
(FOR CVT WITH EMU)
a) STRAY CAPACITANCE. SHALL NOT EXCEED
520 pf.

b) STRAY CONDUCTANCE. SHALL NOT EXCEED

50 µs

19 a) HIGH FREQUENCY WITHIN 80% TO 150%

CAPACITANCE FOR ENTIRE OF RATED CAPACITANCE
CARRIER FREQUENCY RANGE.

b) EQUIVALENT SERIES LESS THAN 40 Ohms

RESISTANCE OVER THE ENTIRE
CARRIER FREQUENCY RANGE.

20 TEMPERATURE CATEGORY ABOVE - 10 DEG. C TO

+ 50 DEG. C.
21 ONE MINUTE POWER FREQUENCY
TEST.
a) WITHSTAND VOLTAGE BETWEEN 10 kV IF EXPOSED TO
LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL & EARTH ATMOSPHERE AND 4 kV
TERMINAL (IN RMS) IF NOT EXPOSED.

b) WITHSTAND VOLTAGE FOR 3 kV (RMS)

SECONDARY WINDING

22 TANGENT OF LOSS ANGLE AT NOT MORE THAN 0.002

RATED FREQUENCY AND RATED
VOLTAGE.

23 MIN. CREEPAGE DISTANCE OF 3625

PORCELAIN HOUSING (MM)

24 VISUAL CORONA EXTINCTION 106

 VOLTAGE (KV rms)

25 REFERENCE RANGE OF FREQUENCY

FOR WHICH REQUIRED
ACCURACIES ARE VALID.
a) FOR PROTECTION 97% TO 103% OF RATED
APPLICATION FREQUENCY.

b) FOR METERING APPLICATION 99% TO 101% OF RATED

FREQUENCY.

26 SIMULTANEOUS BURDEN 50 VA
 APPENDIX - II

REQUIREMENT SCHEDULE

The requirement of 145 KV CVTs are as under.

S.
No. Particulars Quantity

1 145 kV CVTs: Nos.

i) Winding –I: RATIO - 132 KV / 110 V

√3 √3
Burden 25 VA
Accuracy class 3P
ii) Winding –II: RATIO - 132 KV / 110 V
√3 √3
Burden 25 VA
Accuracy class 3P
iii) Winding –III: RATIO - 132 KV / 110 V
√3 √3
Burden 25 VA
Accuracy class 0.2
Simultaneous Burden 50 VA
Technical Spec. for 120 kV LA

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 120 KV (HEAVY DUTY) STATION CLASS

LIGHTENING ARRESTERS (LIGHTNING ARRESTERS)

1.1. SCOPE:-

This specification covers design, manufacture, assembly testing at manufacturer's works

and & delivery at site of 120 kV(HEAVY DUTY) station class metal oxide Lightening
Arresters to be installed at Grid Sub Station in Rajasthan. The Lightening Arresters shall be
complete in all respects conforming to modern design and practice for protection of
transformers and substation equipments of 3 phase, 50Hz solidly grounded neutral AC
system. The Lightening arresters are required for 132 kV system protection. The Lightening
arresters for 132 kV system are to be provided with insulating base and Lightening counter
with current meter.

The arrester housing shall be porcelain/polymer as per IEC standard.

1.2. STANDARDS:-

The Lightening arresters shall conform to the latest editions and amendments available at
the time of supply, of the standards listed hereunder.

Sl. No. Standard Ref. No. Title

1. IEC 99-4 Specification Part-4 for Lightening Arrestors without
gap for AC system.
2. IS:3070 Specification for Lightning Arrestors for alternating
current (Part-3) system Part-3.
3. IS:2629 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing of iron
and steel.
4. IS:2633 Method for testing uniformity of coating on zinc coated
articles.
5. IS:5621 Specification for large hollow porcelain for use in
electrical installation.
6. IS:2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low
voltage switchgear and control.
7. -- Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.

Note: -

i) For the purpose of this specification all technical terms used hereinafter shall
have the meaning as per IEC specification.
ii) For the parameters of the Arrestor which are not specified in IEC specification for
Lightening Arrestors, the provisions of BIS/3070 (Part-3) shall be applicable.

Lightening Arrestors meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards, which
ensure equal or better quality than the standards mentioned above shall also be acceptable.
Where the equipment offered, conforms to other standards, salient points of difference
between the standards adopted and the specified standards shall be clearly brought out.

1.3. PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM:-

The arresters shall be used on 3 phase 50 cycles effectively grounded neutrall AC system.
The maximum system voltage shall be as under.

For 132 kV system :-145 kV (rms)

1
Technical Spec. for 120 kV LA

The system frequency may vary by +3% from normal of 50 Hz.

1.4. IMPULSE WITHSTAND VOLTAGE OF EQUIPMENT AND TRANSMISSION LINES:

The basic insulation level of transformers circuit breakers and other equipments like
instrument transformers and transmission lines are as under:

For 132 kV system:- 650 kVp

1.5. TYPE AND RATING OF LIGHTENING ARRESTERS:

The Lightening arresters should be of single pole having multi units of outdoor self-
supporting type, heavy duty station class for 132 kV system. The Lightening arrester shall
have nominal discharge current of 10KA and voltage rating as under:

For 132 kV system :-120 kV (rms)

1.6. CHARACTERISTICS:

The Lightening arresters shall generally conform to IEC-99-4 (latest addition). The Lightening
arrester shall be suitable for our system (equipment/lines) as mentioned at clause No.1.3
and 1.4 and shall be capable of repeated successive operations for discharging the
transmission lines while conducting for limiting switching Lightening and shall be capable of
satisfactory operation within stipulated limits against Lightening and switching Lightenings.

The guaranteed duration for which the arresters can be temporarily subjected to atleast
10% power frequency over voltage without affecting their operating properties shall be
clearly stated in the bid.

The design features, type test certificates and other documentary evidence in support of
above features of the arresters shall be clearly elaborated /appended with the bid. The
power frequency over voltage and its duration to which the arrester offered can be
subjected without effecting any of its operating properties shall be explicitly guaranteed by
the bidder.

The equipment offered under this specification for gapless metal oxide type station class
LAs shall be suitable for the parameters as mentioned below:

S. No. PARAMETERS 132 kV SYSTEM

1. Rated voltage. KV(rms) 120
2. Nominal system voltageKV(rms) 132
3. [Link] [Link](rms) 145
4. [Link] operating voltage(MCOV) not less than 102
KV(rms)
5. Nominal discharge current. KA 10
6. Long duration discharge class 3
7. Type of construction for 10 KA rated arrester. Single phase
8. Minm. energy discharge capability(KJ/KV) 4
9. Safe fault current (KA) 40
10. Lightning impulse withstand voltage with 1.2/50 micro sec. 650
wave (KVp)
11. One minute power frequency withstand voltage of housing. 275
(dry/weight) - KV (rms).

2
Technical Spec. for 120 kV LA

S. No. PARAMETERS 132 kV SYSTEM

12. High current short duration impulse withstand level with 100
4/10 microsecond wave KA(peak)
13. Minimum pressure relief current (KA rms) 40
14. A) Terminal Connector suitable for ACSR conductor size Twin/Single ACSR
Panther/Zebra
(as per requirement)
B) Take off (for both) Vertical & Horizontal
15. Voltage (Corona extinction) (KV rms). Rated Voltage
16. Maximum radio interference voltage when energized at 2500
MCOV (Microvolts)
17. Whether insulating base and discharge counter with mili- Yes
ammeter are required.
18. Minimum creepage distance of Arrestor housing(mm) 3625

1.7. ACCESSORIES AND FITTINGS:-

1.8. PORCELAIN HOUSING:

a) All porcelain housings shall be free from amination cavities or other flaws
affecting the maximum level of mechanical and electrical strengths.

b) The porcelain shall be well vitrified and nonporous.

c) The creepage distance of the Arrestor housing shall be as per characteristics

clause 1.6 above.

d) The porcelain petticoat shall be preferably of self-cleaning type (Aerofoil

design).The details of the porcelain housing such as height,angle of inclination,
shape of petticoats, gap between the patticoats, diameter (ID and OD) etc.,
shall be indicated in the form of a detailed drawing.

e) The Arrestor housing shall conform to the requirements of IEC specification.

1.8.1. POLYMERIC HOUSING:

a) The silicon polymeric housing shall protect from the effect of weather,
withstands an environmental conditions without failure (pollution, UV, rain, heat
etc.) and avoids flash over for wet and dry AC conditions as well as the
residual voltage during Lightening discharge.

b) The polymeric housing also thermally cycles with the ZnO discs to maintain a
moisture seal without loss of performance.

c) The Arrester housing shall confirm to the requirement of IEC specification.

1.8.2. Insulating base & discharge counters shall be provided for the 132 kV arrestors
[Link] discharge counter shall be provided withmilli-ammeter for measuring the leakage
current and shall not require any DC or AC Aux. supply. It shall be suitable for outdoor use.
The installation of discharge counter shallnot adversely affect the Arrestor performance.

1.8.3. The discharge counter shall registeroperation whenever Lightening or any other type
of Lightning strikes the Lightening Arrestor.

3
Technical Spec. for 120 kV LA

1.8.4. All necessary accessories and earthing connection leads between the bottom of the
Arrestor and the discharge counter shall be in the bidder’s scope of supply. The connecting
lead between discharge counter and Lightening Arrestor shall be of copper strip of size 25 x
4 mm and minimum of 1.5 meter length. The discharge counter shall be so designed that the
readings of discharges recorded by the counter and the readings of milli- ammeter shall be
clearly visible through an inspection window to a person standing on ground. The minimum
height of purchaser's support shall be 2.5 M.

1.8.5. Terminal connector conforming to IS:5561 shall be supplied alongwith the arrester.

1.8.6. The grading ring on each complete arrestor proper stress distribution shall be
provided if required for attaining all the relevant technical parameters.

1.8.7. Each Lightening counter shall have terminals of robust construction for connection to
earthing lead and these shall be suitably arranged so as to enable the incoming and
outgoing connections to be made with minimum bands.

1.8.8. The grounding terminals shall be suitable for accommodating purchaser's grounding
connection to steel earth mat. Proper functioning of the Lightening counter with Lightening
Arrestor shall be ensured.

1.9. MOUNTING:-

The arrester shall be suitable for mounting on steel structures. The necessary flanges, bolts
etc. for mounting the base are within the scope of supply.

1.10. TERMINAL CONNECTORS:-

The Lightening arresters shall be provided with appropriate number of solder less clamp type
connectors suitable for Twin/Single ACSR Panther/Zebra, as per requirement, for 120kV
(heavy duty) station class Lightening Arrester. Each terminal clamp shall be suitable for
both vertical and horizontal connection of the transmission line conductor. Each terminal
connector shall further be provided with appropriate number of grounding terminals and the
clamps for receiving ground connections.

1.11. PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE:-

The Lightening arrester shall be fitted with efficient pressure relief device so as to check
explosive shattering of the housing following prolonged passage of systems short circuit
current. The pressure relief device shall be suitable for high current pressure relief test on
minimum prospective symmetrical fault current as 40KA (rms) and low current pressure relief
test as per IEC- 99-4(latest amended). The bidder shall enclose detailed information and
literature on pressure relief device. The bidders shall enclose the test certificates in respect
of pressure relief test alongwith certified drawing so as to establish that the pressure relief
device so offered with the equipment is the same as was tested at that independent Testing
Laboratory. The bidder may also furnish the comparative details with respect to
design/construction of the other prospective symmetrical fault current for metal oxide LAs.
The offers without above test and details are liable to be ignored .

Lightning arresters without pressure relief device shall not be accepted for porcelain arrester
only.

4
Technical Spec. for 120 kV LA

1.12. DRAWINGS:

To show Operation and operating features of the arrester, the following drawings shall be
furnished.
a) Drawing showing the outline of the complete Lightening arresters.
b) Drawing showing cut away view of Lightening
c) Drawing showing details of pressure relief device.
d) Drawing showing clearance from grounded objects andbetween adjacent poles
of Lightening arrester required at various heights of Lightening arrester.
e) Drawing showing mounting details.
f) Drawing showing details of terminal connectors.
g) Drawing showing details of insulating base & Lightening monitor for 132 kV
Lightening arrester.

Descriptive literature explaining action of the Lightening arrester and principal operation of
the Lightening counter shall also be furnished.

1.13. TESTS:-

1.13.1. TYPE TESTS:-

The test report for the following tests as per relevant latest IEC (IEC 60099-4 Edition-3
2014-06) shall be accepted. The type test certificates should not be older than 10 (Ten)
years as on the date of opening of technical bid.

Tests Requirement as per IEC 60099-4 Edition-3

2014-06 clause no. for Station Class 10 kA, Us
S. No. List of Type test reports.
(kV), rms value ≤ 245 Porcelain housed Metal-
oxide surge arrester without gaps for AC system
1. Insulation Withstand tests.
a) Lightning impulse 8.2.6 (test shall be performed on individual unit
housing)
b) Power-frequency 8.2.8 (test shall be performed on individual unit
housing)
2. Residual Voltage tests
a) Steep Current 8.3.2 (test shall be made on complete arrestor or
arrestor section)
b) Lightning Impulse 8.3.3 (test shall be made on complete arrestor or
arrestor section)
c) Switching Impulse 8.3.4 (test shall be made on complete arrestor or
arrestor section)
3 Test to verify long term 8.4 (test shall be performed on MO resistors)
stability under continuous
operating voltage
4 Repetitive charge transfer 8.5 (test shall be performed on MO resistors)
withstand
5 Heat dissipation behaviour 8.6 (test shall be performed on MO resistors)
verification of test sample
6 Operating Duty tests 8.7 (test shall be performed on MO resistors)
7 Power frequency voltage 8.8 (test shall be performed on MO resistors)
versus time
8 Arrestor disconnector /fault 8.9 (tests shall be made on arresters which are
indicator (when fitted) fitted with arrester disconnector)
9 Short-circuit tests 8.10 ( test shall be performed on longest arrestor

5
Technical Spec. for 120 kV LA

Tests Requirement as per IEC 60099-4 Edition-3

2014-06 clause no. for Station Class 10 kA, Us
S. No. List of Type test reports.
(kV), rms value ≤ 245 Porcelain housed Metal-
oxide surge arrester without gaps for AC system
unit used for the design with the highest rated
voltage of that unit used for each different
arrester design in case of high current test and
for low current test shall be performed on
arrestor unit of any length with with the highest
rated voltage of that unit used for each different
arrester design)
10 Bending moment test. 8.11 ( test shall be performed on complete
arrestor units without insulating base or mounting
bracket and without internal overpressure)
11 Environment tests 8.12 ( test shall be performed on complete
arrestor units of any length)
12 Seal leak rate 8.13 ( test shall be performed on one unit each)

13 Radio interface voltage (RVI) 8.14( test shall be performed on fully aasembled
arrester, and shall include the fittings(line and
earth terminals, grading rings, etc.)
14 Test to verify the dielectric 8.15( test shall be performed on real arrester or
withstand of the internal arrester unit of the design)
components of an arrester
15 Test of internal grading 8.16 ( test shall be performed on MO resistors)
components
16 Polluted housing test Annex C – on complete Unit.

*For polymeric arresters, test shall be performed as per clause 10 of IEC 60099-4
Edition-3 2014-06.

1.13.2. Routine Test:-

The each unit of Lightening arrester and accessories shall be subjected at manufacturer’s
works for the following tests as per 60099-4 Edition-3 2014-06 ISS before offer of material for
inspection.
i) Measurement of reference voltage.
ii) Residual voltage test.
iii) Internal Partial discharge test.
iv) For arrester units with sealed housing a leakage check shall be made on each
unit as hereunder. Units of 120 kV or 198 kV arrester >= 10 gega ohm.

1.13.3. Acceptance Test:-

The following tests shall be got conducted in presence of purchaser’s representative, as per
stipulation of the relevant ISS. Acceptance tests wherever possible, shall be conducted on
the complete arrester unit No. of samples to be selected for acceptance tests shall be
nearest lower whole number to the cube root of the number of arresters offered for
inspection.
i) Measurement of power frequency reference voltage on the complete arrester at
the reference current measured at the bottom of the arrester.
ii) Lightning impulse residual voltage.
iii) Internal Partial discharge test.
iv) Visual inspection & verification of dimension.

6
Technical Spec. for 120 kV LA

1.13.4. Test on bought out items:-

The manufacturer’s test report shall be accepted for the following tests at the time of
inspection.
i) Temperature cycle test on arrester housing.
ii) Porosity test on porcelain housing.
iii) Galvanizing test.
iv) Test for terminal connector.

1.13.5. TOLERANCE ON TEST RESULTS:

As per relevant standards/ specification.

1.13.6. TEST AT SITE:-

The purchaser reserves the right to conduct all tests on Lightening Arresters after arrival at
site and the contractor shall guarantee test certificate figures under actual service conditions.

1.14. TROPICAL TREATMENT:-

The equipment shall be subjected during service to extremely severe exposure to

atmospheric moisture andlong period ofhigh ambient temperature. All corrodible points and
surface shall be of such material and shall be provided with such protective finish that no part
of the installed equipment shall be in furiously effected by atmospheric conditions. All
electrical auxiliary equipment shall be given special treatment for tropical conditions.

1.15. MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP:-

All the materials used in the manufacture of equipment shall be of best quality of their
respective kind and the whole of the work shall be of the highest class well finished of
approved design and make. Castings shall be free from blow holes, flaws, cracks and
other defects and shall be smooth class grain and of the true form and dimensions. All
machined surfaces shall be true and smooth finished. The finish of the end caps should be
such that the verticality of Lightening arresters is obtained satisfactorily. The arrester shall
be completely assembled at the works to ascertain that all parts fit correctly and
Lightening arrester is erected vertically.

1.16. INSTRUCTION PLATE AND MARKING:-

The arrestor shall be provided with non-corrosive legible name plate indelibly, marked with
the following information:

i) Rajasthan RajyaVidhyut Prasaran Nigam Ltd.

ii) Purchase Order No.
iii) Manufacturer's name or trade mark and identification No. of the arrestor being
supplied.
iv) Rated voltage.
v) Maximum continuous operating voltage.
vi) Type.
vii) Rated Frequency.
viii) Nominal discharge current.
ix) Long duration discharge class.
x) Pressure relief current in KA rms.
xi) Year of manufacture.

7
Technical Spec. for 120 kV LA

1.17. COMPLETENESS OF THE EQUIPMENT:-

All fittings accessories and apparatus which may have not been specifically mentioned in this
specification but which are actually necessary for the completeness of the equipment shall
be deemed to have been included in the contract. All equipment shall therefore be
complete in all details whether such details are mentioned in this specification or not.

1.18. SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:-

The Guaranteed Technical particulars shall be furnished in prescribed format along with the
requisite drawings / documents for approval.

1.19. INSTRUCTION MANUALS:

Copies of operation, maintenance and erection manuals shall be supplied alongwith the
equipment.
The manuals shall be bound volume and shall contain all the drawings and information’s
required for erection, operating and maintenance of equipment. The manuals shall
include amongst other things the following particulars.

i) Marked erection prints identifying the components, with the assembly drawing.
ii) Detailed dimensions, assembly and description of the equipment and
accessories.
iii) Detailed view of the arrester unit etc.

1.20. SEALING:-

The arrester shall be hermetically sealed to avoid ingress of moisture. Suitable rubber
gaskets with effective sealing system should be used.

Manufacturer should devise a suitable routine production testing to verify the efficiency of
sealing.

1.21. BILL OF MATERIAL:

The firm shall also have to furnish the bill of material used for Lightening Arresters.

8
Technical Spec. for 120 kV LA

Schedule-GTP
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 120 kV METAL OXIDE
TYPE STATION CLASS SURGE ARRESTERS.

Sr. No. Particulars 120 kV LA

1 Name of manufacturer.
2 Type & designation
3 Applicable standard
4 (a) Rated voltage. (KV rms)
(b) [Link] operating voltage(MCOV) in KV(rms)
(c ) Current through arresters at MCOV in Amps.
(d) Reference voltage
(e ) Reference current
5 Nominal discharge current with 8/20 micro second
wave.(KA Peak)
6 High current impulse withstand level with 4/10 micro
second wave. (KA Peak)
7 (a) Long duration impulse current discharge class.
(b) Min. energy discharge capability.(KJ/KV)
8 [Link] voltage for discharge current of 8/20
micro
second wave.(KV Peak)
(a) 1500 Amps
(b) 5000 Amps
(c ) 10000 Amps
(d) 20000 Amps
9 [Link] surge protective level at 1000 Amps.
and 3000Amps. front time 30 micro second.
10 Temporary over voltage capacity (KV rms).
(a) 0.1 second.
(b) 0.2 second
(c ) 1.0 second
(d) 10 second
(e ) 100 second
11 Max.1 micro second discharge voltage at 10 KA.(KV
Peak)
12 Max. cantilever strength of thearrester (including wind
load).
13 Leakage current (mA)
14 (a) Whether pressure relief device fitted.
(b) Prospective symmetrical faultcurrent for which device
hasbeen tested.
15 (a) No. of units per phase ofarrester. (Nos.).
(b) Rating of non linear resisters in each unit (KV rms).
(c ) No. of non linear resistersper unit. (Nos.)
(d) Dimensions of non linearresistor disc.(Height
&diameter)
(e ) Whether arrester units are interchangeable.
16 Impulse withstand test voltage of arrester housing.(KV
Peak with 1.2/50 [Link].)
17 One minute power frequency(drywet) withstand
voltage of arrester housing.
18 (a) Total creepage distance of arrester housing.(mm)

9
Technical Spec. for 120 kV LA

Sr. No. Particulars 120 kV LA

I Whole arrester
II Individual section.
(b) Min protected creepage distance of arrester housing
(mm)
I Whole arrester
II Individual section.
19 (a) Weight of Las.(Kg.)
(b) Weight of insulating base (Kg)
(c ) Weight of surge counter withcurrent meter (Kg).
(d) Weight of complete LA including all fittings
&accessories etc.(Kg.)
20 Min. centre to centre recommended spacing between
arresters.(mm)
21 Min. clearance required from grounded equipments at
various heights of arrester unit.(mm)
22 (a) Dimension of complete unit from base to line terminal
excluding insulating base.
(b) Dimension of insulating base
23 Whether earthing arrangement provided for earthing
side of arrester. (Yes/No.)
24 (a) Mounting flange dimension details.
(b) Details of loading for design of supporing pedestal &
plinths:
I Vertical load.
II Horizontal load.
25 (a) Whether Earrhing connecting material included in the
scope of supply.(Yes/No)
(b) Material,weight and dimensional details of connecting
material
(c ) Whether arrester disconnector provided alongwith
LAs.
26 (a) Whether arresters are suitablefor hot line washing ?
(b) If yes, how much is the gradingcurrent.
27 (a) Type & Designation of pressure relief device
(b) Min. prospective symmetrical fault currnet for which
device is suitable.

10
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN, MANUFACTURE, TESTING AT

MANUFACTURER’S WORKS SUPPLY AND DELIVERY OF 132 KV FEEDER,
BUS COUPLER & TRANSFORMER CONTROL & RELAY PANELS

1.0 SCOPE :
This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturer's
works before despatch, supply, delivery& commissioning of 132 kV Feeder, Bus
Coupler & Transformer Control & Relay Panels to be installed at various 220 kV and
132 kV substations covered under Rajasthan RajyaVidyutPrasaran Nigam Ltd.,
Rajasthan.

2.0 STANDARDS:
The relays, associated components & enclosures shall conform to the latest issues of
standards given as below or equivalent/relevant IEC or BSS, except to the extent
explicitly modified in the specification.

Indian
S. No. Title
Standard No.
1 IS: 3231 Protective Relays.
2 IS: 8686 Static Protective Relays.
3 IS: 1248 General requirement of indicating and integrating meters.
4 IS: 8623 Specification for Low-voltage switchgear and control gear
assemblies.
5 IS: 13947 Specification for Low-voltage switchgear and control gear
(covers degree of protection)
6 IS - 5 Colours for ready mix paints and enamels.

3.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT:

3.1 SYSTEM PARTICULARS :

3.1.01 A statement indicating line constants for 132 kV transmission lines, proposed
transformer capacities and DC auxiliary voltages at various grid sub stations is
placed at Appendix- GENERAL for 132 kV CRP.

3.1.02 A statement showing CT ratio, their technical particulars and instrument range is
placed at Appendix - 132 kV CT.

3.1.03 Statement showing ratio of capacitive voltage transformers proposed to be provided

at various sub stations is placed at Appendix - 132 kV CVT.

3.2 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENT :

3.2.01 The specification covers the design, manufacture, fabrication, shop testing, delivery
and commissioning of control and relay board duly mounted with protective relays,
metering equipments etc. required for the satisfactory operation of 132 kV Feeder,
Bus Coupler & Transformers at various 220kV & 132kV Grid substation at RVPN,
Rajasthan included in the specification to the satisfaction of Purchaser.

3.2.02 The intention of the specification is to provide protective relaying & metering
equipments on control boards enumerated in the specification and to be complete in
every respect for the functions designated. It is required that the supplier, in accepting

1
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

the contract, agrees to furnish all apparatus, appliances and material whether
specifically mentioned or not but which may be found necessary to complete or test
any of the herein specified protective schemes in compliance with the requirements of
the specification without any extra charges.

3.2.03 Considerations may be given to alternatives which the supplier considers advisable by
reasons of his own manufacturing requirements and experience, provided descriptive
literature is submitted pointing out the recommended device or arrangement as equal
to, or superior to that required by the accompanying specification.

3.3 GENERAL RELAYING / INSTRUMENTS & METERS REQUIREMENTS:

3.3.01 a) The panel offered by the supplier shall comply with the requirements of latest
issue of IS:3231& IS:8686 or relevant BSS/IEC wherever relevant IS is not available
and shall be suitable for operation in the climatic conditions specified in this
specification. If complying with a specification other then BSS/ISS/IEC then an
English translation of the same shall accompany the bid.
b) The bidder shall clearly indicate the specific model of quoted relays completely
meeting the requirement of specification. General indication such as series or
families, etc. of quoted relays shall not be acceptable.
c) Every relay must have spare contacts for event logger and disturbance recorder which
shall be wired on spare TB.
d) Binary Input & Binary Output contacts of every numerical relay shall be configurable
at site.
e) Every numerical relay should be accessible with PC or Laptop through front interface
& Remotely from rear port. Firm shall provide communication cord having USB
port (or USB convertor) with each panel to make communication with relay and
remote PC or Laptop through front interface.
f) For Time synchronisation firm shall provide one number BNC T-connector (Female
to two Female) with each panel

3.3.02 Each electromechanical relay shall be provided with dust tight, removable covers
with glass/clear plastic windows. The relay shall be so arranged that on opening the
case, it shall be impossible for any dust which may have collected in or upon the case,
to fall on the relay mechanism. The operation of the relays shall be practically free
from errors due to normal variation in frequency and waveform and from ambient
temperature effects between (-) 5 C to 50C.

3.3.03 Terminal blocks shall have bases and barriers moulded integrally with brass inserts
and shall be suitable for 660 volts service. Individual studs with retainer type washer
for terminals shall be provided for each incoming and outgoing feeders. Terminal
blocks for CT & PT shall be Disconnecting type.

3.3.04 Annunciation and alarm circuits shall be operated by contacts on an auxiliary tripping
relay or by a separate relay added for that purpose. Auxiliary tripping relays for all
protections included in this specification shall be hand reset type except for the
transmission line protection, where specified to be of self resetting type, because of
auto reclosing of circuit breaker.

3.3.05 i) All the protection scheme and relays shall be provided with test blocks in
panel and test plugs so designed that the protection schemes/relays may be tested IN-

2
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

SITU (without removing the relay from panel). The protection schemes/relays should
have provision of testing either through test block or test plug easily accessible by
injecting the voltage/current/ frequency (as applicable) from external testing
instruments/source without first disconnecting/ de-energising the electrical circuit
protected by the schemes & relays. Facilities for isolating the tripping circuit during
such testing shall be also provided.
ii) The requirement of separate test block in the panel shall not be applicable in
case of those models of relays which have inbuilt test block and relay can be tested by
using test plug (in the scope of supplier) without removing the relay from panel.
iii) The testing facilities provided in the relays shall be specifically stated in the
bid. Necessary test plug etc. as may be required for proper testing shall be included in
the contractor's scope of supply.
iv) All the protection schemes and main relays shall be supplied in cases flush
mounted on steel panels.
v) In case of Directional Relay, it should be possible to check the Directional
feature of main & Protective relay through a specified procedure with a provision to
make the relay non directional. Bidder shall furnish details of specified procedure
along with bid.
vi) Signal inputs in between Main Relay / Back up Relay, etc. shall be transferred
through hard wire as well as through GOOSE. The transfer of signals shall be as
under:
1. CB status of from Main protection to Back up relay.
2. DR triggering from other operated relays (as applicable):
i) DR of Main/ Differential protection from Back up Relay.

3.3.06 In case of electromechanical relays contacts shall be silver surface, bounce free and
capable of repeated operation without deterioration. For static/ numerical relay
system provided for output shall give the equivalent performance.

3.3.07 The normal frequency will be 50 [Link] the numerical relays (current operated)
should be suitable for both 1 A & 5 A CT secondary current eitherby site
configuration or through ICT.

3.3.08 GENERAL INSTRUMENTS/METERS REQUIREMENTS

3.3.08.1AC static 0.2S class TOD type HT Trivector Meter as per the specification
requirement indicated in specification shall be mounted on front panel of each
Control panel. The acceptable make of TOD meter is indicated at clause No. 3.9.03.

3.3.08.2The multifunction meter to be provided shall be of digital type of 0.5 class of

accuracy. The height of figures of digital display shall be such that it is readable and
legible. The size of meter shall not be more than 144 mm *144 mm. The
multifunction meter supply shall be 110 V or 220 V DC as per panel rating and
energy reading and other data shall store in non volatile memory

3.4 INSPECTION AND TESTS:

3.4.1 The following tests shall be carried out on each panel at the manufacturer's works
after completely assembling the control and relay Boards, in the presence of an
Engineer of the Purchaser, if desired by the Purchaser, and four copies of the test
reports shall be supplied and got approved from the Purchaser before despatching the
equipment:

3
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

i) One minute 2kV insulation withstand test at 50Hz on all equipments (may be except
electronic devices)on the panels and wiring.
ii) Insulation resistance of complete wiring, circuit by circuit with all equipments
mounted on the panels.
iii) Checking the operation & function of protection schemes, instruments and meters.
The display parameters of the relays and meters shall also be checked.
iv) Checking of colour scheme used in wiring as per following requirement:

i) A.C. three phase circuits

No.1 phase Red
No.2 phase Yellow
No.3 phase Blue
ii) Neutral Black
iii) Connections to earth Green
iv) D.C. circuits Grey
v) Checking of same ferrules at both ends of wires.
vi) Routine tests in accordance with relevant IS or other international standards shall be
carried out on all the instruments, relays and other devices and/or manufacturer's
routine test reports shall be enclosed with inspection report.
vii) Checking of all wires connected on T.B. as per approved drawing and Final drawing
should be submitted prior to inspection offer letter.
viii) Checking of communication through GOOSE between IEC-61850 relays.

3.5 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

Guaranteed technical and other particulars in prescribed format shall be furnished.
Particulars of guarantee shall be clearly marked. The word "As per Spec. & as per
catalogue" will not be indicated in GTP.

3.6 DRAWINGS:
3.6.1 In addition to any other drawings, which the biddermay like to enclose to explain the
merits of his proposal, the following drawings shall be furnished:
i) Principal dimensional details of each control and relay panel.
ii) Front and rear views with all relays, instruments/ meters and devices
positionsmarked.
iii) Foundation details.
iv) Elementary diagrams of all metering, Protection, annunciation and other
circuits.
v) Feeder protection scheme.
vi) Local breaker backup protection scheme with bus bar tripping relay.
vii) Auto reclose scheme.
viii) Transformer biased differential protection scheme. External triggering through
other auxiliary relays.
ix) Transformer high impedance differential (circulating current) protection.
x) Transformer REF protection scheme.
xi) Transformer over fluxing protection scheme.
xii) Transformer voltage Neutral displacement protection scheme.
xiii) Backup Protection.

4
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

3.6.2 All drawings shall be in English language and dimensions in SI/ Metric System.
Further the following drawings in triplicate of respective panels along with schematic
drawings indicating internal electrical circuit/ contacts of protection schemes/ relays
shall be furnished. The drawings for all type of ordered panels shall be furnished in
single lot & not in piecemeal. Drawing should be of Standard size of 24"x12"or
12"x8.5" or A4 and should have blank space of size 3"x1.5" on lower right hand side
to have a stamp of approval.
1) Principal dimensional details of each C&R panel.
2) Front & rear views and foundation plan .
3) General arrangement of control panel with instruments, relays & devices
positions marked.
4) Equipment legend details of control panels .
5) General arrangement of relay panel with relays & devices positions marked.
6) Equipment legend details of relay panels .
7) SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS
i) Single line diagram/ Key diagram/ Line diagram
ii) A.C. supply Distribution circuit
iii) D.C. supply Distribution circuit. The DC circuit for annunciation shall
be separate and independent from the DC supply used for other
functions and terminals shall be marked as J21 & J22 (for 132 kV side
annunciation ).
iv) Metering circuit
v) Back up over current and earth fault protection circuit.
vi) Master trip relay circuit separate for group-A (Master trip relay 1)and
group-B(Master trip relay 2)
vii) Circuit breaker control circuit-closing coil
viii) Circuit breaker control circuit-Trip Coil-1
ix) Circuit breaker control circuit-Trip Coil-2
x) Annunciation Scheme alongwith wiring of monitoring of DC supply of
annunciation andfailure of AC supply as per clause 8.12.06(a)& (b).
xi) Annunciation windows inscription details alongwith details of trip and
non trip alarms.
xii) Indication circuits shall be indicate separately on same sheet
a) Semaphore indication for circuit breaker and isolator
b) For Indicating lamps for circuit breaker by stating that “From
transformer panel change over supply as per clause 8.10.03 of
specification”.
xiii) Internal position of CB Control switch.
xiv) Feeder protection scheme.
a) Line VT circuit
b) Synchronising circuit
c) Distance scheme A.C. circuit
d) Distance scheme D.C. circuit
e) Distance scheme Auxiliary circuit
f) Trip relay circuit distance scheme
g) Distance scheme Main internal details
h) Trip transfer protection scheme as per clause no. 3.14of spec.
xv) Transformer protection scheme
a) Transformer percentage biased differential protection scheme
b) Transformer REF protection scheme.

5
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

c) Transformer over fluxing protection scheme.

d) Back up Protection.
e) Transformer auxiliary protection.
f) Trip Transfer protection scheme as per clause 3.14 of specification.
Trip transfer scheme should be through NI & IT position of Trip
Transfer Switch.
xvi) The T.B. Schedule drawing sheet.
xvii) Rear view of all relays with indicating wiring with ferrules and sheet
No. on each terminal of relay. Alternatively, these may be given in
tabular form.
xviii) The device schedule drawing [Link], these may be given in
tabular form.
xix) The wire routing schedule drawing sheet. The drawing shall be in
tabular form indicating the sequence in which any wire will be
connected to various devices.

3.6.3 Some of the wiring is standardized for Tripping/ Closing of the Circuit Breaker, CT
and PT connections, Supervision Relay, CB and Isolator status etc. on one separate
TB. Bidder should adhere to the standardised wiring as per Appendix –D1-D3.
3.6.4 Apart from above drawings, the supplier shall include other drawings that it considers
necessary.
3.6.5 The Purchaser reserves the right to issue standard drawings according to which the
panels shall be fabricated/ manufactured/ wired.

3.6.6 The bidder shall be responsible for any discrepancies/ errors or omissions in the
drawings and other particulars though approved by the Purchaser or not.
3.6.7 Two sets of approved drawings after incorporating corrections shall be supplied
alongwith each panel to the consignee for fieldofficers&onesets to the Purchaser.

3.7 ILLUSTRATED AND PRINTED LITERATURE ALONGWITH BID:

In the event of an order, 2(Two) sets of complete technical literature,
commissioning/operating / maintenance instructional manual of aforesaid items shall
be supplied alongwith each panel to the consignees. Apart from this,
manuals/literatures in soft copy shall also be furnished to consignee and purchaser.

3.8 CO-ORDINATION :
The control and relay board shall be suitably fabricated to match and arranged to
form one continuous board with the existing panels at various sub stations, wherever
mentioned.

3.9 ACCEPTABLEMAKE AND MODEL OF RELAYS:

(only for performance purpose)

3.9.01 a) The following approved makes & models of numerical relays are only
acceptable for Distance, Differential and Over current & Earth fault:

6
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

MAKE MODEL
Distance Relay For 132kV Feeder C&R Panel
ABB REL670, REL-650
GE T&D MICOM P442, MICOM P444
SCHNEIDER MICOM P442, MICOM P444
SEL SEL 311C
SIEMENS 7SA522, 7SA611
Differential Relay For 132 kV Transformer C&R Panel
ABB RET670, RET-650
GE T&D MICOM P642, MICOM P643,
SCHNEIDER MICOM P642, MICOM P643,
SEL SEL 787
SIEMENS 7UT613 (With 8Nos. Binary Input & 8Nos. Binary Output contacts) ,
7SR23, 7SR54
Combined Over Current & Earth Fault relay
ABB REF 615
GET&D MICOM P141, P14D, P14N
SCHNEIDER MICOM P141
SEL SEL 751, SEL 751A
SIEMENS 7SJ80, 7SR10, 7SR11, 7SR12
CGPISL AEGIS-F

Subject to confirmation that the relay supplied shall be suitable for both 1A & 5A.
Conversion from 1A to 5A and vice versa with ICT isalso acceptable. ICT be
supplied as mandatory spare.

b) For auxiliary and otherrelays (except mainand Back up protection relays) in

case make of relays are other than following then type test report of such relays shall
also be furnished.
i) GE T&D(formerly Areva/Alstom)
ii) ABB
iii) EasunReyrolle
iv) JVS
v) AVANA

In case make of auxiliary and other relays (except mainand Back up protection
relays)are other than the approved then the bidder shall furnish the following valid
and authenticated Type test certificate from manufacturer/ a laboratory accredited by
the NABL/ ILAC-MRA signatory for the type tests as per latest edition of IS-3231 or
IEC of quoted relays or on model having additional features in same series. Such type
test certificate should not be older than 7 years as on the date of technical bid
opening. For this purpose date of conducting type test will be considered.
(i) Insulation test.
(ii) High frequency disturbance test (not applicable for electromechanical
relays).
(iii) Electrical fast transient test (not applicable for electromechanical
relays).
(iv) Relay characteristics, performance and accuracy test.
a) Steady state characteristics and operating time.

7
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

b) Dynamic characteristics and operating time for distance relay.

(v) Test for thermal requirement.
(vi) Test for mechanical requirement.
(vii) Test for rated burden
(viii) Contact performance test.

c) In case of 132 kV Feeder C&R Panel, Bus coupler&Transformer C&R Panels,

which are duplex type of panels, the bidder shall furnish an undertakingthat
the panels shall provide minimum degree of enclosure protection equivalent to
IP 31 in accordance with IS 13947(Part-1).

3.9.02 All the HT TVMs, integrating instruments, Control switches, selector switches,
indicating lamps, Semaphore indicators, Annunciation scheme, Bell, Hooter etc. shall
be of “ISI MARK” for which bidders shall furnish attested Photostat copies of ISI
certificate for the respective make offered along with bid. Alternatively bidder shall
furnished original/attested Photostat copies of the latest type test report of aforesaid
items along with bid. The type test certificate/report should not be older than 7 years.

3.9.03 The following make of bought out items are acceptable to RVPN:

[Link]. Name of item Make

1. 0.2S Class AC Static HT-TVM L&T(ER300P)/SECURE(Premier300/
TOD type Energy Meter Premier500) /GENUS(03D/ HC (for 1A) /
03C (for 5A) / WALLBY/
HPL(CTPT1.24/CTPT5.24)
2. Digital voltmeter Any make having ISI mark
3. Digital multifunction meter SATEC(PM130EH-PLUS) /
(Digital type) SECURE(ELITE445/ ELITE500) /
RISHAB (RISH PQM & RISH MASTER
3440) / AE(AE9000) /ACCORD(MFM-
02) /HPL(EBRIT) / POWERTRAC
(PGMFR3)
4. Control Switch for Circuit ALSTOM(Areva)/ SWITRON/ KAYCEE/
Breaker/Trip Transfer ABB/ RECOM/ EasunReyrolle/
HEMAADRI
5. Selector Switch for Voltmeter/ SWITRON/ KAYCEE/ RECOM/
Ammeter HEMAADRI
6. Semaphore Indicator ALSTOM(Areva)/ DAV /DEEPL/ ER
7. Indicating Lamp(LED Type) ALSTOM(Areva)/ TEKNIC/ VAISHNO/
DAV / DEEPL / VENSON/ L&T/
SIEMENS/ JVS /SECO/CRAFTECH
8. Annunciator MINILEC/ YASHMUN/ INSTALRAM/
PROTON/ JVS/ PRADEEP/ ALAN /
EXPO FYN/ACCORD /SECO / QCEPT
9. Push Button TEKNIC/ VAISHNO/ ESSEN/ L&T/
SIEMENS/ ALSTOM (Areva)
10. A.C. Hooter/Bell TARGET/ INDUSTRIAL HOOTER/
ALAN/ JVS/PROTON/ACCORD/ SECO/
CRAFTECH
11. D.C. Hooter / Bell TARGET/ INDUSTRIAL HOOTER/

8
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

[Link]. Name of item Make

ALAN/ JVS/PROTON/ACCORD/SECO/
CRAFTECH
12. Heater SOFIA/ ELTER/ AIREX/ KAYCEE /
PRAVEEN
13. Link type Test Terminal Block IMP/ CAPITAL/ DAV/DEEPL / AVANA
for testing of TVM
14. 2 Feet Tube Light PHILIPS/ CROMPTON/ BAJAJ
15. 2 Pin/3 Pin socket with switch ISI MARK
(5/15A)

NOTE: In case the successful bidders establish to the Satisfaction of purchaser that
specified makes of particular item (except digital multifunctional meter)are not
available than other makeshall also be acceptable if it is of "ISI" MARK or type
tested for which bidders shall furnish attested Photostat copies of valid ISI
certificate/type test report. The type test report which should not be older than 7 years
as on date of bid opening. As regard digital multifunction meter the other make is
also acceptable provided it meets the requirement of specification (clause No. 7.03)

3.10 MAKE AND TYPE OF BOUGHT OUT ITEMS:

Make/type of each relay, integrating instruments, Control switches, selector switches,
indicating lamps, Semaphore indicators, Annunciation scheme, Bell, Hooter etc. shall
be clearly and invariably indicated in the GTP (Guaranteed Technical Particulars),
and Bill of material. Only specific make accessories shall be indicated. The words
like “EQUIVALENT/ REPUTED MAKE" will not be given consideration.

3.11 DOCUMENTATION:
Two sets of following documents shall be supplied to the consignee for field officer
alongwith each panel.
i) Approved drawings after making corrections as advised at the time of approval of
drawing.
ii) The complete technical literature, commissioning/ operating / maintenance
instruction manuals of protection scheme(s)/relay /relay testing instruments/
integrating instruments, etc.

3.12 PACKING OF C&R PANELS:

Packing shall be governed by GCC. Each panels shall be first packed inside water
proof polythene cover of minimum 0.1 mm thickness and then appropriately wooden
casing shall be provided to hold the panel securely suitable for transportation/
handling.
The supplier shall be required to make separate packages for each consignee. Each
package will be marked on three sides with proper point/ indelible ink with the
following:
i) Name of consignee.
ii) Destination.
iii) PO No. RVPN/SE()/XEN-/A-/BN- /D. Dt.
iv) Particulars of C&R Panel.
a) Description of control/relay panel.
b) CT Secondary.
c) DC Aux. voltage.

9
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

d) [Link]. of control/Relay panel.

v) Manufacturer's Name.

3.13 DEMONSTRATION AND TESTING OF OFFERED RELAYS/

INSTRUMENTS/ ACCESSORIES:
Purchaser reserves the right to get demonstration and sample testing of offered
protection scheme(s)/ relay(s)/ instruments/ accessories to ascertain their technical
suitability, in the office of Chief Engineer (MP&S)/ Superintending Engineer
(Protection), RVPN, HawaSarak, Chambal Power House, Jaipur or at other place of
RVPN, at the risk & Cost of supplier.

3.14 TRIP TRANSFER SCHEMES:

In order to energise master trip relay of bus coupler through master trip relay of
line/Transformer a trip transfer scheme will be provided for transferring the tripping
signal to the bus coupler breaker whenever any line/transformer is connected to the
auxiliary bus. The three position locking pattern switch Stay put type with pistol grip
handle shall be provided on each 132 kV Feeder/ Transformer Control panel.

The positions of Trip Transfer switch are as under:

i) Normal.
ii) Inter
iii) Trip transfer.

3.15 CONTACT MULTIPLICATION RELAY:

3.15.1 FOR ISOLATOR AUXILIARY SWITCH:
Heavy duty latch in type contact multiplication relays will be required for bus
[Link] relay will be voltage operated electrically reset having identical stable
positions and minimum 4 pairs of NO contact and 4 pair of NC contact duly wired on
TBs for requirement of various protection control schemes.

3.16 AUXILIARY RELAY:

The auxiliary relay should have relay connecting fingers/strips and Pins/plug capable
of carrying 30A for 3 sec.& 5A continuously at 660 V. Auxilliary relay should have
15% additional contacts.

3.17 TRIPPING RELAY:

High speed master tripping relay are required for Tripping. The relay should have 2
Normally Closed and 12 Normally Open for 132 kV Electrical reset pair of contacts
with push button.

4.0 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR 132kV FEEDER C&R PANEL

4.1 132kV FEEDER PROTECTION:

All 132 kV circuit breakers are 3 pole ganged type, equipped with 2 tripping coils only. The
protection trip contacts therefore, are required to be suitably multiplied such that each coil
receives independent trip signal from each protection.

4.1.01 PRIMARY PROTECTION:

As a primary protection, distance scheme is proposed for 132 kV lines. The distance
protection scheme for 132 kV feeders shall be of directional distance type suitable for phase

10
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

to phase and phase to ground faults. The scheme shall have minimum 4 Zones of protection
with stepped characteristics. The distance scheme shall be numerical type and shall be
suitable for three phase tripping and will operate with permissive inter trip for accelerating
tripping at remote end in case of Zone-2 fault. The measuring relays in the above protection
shall be based on MHO cross polarised and quadrilateral/shaped characteristics. The
maximum operating time of the relay for the first Zone faults shall be within 4 cycles. The
timing of the second and third zone shall be graded to suit the timings of the adjacent section.
The relay shall have facility to synchronize its time clock from time synchronisation
equipment having output port IRIG–B/ RS232/Potential free contacts (PPM).

The numerical distance relay should be accessible with PC or Laptop through front interface.
It should have facility for inter bus communication and remote communication and remotely
from rear port.

The numerical distance relay should have protocol for communication as IEC 61850. The
protocol mapping along with associated software should be made available to the Purchaser
along with required attachments.

The offered scheme should also have following:

i) Fault locator facility.
ii) Detection of Broken conductor condition.
iii) Fuse failure supervision.
iv) Indication of power flow (Import / Export), current and voltage.
v) Should have minimum 6 digital input and 12 digital output contacts.

4.1.02 BACK-UP PROTECTION :

i) The back-up protection for phase faults shall be provided with inverse directional over
current relays with voltage polarisation for all lines.

ii) The back-up protection for earth faults shall be provided with inverse directional earth
fault relays with voltage as well as current polarisation for all lines.

iii)The over current and earth fault relay shall be of numerical type.

iv) The numerical over current and earth fault relays shall be independent of the primary
protection i.e. these shall be separately provided even if such a feature is inbuilt in the
primary protection.

v) The numerical O/C & E/F relay should be accessible with PC or Laptop through front
interface. It should have facility for inter bus communication and remote communication.

vi) The numerical O/C & E/F relay should have protocol for communication as per IEC-
61850. The protocol mapping along with associated software should be made available to
the purchaser along with required attachments

vii) Should have minimum 4 digital input and 6 digital output contacts.

4.1.03 DELETED

11
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

4.1.04 TIME SYNCHRONIZATION:

(a) The relay shall have facility to synchronize its time clock from time synchronisation
equipment having output port IRIG–B/ RS232/Potential free contacts (PPM)

(b) The numerical distance, numerical O/C & E/F relay should be accessible with PC or
Laptop through front interface. It should have facility for inter bus communication and
remote communication.

(c) The numerical distance, O/C & E/F relay should have protocol for communication as
IEC-61850. The protocol mapping alongwith associated software should be made
available to the Purchaser alongwith required attachments

4.1.05 SOFTWARE FOR NUMERICAL RELAYS:

The bidder shall supply one set of licensed copy of application software for numerical relays
with each C&R panel free of cost. The application software shall consist of relay setting
software and relay data analysis software

Note: Trip circuit Supervision will be done by Numerical Distance protection scheme and
Numerical O/C & E/F Relay. Binary I/P shall be capable for this feature.

5.0 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR 132 kV BUS COUPLER C&R PANEL:

5.1 132 KV BUS COUPLER:

(a) The protection provided on bus coupler shall be non directional IDMTL relays for over
current and earth fault. The IDMTL relay shall be of Numerical type.

(b) The over current and earth fault relay shall be of Numerical type.

(c) The bidder shall supply one set of licensed copy of application software for numerical
relays with each bus coupler panel free of cost. The application software consists of
relay setting of software and relay data analysis software.

(d) The numerical over current & earth fault relay should be accessible with PC or Laptop
through front interface. It should have facility for inter bus communication and remote
communication.

(e) The numerical over current & earth fault relay should have protocol for communication
as [Link] protocol mapping alongwith associated software should be made
available to the purchaser alongwith required attachments.

(f) Trip circuit supervision will be done by numerical O/C & E/F relay. Binary I/P shall be
capable for this feature.

12
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

6.0 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR 132 kV SIDE OF 132/33 kV TRANSFORMER:

6.1 132 kV SIDE OF 132/33kV TRANSFORMER:The protection scheme proposed to

be adopted for transformers will be as under:

a) Percentage biased differential protection for phase and ground faults with harmonic
restraint and magnetic inrush blocking.
b) Inverse over current back-up protection for phase faults with instantaneous attachment.
c) Inverse backup protection for ground faults with instantaneous attachment. Elements
shall have directional features.
d) High temperature winding/oil protection.
e) Buchholz protection for transformer (two relays).
f) Over fluxing protection.
g) Pressure release device.
h) Voltage neutral displacement protection.
i) Numerical Restricted Earth Fault Protection.
j) OSR protection for OLTC of transformer

6.1.01 DIFFERENTIALPROTECTION:
132/33 kV or 132/11kV, 10/12.5 or 20/25MVA or 40/50MVA Power transformers shall be
provided with high speed numerical two winding differential relay suitable for2 (Two)
winding transformers controlled individually and shall be of variable bias type. The
differential relay shall operate for all internal faults and shall not operate on heavy through
faults. The relay shall be immune to magnetising inrush current and have feature to provide
stability under over excited condition and should also be stable for unbalance current due to
on load tap changing equipment provided on the transformer which can vary the tap changer
setting from -15% to +5%. The protection system shall not operate for the transformer inrush
current having an inrush factor not greater than 7 and time constant of 200 mili seconds.

The differential protection relay shall have an operating time of not greater than 40 m sec at
5 times of setting current. The main differential relay shall have an adjustable operating
setting of the order of 20% to 50% of the rated current so that it covers practically the entire
transformer winding susceptible to faults.

The differential relays shall have adjustable settings for the operating current as well as bias
setting. An instantaneous high set circuit with separate indication shall be provided. The
setting of this circuit shall be variable with minimum setting of 8 times of the rated current
so as to trip the transformer when the differential current exceeds setting.

The differential relay shall have dual slope characteristic. The relay will also have fault
recorder, having facility to display fault currents, date, time, frequency, etc. The relay will be
provide with event recorder. The relay should have minimum 8 digital input and 8 digital
output contacts

13
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

6.1.02 TRANSFORMER AUXILIARY RELAY:

Separate auxiliary relays for the following function for each transformer shall be provided:
a. 4 Nos. for Buchholz alarm and trip
b. 1 No. for OLTC oil surge trip
c. 2 Nos. for winding temp. trip
d. 1 No. for Oil temp. trip.
e. 1 No. for pressure release device trip.
f. 1 No. spare.
Gas detector relays have been provided with each of the above mentioned transformers and
each relay will have one pair of alarm contacts and one pair of tripping contacts all of which
shall be used for tripping the transformer.

OLTCs are equipped with oil surge type relays with tripping contacts. Similarly winding
temperature indicators have been provided on HV & LV windings of the transformers which
have two pairs of actuating contacts for winding temperature alarm and trip. The auxiliary
tripping relays shall be provided to trip simultaneously the incoming & the outgoing circuits
of the transformers in conjunction with the main tripping contacts.

The auxiliary relay should have relay connecting fingers/ strips/Pins/plug capable of carrying
30A for 3 sec. & 5A continuously at 660V.

The Auxiliary relays:

(a) Shall be hand reset type.

(b) Should have flag indication for operation.
(c) Should have independent contact for energizing the trip relay, alarm annunciator, for
connection to main differential relay to initiate disturbance recorder.
(d) Each auxiliary relay has three elements and each element have six actuating contacts..

6.1.03 OVER FLUXING RELAY:

Numerical Over fluxing relays shall be provided on high voltage side of the transformers (but
connected to LV bus PT) to provide protection against excessive flux density. The relay shall
have inverse time delay settings for Alarm & trip, w.r.t. voltage/ frequency ratio. An
instantaneous element with separate relay flag shall be provided. If the relay is part of some
other relay it should have separate alarm and tripping contacts.

6.1.04 BACK UP PROTECTION FOR 132kV TRANSFORMER ON 132 kV SIDE OF

132/33 kV TRANSFORMER:

(a) The power transformers shall be provided with inverse over current back up
protection(non-directional) for phase faults and separate inverse earth fault protection
for ground faults(directional type).The back up over current relays shall be non-
directional type with instantaneous attachment.

14
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

The back-up earth fault relay shall be directional type with directional highset
instantaneous element with a provision to make the relay non directional externally.
The relays shall be numerical type.

Both combined (having separate tripping contacts for over current and earth fault) and
separate over current and earth fault relays are acceptable. The over current and earth
fault relay shall not be part of any other relay.

(b) The numerical O/C & E/F relay should be accessible with PC or Laptop through front
interface. It should have facility for inter bus communication and remote
communication.
(c) The numerical O/C & E/F relay should have protocol for communication as per IEC-
61850. The protocol mapping along with associated software should be made
available to the purchaser along with required attachments.
(d) The numerical O/C & E/F relay should have minimum 4 digital input and 6 digital
output contacts.
(e) The numerical O/C & E/F relay should have facility to make directional unit in non-
directional unit.

6.1.05 RESTRICTED EARTHFAULT PROTECTION:

The numerical relay shall be:
i) Deleted.
ii) Deleted.
iii) Deleted
iv) Have current setting of 20-80%.
v) Tuned to supply frequency and reject harmonics.
vi) Provided with continuously adjustable stabilising resistance.
vii) Suitably protected against high voltage by suitable non-linear resistance.
viii) Have alarm and trip output contacts and contacts for trigger Disturbance
recorder of main Differential relay.
ix) Relay shall be Numerical having fault recorder facility to display various
currents, date, time, etc. .
x) REF relay shall not be part of any other relay.
xi) Trip circuit supervision I & II shall be done through REF HV / LV relay.
Binary I/P shall be capable for this feature.

Note : Each 132/33kV (Y-Y) Transformer of the purchaser is provided withdouble core
identical current transformers (CT)for REF protection in the following manner:
1. Three Nos. on HV winding Bushing (One No. per phase)
2. Three Nos. on LV winding Bushing (One No. per phase)
3. Two Nos. on neutral (One for HV neutral &One for LV neutral).

15
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

Current transformers on each HV,LV& neutral side shall be provided in the appropriate
manner in the bushings of the transformer. Technical particular of the bushing CTs for
restricted earth fault protection are given below:

i) Rated frequency : 50 Hz
ii) No. of cores : Two
iii) Rated primary current
a) For HV & HV Neutral 500 A : 500 A
b) For LV & LV Neutral 1000 A : 1000 A
iv) Rated secondary current : 1 Amp.
v) Rated continuous thermal current. : 120% rated.
vi) Rated transformation ratio
a) For HV and HV Neutral : 500/1
b) For LV and LV Neutral 1000/1 A : 1000/1
vii) Accuracy class : PS
viii) Min. knee point voltage : 1000 V
ix) Max. magnetisation current : 60 mA
atguaranteedknee point voltage.
x) Max. Secondary winding resistanceat 75 : 5 Ohm
degree C.
xi) Rated short time thermal current for 1
sec.
a) For HV : 31.5 kA(RMS)
b) For LV : 25.0 kA(RMS)
xii) Rated dynamic current.(Peak) : 100 kA Peak(for HV & HVN)
: 63.0 kA Peak(for LV & LVN)

6.1.06 VOLTAGE NEUTRAL DISPLACEMENT PROTECTION:

The voltage neutral displacement relay will be connected to the open delta terminals of the
bus voltage transformer. The neutral displacement relay will have IDMT characteristics
with setting range of 5% to 20% of rated voltage of 63.5 V. The relay shall be Numerical
type. The NDR relay may be part of numerical O/C & E/F relay.

6.1.07 NUMERICAL RELAY:The relay shall have:

(a) TIME SYNCHRONIZATION: All Numerical relays shall have facility to
synchronize its time clock from time synchronisation equipment having output port
IRIG B/ RS232/Potential free contacts (PPM).
(b) All Numerical relays should be access able with PC or Laptop through front
interface. It should have facility for inter bus communication and remote
communication.
(c) The numerical Differential relay and O/C & E/F relay should have protocol for
communication as IEC-61850. The protocol mapping along with associated software
should be made available to the purchaser along with required attachments.
(d) All Numerical Relays shall have inbuilt fault recorder and facility to display fault
currents, date, time, etc.

16
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

6.1.08 SOFTWARE FOR NUMERICAL RELAYS:

The bidder shall supply one set of licensed copy of application software for numerical
relays with each C&R panel free of cost. The application software shall consist of
relay setting software and relay data analysis software.

7.0 SPECIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTS/METERS:

7.1 INDICATING AND INTEGRATING INSTRUMENTS AND METERS:

All instruments shall be of switch board type back connected suitable for flush mounting and
provided with dust and vermin proof case for tropical use and finished in black colour. All
fixing screws, nuts and threaded parts shall be designed according to relevant Indian
Standards. Digital Multifunctional meters shall be digital type as per clause [Link] and
shall conform to the provisions of the latest edition of relevant IS/ IEC. Energy meters shall
conform to the provisions of relevant IS amended upto date and RVPN‟s technical
specification. The specification of AC static 0.2S Class TOD type HT TVM is enclosed with
this specification.

The Digital multifunctional meters shall be of class 0.5 accuracy. The energy meters shall
also conform to class0.2S accuracy. The calibration of the instruments shall function
satisfactorily when mounted on steel panels.

7.2 DIGITAL VOLT METERS:

Digital voltmeters shall be provided wherever asked for in the detailed equipment
requirement. The digital voltmeter should be capable to display voltage between phases and
between phases and earth one at a time through user selection.

7.3 DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTION METER:

i) The Digital multifunction meter shall be of programmable type of 0.5 class
accuracy
ii) It shall be suitable for measurement by 3 Phase 4 wire unbalance load
iii) It shall be able to indicate following parameters:-
a) Max/ Min Voltage & current
b) Phase and line Voltage
c) Three phase currents.
d) Frequency.
e) Power Factor
f) Reactive & Active Power
g) Apparent Power
h) Maximum demand
i) Per phase KW, KVAR, KVA and P.F.
j) Total harmonic distortion (voltage and current both).
k) Active Energy,
l) Reactive Energy,
m) Apparent Energy.
iv) DMFM shall operate on auxiliary supply either 110V or 220 V DC as per
panel rating and have non-volatile memory to store energy data and setting
data.
v) The other specification shall be:

17
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

a) Current Range 1A or 5A, Continuos 1A, 5A (as per IS: 1248)

b) Surge withstand (1A CT & 5 A CT) (As per IS: 1248)
c) The digital multifunction meter shall be able to accommodate ratios of
installedCT/PT and have adequate rating range.
d) The meter shall have the communication port RS-232/RS-485 having
MODBUS protocol or any other open protocol.
e) EMI/EMC compliant as per requirement IS/IEC.
f) DMFM shall be site configurable for both 1A or 5A operation either
through configuration setting or through ICT.

7.4 ENERGY METERS :

The specification of AC static 0.2S classToD type HT TVM is enclosed as "TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATION FOR 3-PHASE, 4-WIRE, 0.2S CLASS, AC STATIC TOD TARIFF
TRIVECTOR METER FOR EHV/HV SYSTEM OF RVPN".

7.5 TESTING TERMINAL BLOCK (TTB) FOR TESTING OF TRIVECTOR

METER:
Link type testing terminal block suitable for 3 phase 4 wire system shall be provided for
carrying out calibration tests on Energy meters, without disconnecting the connecting leads
or removing the meters. The wiring of the TTB shall be so arranged that when the testing
receptacle are fitted, the current and voltage are automatically disconnected from the source
and injection from the separate source is possible. In case of draw out type meters the
provisions shall be made to automatically short circuit the secondary of CTs when the meter
is taken out of circuit for testing.

8.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF CONTROL AND RELAY BOARD:

8.1 STANDARDS :
8.1.01 The equipment offered should conform to relevant Indian Standards or equivalent
IEC standards. The references of the relevant standard specifications wherever
mentioned in the text of this specification have been given accordingly. Other
authoritative standards which ensure an equal or better quality than the standards
specified will also be accepted.

8.2 GENERAL :
8.2.01 The Boards shall comprise of cubicles placed side by side to form continuous boards.
The duplex type shall be mounted back to back and so arranged as to have a covered
corridor in between to provide access to the internal wiring. Hinged lockable access
doors shall be fitted at both ends of the corridor and switch boards interior shall be
automatically lit by the opening of these doors. The control boards for the same line
voltages at each substation shall be placed side by side and shall form one board.

8.2.02 For the existing sub stations the bidder shall ensure the matching of control & relay
boards with the existing ones. The following points shall be particularly co-ordinated:
i) The height and depth of the panel shall be perfectly matched.
ii) Colour of panels both on exterior and interior shall be matched.
iii) Size and appearance of instruments, control switches and indicating lamps
mounted on the front of the panels shall be matched with the existing ones to
the extent possible.

18
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

iv) The size, colour and disposition of the mimic diagram shall be perfectly
matched with the existing scheme.

8.2.03 For other new sub stations, access doors with concealed hinges having a swing of not
less than 1050 mm on full opening of their position shall be provided at suitable
locations. The equipment specified shall be manufactured in the manner set out and
where not set out, to the reasonable satisfaction of the Purchaser.

8.2.04 The control and relay cubicles shall be of folded type construction. The front panels,
base frame and door frame shall be manufactured from CRCA sheet steel 10
SWG(3mm) thick, while the side panels, roof and doors shall be manufactured out of
14 SWG(2mm) thick CRCA sheet steel. The bottom of the cubicle frame shall be
suitable for erection on cable trenches in the flush concrete floor. Evenly spaced
ground bolts projecting through the base channels forming members of the frame
shall be used for securing cubicles to the floor. The dimensions of control and relay
panels where no specific matching is required shall be as follows:

Height : 2312 mm (inclusive of base channel height of 102 mm).

Width : 610 mm or suitable to accommodate equipments.
Depth
Duplex panel: 610+762+610 mm (Corridor width is 762 mm).

8.2.05 The front panels of all the cubicles shall be detachable and all inter connections from
the control to the relay cubicles and vice verse shall be through terminal connectors.
The inter connections shall preferably run underneath the top cover. In order to avoid
sectionalising the leads at two points, the top cover may be provided with hinges on
the part of blinking plate or similar arrangement shall be provided on both sides of all
control and relay panels for bus wiring of common supplies (DC, PT, AC etc.)
between them . The wiring for such as wiring between panels of one board shall be
provided by the supplier. This shall be done using terminal block on both sides. They
shall be at specified distance from the top.

8.2.06 The complete switch board shall be dust and vermin proof and shall be suitable for
tropical use. All holes and extension windows in the panels shall be blanked and
access doors shall be lined with compressible line at the edges. The complete boards
shall incorporate all necessary meters, instruments, relays control switches, indicating
lamps, mimic buses, audible and visual alarms, horizontal and vertical wiring
supports, earth bars, interior lighting system, terminal blocks, cable glands, fuses,
labels, cleats, ferrules, space heaters, automatic semaphore indicators and other
necessary equipment. In the relay panels, it will be the responsibility of the supplier
to make provisions for the leads to be connected to the annunciator scheme for
different trip and non trip alarms. The enclosure shall provide a minimum degree of
protection equivalent to IP31 in accordance to IS 13947(Pt.1) for this purpose
manufacturer will furnish undertaking.

8.2.07 All power and control cables will be conduit in separate distributing trenches running
immediately, underneath the control & relay panels. The cables will branch off into
each cubicle through entry holes in the concrete floor opening in the bottoms of the
cubicles. The bidder shall mark the details of the cable entry holes, glands and

19
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

position of grouting bolts to enable the Purchaser to prepare foundations with pockets
for grouting bolts while casting floor.

8.2.08 As per requirement, the knock out holes with glands shall be provided by the bidder
in one of the base plate.

8.3 PAINTING:
All unfinished surfaces of steel panels and frame work shall be sand blasted to remove rust,
scale, foreign adhering matter and grease, a suitable rust resisting primer shall be applied on
the interior and exterior surface of steel, which shall be followed by application of an under
coat suitable to serve as base and binder for the finishing coat.

i) All sheet steel work shall be phosphated in accordance with IS: 6005 code of practice
for phosphating iron and steel.

ii) Oil, grease, dirt and swarf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning.

iii) Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by washing
with running water rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and drying.

iv) Afterphosphating thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water followed by
final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying.

v) The phosphate coating shall be sealed with application of two coats of ready mixed,
stoved type zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be "flash dried" while second
coat shall be stoved.

vi) After application of primer two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be
applied, each coat shall be applied followed by stoving the second coat shall be
applied after inspection of first coat of painting. Generally the exterior colour of paint
shall be as per shade 631 of IS:5(2007) except where specific matching is required.

vii) Each of coat of primer and finished paint shall be of slightly different shade to enable
inspection of painting.

viii) Powder coating method of painting is also acceptable.

ix) In case the bidder proposed to follow any other established painting procedure like
electrostatic painting, the procedure, shall be submitted along with the bid for
purchaser's review and approval.

8.4 PANEL WIRING :

8.4.01 All wiring other than annunciation circuits, alarmed and control circuit shall be of
switch board type 2.5 [Link] PVC insulated copper conductor suitable for 660V
service and in accordance with relevant Indian Standards, for annunciation, control
circuit and alarm, the wiring will be done with 1.5 [Link] PVC insulated copper
conductor. Polyvinyl chloride used shall have excellent resistance against burning,
moisture, oil and vermin and shall be furnished with clear colour. Rubber insulated
wiring shall not be acceptable.

20
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

8.4.02 The wiring shall be supported by plastic cleats/PVC channels, Wires shall be
terminated on to the terminal blocks with annealed and tinned (not soldered) crimp
tag termination, separate termination being used for each wire, and the size of
termination suited to the size of wire terminated. Wiring shall in general be
accommodated on the sides of the cubicles and the wires for each circuit shall be
separately grouped.

8.4.03 Wires shall not be jointed or tied between terminated points. At the terminal
connections, washers shall be interposed between terminals and holding nuts. All
holding nuts shall be secured by locking nuts. The connecting studs shall be secured
by locking nuts; the connecting studs shall be project at least 6 mm from the lock nuts
surface.

8.4.04 Bus wiring terminal blocks shall be provided in the control panel and the relaypanel
along with wiring of common circuits and common AC/DC /PT supplies, etc for inter
connection with adjacent control and relay panels. Bus wires shall be fully insulated
and run separately. Fuses and links shall be provided to enable all circuits in a panel
except lighting circuit to be isolated from the bus wire. When ever practicable all
circuits in which the voltage exceeds 125 volts shall be kept physically separated
from the remaining wiring. The function of each circuit shall be marked on the
associated terminal boards. All spare terminals of relays shall be wired upto terminal
block.

8.4.05 All wiring diagrams for the control and relay Boards shall be drawn as viewed from
the back of the cubicles and shall be in accordance with the relevant I.S.

8.4.06 Wiring connected to the space heaters in the cubicle shall have porcelain beaded
insulation over a safe length from the heater terminals.

8.4.07 All wiring inter connecting the front panels with the rear panels of the switch boards
over the access shall be wired in gutters held against the ceiling of corridors by means
of screws. As the front and the back panels will be detachable, the interconnection
shall be made through suitable terminal connectors securely fixed on the panel.

8.4.08 All potential bus wiring,audible and non audible alarm bus wiring, AC & DC control
supply, bus wiring for panel lighting and such other wiring which runs from panel to
panel within the switch board shall be laid out in gutters and shall be suitably
screened.

8.4.09 All wire shall be suitable for bending to meet the terminal studs at right angle with
the studs and they shall not be skewed. Metal cases of all apparatus mounted on
panels shall be separately earthed by means of flexible copper wire or strip.

8.4.10 The following colour scheme of the wiring shall be used:

i) A.C. three phase circuits Colour
No.1 phase Red
No.2 phase Yellow
No.3 phase Blue
ii) Neutral Black
iii) Connections to earth Green

21
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

iv) D. C. Circuits Grey

Use of coloured sleeves at both end of the wire shall not be acceptable.

8.4.11 All wire termination shall be made with insulated sleeve crimping type lugs. only
eye/ ring type of flat/ round pin type lugs, as appropriate for the terminals/terminal
boards, shall be used. Fork type or open- ended type of lugs shall not beused. Only
one wire shall be crimped in one [Link] shall not be tapped or spliced between
terminals. The insulated sleeve shall be integral part of the lug and shall not be used
for colour coding.

8.4.12 The earthing of the equipment mounted in the panels shall be done by starting the
earthing conductor from the earthing strip of all the equipment in series and then
terminating the earthing conductor at the earthing strip so that one end of any
equipment remains connected to earth even if the wire is opened at any point.

8.5 FERRULES :
8.5.01 Same ferrules should be provided at both ends of wires. Ferrules with the same
numbers, letters and symbols as indicated in the connection and wiring diagrams shall
be provided on the terminal ends of all wires for easy identification of circuits for
inspection and maintenance.

8.5.02 Ferrules shall be strong and flexible insulating material with glossy finish to present
adhesion . They shall be engraved and clearly and durably marked and shall not be
affected by dampness.

8.5.03 Ferrules numbering shall be in accordance with IS: 375/1963. The same ferrule
number shall not be used on wires in different circuits on a panel.

8.5.04 All points of interconnection between the wiring carried out for equipments for
different suppliers, where a change of number can not be avoided, double ferrules
shall be provided on each wire with appropriate numbers on the changing end. The
change of numbering shall be shown on the appropriate connection wiring diagram of
the equipment.

8.6 TERMINAL BOARDS:

8.6.01 Terminal block connectors built from cells of moulded dielectric and brass stud
inserts shall be provided for terminating the outgoing ends of the panel wiring and the
corresponding incoming tail ends of control cables. The terminals for CT & PT
wiring shall be sliding link type. Insulating barrier shall be provided between adjacent
connections. The height of the barriers and the spacing between terminals shall be
such as to give adequate protection while allowing easy access to terminals. Provision
shall be made on each pillar for holding 10% extra connections. All blocks shall be
shrouded by easily removable shrouds of non inflammablemoulded and transparent
dielectric materials.

8.6.02 The terminal blocks shall be suitable for 660 volts service and for connection with
copper wires.

8.6.03 Terminal boards shall be mounted in such a manner as to afford easy access to
terminations and to enable ferrule number to be read without difficulty. Wire ends

22
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

shall be so connected to the terminals that no wire terminal number gets marked due
to succeeding connections. In other words ferrule numbering at the terminals should
be unambiguous and fool proof. Terminal board rows shall be adequately spaced and
shall not be less than 100 mm apart so as to permit convenient access to wires and
terminals. Labels in the form of engraved plastic plates shall be provided on the fixed
portion of terminal boards.

8.6.04 No live metal parts shall be exposed at the back of the terminal boards.

8.6.05 All studs, nuts, bolts screws etc. shall be threaded according to the latest relevant
Indian or equivalent Inter- national Standards.

8.6.06 The terminal blocks shall be stud type only. The connecting studs shall be locked by
locking nuts or by use of a spring washer. The connecting studs shall project at least 2
threads from the lock nuts surface. Terminal blocks for CT & PT shall be
Disconnecting type.

8.7 SPACE HEATERS :

Tubular space heaters suitable for connection to the single phase 230 volts A.C. supply
complete with switches located at convenient positions shall be provided at the bottom of
each cubicle to prevent condensation of [Link] Watt loss per unit surface of heater
shall be low enough to keep surface temperature well below visible heat. Each cubicle shall
also be provided with a switch of appropriate rating for control for space heater.

8.8 MIMIC DIAGRAM :

Painted colour bands or painted dove tailed aluminium strips shall be used for the mimic bus.
The Width of mimic diagram and its colour shall be matched with the existingpanel. The
mimic shall represent a single line arrangement of the station switch Yard equipment having
two buses (one main bus for 132 kV Panel)and transfer bus arrangement. The following
colours for showing the various voltages on the mimic shall be used:

132 kV Black
33 kV Brilliant green (shade No.221 of IS 5)

The mimic diagram shall be of the eye level type Automatic, rotating disc type semaphore
indicators for indication of „Close‟ and „Open‟ position of circuit breakers, isolators and
earth switches shall be incorporated in the mimic diagram. Other equipments such as
transformers, voltage Transformers etc. shall be represented by suitable symbols.

8.9 SEMAPHORE INDICATORS :

The operating coils of the semaphore indicators shall be continuously rated and shall be
operated from 220/110 volts DC The units will operate satisfactorily between the limits of 80
to 120 percent of rated DC voltage. The Semaphore disc shall have a 90 degree angular
movement clock wise/counter clock wise to show on/off position of the equipment.

8.10 INDICATING LAMPS :

8.10.01 Indicating lamps shall be provided on the control Board to indicate the following:
i) Visual indication of „ON‟ and „OFF‟ position of each circuit breaker.
ii) Auto trip indication for each circuit breaker.

23
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

iii) Spring charged indication/normal pressure indication for circuit breaker.

8.10.02Each lamp body shall be of moulded insulation and shall be able to withstand a high
voltage of appropriate value. The lamp shall be suitable for 220/110 volts DC supply
and single phase AC supply and shall have low wattage of consumption and shall
provide a wide angle of illumination of sufficient intensity for comfortable viewing.

8.10.03The circuit breaker position indication lamps shall be LED type and shall operate on
DC supply.

8.10.04A glass of appropriate colour shall be screwed into the front of the lamps body. The
design of the indication lamps shall be such as to facilitate replacement of burnt
lamps. An engraved label indicating the purpose of the lamp shall be provided with
each lamp. The bidder shall quote unit prices for lamps and lenses to enable the
Purchaser to order certain spare quantity along with the main panels.

8.10.5 The circuit breaker position indication lamps shall be LED type and shall operate on
D.C. supply.

8.11 SWITCH BOARD LIGHTING :

8.11.01The switch Board interiors shall be illuminated by 2 feet tube light. The illumination
of interior shall be free from hand shadows and shall be planned to avoid any strain or
fatigue to the wireman who may be called upon to do work.

8.11.02A door operated button switch shall be provided for control of lighting on both
entrances of corridor of duplex C&R panels. In case of simplex panels each cubicle
shall have its own interior illumination lamp operated by respective door switch.

8.12 ANNUNCIATION:

8.12.01Each C&R panel shall be equipped with Annunciation scheme for indicating all the
annunciations required for the trip and non-trip alarms as per details given hereunder.
Each annunciation shall be clearly labelled to indicate the nature of particular
annunciation.

8.12.02The following switches shall be provided with the annunciator :

i) A common push button switch near the annunciator unit which when pressed
shall cancel the audible alarm by means of the alarm cancellation relay. The
indication lamps incorporated in the control switch shall remain illuminated,but
shall change from flashing to steady glow.
ii) A common reset push button shall be provided. By pushing this
button,annunciation shall be restored to the normal condition. The lamp
incorporated in the control switch should not glow after resetting all the
protection devices.
iii) A test push button switch shall be provided to activate all the alarm/ lamps of
the associated group as long as the test switch is held in pressed position.
iv) All above push buttons are to be provided at height convenient for their
operation. The push buttons built-in on annunciator unit itself are not
acceptable.

24
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

8.12.03Necessary auxiliary relays shall be provided in the annunciation scheme to indicate

each alarm [Link] alarm whether trip or nontrip shall have visual as well
as audible annunciation.

8.12.04The visual annunciator alarm shall be in the form of flashing display type glow
pattern. The illuminated facias with inscription on the glass transducent plastic to
indicate the operation of particular protection device shall be provided. The window
shall remain illuminated till the particular initiating contact is reset and the common
reset push button is pressed.

8.12.05As regards the audible indication, the automatic trip of the circuit breaker due to the
operation of protection relays shall be indicated by sounding of a hooter. All non trip
alarms shall be indicated by an alarm bell. Hooter and bell shall be provided on each
panel.

8.12.06(a) The DC supply used for annunciation shall be separate and independent
from the DC supply used for other [Link] scheme using AC supply
(230V) shall be provided for monitoring the DC supply used for the annunciation
scheme. Annunciation scheme which have inbuilt DC supervision facility operating
totally on AC supply can also be accepted in place of separate scheme for monitoring
the DC supply used for the annunciation scheme. This scheme shall have accept& test
push buttons and DC bell along with lamp indication of DC supply failure.
(b) The AC supply used for monitoring the annunciation DC supply failure
shall also be provided with audio visual alarm against failure of this AC supply.

8.13 DETAILS OF TRIP AND NON TRIP ALARMS :

8.13.1 132 kV Feeder C&R Panel:
Following trip/non trip alarms shall be provided for each 132 kV feeder C&R Panel.

[Link] Trip Alarms Facia Indications (132kV Feeder):

i) Trip relay (86) operated.
ii) Distance Prot. Operated.
iii) Over current Prot. Operated.
vi) Earth fault Prot. Operated.
v) Spare.
vi) Spare.
vii) Spare.
[Link] Non Trip Alarms Facia Indications (132kV Feeder):
i) Circuit breaker OFF.
ii) Broken conductor Alarm.
iii) Protection DC Fail.
iv) Distance Protect. Unhealthy.
v) VT Fuse Fail.
vi) VT not Selected.
vii) CB Trip Circuit-1 Faulty.
viii) CB Trip Circuit-2 Faulty.
ix) CB Low Air Pressure.
x) CB Low SF 6 Gas Pressure.
xi) CB Low Air/SF 6 Gas Pressure Lockout.
xii) Control Board AC Supply Fail.

25
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

xiii) Backup protection unhealthy.

xiv) Trip relay I unhealthy.
xv) Spare.

8.13.2 132 kV Bus Coupler C&R Panel:

Following trip/non trip alarms shall be provided for each 132 KV Bus coupler panel:

[Link] Trip alarms facia indications (132 kV Bus Coupler):

i) Over current protection operated.
ii) Earth fault protection operated.
iii) Trip relay (86) operated
[Link] Non Trip alarm faciaindications(132 kV Bus Coupler):
i) Protection DC fail
ii) VT not selected.
iii) CB trip circuit-1 faulty.
iv) CB trip circuit-2 faulty.
v) CB low air pressure.
vi) CB low SF6 gas pressure.
vii) CB low air/SF6 gas pressure lockout.
viii) Control Board AC supply.
ix) Circuit breaker off

8.13.3 132kV side of 132/33kV transformers.

Following trip/non trip alarms shall be provided for each transformer panel:

[Link] Trip Alarms facia indications (132kV side of 132/33kV Tr.):

i) Differential Prot. operated.
ii) Over current [Link].
iii) Earth fault [Link].
iv) Over Flux [Link].
v) Buchholz alarm-I.
vi) Buchholz alarm-II.
vii) Buchholz trip-I.
viii) Buchholz trip-II.
ix) Pressure relief device operated.
x) HV/LV winding temp. trip.
xi) Oil [Link].
xii) OLTC surge relay trip.
xiii) Restricted Earth Fault ( For HV)
xiv) Restricted Earth Fault (For LV)
xv) Trip relay (86) operated
xvi) Spare
xvii) Spare
[Link] NonTrip alarm faciaindications(132 kV side of 132/33kV Tr.) :
i) Over flux prot. Alarm
ii) HV/LV winding [Link].
iii) Oil temp. high
iv) Oil level low.
v) OLTC oil level low.

26
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

vi) Protection DC fail.

vii) Differential protection unhealthy.
viii) CB trip circuit-1/2 faulty.
ix) CB low air pressure.
x) CB low SF6 gas pressure.
xi) CB low air/SF6 gas pressure lockout.
xii) Control Board AC supply fail.
xiii) Voltage failure alarm for Over Flux relay
xiv) Voltage failure alarm for O/C & E/F relay.
xv) Air cell alarm.
xvi) Trip circuit 1 supervision Alarm.
xvii) Trip circuit 2 supervision Alarm.
xviii) Watch dog alarm for all numerical relays.
xix) Voltage not selected alarm.
xx) Circuit breaker OFF

8.13.4 It will be responsibility of the supplier to provide all the alarms and annunciation
equipments required for the safe and efficient operation of the sub stations. General
description of the alarms required are given but the supplier shall include other alarms that he
considers necessary.

8.14 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION :

For continuous supervision of the trip circuits, continuous trip circuit supervision relay shall
be installed. The relay shall operate self reset alarm contact for failure of trip supply and
open circuit of trip coil or trip circuit wiring. The relay shall monitor the trip circuit in both
close and open position of the circuit breakers upto the auxiliary NO contact of CB trip
circuits. The 132 kV SF6 circuit breakers are gang operated with 2 trip coils. Two Nos.
supervision relays shall be required for these circuit breakers. There would be 2 sets of alarm
annunciations for 132 kV circuit breakers. Trip circuit supervision in 132 kV Feeder C&R
Panels may be done by distance protection scheme and numerical O/C & E/F relay.

8.15 TITLE PLATES AND NAME PLATE:

8.15.1 A title plate bearing the name and purpose of each panel shall be fixed on the top of
each control as well as relay panel.
8.15.2 Control and relay panels shall be provided with a name plate. The name plate shall be
weather and corrosion proof. It shall be mounted back side of the panels. It shall carry
the information duly engraved/punched as detailed hereunder:
i) Manufacturer's name.
ii) PONo. RVPN/SE ( )/XEN- /A- /BN-/[Link]
iii) [Link]. of panel
iv) Month of despatch.
v) Particulars of panel.
(a) Description of panel
(b) CT secondary
(c) DC auxiliary voltage.
vi) Guarantee period:

27
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

8.16 TEST BLOCKS FOR TESTING OF PROTECTION SCHEME/RELAYS:

Switch board type back connected test blocks alongwith Test plug10 Nos. of upper and 10
Nos. lower terminals (Similar to universal type AREVA make MPG test block and MPB test
plug)shall be provided for shorting terminals of CT loads and isolating the tripping circuit
before interrupting the normal circuit for injection from an external source or for inserting
testing instruments in the circuit without causing open circuit of the CT. The potential testing
studs shall preferably be housed in the narrow recesses of the block moulding insulation to
prevent accidental short circuit across the studs. All test blocks for the relays etc.,whenever
required, shall properly be of flush mounting pattern and the number of test blocks being
provided on each control and relay panel shall be stated in the bid.

Irrespective of number of test blocks provided on each panel, one number test plug with a lot
of 5 panels or part thereof shall be supplied necessarily, free of cost.

In case if test block is the part of the relay itself then one number test handle/ test plug with a
lot of each 5 panels or part thereof shall be supplied necessarily, free of cost.

8.17 SAFETY EARTHING:

Earthing of current free metallic parts or metallic bodies of the equipments mounted on the
switch boards shall be done with 2.5 [Link] green coloured PVC insulated copper wire. The
two ends of this line shall be provided with crimp tag terminations and connected to a tinned
copper earth bar of 25mm x 3mm section running longitudinally at the bottom of the Control
Board.
The neutral point of star connected secondary winding of instrument transformers and one
corner of the open delta connected LV side of potential transformers, if used, shall not be
earthed in the panels. Multiple earthing of any instrument transformer circuit shall be
avoided.
9.0 BILL OF MATERIAL

9.1 The C&R panels, required at various sub stations can be broadly classified into
following categories of panels :
[Link]. Particulars Duplex Type of panels
1 132kV Feeder panel J-II
2 132kV Trf. panel for HV side of 132/33 kV Trf. K-III
3 132kV Bus coupler panel L-II

9.2 a) The requirement of various sub stations will comprise of one or more of these panels.
The simplex panel shall be complete in itself and provided with doors at the back,
while the continuous board of Duplex panels shall have end doors at each end of the
corridor between relay and control position of the set of duplex panels.
b) The supplier shall supply end doors and frames alongwith each set of each type of
132kV duplex type feeder Control & Relay panel. The end doors shall be detachable
type fitted on a detachable frame with suitable hinges. The frame size shall be 2200
mm height & 760 mm width. The frame shall be fitted so that its base shall be at the
floor level.A channel of height 100 mm shall be fitted above the frame.

28
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

9.3 DETAILS OF EQUIPMENTS TO BE MOUNTED ON EACH PANELS:

The control and relay panel shall generally be equipped as under, however if auxiliary
relays are required to complete the protection scheme as per site requirement, same
shall be supplied free of cost.

9.4 132kV FEEDER CONTROL & RELAY PANEL TYPE J-II (DUPLEX):
9.4.01 132kV Feeder Control Panel:

[Link]. Qty. Particular

1 One Section of painted mimic diagram with symbols.
2 Four Automatic semaphore indicator for four Isolator and one earth
switch position indication.
3 One Automatic semaphore indicator for circuit breaker position
indication.
4 One Three position locking pattern control switch, spring return to
normal and having contacts with lost motion device with pistol
grip handle for control of 132 kV circuit breakers with the
following positions:
i) Closeii) Normal iii) Trip.
5 Two Breaker position indicating lamps red and green.
6 One Indicating lamp fitted with a white lens and labelled „Auto trip‟.
7 One Indicating lamp fitted with an Amber lens and labelled „CB
Spring Charged‟.
8 One Digital Multifunction meter.
9 One 3 phase 4 wireAC static trivector meter of 0.2S class accuracy
10 One One 24 way annunciation scheme complete with auxiliary relays
and control switches with hooter & bell.
11 One 3 phase 4 wire link type Test terminal block for testing of
Trivector meter.
12 One Three position locking pattern control switch stay put type with
pistol grip handle for trip transfer with the following position.
i) Trip transfer ii) Inter iii) Normal.
13 One Three position locking pattern synchronizing selector switch stay
put type with pistol grip handle with the following position.
i) By pass ii) Off iii) Check synchronizing.
14 One Three position locking pattern selector switch stay put type with
pistol grip handle with the following position.
i) Dead bus ii) Off iii) Check synchronizing.
15 One Selector switch for Main DC-I and Main DC-II

9.4.02 132kV Feeder Relay Panel:

[Link]. Qty. Particular

1 One Directional distance scheme as per clause 4.01.1 of this
specification
2 One Numerical communicable combined IDMT Directional Over
current and Directional earth fault relay with voltage polarisation
& wide range of maximum torque angle (having three element of

29
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

O/C and one element of E/F)

4 Two High speed master tripping relay having 2 normally closed and
12 normally open hand reset pair contacts for intertrip facility
with duplicated trip contacts and for closing interlock, separate
for distance and backup protection.
5 One Test block for testing of distance scheme set (clause 8.16).
6 As Test block for testing of O/C, E/F & other relays (clause 8.16)
Required
7 One Two position locking pattern selector switch stay put type with
pistol grip handle for carrier selection with the following
positions:
i) Carrier In ii) Carrier Out
8 One Contact multiplication relay for isolator auxiliary switch.
9 One BNC Connector for Time synchronisation
10 One BNC Connector for Time synchronization (Female to two
female BNC ‘T’ connector)

9.5 132 kV BUS COUPLER CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS TYPE L-II
(DUPLEX):
9.5.01 132 kV Bus Coupler Control Panel:

[Link]. Qty. Particular

1 One Section of mimic diagram and symbols.
2 Three Automatic semaphore indicators for isolator position indication.
3 One Automatic semaphore indicator for automatic indication of
circuit breaker position
4 One Three position locking pattern control switch, spring return to
normal and having contacts with onelost motion device pistol
grip for control of 132 kV circuit breaker with the following
positions:
i) Closeii) Normal iii) Trip.
5 Two Breaker position indicating lamps Red and Green.
6 One One indicating lamp fitted with a white lens & labelled „Auto
trip‟.
7 One One indicating lamp fitted with an amber lens & labelled „CB
Spring Charged‟
8 Two Flush switch board mounting digital AC voltmeter of class 1.0
accuracy.
9 One 3 phase 4 wireAC static trivector meter of 0.2S class accuracy
10 Six Voltmeter lamps with lenses coloured Red, Amber and Blue for
VT supply indication.
11 Two Voltmeter selector switch to indicate voltage between phases
and between phase & Earth.
12 One Three position locking pattern selector switch stay put type with
pistol grip handle with the following positions:
i) Dead bus ii) Off iii) Check synchronizing.
13 One Three position locking pattern synchronizing selector switch stay
put type with pistol grip handle with the following positions:
i) By pass ii) Off iii) Check synchronizing.

30
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

[Link]. Qty. Particular

14 One 18 way Annunciation scheme complete with auxiliary relays and
control switch with hooter & bell.
15 One One Digital Multifunction Meter
16 One 3 phase 4 wire link type test terminal block of 15 amps. rating
for testing of static trivector meter (clause 7.05)
17 One Set of 3 control push buttons for 'ACCEPT', „RESET‟ and
„LAMP TEST‟ common for 18 way annunciation scheme
provided in panel
18 One Selector switch for Main DC-I and Main DC-II

9.5.02 132 kV Bus Coupler Relay Panel:

[Link]. Qty. Particulars

1 Two Numerical communicable Inverse non directional over current
relays
2 One Numerical communicable Non directional earth fault relay
3 One High speed master tripping relay having 2 normally closed and 6
normally opened hand reset pair of contacts with duplicated trip
contacts
4 As Test block for testing of O/C, E/F and other relays (clause 8.16)
Required
5 Two Contact multiplication relay for isolator auxiliary switch.
6 Six Trip circuit supervision relay suitable both for open & close
position of circuit breaker.
7 One BNC Connector for Time synchronization (Female to two
female BNC ‘T’ connector)
DC shall be supervised by numerical O/C & E/F relays

9.6 132 kV TRANSFORMER CONTROL & RELAY PANEL FOR 132/33kV

TRANSFORMERTYPE K-III (DUPLEX):

9.6.01 132kV TRANSFORMER CONTROL PANEL FOR 132/33kVTRANSFORMER

(FRONT)

[Link]. Qty. Particulars

1 One Section of mimic diagram with symbols.
2 Four Automatic semaphore indicators for Isolator position indication
3 One Automatic semaphore indictor for circuit breaker position
indication
4 One Three positions locking pattern control switch, spring return to
normal and having contacts with lost motion device with pistol
grip handle for control of 132kV circuit breaker with the
following positions :
i) Close ii) Normal iii) Trip.
5 Two Breaker position indicating lamps.
6 One Indicating lamp fitted with a white lens and labelled „Auto Trip‟
7 One Indicating lamp fitted with an Amber lens and labelled 'CB
Spring Charged'

31
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

[Link]. Qty. Particulars

8 One 3 phase 4 wireAC static trivector meter of 0.2S class accuracy
9 One Digital Multifunction meter
10 Three Indicating lamps with lenses coloured Red, Amber and Blue for
VT supply indication.
11 One 42 way annunciation scheme complete with auxiliary relays and
control switches with bell & hooter.
12 One 3 phase 4 wire Test terminal block for testing of tri-vector meter
13 One Detachable end doors and detachable frames with suitable hinges
Set for corridor between control and relay panel (Cl.9.02(b))
14 One Three position locking pattern control switch stay put type with
pistol grip handle for trip transfer with the following position.
i) Trip transfer. ii) Inter iii) Normal.
15 One Selector switch for Main DC-I and Main DC-II

9.6.02 132kV TRANSFORMER RELAY PANEL FOR 132/33 KVTRANSFORMER:

[Link]. Qty. Particulars

1 One Numerical communicable differential relay with application
software
2 One Numerical Communicable IDMT Non-Directional Over current
relay with high set element and Directional earth fault relay with
directional highset element with voltage polarisation & wide
range of maximum torque angle.(having three element of O/C
and one element of E/F )
(Note: NDR shall be part of O/C + E/F relay.)
3 Six Three element auxiliary relay for operation in conjunction with 2
Nos. for buchholz alarm, 2 Nos. for buchholz trip, 1 No. for
OLTC oil surge trip, 2 Nos. for winding temperature trip, 1 No.
for oil temperature trip, 1 No. for pressure release device trip, 1
No. for spare.
4 One Over fluxing relay for connection to LV winding. Numerical (can
be part of other relay)
5 One High speed master tripping relay having 2 normally closed and 12
normally open hand reset pair of contacts for inter trip facility
with duplicated trip contacts and for closing interlock.
6 One Test block for testing of differential relay (Cl.8.16).
7 As Test block for testing of O/C,E/F & other relays (Cl.8.16)
Required
8 Two Contact multiplication relay for isolator auxiliary switch
9 Two Restricted Earth Fault Relay (Numerical)
10 One Test block for testing of Voltage neutral displacement relay and
Over fluxing relay
11 One BNC Connector for Time synchronisation.
12 One BNC Connector for Time synchronisation. (Female to two
female BNC ‘T’ connector)

Note: Note: Trip circuit Supervision will be done by numerical REF relay for which
Binary inputs shall be capable for this feature.

32
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

Note: Irrespective of number of relay test blocks provided on each panel, one number test
plug with a lot of 5 panels or part thereof shall be supplied necessarily, free of cost.

In case if test block is the part of the relay itself then one number test handle/ test
plug with a lot of each 5 panels or part thereof shall be supplied necessarily free of
cost.

33
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

APPENDIX-GENERAL for 132 kV CRP

TECHNICAL PARAMETERS

(A) LINE CONSTANTS OF 132 kV LINE

(P.U. POSITIVE SEQUENCE VALUES PER Km)
(I) BASE 100 MVA
CONDUCTOR : SINGLEPANTHER

R1 X1 B1
SINGLE CIRCUIT .00091 .00236 .0005
DOUBLE CIRCUIT .000455 .00118 .0010
S/C 220 kV,CHARGED ON .000444 . 002363 .0005
132 kV SINGLE ZEBRA CONDUCTOR

(II) LINE LENGTH OF EACH FEEDER 0.5 Km TO 150 Km.

(B) PROPOSED TRANSFORMER CAPACITIES AT EACH STATION.

132 kV CLASS:-1X20/25 MVA 132/33kV

(C) DC AUXILIARY VOLTAGE

220 kV GSS 220V/110V
132 kV GSS 220V/110V

34
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

APPENDIX-132 kV CT
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CTs UTILISED AT VARIOUS GSS

1. 132 kV TRANSFORMER CT'SRATIO 132 KV SIDE OF 132/33kV

TRANSFORMER
Ratio :250-500/1A 3Cand 500/1A, 3C
S. Core
Description
No. I II III
1 Rated burden.
1A Secondary -- -- 10VA
2 Accuracy class PS PS 0.2S
3 Min. knee point
voltage at lowest
ratio
1A Secondary 650V 650V --
4 Max. secondary
resistance(Ohms)
1A Secondary 2.5 2.5 --

2. INSTRUMENT RANGES:

132 kV 132 kV 132 kV

S.
Description FEEDER TRANSFORMER B/C
No
PANEL (J-II) PANEL (K-III) PANEL (L-II)
1 AMMETER 0-500A 0-500A 0-500A
2 VOLTMETER 0-150V 0-150V 0-150V
3 MW METER 0-80MW N.A 0-80 MW
4 MVAR METER 0-50 N.A N.A
MVAR
5 POWER FACTOR 0.5LAG- N.A N.A
UNITY-
0.5LEAD

NOTE- BIDDERS SHALL PROVIDE TWO SCALES IN AMMETER SUITABLE FOR

HIGHER CT RATIO & NEXT LOWER RATIO ALONGWITH MULTIPLICATION
FACTOR FOR REMAINING CT RATIO IF ANY.

35
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

APPENDIX-132 kV CVT

TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CVTs UTILISED ATVARIOUS G.S.S.

[Link]. PARTICULARS 132 kV

1 Type CVT
2 Rated primary voltage 132 kV/√3
3 No. of secondary winding Three
4 110V/√3 V
110V/√3 V
110V/√3 V
5 Rated burden
Winding.I 25 VA
[Link] 25 VA
[Link] 25 VA
6 Accuracy class
Winding.I 3P
[Link] 3P
[Link] 0.2
7 Maximum ratio error with rated Within limits specified by IS:3156 for
burden & 5% normal primary accuracy class indicated
voltage
8 Maximum phase angle error with Within limits specified by IS:3156 for
rated burden & 5% normal accuracy class indicated
primary voltage
9 Oil Transformer oil conforming to IS:335
10 Temperature rise of1.2 times rated Within limits specified by IS:3156
Voltage with rated Burden
11 Rated voltage Factor and time 1.2 continuous, 1.5 for 30 seconds
12 Temperature for11 above Within limits specified by IS:3156

36
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

Appendix-D1

STANDARD WIRING ON TB OF 132 & 220 KV FEEDER C&R PANEL

Ferrule TB No. & Ferrule TB No. &
Description Description
Marking Position Marking Position
Main DC- I J1 CX2-31 TC2 Supervision K61 RX4 - 47
J2 CX2-32 Pre-close K63 RX4 - 48
Main DC-II J3 CX2-33 K65 RX4 - 50
J4 CX2-34 K67 RX4 - 51
Annunc. DC J21 CX2-35 K69 RX4 - 53
J22 CX2-36 K71 RX4 - 54
Control DC K1 RX4-33 Bus 1 VT Protection E11A RX3 - 25
K2 RX4-34 Core E31A RX3 - 26
Trip Ckt. 1 Protection K3A RX4 - 35 E51A RX3 - 27
Trip K3B RX4 - 38 E71A RX3 - 28
K3C RX4 - 41 Bus 1 VT Metering E21A RX3 - 29
Trip Ckt. 2 Manual K53 RX1 - 22 Core E41A RX3 - 30
trip(For 132 KV TC1 K55 RX1 - 23 E61A RX3 - 31
& TC2) K57 RX1 - 24 E81A RX3 - 32
K59 RX1 - 25 Bus 2 VT Protection E11B RX3 - 33
Control DC K51 RX4-44 Core E31B RX3 - 34
K52 RX4-45 E51B RX3 - 35
Trip Ckt. 2 Protection K53A RX4 - 46 E71B RX3 - 36
trip K53B RX4 - 49 Bus 2 VT Metering E21B RX3 - 37
K53C RX4 - 52 Core E41B RX3 - 38
CT wiring (Main - I) A11 RX3 - 1 E61B RX3 - 39
A31 RX3 - 2 E81B RX3 - 40
A51 RX3 - 3 LBB B211 RX3 - 17
A71 RX3 - 4 B231 RX3 - 18
CT wiring (Main - II) A21 RX3 - 5 B251 RX3 - 19
Only for 220 KV A41 RX3 - 6 B271 RX3 - 20
A61 RX3 - 7 CB Status L1 CX2 - 1
A81 RX3 - 8 OFF L3 CX2 - 4
CT wiring Back Up C11 RX3 - 5 ON L5 CX2 - 5
(Only for 132 KV) C31 RX3 - 6 SEM OFF L7 CX2-6
C51 RX3 - 7 SEM ON L11 CX2-2
C71 RX3 - 8 Auto Trip L13 CX2-3
CT Metering Core D - 11 CX3 - 1 CB status for Relay R K 39 RX 6-13
Ph
D - 31 CX3 - 2 CB status for Relay K41 RX 6-14
YPh
D - 51 CX3 - 3 CB status for Relay K43 RX 6-15
BPh
D - 71 CX3 - 4 Positive for CB status K101 RX 6-16
Line PT Wdg. 1 E111 CX1 - 5 Isolator Status K1 RX6 - 1
E131 CX1 - 6 Bus-I OFF K13A RX6 - 3
E151 CX1 - 7 Bus-I ON K15A RX6 - 2
E171 CX1 - 8

37
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

Ferrule TB No. & Ferrule TB No. &

Description Description
Marking Position Marking Position
Line PT Wdg. 2 E211 RX3 - 21 K1 RX6 - 4
E231 RX3 - 22 Bus-II OFF K17A RX6 - 6
E251 RX3 - 23 Bus-II ON K19A RX6 - 5
E271 RX3 - 24
TC1 Supervision K9 RX4 - 36 K1 RX6 - 7
Pre-close K11 RX4 - 37 Aux Bus -OFF K21A RX6 - 9
K13 RX4 - 39 Aux. Bus- ON K23A RX6 - 8
K15 RX4 - 40 K1 RX6 - 10
K17 RX4 - 42 Line- OFF K25A RX6 - 12
K19 RX4 - 43 Line -ON K27A RX6 - 11
Closing K21 RX1 - 19
K31 RX1 - 20
Auto Reclose K36 RX1 - 21
H1 CX1-1
AC Supply
H2 CX1-2

Note: Terminal / ferrules not applicable shall be left unutilized

38
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

Appendix-D2
STANDARD WIRING ON TB OF 132 & 220 KV BUS-COUPLER C&R PANEL
Ferrule TB No. & Ferrule TB No. &
Description Description
Marking Position Marking Position
J1 CX2-31 Bus 1 VT E21A RX3 - 29
Main DC-I Metering Core
J2 CX2-32 E41A RX3 - 30
J3 CX2-33 E61A RX3 - 31
Main DC-II
J4 CX2-34 E81A RX3 - 32
J21 CX2-35 Bus 2 VT E11B RX3 - 33
Annunc. DC Protection Core
J22 CX2-36 E31B RX3 - 34
K1 RX4-33 E51B RX3 - 35
Control DC
K2 RX4-34 E71B RX3 - 36
Trip Ckt. 1 K3A RX4 - 35 Bus 2 VT E21B RX3 - 37
(Protection Trip) K3B RX4 - 38 Metering Core E41B RX3 - 38
K3C RX4 - 41 E61B RX3 - 39
Trip Ckt. 2 K53 RX1 - 22 E81B RX3 - 40
Manual trip(For K55 RX1 - 23 LBB (Only for 220 B211 RX3 - 17
132 KV TC1 & KV)
K57 RX1 - 24 B231 RX3 - 18
TC2)
K59 RX1 - 25 B251 RX3 - 19
K51 RX4-44 B271 RX3 - 20
Control DC
K52 RX4-45 CB Status L1 CX2 - 1
Trip Ckt. 2 K53A RX4 - 46 OFF L3 CX2 - 4
Protection trip K53B RX4 - 49 ON L5 CX2 - 5
K53C RX4 - 52 [Link] L7 CX2-6
CT wiring Back C11 RX3 - 1 [Link] L11 CX2-2
Up C31 RX3 - 2 Auto Trip L13 CX2-3
C51 RX3 - 3 CB status for K 39 RX 6-13
Relay R Ph
C71 RX3 - 4 CB status for K41 RX 6-14
Relay YPh
CT Metering D - 11 CX3 - 1 CB status for K43 RX 6-15
Core Relay BPh
D - 31 CX3 - 2 Positive for CB K101 RX 6-16
status
D - 51 CX3 - 3 Isolator Status K1 RX6 - 1
D - 71 CX3 - 4 Bus-I OFF K13A RX6 - 3
Bus-I ON K15A RX6 - 2
TC1 Supervision K9 RX4 - 36 K1 RX6 - 4
Pre-close K11 RX4 - 37 Bus-II OFF K17A RX6 - 6
K13 RX4 - 39 Bus-II ON K19A RX6 - 5
K15 RX4 - 40 K1 RX6 - 7
K17 RX4 - 42 Transfer ISO. - K21A RX6 - 9
OFF

39
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

Ferrule TB No. & Ferrule TB No. &

Description Description
Marking Position Marking Position
K19 RX4 - 43 Transfer ISO. -ON K23A RX6 - 8
TC2 Supervision K61 RX4 - 47 K1 RX6-10
Pre-close K63 RX4 - 48 Coupler ISO. OFF K25A RX6-12
K65 RX4 - 50 Coupler ISO. ON K27A RX6-11
K67 RX4 - 51 Closing K21 RX1 - 19
K69 RX4 - 53 K31 RX1 - 20
K71 RX4 - 54 Auto Reclose K36 RX1 - 21
AC Supply H1 CX1-1
H2 CX1-2

Note: Terminal / ferrules not applicable shall be left unutilized

40
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

Appendix–D3
STANDARD WIRING ON TB OF 132 & 220 KV TRANSFORMER C&R PANEL

Ferrule TB No. & Ferrule TB No. &

Description Description
Marking Position Marking Position
Main DC-I J1 CX2-31 Bus 1 VT E21A RX3 - 29
J2 CX2-32 Metering Core E41A RX3 - 30
Main DC-II J3 CX2-33 E61A RX3 - 31
J4 CX2-34 E81A RX3 - 32
Annunc. DC J21 CX2-35 Bus 2 VT E11B RX3 - 33
J22 CX2-36 Protection Core E31B RX3 - 34
Control DC K1 RX4-33 E51B RX3 - 35
K2 RX4-34 E71B RX3 - 36
Trip Ckt. 1 K3A RX4 - 35 Bus 2 VT E21B RX3 - 37
Protection Trip K3B RX4 - 38 Metering Core E41B RX3 - 38
K3C RX4 - 41 E61B RX3 - 39
Trip Ckt. 2 Manual K53 RX1 - 22 E81B RX3 - 40
trip (For 132 KV K55 RX1 - 23 OVER FLUX ER OF RX3 – 41
TC1 & TC2) K57 RX1 - 24 RELAY (From EY OF RX3 – 42
K59 RX1 - 25 RVT/LV Side of EB OF RX3 – 43
Control DC K51 RX4-44 TRF PT) EN OF RX3 - 44
K52 RX4-45 Neutral E NDR RX3 – 45
Displacement E NDR RX3 - 46
Relay (From
RVT/HV Side of
TRF PT)
LBB B211 RX3 - 17
Trip Ckt. 2 K53A RX4 - 46 (Only for 220 KV) B231 RX3 - 18
Protection trip K53B RX4 - 49 B251 RX3 - 19
K53C RX4 - 52 B271 RX3 - 20
CT wiring A111 RX3 - 1 CB Status L1 CX2 - 1
(Differential - HV) A131 RX3 - 2 OFF L3 CX2 - 4
A151 RX3 - 3 ON L5 CX2 - 5
A171 RX3 - 4 [Link] L7 CX2 - 6
CT wiring A211 RX3 - 5 [Link] L11 CX2 - 2
(Differential- LV) A231 RX3 - 6 Auto Trip L13 CX2 - 3
A251 RX3 - 7 CB status for K 39 RX 6-13
Relay RPh
A271 RX3 - 8 CB status for K41 RX 6-14
Relay YPh
CT Wiring Back C11 RX3-21 CB status for K43 RX 6-15
UP Relay BPh
C31 RX3-22 Positive for CB K101 RX 6-16
status
C51 RX3-23 For Isolator Status K1 RX6 - 1
C71 RX3-24 Isolator Bus-I K13A RX6 - 3
OFF
Isolator Bus-I ON K15A RX6 - 2

41
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

Ferrule TB No. & Ferrule TB No. &

Description Description
Marking Position Marking Position
CT Metering Core D - 11 CX3 - 1 For Isolator Status K1 RX6 - 4
D - 31 CX3 - 2 Isolator Bus-II K17A RX6 - 6
OFF
D - 51 CX3 - 3 Isolator Bus-II K19A RX6 - 5
ON
D - 71 CX3 - 4 For Isolator Status K1 RX6 - 7
TC1 Supervision K9 RX4 - 36 Isolator Aux Bus - K21A RX6 - 9
Pre-close OFF
K11 RX4 - 37 Isolator Aux. Bus- K23A RX6 - 8
ON
K13 RX4 - 39 For Isolator Status K1 RX6 - 10
K15 RX4 - 40 Isolator K25A RX6 - 12
Transformer- OFF
K17 RX4 - 42 Isolator K27A RX6 - 11
Transformer- ON
K19 RX4 - 43 Closing Command K21 RX1 - 19
TC2 Supervision K61 RX4 - 47 K31 RX1 - 20
Pre-close K63 RX4 - 48 REF (132 kV A181 RX3-9
K65 RX4 - 50 Panel) HV A182 RX3-10
K67 RX4 - 51 REF (132 kV A281 RX3-11
K69 RX4 - 53 Panel) LV A282 RX3-12
K71 RX4 - 54 REF (220 kV A181 RX3-9
Bus 1 VT E11A RX3 - 25 Panel) A182 RX3-10
Protection Core E31A RX3 - 26 High Impedance A21 RX3-13
E51A RX3 - 27 Differential A41 RX3-14
E71A RX3 - 28 A61 RX3-15
A81 RX3-16
H1 CX1-1
AC Supply
H2 CX1-2

Standard Ferruling of Transformer Aux. Protection At C& R Panel

Purpose Ferrule T B No.
Positive for Aux. Prot. Alarm L101 RX7-01
Oil Temp. High Alarm OTA RX7-02
HV Winding Temp. High Alarm HWTA RX7-03
LV Winding Temp. High Alarm LWTA RX7-04
MOLG Main Conservator Tank Alarm LOAM RX7-05
MOLG OLTC Conservator Tank Alarm LOAOL RX7-06
Air Cell Fail Alarm ACF RX7-07
Positive for Aux. Prot. DC 1 Trip K 101 RX7-08
Oil Temp. High Trip OTT RX7-09
HV Winding Temp. High Trip HWTT RX7-10
Buchholz Relay 1 Alarm BA1 RX7-11
Buchholz Relay 1 Trip BT1 RX7-12

42
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

Pressure Relief Device 1 Trip PRD1 RX7-13

Pressure Relief Device OLTC PRDOL RX7-14
OLTC OSR Common Trip OSRC RX7-15
Purpose Ferrule T B No.
Positive for Aux. Prot. DC 2 Trip K 201 RX7-16
LV Winding Temp. High Trip LWTT RX7-17
Buchholz Relay 2 Alarm BA2 RX7-18
Buchholz Relay 2 Trip BT2 RX7-19
Pressure Relief Device 2 Trip PRD2 RX7-20
OLTC OSR U-Phase Trip OSRU RX7-21
OLTC OSR V-Phase Trip OSRV RX7-22
OLTC OSR W-Phase Trip OSRW RX7-23

Note: Terminal / ferrules not applicable shall be left unutilized

43
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

Schedule-GTP
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR SUPPLY OF 132kV
FEEDER, BUS COUPLER & TRANSFORMER CONTROL & RELAY PANELS

S. No. PARTICULARS Details

1 GENERAL
a. Manufacturers Name
b. Postal address for correspondence
i Name of In charge
ii Telephone No.
iii Fax no.
c. Works Address
i Name of In charge
ii Telephone No.
iii Fax no.
2 INDICATING INSTRUMENTS
2(i) DIGITAL VOLTMETER
a Make
b Type
c Size
d VA Burden
e Power Consumption
f Standards to which conforms
g Class of accuracy.
h Range of Dial
i Limits of error in effective range
j Calibration for:
i) PT ratio
k Whether Magnetically shielded or not
l Colour Finish
m Short time overload capacity
n Type of communication port & communication protocol.
o The height of figures for digital display
2(ii) DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL METER
a Make
b Type
c Size
d VA Burden
i) Current Coil
ii) Potential Coil
e Power Consumption
i) Current Coil
ii) Potential Coil
f Standards to which conforms
g Class of accuracy.
h Range of Dial
i Limits of error in effective range

44
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

S. No. PARTICULARS Details

j Calibration for:
i) CT ratio
ii) PT ratio
k Whether Magnetically shielded or not
l Colour Finish
m Short time overload capacity
n Type of communication port & communication protocol.
o The height of figures for digital display for digital meters
3(i) CONTROL SWITCHES FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER
a Make
b Type
c Type of handle provided
d No. of Position
e No. of contacts
i) Normally Closed
ii) Normally Open
f Making Capacity / breaking capacity
i) At 220 / 110 V DC for both inductive and non inductive
currents
ii) At 230 V 50 c/s AC for both inductive current
g Whether spring return to neutral or stay put type
h Type of lock provided
i Whether have two sets of contacts which shall remain closed in
neutral after close position
3(ii) CONTROL SWITCHES FOR TRIP TRANSFER
a Make
b Type
c Type of handle provided
d No. of Position
e No. of contacts
i) Normally Closed
ii) Normally Open
f Making Capacity / breaking capacity
i) At 220 / 110 V DC for both inductive and non inductive
currents
ii) At 230 V 50 c/s AC for both inductive current
g Whether spring return to neutral or stay put type
h Type of lock provided
i Whether have two sets of contacts which shall remain closed in
neutral after close position
3(iii) DEAD BUS CLOSING SWITCH
a Make
b Type
c Type of handle provided
d No. of Position
e No. of contacts

45
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

S. No. PARTICULARS Details

i) Normally Closed
ii) Normally Open
f Making Capacity / breaking capacity
i) At 220 / 110 V DC for both inductive and non inductive
currents
ii) At 230 V 50 c/s AC for both inductive current
g Whether spring return to neutral or stay put type
h Type of lock provided
i Whether have two sets of contacts which shall remain closed in
neutral after close position
3(iv) SYNCHRONIZING SELECTOR SWITCH
a Make
b Type
c Type of handle provided
d No. of Position
e No. of contacts
i) Normally Closed
ii) Normally Open
f Making Capacity / breaking capacity
i) At 220 / 110 V DC for both inductive and non inductive
currents
ii) At 230 V 50 c/s AC for both inductive current
g Whether spring return to neutral or stay put type
h Type of lock provided
i Whether have two sets of contacts which shall remain closed in
neutral after close position
4 SELECTOR SWITCHES FOR AMMETER/ VOLTMETER
a Make
b Type
c Type of handle provided
d No. of Position
i) In Ammeter
ii) In Voltmeter
e No. of contacts in each position
i) Open
ii) Closed
f Making Capacity breaking capacity
g Breaking Capacity of contacts
h Whether locking arrangements provided or not
5 CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS
a Dimensions of control and relay panels
I Control panel
i) Height
ii) Width
iii) Depth
II Relay panel

46
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

S. No. PARTICULARS Details

i) Height
ii) Width
iii) Depth
b Width of corridor for duplex panels
c Dimension of supporting channels
d Overall dimensions of C&R Panels Height x Width x Depth
e Thickness of CRCA sheet steel proposed for use on panels
i) Front, door frame, base frame
ii) Side Panels, roof, doors
f Degree of protection
g Painting Process in as per Cl. 8.3
h Whether detachable end doors fitted on a detachable frame
with suitable hinges is provided for each set of 132 KV duplex
type Feeder C&R Panels (Cl. 9.02.b of spec)
i) Height of detachable frame
ii) Width of detachable frame
iii) Channel height fitted above the detachable frame
6 SEMAPHORE INDICATORS
a Make
b Type
c Diameter of the disc (mm)
i) For Isolator
ii) For Breaker
d Operating voltage
e Burden (Watts DC)
f Whether latch in type or supply failure type
7 INDICATING LAMPS
a Make
b Type (LED Type)
c Operating Voltage
d Size of Lens
e Wattage of Lamp
f Colour of lamps body
g Colour of lamps for CB position
i) CB ON
ii) CB OFF
iii) CB AUTO TRIP
iv) CB Air Pressure Normal
8 SWITCHBOARD WIRING
a Insulation of wiring
b Size of wiring conductor for :
i) CT Circuits
ii) PT Circuits
iii) DC Supply Circuits
iv) Alarm & Annunciator Circuit
c Size of earthing bar for safety earthing

47
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

S. No. PARTICULARS Details

d Type of Terminal provided on wiring
e Wiring Conductor
f Colour scheme of the wiring
i) AC 3 phase circuit
ii) No.1 phase
iii) No.2 phase
iv) No.3 phase
g Whether same ferrules provided at both ends of wires
9 OVER CURRENT RELAY + EARTH FAULT RELAY
A Maker's name
B Type of the Relay
i) Specified by manufacturer
ii) Whether the relay is draw out or non draw out
iii) Whether relay is numerical & communicable type
iv) Whether relay has provision of testing by injecting the
voltage/current/frequency(as applicable) from external testing
instruments/source without first disconnecting/de-energising
the Electrical circuit protected by the Relay and isolating the
tripping circuit of relay during such testing
v) Whether test block is required for testing of Relay
vi) Whether test block is inbuilt
vii) Whether test block is provided in panel
viii) Whether test plug is required for testing the relay
ix) Details of testing facilities provided in relay
x) Whether relay have provision to initiate a trip command
externally through push button/ programmable switch or
through attracted armature relays
xi) In case of directional relays whether relay have provision to
check the directional feature and to make the relay non
directional through a specified procedure. Details of specified
procedure be indicated
C Current coil rating
D Tap range
E VA Burden
F Time of operation at max. time dial setting at :
i) 5 times the tap setting current
ii) 10 times the tap setting current
G Type of characteristics
H Trip contact rating
I Whether seal in contacts provided
J No. of contacts
i) Digital Input
ii) Digital Output
K Make & Type of software for Numerical Relays
L Type & number of communication ports
M Whether Front communication port is available or not.

48
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

S. No. PARTICULARS Details

N Communication protocol type
O Ref. No. of literature submitted
10 DISTANCE RELAY FOR 132kV FEEDER RELAY PANEL
a Make
b Type
i) Specified by manufacturer
ii) Whether relay is draw out or non draw out
iii) Whether relay is numerical
iv) Whether the relay is switched or non switched
c No. of zone of protection
d Details of starting units
e Characteristic of measuring relay
f Operating time:
i) First zone timing
ii) second zone timings
iii) Third zone timings
g Contact rating:
h VA burden of each type of relays
i) current circuit
ii) Potential circuit
i Whether relay has built in fault locators
j No and type of communication ports front/ rear
k Have Communication protocol as per IEC-61850
11 COMBINED OVER CURRENT RELAY + EARTH FAULT
RELAY FOR 132kV TRANSFORMER PANEL(TYPE K-III)
HV SIDE OF 132/33kV TRANSFORMERS
a Maker's name
b Type of the Relay
i) Specified by manufacturer
ii) Whether the relay is draw out or non draw out
iii) Whether relay is numerical & communicable type
iv) Whether relay has provision of testing by injecting the
voltage/current/ frequency(as applicable) from external testing
instruments/source without first disconnecting/de-energizing
the Electrical circuit protected by the Relay and isolating the
tripping
v) Whether test block is required for testing of Relay.
vi) Whether test block is inbuilt
vii) Whether test block is provided in panel
viii) Whether test plug is required for testing the relay.
ix) Details of testing facilities provided in relay.
x) Whether relay have provision to initiate a trip command
externally through Push button/ programmable switch or
through attracted armature relays
xi) In case of directional relays whether relay have provision to
check the directional feature and to make the relay non

49
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

S. No. PARTICULARS Details

directional through a specified procedure. Details of specified
procedure be indicated
c Current coil rating
d Tap range
e VA Burden
f Time of operation at max. time dial setting at :
i) 5 times the tap setting current
ii) 10 times the tap setting current
g Type of characteristics
h Trip contact rating
i Whether seal in contacts provided
j No. of contacts
i) Digital Input
ii) Digital Output
k Make & Type of software for Numerical Relays
l Type & number of communication ports
m Whether numerical relay is assessable with remote PC or lap
top through a front interface
n Type of front interface provided in relay(in ref. to above S. No.
m)
o Ref. No. of literature submitted
12 PERCENTAGE BIASED DIFFERENTIAL RELAYS: FOR
132kV TRANSFORMER PANEL HV SIDE OF132/33kV
TRANSFORMER (TYPE K-III)
a Make
b Type
i Specified by manufacturer
ii Whether relay is draw out or non-draw out
iii Whether relay is numerical or static
c Whether relay is two winding type -
d Whether relay is variable bias type.
e Operating time of differential relay at 5 times of setting
f Whether relay immune to magnetizing inrush current and have
feature to provide stability under over excited conditions
g Whether the protection system shall not operate for the
transformer inrush current having an inrush factor not greater
than seven and time constant of200 mili sec-
h Operating setting of the differential relay(in percent of the rated
current)-
i Whether relay shall operate for all internal faults but shall not
operate on heavy through faults
j Whether relay suitable for unbalance current due to on load tap
changing equipment provided on transformer which can vary
tap changer setting from (-)15% to (+)5%
k Whether differential relay have adjustable setting for the
operating current as well as bias setting.
l Whether instantaneous high set circuit with separate indication

50
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

S. No. PARTICULARS Details

is provided
m Minimum setting of the instantaneous high set circuit (in times
of the rated current.
n Whether relay have dual slope Characteristics.
o whether relay is assessable with remote PC or Laptop through
front interface.
p Type of port provided in relay (in reference to above S. No. o)
q Make and Type of application software for Numerical relays
r No. of contacts
i) Digital Input
ii) Digital Output
13 AUXILIARY RELAYS
a Maker's name
b Type
i) Specified by manufacturer.
ii) Whether relay is draw out or non draw out
iii) Whether relay is numerical or static or electromechanical
c Capacity of contacts Continuously for 3 sec.
d Operating coil VA burden
e Voltage operated or current operated
f No. of normally closed contacts
g No. of normally open contacts
h Contacts hand or self/reset type
i Type of mounting
j Case finish
k Any other special feature
l Reference No. of literature submitted
14 HIGH SPEED MASTER TRIPPING RELAY FOR 132kV
C&R PANELS
a Maker's name
b Type
i) Specified by manufacturer.
ii) Whether relay is draw out or non draw out
iii) Whether relay is static or electromechanical
c Operating Voltage
d No. of normally open contacts
e No. of normally closed contacts
f Operating coil VA burden
g Making capacity of contacts
h Indicator self reset or hand reset type
i Case finish
j Reference No. of literature submitted
15 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY
a Make
b Type
i) Specified by manufacturer.

51
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

S. No. PARTICULARS Details

ii) Whether relay is draw out or non draw out
iii) Whether relay is numerical or static or electromechanical
c Whether provides trip circuit supervision during CB on and CB
off (pre-closing)
d Reference No. of literature submitted
16 CONTACT MULTIPLICATION RELAY FOR ISOLATOR
AUXILIARY SWITCH
a Make
b Type
i) Specified by manufacturer.
ii) Whether relay is draw out or non draw out
iii) Whether relay is numerical or static or electromechanical
c Number of contacts
i) Normally open
ii) Normally closed
d Whether relay is heavy duty latch-in type
17 DC SUPERVISION RELAY
a Make
b Type
i Specified by manufacturer.
ii Whether relay is draw out or non draw out
iii Whether relay is numerical or static or electromechanical
c No. of elements per relay
d Setting range
e VA Burden
f No. of output contact
g Reference No, and literature submitted
18 TEST PLUG FOR TESTING OF RELAYS
a Whether test plug is required for testing the offered relays
b If not required, give detail why it is not required
c Whether only one type of test plug is suitable for testing of
distance/ over differential over current & earth fault protection
schemes/ relays as offered
i) Make
ii) Type
d If separate test plug is required for each/type of protection
scheme/relays as offered
19 DISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATORS
a Whether in built in distance protection scheme or provided
separately
b Make
c Type
d Accuracy of measurement of line length
e Whether provided digital indication of distance to fault in
percentage/ actual length of the supervisor length (in Kms)
f whether have facility to provide outputs for tertency and local

52
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

S. No. PARTICULARS Details

print out of the distance of fault
g Current input required
h Voltage input required
i Minimum & maximum range of fault detection
j Whether distance display in KM available
k Mode of output for tele-metering
l Whether interfacing equipment required for connection to
printer
m Mounting details
n Standard to which confirm
o Reference No,. Of literature submitted
20 ANNUNCIATOR
a Maker's name
b Type of relays
21 SYNCHRONIZING SOCKET WITH PLUG
a Make
b Type
22 HOOTER
a Make
b Type
23 BELL
a Make
b Type
24 SPACE HEATER
a Make
b Type
25 LINK TYPE TEST TERMINAL BLOCK FOR TVM
a Make
b Type
26 TEST KIT/PLUG FOR TESTING OF RELAYS
i) Distance Relay
ii) Over current and Earth fault Relay
iii) Any other relay provided in panel
27 2 FEET TUBE LIGHT
a Make
b Type
c Capacity in watt
28 PROTOCOL PROVIDED IN NUMERICAL RELAY
c 132kV Distance Relay
d Over current and Earth fault Relay
29 0.2S Class AC Static HT-TVM TOD Meter
a Make
b Type
c Whether it meets the specification of TOD meter

53
 Tech Spec- 132 kV CRP

S. No. PARTICULARS Details

36 MISCELLANEOUS
Whether 10% spare connectors in terminal boards mounted in
control& relay panel?

Any other particulars which bidder may like to give.

(Signature )
Name & Designationwith Seal.

54
Tech spec. for 145 kV SCPI

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 145kV SOLID CORE POST

INSULATORS SUITABLE FOR 145kV 800/1250 AMP. ISOLATORS

1.0 SCOPE:

This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, inspection and
testing at manufacturer’s own works, packing and delivery with all fittings and accessories
at site(s)/store(s) of 145 kV Solid Core Post Insulators required for 145 kV, 800/1250 Amps.
Outdoor gang operated Isolators and also as support Insulators to be installed at various
Grid Substation in Rajasthan.

It is not the intent to specify completely herein all details of the design and construction of
equipment. However the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of
engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous
operation. The purchaser will interpret in a manner the meanings of drawings and
specification and shall have the power to reject any work or material which in his
judgment is not in accordance herewith. The equipment offered shall be complete
with all components necessary for its effective and trouble free operation. Such
components shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply irrespective of whether these
are specifically brought out in this specification and/or the commercial order or not.

2.0 STANDARDS:

Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification, the rating as well as performance
and testing of 145kV Solid Core Post Insulators shall conform to the IS: 2544 & IS: 5350
(Part-II) with latest amendments.
Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative National or International
Standards, which ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above,
will also be acceptable. When the equipment offered by the Bidder conforms to other
standards, salient point of difference between standards adopted and the standards
specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out. Four copies of such standards with
authentic translation in English shall be furnished along with the offer.

3.0 RATING:

The rating of 145kV Gang operated isolators for which 145kV Solid Core Post Insulators are
required shall be as under:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[Link]. Particulars 145 KV Isolators
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
i) No. of poles. 3
ii) Nominal system voltage. 132 kV rms.
iii) Rated voltage. 145 kV rms.
iv) Rated frequncy. 50 Hz.
v) One minute power frequency 275 kV rms.
withstand voltage.
vi) Impulse withstand voltage. 650 kV peak
___________________________________________________

4.0 TYPE OF INSULATORS :

4.1 145kV Solid Core Outdoor Post Insulators used with 145kV Isolators shall be
cylindrical type. The 145kV Solid Core Post Insulators shall be conforming to latest
edition of relevant IS. The porcelain and metal parts shall be assembled together in
such a manner that due to expansion between metal and the porcelain part

1
Tech spec. for 145 kV SCPI

throughout a range of temperature variation, it shall not loosen the parts or create
undue stresses adversely effecting performance of insulators for various electrical
and mechanical properties which are to be furnished with the bid.

4.2 The minimum desirable electrical and mechanical values of 145kV Solid Core Post
Insulators shall be as given below :
4.3
S. No. Particulars Values
1 Torsional strength 460 Kgf-m
2 Cantilever strength 612 Kgf
3 Tensile strength 7000 Kgf
4 Compression strength 27000 Kgf
5 Dry Power frequency withstand voltage for one 275kV rms.
minute.
6 Wet power frequency withstand voltage for one 275kV rms.
minute.
7 Impulse withstand voltage. 650kV peak.
8 Visible discharge voltage. 105kV rms.
9 Total minimum creepage distance. 3625 mm.
10 Post insulator height. 1500 mm.
11 Height of bottom metal fitting (Minimum) 90 mm
12 Fixing arrangement for terminal connector at 4 Nos. tapped M16 holes
top. at 127 mm PCD.
13 Bottom metal fitting PCD 4 Nos. of 18mm dia.
holes at 184 mm PCD.
.

5.0 TYPE TESTS:

The 145 KV Solid Core Post Insulators shall be fully Type tested as per IS:2544 and
IS:5350 (Part-II). The type test certificates should not be older than 10(Ten) years as on
the date of technical bid opening.

6.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING:

6.1 ROUTINE/ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

i) All the routine/acceptance tests as per relevant standards shall be got

conducted in presence of purchaser's representative on each lot offered for
inspection.

ii) Beside above the type tests for mechanical strength i.e. bending, tensile,
torsional and compression tests shall be got conducted in presence of
purchaser's representative on each lot offered for inspection.

Sampling shall be done as per the provisions of relevant IEC. However, if the
quantity of offered lot for inspection is less than or upto 500 Nos. The sample size
for carrying out the above tests shall be as under:

i) upto and including 300 Nos. - 2 Nos.

ii) 300 - 500 Nos. - 4 Nos.

2
Tech spec. for 145 kV SCPI

The supplier will have to furnish valid calibration certificates of all testing equipments
issued from Govt./Govt. approved agency to purchaser's representative before
offering the material for purchaser inspection.

6.2 The purchaser reserve the right to have all the tests carried out at his cost by an
independent agency, wherever there is dispute regarding the quality of material,
and will claim reimbursement from the supplier, in case the material as a result of
such test/tests is not found conforming to the requirement of the specification.

6.3 All the tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer unless
otherwise especially agreed upon by the bidder and purchaser at the time of
purchase. The supplier shall afford the inspecting officer(s) representing the
purchaser all reasonable facilities without charges, to satisfy him that the material is
being furnished in accordance with this specification.

6.4 Inspection and acceptance of any material under the specification by the purchaser,
shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing material in accordance with
the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the material is found to
be defective. The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance, about
manufacturing programme so that arrangements can be made for inspection.

7.0 SITE TESTS:

The purchaser reserves the right to carry out any site tests as may be decided,
at his own cost and will claim reimbursement from the supplier ,in case the
material as a result of such test/tests is not found conforming to the prescribed
specification.

8.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND OTHER INFORMATION:

Guaranteed technical particulars as per Schedule-GTP shall be furnished.

9.0 DRAWINGS :

The fully dimensional drawing of 145kV Solid Core Post Insulator to be supplied by
the bidder alongwith photocopy of complete type test certificates/reports with certified
drawings showing full details of post Insulators got type tested in order to enable the
purchaser to ascertain the clearance etc. The dimensions of upper and lower metal
fitting shall be clearly shown in the drawings of insulator offered.

i) Outline dimensional drawings of post Insulator along with complete details

regarding metal hardware fittings.
ii) Assembly drawings and weight of main component/part.
iii) Drawings showing dimension of upper and lower metal parts along with PCD.
iv) Descriptive literature and manufacturing data on insulator shall be furnished.

10.0 NUTS, BOLTS & WASHERS :

All nuts, bolts and washers etc. for complete 145kV Post Insulator to be used with 145kV
Isolator hardware shall be supplied by the Insulator supplier.

11.0 MARKING AND PACKING :

1) Each Post Insulator unit shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the
following:

3
Tech spec. for 145 kV SCPI

i) Name and trade mark of manufacturer.

ii) Month and year of manufacture.
iii) Country of manufacture.

Such marking on porcelain shall be printed, not embossed and shall be applied
before firing. Post Insulator may be marked with the ISI certification mark.

2) All Post Insulator shall be packed in strong wooden boxes of approved design
with hoops and bonds for strength and durability to withstand rough handling
during shipment, transport and also during storage.

3) Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing

the following information:

a) Name of the consignee.

b) Details of consignment.
c) Destination.
d) Handling and unpacking instruction.
e) Bill of material indicating contents of each package.

12.0 COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT:

All fittings and material etc. which may have not been specifically mentioned in this
specification, but which are usual or necessary for the equipment shall be deemed
to have been included in this specification. All equipment shall be complete in all
respect.

13.0 LATENT DEFECTS, ERRORS AND OMISSIONS:

Any material/equipment or part thereof that develops defects, errors or omissions in

the apparatus, not disclosed prior to the final acceptance by the purchaser, but occur
or are disclosed during the guarantee period shall be corrected promptly. The
equipment or part thereof shall be replaced by the supplier free of charges and all
expenses for the transportation, handling, installation of such replacement or any
other incidental charges shall be borne by the supplier.

4
Tech spec. for 145 kV SCPI

Schedule- GTP
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 145 KV SOLID CORE
POST INSULATORS
NAME OF FIRM:

S. No. Particulars 145 kV Solid Core

Post Insulators
1(a) Type and Post insulator unit designation.
(b) Make
( c) Drawing No.
(d) Catalogue No.
2 Glaze
3 Net Mass
4 Packed Mass
5 Material of Cap and Flange
6 Whether insulator is in single unit
7 Total height of post insulator
8(a) Height of upper metal fitting
(b) Height of bottom metal fitting
(c) Diameter of base plate
9 Details of holes in bottom and upper metal fitting for
assembly with isolator metal hardware
(a) Nos. and dia. of holes with PCD in upper metal fittings
(b) Nos. and dia. of holes with PCD in bottom metal fittings
10 Details of bolts, nuts, washers [Link] be supplied with
insulator for fixing them on isolator hardware.
(a) For upper metal fitting.
(b) For bottom metal fitting.

MECHANICAL VALUES OF INSULATOR:

11 Ultimate bending strength upright
12 Ultimate bending strength inverted.
13 Ultimate torsional strength
14 Ultimate tensile strength
15 Ultimate compression strength

ELECTRICAL VALUES OF INSULATOR:

16 Rated voltage
17 Rated Frequency.
18 Dry one minute power frequency withstand voltage
19 Wet one minute power frequency withstand voltage
20 Dry power frequency flashover voltage
21 Wet power frequency flashover voltage
22 Dry impulse withstand voltage positive wave
23 Dry impulse withstand voltage negative wave
24 Dry impulse flashover voltage positive wave
25 Dry impulse flashover voltage negative wave
26 Visible discharge voltage
27 Min. total creepage distance
28 Protected creepage distance
29 Dry arcing distance.
30 Standard to which insulator conforms

5
Spec. 36 kV VCB (BN- 9016002326) 1

VOLUME-II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 36 kV VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1.01 SCOPE:

This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturer's works
before dispatch of supply and delivery at site of 3 pole, 50 Hz, 36kV Vacuum Circuit breakers
for outdoor installation with supporting structures complete with all materials and accessories
for efficient and trouble free operation.

1.02 SYSTEM PARTICULARS:

The equipments shall be suitable for operation of 3 phase, 50 Hz, 33kV system with neutral
solidly grounded.

1.03 STANDARDS:

The circuit breakers shall conform in all respects to IS:13118 or IEC:56(latest issue) (IEC
62271-100)with its latest amendments except in regard to the values wherever specified herein.
Equipment meeting any other authoritative standard which ensure equal or better quality than the
standard mentioned above will also be acceptable. In such cases, a copy of standard (English
version) adopted, should be enclosed with the bid. The following specifications are referred
against the various equipments covered in the scope of the specification:

i) Circuit Breakers : IS-13118/IEC56(IEC62271-100)

ii) HV Bushings/Hollow insulator : IS-2099/IS-5621

iii) Terminal connector : IS-5561

iv) Recommended practice for : IS-2629

HotDip Galvanising of iron &
steel
v) Structural steel (Standard quality) : IS-2062

1.04 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:

The 36kV circuit breakers offered shall have motor operated spring charged operating
mechanism suitable for remote closing of the breakers. The mechanism shall be designed for
electrical control from remote as well as local position. In addition, local manual trip push button
shall be provided in case of VCBs. The operating mechanism along with its accessories shall be
mounted in cubicle or cabinet with front access door with lock and key, located near the breaker.
A local control switch and a breaker position indicator shall be provided in the cabinet. The
breaker shall be electrically and mechanically trip free under operating conditions. 2 Nos.
shunt trip coils and 1 No. closing coil shall be provided for the remote operation of the breaker.
The control circuit for breaker shall be designed to operate on both 220 Volts &110 Volts DC as
per requirements. The studs of the breakers for outgoing/incoming connections shall be of copper/
Aluminium Alloy. Adequate but not less than four Nos. of spare auxiliary contacts both of
normally open and normally close type shall be provided on the circuit breaker for use in the
remote indication and control scheme of the circuit breaker. The auxiliary contacts shall be
Spec. 36 kV VCB (BN- 9016002326) 2

preferably convertible type so that normally open contacts can be converted to normally close
contact and vice versa at site. The auxiliary contact shall be rated for 10 Amp at 240 Volts AC and
220 V DC. Cable glands for termination of multi-core control cable & power Cables shall be
provided wherever required and complete bill of material for the circuit breaker including all
accessories shall be furnished. The control circuit of breakers shall be designed to operate on both
110 V DC and 220 V DC.
All equipment , accessories and wiring shall have tropical protection, involving special
treatment of metal and insulation against fungus, insects and corrosion.
1.05 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:

i) Rated voltage 36 kV
ii) Type Vacuum circuit breakers
iii) Service Out door
iv) Nos. of poles 3
v) Rated frequency 50 Hz
vi) System Neutral earthing Effectively Grounded
vii) INSULATION LEVEL
a) Impulse withstand 170 kVp
b) One minute power 70 kV rms
viii) RatedContinuousCurrentat 50deg 1600 A
C.
ix) Short time current for 3 sec. 31.5kA
x) Rated breaking capacity
a) Symmetrical 31.5 kA 36 kV
b) Asymmetrical As per relevant standard
xi) Rated making capacity 79 kAp
xii) Total break time 5 cycles (Max.)
throughouttherange of
interrupting duty
xiii) Min. creepage distance 900 mm
xiv) Spring charging Motor 230 V/415 V AC
xv) Heater /lamp/Socket 230 V AC
xvi) Terminal connector
a) Type Bimetallic/ Aluminum alloy suitable for
both horizontal & vertical take off
b) Suitable for Twin ACSR Panther conductor/ Twin
ACSR Zebra conductor for horizontal /
vertical take off
xvii) Auxiliary Power supply
a) [Link] i) 415 Volts, 3 ph, 4 wire, 50 Hz
ii) 230 Volts, 1 ph, 2 wire, 50 Hz
b) [Link] 110 / 220 V DC, 2 wire
xviii) Duty cycle O-0.3 sec.-CO-3min-CO

1.06 OPERATING MECHANISM:

Operating mechanism shall be spring operated with anti pumping and trip free features, complete
with shunt trip coils. All three breaker poles shall operate simultaneously. Circuit breaker shall
have provision so as to be suitable for three phase auto reclosing.
The mechanism shall be designed for electrical control from remote as well as local position. In
addition, local manual trip button shall be provided for VCBs. Operation counter and
mechanical ON/OFF indicator shall be provided.
Spec. 36 kV VCB (BN- 9016002326) 3

The operating mechanism with single or three phase motor charged independent spring closing
arrangement shall be designed to withstand continuous operation throughout the life of
breaker, coils without requiring any capital maintenance.
Contact wear indicator/mark on operating rod shall be provided on the linkage assembly. The
mechanism should be capable of performing 5000 operations without any fatigue. The interrupters
shall be capable of performing 8000 to 10000 load operations. The breaker shall be provided with
trip free mechanism so that tripping could override the closing instructions.

1.06.1 CLEARANCE:

The minimum height of lowest live terminal from the ground level shall be 3700 mm. The height
of the supporting structure shall be provided accordingly after considering the plinth level of
foundation as 300 mm above ground level. The bidders offering lower height of supporting
structures are likely to be ignored. The bidders shall clearly state the minimum height of lowest
live parts from the ground level within the sub-station. Minimum Phase to Phase clearance shall be
320mm and minimum Phase to earth clearance shall be 320mm and clearly indicated in drawing.

1.07 TEMPERATURE RISE:

The maximum temperature in any part of the equipment at specified rating shall not exceed
the permissible limits as stipulated in the relevant standards even at an ambient temperature
of 50 Deg.C.

1.08 BUSHING/HOLLOW PORCELAIN INSULATOR:

The circuit breaker shall be fitted with weather proof capacitance graded bushing which shall be
designed to have the necessary mechanical strength and rigidity required and shall be free from
objectionable interference and external and internal corona. The porcelain shall be of the wet
process type, homogeneous, free from laminations and cavities or other flaws which could
effect its electrical or mechanical strength and shall not be injuriously stressed by temperature
changes. The porcelain shall be thoroughly vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture and
shall be evenly glazed. The glazing shall be free from blisters or burns. The bushings /hollow
porcelain insulator shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest
edition of IS:2099 or BS:223/IS-5621. The type of bushings/insulators shall be clearly specified.
The bushing and hollow porcelain insulator shall be of standard make such as
W.S.I./BHEL/MODERN/BIRLA NGK/CJI/ Jaipur Glass & shall conform to as per relevant
latest IS. The make, creepage & creepage factor, bending load & other bushing details be clearly
stated in the GTPs. Any other make quoted should be supported by relevant type test reports as per
IS-5621 for hollow insulators and following test as per IS-2099 for bushings.

1. LIV Test.
2. HVPF (Wet).

The test should be got conducted at Govt. Approved /NABL accredited laboratory/ International
Laboratory Accreditation Corporation Mutual Recognition Arrangement (ILAC-MRA) signatory
agency (in case of foreign laboratory). Such type test reports should not be older than 10 years as
on the date of bid opening. For this purpose, date of conducting type test will be considered.

NOTE: For the type test reports conducted at CPRI/ERDA/IIT Madras, the requirement for NABL
LOGO shall not be insisted upon.
Spec. 36 kV VCB (BN- 9016002326) 4

1.09 TYPE OF MOUNTING:

The circuit breaker shall be suitable for mounting on fabricated galvanized Steel structure
which shall be supplied along with the breakers.

1.10 TERMINAL CONNECTORS:

1600 Amp Current rating Bimetallic/Aluminum Alloy clamp type terminal connectors of the circuit
breakers suitable for connecting to Twin ACSR Panther conductor/ Twin ACSR Zebra conductor
for horizontal / vertical take off shall be supplied along with the breakers. Suitable earth
connectors for earthing connections shall also be supplied with the circuit [Link] terminal
connectors shall conform to relevant standard IS [Link] shall furnish type test reports for STC
test and temperature rise test of the terminal connector of the type and make offered before
commencement of the supplies without asking any delivery extensionconducted at Govt.
Approved / NABL accredited laboratory/ International Laboratory Accreditation Corporation Mutual
Recognition Arrangement (ILAC-MRA) signatory agency (in case of foreign laboratory).Such type
test reports should not be older than 10 years as on the date of bid opening. For this purpose, date of
conducting type test will be considered.

NOTE: For the type test reports conducted at CPRI/ERDA/IIT Madras, the requirement for NABL
LOGO shall not be insisted upon.

1.11 INTERLOCK:

All electrical and mechanical interlocks which are necessary for safe and satisfactory operation of
the circuit breaker shall be provided.

1.12 CONTROL CUBICLE:

A common control cubicle shall be provided with all other accessories required except those which
must be located on individual poles. The protection class of cubicle shall be IP-55 ofgasketed
weatherproof construction with adequate sealing with proper quality of adhesive or its
application. Sealing arrangement should be effective and have adequate life span Cubicle shall
be fabricated from CRCA sheet steel of min. 3.0 mm thick .

The cubicle shall have front access door with lock & keys and removable gland plate at the
bottom for Owner's cable entry. Thermostat controlled space heater, internal illumination
lamp & 3 pin 5A socket with individual ON-OFF switches shall be provided in the cubicle.

For local operation following shall be provided:

a) LOCAL/REMOTE SELECTOR SWITCH

b) TRIP NORMAL CLOSE CONTROL SWITCHES with pistol grip handle.

All electrical & mechanical connections between the control cubicle and individual poles shall be
furnished.

1.13 WIRING:

(a) Wiring shall be complete in all respects to ensure proper functioning of the control,
protection, monitoring and interlocking schemes.
Spec. 36 kV VCB (BN- 9016002326) 5

Wiring shall be done with flexible 650 V grade, PVC insulated, switchboard wires with 2.5 sq.
mm stranded copper conductor. Each wire shall be identified at both side with permanent
marking ferrul's bearing wire numbers as per RVPN wiring/schematic diagram (to be intimated
later by purchaser in the event of order).Wire termination shall be done with crimping type
connectors with insulating sleeves. Wires shall not be spliced between terminals.
All spare contacts of relays, push buttons, auxiliary switches etc. shall be wired up to terminal
blocks in the control cubicle.

(b) Some of the wiring of Circuit Breaker has been standardized in separateTBs. The
Bidder should adhere to the standardized wiring as per Annexure-W

1.14 TERMINAL BLOCKS:

Terminal blocks shall be 650 V grade, box clamp type ELMEX 10 [Link] or approved equal. Not
more than two wires shall be connected to any terminal. Spare terminals equal in number to 20%
of active terminals shall be furnished.
Terminal blocks shall be located to allow easy access, wiring shall be so arranged that
individual wire of an external cable can be connected to consecutive terminals.

1.15 FITTING AND ACCESSORIES:

Each circuit breaker shall be furnished complete with fittings and accessories as listed below:

- Motor charged spring operated closing mechanism.

- Shunt tripping arrangement for 110V & 220V DC (Both compatible) for remote/local
tripping.
- Closing Coil suitable for 110V& 220V DC (Both compatible) for remote/local closing
- Clamp type bimetallic / aluminum alloy terminal connectors.
- Ground pads suitable for termination of 50x6mm flats
- Complete mounting steel pedestal
- Operating mechanism with double tripping coils and a closing coil.
- Auxiliary contacts and relays.
- Local/remote selector switch, trip normal close control pistol control switch.
- Operating handle for independent manual closing mechanism.
- Auxiliary switch having Min. of 8 spare contacts, 4 normally open and 4 normally closed
- Manual tripping device with protective flap
- Mechanical ON-OFF indicator.
- Anti-pumping relay/contactor
- Operation counter
- Locks with keys
- Weather proof outdoor type control cubicle and pole boxes.
- Set of switch fuse units/MCBs for AC and DC supply
- Space heaters with thermostat and ON-OFF switch
- Cubicle illumination lamps with ON-OFF switch
- 3 Pin 5A socket with ON-OFF switch
- Terminal blocks and internal wiring- lot as required
- Set of prefabricated pipe, fittings, clamps, hardware, interconnecting wires/cables etc,
for connection between control cubicle and pole boxes as may be required
- Other standard accessories which are not specifically mentioned but are required to be
supplied with breakers of similar type and rating for efficient and trouble free
operation.
Spec. 36 kV VCB (BN- 9016002326) 6

1.16(A) INSPECTION & TESTING:

a) 36 kV Circuit Breakers and accessories shall be subjected at Maker's works before

dispatch to following routine tests/Acceptance tests as per IEC 62271-100 with its latest
amendments on 25% (Nearest higher whole number) of the offered lot for established suppliers
and 100% of the offered lot for un-established suppliers as per relevant standards in the
presence of purchaser's inspecting officer /representative. Moreover, suppliers have to furnish
the in house routine test reports for the complete offered lot with the inspection report.
i) One minute power frequency voltage withstand dry test on main circuit.
ii) Voltage withstand test on control and auxiliary circuits of 2 kV for 1 minute.
iii) Measurement of resistance of main circuit.
iv) Mechanical operation test.
v) Design and visual checks.
In the event of order, the bidder have to get at least one breaker tested in respect of Temperature rise
test in presence of purchaser representative.

b)Type tests: The bidder shall furnish valid and authenticated type tests certificates as per
latest edition of IS or IEC for following type tests from Govt. approved /NABL accredited
laboratory/ International Laboratory Accreditation Corporation Mutual Recognition Arrangement
(ILAC-MRA) signatory agency (in case of foreign laboratory) of same voltage class with same
operating principal and design of bidding material / equipment. Such type test certificates should
not be older than 10 years as on the date of bid opening. For this purpose, date of conducting type
test will be considered.

The type test certificate from in-house laboratory of Bidding firm shall also be accepted provided
the lab. is accredited by National Accreditation Body of the country and tests have been witnessed
by a representative of NABL accredited laboratory / Power Utility.

NOTE: For the type test reports conducted at CPRI/ERDA/IIT Madras, the requirement for NABL
LOGO shall not be insisted upon.

1) Dielectric test.
a) Lightning impulse Voltage test.
b) One minute power frequency test (wet & dry).
2) Temp rise test.
3) Short time withstand current test.
4) Mechanical operation test.
5) IP-55 test(for cubicle/control cabinet).
6) Basic short test duties test.
7) Out of phase making & breaking test.
8) Single phase short circuit test.
9) Capacitive current switching test.
a) Cable charging test.
b) Single capacitor bank current switching test.
10) Measurement of resistance of main circuit.
11) Tightness test (Shall be acceptable from manufacturers asper standard practice followed).
12) EMC test if applicable (As per IEC62271-100)
13) Any other mandatory type test not specified above butcovered as per amendments / latest
addition of relevant IS/IEC.
Spec. 36 kV VCB (BN- 9016002326) 7

1.16(B) Test on bought out items: Tests are not required to be performed on brought out item
like motor, Insulator [Link] the works of manufacturer. Furnishing of test certificate of these items
from the original equipment manufacturer shall be deemed to be satisfactory evidence.

1.17 Guaranteed Technical Particulars:

The guaranteed technical particulars as called in Schedule-GTP shall be furnished along with the
bid.

1.18 Drawings &Documents:

All the relevant drawings of the Circuit Breakers including the following should be sent along with
the bid.

i) Outline General Arrangement drawing showing all dimensions, earthing, ground pads
for termination of 50x6 flat.
ii) Schematic wiring diagram with write up.
iii) Supporting structure drawing showing details of each member, clearances from the
ground etc.
iv) Terminal connector drawing showing all dimensions
v) Drawing for operating mechanism box showing locking arrangement earthing etc.

1.19 RATING PLATE:

1.19.1 A circuit breaker and its operating device shall be provided with a weather and
Corrosion proof rating plate(s) marked with technical particulars etc. including the
following:

a) Manufacturer's name or trade mark by which it may bereadily identified.

b) [Link]. and type designation, making it possible to get all the relevant information
from the manufacturer.
c) Month and year of manufacture.
d) Rated voltage.
e) Rated insulation level.
f) Rated frequency.
g) Rated normal current.
h) Rated short circuit breaking current.
i) Rated duration of short circuit.
j) First pole to clear factor.
k) Rated auxiliary DC supply voltage of closing and opening devices.
l) Rated supply voltage and frequency of auxiliary circuits.
m) Reference of PO No. & Date
n) Guarantee period of VCB & VI.
o) Contact e-mail address and Toll free No. for after sales service.

1.19.2 The coils of operating devices shall have a reference mark permitting the data
to be obtained from the manufacturer.
1.19.3 The rating plate shall be about 1000-1300 mm above ground level or readable from
a suitable platform which shall be provided by the bidder on the structure at a height
not more than 750 mm from the ground level by maintaining the required electrical
clearance, so that it is visible in position of normal service and installation.
Spec. 36 kV VCB (BN- 9016002326) 8

1.20 MAKE OF VACUUM INTERUPTER :

Vacuum interrupter shall be of standard make such as BEL, CGL, Siemens, ABB, Alstom
/Schneider, Stelmec.

1.21 TRAINING TO RVPN STAFF:

Training to RVPN Engineers & Technical staff should be provided free of cost at the
manufacturer’s works, if RVPN nominates their personnel for such training during currency of
contract. Traveling expenses including lodging & boarding charges shall be borne by RVPN.

1.22 SPARE PARTS:

The spare, required for servicing/troubleshooting/overhauling of Vacuum Circuit Breakers,

shall be supplied directly by the manufacturer only.

1.23 BASE DETAILS OF 36 KV VCB:

The base of 36 kV VCB shall be as below :

Where:
A = 800 mm
B = 450 mm
Foundation bolt Size/Length = M20/500 mm
Spec. 36 kV VCB (BN- 9016002326) 9

Annexure-W

STANDARD WIRING ON TB OF 33 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER

Description Ferrule TB No. &

Marking Position
Control DC 1 Positive K1 RX1-01
Control DC 1 Negative K2 RX1-02
Control DC 2 Positive K51 RX1-03
Control DC 2 Negative K52 RX1-04
Positive for Remote Closing K21 RX1-05
Remote Closing Command K31 RX1-06
Positive for Remote Trip TC1 K53 RX1-07
Remote Trip TC 1 Command K55 RX1-08
Positive for Remote Trip TC2 K57 RX1-09
Remote Trip TC 2 Command K59 RX1-10
Protection Trip TC 1 K3A RX1-11
Protection Trip TC 2 K53A RX1-12
Positive for Pre close Supervision TC1 K9 RX1-13
Negative for Pre close Supervision TC1 K11 RX1-14
Positive for Pre close Supervision TC2 K61 RX1-15
Negative for Pre close Supervision TC2 K63 RX1-16

Positive for Indication L1 CX1-01

CB OFF Lamp Indication L3 CX1-02
Positive looping L1 CX1-03
CB ON Lamp Indication L5 CX1-04
Positive looping L1 CX1-05
CB OFF Semaphore Indication L7 CX1-06
Positive looping L1 CX1-07
CB ON Semaphore Indication L11 CX1-08
Positive looping L1 CX1-09
CB Auto trip Lamp Indication L13 CX1-10
Positive looping L1 CX1-11
CB Spring Charge Lamp Indication L9 CX1-12

AC Supply 1 Phase (Phase) H1 CX1-19

AC Supply 1 Phase (Neutral) H2 CX1-20

Note: Terminal / ferrules not applicable shall be left unutilized

********
Spec. 36 kV VCB (BN- 9016002326) 10

Schedule-GTP

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 36 kV VACUUM CIRCUIT

BREAKER AGAINSTBN-901600xxxx

[Link]. Particulars
1 Name of Manufacturer& Factory Address

2 Manufacturer's type designation

a) Reference standard
b) Type
c) Service
d) Pole

3 Rated voltage

4 Max.(continuous) service rated Voltage

5 Current rating:
a) At reference ambient temperatureat 40° C.
b) Under site conditions at 50°C ambient
temperature.

6 Short time current rating for 3 seconds.

7 a) Temperature rise at ratedcurrent over

50°Cambient and [Link] by
i) Contact.
ii)Any other part.
b) Rated operating sequence.

8 Rated breaking capacity.

a) Symmetrical
b) Symmetrical rupturing capacity at rated service
voltage.
c) Asymmetrical
d) Is it possible to increase the rupturing capacity at a
later date.

9 Rated making capacity.

10 Total break time

a) At 10% rated interrupting capacity.

b) At 100% rated interrupting capacity.

11 Arcing time at breaking capacity.

12 Make time

13 Assigned transformer charging Breaking current

assigned overvoltage.
Spec. 36 kV VCB (BN- 9016002326) 11

14 Dry and wet 1 min. Power Frequency withstand test

voltage for complete breaker.
a) Between line terminal & grounded object
i)Dry
ii)Wet
b) Between terminal with breaker contact open
i) Dry
ii) Wet

15 1.2/50 micro sec. Full wave impulse withstand test

voltage for complete breaker.
a) Between line and grounded objects.
b) Between terminal with breaker contact open.

16 Bushings
a) Make.
b) Type.
c) Catalogue number of bushingoffered & its
mechanical strength.
d) Dry and wet 1 minute Power freq. withstands
test voltage.
i) Dry
ii) Wet.
e) 1.2/50 Micro second full wave impulse
withstands test voltagefor bushings/insulator.
f) (i) Creepage distance
(ii) Protected creepage distance.

17 Min. clearance in air

a) phase to ground
b) phase to phase
c) Lowest part of the support Insulator to ground
level.
d) Lowest live terminal to ground level in the S/St.

18 One 3 phase unit or 3 single phase unit.

19 No. of breaks per phase.

20 Total length of break per phase.

21 Type of main contact.

22 Type of auxiliary contacts.

23 Material of auxiliary contacts.

24 Material of
i) Main contacts.
ii) Terminals of breakers.
Spec. 36 kV VCB (BN- 9016002326) 12

25 Whether the main & auxiliarycontacts are silver

plated or not

26 Thickness of silver coating, if provided

a) Main contact.
b) Auxiliary contacts.
c) Terminals of breakers.
27 Contact pressure.
28 Total Nos. of auxiliary switch contacts provided
inclusive spare contacts
i) Those closed when breaker is closed
ii) Those open when breaker is closed.
iii) Those adjustable with respect to the position of
main contacts.

29 Number of spare auxiliary switch contact provided.

i) Those closed when breaker is closed.
ii)Those open when breaker is closed
iii) Spare contacts available for interlocking addition
to those required for breaker operation.
a) Normally open
b) Normally closed
c) Contact type (convertible or fixed)

30 Type of operating mechanism

a) Opening
b) Closing

31 Tripping & closing control circuit voltage.

32 Power required for trip coil at

a) 110 V DC
b) 220 V DC.
33 Power required for close coil at
a) 110 V DC
b) 220 V DC.
34 Weight of 3 phase breaker, complete with operating
mechanism, bushing & framework.

35 Overall dimensions
a) Circuit breaker.
b) Control cubicle.
c) Structure.

36 Short circuit type test certificate report No.

37 Degree of vacuum provided in VCBs.

38 Capacity to interrupting transformer charging

current.

39 Capacity to interrupt line charging current.

Spec. 36 kV VCB (BN- 9016002326) 13

40 a) Capacity to interrupt cable charging current.

b) Max. shunt capacitor bank switching capacity &
over voltage
c) Rated back to back capacitor bank breaking
current.
d) Rated capacitor bank inrush making current
41 Assigned out of phase breaking capacity.
42 Terminal connectors
a) Components of the material used in the
manufacture of terminal connectors.
b) Size of terminal connector
c) Max. current density in most critical part of
terminal connector
d) Max. temp. rise of terminal connectors at rated
current over an ambient temp. of 50 Deg. C.
e) Rated current capacity.
f) Rated short time current for 3 sec.

43 Number of openings, the circuit breaker is capable of

performing without inspection, replacement of
contacts or other main parts.
a) At 100% rated current.
b) At 100% breaking current.

44 No. of operations after which main & aux. contacts

replacements is necessary.
i) 100% rupturing capacity.
ii) 50% rupturing capacity.
iii) 10% rupturing capacity
iv) At rated current.

45 Pressure at which gas pressure Switch will give

i) Alarm
ii) Tripping impulse
iii) Lockout.

46 Details of mountings.

47 First pole to clear factor

48 a) Thickness of sheet steel used in control cubicle etc.

(3 mm Min.)
b) Whether cold rolled or hot rolled

49 Motor
a) Make
b) Wattage.
c) Rated voltage.
d) Protection equipment provided
e) Closing contactor.
f) Wattage of motor on No Load
g) Wattage of motor on full Load
Spec. 36 kV VCB (BN- 9016002326) 14

50 Whether structure galvanised

51 Control cubicle painted or galvanising

a) Type of galvanising.
b) Paint shade.

52 Type of breaker.
a) Bushing mounted.
b) Draw out or fixed type.
53 a) Make of vacuum bottles.
b) trade name/No. of bottles.

54 Max. Chopping current.

55 Whether contact wear indication provided.

56 Whether operation counter provided.

57 Whether anti pumping provided

58 Make of anti-pumping relay provided.

59 Make and type of control switches.

60 Make & type of selector switches.

61 Details of control cubical wiring.

62 Whether alarm/tripping/locking out Due to loss of

vacuum/gas pressure provided.
63 Whether base of 36 kV VCB is as per provision of
Tech. Specification (Yes/No)

NOTE: The content and order of particulars of the GTP shall not be changed by bidder.

( Signature )
Name & Designation
with Seal of the firm/bidder.
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

VOLUME-II
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 36 KV, 800/1250/2000 AMP.,DOUBLE BREAK,BANGING
TYPE, MOTOR OPERATED ISOLATORS (HARDWARES ONLY)UNDER BN-90160025XX

1.0 SCOPE :

This specification covers design, engineering, manufacture,

assembly, inspection and testing at manufacturer's own works,
packing and delivery with all fittings, accessories and auxiliary
equipments at site(s)/store(s) of 36KV, 800/1250/2000 Amp. Without
Earth Switch Isolators, With Single Earth Switch Isolators (Air
Break Disconnectors), required for installation at various Grid
Sub-Stations in Rajasthan. The manufacturer shall also provide
design, drawing and bill of material for supporting structures
required for installation of their Isolators Without Earth Switch,
with Single Earth Switch.

It is not the intent to specify completely herein all

details of the design and construction of equipments. However, the
equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of
engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of
performing in continuous operation. The purchaser will interpret
in a manner the meaning of drawings and specification and shall
have the power to reject any work or material which in his
judgment is not in accordance herewith. The equipment offered
shall be complete with all components necessary for its effective
and trouble free operation alongwith associated equipment’s,
interlocks, protection schemes etc. Such components shall be
deemed to be within the scope of supply, irrespective of whether
these are specially brought out in this specification and/or the
commercial order or not. All similar parts particularly movable
ones shall be interchangeable.

2.0 STANDARDS :

Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this

specification, the rating as well as performance and testing of
the isolators/isolators with earth switch their accessories and
fittings shall conform to the latest revisions and amendments of
the following standards:
_____________________________________________________________
[Link]. STANDARD NO. TITLE
_____________________________________________________________
1. IS:9921 : Alternating Current Isolators
(Disconnectors) and Earthing
Switches.

2. IEC:129 : ------------do---------------

3. IS :13947 : Degree of Protection Provided

by Enclosure.

4. IS:4691 : ------------do---------------

5. IS:325 : Three Phase Induction Motors.

6. IS:4722 : Rotating Electrical Machines.

7. IS:2629 : Recommended Practice for Hot

Dip Galvanising of Iron and
Steel.
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

8. IS:4759 : Hot Dip Galanisation Coating

on Structural Steel.

9. IS:2633 : Method of Testing Uniformity

Of Coating on Zinc Coated
Articles.

10. IS:1573 : Electroplated Coatings of Zinc

on Iron and Steel.

11. IS:6735 : Spring Washers.

12. IS:2016 : Plain Washers.

13. IS:5561 : Electrical Power Connectors.

(Terminal Connectors)

14. -- : Indian Electricity Rules.

15. IS:9530 : Recommended Practice for Silver

Plating.

16 BS:2816 : Testing of Silver Plating

Thickness.

17. IS:5925 : Recommended Practice for Silver

Plating for General Engineering
Purposes.

__________________________________________________________

Equipment meeting with the requirements of other

authoritative National or International Standards, which ensure
equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above,
will also be acceptable. When the equipment offered by the
bidder conforms to other standards salient points of difference
between standards adopted and the standards specified in
this specification shall be clearly brought out. Four copies of
such standards with authentic translation in English shall be
furnished alongwith the offer.

3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS :

3.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :

Equipments to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory

continuous operation under the following Tropical conditions.

S. No. Particular Values

1 Max. ambient Air Temperature 50 ºC
2 Max. daily average ambient Temperature 45 ºC
3 Max. yearly weighted ambient Temperature 35 ºC
4 Min. ambient Air Temperature (-)5 ºC
5 Max. relative humidity 90%
6 Min. relative humidity 10%
7 Height above main sea level Less than 1000 mtr.
8 Dust storms are liable to occur during the period March to July
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

9 Average No. of thunder storm days / annum 40 days

10 Average annual rainfall 10 to 100 cm
11 Average No. of months of tropical monsoon 4 months (June to Sep.)
conditions
12 Seismic level horizontal acceleration 0.3g
13 Degree of Polution Heavy
14 Intensity of solar radiation 1.0 kW/Sq.M
15 Max. wind load 195 kg/Sq.M

Note : Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and
fungus growth. The climatic conditions are also prone to wide
variations in ambient conditions. Smoke is also present in the
atmosphere. Heavy/lightning also occurs during June to October.

3.2 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY :

3.2.1 The offered 36 KV Isolator under this specification shall be

suitable for the following auxiliary power supplies.

a)Power Device (like : 415V,3 Phase,4 wire,50 Hz.

drive motors). neutral grounded AC supply.

b) AC control and : 240 V, 1 PHASE 2 WIRE 50 Hz

protective devices, neutral grounded, AC supply.
lighting fixtures,
space heaters and FHP
motors.

c) DC alarm, control and : 220/110 V DC, 2-wire.

protective devices.

Each of the foregoing supplies shall be made available by

the Purchaser at the terminal point for each equipment for
operation of accessories and auxiliary equipment. Bidder scope
shall include supply of cable glands, Terminal boxes, etc. The
above supply voltages may vary as below and all devices shall be
suitable for continuous operation over entire range of voltages.

i) AC supply :- Voltage -15% to +10%.

Frequency + or - 5%.
ii) DC supply :- Voltage -15% to +10%.

4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS :

The equipment covered in this specification

shall meet the technical requirements listed below :

4.1 FOR 36 KV ISOLATORS:-

------------------------------------------------------------
[Link]. TECHNICAL PARAMETER 36 KV
------------------------------------------------------------
1. Rated Frequency. : 50 Hz.

2. System Neutral Earthing. : Effectively Earthed.

Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

3. No. of Phases (Poles). : 3 Phases.

4. Temperature Rise. : As per relevant IS/

IEC publication/
Specification.

5. Safe Duration of overload.:

a) 150% of rated current. : 5 Minutes.

b) 120% of rated current. : 30 Minutes.

6. Class. : Outdoor.

7. Type of Isolator. : Double Break,Centre

Post Rotating, Banging
type.

8. Rated voltage. : 36KV rms.

9. Rated normal current. : 800/1250/2000 [Link].

10. Rated short time : 30.0KA rms

withstand current of
Main Switch & Earth
Switch for 1 second
duration.

11. Rated peak withstand : 75KA peak.

current.

12. Rated short circuit : 75KA peak.

making current of
Earth Switch.

13. Basic insulation level. :

i) 1.2/50 micro second :

lightning impulse
withstand voltage
(+ve or -ve polarity).

a) To earth and : 170 KVp.

between poles.

b) Across isolating :
distance.
- One terminal : 195 KVp.
subjected to
lightning impulse
and opposite
terminal earthed.

ii) Rated 1 minute power :

frequency withstand
voltage.

a) Across isolating : 70 KV rms.

distance.

b) To earth and between : 80 KV rms.

poles.
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

14. Min. creepage distance : 860 mm.

of support and rotating
Insulators.

15. Phase to Phase spacing : As per attached drawing.

for installation.
(centre to centre).

16. Minimum clearances. :

a) Phase to earth. : 508 mm.

b) Isolating distance : 400 mm.

between poles of
same phase (centre
to centre).

17. Rating of auxiliary : 10 A at 220 V DC /

contacts. 110V DC with breaking
capacity of 2 Amp. DC
with time constant
not less than than
20 ms.

18. Climatic conditions. : As per Cl.3.1.

19. Rated mechanical : As per relevant

terminal load. Standards.

20. Operating time. : 12 [Link] less.

21. Rated magnetising / : 0.7 Amps./rms.

capacitive current make/
break.

22. RIV at 1 Mhz& 1.1 x : 1000 micro volts.

rated phase to earth
voltage.

23.
[Link] of silver : 40 microns.
coating on contacts.
24. Size of Base Channel :- 100X50 mm
______________________________________________________________

5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS :

5.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT :

5.1.1 The 36KV Isolators covered by this specification shall be Centre

Post Rotating, Double Break, Banging type (horizontal break having
double break per phase) without and with single earthing blade per pole
The motorized isolators shall be gang operated and the blades shall
rotate in the horizontal plane. The isolators shall be provided with
proper studs for the perfect leveling of all the phases of the isolator.
Suitable arrangement shall be provided on the support structures for
fixing the operating mechanism for the earth blades. The isolators shall
be so designed that addition of earth switch on one or both sides shall
be possible in future.

5.1.2 Complete isolators with all the necessary items for successful
operation shall be supplied including but not limited to the following :
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

[Link] Isolators assembled with isolator blades (main and earth),

complete base frame, linkages, operating mechanism etc.

[Link] One central control cabinet for each isolator with all the
required electrical devices mounted therein and necessary terminal
blocks for termination shall be provided.

5.1.3 The isolators/earth switch shall be complete with base channel

boxes suitable for mounting post insulators. It shall be supplied with
suitable clamps, bolts, nuts and washers for mounting.

5.1.4 The detailed drawing and bill of material of supporting

structure suitable for these isolators shall be supplied alongwith the
bid offer. Although supporting structures are not in the scope of supply
of this specification.

5.1.5 The three phase motorized isolator and earth switch shall be
manufactured out of the best grade of material suitable for the weather
conditions prevailing in the Rajasthan.

5.1.6 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized. All bearings in
the current path except those specifically designed as high
pressure contact shall be shunted by flexible copper connector of
suitable cross section.

5.1.7 The insulator of isolators and earth switch shall be so arranged

that leakage current will pass to earth and not between terminals of the
same pole or between poles.

5.1.8 It shall not be possible after final adjustments have been made
for any part of the mechanism to be displaced to any point of travel so
as to allow improper functioning when the switch is operated.

5.1.9 The isolators with all accessories except insulators should have
all requisite fittings ready for mounting them on supporting structures.
All hardwares for fixing accessories on the purchaser's support structure
shall be included in the scope of supply with isolators.

5.1.10 Each of the foregoing supplies shall be made available by the

Purchaser at the terminal point for each equipment for operation of
accessories and auxiliary equipment. Bidder scope shall include supply
of cable glands, terminal boxes, etc.

5.2DUTY REQUIREMENTS :

5.2.1 The isolator and earth switch shall be capable to withstand the
rated mechanical terminal load and electromagnetic forces without
impairing their operation reliability. The rated mechanical load shall
be given in the bid offer. The earth switch isolator shall be such that
they cannot come out of their open or close position by gravity, wind
pressure, vibrations or accidental touching of the operating rod.
Suitable electrical and mechanical interlock shall be provided to
prevent closing of earth switch when isolator is closed and also prevent
closing of isolator when earth switch is closed. Isolators and earth
switches shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic and thermic
effects of the maximum possible short circuit current of the systems
in their closed position. The isolators shall be so designed that they
do not open under the influence of short circuit current.

5.2.2 The isolator shall be capable of making/breaking normal

currents when no voltage difference occurs across the terminals of each
pole of isolator on account of make/ break operation.
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

5.2.3 The isolator shall be capable of making/breaking magnetizing

current of 0.7 A at 0.15 power factor and capacitive current of 0.7 A
at 0.15 power factor.

5.2.4 Isolator and earth switches shall be able to bear on the

terminals the total forces including wind loading and electrodynamic
forces on the attached conductor without impairing reliability or
current carrying capacity.

5.3 BASE CHANNEL :

The channels shall be of sizes mentioned in clause No. 4.0

"Principal parameters" of this specification and shall conform
to IS-808. The mounting holes on channel shall be as per
attached drawing of the structure.

5.4 OPERATING MECHANISM :

5.4.1 The three phase 36KV isolators shall be remote controlled

from the control room. Provision shall be made for local motor control
also. Operating mechanism shall also be equipped with local manual
operating device intended for emergency operation when motor operating
mechanism becomes in-operative. The manual operating handle shall be at
a height of 1150 mm from the ground level. Additional electromagnetic
type interlock shall be provided on the manual operating handle so as
to prevent the operation of isolator manually or electrically when the
corresponding circuit breaker is ON. Suitable interlock shall be
provided such that during manual operation, electrical operation shall
be automatically rendered inoperative by interrupting the power
supply.

5.4.2 Manual operating mechanism through crank and reduction worm

gear shall be provided for earth switch. The Manual operating handle
shall be at a height of 1150 mm above ground level. The operating
handle shall be provided with insulation layer for operator safety.

5.4.3 The operating mechanism shall provide quick, simple and

effective operation. The design of manual Operation shall be such that
one man shall be able to Operate the isolator without undue effort. The
operating mechanism shall be suitable to hold the disconnector in CLOSE
OR OPEN position and prevent operation by gravity, Wind, short circuit
forces, seismic forces, vibration, Shock, accidental touching etc.

5.4.4 Limit switches for control shall be fitted on the Isolator /

earth switch shaft within the cabinet to sense the Open and close
positions of the isolators and earth switches. Limit switches shall
also have three (3) spare contacts for Purchaser’s use for indication
and control circuits.

5.4.5 It shall not be possible, after final adjustment has been made
for any part of the mechanism to be displaced at any point in the
travel sufficient enough to cause improper functioning of the isolator
when the isolator is opened or closed at any speed. All holes in
cranks, linkage etc., having moving pins, shall be drilled to fit
accurately so as to maintain the minimum amount of slack and lost-
motion in the entire mechanism.
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

5.4.6 A local/remote selector switch and a set of Open and Close

push buttons shall be provided on the control cabinet of the
isolator to permit its operation through local or Remote push buttons.
The remote push buttons shall be arranged By the purchaser.

5.4.7 Provision shall be made in the control cabinet to disconnect

power supply to prevent local/remote power operation.

5.4.8 Each motor operated mechanism shall be subjected to Blocked

rotor test.

5.4.9 A vertical down pipe operating shaft not less than 2.0 meters
for 36KV Isolator to suit mounting height of structure and supported on
ball or roller bearing in its shaft shall be provided.

5.4.10 Each rotating insulator stool of isolator shall have taper

roller bearing at top and ball bearing at other end. The thickness of
plate required for fixing of the rotating stool shall be atleast 10 mm
for 36KV Isolators. Four (4) Nos. holes of 15 mm diameter on this plate
of the stool at a PCD of 76 mm & minimum clearance of 23 mm from the
hole centre for 36KV Isolators for fitting the post insulators shall
be provided. The bearings shall be of reputed make eg. SKF,HMT, NBC,
TATA. Additional bearing assemblies, channels etc wherever required for
avoiding the fouling of operating mechanism with the structure & for
smooth operation of the Isolators, shall be provided free of cost by
the supplier.

5.4.11 The entire mechanical load shall be suspended on taper roller

bearing. The bearing shall be adjustable and accessible for dismantling
in the field. The rotating insulator shall be mounted on a housing with
bearing housing. The bearing housing shall be weather proof and
facilities for lubrication of bearing shall be provided. The housing
shall be made of pressure die cast aluminium with smooth surfaces
suitably machined for seating the bearings. Two nos. of bearings with
adequate shaft diameter and distance between the bearings shall be
provided to avoid wobbling during operations.

5.4.12 All other friction locations shall be provided with bearings,

bushes, joints, springs etc., and shall be so designed that no
lubrication shall be required during service. Complete details of
bearings, bushes, housing, greasing etc., shall be furnished with the
bid .The earthing switch shaft shall also be provided with necessary
bearings.

5.4.13 The down operating pipe (Two Nos. i.e. one number of main switch
and one for earth switch) and phase coupling pipe shall not be less
than 32 mm (3.13 Kg/ Mtr)and 25 mm (2.41 Kg/Mtr) nominal bore
respectively. All G.I pipes used in operating mechanism of isolators
and earth switch shall be of class B as per relevant IS. The operating
pipe shall be terminated into a suitable swivel or universal type joint
at both ends between the insulator bottom bearing and the operating
mechanism to take care of marginal angular misalignment at site.

5.4.14 Each phase of isolator shall be provided with a rigid base

fabricated from steel sections. The base shall be suitable for
mounting on support structures. Fabrication, welding etc., shall be
done by suitable jig, power press and templates to avoid deviations
during production. Details of dimensions of sections, jig templates
and device used for production of the base shall be furnished with the
bid.
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

5.5CONTROL CABINET :

The control cabinet of the operating mechanism shall be made out

of 12 SWG hot dip galvanized sheet steel and shall be weather and dust
proof. Hinged door shall be provided with pad locking arrangement.
Sloping rain hood shall be provided to cover all sides.15 mm thick
neoprene or better type of gaskets shall be provided on the door and
the top side entry of operating rod to ensure degree of protection of
at least IP-55 as per IS:13947. Separate cabinet made out of 12 SWG
hot dip galvanized sheet steel shall be provided with each earth switch
operating mechanism. The cabinet for both main and earth switch shall be
mounted on galvanized support structure with adjustment for horizontal
and vertical alignment. The support structure with suitable hardware is
also in the scope of supply. Details of these arrangements along with
the size of the cabinet shall be furnished with the bid.

5.6 MOTOR:

The motor shall be suitable for 3 phase,415 V A.C supply with

variations as specified in this specification. It shall be totally
enclosed type if mounted outside the control Cabinet. The motor shall
withstand without damage stalled torque for at least three times the
duration of tripping device. The motor shall, in all other respects,
conform to the requirement of [Link] make of motor shall be
CROMPTON / ABB / SIEMENS only.

5.7 GEAR:

The isolator may be required to operate occasionally, with

considerably long idle intervals. Special care shall be taken for
selection of material for gear and lubrication of gears to meet this
requirement. The worm gears shall be made out of bronze or any other
better material and lubricated for life with graphite or better quality
non draining and non hardening type grease. Wherever necessary
automatic relieving mechanism shall be provided .Complete details of
components, material, grade, self lubricating arrangement, grade of
lubricants, details of jig, fixtures and devices used for quality
check, shall be furnished by the bidder in his offer.

5.8 GLAND PLATE AND GLANDS :

A removable gland plate with double compression type brass

cable glands shall be provided with each operating mechanism for
terminating all cables . Two (2) no. of 32 mm and one (1) no. of 25
mm for earth switch operating mechanism and three (3) nos. of 32 mm
and one (1) no. of 25 mm for main operating mechanism glands shall
be provided.

5.9CONTROL CIRCUITS:

Control device shall store OPEN and CLOSE command even if the
corresponding switch is momentarily pressed until the command is fully
executed and the components get deenergised after execution. Failure of
auxiliary power supply or loose contact shall not cause faulty
operation.

5.10 LIMIT SWITCH:

Limit switches shall be of reputed make. Auxiliary switch

shall not be used as Limit switch. Details of make, rating and type of
limit switch shall be furnished in the bid offer.
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

5.11 OVERLOAD AND SINGLE PHASING PREVENTOR:

Suitable relay/device shall be provided to prevent overloading of

the motor. Single phase preventer shall be provided to operate on open
circuiting of any phase and shall trip off the motor and disconnect the
control supply. The motor shall be protected by using separate single
phasing preventor and overload relay. These shall also be used to cut-
off the control supply of the operating mechanism. Complete details of
the devices shall be furnished in the bid offer.

5.12 CONTACTOR:

The contactor shall be suitable for making and breaking stalled motor
current. The contactor shall be suitable for operating at 110V DC as
well as 220 V D.C. or three phase 415V A.C. with suitable inter-locking
D.C. relay to cut off A.C. supply to the motor in accordance with
the interlocking scheme. Two nos. of contactors shall be provided for
each motor for OPEN and CLOSE operation respectively. One Contactor
shall be provided for the electrical interlocking system. A timer shall
be provided for providing alarm and opening the control circuit in case
the isolator does not perform the operation in the specified time.
Make, type, rating and details of the contactor shall be furnished in
the bid offer.

5.13 AUXILIARY SWITCH :

5.13.1 The isolators shall be provided with snap type auxiliary switch
with all contacts visible and replaceable to facilitate adjustment/
inspection in the field. Each operating mechanism box shall be
equipped with Twelve Nos. of NO and Twelve Nos. of NC auxiliary
switches exclusively for Purchaser's use. Eight pairs of NO and Eight
pairs of NC contacts shall be provided in the auxiliary switch box for
each operating mechanism for earth switch. The contacts of auxiliary
switches shall be silver plated. The auxiliary switches shall be of
reputed make and of best quality. Auxiliary switches other than snap
type shall not be accepted. The bidder shall get the sample of snap
type auxilary switch approved from the RVPN/purchaser before approval
of drawings of isolators.

5.13.2 The auxiliary switches and auxiliary circuits shall be

capable of carrying the current of atleast 10 Amps. continuously
with adequate breaking capacity.

5.13.3 Auxiliary switches shall be capable of breaking atleast 2A in

a 220 V D.C/ 110 V D.C circuit with a time constant of not less
than 20 milliseconds.

5.13.4 The R.M.S withstand voltage shall be 2 KV for one minute. The
auxiliary switches shall be positively driven in both direction by
rigid members. The insulating material for the auxiliary switches shall
be ceramic or other non-cracking material.

5.13.5 The auxiliary switches shall be actuated by a cam or similar

arrangement directly mounted on the isolator operating pipe and shall
be without any intermediate levels, linkages etc., to ensure fool
proof operation.

5.13.6 The auxiliary switches which are installed on the frame of

isolator shall be suitably protected from accidental arcing from the
main circuit. A drawing of auxiliary switch included in the scope of
supply shall be furnished with the bid offer. The auxiliary switch
contacts shall be accessible when the isolator is live and signaling
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

for open will not take place unless moving contacts have fully
separated.

5.14 SPACE HEATERS:

Space heater suitable for 1 phase 240 V AC supply shall be

provided for motor operated operating mechanism to prevent
condensation. A switch and fuse / link shall be provided in the
operating mechanism.

5.15 TERMINAL BLOCK AND WIRINGS :

Each operating mechanism shall be provided with 1100 V grade

stud type terminal block. All auxiliary switches, interlocks and other
terminals shall be wired upto terminal block .The terminal block shall
have at least 20% extra terminals. All wiring shall be carried out with
1100V grade insulated 2.5 [Link]. copper wires.

5.16 ARCING HORNS :

The arcing horns provided on the isolators shall be capable of

breaking the magnetizing current of the transformers up to the capacity
of 80 MVA. The arcing horns shall close before the main contacts close
and open after the main contacts are separated .Arcing horns shall be
made of liberally rated renewable rod type. The diameter of the arcing
horn's rod shall be atleast 10mm made out of G.I.M.S.

5.17 INTERLOCKING :

5.17.1 Each earth switch shall be mechanically interlocked with the

associated isolator so as to prevent closing of the earthing blades
when the main blades are in a closed position and vice-versa. The
interlocking arrangement shall be strong and robust. Each isolator
shall also be provided with electrical interlocking (of the approved
type)between isolator and associated circuit breaker so that isolator
may not be operated on load, i.e, when the circuit breaker is in
closed position.

5.17.2 The earth switches, wherever provided, shall be constructionally

interlocked so that the earth switch can be operated only when the
isolator is open and not vice-versa. The constructional interlocks
shall be built-in construction of isolator and shall be in addition to
the electrical and mechanical interlocks provided in the operating
mechanism.

5.17.3 In addition to the constructional interlock, isolator and earth

switches shall have provision to prevent their electrical and manual
operation unless the associated and other interlocking conditions
are met. All these interlocking shall be of fail safe type. Suitable
individual interlocking coil arrangements shall be provided. The
interlocking coil shall be suitable for continuous operation both on
110 V DC and 220 V DC supply so that it may not have to be changed to
DC Battery Voltage available at Sub-Station(s).

5.17.4 Castel type keyed switches with solenoid operated locking pin
and one auxiliary contact shall be provided for the interlocking
scheme. It shall not be possible to operate the isolator or earth
switch manually without fitting this key on shutters provided on the
openings for inserting operating crank. It shall not be possible to
operate the isolator electrically unless this key is re- fitted in the
switch.
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

5.18 INTERIOR ILLUMINATION:

A switch, HRC fuse and holder suitable for a 240 V Lamp shall
be provided in the Control Cabinet.

5.19 POWER SOCKET:

A 1 phase 240V, 15A power socket and switch shall be provided

in the motor operated operating mechanisms of the isolator.

5.20 CONTROL AND AUXILIARY SUPPLY:

A 3 phase switch with HRC fuses for phases and link for
neutral shall be provided for power supply and a 2 way switch with HRC
fuses shall be provided for control supply in the motor operated
mechanism of the isolator.

5.21ACCESSORIES :

The accessories to be provided on the isolator shall include

but not be limited to the following:

5.21.1POSITION INDICATOR :

A position indicator to show whether the isolator is in ON or

OFF position.

5.22NAME AND RATING PLATE :

Isolators and earthing switches and their operating devices shall be

provided with a name plate. The name plate shall be weather proof and
corrosion proof. It shall be mounted in such a position that it shall
be visible in the position of normal service and installation. It shall
carry the following information duly engraved or punched on it.

5.22.1ISOLATOR BASE :

Name of Purchaser:
Name of Manufacturer:
A/T No.:
Type Designation:
Manufacturer's serial number:
Rated voltage:
Rated normal current:
Rated short time current (rms)
and duration:
Rated short time peak current (kAp):
Weight:

5.22.2EARTHING SWITCH :

Name of purchaser:
Name of Manufacturer:
A/T No.:
Type Designation:
Manufacturer's serial number:
Rated voltage:
Rated short time current (rms)
and duration:
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

Rated short time peak current (kAp):

Weight:

5.22.3OPERATING DEVICE :

Name of purchaser:
Name of Manufacturer:
Email/Contact No:-
PO No.
Month & Year of Mfg.
A/T No.:
Type Designation:
Reduction gear ratio:
[Link]:
i) Rated auxiliary voltage:
ii) Starting current:
iii) Designation of AC Motor as
per IS:4722:
iv) Starting Torque at 80% of
supply voltage:
v) Pretravel in degrees after
cutting of supply:

Total operating time in seconds:

i) CLOSE operation - electrical

ii) OPEN Operation - electrical
iii) ------do------ - manual

Space Heater:
Rated voltage and power:

Auxiliary contacts:

i) Rated current (Amps):

ii) No. of contacts used (NC & NO):
iii) No. of free contacts (NC & NO):

Terminal blocks and wiring:

i) Rated current:
ii) Voltage grade and type:

5.23PADLOCKING DEVICE :

All isolators and earthing switches shall be provided with

padlocking device to permit locking of the isolator and earthing switch
in both fully open and fully closed positions. Isolator and earthing
switch shall be arranged to be interlocked electrically also.

5.24SIGNALLING :

5.24.1 Signalling of the close position shall not take place unless
the movable contact has set in a position in which the rated normal
current, the peak withstand current and the short time withstand
current can be carried safety.

5.24.2 Signalling of the open position shall not take place unless
the movable contact has reached the position such that the clearance
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

between the male and female contacts is at least 80% of the isolating
distance.

5.26DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION :

5.26.1 Full particulars of design, manufacture , jig template

and quality control devices developed for manufacture of the
equipment offered in respect of but not limited to the following, shall
be furnished with drawings and descriptions alongwith the bid.

i) Contacts, material, current density etc.

ii) Design of contact pressure.
iii) Contact support and fixing arrangement on isolators.
iv) Operating mechanism, clamps, locks etc.,
v) Bearings, housing of bearings, bushes etc.,
vi) Balancing of heights.
vii) Coupling pipes, joints, connection adjustments.
viii) Base plates.
ix) Down pipe guides and joints.
x) Brass bushes and bearings at various joints.
xi) Operating mechanism, type of gear, aux. switch, size and
thickness of box, degree of protection, gland plate, gland
etc.
xii) Nuts, bolts and fasteners.
xiii) Interlocking devices.

Offers without the above information or with incomplete

information shall not be considered.

5.27FASTENERS :

All the bolts, nuts, washers etc. required for assembling

the equipment and for fixing them on the structures including
for fixing of post insulators on the base plate/base frame are
included in the scope of supply. Nuts, bolts and washers of 5/8” and
higher size shall be hot dip galvanized. Nuts, bolts and washers of
less than 5/8" size shall be of stainless steel when used on current
carrying live parts and nickel plated brass in other parts.

5.28CONTACTS:

5.28.1 The contacts, terminal arrangement and terminal pad of the

isolator shall be made out of hard drawn electrolytic copper having
liberal cross section to withstand the rated normal current and fault
levels. The contacts of isolators shall be reverse loop type, heavy duty,
self aligning, high pressure contacts of modern design. The contacts
surface shall be silver plated having minimum thickness of 40 microns.
The switch blades shall be made from tubular section of hard drawn
electrolytic copper having suitable diameter and wall thickness. The
contact surface shall be wiped during closing and opening operations to
remove any film, oxide coating etc. Wiping action shall not cause
scouring for abrasion of surfaces. Fabrication of contact shall be made
with suitable jig to avoid deviations during production. Details of size
and shape of contacts, springs, back plate, fixing arrangements design of
contact pressure, life of contacts, limit of temperature rise etc., shall
be furnished alongwith the bid. The moving contacts of tubular section
shall be so dimensioned as to carry the rated current. Bi-metallic strip
of 1 mm thickness shall be used for all connections between copper and
aluminum parts.
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

The stopper provided in the jaw should be of Teflon/Fibre or any other material
having high heat resistance & water resisting quality.

5.28.2 The current density shall be less than 2.5 Amp. per [Link] in
the male and female contacts & terminal pad. The current density in
all other parts of Isolator shall be less than 2.5 A/[Link] for
copper and 1.0 A/[Link] in Aluminium. The supporting calculation
showing current density without &with holes for overlapping shall be
furnished with bid offer. Minimum cross section of fixed contacts -380
Sq mm / 593 Sq mm / 952 Sq mm respectively.

5.28.3 The male and female contacts assemblies and blades should
ensure:

i) Electrodynamic withstand ability during short

circuit.

ii) Thermal withstand ability during short circuit.

iii) Constant contact pressure even when the live parts of

the insulator stack are subject to tensile stresses due
to linear expansion of connected bus bar or flexible
conductor either because of temperature variation or
strong winds.

iv) Wiping action during closing and opening.

v) Self alignment ensuring smooth closing of the switch.

5.29 MOUNTING OF FIXED CONTACTS :

Slots shall be provided for marginal adjustment of height of contacts.
Suitable device shall be provided to prevent dashing. Fabrication,
welding etc. shall be done in suitable jig to avoid deviations during
production.

5.31TERMINAL CONNECTORS :

5.31.1 Each isolator shall be provided with bi-metallic rigid self

grooved bolted type terminal connectors suitable for Twin zebra ACSR
conductor. The terminal connector shall be suitable for horizontal and
vertical take off. The terminal connectors shall have ratings as that of
isolator's current rating or higher. The current density in terminal
connector shall not exceed 1.0 Amp./[Link].

5.31.2 The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements:

i) The terminal connectors shall be designed most liberally for

current ratings and shall be manufactured and tested as per IS:
5561 for tensile strength, temperature rise and short circuit
current withstand test.

ii) All casting shall be pressure die casting free from blow holes,
surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp edges and corners
shall be blurred and rounded off.

iii) No part of clamp shall be less than 10mm thick.

iv) All ferrous parts shall be of stainless steel.

Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

vi) All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to

have minimum contact resistance.

vii) Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with

the requirements stipulated in IS:5561.

5.31.3 The bimetallic strip of standard quality having thickness of

at least 1 mm shall be used to avoid galvanic corrosion. Minimum size
of Bimetallic Strip 75x75mmx1mm thick.

5.32ASSEMBLY :

The isolator shall be fully assembled at the works of the

supplier and operations shall be carried out on it to ascertain that
all parts fit correctly and function satisfactorily.

5.33TEMPERATURE RISE :

The temperature of the moving blades , contacts, terminal

arrangement, terminal pad and terminal connectors and other parts of
the isolator shall not exceed the limits as specified in the IS:9921
while carrying full load current at maximum ambient temperature of
50 degree C and other site conditions as mentioned in the
specification instead of an ambient temperature of 40 degree C as
mentioned in relevant IS.

6.0TYPE TESTS :

6.1 All the material offered, shall be fully type tested as per the
relevant standards. The bidder must furnish type test reports
alongwith the bid of similar rating and type and design of the bidded
material as per 2.01(c )of annexure- PQR.

a. Certified copies of following type test reports as Per IS:9921

(Part-IV) complete in all respect alongwith certified drawings clearly
showing the material, components and cross sectional area of all
current carrying parts shall be furnished alongwith the bid with the
confirmation that material, components and cross sectional area of all
current carrying parts will be either exactly same or superior than that
of isolators got type tested of which type test reports are being
furnished alongwith the bid.

(i) Test to verify insulation level.

(ii) Temperature rise test.

Millivolt drop test/ Measurement of

(iii) resistance test.

Rated peak withstand and Rated short time

(iv) current withstand test on isolator.

Rated peak withstand and Rated short time

(v) current withstand test on earth switch.

Test to prove satisfactory operation &

(vi) mechanical endurance.

Rated peak withstand and short time current

withstand test on Terminal Connector suitable
(vii) for twin zebra ACSR conductor as
per IS:5561.
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

Degree of protection test provided by

(viii) Enclosure as per IS:13947.

(ix) Test on Auxiliary Switch.

6.3 In case of bought out items, the type test reports in

favour of manufacturer of bought out items may be accepted provided
the tests are conducted at a laboratory as per clause 2.01(C) of
annexure-PQR of the Specification.

7.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING :

7.1 ROUTINE AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS :

In the event of an order, the following tests as per relevant standards

shall be got conducted in presence of purchaser’s representative. The
supplier will have to furnish valid calibration certificates of all
testing equipments issued from Govt./Govt. approved agency to
purchaser representative before offering the material for purchaser
inspection. The bidder shall enclose copy of invoices of raw material
and bought out items as listed at Clause No.12.0 along with the
inspection report.

1. Voltage test on control and auxiliary circuit of

isolators as per IS:9921 ([Link]) on all offered
isolators.

2. Measurement of resistance of main circuit of

isolator as per IS:9921 ([Link]) on all offered
isolators.

3. Mechanical Operation test on one isolator of each

type and rating with available post insulators
selected at random out of each offered lot for
inspection.

4. Mechanical Endurance test shall be done as

acceptance test on one isolator of each type and
rating with available post insulators selected at
random out of each offered lot for inspection.
Mechanical endurance test shall be conducted on
the main switch as well as earth switch of one
isolator of each type and rating. Damaged contacts
shall not be acceptable in any case. The contacts
of isolators which have undergone this test shall
be silver plated again by the supplier before
dispatch.

5. Verifications of dimensions as per approved

drawings/Schedule of Guaranteed Technical
Particulars on one isolator of each type and
rating selected at random out of each offered lot
for inspection.

6. Temperature rise test after fitting terminal

connectors on one isolator of each type and rating
selected at random out of each offered lot for
inspection. The test shall be carried out at
maximum ambient temperature of 50 [Link] of
40 Deg.C. as mentioned in relevant IS.

7. The galvanized components shall be tested for

Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

preece test as per IS:2633 of one Isolator of each

type and rating selected at random out of each
offered lot for inspection.

8. The Measurement of thickness of silver plating as

per BS:2816 at supplier's works or at a laboratory as per
clause 2.01 (C) of annexure-PQR on one piece (either
moving or fixed contact) of isolator of each type and
rating selected at random out of each offered lot for
inspection.

7.2 The purchaser reserve the right to have the all tests
carried out at his own cost by an independent agency ,wherever
there is dispute regarding the quality of material, and will
claim reimbursement from the supplier,in case the material as a
result of such test/tests is not found conforming to the
requirement of the specification.

7.3 All the tests (as mentioned at Clause 7.1) and

Inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer unless
otherwise especially agreed upon by the bidder and purchaser at
the time of purchase. The bidder shall afford the inspection
officer(s) representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities
without charges, to satisfy him that the material is being
furnished in accordance with this specification.

7.4 Inspection and acceptance of any material under the

specification by the purchaser, shall not relieve the bidder of
his obligation of furnishing material in accordance with
the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection
if the material is found to be defective. The bidder shall
keep the purchaser informed in advance, about manufacturing
programme so that arrangements can be made for inspection.

7.5 One set of Isolator sample to be erected at firm’s work in

presence of RVPN officer as per the structure drawing provided by
the Nigam before approval of drawing and commencement of bulk
supply.

8.0 TOLERANCE ON TEST RESULTS :

The tests shall be conducted as per relevant ISS.

9.0SITE TESTS :

The purchaser reserves the right to carryout any site

tests as may be decided at his own cost and will claim
reimbursement from the supplier ,in case the material as a result
of such test/tests is not found conforming to the prescribed
specification.

10.0GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS/OTHER INFORMATION:

Guaranteed technical particulars as per Schedule-GTP

shall be furnished alongwith the bid. Bids not accompanied with
Guaranteed technical particulars, type test reports ,detailed
drawings and bill of material etc. are liable to be rejected.

11.0 DRAWINGS:
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

11.1 The bidder shall submit with his bid the bill of material
and fully dimensional drawings of the offered isolators ,their
accessories, clearly showing the full details of material
components and cross sections of moving blade, male and female
contacts, details of terminal arrangement ,terminal pad, terminal
connectors, auxiliary switch box, level adjustment devices,
electrical and mechanical interlocking ,operating mechanism showing
the make, number and type of bearings, bearing shaft diameter,
nominal diameter and thickness of various G.I pipes ,earth switch,
blades, contacts and earth connectors and earth switch operating
mechanism etc. to be supplied by them in order to enable the
purchaser to examine the offer.

11.2 The bidder shall also furnish drawings and bill of

material only for supporting structures required for isolators and
earth switches, although supporting structures are not in the scope
of supply.

11.3 In the event of an order ,the bidder shall submit for

approval outline and detailed dimensional drawings of all the
parts of the isolators and earth switches etc. within fifteen days
from the date of issue of the purchase order. The drawings shall
include the full description of the isolators. Such drawings shall
be sent in four copies alongwith one set of complete test reports
as stipulated at Clause No.6.0 of the specification including
certified drawings clearly showing the material components and
cross sectional area of moving blades , contacts ,terminal
arrangement, terminal pad ,terminal connectors and operating
mechanism etc.. After the necessary approval of the drawings so
sent ,the supplier shall subsequently provide such approved
drawings with operation and maintenance manuals to be sent to
consignee(s).The supplier shall also provide one set of auto
positive drawing for re-production to Superintending Engineer
(Proc.-II),RVPN, Jaipur.

The following drawings are to be supplied as part

of the contract:

[Link] showing the overall dimensions of isolator/

Isolator cum earth switch in open as well as in
close position , clearances, terminal connectors,
operating mechanism, auxiliary switch box, base
channels etc. alongwith bill of material showing
make, type, material and quantity of each
component/part with mass/weight etc..

[Link] views and descriptive details of items

such as heights, phase coupling pipes, base plate,
operating shaft, guides, swivel joint operating
mechanism and its components etc.,

[Link] showing detailed dimensions of all current

carrying parts.

[Link] showing mounting details of isolators on

supporting structures .

[Link] of electrical interlocking and wiring

diagram.

[Link] and rating plate diagram as per IS:9921.

[Link] drawing of auxiliary switches.

Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

[Link] literature of isolator/isolator cum

earth switch construction.

[Link] assurance plan adopted for manufacture of

isolator/isolator cum earth switch specified in
the specification.

11.4 The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in

accordance with the approved drawings and no deviation shall
be permitted without the written approval of the Purchaser. All
manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the
equipment prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at the
Supplier's risk.

Approval of drawings/work by Purchaser shall not relieve

the Supplier of his responsibility and liability for ensuring
correctness and correct interpretation of the latest revision of
applicable standards, rules and codes of practices.

12.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

The bidder shall invariably furnish following information

alongwith his offer, failing which his offer may be liable for
rejection.

i) Statement giving list of important raw materials, including but

not limited to:
a) Copper.
b) Steel.
c) Springs.
d) Bearings.
e) Nuts & Bolts.
f) Operating mechanism and its components such as motor, gear,
auxiliary switch, terminal block, interlocks etc.

ii) Names of sub suppliers for the raw materials, list of standards
according to which the raw materials are tested, list of tests
normally carried out on raw materials in the presence of bidder’s
representative, copies of test certificates etc.

iii) Information and copies of test certificates as in (i) above in

respect of bought out items/accessories.

iv) List of manufacturing facilities available.

v) Level of automation achieved and list of areas where manual

processing still exists.

vi) Listof areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are

normally carried out for quality control and details of such tests
and inspections.

vii) Special features provided in the equipment to make it maintenance

free.

viii) List of testing equipments available with the bidder for final
testing of equipment and test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

the type, special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the

relevant standards.

The successful bidder shall, within 30 days of placement order,

submit following information to the purchaser:

i) List of raw materials as well as bought out items/accessories and

the name of sub-suppliers selected from the list furnished along
with offer.

ii) Type test certificates of the raw material and bought out
accessories.

The successful bidder shall submit the routine test certificates

of bought out items/accessories at the time of routine testing of the
fully assembled isolator.

13.0OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS MANUALS :

13.1 Within one month from the date of issue of the purchase
order, the supplier shall forward three sets of operation and
maintenance instructions manuals per set of isolator to the
Superintending Engineer(Proc.-II), RVPN, Jaipur and one set per
isolator to each consignee alongwith requisite detailed drawings
of the isolator covered by this specification. The manuals shall
be bounded and shall include all necessary information and
drawings to enable all items of the isolators to be maintained,
dismantled, adjusted and re-assembled by the purchaser's staff
together with suitable sectional drawings and part list.

13.2 After commissioning of the isolator, the supplier will

be responsible for issuing any necessary amendment in the
operation and maintenance instructions manuals as may be required.

13.3 The purchaser may send to the supplier notice covering

items of equipment not included in the contract but which are
officially associated with the isolator and earth switches
being supplied so far as operation is concerned. The
supplier shall reproduce these notes and embody them in his own
manuals.

13.4 Copies of operation and maintenance instructions

manuals shall be furnished free of cost.

14.0PACKING, MARKING AND FORWARDING :

14.1 All parts of isolator like base channel, auxiliary switch

box etc. shall have manufacturer mark. The fixed contacts and
moving blades / male contacts of each isolator shall be packed in
wooden box and all other parts shall be packed as per
manufacturer's practice.

14.2 The equipment shall be packed in crates suitable for

vertical/horizontal transport, as the case may be and suitable to
withstand handling during transport and outdoor storage during
transit. The Supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the
equipment during transit due to improper and inadequate packing.
The easily damageable material shall be carefully packed and marked
with the appropriate caution symbols. Wherever necessary, proper
arrangement for lifting, such as lifting hooks etc., shall be
provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall
be supplied by Supplier without any extra cost.
 Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

14.3 Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing

list containing the following information:

a) Name of the consignee.

b) Details of consignment.
c)Destination.
d) Total weight of consignment.
e) Handling and unpacking instructions.
f) Bill of material indicating contents of each package.

15.0COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT :

All fittings, accessories or material which may have not

been specifically mentioned in this specification, but which are
usual or necessary for the equipment shall be deemed to have been
included in this specification. All equipments shall be complete
in all respect.

16.0LATENT DEFECTS,ERRORS AND OMMISSIONS :

Any material/equipment or part thereof that develops defects,

errors or omissions in the apparatus, not disclosed prior to the
final acceptance by the purchaser ,but occur or are disclosed
during the guarantee period, shall be corrected promptly. The
equipment or part thereof shall be replaced by the supplier free
of charges and all expenses for the transportation, handling,
installation of such replacement or any other incidental charges
shall be borne by the supplier.

17.0SPARES :

List of spare parts recommended for five years of

operation shall be furnished by the bidder. The bidder shall also
quote unit F.O.R destination price of these spare parts stating
elements of freight and insurance. The prices of these spare parts
shall be FIRM in all respect. These prices shall be considered for
evaluation
purpose.

IMPORTANT NOTES:

1. In case the current density in particular

current carrying part after excluding area of holes and
without adding area of other overlapped part is found to be
more than its specified maximum current density then at
holes/overlapped portions the current density of the part
shall be calculated by considering/adding the following
effective area:

a) Cross sectional area of part excluding area of

holes.

b) Cross sectional area of other part excluding

area of holes divided by the ratio of required
maximum current density of other part and same
part. For same material this ratio shall be one.

In case the current density in particular current

carrying part after excluding area of holes and without
adding area of other overlapped part is found to be more
than its specified maximum current density then the
requirement of current density at holes/overlapped portions
Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

shall be considered as fulfilled if following condition is

satisfied:

"Maximum current density specified for the part

(d1) x its cross sectional area (excluding area of
holes in the part) (a1) + Maximum current density
specified for other joining part (d2) x its
cross sectional area (excluding area of holes in
the joining part) (a2) shall be greater than or
equal to the rated current of the isolator".
 Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

Schedule-GTP

SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AGAINST BN-

901600XXXX
ITEM: 36kV, 800/1250/2000A MOTORISED ISOLATORS WITH & WITHOUT EARTH
SWITCH.
Name of Firm:
S. No. PARTICULARS 36kV, 800/1250/2000A ISOLATORS
1 i. Name of Manufacturer
ii Manufacture's type and designation
2. Standard (s) according to which Isolators are
manufactured
3. Maximum design voltage at which the
Isolator can operate (kV)
4. Rated value and Characteristics
i. Number of poles
ii. Number of breaks per pole
iii Class
iv. Rated voltage (kV)
v. Continuous current ratings
a) Nominal (Amps.)
b) Under site conditions (Amps.)
5. Derating factor for specified site condition
6. Rated frequency (Hz.)
7. Maximum current that can be safely interrupted
by the isolator
i. Inductive (A & % PF)
ii. Capacitive (A & % PF)
8. Rated insulation level :
i. Lightning impulse withstand voltage (kV peak)
a. To earth and between poles
b. Across the isolating distance
ii. One minute power frequency withstand
voltage (kV rms)
a. To earth and between poles (kV rms)
b. Across the isolating distance (kV rms)
9. Rated short time withstand current for
i. One Second (kA rms)
ii. Three Seconds (KA rms)
10. Rated peak withstand current (kAp)
11. Milivolt drop test voltage between
i. Contacts
ii. Terminals of each phase
12. Overall dimensions and other information’s.
A. Material, dimensions and min. cross sectional area
a. Female Contact
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
b. Male contact
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
c. Terminal Pad/arrangement
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
 Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

d. Terminal Connector
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
e. Earth Switch Male Contacts
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
f. Earth switch Female Contacts
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensional and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
g. Arcing Horns
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
h. Flexible earth connectors for Isolators
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
(i) Flexible earth connectors for earth switch
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
j. Springs
i. Material and grade
ii. Dimensions and cross- sectional area in Sq. mm
k. Contact Support
i. Material, size and length of channel
ii. Material and size of plate
l. Rain hood
i. Material, grade and size
B) Max. current density at the minimum cross-
sections of
a. Female contact (A/Sq. mm)
b. Male contact (A/Sq. mm)
c. Terminal Pad (A/Sq. mm)
d. Terminal Connector (A/Sq. mm):
13 Constructional features:
i. Mass of Manual Operated Isolator Hardware in
Kgs.
a) Without earth blade
b) With single earth blade
ii. Mass of Motor Operated Isolator hardware in
Kgs.
a) Without earth blade
b) With single earth blade
iii. Minimum clearance in air in closed position of
switch (mm)
a. Between adjacent poles of different phases
(Center to Center)
b. Between live parts and earth.
iv. Minimum clearance in air in open position of
switch (mm)
a. Between poles of same phase (Center to center)
b. Between adjacent poles of different phases.
v. Height of center line of terminal pad above
ground level.
14. Rated mechanical terminal load
i. Load along the terminal connector side (Kg.)
 Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

ii. Load across the terminal connector side (Kg)

15. Torque required to operate the switch (Kg-m)
16. Contact zone
i. Horizontal deflection (mm)
ii. Vertical deflection (mm)
iii. Total amplitude of longitudinal movement w.r.t.
conductor supporting fixed contact (mm)
17. Operating mechanism
i. Type of operating mechanism
ii. Material, size and thickness of Auxiliary Switch
Box
a. For Isolators
b. For Earth switch
iii. Degree of protection
iv. Type, size and no. of cable glands
v. Whether removable gland plate provided
vi. Make, Nos. and type (snap type required)of
auxiliary switch contacts (silver plated) used for
a. Isolators
b. Earth switch
vii Size & material of gasket
viii Whether auxiliary switch is ISI marked
18. i. Nominal bore & weight (Kg/Mtr.) of GI pipes
(Medium class) used for
a. Down operating pipe (mm)
Nominal Bore
Weight (Kg/Mtr.)
b. Connecting pipe for adjacent poles (mm)
Nominal Bore
Weight (Kg/Mtr.)
c. Operating handle (mm)
Nominal Bore
Weight (Kg/Mtr.)
ii. Length of operating down pipe (mm)
iii. Length of operating handle (mm)
iv. Height of operating handle above ground level
a. Size class and No. of pipes
Nominal Bore
Weight (Kg/Mtr.)
b. Size of shackle screw
c. No. of bearings/bushes and its material and size
19. Type of universal/swivel joint
i. Between bearing and down pipe
ii. Between down pipe and operating mechanism
20. i. Type of bearings with make, no. and size used for
a. Rotating insulator base assembly.
b. Operating mechanism
iv. Whether lubricating nipple is provided
21. Make, material and size of bearing housing
22. Min. thickness of rotating stool i.e. insulator base
plate (mm)
24 i. Base channels
a. Size, Nos. and length of base channel (mm)
b. Overall size (mm)
 Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

c. Total weight (Kgs.)

25. Type of contacts
26. Thickness of silver coating on contacts
27. Length of silver plating on
i. Moving contacts
ii. Fixed contacts
28. Max. temperature rise of following current
carrying parts when carrying rated current
continuously over an ambient of 50oC instead of
40oC mentioned in relevant IS.
i. Male contact with silver plating
ii. Female contacts with silver plating
iii. Terminal pad
iv. Bimetallic terminal connector
v. Springs
29. Make, type, rating and quantity of
i. Motors
ii. Gears
iii. Limit Switches
iv. Contactors
v. Overload relay
vi. Single Phase Preventor
vii Auxiliary switch
viii. Terminal blocks
ix. Insulated wires
x. HRC Fuses
xi. Pole discrepancy relay
xii Timer
.
xiii Space heaters
xiv Interlocks
30. Terminal connectors
a. Clamp body
i. Alloy composition
ii. Plating if any
iii. Dimensions
iv. Area at min. cross-section (Sq. mm)
b. Bolts and nuts size
i. Alloy composition
ii. Tensile strength
c. Type of washers used
d. Material of braids
e. Temp. rise when carrying rated current at 50oC
ambient (deg.C)
f. Weight of each type of clamp
31. Nuts and Bolts
i. Size, material and grade in live parts
- do –
ii.
in terminal connectors
iii. - do -
in other parts
32. Locking arrangement of operating mechanism
33. Type of interlocking arrangement provided
 Specification_33kV_Moto. ISO

a. Between Isolator and associated breaker (suitable

for operation at 110V DC as well as 220V DC.)
b. Between isolator and earth switch
34. Isolator hardwares shall be suitable for
assembly with Insulator having
i. Bottom metal fitting (Nos., dia. of holes and
PCD to be indicated /mentioned)
ii. Top metal fitting (Nos., dia. of tapped holes and
PCD to be indicated/mentioned)
35. Whether Isolator hardware is complete with all
accessories.

(Signature )
Name & Designation
with Seal of the firm.
 VOLUME-II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR OUTDOOR LIVE TANK TYPE 36 kV CURRENT

TRANSFORMERS AND 36KV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.0 The following items are proposed to be purchased against this BN-
S. No. ITEM
1. 36 kV CTs
(i) 36 kV CT of Ratio 1000/1A, 4C (0.2s class)
(ii) 36 kV CT of 500/1A, 2C (0.2s class)
2. 36 kV Potential Transformers 2C, 0.2 Class

This section covers the design, manufacture assembly, testing at manufacturer’s work before despatch,
supply and delivery of single phase, 50Hz oil immersed, self cooled, hermetically sealed outdoor type 36
kV current transformers & 36 kV potential transformers for installation at various grid sub-stations of
Rajasthan. Consideration may be given to alternatives which the supplier consider advisable by reason
of his own manufacturing requirements and experiences, provided descriptive matter/test certificates are
submitted pointing out the recommended device or arrangement equal to or superior to that required by
this specification and if the purchaser is convinced of the quality and/or superiority of the equipment.
These equipments shall be suitable for installation in system with neutral effectively grounded.

1.1 STANDARDS:
The design, manufacture and testing of various equipments covered by this specification shall comply
with the latest issue of following and other applicable standards except the value wherever specified shall
be considered relevant:-
IS: 16227 Requirement for Instrument Transformers/ Current Transformers
IEC-61869 Instrument transformers
IS:2705Part-1Specification for current transformers.
IS:5621Specification for Hollow porcelain bushing
IS:2099 Specification for Bushings.
IS:5561 Specification for Electric power connectors
IS: 335 Specification for New Insulating oils
IS:4201 Application Guide for Current transformers.
IS:10601 Dimensions of terminals for high Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear
IS-3156 Specification for voltage transformers
IS-4056 Application Guide for voltage transformers.
IS:2633 Specification for method for testing uniformity of Coating on Zinc Coated articles.
IS:2147 Specification for Degree or Protection.

Equipments and material conforming to alternative internationally recognized standard(s) which ensure(s)
quality equal or better than the Indian standard(s) mentioned above should also be acceptable. In case the
tenderer wishes to offer equipment conforming to other standard they shall furnish English Translation
of the relevant standard.

1.2 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:

The climatic conditions under which the equipment will be required to operate satisfactorily are as
under:-

The equipment offered by you shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian standard specifications
except where stated otherwise in the order. Special care shall be taken in the design and manufacture
equipment to take into account the tropical conditions such as high temperature, excessive humidity,
dust and salt-laden atmosphere as detailed below:-
 (i) Maximum Ambient Air Temperature : 50 Deg. C.
(ii) Maximum daily average Ambient Temperature : 45 Deg. C.
(iii) Maximum yearly weighted Ambient Temperature : 35 Deg. C.
(iv) Minimum Ambient Air Temperature : (-) 5 Deg. C.
(v) Maximum relative humidity : 90%
(vi) Minimum relative humidity : 10%
(vii) Height above main sea level : Less than 1000 meters
(viii) Dust storms are liable to occur during the period : March to July
(ix) Average No. of thunder storm days per annum : 40 days
(x) Average annual Rainfall : 10 to 100 cm
(xi) Average No. of tropical monsoon conditions : 4Months(June to Sept.)
(xii) Seismic level horizontal acceleration : 0.3g
(xiii) Degree of Pollution : Heavy
(xvi) Intensity of solar radiation : 1.0 kW/Sq.M
(xv) Maximum wind load : 195 kg/Sq.M

1.2.1 TROPICAL TREATMENT:

All the equipment shall be suitably designed and treated for normal life and satisfactory operation under
the hot and humid tropical climate conditions specified under clause 1.2 above shall be dust and vermin
proof. All the parts and surface which are subject to corrosion shall be made of such material and shall be
provided with such protective finish as would protect the Equipment installed from any injurious effect
of excessive humidity.
You shall supply all such minor accessories required for the completion of supply which have either not
been specifically mentioned in this specification or your tender offer.

1.3 36 kV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:

1.3.1. The 36 KV current transformers shall be single phase, oil immersed, self cooled, hermetically sealed
type suitable for the service conditions indicated above complete in all respect and conforming to the
latest standards at clause No. 1.1 and modern practice of design and manufacturer.
1.3.2. The cores shall be high grade non-ageing, laminated silicon steel of low hysteresis losses and high
permeability to ensure accuracy at both normal and over current.
1.3.3. The current transformers shall be hermetically sealed to eliminate breathing and prevent air and
moisture from entering the tank. The method adopted for hermetically sealing clearly be stated in detail
in the offer. These shall be provided with oil level indicator/sight glass with marking of maximum,
normal and minimum level and suitable pressure relieving devices capable of releasing abnormal internal
pressure where ever necessary. Arrangement for oil filling/drain valve/plug/hole shall be sealed to avoid
leakage/pilferage of oil. The arrangement provided shall be indicated in the tender.
1.3.4 For 36KV CTs only live tank type design is acceptable.

1.4.1 PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

S. Particulars. 36KV CT
No.
1 Type of CT / installation Single phase, live tank, oil filled, hermetically sealed,
outdoor type.
2 Type of mounting Steel structure(300X300mm)
3 Suitable for system frequency 50Hz
4 Nominal system voltage (KVrms) 33
5 Highest system voltage (KVrms) 36
6 Current ratio (i) 1000/1A, 4C(0.2s class)
(ii) 500/1A,2C(0.2s class
7 Method of earthing of system Effectively earthed
 8 Rated continuous thermal current (Amp) CT shall be thermally rated for 200% of rated Max.
primary current for 15 minutes & 120% of rated
continuous current. However, the temperature rise
test shall be carried out at 120% of rated primary
current.
9 Acceptable limit of temp. rise over As per ISS 2705
maximum ambient temperature of 50 deg.
centigrade for continuous operation at
rated current.
10 1.2 / 50micro seconds lightening impulse 170
voltage (KVp)
11 One minute dry power frequency 70
withstand voltage for primary winding
(KVrms)
12 One minute power frequency high voltage 3
withstand requirement for primary winding
(winding sections having more than one
section) and secondary winding (KVrms)
13 Total creepage distance of porcelain/ 900
Polymer housing (minimum in mm)
14 Rated short time withstand current for one 31.5
sec. duration (KArms)
15 Rated dynamic withstand current (KAp) 78.75
16 Maximum creepage factor for hollow 4
porcelain/Polymer insulator
17 Value of tan delta at Um/√3 0.003 (Max)without anytemperature correction
(Fornew) ≤0.005withoutany
temperaturecorrection(withinguaranteeperiod)

1.4.2 PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF POTENTIALTRANSFORMERS

S. Particulars. 36KV PT
No.
1 Type of PT / installation Single phase, 50Hz oil immersed, self cooled,
hermetically sealed outdoor type 36KV potential
transformers. (0.2 Class)
2 Type of mounting Steel structure(300X300)MM
3 Suitable for system frequency 50Hz
4 Nominal system voltage (KVrms) 33 KV
5 Highest system voltage (KVrms) 36 KV
6 Method of earthing of system Effectively earthed
7 Acceptable limit of temp. rise over maximum As per IS 3156 or equivalent IEC
ambient temperature of 50 deg. centigrade.
8 1.2 / 50micro seconds lightening impulse 170 KV
voltage (KVp)
9 One minute dry power frequency withstand 70 KV
voltage for primary winding (KVrms)
10 One minute power frequency high voltage 3 KV
withstand requirement for primary winding
(winding sections having more than one
section) and secondary winding (KVrms)
 11 Total creepage distance of porcelain/Polymer 900
housing (minimum in mm)
12 Maximum creepage factor for hollow 4
porcelain/Polymerinsulator
13 Rated Voltage factor 1.2 continuous and 1.5 for 30 seconds
14 Value of tan delta at 3 KV 0.004 (Max)without anytemperature
correction

1.5 CORE WISE DETAILS OF CTS & PTS

(A) 36 KV CT Ratio 1000/1A, 4C
No. of Core Application Rated Class of Max. Min. Knee Max. Sec. Max.
Cores No. burden Accuracy Instrument point winding Accuracy
Security voltage at resistance at limit
Factor lowest tap 75 Deg. C factor
Ohm at
lowest tap
4 1 Differential -- PS __ 650 V 2.50 --
protection
2 Back up -- PS __ 650V 2.50 --
protection
3 Metering 10VA 0.2s 5 -- -- --
4 Metering 10VA 0.2s 5 -- -- --

(B) 36 KV CT Ratio 500/1A, 2C

No. Core Application Rated Class of Max. Min. Max. Sec. Max.
of No. burden Accuracy Instrument Knee winding accuracy
Cores Security point resistance limit
Factor voltage at at 75 Deg. factor
lowest tap C Ohm at
lowest tap
2 1 Protection -- PS -- 650V 2.50 --
2 Metering 10VA 0.2s 5 -- -- --

(C) WINDING WISE DETAILS OF POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS

S. NO. PARTICULARS REQUIREMENTS

1. Type Single phase

2. Rated primary voltage 33KV/3
3. Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous and 1.5 for 30 seconds
4. Phase angle error As per IS-3156 & latest amendments
5. Number of secondary winding Two
winding-I winding-II
(a) Rated voltage 110/3 110/3
(b) Application Metering Metering
(c) Accuracy 0.2 0.2
(d) Rated output burden 25VA 25VA
6. Value of tan delta at 3KV 0.004 (Max)without anytemperature correction.
 7. Percentage voltage error & phase As per ISS / IEC
displacement(minutes) for specified
accuracy class

NOTE: - The accuracy of 0.2 should be maintained up to & including total burden of 50VA on both the
windings.

1.6 TEMPERATURE RISE FOR ALL CLASS CURRENT TRANSFORMERS.

The limits of temperature rise of the windings, external surface of the core and other parts of the
current transformers when carrying a primary current equal to the rated continuous thermal current at
the rated frequency and with rated burden shall be governed by the provisions of latest issue of IS:2705
(Pt-I). The corresponding temperature rise for the terminal connector shall not exceed at rated
continuous thermal current of the CT beyond the limits prescribed in IS: 5561/1970 or latest issue.

1.7 CORES & WINDINGS FOR ALL CLASS CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:

1.7.1 The current transformers core to be used for metering and instrumentation shall be of the accuracy
class as specified, the saturation factor (instrument security factor) of this core shall be low enough so as
not to cause any damage to measuring instruments in the event of maximum short circuit current. Mu-
metal or such other equivalent ferro-magnetic material shall be used for this purpose. Instrument security
factor shall not exceed to 5 on all transformation ratios.

1.7.2 The current transformer cores to be used for protective relaying shall be of specified class of
accuracy. The core shall be designed for minimum specified knee point voltages.

1.7.3. The rating of the secondary winding shall be as per clause No. 1.4 of this specification. The
secondary terminals shall be brought out in weather proof secondary terminal box fitted with a
hinged/bolted door on the side of current transformer for easy access and shall be provided with short
circuiting arrangement. Required transformation ratios can be achieved in any manner, but the current
transformers will have to satisfy the requirement of rated VA burden.

Class of accuracy, short time thermal current etc. as specified in clause No.1.4 and 1.5 at all
transformation ratios and min. knee point voltage and maximum secondary winding resistance shall
correspond to the lowest ratio. The secondary terminal box shall be provided with necessary glands with
removable gland plate for control cables. The secondary terminal box shall conform to IP-55 test. In case
of 4 core CTs, two secondary terminal boxes shall be provided, one for core 1 & 2 and other for core 3
& 4 as described in core wise details of current transformer (clause No.1.5). The secondary terminal box
for core No. 3 & 4 should have arrangements for sealing.

1.7.4 Primary winding shall be made out of high conducting copper the current density for short circuit
current as well conductivity for primary winding shall meet the requirement of IS:2705/1992 or its latest
issue. However, for primary winding Current density corresponding to the rated short time current shall
not exceed 160 Amps./[Link]. Suitable insulated copper wire of electrolytic grade shall be used for
secondary winding.
The tenderer should furnish details of primary winding e.g. number of primary turns, cross-section, short
time current density and normal continuous rated current density in the primary winding so as to meet
the requirement of relevant ISS. Windings shall have high mechanical strength for safety against short
circuit stresses.

1.7.5. The shape of external metal parts shall ensure that rain water runs off and there is no stagnation.
1.7.6. The CTs shall be of robust design, tested quality and reliable in operation. Only pure high grade
paper wound evenly under controlled conditions and impregnated with mineral oil under vacuum shall
be used for the main insulation.

1.8 GALVANISING AND PAINTING AND TANK DETAILS:

All ferrous parts of 36KV Instrument Transformers exposed to atmosphere including tank and secondary
terminal box shall be painted externally with one coat of primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint
of light grey shade No.631 of IS: 5. All the interior surfaces in contact with oil shall be painted with two
coats of suitable heat resistant oil insoluble paint. Minimum thickness of sheet should be 3mm. Welded
joints have to be minimized to avoid the possibility of oil leakage. In any case, welding in horizontal plane
shall be avoided.

1.9 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES FOR ALL CLASS CTs:

The CTs shall be provided with the following fittings and accessories:
(i) 3 Nos. bimetallic terminal connectors with each CT suitable for horizontal and vertical takeoff. The
thickness of bimetallic strip/sleeve shall be of min. 2mm.

(ii) Oil level indicator/sight glass with marking of maximum, normal and minimum level.

(iii) Pressure release device if design recommended.

(iv) Expansion chamber or suitable type of device for absorbing variation in volume of oil due to change
in temperature of oil.

(v) Oil filling /drain valve/plug /hole with sealing arrangement.

(vi) Lifting lugs/holes.

(vii) Weather proof secondary terminal box fitted with hinged/bolted door and complete with terminals
and short circuit arrangement. The secondary box hinged/bolted door shall have sealing arrangement.

(viii) Two Nos. earthing terminals.

(ix) Name and rating plate, showing details of connection diagram.

(x) Test Tap with caution plate/ Facility (with instructions) for Tan delta measurement.

1.10 36 kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS:

The 36 kV Potential Transformers shall be oil immersed, self cooled, outdoor type hermetically sealed
and shall be suitable for measuring/protection services. The potential transformer shall be suitable for
outdoor installation with the protection from rain, dust &direct ray of Sun under the climatic conditions
as mentions at [Link]. 1.2 and shall conform to the Standards mentioned in Clause No. 1.1 of the
Specification. The 36 kV P.T. shall be Single Phase type.

The cores used shall be high grade non ageing laminated silicon steel having low hysteresis losses and
high permeability. The reluctance of cores shall be as small as possible so as to reduce the ratio error and
phase angle error in the P.T. The potential transformer shall be hermetically sealed to eliminate breathing
& prevent air and moisture from entering the tank and method adopted for hermetically sealing be clearly
stated in the offer. These shall be provided with oil level indicator/sight glass with marking of maximum,
normal and minimum level and pressure reliving devise capable & releasing abnormal internal pressure.
The primary & secondary windings shall be made out of copper. For load shading single phasing is
adopted in the system. The offered PTs shall be suitable for working under such conditions.

1.10.1 INSULATION
The Potential transformer shall be capable to withstand satisfactorily the electric test voltage
corresponding to basic insulation level of 170 KV Peak for 36 KV PTs.

1.10.2 TERMINAL BOX:

All secondary terminals shall be brought out in two secondary terminal boxes for each potential
transformer, one for winding 1 and other for winding 2 as described in winding-wise details of potential
transformers. The secondary terminal box for winding 2 should have arrangements for sealing. Necessary
glands for receiving control cable suitable for mounting on the removable gland plate of the terminal box
shall be included in the scope of the supply.

1.10.3 TEMPERATURE RISE:

The potential transformer shall be designed to limit the temperature rise of windings and of other parts as
specified in the standard when corrected for the difference between temperature prevailing at site and
temperature specified by the standards. The temperature rise when tested at 1.2 times rated voltage,
frequency and rated burden and also when tested at 1.5 times rated primary voltage applied for 30 second
starting from previous stable operating conditions at rated frequency and rated burden shall not exceed
the temperature limits as specified in relevant IS.

1.11 INSULATING OIL AND BUSHING FOR CTs/PTs:

The quantity of insulating oil for first filling in each Instrument transformer and complete specification of
the oil shall be stated in the tender. The oil shall be EHV Grade transformer oil and conform to the
requirements of latest issue of IS: 335. The Instrument Transformers shall be supplied duly filled in with
EHV insulating oil and shall be hermetically sealed. The bushing shall be of standard make such as
W.S.I/BHEL/MIL/ BIRLA NGK/CJI only and shall conform to the relevant latest IS: 5621 & IS: 2099.
The make and catalogue no., creepage and creepage factor and other bushing details be clearly stated in
the GTPs. Pressure of nitrogen or any other inert gas used above the oil level to permit expansion or
contraction of oil along with device to detect any leakage if any shall be stated in the tender. Any other
make quoted should be supported by relevant type test reports as per IS-5621 and following tests as per
IS-2099:-
(i) LIV test
(ii) HVPF (wet) test

Polymer bushing having type test(s) as per IEC-61462 are also acceptable.

The tests should be got conducted at laboratory accredited by NABL/ International Laboratory
Accreditation Cooperation Mutual Recognition Arrangement (ILAC-MRA) signatory agency (in case of
foreign laboratory), accredited for the tests conducted, such type test certificates should not be older than
7 years as on the date of bid opening. For this purpose date of conducting of type test will be considered.

1.12 TERMINAL CONNECTORS:

The Instrument transformers shall be supplied with bimetallic terminal connectors for both ACSR Zebra
& Panther conductor as per requirement mentioned below and confirming to IS-5561.

1. 36 kV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:
Ratio 1000/1A, 4C - ACSR Twin Zebra having sub-conductor spacing 300mm Preferably.
Ratio 500/1A, 2C - ACSR Single Panther & Zebra (combined)
2. 36 kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS: - ACSR single Panther

Each terminal connector shall be suitable for Zebra & Panther (combined)/single Zebra/ single
Panther/Twin Zebra conductor as detailed above for both horizontal & vertical takeoff arrangement.
The terminal connectors should be suitable for withstanding the 200% of continuous maximum primary
current for 15 minutes.

The instrument transformer shall also be provided with two Nos. earthing terminals of adequate size
protective against corrosion and metallically clean. Bimetallic strips or Sleeves of suitable thickness
(minimum 2mm) to prevent bimetallic corrosion shall be provided as an integral part of terminal
connector. The tenderer will furnish valid type test reports for short time current test and temperature
rise test for quoted terminal connectors of the type and make offered preferably alongwith tender or at
the time of order execution got conducted at laboratory accredited by NABL/ International Laboratory
Accreditation Cooperation Mutual Recognition Arrangement (ILAC-MRA) signatory agency (in case of
foreign laboratory), accredited for the tests conducted. However, same will not be insisted if terminal
connectors of make MILIND/NOOTAN/ MEGHA/VINAYAK TRANSMISSION are supplied with
CTs/PTs. The type test certificates should not be older than 7 years as on the date of bid opening. For
this purpose date of conducting of type test will be considered.

1.13 DRAWINGS AND MANUALS :

1.13.1 The following drawings of the equipments covered by this specification shall be furnished by the
tenderer along with their tenders:-
1. Outline general arrangement and sectional drawings showing all dimensions and weight of each item
and foundation details.
2. Drawing showing inside details.
3. Diagram of connections showing details of primary and secondary windings.
4. Name /rating plate diagram.

1.13.2 INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL:

The successful tenderer shall have to supply 10sets of operating and maintenance instructions manuals,
along with the erection manual and requisite drawing of the equipment covered by this specification. One
set of drawing and a manual shall also be sent along with each consignment to respective consignees.

1.13.3 NAME /RATING PLATE:

All items of the equipment included in this specification shall be provided with rating plates as per
relevant standards. Rating plate and terminal marking shall be as per relevant IS. Purchase order/BN-
reference and contact e-mail address / mobile [Link] also be given..

Please insert that“Ensure values of Cap Tan Delta to be taken prior to 3 to 6 months from expiry
of the Guarantee Period” on the plate.

1.14 TESTS:
(A) CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:
Each equipment covered under this specification shall comply with and shall be subjected to all
routine/acceptance tests prescribed in the relevant Indian Standard Specification as mentioned in Clause
1.1 as above.
(i)The certified copies of tests reports conducted at laboratory accredited by NABL/ International
Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation Mutual Recognition Arrangement (ILAC-MRA) signatory agency
(in case of foreign laboratory), accredited for the tests conducted of all type tests as per relevant latest
standard mentioned under volume-II clause 1.1 in respect of similar rating and design of tendered
equipment (voltage class wise) included in this specification along with terminal connector (if offered
other than approved make) shall be furnished to adjudge the technical suitability along with the tender.

The tenderer shall furnish necessary calculations on the basis of STC test report furnished above to prove
the CTs of offered ratios are capable to withstand the specified short circuit level. Tenders without type
test reports and supporting calculations for short circuit level are likely to be rejected. No charges for
above type test reports shall be paid. The type test reports shall not be older than 5 years from the date
of technical bid opening under this BN.
The type tests are detailed as hereunder:
(a) Short time current test.
(i) On CT of accuracy class 0.2s or better if offered CTs are of 0.2s class.
(b) Lightning impulse voltage withstand test.
(c) Temperature rise test.
(d) High voltage power frequency (wet) withstand test.

Note: - If the porcelain weather casing/bushing has been subjected to this test separately, the
requirement of HVPF (Wet) test shall be deemed to have been complied.

(ii) In the event of order, temperature rise test and instrument security current test shall be carried out
once on one CT of each ratio and voltage class in the presence of the purchaser’s representative without
extra charges. The ISC test shall be carried out on all transformation ratios. However, one CT of each
ratio along with terminal connector from each lot shall be tested at 200% of the rated maximum primary
current for 15minutes.

(iii) In the event of order, the tenderer may have to get the equipment type tested (except temperature
rise and instrument security current test) as per requirement of relevant ISS, on one sample of each
voltage class of first lot comprising minimum 25% of order quantity in the presence of the purchaser's
representative. The tenderer shall quote charges for following type test which shall not be considered for
bid evaluation.
(1) Short time current test.
(2) LIV withstand test
(3) High voltage power frequency (Wet) withstand test.

(iv) Routine tests as per relevant standard shall be carried out on equipment covered by this specification
in the presence of purchaser's representative free of cost by successful tenderer. All test reports shall be
submitted and got approved from the purchaser before despatch of the equipment. In addition to the
routine tests all PS class CTs (as per sampling plan(v) below) shall be tested in presence of Inspecting
Officer to prove guaranteed values of minimum knee point voltage, turn ratio, secondary winding
resistance etc.
Routine tests to be conducted are as detailed under:-
(a) Verification of terminal marking and polarity.
(b) Power frequency dry withstand test on primary winding.
(c) Power frequency dry withstand test on secondary winding.
(d) Over voltage inter turn test.
(e) Determination of error or other characteristics according to the requirement of the appropriate design
or [Link] test i.e. determination of error (ratio & phase angle errors) shall be conducted
on 100% ordered quantity in NABL accredited/In-house NABL accredited labs or mobile labs with
NABL accreditation for ascertaining the class of accuracy, before conducting acceptance tests.
(f) Partial discharge tests.
(g) Test for TanDelta Measurement at Um/√[Link]/works teststhe Tan Deltashall notexceed 0.3%
(at Um/√3, without any temperature correction), up to 0.1% deviation betweenfactory and site
 results among CT’s will be acceptable (i.e. the value of Tan Delta at site shallnot exceed 0.4% at
Um/√3, without any temperature correction). The same shall not exceed
0.5%(withoutanytemperaturecorrection)attheendofguaranteeperiod,iftandeltavalueof CTs exceed
prescribed limit of 0.5% without any temperature correction, within guaranteeperiod, it will be
considered as failure within guarantee period. The bidder has to
replacefailedCTswithinguaranteeperiodwithoutanycostimplicationtoRVPN.

Measurement of Capacitance & Dielectric dissipation factor also be carried out at

1.05*Um/√3. At factory/works tests, the Tan Delta value shall not be more than 0.001
increases from what measured at Um/√3 (without any temperature correction).

In case of any dispute raised by the supplier regarding tan delta value measured by RVPN at
site, the supplier may arrange the testing from Govt. approved Lab / Lab accredited by
NABL without any cost implication to RVPNL.

(v) Sampling: - The routine/acceptance test shall be conducted on 30% quantity (minimum 20Nos. of
each ratio) offered for inspection.

However, the manufacturer shall furnish in house test report of tan delta measurement test on
100% ordered quantityto the inspecting officer.

(B) TEST FOR POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS:

(i) The certified copies of tests reports conducted at laboratory accredited by NABL/ International
Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation Mutual Recognition Arrangement (ILAC-MRA) signatory agency
(in case of foreign laboratory), accredited for the tests conducted of all type tests as per relevant latest
standard mentioned under Volume-II clause 1.1 in respect of similar equipment included in this
specification along with terminal connector (if offered other than approved make) shall be furnished to
adjudge the technical suitability along with the tender. Tenders without type test reports are likely to be
rejected. No charges for above type test reports shall be paid. The type test reports shall not be older
than 5 years from the date of opening of technical bid under this BN. The type tests are detailed
hereunder:

(a) Temperature rise test.

(b) Lightening impulse voltage withstand test.
(c) High voltage power frequency (wet) withstand test.
(d) Determination of errors or other characteristics according to the requirements of the appropriate
designation or accuracy class (0.2 class).

Note:-If the porcelain weather casing/bushing has been subjected to this test separately, the requirement
of HVPF (Wet) test shall be deemed to have been complied.

(ii) In the event of order, temperature rise test shall be carried out once on one PT in the presence of the
purchaser’s representative without extra charges.

(iii) In the event of order, the bidder may have to get the equipment type tested (except temperature rise
test)as per requirement of relevant ISS, on one sample of each voltage class of first lot comprising
minimum 25% of order quantity in the presence of the purchaser's representative. The bidder shall quote
charges for following type test which shall not be considered for bid evaluation:-

(a) Temperature rise test.

(b) Lightening impulse voltage withstand test.
(c) High voltage power frequency (wet) withstand test.
(d) Determination of errors or other characteristics according to the requirements of the appropriate
designation or accuracy class (0.2 Class)

(iv) Routine tests as per relevant standard shall be carried out on equipment covered by this specification
in the presence of purchaser's representative free of cost by successful tenderer. All test reports shall be
submitted and got approved by the purchaser before despatch of the equipment.

Routine tests to be conducted are as detailed under:-

(a) Verification of terminal marking and polarity.
(b) Power frequency dry withstand test on primary winding.
(c) Power frequency dry withstand test on secondary winding.
(d) Over voltage inter turn test.
(e) Determination of error or other characteristics according to the requirement of the appropriate design
or [Link] test i.e determination of error (ratio & phase angle errors) shall be conducted
on 100% ordered quantity in NABL accredited/In-house NABL accredited labs or mobile labs with
NABL accreditation for ascertaining the class of accuracy, before conducting acceptance tests.
(f) Partial discharge tests.
(g) Test for Tan Delta Measurement at 3KV. At factory/works tests the Tan Delta shall not exceed 0.4%
(at 3KV, without any temperature correction), up to 0.1% deviation between factory and site results
among PT’s will be acceptable (i.e. the value of Tan Delta at site shall not exceed 0.5% at 3KV,
without any temperature correction). The same shall not exceed 0.6% (without any correction) at the
end of guarantee period, if tan delta value of PTs exceed prescribed limit of 0.6% without any
temperature correction, within guarantee period, it will be considered as failure within guarantee
period. The bidder has to replacefailed PTs within guarantee period without any cost implication to
RVPN.

In case of any dispute raised by the supplier regarding tan delta value measured by RVPN at
site, the supplier may arrange the testing from Govt. approvedLab / Lab accredited by
NABL without any cost implication to RVPNL.

(v) Sampling: - The routine/acceptance test shall be conducted on 30% quantity (minimum 20Nos. of
each ratio) offered for inspection.

However, the manufacturer shall furnish in house test report of tan delta measurement test on
100% ordered quantityto the inspecting officer.

(vi) Site Tests:

All winding & paper insulation should be only in dust free controlled atmosphere, under positive
air pressure. Dust & ingress of foreign particles are the main root cause of partial discharge &
eventual failure of CTs &PTs.

The purchaser reserves the right to carry out any site tests as he may decide at his own cost and will
claim reimbursement from the supplier, in case the material as a result of such test/tests is found not
conforming to the prescribed specification / ISS/Purchase order.

1.15 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

Guaranteed technical particulars as per schedule-DEV (A) & (B)shall be furnished along with the tender.
Tenders not accompanied by guaranteed technical particulars are liable to be rejected.

1.16 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP:

All material used in the manufacture of aforesaid equipment shall be of best quality and capable of
satisfactory operation under climatic conditions mentioned in clause 1.2 above. The workmanship shall
be of the highest grade and the entire manufacture in accordance with the best modern engineering
practice.

1.17 COMPLETNESS OF EQUIPMENT:

Any fittings, accessories or apparatus which may not have been specifically mentioned in this
specification but which are usual or necessary for the equipment shall be deemed to have been included
in this specification and in the scope of supply of biders. All equipments shall be completed in all respect.

1.18 PERFORMANCE PERIOD:

The performance of equipment shall be guaranteed for a period of 36 months from the date of receipt
of last consignment at the site/store or 30 months from the date of commissioning, whichever is
earlierirrespective of guarantee period indicated in GCC.

1.19 LATENTDEFECTS, ERRORS AND OMMISSIONS:

Any material/equipments or parts thereof that develops defects, errors or omissions in the apparatus, not
disclosed prior to the final acceptance by the purchaser but disclosed during the guarantee period shall be
corrected promptly. The apparatus or parts thereof shall be replaced by the supplier free of charge and all
expenses for the transportation, handling, installation of such replacement or any other incidental charges
shall be borne by the supplier.

1.20 SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENTS/PRICES AND DELIVERIES:

1.20.1 The bidders shall quote/offer the quantity w.r.t. bided quantity along with other confirmations and
delivery in the Bid Proposal Form& Schedule-DEL respectively.

1.20.2 Bidders must submit all the schedules duly completed in all respects with the bids.

1.21 DEVIATIONS:
Any deviations from the provisions of Volume, I and II of this specification shall be clearly listed and
brought out separately in Schedule-DEV(A) & (B)" technical deviations from the specification" and
"commercial deviations from the specification. Mentioning of deviations elsewhere in tender will not be
considered as deviation. Printed terms & conditions if any, attached will not be considered. Otherwise, it
will be presumed that equipments offered are strictly conforming to this specification.

1.22 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

The bidders are required to furnish the quality assurance plan along with their bid, which is to be
followed by the supplier during manufacturing of the equipment. The list of raw material used along with
their sub suppliers and type test reports of raw material & bought out items be furnished along with the
offer.
Technical Spec. for 30 kV LA

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 30 kV (HEAVY DUTY) STATION CLASS SURGE

ARRESTERS (LIGHTNING ARRESTERS)

1.1. SCOPE:-

This specification covers design, manufacture, assembly testing at manufacturer's works

and & delivery at site of 30 kV (Heavy Duty) station class metal oxide Lightening Arresters
to be installed at Grid Sub Station in Rajasthan. The Lightening Arresters shall be complete
in all respects conforming to modern design and practice for protection of transformers and
substation equipments of 3 phase- 50Hz solidly grounded neutral AC system. The
Lightening arresters are required for 33 kV system protections. The equipment not
expressly provided but required for satisfactory operation of Lightening arrester in the
opinion of the bidder must be included but quoted separately.

The arrester housing shall be porcelain/polymer as per IEC standard.

1.2. STANDARDS:-

The Lightening arresters shall conform to the latest editions and amendments available at
the time of supply, of the standards listed hereunder.

Sl. No. Standard Ref. No. Title

1. IEC 99-4 Specification Part-4 for Lightening Arrestors without gap
for AC system.
2. IS:3070 Specification for Lightning Arrestors for alternating current
(Part-3) system Part-3.
3. IS:2629 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing of iron and
steel.
4. IS:2633 Method for testing uniformity of coating on zinc coated
articles.
5. IS:5621 Specification for large hollow porcelain for use in electrical
installation.
6. IS:2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low
voltage switchgear and control.
7. Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.

Note: -
i) For the purpose of this specification all technical terms used hereinafter shall have
the meaning as per IEC specification.
ii) For the parameters of the Arrestor which are not specified in IEC specification for
Lightening Arrestors, the provisions of BIS/3070 (Part-3) shall be applicable.

Lightening Arrestors meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards, which
ensure equal or better quality than the standards mentioned above shall also be acceptable.
Where the equipment offered by the Bidder conforms to other standards, salient points of
difference between the standards adopted and the specified standards shall be clearly
brought out in the offer.

1.3. PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM:-

The arresters shall be used on 3 phase. 50 cycles effectively grounded neutral AC system.
The maximum system voltage shall be as under.
For 33 kV system :- 36 kV (rms)
The system frequency may vary by +3% from normal of 50 Hz.

1
Technical Spec. for 30 kV LA

1.4. IMPULSE WITHSTAND VOLTAGE OF EQUIPMENT AND TRANSMISSION

LINES: -

The basic insulation level of transformers circuit breakers and other equipments like
instrument transformers and transmission lines are as under:

For 33 kV system:- 170 kVp

1.5. TYPE AND RATING OF LIGHTENING ARRESTERS:-

The Lightening arresters should be of single pole outdoor self-supporting type, heavy duty
station class for 33 kV system. The Lightening arrester shall have nominal discharge current
of 10KA and voltage rating as under:

For 33 kV system:-30 kV (rms)

1.6. CHARACTERISTICS:-

The Lightening arresters shall generally conform to IEC-99-4 (latest addition). The
Lightening arrester shall be suitable for our system (equipment/lines) as mentioned at clause
No. 1.3 and 1.4 and shall be capable of repeated successive operations for discharging the
transmission lines while conducting for limiting switching Lightening and shall be capable of
satisfactory operation within stipulated limits against Lightening and switching Lightenings.

The guaranteed duration for which the arresters can be temporarily subjected to atleast 10%
power frequency overvoltage without affecting theiroperating properties shall be clearly
stated in the bid.

The design features, type test certificates and other documentary evidence in support of
above features of the arresters shall be clearly elaborated /appended with the bid. The
power frequency over voltage and its duration to which the arrester offered can be
subjected without effecting any of its operating properties shall be explicitly guaranteed by
the bidder.

The equipment offered under this specification for gapless metal oxide type station class LAs
shall be suitable for the parameters as mentioned below:

S. No. PARAMETERS 33 KV SYSTEM

1. Rated voltage. KV(rms) 30
2. Nominal system voltageKV(rms) 33
3. [Link] [Link](rms) 36
4. [Link] operating voltage(MCOV)not 25
less than KV(rms)
5. Nominal discharge current. KA 10
6. Long duration discharge class 2
7. Type of construction for 10 KA rated arrester. Single col. & Single
phase
8. Minm. energy discharge capability(KJ/KV) 4
9. Safe fault current (KA) 40
10. Lightning impulse withstand voltage with 1.2/50 170
micro sec. wave (KVp)
11. One minute power frequency withstand voltage 70
of housing. (dry/weight) - KV (rms).

2
Technical Spec. for 30 kV LA

S. No. PARAMETERS 33 KV SYSTEM

12. High current short duration impulse withstand 100
level with 4/10 microsecond wave KA(peak)
13. Minimum pressure relief current (KA rms) 40
14. A) Terminal Connector suitable for ACSR Single Panther
conductor size
B) Take off (for both) Vertical& Horizontal
15. Voltage (Corona extinction) (KV rms). Rated Voltage
16. Whether insulating base and discharge counter No.
with mili- ammeter are required.
17. Minimum creepage distance of Arrestor 900
housing(mm)

1.7. ACCESSORIES AND FITTINGS: -

1.7.1. PORCELAIN HOUSING:

a) All porcelain housings shall be free from amination cavities or other flaws
affecting the maximum level of mechanical and electrical strengths.
b) The porcelain shall be well vitrified and nonporous.
c) The creep age distance of the Arrestor housing shall be as per characteristics
clause 1.6 above.
d) The porcelain petticoat shall be preferably of self-cleaning type (Aerofoil
design). The details of the porcelain housing such as height, angle of
inclination, shape of petticoats, gap between the patticoats, diameter (ID and
OD) etc., shall be indicated by the Bidder in his offer in the form of a detailed
drawing.
e) The Arrestor housing shall conform to the requirements of IEC specification.

1.7.2. POLYMERIC HOUSING:-

a) The silicon polymeric housing shall protect from the effect of weather,
withstands an environmental conditions without failure (pollution, UV, rain, heat
etc.) and avoids flash over for wet and dry AC conditions as well as the residual
voltage during Lightening discharge.
b) The polymeric housing also thermally cycles with the ZnO discs to maintain
a moisture seal without loss of performance.
c) The Arrester housing shall confirm to the requirement of IEC specification.

1.7.3. All necessary accessories and earthing connection leads between the bottom of the
Arrestor and the discharge counter shall be in the Bidder's scope of supply. The
connecting lead between discharge counter and Lightening Arrestor shall be of
copper strip of size 25 x 4 mm and minimum of 1.5 meter length. The discharge
counter shall be so designed that the readings of discharges recorded by the
counter and the readings of milli- ammeter shall be clearly visible through an
inspection window to a person standing on ground. The minimum height of
purchaser's support shall be 2.5 M.

1.7.4. Terminal connector conforming to IS:5561 shall be supplied alongwith the arrester.

3
Technical Spec. for 30 kV LA

1.8. MOUNTING:-

The arrester shall be suitable for mounting on steel structures. The necessary flanges, bolts
etc. for mounting the base are within the scope of supply.

1.9. TERMINAL CONNECTORS:-

The Lightening arresters shall be provided with appropriate number of solder less clamp
type connectors suitable for SINGLE / TWIN ACSR Zebra / Panther, as per requirement
for 30kV (heavy duty)station class Lightening Arrester. Each terminal clamp shall be
suitable for both vertical and horizontal connection of the transmission line conductor. Each
terminal connector shall further be provided with appropriate number of grounding terminals
and the clamps for receiving ground connections.

1.10. PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE:-

The Lightening arrester shall be fitted with efficient pressure relief device so as to check
explosive shattering of the housing following prolonged passage of systems short circuit
current. The pressure relief device shall be suitable for high current pressure relief test
on minimum prospective symmetrical fault current as 40KA (rms) and low current pressure
relief test as per IEC- 99-4(latest amended). The bidder shall attach detailed information
on pressure relief device. The bidders shall attach the test certificates in respect of pressure
relief test alongwith certified drawing so as to establish that the pressure relief device so
offered with the equipment is the same as was tested at that independent Testing
Laboratory. The bidder may also furnish the comparative details with respect to
design/construction of the other prospective symmetrical fault current for metal oxide
LAs. The offers without above test and details are liable to be ignored.

Lightning arresters without pressure relief device shall not be accepted for porcelain
arrester only.

1.11. DRAWINGS:-

In addition to any drawings which the bidder may like to furnish to explain the
design. Operation and operating features of the arrester, the following drawings shall be
attach with the bid.

i. Drawing showing the outline of the complete Lightening arresters.

ii. Drawing showing cut away view of Lightening Arrester.

iii. Drawing showing details of pressure relief device.

iv. Drawing showing clearance from grounded objects and between adjacent poles
of Lightening arrester required at various heights of Lightening arrester.
v. Drawing showing mounting details.

vi. Drawing showing details of terminal connectors.

Descriptive literature explaining action of the Lightening arrester and principal operation of
the Lightening counter shall also be attached with the bid.

4
Technical Spec. for 30 kV LA

1.12. TESTS:-

1.12.1. TYPE TESTS:-

The test report for the following tests as per relevant latest IEC (IEC 60099-4 Edition-3 2014-
06) shall be accepted. The type test certificates should not be older than 10 (Ten) years as
on the date of opening of technical bid.

S. No. List of Type test reports. Tests Requirement as per IEC 60099-4
Edition-3 2014-06 clause no. for Station
Class 10 kA, Us (kV), rms value ≤ 245
Porcelain housed Metal-oxide surge
arrester without gaps for AC system
1. Insulation Withstand tests.
a) Lightning impulse 8.2.6 (test shall be performed on individual
unit housing)
b) Power-frequency 8.2.8 (test shall be performed on individual
unit housing)
2. Residual Voltage tests
a) Steep Current 8.3.2 (test shall be made on complete
arrestor or arrestor section)
b) Lightning Impulse 8.3.3 (test shall be made on complete
arrestor or arrestor section)
c) Switching Impulse 8.3.4 (test shall be made on complete
arrestor or arrestor section)
3 Test to verify long term stability 8.4 (test shall be performed on MO
under continuous operating voltage resistors)
4 Repetitive charge transfer 8.5 (test shall be performed on MO
withstand resistors)
5 Heat dissipation behaviour 8.6 (test shall be performed on MO
verification of test sample resistors)
6 Operating Duty tests 8.7 (test shall be performed on MO
resistors)
7 Power frequency voltage versus 8.8 (test shall be performed on MO
time resistors)
8 Arrestor disconnector /fault 8.9 (tests shall be made on arresters which
indicator (when fitted) are fitted with arrester disconnector)
9 Short-circuit tests 8.10 (test shall be performed on longest
arrestor unit used for the design with the
highest rated voltage of that unit used for
each different arrester design in case of
high current test and for low current test
shall be performed on arrestor unit of any
length with the highest rated voltage of that
unit used for each different arrester design)
10 Bending moment test. 8.11 (test shall be performed on complete
arrestor units without insulating base or
mounting bracket and without internal
overpressure)
11 Environment tests 8.12 (test shall be performed on complete
arrestor units of any length)
12 Seal leak rate 8.13 (test shall be performed on one unit
each)
13 Radio interface voltage (RVI) 8.14 (test shall be performed on fully

5
Technical Spec. for 30 kV LA

assembled arrester, and shall include the

fittings (line and earth terminals, grading
rings, etc.)
14 Test to verify the dielectric 8.15 (test shall be performed on real
withstand of the internal arrester or arrester unit of the design)
components of an arrester
15 Test of internal grading 8.16 (test shall be performed on MO
components resistors)
16 Polluted housing test Annex C – on complete unit.

*For polymeric arresters, test shall be performed as per clause 10 of IEC 60099-4
Edition-3 2014-06.

1.12.2. Routine Test:-

The each unit of Lightening arrester and accessories shall be subjected at manufacturer’s
works for the following tests as per 60099-4 Edition-3 2014-06 ISS before offer of material
for inspection.

i. Measurement of reference voltage.

ii. Residual voltage test.
iii. Internal Partial discharge test
iv. For arrester units with sealed housing a leakage check shall be made on each
unit as hereunder. 1500mm water dip for 30 minutes followed by megger test
with 5 KV megger 30 KV >= 1gegaohm.

1.12.3. Acceptance Test:-

The following tests shall be got conducted in presence of purchaser’s representative, as per
stipulation of the relevant ISS. Acceptance tests wherever possible, shall be conducted on
the complete arrester unit No. of samples to be selected for acceptance tests shall be
nearest lower whole number to the cube root of the number of arresters offered for
inspection.

i. Measurement of power frequency reference voltage on the complete arrester at

the reference current measured at the bottom of the arrester.
ii. Lightning impulse residual voltage.
iii. Internal Partial discharge test.
iv. Visual inspection & verification of dimension

1.12.4. Test on bought out items:

The manufacturer’s test report shall be accepted for the following tests at the time of
inspection.

i. Temperature cycle test on arrester housing.

ii. Porosity test on porcelain housing.
iii. Galvanizing test.
iv. Test for terminal connector.

1.12.5. TOLERANCE ON TEST RESULTS:-

As per relevant standards/ specification.

6
Technical Spec. for 30 kV LA

1.12.6. TEST AT SITE:-

The purchaser reserves the right to conduct all tests on Lightening Arresters after arrival at
site and the contractor shall guarantee test certificate figures under actual service conditions.

1.13. TROPICAL TREATMENT:-

The equipment shall be subjected during service to extremely severe exposure to

atmospheric moisture and long period of high ambient temperature. All corrodible points
and surface shall be of such material and shall be provided with such protective finish
that no part of the installed equipment shall be infuriously effected by atmospheric
conditions. All electrical auxiliary equipment shall be given special treatment for tropical
conditions.

1.14. MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP:-

All the materials used in the manufacture of equipment shall beof best quality of their
respective kind and the whole of the work shall be of the highest class well finished of
approved design and make. Castings shall be free from blow holes, flaws, cracks and other
defects and shall be smooth class grain and of the true form and dimensions. All machined
surfaces shall be true and smooth finished. The finish of the end caps should be such that
the verticality of Lightening arresters is obtained satisfactorily. The arrester shall be
completely assembled at the works to ascertain that all parts fit correctly and Lightening
arrester is erected vertically.

1.15. INSTRUCTION PLATE AND MARKING:-

The arrestor shall be provided with non- corrosive legible name plate indelibly, marked with
the following information:

i. Rajasthan Rajya Vidhyut Prasaran Nigam Ltd.

ii. Purchase Order No.
iii. Manufacturer's name or trade mark and identification No. of the arrestor being
supplied.
iv. Rated voltage.
v. Maximum continuous operating voltage.
vi. Type.
vii. Rated Frequency.
viii. Nominal discharge current.
ix. Long duration discharge class.
x. Pressure relief current in KA rms.
xi. Year of manufacture.

1.16. COMPLETENESS OF THE EQUIPMENT:-

All fittings accessories and apparatus which may have not been specifically mentioned in
this specification but which are actually necessary for the completeness of the equipment
shall be deemed to have been included in the contract. All equipment shall therefore be
complete in all details whether such details are mentioned in this specification or not.

1.17. SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The Guaranteed Technical particulars shall be furnished in prescribed format along with the
requisite drawings / documents for approval.

7
Technical Spec. for 30 kV LA

1.18. INSTRUCTION MANUALS:-

The Copies of operation, maintenance and erection manuals shall be supplied. The manuals
shall be bound volume and shall contain all the drawings and information required for
erection, operating and maintenance of equipment.

The manuals shall include amongst other things the following particulars.

i. Marked erection prints identifying the components, with the assembly drawing.
ii. Detailed dimensions, assembly and description of the equipment and accessories.
iii. Detailed view of the arrester unit etc.

1.19. SEALING:-

The arrester shall be hermetically sealed to avoid ingress of moisture. Suitable rubber
gaskets with effective sealing system should be used.

Manufacturer should devise a suitable routine production testing to verify the efficiency of
sealing.

1.20. BILL OF MATERIAL:-

The firm shall also have to furnish the bill of material used for Lightening Arresters.

8
Technical Spec. for 30 kV LA

Schedule-GTP

SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF30 kV METAL OXIDE

TYPE STATION CLASS SURGE ARRESTERS.

Sr. No. Particulars 30 kV LA

1 Name of manufacturer.
2 Type & designation
3 Applicable standard
4 (a) Rated voltage. (KV rms)
(b) [Link] operating voltage(MCOV) in KV(rms)
(c ) Current through arresters at MCOV in Amps.
(d) Reference voltage
(e ) Reference current
5 Nominal discharge current with 8/20 micro second
wave.(KA Peak)
6 High current impulse withstand level with 4/10 micro
second wave. (KA Peak)
7 (a) Long duration impulse current discharge class.
(b) Min. energy discharge capability.(KJ/KV)
8 [Link] voltage for discharge current of 8/20
micro
second wave.(KV Peak)
(a) 1500 Amps
(b) 5000 Amps
(c ) 10000 Amps
(d) 20000 Amps
9 [Link] surge protective level at 1000 Amps.
and 3000Amps. front time 30 micro second.
10 Temporary over voltage capacity (KV rms).
(a) 0.1 second.
(b) 0.2 second
(c ) 1.0 second
(d) 10 second
(e ) 100 second
11 Max.1 micro second discharge voltage at 10 KA.(KV
Peak)
12 Max. cantilever strength of thearrester (including wind
load).
13 Leakage current (mA)
14 (a) Whether pressure relief device fitted.
(b) Prospective symmetrical faultcurrent for which device
hasbeen tested.
15 (a) No. of units per phase ofarrester. (Nos.).
(b) Rating of non linear resisters in each unit (KV rms).
(c ) No. of non linear resistersper unit. (Nos.)
(d) Dimensions of non linearresistor disc.(Height
&diameter)
(e ) Whether arrester units are interchangeable.
16 Impulse withstand test voltage of arrester housing.(KV
Peak with 1.2/50 [Link].)
17 One minute power frequency(drywet) withstand
voltage of arrester housing.

9
Technical Spec. for 30 kV LA

Sr. No. Particulars 30 kV LA

18 (a) Total creepage distance of arrester housing.(mm)
I Whole arrester
II Individual section.
(b) Min protected creepage distance of arrester housing
(mm)
I Whole arrester
II Individual section.
19 (a) Weight of Las.(Kg.)
(b) Weight of insulating base (Kg)
(c ) Weight of surge counter withcurrent meter (Kg).
(d) Weight of complete LA including all fittings
&accessories etc.(Kg.)
20 Min. centre to centre recommended spacing between
arresters.(mm)
21 Min. clearance required from grounded equipments at
various heights of arrester unit.(mm)
22 (a) Dimension of complete unit from base to line terminal
excluding insulating base.
(b) Dimension of insulating base
23 Whether earthing arrangement provided for earthing
side of arrester. (Yes/No.)
24 (a) Mounting flange dimension details.
(b) Details of loading for design of supporing pedestal &
plinths:
I Vertical load.
II Horizontal load.
25 (a) Whether Earrhing connecting material included in the
scope of supply.(Yes/No)
(b) Material,weight and dimensional details of connecting
material
(c ) Whether arrester disconnector provided alongwith LAs.
26 (a) Whether arresters are suitablefor hot line washing ?
(b) If yes, how much is the gradingcurrent.
27 (a) Type & Designation of pressure relief device
(b) Min. prospective symmetrical fault currnet for which
device is suitable.

(Signature)
Name & Designation with seal
of Bidder.

10
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 33 kV CONTROL & RELAY PANELS

(Type- A1, B & B1)

1.00 SCOPE :
This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturer's works
before despatch, supply and delivery and commissioning of 33 kV Control & Relay panels
to be installed at various 220 kV & 132 kV sub stations covered under Rajasthan Rajya
Vidyut Prasaran Nigam Ltd. in Rajasthan.

2.00 STANDARDS :
The relays, Associated components & enclosures shall conform to the latest issues of
standards given as below or equivalent / relevant IEC or BSS, except to the extent
explicitly modified in the specification.

[Link]. Indian Standard No Title

1. IS: 3231 Protective Relays
2. IS: 8686 Static Protective Relays.
3. IS: 1248 General requirement of indicating and integrating
meters
4. IS: 8623 Specification for Low-voltage switchgear and
control gear assemblies
5. IS: 13947 Specification for Low-voltage switchgear and
control gear (covers degree of protection)
6. IS: 5 Colours for ready mix paints and enamels

3.00 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT:

3.01 DELETED

3.02 SYSTEM PARTICULARS :

3.02.01 A statement indicating line constants for transmission lines, proposed transformer
capacities and DC auxiliary voltages at various grid sub stations is placed at Annexure-I.

3.02.02 A statement showing CT ratio, their technical particulars and instrument range is
placed at Annexure-II.

3.02.03 Statement showing technical particulars of voltage transformers proposed to be

provided at various sub stations is placed at Annexure-III.

3.02.04 The system particulars of 33 kV SYSTEM is as under:

a) Normal Service Voltage : 33 kV

b) Maximum service Voltage : 36 kV
c) Rated Frequency : 50 Hz.

1
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

3.03 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENT :

3.03.01 This specification cover the design, manufacture, fabrication, shop testing, delivery
and commissioning of control and relay board duly mounted with protective relays,
metering equipments etc. required for the satisfactory operation of 132/33 kV transformer
incomer at various grid sub-station at RRVPNL, RAJASTHAN indicated in the specification
to the satisfaction of purchaser.

3.03.02 The intention of the specification is to provide protective relaying & metering
equipments control boards enumerated in the specification and to be complete in every
respect for the functions designated. It is required that the supplier, in accepting the contract,
agrees to furnish all apparatus, appliances and material whether specifically mentioned or
not but which may be found necessary to complete or test any of the herein specified
protective schemes in compliance with the requirements of the specification without any
extra charges.

3.03.03 Considerations may be given to alternatives which the supplier considers advisable
by reasons of his own manufacturing requirements and experience, provided descriptive
literature is submitted pointing out the recommended device or arrangement as equal to,
or superior to that required by the accompanying specification.

3.03.04 The 33 kV C & R panels required at various sub stations can be broadly classified
into following categories of panels.

S. PARTICULARS TYPE OF PANELS

NO.
1. 33 kV C & R Panel controlling one LV side of 132/33 TYPE A1 (Simplex)
kV transformer circuit breaker.
2. 33 kV C & R Panel controlling two 33 kV Feeder TYPE B (Simplex)
circuit Breaker
3. 33 kV C & R Panel controlling one 33 kV Feeder / Bus TYPE B1 (Simplex)
coupler circuit Breaker.

3.04 GENERAL RELAYING /INSTRUMENTS & METERS REQUIREMENTS :

3.04.01 a) The relay offered by the supplier shall comply with the requirements of latest
issue of IS: 3231 & IS: 8686 or relevant BSS/IEC wherever relevant IS is not
available and shall be suitable for operation in the climatic conditions specified
under clause 3.01 of Volume- II A of this specification. If complying with a
specification other then BSS/ISS/IEC then an English translation of the same shall
accompany the bid.
b) The bidder shall clearly indicate the specific model of quoted relays completely
meeting the requirement of specification. General indication such as series or
families, etc. of quoted relays shall not be acceptable.
c) DELETED
d) Binary Input & Binary Output contacts of every numerical relay shall be
configurable at site.
e) Every numerical relay should be accessible with remote PC or Laptop through
front interface. Firm shall provide communication cord having USB port (or USB

2
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

convertor) with each panel to make communication with relay and Laptop through
front interface and remote PC through Rear port.
f) For Time synchronisation firm shall provide one number BNC connector with
each panel.

3.04.02 Each electromechnical relay shall be provided with dust tight, removable covers
with glass/clear plastic windows. The relay shall be so arranged that on opening the case, it
shall be impossible for any dust which may have collected in or upon the case, to fall on the
relay mechanism. The operation of the relays shall be practically free from errors due to
normal variation in frequency and wave form and from ambient temperature effects between
(-) 5 deg. C to 50 deg.C.

3.04.03 Terminal blocks shall have bases and barriers moulded integrally with brass inserts
and shall be suitable for 660 volts service, individual studs with retainer type washer for
terminals shall be provided for each incoming and outgoing feeders. Terminal blocks for CT
& PT shall be disconnecting type.

3.04.04 Annunciation and alarm circuits shall be operated by contacts of Main relay or an
auxiliary tripping relay or by a separate relay added for that purpose. Auxiliary tripping
relays for all protections included in this specification shall be hand reset type except for the
transmission line protection, where specified to be of self resetting type, because of auto
reclosing of circuit breaker.

3.04.05
i) All the protection scheme and relays shall be provided with test blocks in panel and
test plug so designed that the protection schemes/relays may be tested in-Situ (i.e. without
removing the relay from panel). The protection schemes/relays should have provision of
testing either through test block or test plug easily access able by injecting the
voltage/current/frequency (as applicable) from external testing instruments /source without
first disconnecting / de-energising the electrical circuit protected by the schemes & relays.
Facilities for isolating the tripping circuit during such testing shall be also provided.

ii) DELETED

iii) DELETED

iv) All the protection schemes and main relays shall be supplied in cases flush mounted
on steel panels.

v) In case of directional relays, it should be possible to check the directional feature of

main & protective relays through a specified procedure with a provision to make the relay
non-directional.

3.04.06 In case of electromechanical relays contacts shall be silver surfaced, bound-free

and capable of repeated operation without deterioration.

3.04.07 The normal frequency will be 50 Hz. All the numerical relays (current operated)
should be suitable for both 1 A & 5 A CT secondary current with ICT.

3
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

3.04.08 GENERAL INSTRUMENTS/METERS REQUIREMENTS

[Link] AC static 0.2S class TOD type HT Trivector Meter as per the specification
requirement indicated in Volume-II F shall be mounted on front panel of each C&R panel.
The acceptable make of TOD meter is indicated at clause No. 3.12.3

[Link] The multifunction meter shall be of digital type of 0.5 class accuracy. The height
of figures for digital display shall be such that it is readable and legible. The size of meter
shall not be more than 144x144 mm.

3.05 INSPECTION AND TESTS:

The following tests shall be carried out on 25 % panel (Nearest higher whole number) for
established suppliers and 100 % for un-established suppliers at the manufacturer's works after
completely assembling the control and relay Boards, in the presence of an Engineer of the
purchaser if desired by the purchaser, and four copies of the test reports shall be supplied and
got approved from the purchaser before despatching the equipment.

i) One minute 2 kV insulation withstand test at 50 Hz on all equipments (May be except

electronics devices) on the panels and wiring.

ii) Insulation resistance of complete wiring, circuit by circuit with all equipments mounted
on the panels.

ii) Checking the operation & function of protection schemes, instruments and meters. The
display parameters of the relays and meters shall also be checked.

iv) Checking of colour scheme used in wiring as per following requirement :

No. Wiring for Colour

a) AC three phase circuits
No.1 phase Red
No.2 phase Yellow
No.3 phase Blue
b) Neutral Black
c) Connections to earth Green
d) DC circuits Grey
v) Checking of same ferrules at both ends of wires.
vi) Routine tests in accordance with relevant IS or other international standards shall be
carried out on all the instruments, relays and other devices and/or manufacturer's routine
test reports shall be enclosed with inspection report.
vii) Checking of all wires connected on T.B. as per approved drawing and Final drawing
which shall be submitted prior to inspection offer letter.

3.06 DELETED

3.07 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :

Guaranteed technical and other particulars in prescribed format shall be furnished. Particulars
of guarantee shall be clearly marked. The word "As per spec. & as per catalogue" will not be
indicated in GTP.

4
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

Guaranteed Technical particulars shall be furnished in prescribed format alongwith the

requisite drawings / documents for approval

3.08 DRAWINGS :
3.08.1 In addition to any other drawings which the bidder may like to enclose, to explain the
merits of his proposal, the following drawings shall be enclosed with the bid in single copy:
i) Principal dimensional details of each control and relay panel.
ii) Front, Internal and rear views with all relays, instruments/ meters and devices positions
marked.
iii) Foundation details.
iv) Elementary diagrams of all metering, Protection, annunciation and other circuits.
v) Feeder protection scheme.

3.08.2 All drawings shall be in English language and dimensions in Metric System. Further
the following drawings in triplicate of respective panels alongwith schematic drawings
indicating internal electrical circuit/ contacts of protection schemes/ relays shall be furnished
by Successful Bidders after receipt of NOA. The drawings for all type of ordered panels
shall be furnished in single lot & not in piecemeal Drawing should be of Standard size
of 24" x 12" or 12" x 8.5" or A4 and have blank space of size 3" x 1.5" on lower right hand
side to have a stamp of approval.
1) Principal dimensional details of each C&R panel.
2) Front, Internal & rear views and foundation plan .
3) General arrangement of C & R panel with instruments, relays & devices positions
marked.
4) Equipment legend details of control panels.
5) General arrangement of relay panel with instruments, relays & devices positions marked.
6) Equipment legend details of relay panels.
7) SHEMATIC DRAWINGS
i) Single line diagram / Key diagram / Line diagram
ii) A.C. supply Distribution circuit
iii) D.C. Supply Distribution circuit: DC circuit for annunciation shall be separate and
independent from the DC supply used for other functions and terminals shall be
marked as J21 & J22.
iv) VT Circuit
v) CT circuit
vi) Master trip relay circuit: Trip Coil-1 and Trip Coil-2 of CB shall operate from
Master Trip relay. Additionally, both trip coils of CB shall also be operated from
O/C & E/F relay.
vii) Circuit breaker Control circuit-closing coil
viii) Circuit breaker Control circuit-TRIP COIL-1
ix) Circuit breaker Control circuit-TRIP COIL-2
x) Annunciation Scheme alongwith wiring of monitoring of DC supply of
annunciation and failure of AC supply as per clause 7.12.6(a) & (b).
xi) Annunciation windows inscription details alongwith details of trip and non trip
alarms.
xii) Indication circuit for Circuit Breaker:
a) Semaphore indication for Circuit Breaker.
b) Lamp indication for Circuit Breaker.
xiii) Internal position of contacts of CB control switch.
xiv) DELETED

5
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

xv) The T.B. Schedule drawing sheet.

xvi) Rear view of all relays with indicating wiring with ferules and sheet No. on each
terminal of relay. Alternatively, these may be given in tabular form.
xvii) The device schedule drawing sheet. Alternatively, these may be given in tabular
form.
xviii) The wire routing schedule drawing sheet. The drawing shall be in tabular form
indicating the sequence in which any wire will be connected to various devices.

3.08.3 Apart from above drawings the supplier shall include other drawings that he considers
necessary.

3.08.4 The purchaser reserves the right to issue standard drawings according to which the
panels shall be fabricated / manufactured / wired.

3.08.5 The bidder shall be responsible for any discrepancies / errors or omissions in the
drawings and other particulars approved by the purchaser or not.

3.08.6 Two sets of approved drawings after making corrections shall be supplied alongwith
each panel to the consignee for field officer's. Apart from this, copy of approved drawings in
soft copy shall also be furnished to consignee and purchaser.

3.08.07 Some of the wiring is standardized for Tripping / Closing of the Circuit Breaker, CT
and PT connections, Supervision Relay and CB status etc. on one separate TB. Bidder should
adhere to the standardized wiring as per Annexure- D.

3.09 ILLUSTRATED AND PRINTED LITERATURE ALONGWITH BID:

In the event of an order, 2(Two) sets of complete technical literature,
commissioning/operating/ maintenance instructional manual of aforesaid items shall be
supplied alongwith each panel to the consignees. Apart from this, manuals/literatures in soft
copy shall also be furnished to consignee and purchaser.

3.10 CO-ORDINATION :

The control and relay board shall be suitably fabricated to match and arranged to form one
continuous board with the existing panels at various sub-stations wherever mentioned.

3.11 DELETED

3.12 Acceptable Make and Model of Relays (only for performance purpose):
3.12.1 a) The following makes & models of numerical relays are only acceptable for
main over current & earth fault protection :-
FOR 33 KV C&R PANEL
MAKE MODEL
ABB REF 615
GET&D MICOM P141, P14N, P14D
SEL SEL 751A
SIEMENS 7SJ62, 7SJ80, 7SR1102, 7SR10
ER ARGUS-1
AVANA NPA422

6
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

STELMEC SLR 140C

SCHNEIDER MICOM P141, MICOM P122, MICOMP127

Subject to confirmation that the relay supplied shall be suitable for both 1A & 5A.

b) For auxiliary and other, except main protection, relays in case make of relays are other
than following then type test report of such relays shall also be furnished.
i) GE T&D / Schneider
ii) ABB
iii) Easun Reyrolle
iii) JVS
iv) AVANA

In case make of auxiliary and other, except main protection, relays are other than the
approved then the bidder shall furnish the following valid and authenticated Type test
certificate from Govt. approved / NABL accredited laboratory / ILAC i.e. International
Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (in case of foreign laboratory) as per latest edition
of IS-3231 or IEC of quoted relays or on model having additional features in same series.
Such type test certificate should not be older than 7 years as on the date of technical bid
opening. For this purpose date of conducting type test will be considered.
(i) Insulation test.
(ii) High frequency disturbance test (not applicable for electromechanical relays).
(iii) Electrical fast transient test (not applicable for electromechanical relays ).
(iv) Relay characteristics, performance, accuracy test.
a) and operating time.
(v) Test for thermal requirement.
(vi) Test for mechanical requirement.
(vii) Test for rated burden
(viii) Contact performance test.

c) In case of 33 kV C&R panels, which is simplex type the bidder shall have to furnish
test report for degree of protection on enclosure as IP31 in accordance with IS-13947 (Pt-I)
from NABL accredited laboratory / ILAC i.e. International Laboratory Accreditation
Cooperation (in case of foreign laboratory) on C&R panel of any size. In case of relay
manufacturer, type test report furnished in the name of panel fabricator shall also be
acceptable provided firm confirms to supply panels of same fabricator.

3.12.2 All the HT TVMs integrating instruments, Control switches, selector switches,
indicating lamps, Semaphore indicators, Annunciation scheme, Bell, Hooter etc. shall be
of "ISI MARK" for which bidders shall furnish attested Photostat copies of ISI certificate
for the respective make offered along with bid. Alternatively bidder shall furnish original /
attested Photostat copies of the latest type test report of aforesaid items along with bid. The
type test certificate / report should not be older than 7 years.

7
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

3.12.3 The following make of bought out items are acceptable to RRVPNL for the purpose of
functionalities.

S. No. Name of item Make

1 Digital multifunction meter SATEC(PM130EH-PLUS) / SECURE(ELITE445/
ELITE500) / RISHAB (RISH PQM & RISH
MASTER 3440) / AE(AE9000) /ACCORD(MFM-
02) /HPL(EBRIT) / POWERTRAC(PGMFR3)
2 Control Switch for Circuit ALSTOM (AREVA) / SWITRON / KAYCEE /
Breaker / Trip Transfer ABB / RECOM / EASUN REYROLLE /
HEMAADRI
3 Semaphore Indicator ALSTOM (AREVA) / DAV / DEEPL / ER
4 Indicating Lamp (LED ALSTOM (AREVA) / TEKNIC / VAISHNO /
Type) DAV / DEEPL / VENSON / L&T / SIEMENS /
JVS / SECO / CRAFTECH
5 Annunciator MINILEC / YASHMUN / INSTALRAM /
PROTON / JVS / PRADEEP / ALAN / EXPO
FYN / ACCORD / SECO / QCEPT
6 Push Button TEKNIC / VAISHNO / ESSEN / L&T / SIEMENS
/ ALSTOM (AREVA)
7 A.C. Hooter / Bell TARGET / INDUSTRIAL HOOTER /ALAN /
JVS/ PROTON / ACCORD / SECO / CRAFTECH
8 D.C. Hooter / Bell TARGET / INDUSTRIAL HOOTER / ALAN /
JVS/ PROTON / ACCORD / SECO / CRAFTECH
9 Heater SOFIA / ELTER / AIREX / KAYCEE /
PRAVEEN
10 Link type test terminal block IMP / CAPITAL / DAV / DEEPL / AVANA
for testing of TVM
11 2 FEET TUBE LIGHT PHILIPS / CROMPTON / BAJAJ
12 2 Pin/3 Pin socket with ISI MARK
switch (5A/15A)
13 0.2S Class AC Static HT- L&T (ER300P)/SECURE (Premier300/
TVM TOD type Energy Premier500) /GENUS (03D/HC (for 1A) / 03C (for
Meter 5A) / WALLBY (Now EDMI) / HPL (CTPT 1.24/
CTPT5.24)

NOTE:
In case the successful bidders establish to the Satisfaction of purchaser that specified makes
of particular item (except digital multifunctional meter) are not available then other make
shall also be acceptable if it is of valid "ISI MARK" or type tested for which bidders shall
furnish attested Photostat copies of ISI certificate / type test report. The type test report
should not older than 7 years as on date of bid opening. As regard digital multifunction
meter the other make is also acceptable provided it meets the requirement of specification
(clause No. 6.02).

3.13 MAKE AND TYPE OF BOUGHT OUT ITEMS:

Make / type of each relay, integrating instruments, Control switches, selector switches,
indicating lamps, Semaphore indicators, Annunciator scheme, Bell, Hooter etc. shall be
clearly and invariably indicated in the GTP (Guaranteed Technical Particulars), Bill of

8
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

material and unit price list. Only specific make accessories shall be indicated. The Word
"EQUIVALENT / REPUTED MAKE" will not be given for consideration.

3.14 DELETED

3.15 DOCUMENTATIONS:

Two sets of following documents shall be supplied to the consignee for field officer
alongwith each panel.
i) Approved drawings after making corrections as advised at the time of approval of
drawing.
ii) The complete technical literature, commissioning / operating / maintenance instruction
manualsof relays/ integrating instruments/etc.

3.16 DEPARTURE FROM SPECIFICATION:

If the bidder wishes to depart from the specification in any respect, he should draw
attention to such departures stating the reasons thereof under SCHEDULE- DEV A and
SCHEDULE- DEV B. Unless this is done the departmental specification will hold good.
Mentioning of deviations in the form of clarifications/academic knowledge etc. elsewhere in
the offer will not be considered. In the event of contractor's drawings, table etc. being found
to disagree during the execution of the contract the requirement of the this specification
shall be held as binding.

053.17 PACKING OF C&R PANELS:

Packing shall be governed by Cl.1.30 of GCC. Each panels shall be first packed inside
water proof polythene cover of minimum 0.1 mm thickness and then appropriately
wooden casing shall be provided to hold the panel securely suitable for transportation/
handling.
The supplier shall be required to make separate packages for each consignee. Each package
will be marked on three sides with proper point/ indelible ink with the following.
i) Name of consignee.
ii) Destination.
iii) [Link]. RRVPNL/SE(Proc-II)/XEN-IV/A-3/BN-9016002220/D. Dt.
iv) Particulars of C&R Panel.
a) Description of control/relay panel.
b) CT Secondary.
c) DC Aux. voltage.
d) [Link]. of control/Relay panel.
v) Manufacturer's Name.

3.18 DEMONSTRATIONANDTESTING OF OFFERED RELAYS / INSTRUMENTS

/ACCESSORIES:
Purchaser reserves the right to get demonstration and sample testing of offered relays /
instruments /accessories to ascertain their technical suitability, in the office of SE
(Protection), RRVPNL, HawaSarak, Chambal Power House, Jaipur or at other place of
RRVPNL at the risk & Cost of supplier.

3.19 DELETED.

9
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

3.20 AUXILIARY RELAY

The auxiliary relay should have relay connecting fingers / strips and Pins / plug capable of
carrying 30A for 3 sec. & 5A continuously at 660 V.

4.00 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR 33 KV SYSTEMS

4.01 The protection provided on 33 kV system shall be inverse NON DIRECTIONAL

IDMT relays for over current & earth fault. Inverse characteristic 3 sec. at 10 times at rated
current. These relay shall be numerical type with instantaneous feature.

4.02 A set of two relays shall be provided for phase protection and one relay for earth fault
protection. The phase protection and earth fault relays shall be provided with range for
current setting from 50% to 200% and from 10% to 40% respectively. Each relay shall be
provided with adjustable time setting so that the operating time can be adjusted.

4.03 The earth fault relay for 33 kV C&R Panel (Type- A1), (Type- B) & (Type- B1) will
be IDMT Non directional with instantaneous element having range of 2.5 to 8 times of
rated current with provision to block the instantaneous element at site. These relay shall be
numerical type.

4.04 Each relay other than numerical / static shall be provided with an operation indicator
preferably of the mechanically operated type and secured against unwarranted operation by
vibration. All indicators and hand resetting relays shall be capable of being reset without
opening the relay case.

4.05 DELETED.

4.06 Both combined (having separate tripping contacts for over current & Earth fault) and
separate over current & Earth fault relays are acceptable.

4.7 (a) The numerical over current & earth fault relay should be accessible with Laptop
through front interface. It should have facility for inter bus communication and remote
communication.
(b) The numerical over current & earth fault relay should have open protocol for
communication such as IEC-60870-5-103 / IEC 61850. The protocol mapping alongwith
associated software should be made available to the purchaser alongwith required
attachments.
(c) The bidder shall supply one set of licensed copy of application software for numerical
relays with each C&R Panel free of cost. The application software shall consist of relay
setting software and relay during analysis software.

(d) Time synchronisation: The relay shall have facility to synchronising its time clock from
time synchronisation equipment and having port IRIG B/ RS232/ Potential free contacts
(PPM)

5.00 PANEL NAMENCLATURE:

5.01 The 33 kV C & R panel; TYPE- A1 should be suitable for controlling Circuit Breaker
of 33 kV Transformer I/C (LV side of 132/33 kV Transformer).

10
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

5.02 The 33 kV C & R panel; TYPE- B should be suitable for controlling two 33 kV Feeder
Circuit Breakers.

5.03 The 33 kV C & R panel; TYPE- B1 should be suitable for controlling one 33 kV
Feeder/ Bus-coupler Circuit Breaker.

6.00 SPECIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTS / METERS:

6.01 INTEGRATING INSTRUMENTS AND METERS:

All instruments shall be of switch board type back connected suitable for flush mounting and
provided with dust and vermin proof case for tropical use and finished in black colour. All
fixing screws, nuts and threaded parts shall be designed according to relevant Indian
Standards. Digital Multifunctional meters shall be digital type as per clause [Link] and
shall conform to the provisions of the latest edition of relevant IS / IEC. Energy meters shall
conform to the provisions of relevant IS amended upto date and RVPN technical
specification. The specification of AC static 0.2S class TOD type HT TVM is enclosed with
this specification.

The Digital multifunctional meters shall be of class 0.5 accuracy. The energy meters shall
also conform to class.0.2S accuracy. The calibration of the instruments shall function
satisfactorily when mounted on steel panels or alternatively magnetically shielded
instruments shall be used.

6.02 DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTION METER:

i) The Digital multifunction meter shall be of programmable type of 0.5 class accuracy
ii) It shall be suitable for measurement by 3 Phase 4 wire unbalance load
iii) It shall be able to indicate following parameters:-
Phase & line voltage, Three phase currents & voltages, Frequency, Power Factor,
Reactive & Active Power, Apparent Power, Maximum demand, Per phase KW,
KVAR, KVA and PF and TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION (Current & Voltage
both), Active Energy, Reactive energy and Apparent energy

The other specification shall be:

a) Current: Range 1A or 5A ,Continuous 1A, 5A (as per IS: 1248)
b) Surge withstand 1A CT) (As per IS: 1248)
5A CT)
c) The digital multifunction meter shall be able to accommodate ratios of installed
CT/PT and have adequate rating range.
d) The meter shall have the communication port RS-232 / RS-485 having modbus
protocol / ASCII / DNP 3.0 protocol / any other open protocol.
e) EMI / EMC complaint as per requirement IS/IEC
f) MFM shall operate on auxiliary supply either 110V or 220V DC as per panel rating
and have non volatile memory to store energy data and setting data.

11
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

6.03 ENERGY METERS :

The specification of AC static 0.2S clause ToD type HT TVM is enclosed as"TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATION FOR 3-PHASE, 4-WIRE, 0.2S CLASS, AC STATIC TOD TARIFF
TRIVECTOR METER FOR EHV/HV SYSTEM OF RVPN".
6.04 TESTING TERMINAL BLOCK (TTB) FOR TESTING OF TRIVECTOR
METER:
Link type testing terminal block suitable for three phase 4 wire system shall be provided for
carrying out calibration tests on Energy meters, without disconnecting the connecting leads or
removing the meters. The wiring of TTB shall be so arranged that when the testing receptacle
are fitted, the current and voltage are automatically disconnected from the source and
injection from the separate source is possible. In case of drawout type meters the provisions
shall be made to automatically short circuit the secondary of CTs when the meter is taken out
of circuit for testing.

7.00 GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS:

7.01 STANDARDS:

7.01.1 The equipment offered should conform to relevant Indian Standards or equivalent
IEC standards. The references of the relevant standard specifications wherever mentioned in
the text of this specification have been given accordingly. Other authoritative standards
which ensure an equal or better quality than the standards specified will also be accepted.

7.02 GENERAL:
7.02.1 The 33 kV C& R panel shall be simplex type suitable for placement side by side with
other C & R panels to form continuous boards, lockable access doors with concealed hinges
shall be fitted on the back and interior shall be automatically lit by the opening of these
doors. The control boards for the same line voltages at each substation shall be placed side
by side.

7.02.2For new sub stations, access doors with concealed hinges having a swing of not less
than 1050 mm on full opening of their position shall be provided at suitable locations. The
equipment specified shall be manufactured in the manner set out and where not set out, to the
reasonable satisfaction of the purchaser.

7.02.3The control and relay cubicles shall be of folded type construction. The front panels,
base frame and door frame shall be manufactured from CRCA sheet steel 10 SWG(3mm)
thick, while the side panels, roof and doors shall be manufactured out of 14 SWG(2mm)
thick CRCA sheet steel. For 33 kV C&R panel the bottom of the cubicle frame shall be
suitable for erection on flush concrete floor. Evenly spaced ground bolts projecting through
the base channels forming members of the frame shall be used for securing cubicles to
the floor.

The dimensions of control and relay panels where no specific matching is required shall be as
follows:
Height : 2312 mm (inclusive of base channel height of 102 mm).
Width : 610 mm or suitable to accommodate equipments.
Depth : Simplex Panel: 610 mm

12
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

7.02.4 The complete switch board shall be dust and vermin proof and shall be suitable for
tropical use. All holes and extension windows in the panels shall be blanked and accessdoors
shall be lined with compressible line at the edges. The complete boards shall incorporate all
necessary meters, instruments, relays control switches, indicating lamps, mimic buses,
audible and visual alarms, horizontal and vertical wiring supports, earth bars, interior
lighting system, terminal blocks, cable glands, fuses, labels, cleats, ferrules, space heaters,
automatic semaphore indicators and other necessary equipment. The supplier shall make
provisions for the leads to be connected to the annunciator scheme for different trip and
non trip alarms. The enclosure shall provide a minimum degree of protection equivalent to
IP31 in accordance to IS 13947(Pt.1) for this purpose manufacturer will furnish undertaking.

7.02.5 All power and control cables will be conducted in separate distributing trenches
running immediately, underneath the control & relay panels. The cables will branch off into
each cubicle through entry holes in the concrete floor opening in the bottoms of the cubicles.
The bidder shall mark the details of the cable entry holes, glands and position of
grouting bolts to enable the purchaser to prepare foundations with pockets for grouting
bolts while casting floor.

7.03 PAINTING :
All unfinished surfaces of steel panels and frame work shall be sand blasted to remove
rust, scale, foreign adhering matter and grease, a suitable rust resisting primer shall be
applied on the interior and exterior surface of steel, which shall be followed by application
of an under coat suitable to serve as base and binder for the finishing coat.

i) All sheet steel work shall be phosphated in accordance with IS:6005 code of practice for
phosphating iron and steel.

ii) Oil, grease, dirt and swarf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning.

iii) Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by washing
with running water rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and drying.

iv) After phosphating thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water followed by
final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying.

v) The phosphate coating shall be sealed with application of two coats of ready mixed,
stoved type zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be "flash dried" while second coat
shall be stoved.

vi) After application of primer two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be
applied, each coat shall be applied followed by stoving the second coat shall be applied
after inspection of first coat of painting. Generally the exterior colour of paint shall be as
per shade 631 of IS 5. except where specific matching is required.

vii) Each of coat of primer and finished paint shall be of slightly different shade to enable
inspection of painting.

viii) Powder coating method of painting is also acceptable

13
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

ix) In case the bidder proposed to follow any other established painting procedure like
electrostatic painting, the procedure shall be submitted alongwith the bid for purchaser's
review and approval.

7.04 PANEL WIRING :

7.04.1 All wiring other than annunciation circuits, alarmed and Control circuit shall be of
switch board type 2.5 [Link] PVC insulated copper conductor suitable for 660V service
and in accordance with relevant Indian Standards, for annunciation, control circuit and
alarm, the wiring will be done with 1.5 [Link] PVC insulated copper conductor.
Polyvinyl chloride used shall have excellent resistance against burning, moisture, oil and
vermin and shall be furnished with clear colour. Rubber insulated wiring shall not be
acceptable.

7.04.2 The wiring shall be supported by plastic cleats/PVC channels, Wires shall be
terminated on to the terminal blocks with annealed and tinned (not soldered) crimp tag
termination, separate termination being used for each wire, and the size of termination suited
to the size of wire terminated. Wiring shall in general be accommodated on the sides of the
cubicles and the wires for each circuit shall be separately grouped.

7.04.3 Wires shall not be jointed or tied between terminated points. At the terminal
connections, washers shall be interposed between terminals and holding nuts. All holding
nuts shall be secured by locking nuts. The connecting studs shall be secured by locking nuts.
The connecting studs shall be project at least 6 mm from the lock nuts surface.

7.04.4"Bus wiring terminal blocks shall be provided in the control panel and the relaypanel
along with wiring of common circuits and common AC/DC /PT supplies, etc for inter
connection with adjacent control and relay panels.” Bus wires shall be fully insulated and
run separately. Fuses and links shall be provided to enable all circuits in a panel except
lighting circuit to be isolated from the bus wire. Whenever practicable all circuits in which
the voltage exceeds 125 volts shall be kept physically separated from the remaining wiring.
The function of each circuit shall be marked on the associated terminal boards. All spare
terminals of relays shall be wired upto terminal block.

7.04.5 All wiring diagrams for the control and relay Boards shall be drawn as viewed from
the back of the cubicles and shall be in accordance with the relevant I.S.

7.04.6 Wiring connected to the space heaters in the cubicle shall have porcelain beaded
insulation over a safe length from the heater terminals.

7.04.7 All wiring inter connecting the front panels with the rear panels of the switch
boards over the access shall be wired in gutters held against the ceiling of corridors by means
of screws. As the front and the back panels will be detachable, the interconnection shall be
made through suitable terminal connectors securely fixed on the panel.

7.04.8 All potential bus wiring ,audible and non audible alarm bus wiring , A C & D C
control supply , bus wiring for panel lighting and such other wiring which runs from panel
to panel within the switch board shall be laid out in gutters and shall be suitably screened.

14
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

7.04.9 All wire shall be suitable for bending to meet the terminal studs at right angle with
the studs and they shall not be skewed. Metal cases of all apparatus mounted on panels shall
be separately earthed by means of flexible copper wire or strip.

7.04.10 The following colour scheme of the wiring shall be used:

No. Wiring for Colour

a) AC three phase circuits
No.1 phase Red
No.2 phase Yellow
No.3 phase Blue
b) Neutral Black
c) Connections to earth Green
d) DC circuits Grey

Use ofcoloured sleeves at both end of the wire shall not be acceptable.
7.04.11All wire termination shall be made with insulated sleeve crimping type lugs. "Only
eye/ ring type or flat/ round pin type lugs, as appropriate for the terminals/terminal boards,
shall be used. Fork type or open - ended type of lugs shall not beused. Only one wire shall
be crimped in one lug". Wire shall not be tapped or spliced between terminals. The insulated
sleeve shall be integral part of the lug and shall not be used for colour coding.

7.04.12 The earthing of the equipment mounted in the panels shall be done by starting the
earthing conductor from the earthing strip of all the equipment in series and then terminating
the earthing conductor at the earthing strip so that one end of any equipment remains
connected to earth even if the wire is opened at any point.

7.05 FERRULES:

7.05.1 Sameferrules should be provided at both ends of wires. Ferrules with the same
numbers, letters and symbols as indicated in the connection and wiring diagrams shall be
provided on the terminal ends of all wires for easy identification of circuits for inspection
and maintenance.

7.05.2 Ferrulesshall be strong and flexible insulating material with glossy finish to present
adhesion. They shall be engraved and clearly and durably marked and shall not beaffected
by dampness.

7.5.3 Ferrules numbering shall be in accordance with IS:375/1963. The same ferrule number
shall not be used on wires in different circuits on a panel.

7.05.4 All points of interconnection between the wiring carried out for equipments for
different suppliers, where a change of number cannot be avoided, double ferrules shall be
provided on each wire with appropriate numbers on the changing end. The change of
numbering shall be shown on the appropriate connection wiring diagram of the equipment.

7.06 TERMINAL BOARDS :

7.06.1 Terminal block connectors built from cells of moulded dielectric and brass stud
inserts shall be provided for terminating the outgoing ends of the panel wiring and the

15
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

corresponding incoming tail ends of control cables The terminals for C.T & PT wiring shall
be sliding link type. Insulating barrier shall be provided between adjacent connections. The
height of the barriers and the spacing between terminals shall be such as to give adequate
protection while allowing easy access to terminals. Provision shall be made on each pillar for
holding 10% extra connections. All blocks shall be shrouded by easily removable shrouds of
non inflammablemoulded and transparent dielectric materials.

7.06.2The terminal blocks shall be suitable for 660 volts service and for connection with
copper wires.

7.06.3 Terminal boards shall be mounted in such a manner as to afford easy access to
terminations and to enable ferrule number to be read without difficulty. Wire ends shall be
so connected to the terminals that no wire terminal number gets marked due to succeeding
connections. In other words ferrule numbering at the terminals should be unambiguous
and fool proof. Terminal board rows shall be adequately spaced and shall not be less than
100 mm apart so as to permit convenient access to wires and terminals. Labels in the form of
engraved plastic plates shall be provided on the fixed portion of terminal boards.
7.06.4 No live metal parts shall be exposed at the back of the terminal boards.

7.06.5 All studs, nuts, bolts screws etc. shall be threaded according to the latest relevant
Indian or equivalent International Standards.

7.06.6 The terminal blocks shall be STUD TYPE only. The connecting studs shall be locked
by locking nuts or by use of spring washer. The connecting studs shall project at least 2
threads from the lock nuts surface. Terminal blocks for CT & PT shall be Disconnecting type.

7.07 SPACE HEATERS :

Tubular space heaters suitable for connection to the single phase 230 volts A.C. supply
complete with switches located at convenient positions shall be provided at the bottom of
each cubicle to prevent condensation of moisture .The Watt loss per unit surface of heater
shall be low enough to keep surface temperature well below visible heat. Each cubicle shall
also be provided with a switch of appropriate rating for control for space heater.

7.08 MIMIC DIAGRAM :

Painted colour bands or painted dove tailed aluminium strips shall be used for the mimic bus.
The Width of mimic diagram and its colour shall be matched with the others panel. The
mimic shall represent a single line arrangement of the station switch Yard equipment. The
following colours for showing the various voltages on the mimic shall be used :

33 KV - Brilliant green (shed No. 221 of IS: 5)

The mimic diagram shall be of the eye level type Automatic, rotating disc type semaphore
indicators for indication of `Close' and `Open' position of circuit breakers shall be
incorporated in the mimic diagram. Other equipments such as transformers, voltage
Transformers etc. shall be represented by suitable symbols.

7.09 SEMAPHORE INDICATORS :

The operating coils of the semaphore indicators shall be continuously rated and shall be
operated from 220/110 volts D.C. The units will operate satisfactorily between the limits of

16
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

80 to 120 percent of rated D.C. voltage. The Semaphore disc shall have a 90 degree angular
movement clock wise/counter clock wise to show on/off position of the equipment.

7.10 INDICATING LAMPS :

7.10.01 Indicating lamps shall be provided on the control Board to indicate the following:
i) Visual indication of `on' and `off' position of each circuit breaker.
ii) Auto trip indication for each circuit breaker.
iii) Spring charged indication for circuit breaker.

7.10.02 Each lamp body shall be of moulded insulation and shall be able to withstand a
high voltage of appropriate value. shall be suitable for 220/110 volts D.C. supply and single
phase AC supply and shall have low wattage of consumption and shall provide a wide
angle of illumination of sufficient intensity for comfortable viewing.

7.10.03 A glass of appropriate colour shall be screwed into the front of the lamps body. The
design of the indication lamps shall be such as to facilitate replacement of burnt lamps. An
engraved label indicating the purpose of the lamp shall be provided with each lamp. The
bidder shall quote unit prices for lamps and lenses to enable the purchaser to order certain
spare quantity alongwith the main panels.

7.10.4 The circuit breaker position indication lamps shall be LED type and shall operate on
D.C. supply.

7.11 SWITCH BOARD LIGHTING :

7.11.01 The switch Board interiors shall be illuminated by 2 feet tube light. The illumination
of interior shall be free from hand shadows and shall be planned to avoid any strain or fatigue
to the wireman who may be called upon to do work.

7.11.02A door operated button switch shall be provided for control of lighting on entrance of
C&R panels.

7.12 ANNUNCIATION:

7.12.1 Each C&R panel shall be equipped with Annunciation scheme for indicating all the
annunciations required for the trip and non-trip alarms as per details given hereunder. Each
annunciation shall be clearly labelled to indicate the nature of particular annunciation.

7.12.2 The following switches shall be provided with the annunciator :

i) A common push button switch near the annunciator unit which when pressed shall
cancel the audible alarm by means of the alarm cancellation relay. The indication lamps
incorporated in the control switch shall remain illuminated, but shall change from flashing
to steady glow.

ii) A common reset push button shall be provided. By pushing this button, annunciation
shall be restored to the normal condition. The lamp incorporated in the control switch
should not glow after resetting all the protection devices.

17
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

iii) A test push button switch shall be provided to activate all the alarm/ lamps of the
associated group when the test switch is pressed.

iv) All above push buttons are to be provided at height convenient for their operation.
The push buttons built-in on annunciator unit itself are not acceptable.

7.12.3 Necessary auxiliary relays shall be provided in the annunciator scheme to indicate
each alarm individually .Each alarm whether trip or non-trip shall have visual as well as
audible annunciation.

7.12.4 The visual annunciator alarm shall be in the form of flashing display type glow
pattern. The illuminated facias with inscription on the glass / translucent plastic to indicate
the operation of particular protection device shall be provided. The window shall remain
illuminated till the particular initiating contact is reset and the common reset push button is
pressed.

7.12.5 As regards the audible indication, the automatic trip of the circuit breaker due to the
operation of protection relays shall be indicated by sounding of a hooter. All non trip alarms
shall be indicated by an alarm bell. Hooter and bell shall be provided on each panel.

7.12.6 (a) The D.C. supply used for annunciation shall be separate and independent from
the DC supply used for other functions suitable scheme using AC supply (230V) shall be
provided for monitoring the DC supply used for the annunciation scheme. Annunciation
scheme which have inbuilt DC supervision facility operating totally on A.C. supply can
also be accepted in place of separate scheme for monitoring the DC supply used for the
annunciation scheme. This scheme shall have accept& test push buttons and DC bell
alongwith lamp indication of DC supply failure.

(b) The AC supply used for monitoring the annunciation DC supply failure shall also be
provided with audio visual alarm against failure of this AC supply

7.13 DETAILS OF TRIP AND NON TRIP ALARMS :

7.13.1 TYPE- A1: In the 33 kV Control and Relay panels for 132/33 kV Transformer
I/C, the following trip / non trip alarms shall be provided:

[Link] TRIP ALARMS FACIA INDICATION (33 kV I/C)

132/33 kV Transformer I/C

I/C Over Current & Earth fault trip
Trip Relay (86) operated

[Link] NON TRIP ALARMS FACIA INDICATION (33 KV I/C)

132/33 kV Transformer I/C

I/C Trip Circuit- 1 & 2 faulty
I/C Protection Unhealthy
Circuit Breaker OFF

18
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

7.13.2 TYPE- B: In the 33 kV Control and Relay panels for Controlling Two 33 kV Feeders,
the following trip / non trip alarms shall be provided

[Link] TRIP ALARMS FACIA INDICATION (2 x 33 kV FEEDER)

33 kV Feeder - 1 33 kV Feeder - 2
FEEDER -1 Over Current & Earth fault FEEDER-2 Over Current & Earth fault trip
trip
Trip relay (86) operated Trip relay (86) operated

[Link] NON TRIP ALARMS FACIA INDICATION (2 x 33 kV FEEDER)

33 kV Feeder - 1 33 kV Feeder - 2
FEEDER-1 Trip Circuit-1 & 2 faulty FEEDER-2 Trip Circuit-1 & 2 faulty.
Feeder-1 Protection Unhealthy FEEDER-2 Protection Unhealthy
Circuit Breaker OFF Circuit Breaker Off

7.13.3 TYPE- B1: In the 33 kV Control and Relay panels for Controlling one 33 kV
Feeder/Bus Coupler, the following trip / non trip alarms shall be provided:

[Link] TRIP ALARMS FACIA INDICATION (1 x 33 KV FEEDER/ BUS COUPLER)

FEEDER/BUS COUPLER Over Current & Earth

fault trip
Trip relay (86) operated

[Link] NON TRIP ALARMS FACIA INDICATION (1 x 33 KV FEEDER/ BUS

COUPLER)

FEEDER/BUS COUPLER Trip circuit-1 & 2 faulty

Feeder/Bus coupler Protection Unhealthy
Circuit Breaker OFF

7.13.4 It will be responsibility of the supplier to provide all the alarms and annunciation
equipments required for the safe and efficient operation of the sub stations. General
description of the alarms required are given but the supplier shall include other alarms that he
considers necessary.

7.14 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION :

Trip Circuit Supervision shall be done by numerical O/C & E/F relays.

7.15 DC SUPERVISION:

Supervision for DC supply shall be done by numerical O/C & E/F relays..

7.16 TITLE PLATES AND NAME PLATE:

19
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

7.16.1 A title plate bearing the name and purpose of each panel shall be fixed on the top of
each control as well as relay panel.

7.16.2 Control and relay panels shall be provided with a name plate. The name plate shall be
weather and corrosion proof. It shall be mounted back side of the panels. It shall carry the
information duly engraved / punched as detailed hereunder.

(i) Manufacturer's name.

(ii) P.O. No. RRVPNL/SE( )/XEN- /A-/BN-/D. dt.
(iii)S. No. of panel
(iv) Month of despatch.
(v) Particulars of panel.
(a) Description of panel
(b) CT secondary
(c) DC auxiliary voltage.
(vi) Guarantee period:

7.17 TEST BLOCKS FOR TESTING OF PROTECTION SCHEME/RELAYS:

Switch board type back connected test blocks alongwith Test plug 10 nos. of upper and
10 nos. lower terminals(Similar to universal type AREVA make MPG test block and MPB
test plug)shall be provided for shorting terminals of CT loads and isolating the tripping
circuit before interrupting the normal circuit for injection from an external source or for
inserting testing instruments in the circuit without causing open circuit of the CT. The
potential testing studs shall preferably be housed in the narrow recesses of the block
moulding insulation to prevent accidental short circuit across the studs. All test blocks for
the relays etc. Whenever required, shall properly be of flush mounting pattern and the number
of test blocks being provided on each control and relay panel shall be stated in the bid.

Irrespective of number of test blocks provided on each panel, one number test plug with a lot
of 5 panels or part thereof shall be supplied necessarily, free of cost.

In case if test block is the part of the relay itself then one number test handle/ test plug with a
lot of each 5 panels or part thereof shall be supplied necessarily, free of cost.
7.18 SAFETY EARTHING :
Earthing of current free metallic parts or metallic bodies of the equipments mounted on
the switch boards shall be done with 2.5 [Link] PVC insulated green coloured copper wire.
The two ends of this line shall be provided with crimp tag terminations and connected to a
tinned copper earth bar of 25mm x 3mm section running longitudinally at the bottom of
the control Board. The neutral point of star connected secondary winding of instrument
transformers and one corner of the open delta connected LV side of potential
transformers, if used, shall be similarly earthed by tails connected with the main earth bar at
the switch board earthing system. Multiple earthing of any instrument transformer circuit
shall be avoided.

8.00 BILL OF MATERIAL

8.01 The C&R panels, required at various sub stations can be broadly classified into
following categories of panels :

20
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

[Link]. Particulars Type of panels

1. 33 kV I/Cpanel Type-A1 (Simplex)
2. 2x33 kV feeder panel Type-B (Simplex)
3. 1x33 kV feeder/ Bus Coupler panel Type-B1 (Simplex)

8.01.1 The requirement of various sub stations will comprise of one or more of these
panels. The simplex panel shall be complete in itself and provided with doors at the back,
while the continuous board of Duplex panels shall have end doors at each end of the
corridor between relay and control position of the set of duplex panels.

DETAILS OF EQUIPMENT TO BE MOUNTED ON EACH PANEL

8.02 TYPE-A1: 33 KV CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS FOR CONTROLLING

ONE CIRCUIT BREAKER(LV SIDE OF 132 / 33 KV TRANSFORMER).

The C&R Panel shall accommodate equipments for LV side (33 kV) of 132/33 kV
Transformer on front of panel:
QUANTITY
S. LV SIDE
PARTICULARS
NO. OF132 / 33
kV TR.
1. Section of painted & over laid mimic diagram for one main and one aux. <--One---->
bus arrangement with symbol.
2. Semaphore indicator for automatic position indication of circuit breaker 1
3. Three position locking pattern control switch with spring return to 1
normal and having contacts with one lost motion device (one set of
contact which shall remain closed in neutral after close position)with
pistol grip handle for control of33 kV CB
4. Indication lamp for the following 7
33 kV INCOMER:
i) CB "ON"- RED
ii) CB "OFF" - GREEN
iii) CB "AUTO TRIP" - WHITE
iv) CB "SPRING CHARGED”- AMBER
v) PT supply indication RED, AMBER,
BLUE (3 Nos.)
5. 3 phase 4 wire AC static tri-vector meter of 0.2S class accuracy 1
(provision
for 2nd meter
shall be
provided)
6. Digital Multifunction Meter (as per Cl No 6.02 of specification) 1
7. High speed master tripping relay having 2 normally closed and 6 1
normally open and reset pair of contacts or inter-trip facility with
duplicated trip contacts and for closing interlock
8. Numerical IDMT non-directional over current & Earth fault 1
relay(consisting of 2 O/C element +1 E/F element)
9. 3 phase, 4 wire link type test terminal block of 15 amp. rating for testing 2
of trivector meter

21
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

QUANTITY
S. LV SIDE
PARTICULARS
NO. OF132 / 33
kV TR.
10. Test block for testing of O/C & E/F relay 1
11. BNC T-Connector female to 2 female (in case IRIG B port) 1
Note: D.C shall be supervised by numerical O/C & E/F relays.

8.03 Following equipments shall also be provided on TYPE- A1 panel:

S. PARTICULARS QTY.
NO.
1. 4 x 2 Way or 1x8 way Annunciation windows complete with ONE
Annunciator relays for indicating trip /non trip alarms individually
with common bell & hooter 8 way annunciation window should have
provision of clause 7.12.6(a) & (b)
2. Set of 3 control push buttons for 'ACCEPT', RESET and LAMP ONE
TEST common for the 8 way annunciation provided in panel
3. Space heater with switch ONE
4. 230V A.C. 2 feet tube light with door switch ONE
5. 3 Pin Socket with switch 15Amp. Rating ONE
6. 2 Pin Socket with switch 5 Amp. Rating ONE
NOTE: Irrespective of number of relay test blocks provided on each panel, one number test
plug with a lot of 5 panels or part thereof shall be supplied necessarily, free of cost. In
case if test block is the part of the relay itself then one number test handle/ test plug
with a lot of each 5 panels or part thereof shall be supplied necessarily, free of cost.

8.04 Type-B: 33KV CONTROL RELAY PANEL FOR CONTROLLING TWO

FEEDER CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

The C&R Panel shall accommodate equipments for two feeders. Each Circuit shall occupy
space on front of panel on either side of vertical centre.
S. QUANTITY
PARTICULARS
NO. FEEDER-1 FEEDER-2 TOTAL
1. Section of painted & over laid mimic diagram for <--One---->
one main and one aux. bus arrangement with
symbol.
2. Semaphore indicator for automatic position 1 1 2 Nos.
indication of circuit breaker
3. Three position locking pattern control switch with 1 1 2 Nos.
spring return to normal and having contacts with
one lost motion device ( one set of contact which
shall remain closed in neutral after close position)
with pistol grip handle for control of 33 kV CB
4. Indication lamp for the following 4 4 8 Nos.
33 kV FEEDER-1 & 2:
i) CB "ON"- RED

22
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

S. QUANTITY
PARTICULARS
NO. FEEDER-1 FEEDER-2 TOTAL
ii) CB "OFF" - GREEN
iii) CB "AUTO TRIP" - WHITE
iv) CB "SPRING CHARGED”- AMBER
5. 3 phase 4 wire AC static tri-vector meter of 0.2S 1 1 2 Nos.
class accuracy
6. Digital Multifunction Meter (as per Cl No 6.02 of 1 1 2 Nos.
specification)
7. High speed master tripping relay having 2 1 1 2 Nos.
normally closed and 6 normally open and reset
pair of contacts or inter-trip facility with
duplicated trip contacts and for closing interlock
8. Numerical IDMT non directional O/C and earth 1 1 2 Nos.
fault relay with instantaneous element having
range 2.5 to 8 times of rated current with
provision to block the instantaneous element
(consisting of 2 O/C element +1 E/F element).
9. 3 phase ,4 wire link type test terminal block of 15 1 1 3 Nos.
amp. rating for testing of trivector meter
10. Test block for testing of O/C & E/F relay 1 1 2 Nos.
11. BNC T-Connector female to 2 female (in case 1 1 2
IRIG B port)
Note: D.C shall be supervised by numerical O/C & E/F relays.

8.05 Following equipments shall also be provided on TYPE- B panel in common for
both circuits:

S. PARTICULARS QTY.
NO.
1. 4 x 4 Way or 1x16 way Annunciation windows complete with ONE
Annunciator relays for indicating trip /non trip alarms individually
with common bell & hooter 16 way annunciation window should have
provision of clause 7.12.6(a) & (b)
2. Set of 3 control push buttons for 'ACCEPT', RESET and LAMP ONE
TEST common for the 16 way annunciation provided in panel
3. Space heater with switch ONE
4. 230V A.C. 2 feet tube light with door switch ONE
5. 3 Pin Socket with switch 15 Amp. Rating ONE
6. 2 Pin Socket with switch 5 Amp. Rating ONE

NOTE: Irrespective of number of relay test blocks provided on each panel, one number test
plug with a lot of 5 panels or part thereof shall be supplied necessarily, free of cost. In
case if test block is the part of the relay itself then one number test handle/ test plug
with a lot of each 5 panels or part thereof shall be supplied necessarily, free of cost.

23
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

8.06 Type-B1: 33 KV CONTROL RELAY PANEL FOR CONTROLLING ONE

FEEDER/ BUS COUPLER CIRCUIT BREAKER:

The C&R Panel shall accommodate equipments for One feeder/ Bus Coupleron front of
panel.

S.
PARTICULARS QUANTITY
NO.
1. Section of painted & over laid mimic diagram for one main and one <--One---->
aux. bus arrangement with symbol.
2. Semaphore indicator for automatic position indication of circuit breaker 1
3. Three position locking pattern control switch with spring return to
normal and having contacts with one lost motion device ( one set of
1
contact which shall remain closed in neutral after close position) with
pistol grip handle for control of 33 kV CB
4. Indication lamp for the following:
33 kV FEEDER:
i) CB "ON"- RED
4
ii) CB "OFF" - GREEN
iii) CB "AUTO TRIP" - WHITE
iv) CB "SPRING CHARGED”- AMBER
5. 3 phase 4 wire AC static tri-vector meter of 0.2S class accuracy 1
6. Digital Multifunction Meter (as per Cl No 6.02 of specification) 1
7. High speed master tripping relay having 2 normally closed and 6
normally open and reset pair of contacts or inter-trip facility with 1
duplicated trip contacts and for closing interlock
8. Numerical IDMT non directional O/C and earth fault relay with
instantaneous element having range 2.5 to 8 times of rated current with
1
provision to block the instantaneous element (consisting of 2 O/C
element +1 E/F element).
9. 3 phase, 4 wire link type test terminal block of 15 amp. rating for testing
1
of trivector meter
10. Test block for testing of O/C & E/F relay 1
11. BNC T-Connector female to 2 female (in case IRIG B port) 1

Note: D.C shall be supervised by numerical O/C & E/F relays.

8.07 Following equipments shall also be provided on TYPE- B1 panel:

S. PARTICULARS QTY.
NO.
1. 4 x 2 Way or 1x8 way Annunciation windows complete with ONE
Annunciator relays for indicating trip /non trip alarms individually
with common bell & hooter 8 way annunciation window should have
provision of clause 7.12.6(a) & (b)
2. Set of 3 control push buttons for 'ACCEPT', RESET and LAMP ONE
TEST common for the 8 way annunciation provided in panel
3. Space heater with switch ONE

24
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

S. PARTICULARS QTY.
NO.
4. 230V A.C. 2 feet tube light with door switch ONE
5. 3 Pin Socket with switch 15 Amp. Rating ONE
6. 2 Pin Socket with switch 5 Amp. Rating ONE

NOTE: Irrespective of number of relay test blocks provided on each panel, one number test
plug with a lot of 5 panels or part thereof shall be supplied necessarily, free of cost.
In case if test block is the part of the relay itself then one number test handle/ test
plug with a lot of each 5 panels or part thereof shall be supplied necessarily, free of
cost.

25
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 3-PHASE, 4-WIRE, 0.2S CLASS, AC STATIC

TOD TARIFF TRIVECTOR METER FOR EHV/HV SYSTEM OF RVPN.

1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, assembly inspection,
testing at manufacturer‟s works before dispatch, supply and delivery at site / FOR
destination anywhere in Rajasthan of class 0.2S accuracy static HT TOD Tariff
trivector meters as per requirement given in this specification. The meters shall be
mounted on the C&R Panel and used for Energy accountal& auditing as well for T&D
loss calculation.
1.2 The meter shall be installed on each panel to be utilized at various EHV/HV lines/
transformer/ Bus-coupler Panel as a self-contained device for measurement of
parameters in a programmable time clock initially set at 15 minute blocks. The meter
shall also measure and display true cumulative energy import and export on daily and
monthly basis.
1.3 The meter Manufacturer should possess fully computerized meter test bench system
for carrying out the relevant routine / acceptance tests as well facility to generate test
reports for each and every meter tested.
1.4 The meter manufacturer should have duly calibrated electronic reference standard
(ERS) meter of class 0.02 accuracy or better.
1.5 The meter should be 3 phase 4 wire type suitable for connection to 3 phase 4 wire as
well as 3 phase 3 wire system. The meter shall be capable of measuring in all the 4
quadrants. The meter should be capable of recording and displaying active, reactive
and apparent energy and maximum demand for 3 phase 4 wire as well as 3 phase 3
wire AC balanced / unbalanced loads without affecting the accuracy for a power
factor range of zero (lagging), unity and zero (leading) for export and import as per
requirement given in this specification.
1.6 Each Meter shall be supplied alongwith related basic computer software (BCS) as
per details given in this specification. The meter shall have following features:
a) Modem interface connectable and compatible to MPLS system for transfer of
data to remote stations.
b) For transfer of data, meter should have multiple communication ports for local
reading and remote communication facility.
1.7 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and
construction of material. The material shall, however, confirm in all respects to high
standards of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing
for continuous commercial operation in a manner acceptable to the purchaser, who
will interpret the meaning of drawings and specification and shall have the power to
reject any work or material which in his judgment is not in accordance therewith. The
offered materials shall be complete with all accessories, hardware, software and
components necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such components
shall be deemed to be within the scope of bidders supply irrespective of whether those
are specifically brought out in this specification and / or the commercial order or not.

2.0 STANDARDS APPLICABLE

2.1 Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification the performance and testing
of the meters shall confirm to the following Indian/international standards and all
related Indian/international standards to be read with upto date and latest
amendments/revisions thereof :

26
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

S. No Standard No. Title

1 IS 14697- 1999with latest AC static transformer operated
amendment Watthour and VAR–Hour meters, class
0.2S & 0.5S.
2 CBIP Publication No. 304 Manual on Standardization of AC Static
Electricity Energy Meters.
To be referred for tests for immunity
against AC & DC magnetic induction
of external origin as per revised values
given at Clause 4.6.4, Table – 17,
Influence Quantities.
3 IEC – 60687 – 2000 AC static Watthour meters for active
with latest amendment energy, class 0.2S & 0.5S.
4 IS – 9000 Basic environmental testing procedures
with latest amendment for electronic and electrical items.
5 IS 15959 – 2011 Indian Standard – Data Exchange for
Electricity Meter Reading, Tariff and
Load Control – Companion
Specification.
6 IEC – 61000 – 4 – 5 (2001 – For Electro-magnetic compatibility –
04) Testing and measurement techniques,
with latest amendment surge immunity test.
7 IS – 15707:2006 Specification for testing evaluation,
installation and maintenance of AC
Electricity Meters – Code of practice.

2.2 The meters shall bear BIS Certification mark.

2.3 Meters matching with requirements of other national or international standards which
ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above shall also be
considered. When the equipment offered by the tenderer conforms to standards other
than those specified above, salient points of difference between standards adopted and
the standards specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant
schedule and copy of such standards alongwith their English translation shall
invariably be furnished alongwith the offer.

3.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS

3.1 Supply system:
Rated voltage (Vref) 3 x 110/√ 3 V- phase to neutral .
(Through PT) (3 phase 4 wire system)
3 x 110 V- phase to phase
Meter shall be programmed for
-/3x110 V (Ph.-Ph.)
-/110/√ 3 V (Ph.-N).

Rated current (basic current Ib) 3x -/1 Amps or

(Connected through CT) 3x -/5 Amp as per requirement.

Multiplying factor to arrive at actual primary values wherever applicable, shall be

calculated from the CT and VT ratio of the installed CTs and VTs.

27
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

4.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:

4.1 The microprocessor based 3 phase 4 wire metering system shall conform to class 0.2
S as per IS:14697-1999.
4.2 The active energy measurement (Wh) shall be carried out on 3 phase 4 wire principal
with an accuracy as per class 0.2S of IS:14697-1999. In the meters, the energy shall
be computed directly in CT/VT secondary quantities and indicated in Watthours. The
meters shall compute the active energy(Wh) import and export from the substation
during each successive 15 minute block and stored in its memory.
4.3 Further the meter shall continuously integrate and display on demand the
accumulative active energy import and export from the substation upto date time. The
cumulative Watthour reading at each midnight shall be stored in the meter memory.
Separate register shall be maintained for active energy import and export.
4.4 The meter shall continuously compute the average of the RMS value (fundamental
only) of the 3 lines to neutral VT secondary voltage and then display the same on
demand.
4.5 Four cumulative energy registers for reactive energy should be available on meter
display.
a) Reactive energy lag while active energy import.
b) Reactive energy lag while active energy export.
c) Reactive energy lead while active energy import.
d) Reactive energy lead while active energy export.
4.6 Each meter shall have a built in calendar in clock. The maximum drift permissible in
the real time clock shall be +/- 2 minutes / year for 0.2S class meters. The calendar
and clock shall be correctly set at the manufacturer‟s works. The date (day – month –
year) and time (hour – minute – seconds) shall be displayed on the meter front on
demand. Clock adjustment shall be possible at site using the Common Meter Reading
Instrument (CMRI) and LAPTOP and also remotely using time synchronization signal
through modem and MPLS system.
4.7 Each meter shall have a unique identification code, which shall be marked
permanently on the front as well as in its memory.
4.8 Each meter shall have a non-volatile memory in which the following shall be
automatically stored. The non-volatile memory should retain data for a period not less
than 10 years under un-powered condition. Battery back up memory will not be
treated as NVM and shall not be accepted.
4.8.1 Wh transmittal during each successive 15 minute block upto second decimal for
import and export separately.
4.8.2 Cumulative Wh transmittal at each mid night.
4.9 The meters shall store all data in their memories for a period of 22 days. The data
older than 22 days shall get erased automatically.
4.10 All meters shall be totally identical in all respects except for their unique
identification codes. They shall also be totally sealed with no possibility of any
adjustment at site except for clock correction.
4.11 The meters shall safely withstand the usual fluctuation arising during faults, in
particular, 115% of rated VT secondary voltage applied continuously and 190% of
rated secondary voltage for 3 seconds, and 120 % of rated CT secondary current
applied continuously and 20 times of maximum current applied for 0.5 seconds, shall
not cause any damage to or the mal-operation of the meters.
4.12 An automatic back up for the continued operation of the offered meters clock and
calendar shall be provided through a long life battery which shall be capable of
supplying the required power for atleast two years under meter un-powered

28
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

conditions. The offered meters shall be supplied duly fitted with the battery that shall
not be required to be changed for at least 10 years, as long as total VT interruption
does not exceed two years.
4.13 Power Factor Range:
The meter shall be suitable for full power factor range from zero (lagging) through
unity to zero (leading). The meter should work as an active energy import and export
and reactive (lag and lead) energy meter.
4.14 Power Supply Variation:
The meter should be suitable for working with following supply variations:
Specified operating range - 0.8 to 1.1 Vref.
Limit range of operation - 0.7 to 1.2 Vref
Frequency - 50 Hz ± 5 %.
4.15 Accuracy:
Class of accuracy of the meter shall be 0.2S for active energy & 0.5S for reactive
energy or better. The accuracy should not drift with time.
4.16 Power Consumption:
i) Voltage Circuit: The active and apparent power consumption in each voltage
circuit including the power supply of meter at reference voltage, reference
temperature and reference frequency shall not exceed 1.5 Watt. Per phase and
10 VA per phase respectively.
ii) Current Circuit: The apparent power taken by each current circuit at basic
current, reference frequency and reference temperature shall not exceed 1 VA
per phase.
4.17 Starting Current
The meter should start registering the energy at 0.1% Ib at unity power factor.
4.18 Maximum Current:
The rated maximum current of the meter shall be 120% Ib.

5.0 GENERAL AND CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

5.1 Meters shall be designed and constructed in such a way so as to avoid causing any
danger during use and under normal conditions. However, the following should be
ensured:
a) Personnel safety against electric shock
b) Personnel safety against effects of excessive temperature.
c) Protection against heat & spread of fire.
d) Protection against penetration of solid objects, dust and water.
e) Protection against radio interference.
f) Protection against electro-magnetic & electro-static fields.
g) Protection against shock & vibration.
h) Protection against fraud.
i) Prevention against pilferage.
5.2 All the material and electronic power components used in the manufacture of the
meter shall be of highest quality and reputed make to ensure higher reliability, longer
life and sustained accuracy.
5.3 The meter shall be designed with application specific non – editable integrated
circuits/ microprocessors. The electronic components shall be mounted on the printed
circuit board using latest technology.
5.4 All insulating materials used in the construction of meters shall be non-hygroscopic
non ageing and of tested quality. All parts that are likely to develop corrosion shall be
effectively protected against corrosion by providing suitable protective coating.

29
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

5.5 Meter shall be supplied with transparent extended block cover (ETBC).
5.6 Each meter shall have a test output device (visual) for checking the accuracy of active
energy (Wh) and reactive energy (VArh) measurement using a suitable test
equipment. The test output shall not be software configurable. It should be possible to
select the output for active energy import / export and reactive energy lag/lead by
operation of the push button(s)/ keypad provided on the meter for scrolling through
the menu / display.
5.7 The meter shall have an operation indication device such as a blinking LED. The
operation indicator shall be visible from the front window. Separate indicators shall
be provided for KWh &KVArh pulse indication. In case only one indicator is
provided, it should be possible to select kWh or kVArh pulse with the use of push
buttons/ keypad / menu selection provided on the meter (access through software
should not be required).
5.8 The meter shall be suitable for being connected through test terminal blocks to the
voltage transformer having a rated secondary line to neutral voltage of 110/√3 V and
to current transformers having a rated secondary current of 1A or 5A as per
requirement. Any further transformers/ transducers required for their functioning shall
be in-built in the meters. Necessary isolation and/ or suppression shall also be built in
for protecting the meters from surges and voltage spikes that may occur in the VT/CT
circuits of the EHV switchyards.
5.9 A keypad / Push button (s) shall be provided on the front of the main control module
for switching on the display of the metering module/parameters selected and for
changing from one indication to the next. Menu driven or other forms of display can
also be accepted provided they meet RVPN requirements. Such arrangements shall be
demonstrated and got approved from RVPN during technical bid evaluation.
5.10 The meter shall have communication facilities as per Indian Standard – Data
Exchange for Electricity Meter Reading, Tariff and Load Control – Companion
Specification.
a) The meter shall be provided with the following ports:
i) RS – 485 port for periodic data transfer to Sub Station data logger /
Computer. RS – 485 communication port shall be suitable for interfacing multiple
Energy Meters. It shall be possible to download stored meter data on polling basis
with the aid of a software schedule by addressing one meter at a time and
downloading the stored data into the Sub Station data logger / Computer / Data
Acquisition Server.
ii) Galvanically isolated optical communication port in front of the meter for
data transfer to or from a hand held data Collection Device (Common Meter Reading
Instrument– „CMRI‟)/LAPTOP – conforming to IEC 62056 or CBIP Technical
Report No. 111.
5.11 The meter shall have a light emitting diode as a test output device for checking
accuracy of the meter. The operation indicator shall be visible from an operation
indication device for/on the front window.
5.12 The meter shall conform to the degree of protection IP 51 of IEC60687 for protection
against ingress of dust, moisture and vermin.
5.13 The meter-base, meter-cover, terminal block and ETBC shall be made of unbreakable,
high grade, fire-resistant, reinforced, non-inflammable, high grade and good quality
engineering plastic/ suitable material to ensure safety. The manufacturer shall clearly
indicate the material used.
5.14 The meter cover shall have one window. The window shall be of transparent, UV
stabilized polycarbonate or equivalent high grade engineering plastic for easily

30
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

reading all the displayed values/parameters, name plate details and observation of
operation indicator. The window shall be ultrasonically welded with the meter cover
such that it cannot be removed undamaged without breaking the meter cover seals.
5.15 The terminal block shall be of high grade non hygroscopic, fire retardant, low
tracking, fire-resistant, high grade engineering plastic (not bakelite) which should
form an extension of the meter case, meeting the requirement of clause No.6.4 of IS
14697/ Clause No. 4.2.4 of IEC 1036-1996.
The current circuit conductors of a meter shall be connected to its current terminals
inside the meter terminal block adopting any of the recommended methods given in
clause 6.4 – Annexure B of IS-13779 – 1999.
5.16 The meter shall have tin/nickel plated brass terminals. The terminals shall have
suitable construction with barriers and cover to provide firm and safe connection of
current and voltage leads of stranded copper conductors with copper reducer type
terminals ends (thimbles).
5.17 The manner of fixing the conductors to the terminal block shall ensure adequate and
durable contact such that there is no risk of loosening or undue heating. Screw
connections transmitting contact force and screw fixings which may be loosened and
tightened several times during the life of the meter shall screw into a metal nut. All
parts of each terminal shall be such that the risk of corrosion resulting from contact
with any other metal part is minimized. Two screws shall be provided in each current
terminal for effectively clamping the external leads of thimbles. Each screw shall
engage at least 3 threads in the terminal. The ends of screws shall be such as not to
pierce the conductor. Electrical connections shall be so designed that contact pressure
is not transmitted through insulating material. The internal diameter of the terminal
holes shall be 5.5 mm. The clearances and creepage distances shall conform to clause
6.6 of IS 14697 -1999. Minimum center to center clearance between adjacent
connections shall be 13.5 mm. Alternate equivalent manner of fixing / connecting
conductors / wires to the meter may be proposed but shall have to be demonstrated
during pre-bid evaluation for acceptance by RVPN.
5.18 In case of the terminal block and the meter case reasonable safety shall be ensured
against the spread of fire and should not be ignited by thermic overload of live parts in
contact with them.
5.19 The meter shall be compact in design. The entire design and construction shall be
capable of withstanding stresses likely to occur in actual service and rough handling
during transportation. The meter shall be convenient to transport and immune to
shock and vibrations during transportation and handling.

5.20 SEALING OF THE METER :

5.20.1 Reliable sealing arrangement should be provided to make the meter tamper - proof
and to avoid tempering by unauthorized persons.
5.20.2 The body/cover of the meters shall be sealed by the manufacturer at his works. In
addition, one more body/cover sealing point shall be provided for sealing the meters
after installation.
5.20.3 Two Nos. sealing points shall be provided for sealing the meter terminal cover.
5.20.4 One sealing point shall also be provided for each communication port.
5.20.5 One sealing point shall also be provided for each communication port the MD reset
button (if such button is provided).
5.20.6 A tracking and recording software for all new seals shall be provided by the
manufacturer of the meters so as to track total movement of seals starting from

31
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

manufacturing, procurement, storage, record keeping, installation, series of

inspections, removal and disposal.
5.20.7 Only the patented seals (seal from the manufacturer who has official right to
manufacture the seal) shall be used.
5.20.8 Polycarbonate or acrylic seals or plastic seals or holographic seals or any other
superior seal shall be used. Lead seals shall not be used in the meters.
5.20.9 Rear side sealing arrangement will not be preferred, unless specifically agreed to.
5.20.10 The sealing arrangement should be explained by the suppliers in their offer.

5.21 MARKING OF METER :

The meter terminal marking and mounting arrangement should be as per Indian
installation practices. The marking on every meter shall be in accordance with IS
14697-1999 /IEC 60687-2000.
Every meter shall have name plate beneath the meter cover such that the name plate
cannot be accessed without opening the meter cover and without breaking the seals of
the meter cover and the name plate shall be marked indelibly. The name plate
marking should not fade or otherwise be adversely affected by UV exposure with
lapse of time. The basic markings on the meter name plate shall be as follows:-
i. Manufacturer‟s name and trade mark.
ii. Type designation.
iii. Number of phases and wires.
iv. Serial Number.
v. Month and year of manufacture.
vi. Reference voltage and VT ratio.
vii. Rated secondary current of CT (-/1 A) or (-/5 A) as per requirement.
viii. Principal unit(s) of measurement.
ix. Meter constant (Imp/kWh, Imp/kVArh).
x. Class index of meter.
xi. “Property of RVPNL”.
xii. RVPNL‟s purchase order number and date.
xiii. Guarantee period.
xiv. BIS Certification Mark.
5.22 Connection Diagram And Terminal Markings :
The connection diagram of the meter shall be clearly shown for 3 phase 4 wire system,
on inside portion of the terminal cover and shall be of permanent nature. The meter
terminals shall also be marked and this marking should appear in the above diagram.
5.23 SOFTWARE:
One licensed copy of the following software shall be supplied by the supplier without
extra cost with each meter.
5.23.1 Software for reading, down loading data, time setting and TOD programming in the
meter normally resident in the Common Meter Reading Instrument CMRI & Laptop
both. The software shall be suitable for Windows. Software should be suitable and
configurable to other kind of tariff within the recorded parameters/ data provided by
the meter.
Time setting and TOD programming should be enabled at BASIC COMPUTER
SOFTWARE under multi-level password protected security system for specified
meter(s). The Base Computer Software should be able to schedule the Laptop/CMRI
for meter reading.

32
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

5.23.2 Windows based Basic Computer Software (BCS) for receiving data from
CMRI/Laptop and from meter directly through specified communication system. The
facility to convert meter reading data into user definable ASCII format so that it may
be possible for the user to integrate the same with the user's billing data and process
the selected data on line in desired manner.
5.23.3 Any other special application software of the manufacture for the meter.

Any future up-gradation made by the bidder in any of the above software shall also be
provided free of cost.

6.0 SALIENT FEATURES :

The meter shall have the following additional salient features:
6.1 The 3 line to neutral voltages shall be continuously monitored by individual phase
wise LEDs or by any other indications. The time blocks in which such a voltage
failure occurs/ persists shall also be recorded in the meter‟s memory. The lamp shall
automatically resume normal function when corresponding VT secondary voltage is
healthy again.
6.2 It should be possible to check the healthiness of phase voltages by displaying all the
voltages on the meter display.
6.3 The meter should work accurately irrespective of phase sequence of the mains supply.
6.4 It should be possible to check the correctness of connections of CT and VT to the
meter with proper polarity. This feature may be made available on the meter display.
For this purpose, suitable software for field diagnosis of meter connections with the
help of meter and Laptop/CMRI should be supplied as per Annexure – G – 15 of IS
14697-1999.
6.5 The meter should continue to record accurately as per prevailing electrical conditions
even if the neutral of potential supply gets disconnected.
6.6 The meter shall be provided with adequate magnetic shielding so that any external
magnetic field (AC electro magnet or DC magnet) as per the values specified in CBIP
Publication No. 304 (with latest amendments) applied on the meter shall not affect the
proper functioning and recording of energy as per error limits prescribed by CBIP.
6.7 It shall not be possible to change the basic meter software by any means in the field.
Moreover, critical events like time set, MD reset operation and tariff change shall be
logged by the meter. Such events shall be logged in roll over mode for minimum ten
events.

6.8 Display Of Measured Values:

6.8.1 The measured value(s) shall be displayed through Liquid Crystal Display (LCD
backlit) or Light Emission Diode (LED) display and should have page wise display of
multiple parameters, with option of configuring favorite parameters under the favorite
page.
6.8.2 The data should be stored in Non Volatile Memory. The non volatile memory should
retain data for a period of not less than 10 years under un-powered condition. Battery
backup memory will not be considered as NVM.
6.8.3 It should be possible to easily identify the single or multiple displayed parameters
through symbols/legend on the meter display itself or through display annunciator. A
separate legend plate indicating the symbols shall be supplied by manufacturer
alongwith each meter.
6.8.4 The register shall be able to record and display, starting from zero, for a minimum of
1500 hours, the energy corresponding to rated maximum current at reference voltage

33
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

and unity power factor for CT ratio upto 1000/1A for 1 Amp meters and for VT ratio
upto 400 KV/110 V. The register should not roll over in between this duration.
6.8.5 Any interrogation/read operation shall not delete or alter any stored meter data. The
meter should continue to read & store data even during simultaneous
interrogation/read operation through BCS/Laptop/CMRI/ and should not stop working
on this account.
6.8.6 The meter shall store all data in its memory for a period of 22 days. The data older
than 22 days shall gets erased automatically.
6.9 Meter Serial Number :
In addition to providing serial number of the meter on the display plate, the meter
serial number shall also be programmed into meter memory for identification through
Laptop/ CMRI/ meter reading print out, and optionally on meter display.
6.10 Display Sequence :
The meter shall display the required parameters on suitable selection through key pad
or push button(s) or menu selection:
i) LED/LCD segment check.
ii) Real time.
iii) Date – dd, mm, yy.
iv) Meter serial number.
v) Deleted
vi) Power On hours of current month.
vii) Cumulative MD reset count.
viii) Cumulative Active energy import (kWh/MWh).
ix) Cumulative Active energy export (kWh/MWh).
x) Cumulative Reactive energy lag (kVArh lag) while kWh import.
xi) Cumulative Reactive energy lag (kVArh lag) while kWh export.
xii) Cumulative Reactive energy lead (kVArh lead) while kWh import.
xiii) Cumulative Reactive energy lead (kVArh lead) while kWh export.
xiv) Cumulative Apparent energy (kVAh) while kWh import.
xv) Cumulative Apparent energy (kVAh ) while kWh export..
xvi) High resolution energy registers (Minimum 4 digits after decimal).
i) kWh - **.****
ii) kVArh lag - **.****
iii) kVArh lead - **.****
iv) kVah - **.****

Note: If energy readings upto 4 decimal or more digits are provided on the main registers,
then high resolution energy registers as given at sequence (xvi) will not be required
separately.
xvii) Instantaneous power factor with sign for lag/lead.
xviii) Cumulative maximum demand (kVA) import mode.
xix) Cumulative maximum demand (kVA) export mode.
xx) Instantaneous phase voltage.
i) R phase voltage
ii) Y phase voltage
iii) B phase voltage
xxi) Instantaneous line currents (Amps.)
i) R phase line current
ii) Y phase line current.
iii) B phase line current.

34
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

xxii) Phase sequence of voltages.

xxiii) Instantaneous load in
i) kW (import & export)
ii) kVA
xxiv) Maximum demand in kVA since last reset (imports & export separately).
xxv) Anomaly data:
i) Present status of anomaly
a) Missing potential with phase identification
b) CT polarity reversal with phase identification
c) Current unbalance.
d) Current short (bypass)/open with phase identification (applicable
when meter is connected in 3 phase 4 wire mode only).
ii) Date and time of last anomaly occurrence with type of anomaly.
iii) Date and time of last anomaly restoration with type of anomaly.
iv) Cumulative anomaly count of all types of anomalies and all phases.
Detailed phase wise anomaly information should, however, be logged
in the meter memory and be available for downloading to the BCS
directly.
xxvi) TOD Maximum Demand (kVA during kW Import) registers.
06:00 – 09:00 HRS
09:00 – 18:00 HRS
18:00 – 22:00 HRS
22:00 – 06:00 HRS
TOD Maximum Demand (kVA during kW Export) registers.
06:00 – 09:00 HRS
09:00 – 18:00 HRS
18:00 – 22:00 HRS
22:00 – 06:00 HRS

xxvii) TOD Active Energy (Cumulative kWh Import) registers.

06:00 – 09:00 HRS
09:00 – 18:00 HRS
18:00 – 22:00 HRS
22:00 – 06:00 HRS
TOD Active Energy (Cumulative kWh Export) registers.
06:00 – 09:00 HRS
09:00 – 18:00 HRS
18:00 – 22:00 HRS
22:00 – 06:00 HRS

Note: Apparent energy should be based on reactive lag/lead,

i.e., App. energy=√{(active imp. energy)2+[react. energy(lag + lead)]2}

Note: The following TOD wise billing parameters like active energy (Imp./Exp.),
apparent energy (Imp./Exp.) and maximum demand (Imp./Exp.), should be logged in
the meter memory and be capable of being downloaded to the BASIC COMPUTER
SOFTWARE directly and through the CMRI.
a) Cumulative active energy import reading (kWh/MWh) of predefined
date and time for monthly billing purpose (BP kWh/MWh).

35
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

b) Cumulative active energy export reading (kWh/MWh) of predefined

date and time for monthly billing purpose (BP kWh/MWh).
c) Cumulative apparent energy reading (kVAh) during kWh import of
predefined date and time for monthly billing purpose (BP kVAh).
d) Cumulative apparent energy reading (kVAh) during kWh export of
predefined date and time for monthly billing purpose (BP kVAh).
e) Maximum demand (kVA) upto predefined date and time of the month
for monthly billing purpose (BP kVA) Import mode.
f) Maximum demand (kVA) upto predefined date and time of the month
for monthly billing purpose (BP kVA) Export mode.
g) Average power factor of the consumption month upto predefined date
and time for monthly billing purpose (BP PF) Import mode.
h) Average power factor of the consumption month upto predefined date
and time for monthly billing purpose (BP PF) Export mode.
(Note: The average power factor displayed for billing purposes should
exactly match the average power factor worked out through kWh/kVAh).

6.11 Output Device :

The meter shall have a test output accessible from the front and be capable of being
monitored with suitable testing equipment. The operation indicator must be visible
from the front. Test output device shall be provided in the form of one common
LED/LCD for Wh&VARh with the provision of selecting the parameter being tested
by the use of the keypad / push button (s)/ menu selection. Alternatively, test output
device in the form of separate LEDs/LCDs for Wh&VARh is also acceptable.
The relation between test output and the indication on display shall comply with the
marking on the name plate (imp. per Wh/VArh).
The manufacturer shall state the necessary number of pulse count(s) to ensure
measurement accuracy of atleast 1/10th of class of the meter at the different test
points.
The resolution of the test output pulse(s) should be sufficient to enable conduction of
the starting current in less than 10 minutes and accuracy test at the lowest load with
desired accuracy within 5 minutes.
6.12 Auxiliary power:
The auxiliary power shall be drawn from all three phases equally and the meter should
be able to remain powered up with availability of any two phases or any one phase
and neutral.
6.13 Time Synchronization:
The meter shall support one minute advance and retard command from CMRI/ Laptop
through password protected security system which shall be adjusted in six 15 minutes
blocks with an adjustment of 10 seconds each block. If one time advance/retard
command is accepted than meter shall not accept time adjustment command for next
seven days. The clock adjustment correction shall be registered in the meters memory
and suitably shown on print out of load survey data. The time synchronization should
also be possible from remote through communication ports of the meter and data
concentrator using time synchronization signal received through MPLS system and
modem.
6.14 TOD (Time of day registers):
The metering system shall have TOD registers for active energy import and export,
apparent energy import and export and apparent MD import and export. Maximum

36
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

eight registers for each energy and MD can be defined. It shall be possible to program
number of TOD registers and TOD timing through BASIC COMPUTER
SOFTWARE with multilevel password security system.
6.15 Maximum demand (MD) registration:
The meter shall continuously monitor and calculate the average demand in VA/ W
during the integration period set and the maximum, out of these shall be stored
alongwith date and time when it occurred in the meter memory. The maximum
registered value shall also be made available on meter display.
The integration period shall be set as 15 minutes, on real time basis which shall be
capable to change to other integration period also, if required.
The principal of maximum demand calculation used by the bidder should be explained
in the offer.
6.16 Maximum demand reset:
Facility for auto reset of MD at predefined date and time shall be provided. The meter
shall display the maximum demand reset count.
6.17 Load survey capability and billing point requirements:
The meter shall be capable of recording following data for 15 minutes integration
period for at least last 22 days.
a) KWh Import.
b) KWh Export.
c) KVArh Lag when KWh is Import.
d) KVArh Lag when KWh is Export.
e) KVArh Lead when KWh is Import.
f) KVArh Lead when KWh is Export.
g) KVAh when KWh is Import.
h) KVAh when KWh is Export.

It shall be possible to select either demand or energy view in the Basic computer
Software.
Voltage low marking should be locked when average voltage goes below 60% of
Vref.

The load survey data should be available in the form of bar charts as well as in spread
sheets. The BASIC COMPUTER SOFTWARE shall have the facility to give the
complete load survey data both in numeric and graphic form.
The figures of 24 hourly Wh import, Wh export, VAh import and VAh export should
also be made available under each date in the load survey or otherwise, it should be
possible to calculate such figures through BASIC COMPUTER SOFTWARE.
The predefined date and time for registering the billing parameters of Wh import, Wh
export, VAhimport ,VAh export , PF import, PF export, VA MD import and VA MD
export shall be 00.00 hours of the first day of each calendar (billing) month. All
billing parameters shall be transferred to billing registers and shall be displayed on
display mode referred to as „BILLING PARAMETERS‟ .
The above billing data, TOD registers data, load survey data, anomaly information
and instantaneous parameters data shall all be retrievable as stored in the preset cyclic
order through Laptop and a common meter reading instrument (CMRI). It shall be
possible to transfer (down load) this data to a PC with windows based software to get
complete details in numerical and graphic form. The necessary basic computer
software (BCS) for this purpose shall be provided by the bidder with complete details.

37
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

The software/tool required for obtaining the information through the communication
ports of the meter as above shall be supplied by the manufacturer.
a) Meter programming count.
b) MD reset count
c) Billing parameters for last three months
6.18 Harmonics measurements:
The meter should be capable of measuring fundamental energy as well total energy
i.e. fundamental plus harmonics energy. Fundamental energy should be made
available on meter display and the same only shall be used for billing purpose.
The supplier shall indicate the sampling rate so that it shall be sufficient for the user to
determine the accuracy of total energy.
The values of total energy shall be made available either on meter display or on
CMRI/ Laptop with proper resolution.
The supplier shall state as to how he will meet the above requirement and finally the
above requirement shall be mutually agreed between user and supplier.
The total energy (fundamental plus harmonic energy) shall be logged in the meter
memory and be capable of down loading to the BCS directly or through the
CMRI/Laptop.
6.19 Self Diagnostic feature:
The meter shall be capable of performing complete self diagnostic check to monitor
the circuits for any malfunctioning to ensure integrity of data memory location all the
time. The meter shall have indications for unsatisfactory / nonfunctioning /
malfunctioning of the following as per requirement under G 19 of IS 14697:
a) Time and date
b) All display segments
The meter shall have indications for unsatisfactory/ nonfunctioning/ malfunctioning
of the following as per clause 6.10 of the CBIP Publication No. 304:
a) Time and Calendar
b) Real Time Clock.
c) RTC Battery
d) Non-Volatile Battery

The details of malfunctioning of time and date should be recorded in the meter
memory. The details of self diagnostic capability feature should be furnished by the
bidder.
6.20 Tamper and Anomaly detection features:
The meter should have features to detect the occurrence and restoration of, atleast, the
following common ways of tamper/anomaly:
a) Missing potential: The meter shall be capable of detecting and recording
occurrences and restoration of missing potential (1 phase or 2 phases) which can
happen due to intentional / accidental disconnection of potential leads, alongwith
the total number of such occurrences for all phases. Absence of one or more phase
voltage from mains side should not be recorded as missing potential.
b) CT polarity reversal: The meter shall be capable of detecting and recording
occurrences and restoration of CT polarity reversal of one or more phases.
c) CT Short (Bypass) / Open : The meter shall be capable of detecting and recording
occurrences and restoration of shorting (bypassing) / opening of any one or two
phases of CT when the meter is connected to a 3 phase 4 wire system. This feature
shall not be available if and when the meter connected to a 3 phase 3 wire system.

38
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

d) Current and voltage unbalance: The meter shall be capable of detecting and
recording occurrences and restoration of current and voltage unbalance separately
as an anomaly event. Snap shorts (numerical values) of voltage, current, power
factor and energy (Wh/kWh) readings as well as the date and time of logging of
the occurrence and restoration of all anomaly events, subject to meter-memory
space as described herein under, should be logged in the meter memory and
available for retrieving through the meter‟s optical port via CMRI/Laptop and the
BASIC COMPUTER SOFTWARE.
e) Power On/Off: If all the voltages are not available, power off event should be
logged and power On event should be logged when supply is available. The
power on and off event should be logged with date and time. Minimum hundred
(100) events (occurrence and restoration) of all types of anomaly with date and
time shall be available in the meter memory on first-in, first-out basis. It shall be
possible to retrieve the anomaly data alongwith all related snap shots data through
the meter‟s optical port with the help of communication system available and
down load the same to the BASIC COMPUTER SOFTWARE where it shall be
available for viewing. All this information shall be available in simple and easily
understandable format.
6.21 Anomaly detection logic:
A properly designed meter anomaly logic should be provided. The anomaly logic
should be capable of discriminating the system abnormalities from source side and
load side and it should not log / record anomaly due to source side abnormalities.
The threshold values and logic for voltage, current and PF, etc. for the purpose of
logging occurrence and restoration of various types of anomalies are given below
at clause 6.23. The bidder may, however, propose other logics/ values in their
offer based on their experience.

6.22
[Link]. Tamper event with date and Occurrence Restoration
time
1 Missing Potential :
a) Voltage <20% Vref >40% Vref
b) Line current >10 % Ib Ignored
c) Persistence Time 5 Min. 120 Seconds
Notes : Missing potential should be phase wise.
1)
Absence of one or more phase voltages from supply side should not be
2) recorded as missing potential.
2. CT Polarity Reversal : (Phase wise)
a) Line current in tampered >5% Ib(Current Current direction
phase direction becomes positive
negative)
b) Power Factor >0.2 Not applicable
c) Persistence Time 5 Min. 120 Seconds
Notes : Current reversal detection will be phase wise.
1)
3 Current Short / Bypass:
a) Vector sum of line currents (IR + IY + IB ) (IR + IY + IB )
> 20% Ib <5% Ib

39
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

[Link]. Tamper event with date and Occurrence Restoration

time
b) Persistence Time 5 Min. 120 Seconds
4 Current Unbalance:
a) (Max. Current –Min. Current) > 5% Ib <1% Ib

b) Persistence Time 5 Min. 120 Sec.

5 Voltage Unbalance
a) {(Max. Voltage-Min. > 5% Vref. <1% Vref.
Voltage) x 100}/Avg. Voltage
b) Persistence Time 5 Min. 120 Sec.
Note: Any temper event will be logged only when the meter senses all respective
threshold conditions.

6.23 There shall be four separate compartments for logging of different type of anomalies
as follows :
Compartment No. 1:
25% of total anomaly memory space shall be allocated for the following current
related anomalies:
 CT polarity reversal
 CT open circuit
 CT short (by pass)
Compartment No. 2:
25% of total anomaly memory space shall be allocated for missing potential and
voltage unbalance anomalies.
Compartment No. 3:
50% of total anomaly memory space shall be allocated for current unbalance
anomalies.
Compartment No. 4:
Twenty(20) events of power ON/OFF.

The logging of various anomalies in each compartment should be as under:

Once one or more compartments have become full, the last anomaly event pertaining
to the same compartment will be entered and the earliest (first one) anomaly event
should disappear. Thus, in this manner each succeeding anomaly event will replace
the earliest recorded event, compartment wise. Events of one compartment/category
should overwrite the events of their own compartment/ category only.
Bidders may indicate alternate proposals for the above anomaly detection and logging
scheme.
Anomaly count should increase as per occurrence (not restoration) of anomaly events.
The total No. of anomaly counts should also be provided on the meter display as well
as at the BASIC COMPUTER SOFTWARE end.
6.24 Anomaly persistence time:
The persistence time for logging/registration of an occurrence of an anomaly should
be 5 minutes ±10 seconds. The persistence time for logging of restoration of anomaly
should not be more than 120 seconds.
6.25 Transmission of Data:
The following parameters/Data shall be available for transmission through the
communication ports indicated at clause 6.10 above.

40
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

[Link]. Parameters
1 Real time clock, date and time
2 Current IR
3 Current IY
4 Current IB
5 Voltage VRN
6 Voltage VYN
7 Voltage VBN
8 Three phase power factor PF
9 Frequency
10 Signed active power kW [(+)Forward, (-)
reverse]
11 Cumulative energy, kWh
12 Number of power failures.
13 Cumulative of power failure duration
14 Cumulative tamper count
15 Deleted

6.26 Accuracy Requirement:

The accuracy of parameters measured by meters shall be tested in accordance with the
relevant standards described in clause 2.0 of this specification. For apparent energy,
accuracy testing shall be done in accordance with the provisions of annexure G 7 of
IS 14697-1999. Time accuracy of the meter should be as per annexure G 18 of IS-
14697-1999.
6.27 Electrical Requirement:
The electrical requirement of meter shall be as specified in the relevant standards
described in clause 2.0 of this specification.
6.28 Electro magnetic compatibility and interference requirement:
The meter shall meet EMI / EMC requirements as specified in the relevant standards
described in clause 2.0 of this specification.
6.29 Mechanical Requirement:
The meter shall meet the mechanical requirements as specified in the relevant
standards described in clause 2.0 of this specification.
6.30 Climatic influence requirement:
The meter shall meet dry heat / cold / damp heat cyclic test requirements as per the
relevant standards described in clause 2.0 of this specification.

7.0 LIFE EXPECTANCY:

The metering system shall be designed to meet the life expectancy of 20 years.

8.0 TESTS FOR THE METER (for HT-TVM of make other than acceptable):
8.01 TYPE TESTS:
The energy meters shall be fully type tested at NABL accredited Test Laboratories as
per relevant standards described in clause No. 2.0 of the specification. The bidder
must furnish type test reports in respect of AC static HT trivector meter (TOD Meters)
of 0.2S accuracy class of both current ratings. These type tests must not have been
conducted earlier than seven years from the date of opening of bid.

41
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

8.02 Names of Competent Laboratories as given in the CBIP Publication no. 304 (National
Physical Laboratory or Laboratory accredited by NABL, India for the particular
testing) where type tests can be conducted are listed below:
No. Short Name Full Name of Testing Laboratories
1 NPL National Physical Laboratory, New Delhi
2 CPRI (Bangalore) Central Power Research Institute, Bangalore
3 CPRI (Bhopal) Central Power Research Institute, Bhopal
4 ERTL (N) Electronics Regional Test Laboratory (North), New
Delhi
5 ERTL (E) Electronics Regional Test Laboratory (East), Kolkata
6 ERDA Electronics Research & Development Association,
Vadodara
7 ETDC (Chennai) Electronics Test & Development Centre, Chennai
8 YMPL Yadav Measurements Private Ltd., Udaipur
9 SML Secure Meters Ltd., Udaipur
10 Torrent Power Torrent Power Ltd., Ahmedabad
11 MPSE MPS Electrical Test Laboratory, L&T Ltd., Mysore

8.03 TYPE TESTS TO BE CONDUCTED ON TWO UNITS OF EACH TYPE AND

EACH RATING AS PER RELEVANT STANDARD NO. 14697 – 1999/ IEC 687-
1992/ CBIP PUBLICATION NO. 304 / IS – 9000.
a) Test of insulation properties
i) Impulse voltage test
ii) AC High voltage test
iii) Insulation test
b) Test of accuracy requirement
i) Tests on limits of error
ii) Test on starting condition
iii) Test on no load condition
iv) Test of Ambient Temperature influence
v) Test of repeatability of error
vi) Test of influence quantities
c) Test of electrical requirement
i) Test for power consumption
ii) Test for influence of supply voltage
iii) Test of influence short time over current
iv) Test of influence of self heating
v) Test of influence of heating
d) Test of electromagnetic compatibility
i) Radio interference measurement
ii) Fast transient burst test
iii) Test of immunity to electrostatic discharges
iv) Test of immunity to electromagnetic HF field
e) Test for climatic influences
i) Dry heat test
ii) Cold test
iii) Damp heat cyclic test
f) Test for mechanical requirements
i) Vibration test

42
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

ii) Shock test

iii) Spring hammer test
iv) Protection against penetration of dust and water
v) Test of resistance to heat and fire

8.04 Tests At Site:

The Purchaser reserves the right to conduct all tests on the meters after arrival at site
and the Contractor shall guarantee test certificate figures under actual service
conditions.
The supplier should furnish detailed write up for the procedure to be adopted for error
testing of the meters in the laboratory and at site/field.

9.0 INSPECTION:
The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing
of the bought out items.

10.0 Mounting of Meters:

The meter shall be wired / mounted on the front side of the C&R Panel

11.0 FURNISHING OF SAMPLES (for HT-TVM of make other than acceptable):

a) One No. sample meter of each rating, alongwith all associated software, shall be
supplied by the bidder to the Purchaser along with type test certificates as per
clause No. 5.0 of the specification for checking and testing in our Meter Testing
Laboratory at Jaipur for routine / acceptance tests to ensure that offered meter
meets the requirement specified under clause 4.0 of the specifications. It shall be
the responsibility of the bidder to get the sample meter tested in his presence at
our testing laboratories.
b) The details of logic and threshold values for various kinds of tampers as
proposed and incorporated by the bidder in their meter samples shall be
furnished along with the meter sample(s). The sample(s) should be duly labeled
and with full address of the firm with tender enquiry number and date
thereupon. Sample(s) should be handed over personally or sent by post. Sample
shall not be received against RR or through G/R. After finalization of the tender,
the unsuccessful bidder(s) will collect their sample(s) so submitted otherwise
department does not hold itself responsible for safe custody of sample(s) so
received.
c) The bidder can commence the supply only after approval of sample.
d) Tests to be conducted:
i) Starting condition test.
ii) Power consumption test.
iii) Repeatability of error test.
iv) Accuracy requirements.
v) Voltage variation test (- 30% to + 20%).
vi) Tamper and fraud protection test: Tests to prove compliance to this
specification.
vii) AC and DC magnetic immunity test.
viii) Temper logic and threshold values.
ix) Capability of meter to transmit / communicate data as per specifications.

43
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

12.0 GUARANTEE:
The equipment found defective within the guarantee period shall be repaired /
replaced by the bidder free of cost within one month of receipt of intimation.
The bidder shall also furnish an undertaking that there shall be no drift in the accuracy
class of the meter for a minimum period of 10 years from the date of supply.

13.0 AFTER SALES SUPPORT:

The supplier shall provide competent and timely after sales service support.

44
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

ANNEXURE- D
STANDARD WIRING ON TB OF 33 KV TRANSFORMER & FEEDER C&R PANEL

Description Ferrule TB No. Description Ferrule TB No.

Marking & Marking &
Position Position
CB CIRCUIT: CB INDICATION:
Main DC J1 CX2-31 CB Status (+ve) L1 CX2 - 1
J2 CX2-32 CB OFF- Lamp L3 CX2 - 4
Annun. DC J21 CX2-35 CB ON- Lamp L5 CX2 - 5
J22 CX2-36 CB Auto Trip- Lamp L13 CX2 - 3
Control DC K1 RX4-33 CB OFF- Semaphore L7 CX2 - 6
(CB Close+TC-1) K2 RX4-34 CB ON- Semaphore L11 CX2 - 2
Control DC K51 RX4-44 AC SUPPLY:
(TC-2) K52 RX4-45 240 V AC supply H1 CX1 - 1
Protection Trip K3A RX4 - 35 H2 CX1 - 2
(TC-1)
Protection Trip K53A RX4 - 46
(TC-2)
CB Manual Trip K53 RX1 - 22
(TC-1) K55 RX1 - 23
CB Manual Trip K57 RX1 - 24
(TC-2) K59 RX1 - 25
CB Closing K21 RX1 - 19
K31 RX1 - 20
Trip Ckt Supervision K9 RX4 - 36
(TC-1) K11 RX4 - 37
Trip Ckt Supervision K61 RX4 - 47
(TC-2) K63 RX4 - 48
CT CIRCUIT:
CT Wiring C11 RX3-1
(Protection) C31 RX3-2
C51 RX3-3
C71 RX3-4
CT Wiring D - 11 CX3 - 1
(Metering) D - 31 CX3 - 2
D - 51 CX3 - 3
D - 71 CX3 - 4
CT Wiring (Metering) D - 111 CX3 - 9
(for I/C only) D - 131 CX3 - 10
D - 151 CX3 - 11
D - 171 CX3 - 12
VT CIRCUIT:
VT Wiring E21A RX3 - 29
(Metering) E41A RX3 - 30
E61A RX3 - 31
E81A RX3 - 32
Note: Terminal / ferrules not applicable shall be left unutilized

45
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

ANNEXURE- GENERAL for 33 kV CRP

(A) LINE CONSTANTS OF 33 KV LINE

(P.U. POSITIVE SEQUENCE VALUES PER 100 Km)
BASE : 1 MVA

CONDUCTOR : SINGLE RACOON DOG

SECTIONAL AREA TOTAL: 91.97 [Link] 118.5 SQ. MM

SECTIONAL AREA ALUM:78.83 [Link] 105.O [Link]

(80 [Link]) (100 [Link])

DETAILS OF 33 KV S/C SINGLE RACOON :

BASE IMPEDANCE : 1089 OHMS

PU Resistance (R1) Reactance (X1) Susceptance (B1)

R1 X1 B1

0.3098 0.0359 0.3540

(B) PROPOSED TRANSFORMER CAPACITIES AT EACH STATION.

132 KV CLASS - 1X20/25 MVA 132/33 KV

(C) DC AUXILIARY VOLTAGE

132 KV GSS -- 220V/110V

46
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

ANNEXURE- 33 kV CT

TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CURRENT TRANSFORMERS PROPOSED TO

BE UTILISED AT VARIOUS G.S.S.

A. 33 KV TRANSFORMER CT :
(i) Ratio : 1000/1A, 4C (for 31.5 MVA Transformers)

S. Core
Description
No. I II III IV
1. Rated burden (VA) -- -- 10 10
2. Accuracy class PS PS 0.2S 0.2S
3. Max. Instrument Security Factor -- -- 5 5
4. Min. knee point voltage at lowest ratio(Volt) 650 650 -- --
5. Max. secondary winding Resistance at 75 2.5 2.5 -- --
deg.c (Ohms)

B. 33 KV FEEDER / BUS-COUPLER CT:

(i) Ratio : 500/1A, 2C

S. Core
Description
No. I II
1. Rated burden (VA) -- 10
2. Accuracy class PS 0.2S
3. Max. Instrument Security Factor -- 5
4. Min. knee point voltage at lowest ratio(Volt) 650 --
5. Max. secondary winding Resistance at 75 deg.c (Ohms) 2.5 --

47
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

ANNEXURE-33 kV PT

TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS PROPOSED

TO BE UTILISED AT VARIOUS G.S.S.

S. No. Particulars Details of 33 kV PT

1. Type Electro- magnetic outdoor
2. Rated primary voltage 33 kV√ 3
3. No. of secondary winding TWO
4. Voltage ratio:
(i) Winding- I 110V/ √ 3 V
(ii) Winding- II 110V/ √ 3 V
5. Rated burden (VA)
(i) Winding- I 25
(ii) Winding- II 25
6. Accuracy class
(i) Winding- I 0.2
(ii) Winding- II 0.2
7. Maximum ratio error with rated burden
Within limits specified by IS: 3156
& 5% normal primary voltage for accuracy class indicated
8. Maximum phase angle error with rated
Within limits specified by IS: 3156
burden & 5% normal primary voltage for accuracy class indicated
9. Oil Transformer oil conforming to
IS:335
10. Temperature rise of1.2 times rated Within limits specified by IS: 3156
voltage with rated burden
11. Rated voltage factor and time 1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30
seconds
12. Temperature for 11 above Within limits specified by IS: 3156

***********

48
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 33 KV

TYPE- A1, TYPE- B AND TYPE- B1 CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

NOTE: Incomplete furnishing of information under this schedule will make the
proposal liable to be rejected.
[Link]. PARTICULARS DETAILS
1.0 GENERAL
a. Manufacturers‟ Name
b. Postal address for correspondence
i) Name of Incharge
ii) Telephone No.
iii) E-mail Id
c. Works Address
i) Name of Incharge
ii) Telephone No.
iii) E-mail Id.
2.0 MULTIFUNCTION METER
a Make
b Model
c Size
d Standards to which conforms
e Class of accuracy.
f Type of communication port & communication
protocol
g The height of figures display in digital meters
3.1 CONTROL SWITCH FOR CIRCUIT
BREAKER
a Make
b Type (As specified by manufacturer)
c Type of handle provided
d No. of Position
e Whether spring return to neutral and having
contacts with lost motion device
f Whether lock is provided
g Whether have one sets of contacts which shall
remain closed in neutral after close position
3.2 CONTROL SWITCH FOR TRIP TRANSFER
a Make
b Type (As specified by manufacturer)
c No. of Position
d Whether stay put type
e Whether lock is provided
4.0 CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS
(Dimensions of control and relay panels)
a Height (incl. Base channel height of 102 mm )
b Width
c Depth
d Thickness of CRCA sheet steel proposed for use on
panels

49
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

[Link]. PARTICULARS DETAILS

i) Front, door frame, base frame
ii) Side Panels, roof, doors
e Degree of protection
f Whether Painting Process is as per Cl. 7.03 of spec.
5.0 SEMAPHORE INDICATORS
a Make
b Type (As specified by manufacturer)
c Whether Semaphore disc have a 90 degree angular
movement clockwise / counter clockwise to show
ON/OFF position of the equipment (M)
d Range of DC voltage for satisfactory operation of
semaphore disc
6.0 INDICATING LAMPS
a Make
b Type (As specified by manufacturer)
c Operating Voltage
i) DC
ii) AC
d Colour of lamps for CB position
i) CB On
ii) CB Off
iii) CB Auto trip
iv) CB Spring Charged
7.0 SWITCHBOARD WIRING
a Size of wiring conductor for :
i) CT circuits
ii) PT circuits
iii) DC supply circuits
iv) Alarm & Annunciator circuit
b Size of earthing bar for safety earthing
c Type of terminal provided on wiring
d Wiring Conductor
e Colour scheme of the wiring
i) AC 3 phase circuit
(a) No.1 phase
(b) No.2 phase
(c) No.3 phase
ii) Neutral Conductor
iii) Connection to Earth
iv) D.C. Circuit
f Whether same ferrules provided at both ends of
wires
g Make of Terminal Boards
h Type of TB provided for CT & PT wiring
8.0 GENERAL RELAYING REQUIREMENT :
(i) Whether all the protection relays offered by you
have a provision of testing in `SITU' (without

50
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

[Link]. PARTICULARS DETAILS

removing the relay from panel) either through test
block or test plug easily accessible by injecting the
voltage/current/frequency(as applicable) from
external testing instruments/source without first
disconnecting /de-energising the electrical circuit
protected by the schemes & relays and have a
facility for isolating the tripping circuit during
testing.
(ii) Whether all the protection schemes and main relays
provided in cases flush mounted on steel panels.
(iii) Whether all main & backup protective relay have a
provision to initiate a trip command externally
through push button/ programmable switch or
through attracted armature relays.
(iv) In compliance to cl. 3.03.05 (i) & (ii) please
confirm you shall provide either test block along
with test plug in panel for testing of relays (in case
relays does not have inbuilt test block) or test plug/
test handle (in case relays have inbuilt test block.) in
SITU (without removing relay from panel)
9.0 OVER CURRENT RELAY
a Maker's name
b Type of the Relay:
i) Specified by manufacturer
ii) Whether the relay is drawout or non drawout
iii) Whether relay is numerical
iv) Communication Protocol to which relay confirm
c Range of current setting
d VA Burden
e Time of operation
f Type of characteristics
g Trip contact rating
h Make & Type of software for Numerical Relays
10.0 EARTH FAULT RELAY
a Maker's name
b Type of the Relay:
i) Specified by manufacturer
ii) Whether the relay is drawout or non drawout
iii) Whether relay is numerical or static or
electromechanical
iv) Communication Protocol to which relay confirm
c Range of current setting
d VA Burden
e Time of operation at max. time dial setting at :
f Type of characteristics
g Trip contact rating
h Make & Type of software for Numerical Relays

51
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

[Link]. PARTICULARS DETAILS

11.0 HIGH SPEED MASTER TRIPPING RELAY
a Maker's name
b Type:
i) specified by manufacturer.
ii) Whether relay is drawout or non drawout
iii) Whether relay is numerical or static or
electromechanical
c Operating Voltage
d [Link] normally open contacts
e [Link] normally closed contacts
f Operating coil VA burden
g Making capacity of contacts
h Indicator self reset or hand reset type
12.0 ANNUNCIATOR
a Make
b Type specified by manufacturer
c Whether annunciation confirms specification
provision of Cl 7.12.6 (a) & (b)
13.0 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY IN-BUILT IN O/C +
E/F Relay
a whether provides trip circuit supervision during CB
on and CB off (preclosing)
14.0 DC SUPERVISION RELAY IN-BUILT IN O/C +
E/F Relay
a VA Burden
b No. of output contacts
i) NO contacts
ii) NC contacts
15.0 TEST PLUG FOR TESTING OF RELAYS
a Make
b Type
16.0 Hooter
a Make
b Type
17.0 Bell
a Make
b Type
18.0 Space Heater
a Make
b Type
19.0 LINK TYPE TEST TERMINAL BLOCK FOR
TESTING OF TVM
a Make
b Type
20.0 TEST BLOCK ALONG WITH TEST PLUG
FOR TESTING OF RELAYS
a Make
b Type

52
 Tech. Spec. 33 kV CRP

[Link]. PARTICULARS DETAILS

21.0 TUBE LIGHT
a Make
b Type
c Capacity in watt
22.0 MISCELLANEOUS
whether 10% spare connectors in terminal boards
mounted in control & relay panel?
23.0 0.2S Class AC Static HT-TVM TOD Meter
a Make
b Type
c Whether it meets the specification of TOD meter

Signature
Name & Designation

53
Spec. 2X24kV Post Insulator (BN- 90160024XX) 1

VOLUME-II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR OUTDOOR INSULATORS 2x24 kV

UNITS SUITABLE FOR 33kV ISOLATORS

1. SCOPE :

This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer's

works before dispatch, supply and delivery of outdoor post insulator units
with complete fittings suitable for 33kV Isolators for installation at various
220kV and 132kV Grid Sub Stations and feeders in Rajasthan.

1.1 STANDARDS :

The design/manufacture and testing of various equipments covered by this

specification shall comply with the latest issue of the following standards
except the value(s) wherever specified herein shall be considered relevant.

i) IS: 2544/1973 with latest amendments if any.

ii) IS: 5350 ([Link]/1971) with latest amendments if any.

Post insulator and/or post insulator unit conforming to other internationally

accepted standards, which ensure equal or higher quality than the
standards mentioned above, would be acceptable. In case, the bidders wish
to offer equipment conforming to other standards, they shall furnish an
English Translation of the relevant standards.

1.2. SERVICE CONDITIONS :

1.2.1. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:

Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for

satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions.
S. No. Particular Values
1 Max. ambient Air Temperature 50 ºC
2 Max. daily average ambient Temperature 45 ºC
3 Max. yearly weighted ambient Temperature 35 ºC
4 Min. ambient Air Temperature (-)5 ºC
5 Max. relative humidity 90%
6 Min. relative humidity 10%
7 Height above main sea level Less than 1000 mtr.
8 Dust storms are liable to occur during the period March to July
9 Average No. of thunder storm days / annum 40 days
10 Average annual rainfall 10 to 100 cm
11 Average No. of months of tropical monsoon 4 months (June to Sep.)
conditions
12 Seismic level horizontal acceleration 0.3g
13 Degree of Polution Heavy
Spec. 2X24kV Post Insulator (BN- 90160024XX) 2

14 Intensity of solar radiation 1.0 kW/Sq.M

15 Max. wind load 195 kg/Sq.M

Note: Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus
growth. The climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient
conditions. Smoke is also present in the atmosphere. Heavy lightning also
occurs during June to October.

1.3. CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS :

1.3.1. GENERAL :

The post insulator units shall be constructed out of the best quality of
material suitable for weather conditions prevailing in Rajasthan. The
workmanship shall be of the highest grade and the entire manufacture shall
be in accordance with the modern Engineering practices. All ferrous parts
shall be given an anticorrosive finish and shall be hot dip galvanized. The
other parts shall be substantially non corrosive.

1.3.2.

The stack of two units of 24kV Post Insulator shall be used for 33kV,
630Amps. and 33 kV, 800Amps. Isolators. The rating of individual post
insulator shall not be less than 24kV for 33kV Isolators.

1.3.3.

The porcelain used for post insulators shall be sound, free from defects,
thoroughly vitrified smoothly glazed. The glaze shall be brown in colour. The
glaze shall cover all the exposed porcelain parts of the insulator except those
areas which serve as support during fixing are required to be left unglazed.

1.3.4.

The porcelain and metal parts shall be assembled in such a manner that
any thermal expansion between the metal parts and porcelain shall not get
loose or create undue strength adversely affecting the mechanical and
electrical strength of the unit as a whole or stack of two units.

1.3.5.

Cement used in the construction of post insulators shall not cause fracture
by expansion or loosening by construction and proper care shall be taken to
locate correctly the individual parts during cementing. The cement used
shall not give rise to chemical reaction with metal fittings and its thickness
shall be uniform.
Spec. 2X24kV Post Insulator (BN- 90160024XX) 3

1.3.6.

The porcelain and hardware surface coming in contact with cement shall be
coated with bituminous paint for cushioning to relieve mechanical stress
caused by temperature variation and cement expansion.

1.3.7.

All ferrous metal parts, except those of stainless steel, shall be hot dip
galvanized and the uniformity of the zinc coating shall satisfy the
requirement of IS:2633/1972 with latest edition. The finished galvanized
surface shall be smooth.

1.3.8.

The threads of the tapped holes in the post insulator metal fittings shall be
cut after giving anti-corrosion protection and shall be protected against rust
by greasing or other similar means, all other threads shall be cut before
giving anti-corrosion protection. The tapped holes shall be suitable for bolts
with threads having anti-corrosion protection and shall conform to IS:4218
(Pt. I to IV)/1967or latest version thereof. The effective length of thread shall
not be less than the nominal diameter of the bolt.

1.3.9.

The post insulator unit shall be assembled in a suitable jig to ensure the
correct positioning of the top and bottom metal fittings relative to one
another. The faces of the metal fitting shall be parallel and at right angles to
the axis of the insulator and the corresponding holes in the top and the
bottom metal fitting shall be in a vertical plane containing the axis of the
insulator.

1.3.10.

The post insulators shall conform to IS:5350 ([Link]/1971).24kV Insulator

to be used for 33kVIsolator shall be with 430 mm Minimum creepage.

1.4. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT OF POST INSULATORS :

The standard insulation level of the post insulator unit shall be in

accordance with the following:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[Link]. Particulars. For 33 kV Isolators for individual
unit of a stack. (2 x 24 kV)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Highest system : 24kV (rms)
voltage.
2. Visible discharge test : 18kV (rms)
3. Dry one minute : 55kV (rms)
power frequency
test voltage.
Spec. 2X24kV Post Insulator (BN- 90160024XX) 4

4. Wet one minute : 55kV (rms)

power frequency
test voltage.
5. Power frequency :1.3 times the actual dry flash
puncture withstand over voltage of the unit(rms.)
voltage.
6. Impulse voltage : 125kV(Peak)
withstand test.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.4.1. DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF POST INSULATORS :
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[Link]. Particulars For 33kV Isolators
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Nominal system 33 kV
voltage.

2. No. of units per Two

stack.

3. Total height of
a) Stack. 508 mm
b) Unit. 254 mm

4. Diameter of Insula- 210 mm

ting part (max.)

5. Minimum creepage
distance of each unit
a) Total. 430 mm
b) Protected. 215 mm

6. Top and bottom 76 mm

fitting pitch circle
diameter.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
The bolts and spring washers used for combining two units of 24kV post
insulators to make a 33kV stack shall be provided by supplier.

1.5. DRAWINGS :

The following drawings/technical literatures of the equipment covered by this

specification shall be furnished.

1) Outline dimensional drawings of insulators.

2) Assembly drawings showing complete details of all parts and separating
mechanism and mass of main components.
Spec. 2X24kV Post Insulator (BN- 90160024XX) 5

1.6. INSTRUCTIONS MANUALS :

The successful bidders shall have to supply ten sets of operating and
maintenance instructions manuals along with the erection manuals and
requisite detailed drawings of the equipment covered by this specification.

1.7. MARKING :

i) Each post insulator or post insulator unit shall be legibly and indelibly
marked to show the following:
a) Name or trade mark of the purchaser i.e. RVPN.
b) Name or trade mark of the manufacturer
c) Month and year of manufacture.
d) Country of manufacture.

ii) Marking on porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before wiring.

i) Post insulator or post insulator unit may also be marked with the ISI
certification mark.

1.8. TESTS :

1.8.1. Type Tests :

The 2x24kV Post Insulator stack shall be fully type tested as per IS: 2544
and IS:5350 (Part-III). The bidder must furnish type test reports with
certified drawings along with the bids per clause 2.0(C) of qualifying
requirement Annexure –PQR of the Specification..

1.8.2. Each equipment shall comply with and shall be subjected to all routine
tests prescribed in the relevant Indian Standard Specification.

1.8.3. The various acceptance tests as per relevant standards shall be carried out
on required number of samples (but not less than 6) covered by this
specification in the presence of purchaser's representative.

The purchaser has right to have the test carried out at his own cost by an
independent agency wherever there is dispute regarding the quality of
material.

1.8.4. The supplier will have to furnish valid calibration certificates of all testing
equipments issued from Govt./Govt. approved agency to purchaser's
representative before offering the material for purchasers inspection.

1.9. SITE TESTS :

The purchaser reserves the right to carryout any site tests as may be
decided at his own cost and will claim reimbursement from the
supplier, in case the material as a result of such test/tests is not found
conforming to the prescribed specification.
Spec. 2X24kV Post Insulator (BN- 90160024XX) 6

1.10. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :

Guaranteed technical particulars as per Schedule-GTP shall be furnished

alongwith the bid. Bid not accompanied with guaranteed technical
particulars, type test reports and detailed drawings etc. are liable to be
rejected. .

1.11. COMPLETNESS OF EQUIPMENT :

All fittings, accessories or apparatus which may have not been specifically
mentioned in this specification, but which are usual or necessary for the
equipment shall be deemed to have been included in this specification. All
equipments shall be complete in all respects.

1.12. LATENT DEFECTS, ERRORS AND OMMISSIONS :

Any material/equipment or part thereof that develops defects, errors or

omissions in the apparatus, not disclosed prior to the final acceptance by
the purchaser, but occur or are disclosed during the guarantee period, shall
be corrected promptly, the equipment or part thereof shall be replaced by
the supplier fee of charges and all expenses for the transportation, handling,
installation of such replacement or any other incidental charges shall be
borne by the supplier.

IMPORTANT NOTES :

1. Any deviation from technical and commercial specification shall be brought out
separately on deviation sheets (Schedule-DEV). Deviations indicated at other
place of bid shall not be entertained.

2. The delivery and commencement period shall not be linked with the time taken in
approval of drawings and arranging type tests etc. Such time shall already be
considered in commencement period while quoting delivery.

3. All the schedules as per tender specification shall be returned duly filled and
completed.
Spec. 2X24kV Post Insulator (BN- 90160024XX) 7

Schedule-GTP

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 2X24kV POST INSULATORS

AGAINST BN-90160024XX
ITEM: 2X24kV POST INSULATORS
NAME OF Bidder:
Work’s Address:
S.
PARTICULARS 2x24 kV Post Insulator
No.
A. GENERAL
1 Type of Insulator
2 Name of the Manufacturer
3 Standard to which it conforms
4 Catalogue No. of Insulator
5 Height of Insulator in mm
ii) Stack
iii) Unit
Diameter of Insulating part in mm, 210 mm
6
(Max.)
7 Mass of Insulator(Approx.) in kgs.
8 Minimum Creepage distance in mm.
i)Total
ii) Protected
9 Pitch Circle Diameter in mm
i) Top metal fittings
ii)Bottom metal fittings
B. MATERIAL USED FOR
1 Cap
2 Cement
3 Sanding
4 Cushion
5 Porcelain shell
6 Paint
7 Pedestal
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (for
C.
1x24 kV PI)
1 Flash over voltage
a) Power frequency in kV (rms)
i) Dry
ii) Wet
b) Impulse voltage of 1.2/50 Micro Sec.
i) Positive
ii) Negative
2 Withstand voltage
a) One minute power frequency in kV (rms)
i) Dry
ii) Wet
Spec. 2X24kV Post Insulator (BN- 90160024XX) 8

b) Impulse voltage of 1.2/50 Micro Sec.

i) Positive
ii) Negative

Power frequency puncture withstand voltage of

3
unit in kV(rms)
4 Visible discharge test in kV (rms)
MECHINICAL CHARACTERISTICS (for
D.
1x24 kV PI)
1 Bending strength in Kgf/Newton
a) Upright
b) Inverted
2 Tensile strength in Kgf/Newton
3 Compression strength in Kgf/Newton
4 Torsional strength in Kgf-m/Newton-meter
Does the Post Insulators units confirms to the
E
latest version of IS-2544 (YES/NO)
Whether Post Insulators marked with ISI
F
certification mark (YES/NO)

(Signature )
Name & Designation
with Seal of the firm.
Tech Spec. for 110V-200AH battery set (tubular type)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 110V-200AH STATIONARY LEAD ACID (TUBULAR

TYPE) BATTERY SETS IN SAN CONTAINER

1.1. SCOPE:

This specification covers design, manufacture/ fabrication shop test and offer for inspection,
testing and checking before delivery of stationary Lead acid (Tubular Type) battery sets
in Transparent SAN (Styrene Acrylo Nitrile) container along with accessories duly
packed suitable for indoor installation at Grid Sub Stations in Rajasthan. These equipment’s
are to be complete in every respect, details to the functions designated to the entire
satisfaction of the purchaser. It is required to furnish all apparatus, appliances and
material whether specifically mentioned or not but which may be found necessary to
complete to perform and testing any of the herein specified equipment(s) for compliance
with the requirements implied without extra charges. The erection/maintenance tools and
specific tools if any will also form part of supply

1.2. GENERAL :

The Battery sets to be supplied by the supplier shall meet the requirement of relevant
standards as at clause no. 1.5 and shall be suitable for continuous operation for the climatic
conditions specified in the specification. The batteries shall be suitable for float quick
charging.

One Battery set of 110volts DC Battery having a rated capacity of 200AH at 10hr rate of
discharge to end voltage of 1.80 volts per cell at 27 Deg. C shall comprise of 55 cells with
nominal voltage of 2 V each with suitable battery mounting racks and other equipment
required to provide a complete operational battery sub system. The battery shall be Tubular
Battery SAN (TBS) type. The batteries shall conform to IS: 1651-2013 and as amended up
to date. All the battery banks shall be located indoor in the separate rooms specially
constructed for this purpose.

Battery sets shall be capable of operating at a peak ambient temperature of 50 Deg.C. The
average ambient temperature shall be 35 Deg. C. All safety equipment required for
installation shall be provided by the manufacturer.

1.3. GENERAL REQUIREMENT OF BATTERIES:

Depending upon the situation, the batteries may be required to provide a back-up for 8, 24
or 48 hours. Furnish detailed battery sizing calculations along with all arrangements and
supporting structures, for each type of DC supply units being proposed, alongwith the bid. In
all cases the battery is normally not allowed to discharge beyond 80% of rated capacity of
the battery at 10 hours rate of discharge.

The manufacturer supplying the cells/batteries as per this document shall be responsible
to replace/repair free of charge, the battery/cell becoming faulty, owing to defective
workmanship or material as per the provisions of the bid document.

All electrical and mechanical equipments shall be designed and manufactured so that
no damage will result in transportation, installation and operation of the equipment under
the climatic conditions to which it will be subjected.

1
Tech Spec. for 110V-200AH battery set (tubular type)

1.4. STANDARD:

All material and equipments used for battery set shall comply in all respect with the
requirements of the latest edition of the relevant Standards. The bidder shall quote for
stationary Tubular type Lead Acid batteries complying to relevant IS:-

S. No. Standard No. Title

1. IEC 60896-11 General requirements & methods of tests for stationary lead
acid batteries.
2. IS: 1885 Electrical vocabulary – Stationary cells and batteries.
3. IS: 266-1977 Specification for sulphuric acid.
4. IS: 652-1960 Specification for wooden separators for lead acid storage
batteries.
5. IS: 1069-1964 Specification for water for storage batteries.
6. IS: 1070-1960 Specification for water, distilled quality.
7. IS: 1651-2013 Specification for stationary cells and Batteries lead acid type
and as amended (with tabular positive plates).
up to date
8. IS: 3116-1965 Specification for scaling compound for lead acid batteries.
9. IS: 6304-1980 Specification for stationary batteries lead acid type with
pasted positive plates.
10. IS: 8320-1976 General requirement and methods of tests for lead acid
storage batteries.
11. IS: 6071 Specification for synthetic separators for lead acid batteries.
12. IEEE - 485 IEE recommended practice for sizing of large lead acid
storage batteries for generating stations and sub stations.
13. IEEE-484 Recommended practice for design and installation of
storage batteries.

1.5. MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION :

1.5.1. GENERAL:

The storage batteries should be fabricated with Tubular type positive plates and Flat pasted
type negative plates as per relevant Standards and shall be assembled in hard containers
of durable and robust construction.

The design of battery shall be as per field proven practices. Partial plating of cells is not
permitted. Paralleling of cells externally for enhancement of capacity is not permitted. The
cells shall be so designed as to be suitable of Horizontal/vertical Stacking.

1.5.2. POSITIVE PLATES:

The plates shall be of first class material and workmanship and shall be free from blowholes,
cracks and other imperfections. The tubular positive plates shall consist of a suitable bar
with spines cast of suitably alloyed lead to give adequate mechanical strength and minimum
electrical resistance. The tubular spines shall be cast of an alloy of Pb and Antimony. The
casting shall be done using proper controlled procedure preferably using high pressure
casting machine with an operating pressure. Low antimony alloy (not greater than 3%) will
ensure low water loss. High pressure cast spines will ensure a long life and trouble-free
operation. Porous, acid resistant and oxidation resistant tubes shall be inserted one over
each spine. After insertion, the tube shall be adequately filled and packed with active
material before their lower ends are closed by common plastic bar. The construction and

2
Tech Spec. for 110V-200AH battery set (tubular type)

material of tube shall be such as to reduce the loss of active material and shall be able to
withstand normal internal stresses developed during service.

1.5.3. NEGATIVE PLATES:-

The negative plates shall be of flat pasted type and should be made of lead-calcium alloy.
The pasting shall be done by manually or on semi or on an automated machine for better
control of process parameters. It should have adequate mechanical strength and would be
so designed that active material is maintained in intimate contact with the grid under normal
working conditions throughout the life of the battery.

1.5.4. CONTAINERS:-

The containers shall be made of transparent SAN polymer giving excellent clarity,
outstanding chemical resistance, rigidity and toughness with very high insulating qualities
which eliminate the need for separate cell insulators. It shall have adequate mechanical
strength to prevent bulging, cracking etc. during the life span of battery when operating
under expected temperature range and due to action of static and dynamic loads and the
action of electrolyte. The container shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the requisite
maximum and minimum operating electrolyte levels. These containers should enable to
visualize the electrolyte level and the cell condition to be monitored at a glance. The
containers shall conform to latest edition of IS-1146 and IS: 1651-2013 and as amended up
to date.

1.5.5. TERMINAL POSTS: -

Both the positive and negative terminals of the cells shall be capable of proper termination
and shall ensure its consistency with the life of the battery. The surface of the terminal
post extending above the cell cover including bolt hole shall be coated with an acid
resistant and corrosion retarding material. Terminal posts or any other metal part which is in
contact with the electrolyte shall be made of the same alloy as that of the plates or of a
proven material that does not have any harmful effect on cell performance. Both positive and
negative posts shall be clearly and unambiguously /identifiable. All exposed metal parts
(connectors, terminals etc) shall be protected with heat shrinkable silicon sleeves for
reducing the environmental impact including a corrosive environment.

“Terminal shall be clearly and un mistakable identifiable and marking shall be of permanent
nature”

The terminal post size should be capable of carrying current so as to confirm to BS

6290 Part II 1999.

1.5.6. CONNECTORS, NUTS & BOLTS

i. Connectors

The manufacturer’s identification shall be indicated on the connectors. Where it is not

possible to bolt the cell terminals directly to assemble a battery, separate lead, copper or
aluminum connectors of suitable size shall be provided to enable connection of the cells. In
some cases, it may be necessary to connect individual cells in parallel. In such cases the
connectors shall be suitably designed. The cross section area of the connectors is to be
sufficient to have a maximum current density of 2.5A/mm2 of 4 lead connectors and
15A/mm2 for Copper connectors when the discharge current of 1 min rate is considered. In
case copper connectors or aluminum Connectors, when used for discharge at a very high
rates are not plastic and capsulated, should be suitably coated with lead to withstand

3
Tech Spec. for 110V-200AH battery set (tubular type)

corrosion due to sulphuric acid. In such cases, the thickness of lead coating of connectors
should be not less than 0.025 mm and lead coating thickness shall be measured in
accordance with Appendix F of IS 6848.

ii. Nuts and Bolts

The material for bolts and nuts shall be brass/ mild steel /SS. Bolts and nuts, for connecting
the cells, shall be effectively lead-coated to prevent corrosion from sulphuric acid. The
fasteners when used in bolt on type terminal shall preferably have a plastic head for
insulation purpose with an excess point to enable voltage measurement.

1.5.7. VENTING DEVICE:-

The containers being transparent, these cells do not require any extra electrolyte level
indicator. Hence preventing hole on the lid would suffice. However, depending on the size of
the cell more than one venting hole may also be provided.

1.5.8. SEPARATORS:-

The separators used shall be glass mat or synthetic material having high acid absorption
capability, resistant to sulphuric acid and good insulating properties. The design of
separators shall ensure that there is no misalignment during normal operation and handling.

The synthetic separators when used shall conform to IS 6071 : 1986.

1.5.9. STAND/SUPPORTING RACK:

The construction of the stand shall be suitable for mounting on a flat concrete floor. The
stand shall be rigid, free standing type and free from wrap and twist. The stand should be
made up of MS channels/angles with FRP coating of min.5.0 mm or of pure FRP material.
The FRP STAND shall also be non-reactant to acid. The stand should be designed
considering all aspect of loading and safety, so as to withstand the loading of battery set
throughout its life, which shall be supported by load bearing calculation. The lower tier of the
stand will be at the height of 300 mm from the ground level. Support angle should be
provided for each rack so as to safeguard each battery cell from falling or declining. There
shall be sufficient space between two tiers of stand so that maintenance of battery cells of
lower tier can be done easily. Necessary supports for power cable connected to end take off
terminals shall be mounted on the stand.

1.5.10. ELECTROLYTE:-

The sulphuric acid and water used for the preparation and maintenance of electrolyte shall
conform to IS 266 : 1977 and IS 1069 : 1964 respectively.

1.5.11. SEALING COMPOUND:-

Sealing compound, if bitumen based, shall conform to IS 3116 : 1965.

1.6. RATINGS:-

The rating of battery cells shall be 10 hrs. rating corrected to 27 deg.C. The Ampere-hour
rating for battery banks are as under:

(i) 110V-200AH

4
Tech Spec. for 110V-200AH battery set (tubular type)

In the above banks each cell will be of 1.80 Volts under float operating condition. Thus the
battery bank for 110V shall consist of 55 Cells. So that total battery voltage is not in excess
of 10% of the rated voltage under float operating condition.

1.7. DESIGNATION:-

The cell shall be designated by symbol as per relevant Standards.

1.8. CAPACITIES AND DIMENSIONS:-

The ampere-hour capacities and dimensions of the cells shall be in accordance with detailed
below Maximum overall Dimensions of 2 V Cells.

Capacity at 10-Hour Maximum overall Dimensions

Rate Length Width Height
AH mm mm mm
200 210 150 555

NOTES
1. The length and width dimensions given in this table may be interchanged.
2. In the case of batteries with built-in cell connectors, the height of the interconnector
shall be disregarded.
3. For capacities not covered in this table, the cell dimensions shall not exceed the
dimensions of the cell of next higher size covered by this table.

The capacities of cells of TBS cells discharge performance design shall conform as given
below table.

Capacities and Final Cell Voltage at various rates of Discharge Current at 27°C –TBS Cells
as under.

Rate of Discharge Capacity expressed as End Voltage.

Percentage of Cn capacity
Rating percent.
C- 10 100.0 1.80

1.9. MARKING AND PACKING:-

1.9.1. MARKING:

The following information shall be indelibly and durably marked on the outside of the cell.

a) Manufacturer's name and trade name.

b) AH capacity at 10 hour rate.
c) Upper and lower electrolyte level in case of transport containers.
d) Month & Year of manufacture.

The cells and batteries may also be marked with the ISI certification mark, if any.

1.9.2. PACKING :

The cells shall be suitably packed so as to avoid any loss or damage during transit.

5
Tech Spec. for 110V-200AH battery set (tubular type)

1.10. INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL:-

The manufacturer shall supply copies of instructions manual for initial treatment and routine
maintenance during service, with every batch of batteries.

The following information shall be provided on, the instruction cards.

a) Designation of cell or battery.

b) Ampere hour capacity.
c) Nominal voltage.
d) Manufacturer's instructions for filling, initial charging.
e) Normal and finishing charging rates.
f) Maintenance instructions.

1.11. TESTS:
i) TYPE TESTS:-
The bidder shall submit the complete type test reports for following tests as stated
hereunder. The type test certificates should not be older than 7 (Seven) years as on the date
of opening of technical bid:-

a) Verification of constructional requirements (As per IS 1651).

b) Verification of marking and packing (As per IS 1651).
c) Verifications of dimensions (As per IS 1651).
d) Capacity test (As per IS 1651 & IEC 60896 – 11)
e) Endurance (As per IS 1651 & IEC 60896 – 11)
f) Ampere- hour and watt-hour efficiency tests (As per IS 1651).
g) Test for loss of capacity on storage (As per IS 1651).
h) Short circuit current and internal resistance test(As per IS 1651).
i) Water loss test (As per IS 1651).
j) Test for suitability of floating Battery operation (As per IS 1651).

ii) ACCEPTANCE TESTS:-

All the acceptance tests as per relevant standards shall be carried out for batteries in
presence of our inspecting officer. Tests shall be carried out as under at Manufacturer's
works:
a) Visual inspection including marking and packing.
b) Dimensional check.
c) Capacity test.
d) Test for voltage during discharge.

1.12. DRAWINGS:-
The bidder will submit the detailed dimensional drawings for battery sets including stands.

1.13. TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES :

The bidder must furnish all type test reports. The type test certificates shall be as per
relevant standards mentioned at [Link].1.11.

1.14. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :

The Guaranteed Technical particulars shall be furnished in prescribed format along with the
requisite drawings / documents for approval.

6
Tech Spec. for 110V-200AH battery set (tubular type)

1.15. ACCESSORIES:-

Each battery set shall be supplied complete with all necessary accessories viz. stand,
inter connections, cell No. plates with Sticker, Digital multi meter complete with leads,
spanners.
One set of following accessories shall be supplied along with each battery set:-

a) One battery logbook.

b) Two copies of printed instruction sheet.
c) One No. cell testing voltmeter (3-0-3 volts) complete with lead.
d) One no. rubber syringe.
e) One no. rubber syringe type hydrometer suitable for specific gravity reading.
f) One no. thermometer (0 to 70 0 C min.) with specific gravity correction scale.
g) One set cell bridging connectors.
h) Anti sulphuric enamel paint -
(1) Red colour in required quantity
(2) Black colour - 2 liters.
i) Battery stand suitable for accommodating the cells coated with 3 coats of anti
acid paint.
j) PVC sheet stand insulators in required quantity with 4 Nos. extra (spare).
k) One set of cell number plates with fixing pins.
l) One pair of spanners.
m) One no. acid resisting funnel.
n) One no. acid resisting jug of 2 liters capacity.
o) Requisite quantity of electrolyte with 10% extra in nonreturnable containers.
p) One pair of rubber gloves.
q) One pair of rubber boots.
r) One no. rubber apron.
s) One set of inter tier connector.
t) Cable socket for two end cells and four tapping cells.
u) One Battery stand made up of MS channel / angles with FRP coating.

1.16. BILL OF MATERIAL:-

The firm shall also have to furnish the bill of material used in battery set.

1.17. SAMPLING:-

The sampling scheme and criteria for acceptance test for cells shall be in accordance with
Clause 12.1.4 of IS 8320.

1.18. NAME PLATE:-

Each battery sets shall be provided with a name plate. The name plate shall be weather and
corrosion proof. It shall be mounted on the front side of the battery sets.

It shall carry the information duly engraved/punched as detailed hereunder:-

(i) Manufacturer’s Name.

(ii) [Link]. RVPN / SE(Proc- ) / XEN( ) / A- / BN---
(iii) Sr. No. of battery set.
(iv) Month of dispatch.
(v) Capacity of battery set.

7
Tech Spec. for 110V-200AH battery set (tubular type)

SCHEDULE-GTP

SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PARTICULARS OF

STATIONARY LEAD ACID (TUBULAR TYPE) BATTERY SETS.

S. No. Particulars 110V-200AH

1. Capacity of battery at 10 hr. rate.
2. Capacity of battery at 01 min. rate.
3. Manufacturer's name.
4. Type of positive plate.
5. Type of negative plate.
6. Cell designation in accordance with Indian Standard
Spec. No. 1651-1991 with the latest amendment.
7. Size of material of connector between cells that the
whether bolted or burnt (bolted connectors would be
preferred).
8. Recommended starting & finishing rates of charge.
9. Voltage per cell at the end of charge at the finishing
rate.
10. Recommended trickle charging rates.
11. Clearance between the edges of the plates and the
inner surface of the container.
12. Clearance between bottom of the negative plates &
bottom of container.
13. Clearance between top of the plates and top of the
container.
14. Thickness type and material of the separator.
15. Material of container.
16. Thickness of container.
17. Amount & specific gravity of electrolyte per cell
required for first filling.
18. Recommended specific gravity of electrolyte at the end
of full charge.
19. Expected specific gravity of electrolyte at the end of full
charge.
20. Over all dimensions of each cell.
21. Distance between the centers of cells.
22. Max. No. of charge/discharge cycles, the cells can with
stand.
23. Weight of cell complete with acid.
24. a) Recommended Max. Period of storage before the
first charge.
b) Life in years after the firs charge.
25. Internal resistance of the cell.
26. Size of cable recommended for connection of battery
bank with the charging equipment/DC Distribution
Board.
27. Erection details of stands:
a) No. of cells in each row and tier/stand.
b) Stands connected in series/parallel (Nos.)
c) No. of inter row inter tier connector required.

8
Tech Spec for Battery Chargers for 110V-200AH battery sets

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR BATTERY CHARGER SUITABLE FOR 110V-200AH

STATIONARY TUBULAR BATTERY SETS

1.1. SCOPE:-

1.1.1. This specification provides for the design, engineering, manufacture, fabrication,
assembly, shop testing, inspection & testing before dispatch, packing forwarding and
delivery of battery chargers & accessories suitable for indoor installation at 132 kV Grid sub
stations in Rajasthan.

1.1.2. It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of design and
construction of battery chargers. However battery chargers shall conform in all respects to
the high standard of design & workmanship and be capable of performing in continuous
commercial operation. The battery chargers offered shall be complete with all parts,
necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed
to be within the scope of supply, irrespective whether they are specifically brought out in the
commercial order or not.

1.1.3. Consideration may be given by the purchaser to alternatives which the supplier
considers advisable by reason of his own manufacturing requirements and experience,
provided descriptive matter is submitted pointing out the recommended device or
arrangements equal to or superior to that required by the accompanying specification with
full justification.

1.2. STANDARD:-

All materials and equipment shall comply in all respect with the requirements of the latest
editions of the relevant Indian Standards or in the absence of the requisite Indian Standard,
with relevant British Standards except in so far as they are modified in these specifications.
Alternatively all materials and equipments shall be designed and manufactured in
accordance with the standards of the International Electro technical Commission (IEC) or
the American Standards specification or the appropriate German or Swiss Standards.
Where a certain equipment is stated not to comply with the Indian Standard or in the
absence or requisite Indian standards to the relevant British Standards the salient
points of difference, merits and demerits between standards adopted and the Indian
Standards or the British Standards shall be clearly brought out in the bid making at the
same time, due correction for operation under the climatic conditions specified herein.

1.3. GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT:-

1.3.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS :-

[Link]. The materials and components not specifically stated in this specification but which
are necessary for satisfactory operation of the equipment are deemed to be included in the
scope of supply unless specifically excluded.

[Link]. Unless otherwise brought out separately by the Bidder in the schedule of
deviations the Battery charger offered shall conform to the specification scrupulously. All
deviations from the specification shall be brought out in the schedule of deviations. The
discrepancies between the specification and the catalogues or literature submitted as part
of the offer shall not be considered as valid deviations unless specifically brought out in the
schedule of deviations.

[Link]. Any deviation which has not been specifically brought out in the schedule of
deviations of the Bid Proposal Sheets, shall not be given effect to the deviations brought out
in the schedule shall be supported by authentic documents, standards and other references.

1
Tech Spec for Battery Chargers for 110V-200AH battery sets

1.3.2. PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:

The battery chargers offered under this specification shall conform to the parameters given
below:

110V 200AH BATTERY CHARGER

S. No. PARTICULARS SUITABLE FOR TUBULAR LEAD ACID
BATTERIES
1. Rated Voltage 110V
2. Ampere hour rating of the battery set 200AH
to be charged.
3. Input supply to the battery charger 3 phase 50 Hz 415 V AC
4. Charging capacity:
a. Float Charger 30A
b. Boost Charger 40A

1.4. Ripple content:-

(In float and boost section both)

a) Load current ----Less than 25%----

b) Output voltage across the load ----Less than 2%----

1.4.1. For battery chargers suitable for 110V-200AH TUBULAR batteries:-

[Link]. The battery chargers to be supplied by the supplier shall meet the requirements of
any of ISS if comes later on for battery chargers at the time of supply. The battery chargers
shall be constant potential type with current and voltage limiting facility and shall meet the
requirements of clause 6 of IS:15549:2005 (specification for stationary TUBULAR battery).
Battery chargers shall be of sufficient capacity to suit battery sets of respective ratings.

[Link]. The equipment shall be suitable for float charging, as well as quick charging of
associated battery sets of 110V-200AH ratings. The bus bar voltage shall be maintained at
all times even during quick charging. The float voltage to the load shall be maintained within
+/- 1% of the set voltage at all times even during boost charging. The float section as well as
the boost section of the charger shall be Silicon Control Rectifier (SCR) based to control the
voltage as per requirement of the load TUBULAR battery set.

[Link]. The battery charger shall be capable of recharging the battery within 12 to 16
hours from a completely discharged conditions, i.e. the float charger should be capable
of charging the batteries from 1.75 volts per cell to 2.30 volts per cell and boost charger
should be capable of charging the batteries from 1.75 Volts per cell to 2.75 volts per cell.

[Link]. During normal working conditions, the float charger shall supply the load current
and also keep the batteries on Float'. The boost charger will remain off under these
conditions. During failure of mains supply, the load be automatically fed by the
batteries (time delay not permitted).

[Link]. On resumption of supply, the batteries may need to be boost charged. For this the
Boost charger should be switched on to boost the batteries. The Boost charger should be
SCR controlled type and its output voltage be available from 1.75 V per cell to 2.75 V per
cell.

2
Tech Spec for Battery Chargers for 110V-200AH battery sets

However under Boost charge condition, the voltage across the load should not exceed the
rated value. The Boost charger construction shall be such that every time when it is
switched ON, it shall charge the battery set at the selected voltage at a boost rate not
exceeding 80A /40A (for 220V/110V battery set respectively) The voltage shall also not
exceed 2.30 Volt per cell.

However every time when the float charger is switched ON, or restoration of A.C. supply
takes place after a failure the float charger shall charge the battery set to the rated/ set
voltage without exceeding the limits of the charging current.

[Link]. The float section of the charger suitable for 200AH batteries shall be capable of
delivering a continuous load of 60 A & 30A respectively. The boost section shall be capable
of delivering a continuous load of 80 Amps and 40 Amps. respectively.

[Link]. Battery charging equipment causing unbalance in charging current of various cells
of the battery shall not be acceptable. All cells will receive adequate and permissible value
of charging current. There should not be any discontinuity of DC supply to the bus
bar during any transition period and battery power should be available for tripping circuit,
if necessary, even during quick charging.

[Link]. The float & boost section of the battery charger should be able to stabilize the DC
output voltage within plus minus 1% and with the variation of plus minus 10% in the AC
supply with simultaneous load variation from 0 to 100% of rated current. The efficiency
of Float & Boost charger shall not be less than 85% at rated voltage & rated load conditions.

Both float charger and boost charger shall be provided with temperature compensation
feature so as to protect TUBULAR batteries (and hence enhance battery life) against
temperature variation. It should increase or decrease the output voltage depending upon
the situation whether temp. is below or above 27 Deg.C. respectively. The circuit should
have a temp. sensor and be supplied with min. 10 meter long cable.

Normally the charging voltage to be set in chargers at 27 Deg. C are :

i. Float Voltage = 2.18 ± 0.02 x Nos. of Cells

ii. Boost Voltage = 2.55 to 2.75 ± 0.02 x Nos. of Cells.

iii. The battery charger shall also have the following features:
a) Higher voltage cut off at 2.75 volts per cell.
b) Lower voltage cut off at 1.70 volts per cell.

[Link]. Automatic run down circuit shall be provided so that at the incidence of power
failure, the DC output voltage of the float charger reaches the minimum position
automatically and, therefore, when the power is resumed the voltage reaches a
normal floating level from the minimum voltage slowly, by which the excessive in-rush
current into the discharged battery is minimized.

[Link]. Current limiting circuit shall be provided to protect the float charger & boost
charger.

[Link]. Keyed push button arrangement shall be provided by which the boost charger
can be used as a float charger, whenever the float charger is down due to any defect
or failure.

3
Tech Spec for Battery Chargers for 110V-200AH battery sets

1.5. CONSTRUCTION:-

1.5.1. The rectifier used in the battery charger shall be of robust construction and shall
preferably be of silicon type. The bidder shall supply the characteristics of the rectifier used
in the construction of the charger indicating the capacity of the rectifier to suit the
temperature conditions.

1.5.2. Suitable constant potential & current limiting controllers shall be provided for
maintaining constant voltage across float charger & boost charger & for maintaining the
current within permissible / set values. The control for the voltage settings shall be provided
on the front panel side of the battery charger.

1.5.3. The float and Boost charger should have provision for changing over to the manual
mode, in case the electronic circuit stabilizing the DC output fails. For this purpose, suitable
arrangement should be made to trigger/ fire the Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCR) in the
manual position also. Also facility should be provided to prevent the excessive in rush
current into the battery, when the discharged battery suddenly comes across the float
charger after an emergency period. The ripple content of the output across load (in float and
Boost section) shall be less than 2%.

1.5.4. The DC voltmeter with a range of 0-150V(for 110V Charger) and ammeters (shunt
operated)with a range of 0-100 A will be provided with class of accuracy 1.5. The charger
shall be complete with the necessary transformer, chokes, capacitors input output switches
etc. The ripple content of the output across load in boost charger should be less than 2%
(maximum). An A.C. voltmeter of class of accuracy 1.0 with selector switch also be provided
at AC incoming supply. An ammeter is also to be provided in Boost charger. Weak links such
as fuses, relays etc. shall not be provided between the chargers, batteries and load to
ensure continuity of DC supply. However suitable AC/DC switches/contactors of
appropriate rating shall be provided to cut off AC/DC supply for repair and maintenance if
considered so necessary. In that case the battery would directly feed the load. Indicating
lamps (Red, yellow, blue) be provided to indicate 3 phase A.C. supply.

1.5.5. All the electronic components shall be of high MTBF or heavy duty type and liberally
rated. These shall be housed in a well-ventilated sheet steel cubicle complete with input and
output terminals. The charger shall be assembled in a sheet steel cubicle with suitable angle
iron structure. Louvers will be provided for ventilation backed up by fine wire mesh.

Thickness of the CRCA sheet steel used for cubicle shall be as follows:

Thickness of the sheet steel for Door

S. No. Battery charger suitable for Frame/Front/
Top/Bottom Sides/Rear
1. 110 V-200 AH BATTERIES 2mm 1.6 mm

1.5.6. The unit shall be provided with audio and visual alarm for the following faults:
a) Input supply fuse failure float.
b) Input supply fuse failure boost.
c) Float charger rectifier fuse fail.
d) Boost charger rectifier fuse fail.
e) AC mains failure/ phase failure.
f) Condenser fuse failure.
g) The audio alarm shall ring under any fault conditions.
h) The audio alarm shall ring under any fault conditions “Even if one alarm exists,
any or all other alarm shall be annunciated ( audio and visual both)

4
Tech Spec for Battery Chargers for 110V-200AH battery sets

1.6. TEMPERATURE RISE:-

The temperature rise of various components after a heat run test on rated load shall not
exceed the value given below:-

Components. Max. permissible rise above

ambient.
Transformers & Chokes with Class `F' insulation 90 deg.C
Sillicon diodes, Zener diodes 70 deg.C
Thyristers (Sillicon controlled rectifiers). 50 deg.C

1.7. DANGER LABEL:-

Each equipment shall have "Danger 415V" label suitably marked in a prominent place with
red characters against white back ground.

1.8. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM:-

An laminated circuit diagram of the equipment shall be fixed permanently at a convenient

place inside the cubicle.

1.9. NAME PLATE :

The battery chargers shall be provided with non- corrosive legible name plate indelibly
marked with the following information:

i. Rajasthan Rajya Vidyut Prasaran Nigam Ltd.,

ii. Purchase Order No.
iii. Manufacturer's name or trade mark and identification no. of the Battery Charger
being supplied.
iv. Rating of charger:
a. Float
b. Boost
v. Input voltage.
vi. Output voltage & current.
vii. Year of manufacture.

1.10. TESTS:-

1.10.1. If there is no Indian Standards Specification for battery charger, following tests shall
be carried out on each charger in presence of our Inspecting Officer free of cost.

The sampling plan shall be 25% (Nearest higher whole number) of the offered lot for
established suppliers and 100% of the offered lot for un-established suppliers.

a) No load test.
b) Load test.
c) Insulation resistance test.
d) High voltage test at 2 KV for one minute.
e) General performance test at various loads.
f) Dimensional checking and sheet steel thickness measurements.
g) Checks on annunciation circuits.

5
Tech Spec for Battery Chargers for 110V-200AH battery sets

1.10.2. In addition to the tests indicated at clause 1.10.1 above, the efficiency test & Temp.
rise test shall be carried out as type test on one number charger in each rating in presence
of purchaser's representative.

1.10.3. All the tests reports for the tests conducted as per clause 1.10.1 and 1.10.2 above on
similar or higher rating shall also be [Link] type test certificates should not be older
than 7 (Seven) years as on the date of opening of technical bid

1.11. DOCUMENTATION:-

1.11.1. All drawings shall conform to International Standards Organization (ISO) "A" series
of drawing sheets/Indian Standards specifications. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable
for microfilming. All dimensions and data shall be in S.I. UNITs.

1.11.2. The following drawings shall be furnished for battery chargers.

i. Circuit diagram of battery charger.

ii. Dimensional drawing of battery charger.
iii. List of components with ratings, makes and rates.
iv. Installation and maintenance manual.

1.12. Schedule GTP

The Guaranteed Technical particulars shall be furnished in prescribed format along with the
requisite drawings / documents for approval.

1.13. TEST REPORTS:-

All test reports of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained by the Supplier.
These shall be produced for verification as and when requested for by the Purchaser.

1.14. PACKING & FORWARDING:-

1.14.1. Equipment shall be packed in suitable crates so as to withstand handling

during transport and outdoor storage during transit. The Supplier shall be responsible for
any damage to the equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate packing. The
easily damageable material shall be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate
caution symbols. Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting such as lifting hooks
etc., shall be provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall be
supplied by the Supplier without any extra cost.

1.14.2. Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the
following information:

i. Name of the consignee.

ii. Details of consignment.
iii. Destination.
iv. Total weight of consignment.
v. Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.
vi. Handling and unpacking instructions.
vii. Bill of materials indicating contents of each package.

1.14.3. The Supplier shall ensure that the packing list and bill of materials are approved by
the Purchaser before dispatch.

6
Tech Spec for Battery Chargers for 110V-200AH battery sets

1.14.4. The supplier shall furnish the three copies of operating and maintenance manual
and drawing with each battery charger.

1.14.5. The material shall be transported within India to the respective destination by Road
Transport/Rail Transport as the case may be at the option of the Purchaser.

7
Tech Spec for Battery Chargers for 110V-200AH battery sets

Schedule-GTP

SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF BATTERY CHARGERS

SUITABLE FOR 110V-200AH LEAD ACID (TUBULAR) BATTERY SETS.

S. No. Particulars 110V – 200 AH

1 Type and make.
2 Rated service voltage.
3 Charging capacity.
i) Float charger.
ii) Boost charger.
4 Rate of trickle/float and boost charging.
5 Ripple content % for
a) Float charger.
b) Boost charger.
6 Voltage available for charging battery.
a) Float
b) Boost
7 Type of rectifier used.
8 Temperature rise at junction at full load conditions.
9 Efficiency of the charger without any negative tolerance.
(a) Float Section.
(b) Boost Section.
10 Makes & rating of the following electric / electronic
components :
i) Diodes/Rectifiers.
ii) Meters.
iii) HRC fuse for protection of individual diode/rectifiers.
iv) Contactors.
v) Relays.
vi) Filter/Chokes.
vii) Rectifier transformers.
11 Details of protection provided.
12 Details of alarm provided.
13 Thickness of sheet steel of cubicle in mm.
a) Front.
b) Top.
c) Bottom.
d) Sides.
e) Rear.
14 Dimensions in mm (Height, Length & Width).
15 Details of painting.
16 Weight in Kg.

8
 1
Spec-DCDB BN-901600xxx

VOLUME-II
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 110V DC CONTROL & DISTRIBUTION BOARDS.

3.01 SCOPE :

This specification covers the design, manufacture assembly, testing at manufacturer's works before dispatch
supply and delivery of 220V and 110V DC Control and distribution boards to be installed at various 220
KV and 132 KV sub stations covered under Rajasthan.

3.02 CLIMATIC CONDITON:

S. No. Particular Values

1 Max. ambient Air Temperature 50 ºC
2 Max. daily average ambient Temperature 45 ºC
3 Max. yearly weighted ambient Temperature 35 ºC
4 Min. ambient Air Temperature (-) 5 ºC
5 Max. relative humidity 90%
6 Min. relative humidity 10%
7 Height above main sea level Less than 1000 mtr.
8 Dust storms are liable to occur during the period March to July
9 Average No. of thunder storm days / annum 40 days
10 Average annual rainfall 10 to 100 cm
11 Average No. of months of tropical monsoon conditions 4 months (June to Sep.)

12 Seismic level horizontal acceleration 0.3g

13 Degree of Polution Heavy
14 Intensity of solar radiation 1.0 kW/Sq.M
15 Max. wind load 195 kg/Sq.M

Note:- Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conductive to rust and fungus growth.
The climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions. Smoke is
also present in the atmosphere. Heavy /lightning also occurs during June to October.

3.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

3.03.1 The intention of the specification is to provide DC Control and distribution Boards as enumerated in
the specification and to be fully complete in every respect for the functions designated. It is required that
furnish all apparatus, appliances and material whether specifically mentioned or not, but which may be
found necessary to complete or test DC control and distribution board in compliance with the requirements
of the specification. The DC control and distribution boards shall generally comply to the requirements of
IS:8623 "Specifications for factory built assemblies of switchgear & control gear for voltages upto &
including 1000 V AC & 1200V DC.”

3.03.2 Considerations may be given to alternatives which the supplier considers advisable by reasons of his
own manufacturing requirements and experience, provided descriptive literature is submitted pointing out
the recommended device or arrangement as equal to, or superior to that required by the accompanying
specification.

3.03.3 STANDARDS :
 2
Spec-DCDB BN-901600xxx

Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification, the rating as well as performance and testing of
the equipments, their accessories and fittings shall conform to the latest revisions and amendments of the
following standards:

Sr. Standard Title

No. No.
1 IS:3231 Protective Relays.
2 IS:8686 Static Protective Relays.
3 IS:1248 General requirement of indicating& integrating meters.
4 IS:8623 Specification for low voltage Switchgear and Control gear
5 IS:13947 Specification for low voltage Switchgear and Control gear
6 IS:5 Colour for ready mix paint sand enamels.

Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative National or International Standards, which
ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, will also be acceptable. When the
equipment offered by the Bidder conforms to other
standards salient points of difference between standards adopted and the standards specified in this
specification shall be clearly brought out. Four copies of such standards with authentic translation in
English shall be furnished alongwith the offer.

3.04 EQUIPMENTS DETAILS :

3.04.1 The DC distribution shall be suitable for receiving the DC supply from the battery charger and for
the distribution of same for the control& indicating, annunciation & lighting circuits, etc., as given in
Annexure-1 (A) for 220V DCDB & Annexure-1 (B) for 110V DCDB

3.04.2 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

[Link] The above circuits shall be controlled by air circuit breaker of moulded case type fitted with
releases of 16A current rating having thermal over load and instantaneous high current short
circuit tripping devices and shall be suitably rated to carry the DC current continuously without
undue heating. The making and the breaking capacity ratings shall be properly coordinate with
the current to be broken in the circuit but it shall not be less than 9KA rms. The MCCB'S shall
be provided with necessary auxiliary contacts for alarm and position indication of MCCB.
Common alarm annunciation scheme (audio-visual) shall also be included for all MCCB's.

[Link] The MCCB'S offered shall conform to the requirements of latest issue of relevant Indian
Standard and shall be suitable for operation in the climatic conditions specified under clause
3.02 of this specification, MCCB shall be supplied complete in all respect including all standard
accessories used for their satisfactory operation and as detailed in the specification.

[Link] The MCCB's shall have dust tight cases and shall be suitable for flush mounting and shall be free
from errors due to change in ambient temperature and shall be able to withstand maximum
possible electrical/mechanical stresses likely to be encountered in service. The insulating case of
the MCCB shall be made of high strength heat resistant and flame retardant thermosetting
insulating material. The MCCB shall be trip free.

[Link] The DC connection from the above circuit breakers shall be brought to the terminals inside the
distribution board from where the distribution of DC voltage can be affected to the required
terminals. The DC outgoing circuits other than those controlled by MCCB'S shall be
properly fused. All terminals shall be clearly marked and their particulars shall be inscribed on
the terminals.

[Link] ALARM ANNOUNCIATION SCHEME :

 3
Spec-DCDB BN-901600xxx

The MCCBs shall be provided with necessary auxiliary contacts for alarm and position indication of
MCCBs Alarm annunciation schemes (audio-visual) shall also be included which shall function as
below:

Fault Manual Operating Sequence Audio Visual

Condition Action
Normal OFF OFF
IC Closed ON Flash
IC Closed Accept OFF Steady
IC Closed Reset OFF Steady
IC Open Reset OFF OFF

*IC- Initiating Contact

3.04.3 CHANGEOVER CONTACTORS :

[Link] Automatic change over power contactors of appropriate rating shall be incorporated in the
control board to change the AC circuit to DC circuit automatically in case of failure of 230 V
AC supply for control room/switchyard lighting and back to AC circuit after restoration of AC
supply. In case of DC boards meant for 220V DC provision shall be made to avoid
intermingling of AC/DC during change over since the change over for 220V board shall be on
same wiring.

[Link] The contactors shall also have dust tight cases, shall be free from errors due to change in
ambient temperature and shall be able to withstand maximum possible electrical and
mechanical stresses encountered in service. The contactors shall confirm to the requirements of
latest issue of relevant Indian standards.

[Link] Necessary auxiliary contacts shall be provided for safety interlocking.

3.04.4 GENERAL RELAYING REQUIREMENTS:

[Link] Voltage relays and the earth fault relays are to be provided to initiate an alarm for low voltages
and the earth fault in the DC system.

[Link] The DC earth fault relay and no volt relay offered by the supplier shall comply with the
requirement of latest issue of ISS:3231 or relevant IEC and shall be suitable for operation
in the climatic conditions specified in clause 3.02 of this specification. If complyin with a
specification other than ISS/IEC then an English Translation of the same shall accompany the
BID.

[Link] Each relay shall be provided with dust tight, removable glass covers with glass windows. the
relay shall be so arranged that on opening the case, it shall be impossible for any dust
which may have collected in or upon the case, to fall on the relay mechanism. The operation
of the relays shall be practically free from errors due to normal variation in frequency and
wave form (for AC relay) and from ambient temperature effects between (-) 5 deg.C to (+)50
deg.C.

[Link] The relay coils shall be able to withstand the maximum possible thermal and mechanical
stresses likely to be encountered in service, without damaging the coil and mechanical parts.
Each relay coil shall be vacuum impregnated with an insulating compound and shall be heat
and moisture resistant.
 4
Spec-DCDB BN-901600xxx

[Link] Terminal blocks for incoming DC supply from the battery charger shall be suitable for 25
[Link] copper conductor. Terminal blocks for outgoing circuits shall be suitable for 10 [Link]
copper conductor. These shall have bases and Barriers moulded integrally with brass inserts
and shall be suitable for 660 volts service. The terminals shall be stud type and shall be
provided with plain washers,spring washers and nut for all incoming and outgoing circuits.

[Link] The fault detecting relay such as DC earth fault relay and DC no volt relay shall be equipped
with operation indicators. The operation indicator shall be preferably mechanically
operated type and secured against unwanted operation by vibration. All indicators and hand
reset contacts shall be capable of being reset without opening the relay case.

[Link] The relays shall be draw out type and shall be supplied in cases flush mounted on steel panels.
If certain relays cannot be contained in draw out type cases, the bidder may offer these
particular relays in non-draw out type cases for the purchaser's consideration and approval.

[Link] Approved make of relays are as under :

i. Alstom
ii. ABB
iii. JVS
iv. EasunReyrolle
v. Avana

If bidder quotes any other make relays except above,same shall not be considered.

3.04.5 AMMETER AND VOLTMETER :

[Link] Moving coil Indicating ammeter/voltmeter alongwith selector switch should be provided to
measure the load currents and voltages between the battery terminals, between the positive
terminal to earth and, between negative terminals to earth.

[Link] The ammeter/voltmeter shall be of switch board type back connected suitable for flush
mounting and provided with dust and vermin proof case for tropical use and finished in
suitable colour. It shall be 144x144 mm square pattern moving coil type and shall conform to
the provisions of the latest edition of IS:2419/1963.

[Link] The limits of errors for ammeter/voltmeter shall be those permissible for class-I instruments of
switch board type given in IS:1248. The instruments shall be magnetically shielded.

3.05 GENERAL PANEL CONSTRUCTION

3.05.1 STANDARDS

The panels offered should conform to relevant Indian standards or equivalent I.E.C. standards. The
reference of the relevant standard specifications wherever mentioned in the text of this specification
have been given accordingly. Other authoritative standards which ensure an equal or better quality
than the standards specified will also be accepted.

3.05.2 GENERAL

[Link] The DC control and distribution board shall be simplex type suitable for placement side by side
with other C/R panels to form continuous boards. Lockable access doors with hinges having a
swing of not less than 1050 mm shall be fitted on the back and interior shall be automatically
lighted by the opening of these doors.
 5
Spec-DCDB BN-901600xxx

[Link] For the existing sub-stations the Bidder shall ensure the matching of control and distribution
board with the existing C/R panels. The complete details of the existing control and relay panels
shall be supplied to the successful Bidder. The following points shall be particularly co-
ordinated.

i. The height and depth of the panel shall be perfectly matched.

ii. Colour of panels both on exterior and interior shall be matched.

[Link] The DC board shall be of folded type construction. The front panels, base frame and door
frame shall be manufactured from CRCA sheet steel plate 10SWG(3mm) thick while the side
panels, roof and doors shall be manufactured out of 14SWG(2mm) thick CRCA sheet steel.
The bottom of the cubicle frame shall be suitable for erection on flush concrete floor. Evenly
spaced ground bolt projecting through the base channels forming members of the frame shall be
used for securing cubicles to the floor. The dimensions of the DC control and distribution board
where no specific matching is required shall be as follows.

Height-2312 mm (Inclusive of base channel height of 102 mm)

Width-610 mm

Depth-610 mm

[Link] The complete cubicle shall be dust and vermin proof be suitable for tropical use and shall
provide degree of protection not less than IP-51 in accordance with IS:[Link] holes and
extension windows in the panels shall be blanked and access doors shall be lined with
compressible liders at the edges. The complete board shall incorporate all necessary MCCB's
power contactors, relays, fuses, switches, horizontal and vertical wiring support earth bars,
interior lighting system, terminal blocks, Brass cable glands, labels, ferrule, space heaters, and
other necessary equipment.

[Link] The bottom plates of 4mm thickness shall be provided for making the base dust tight. Cable
gland plates of 4mm thickness shall be provided on this bottom plate. Sufficient number of
knockouts of appropriate diameter shall be provided on the gland plate for accommodating cable
glands.

3.05.3 PAINTING :

i. All sheet steel work shall be phosphated in accordance with IS:6005 code for practice for
phosphating iron and steel.

ii. Oil, grease, dirt and swarf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning.

iii. Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by washing with running
water rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and drying.

iv. After phosphating thorough rincing shall be carried out with clean water followed by final rinsing
with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying.

v. The phosphate coating shall be sealed with application of 2Nos. coats of ready mixed, stoved
type zincchromate primer. The first coat may be "flash dried" while second coat shall be stoved.

vi. After application of primer two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be applied, each coat
shall be applied followed by stoving the second coat shall be applied after inspection of first coat
 6
Spec-DCDB BN-901600xxx

of painting. Generally the exterior colour of paint shall be as per shade 631 of IS:5,except where
specific matching is not required.

vii. Each of coat of primer and finished paint shall be of slightly different shade to enable inspection of
painting.

[Link] case of any other established painting procedure like electrostatic painting, the procedure shall be
submitted along with the BID for purchaser's review and approval.

3.05.4 PANEL WIRING

[Link] The main DC bus bars and the segregated bus shall be made of 25x6 mm tinned copper flat. The
busbars shall be insulated using PVC sleeves. The colour of the sleeves shall be red on the
positive bus and blue on the negative bus. The sleeves shall be cut only at the points where
connections are to be made. All connections to the bus bars shall be made by using brass bolts,
nuts, plain washer & spring washer. The bus bars shall be rigidly supported by non-hygroscopic
insulation material having high dielectric and mechanical strength. The bus bars shall be
shielded with Bakelite sheet cover to safeguard against any inadvertent/ unintentional contact
during maintenance, etc.

[Link] The wiring of the incoming DC supply circuit from the terminal blocks to the bus bars shall be
carried out using 25 Sq. mm PVC insulated copper conductor (660V service & in accordance
with relevant ISS). The positive wire shall be connected through the external shunt of the
ammeter. All main wiring for connection of MCCB's to bus bar and terminal board shall be
switch board type connecting or multi strand 4 mm sq. PVC insulated copper conductor suitable
for 660 volt service and in accordance with relevant Indian standards. For auxiliary control circuit
, the wiring will be done with 2.5 mm sq. insulated copper conductor and for alarm circuit
same shall be done with 1.5 sq mm insulated copper conductor. Polyvinyl chloride used shall
have excellent resistance against burning ,moisture, oil and vermin and shall be furnished with
clear colour. Rubber insulated wiring shall not be acceptable.

[Link] The wiring shall be supported by plastic cleats. The terminals blocks with ( not soldered) copper
ROSS Courtney/tinned suitable claw washers, separate washers terminated. Wires shall be
terminated on to the terminal blocks with insulated tinned copper solder less crimping type lugs.
Wiring shall in general be accommodated on the sides of the cables and the wires for each circuit
shall be separately grouped.

[Link] Wires shall not be jointed or tied between terminated points. At the terminals connections, washer
shall be interposed between terminals and holding nuts. All holding nuts shall be secured by
locking nuts. The connecting stud shall project at least 6 mm from the lock nuts surface.

[Link] All wiring diagram for the DC control volts shall be drawn as viewed form the back of the cubical
and shall be accordance with the relevant IS.

[Link] Wiring connected to the space heater in the cubical shall have porcelain beaded insulation over a
safe length from a heater terminal.

[Link] All wires shall be suitable for bending to meet the terminal studs at right angles with the studs and
they shall not be skewed. Metal cases of all apparatus mounted on panels shall be separately
earthed by means of copper wire terminated on common earthing strip.

[Link] The following colour scheme of the wiring shall be used :

i. AC circuits -BLACK

ii. Connection to earth - GREEN

 7
Spec-DCDB BN-901600xxx

iii. DC circuits

a) POSITIVE - RED

b) NEGATIVE - BLUE

3.05.5 FERRULES

[Link] Ferrules engraved with the same numbers, letters and symbols indicated in the connection and
wiring diagrams shall be provided on the terminals ends of the all wires for easy identification of
circuits for inspection and maintenance.

[Link] Ferrules shall of strong and flexible insulating material with glossy finish to prevent adhesion.
They shall be engraved and clearly durably marked and shall not be affected by damages.

[Link] Ferrules numbering and identification suffix shall be in accordance with ISS:11353. The same
ferrules numbers shall not be used on wires in different circuits on a panel.

[Link] Ferrule number shall be provided on outgoing circuits as indicated against each in Annexure-1

3.05.6 TERMINAL BOARDS:

[Link] Terminal block connectors built from cells of moulded dielectric and brasstud inserts shall be
provided for terminating the outgoing ends of the panels wirings and the corresponding
incoming tail ends of control cables. Insulating barriers shall be provided between adjacent
connections. The height of the barriers and the spacing between the terminals shall be such as to
give adequate protection and allowing easy access to terminals. Provision shall be made on each
pillar for holding 10% extra connections. All blocks shall be shrouded by easily removable
shrouds of non-inflammable moulded and transparent dielectric materials.

[Link] The terminals block shall be suitable for 660 volts service and for connection with copper wires
only.

[Link] Terminals boards shall be mounted in such a manner as to afford easy access to terminations and
to enable ferrules number to be read without difficulty. Wire ends shall be so connected to the
terminals that no wire terminals number gets obstructed due to succeeding connections. In other
words ferrules numbering and terminals should be unambiguous and fool proof. Terminals
board rows shall be adequately spaced and shall not be less than 100 mm apart so as to permit
convenient access to wire and terminals. Labels in the form of engraved plastic plates shall be
provided on the fixed portion of the terminal boards.

[Link] No live metal parts shall be exposed at the back of the terminals boards.

[Link] All studs, nuts, bolts, screws etc., shall be threaded according to the latest relevant Indian or
equivalent international standards.

3.05.7 SPACE HEATER :

Tubular space heater suitable for connection to the single phase 230 volts AC supply complete
with switches located at convenient positions shall be provided at the bottom of each cubical to
prevent condensation of moisture. The watt loss per unit surface of heater shall be low enough to
keep surface temperature well below visible heat . Each cubical shall also be provided with a
switch of appropriate ratings for control of space heater.

3.05.8 CUBICAL LIGHTING:

 8
Spec-DCDB BN-901600xxx

The cubical interiors shall be illuminated by incandescent lamp connected to 230 volts single phase
AC supply. The illumination of interior shall be free from hand shadow and shall be planned to
avoid any strain or fatigue to the wireman who may be called upon to do work.

3.05.9 SAFETY EARTHING:

Earthing of current free metallic parts of metallic body of the equipment mounted on the DC control
board shall be done with 6 mm sq. PVC insulated Green colour copper wire. The two ends of this
line shall be provided with Ross Courtney/tinned copper lugs terminations and connected to a tinned
copper earth bar of 25x3mm section running longitudinally at the bottom of the control boards.

3.06 INSPECTION AND TESTS :

3.06.1 Following tests shall be carried out at the manufacturers work's after complete assembly of the DC
control Board, in the presence of purchaser's representative.

i. Routine test as per IS:8623."Specification for factory built assemblies of switchgear and control gear
for voltages upto & including 1000 V AC & 1200 V DC".

ii. One minute 2 KV insulating with stand test at 50 cycleson all equipment on the panels and wiring.

iii. Insulation resistance of complete wiring, circuit by circuit with all equipments mounted on the panel.

iv. Checking the operation of MCCB's and change over circuit and associated relays.

v. Routine tests in accordance with relevant IS or other international standards shall be carried out on all
the instruments, relays and other circuits.

vi. The switch boards should also be physically examined for dimensional checkup, sheet thickness & Bill
of material as per purchase order and drawing.

3.06.2 BOUGHT OUT ITEMS:

Only approved makes of bought out item as mentioned in schedule of bought out item appended
herewith shall be acceptable.

[Link] TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES:

The Bidder should furnish valid type test certificate for Degree of Protection test minimum IP-51
for any panel along with BID, as per PQR of the specification.

3.07 SPARES AND OPTIONAL ITEMS:

The Supplier shall necessarily include in his BID and item wise price list of MCCB’s, various
relays, accessories and other optional items used in the manufacture of DC control Board offered by
him to facilitated ordering of spares as well as to make suitable adjustment in prices on account of
subsequent addition/deletion of any of these items.

3.08 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :

Guaranteed technical as per schedule-GTP shall be furnished along with the BID. The BID not
accompanied with the guaranteed technical particulars, type test report, detail drawing and bill of
material etc. are liable to be rejected.

3.09 DRAWINGS :
 9
Spec-DCDB BN-901600xxx

In addition to any other drawings which the bidder may like to enclose to explain the merits of his
proposal, the following drawings shall be enclosed with the bid:-

i) Principal dimensional details of each DC board panel.

ii) Front and rear views with circuit breakers relays and devices positions marked.

iii) Elementary wiring and schematic diagram of all circuits.

iv) Foundation details.

The Bidder shall be responsible for any discrepancies / errors or omissions in the drawings and
other particulars supplied whether such drawings and particulars have been approved by
purchaser or not.

The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved drawings and
no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the Purchaser. All manufacturing
and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the drawing shall be
at the Supplier's risk.

Approval of drawings/work by Purchaser shall not relieve the Supplier of his responsibility and
liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the latest revision of applicable
standards, rules and codes of practices.

3.10 PACKING AND FORWARDING:

The equipment shall be packed in crates suitable for vertical/horizontal transport, as the case may be
and suitable to withstand handling during transport and outdoor storage during transit. The supplier
shall be responsible for any damage to the equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate
packing and handling. The easily damageable material shall be carefully packed and marked with
the appropriate caution symbols. Wherever necessary proper arrangement for lifting such as lifting
hooks etc. shall be provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall be
supplied by the supplier without any extra cost.

Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the following
information:

i. Name of consignee.

ii. Details of consignment.

iii. Destination.

iv. Total Weight of consignment.

v. Handling and unpacking instructions.

vi. Bill of material indicating contents of each package.

3.11 ILLUSTRATED AND PRINTED LITERATURE :

Four copies of each of the descriptive and printed literature in respect of all the MCCB's DC earth
faults and other relays ,AC/DC changeover circuit voltmeter, voltmeter selector switches ,
fuses etc. proposed to be used shall be supplied along with the BID. A descriptive note indicating
the salient points of the scheme offered shall also accompany with the BID.
 10
Spec-DCDB BN-901600xxx

3.12 CO-ORDINATION:

The DC control board shall be suitably fabricated to match and arranged to form one
continuous board with the existing panels at substation wherever mentioned.

Annexure-1

BILL OF MATERIAL AND LIST OF EQUIPMENTS TO BE MOUNTED ON 110V DC

CONTROL AND DISTRIBUTION BOARDS.

These shall be equipped as under but not limited to the equipment listed:

NINE Double pole moulded case air circuit breaker quick action load break type rated for 25 Amps.
and labeled as under :
 11
Spec-DCDB BN-901600xxx

1. 132 KV Feeder & Bus coupler C&R PANELS- J5,J6

2. 132 KV Transformer C&R PANELS - J7,J8
3. 33 KV C&R PANELS- J11, J12
4. ANNUNCIATION,132 KV SIDE - J21,J22
5. ANNUNCIATION, 33 KV SIDE- J25,J26
6. LT & RTCC PANELS - J31,J32
7. PLCC/SLDC- J35,J36
8. EMERGENCY LIGHT - J41,J42
9. SPARE - J45,J46

One Double pole AC Power contactors for control room emergency lighting(230V AC).

EIGHTEEN indicating lamps/LED'S (Group of four) MCCB ON (RED) & OFF (GREEN)
indication.

One moving coil ammeter for load current, class-I accuracy 0-20 Amps. (size 144x144mm) with
external shunt.

One moving coil DC voltmeter, class -I accuracy, 0-150 V (size 144 x 144 mm).

One Selector Switch for the voltmeter (Four positions).

One DC under voltage relay with alarm contacts.

One DC earth fault relay with alarm contacts.

One AC no volt relay with alarm contacts.

One SET of Annunciation scheme operating on 110V DC supply for audio visual alarm of the
following along with accept, reset & test push buttons with facia inscription as below:

a) DC earth fault.
b) AC supply fail.
c) MCCB Trip (common for 9 MCCB's).

ONE SET Annunciation scheme operating on 230V AC supply for audio visual alarm of the
following along with accept, reset & test push buttons with facia inscription as below:
a) DC under voltage.

NOTE: Please refer to clause [Link] of volume-II of specification for requirements of functioning
of annunciation scheme.
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MAKES OF EQUIPMENTS FOR 220V & 110V DC CONTROL &
DISTRIBUTION BOARD

S. ITEM PROPOSED APROVED MAKES

NO.
1 MCCB SPACEAGE/LSIS(LG)/L&T/HAVELLS/SIEMENS/C&S
2 POWER ABB/GE/L&T/CGL/ SIEMENS/ HAVELLS
CONTACTOR
3 INDICATING DAV/JVS/EASSUN/CONNECTWELL/ALSTOM/TEKNIC/VAISHNO/
LAMPS/LEDs SECO/ CRAFTECH/SIEMENS/DAV/ DEEPAL/ VENSON/ L&T/
CRAFTECH
4 MOVING COIL AE/IMP/MECO
AMMETER
5 MOVING COIL AE/IMP/MECO
VOLTMETER
 12
Spec-DCDB BN-901600xxx

6 SELECTOR SWITCH KAYCEE/RECOM/SWITRON/HEMAADRI

7 ANNUNCIATOR ALAN/JVS/MINILAC/PRADEEP/ INSTAALARM/ SECO/ PROTON/
SCHEME ACCORD/ YASHMUN/ EXPO-FYN
8 AC HOOTER ALAN/JVS/INDUSTRIAL HOOTER/ SECO/ PROTON/ ACCORD/
CRAFTECH / TARGET
9 DC HOOTER ALAN/JVS/INDUSTRIAL HOOTER / SECO/PROTON/ ACCORD/
CRAFTECH
10 DOOR SWITCH ESSEN/KAYCEE/ CONNECTWELL

11 THERMOSTAT TEMPRAL/AIREX/ IERISH-EGO

12 HEATER KAYCEE/ELTER/AIREX/SOFIA/ PRAVEEN

Note:-
In case the successful bidders establish to the Satisfaction of purchaser that specified makes of
particular item are not available then other make shall also be acceptable if it is of valid "ISI
MARK" or type tested for which bidders shall furnish attested Photostat copies of ISI certificate /
type test report confirming to relevant IS. The type test report should not older than 7 years as on
date of bid opening.

Schedule-GTP

SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 220V DCDB AND 110V DCDB

FURNISHED BY THE PARTICIPATING FIRMS AGAINST BN- 901600XXXX
1. 220V 110V
Moulded case Circuit Breaker :
DCDB DCDB
i. Make.
ii. Type and rating.
iii. Rated DC Voltage.
iv. Rated DC breaking capacity in KA.
v. Current setting range in Amp.
vi. Type of tripping unit.
vii. Whether MCCB is trip free.
viii. If suitable for flush mounting.
 13
Spec-DCDB BN-901600xxx

ix. Overload protection.

x. Short circuit protection.
xi. Whether contacts for alarm indication provided.
xii. Number of Auxiliary contacts
2. POWER CONTRACTOR FOR AC/DC CHANGE
OVER :
i. Make.
ii. Rating
iii. Auxiliary contacts available.
a Normally open.
b Normally closed.
iv. Material of contacts.
v. Rated breaking capacity.
3. D.C. EARTH FAULT RELAY :
i. Maker's name.
ii. Type.
iii. Range of setting available. Whether in steps or continuously
variable
iv. Min. operating current & time.
v. No. of auxiliary contacts.
vi. Whether operation indicator provided.
vii. Type of base and mounting.
4. DC UNDER VOLTAGE RELAY :
i. Maker's name.
ii. Type.
iii. Setting value.
iv. Minimum drop off/ pickup voltage.
v. Auxiliary contacts and rating.
vi. Whether operation indicator provided.
vii. Type of reset.
viii. Type of case and mounting.
5. AC NO VOLT RELAY :
i. Maker's name.
ii. Type.
iii. Range setting.
iv. Operating range voltage.
v. Auxiliary contacts and rating.
vi. Whether operation indicator provided.
vii. Type of reset.
viii. Type of case and mounting.
6. Bus Bar:
i Whether Main bus dimensions is of 25 x6 mm Tinned
copper flat with coloured PVC sleeves.
ii Whether Segregated bus dimensions is of 25 x [Link]
copper flat with coloured PVC sleeves
7. Cable size used for connecting :
 14
Spec-DCDB BN-901600xxx

i. MCCB circuit.
ii. Alarm circuit.
[Link] /control circuit.
8. Fuses for control circuit.
i. Make.
ii. Type
9. Indicating Lamps :
i. Type- LED/FILAMENT
ii. Make.
10. Panel construction :
i. Size of panel.
ii. Degree of protection.
[Link] of sheet steel.
iv. Sheet steel thickness.
11. Whether 10% spare connectors provided in terminal boards,
mounted in the board.
12. Whether Annunciation scheme confirms the requirement of
clause [Link]

NOTE: The content and order of particulars of the GTP shall not be changed by bidder.

(Signature)
Name & Designation with seal
Technical Spec for LT Panel

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 400 AMPS. L.T. SWITCHGEAR & CONTROL PANELS

1.01 SCOPE:

This specification covers the design manufacture/fabrication testing before dispatch

and delivery of low tension switchgear panels to be erected, tested, commissioned
(ETC) at 132 kV Grid sub stations in Rajasthan. The switch boards shall be complete
in every respect for the functions designated.

1.02 STANDARDS:

Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification, the rating as well as

performance and testing of the equipments and their accessories and fittings shall
conform to the latest revisions and amendments of the following standards:

(i) Factory build assemblies of switchgear & : IS:8623

control gear
(ii) Circuit breaker : IS:13947(part-2)1993
(iii) Fuse combination unit : IS:13947(part-3) 1993
(iv) Fuse : IS:13703 (part-1)
(v) Current Transformer : IS:2705
(vi) Indicating Instruments : IS:1248
(vii) Integrating Instruments : IS:13779

Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative National or

International Standards, which ensure equal or better performance than the
standards mentioned above, will also be acceptable. When the equipment offered by
the bidder conforms to other standards salient points of difference between
standards adopted and the standards specified in this specification shall be clearly
brought out. Four copies of such standards with authentic translation in English shall
be furnished alongwith the offer.

1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENT:

The switch boards are to be complete in every respect for the functions designated
and to the entire satisfaction of the purchaser. It is required that the supplier in
accepting the contract, agrees to furnish all apparatus, appliances and material,
whether mentioned specifically or not, but which may be found necessary to
complete the requirements implied in this specification without extra charges. The
bidder is also required to furnish all the details, drawings, type test reports, technical
particulars and anything else, which facilitate thorough analysis of the equipment
offered by him. 400 Amp. L.T. switchgear panels shall be equipped as per the
detailed equipment specified at enclosed Appendix-I.

1.0.4 PANELS:

The approximate over all dimensions of the panels shall be:

a) Height. : 2312 mm with base channel of 102 mm

b) Depth. : 700 mm
c) Width. : 1600 mm

The panels shall be fabricated out of CRCA sheet steel and shall be assembled
together to form a continuous switch board. The panels shall be dust and vermin

1
Technical Spec for LT Panel

proof and protected from the ingress of moisture. All openings and outlets in the door
shall be machine made and shall be free from burrs, weld runs be ground smooth. All
sheet surfaces shall be free from dents and hammer marks. The front panel, base
frame and door frame shall be manufactured from CRCA sheet steel 10 SWG (3mm)
thick, while the side panels roof and doors shall be manufactured out of 14 SWG
(2mm) thick CRCA sheet steel. The thickness of the sheet steel used shall be clearly
stated in the bid. The enclosure shall provide a minimum degree of protection
equivalent to IP-51 in accordance to IS:[Link] general arrangement of the panel
shall be as shown inenclosed drawings.

1.05 PAINTING:

i) All sheet steel work shall be phosphate in accordance with IS:6005 code for
practice for phosphating iron and steel.

ii) Oil, grease, dirt and swarf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning.

iii) Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by
washing with running water rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and drying.

iv) After phosphating thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water
followed by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying.

v) The phosphate coating shall be sealed with application of two coats of ready
mixed, stoved type zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be "flash dried"
while second coat shall be stoved.

vi) After application of primer two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be
applied, each coat shall be applied followed by stoving the second coat shall be
applied after inspection of first coat of painting. The exterior colour of paint shall
be as per shade 631 of IS-5. The interior of the panel shall be of white colour
and the base frame shall be painted black.

vii) Each of coat of primer and finished paint shall be of slightly different shade to
enable inspection of painting.

viii) Incase the bidder proposes to follow any other established painting procedure
like electrostatic painting, the procedure shall be submitted alongwith the bid for
purchaser's review and approval.

1.06 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

The air circuit breaker shall be of horizontal triple pole totally enclosed fully
interlocked pattern, independent manual spring operated type, pad locking
arrangement shall be provided on the breaker to lock it in its OFF position. It should
be suitable for 500 Volts, 3 phase AC 50 Hz system and shall have rupturing capacity
as per the schedule of equipment. The ACB shall be with drawable type. The spring
charging arrangement shall be motor operated, however additional manual spring
charging arrangement shall also be provided.

The circuit breaker shall be capable to protect the system against short circuit, over
current & earth fault through inverse over current and earth fault relays. Provision for
manual closing & tripping by hand should also be provided. Facility to close and trip
the breaker electrically through T-N-C. Switch shall also be provided. The breaker

2
Technical Spec for LT Panel

should be of trip free mechanism type. Mechanical ON/OFF indicator shall also be
provided for indicating the position of the breaker.

All current carrying copper contacts on the breaker shall be silver plated. The circuit
breakers shall fully comply with the requirement of IS:13947 part-(2) with latest
amendment thereof and shall be suitable for continuous operation under the climatic
conditions.

1.07 BUS BARS:

The bus bars will be of vertical copper strip, the phases being in horizontal
configuration and shall be suitable for carrying the rated current continuously under
the climatic conditions. The Bus Bar shall be provided in Top chamber horizontally
and a clearance of 75mm is to be provided on both sides of the bus bar as indicated
in the enclosed drawing. Facility for extending the Bus bars and connecting to
adjacent panels shall be provided on both side. The openings on the side of the
panels shall be closed with gasketted blanking plates. The bus bar chamber shall be
designed to allow easy interchangeability of fuse switch units. Provisions shall be
made for future extensions of panels on both sides. All bus bars shall be of solid
construction and shall be insulated with PVC sleeving / taping. The bus bars shall
be supported by non hygroscopic insulation material with high dielectric and
mechanical strength and shall be supported rigidly. The bus bar coupling clamps
used for connecting up the bus bar of the adjacent sections of bus, may be of bolted
type.

1.08 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

a) The combination units comprises with MCCB of appropriate ratings The

offered Triple pole with neutral MCCB'S shall conform to the relevant Indian Standard
IS:61429-1 & 2, 2004and shall be suitable for operation in the climatic conditions,
MCCB shall be supplied complete in all respect including all standard accessories
used for their satisfactory operation and as detailed in the specification.
b) The MCCB's shall have dust tight cases and shall be suitable for flush
mounting and shall be free from errors due to change in ambient temperature and
shall be able to withstand maximum possible electrical/mechanical stresses likely to
be encountered in service. The insulating case of the MCCB shall be made of high
strength heat resistant and flame retardant thermosetting insulating material. The
MCCB shall be trip free.

1.09 TERMINALS:

All the terminals shall be provided with adequate electrical contacts for appropriate
size of aluminium / copper conductor and bimetallic washers if necessary for
aluminium cables.

1.10 CABLE ENTRIES:

The cable entries for the circuit breaker and fuse combination unit shall be through
cable glands, the number and sizes of cable glands have been indicated in the
schedule of equipments. All the cable glands shall be suitable for PVC cable. Bottom
plate of 4 mm thickness shall be provided for making the base dust tight. Cable gland
plates of 4 mm thickness shall be provided on this bottom plate as per general
arrangement drawing and fitted with the specified number of cable glands.

3
Technical Spec for LT Panel

1.11 LIMITS OF TEMPERATURE RISE:

The maximum temperature rise for various parts under the rated conditions shall not
exceed the limits of temperature specified in the relevant ISS/BSS/IEC.

1.12 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:

The current transformers shall be of double core ring type and comply with the
requirements of IS:2705. The accuracy class of CT shall be of 0.5 for metering and
5P10 for protection. The rated burden of the CT shall be 15VA for each core. The
insulation level shall not be less than the value indicated for the circuit breaker.
Alternatively two single core CTs one for metering and other for protection may also
be acceptable.

1.13 WIRING:

L.T. Panel shall be completely factory wired ready for connections to the
incoming/outgoing cables. All central wiring shall neatly run and be properly
supported. The terminals shall be of adequate current rating and size to suit
individual feeder requirements. The colour code of the wiring shall be as per the
latest edition of IS:11353.

1.14 (a) INDICATING INSTRUMENTS:

The indicating instruments shall be of reputed make and accuracy class of 1 to be

specified by the bidder. The arrangement of the instrument shall be logical. The
instruments shall be flush mounted and shall comply with the latest edition of IS:
1248.

(b) INTEGRATING INSTRUMENTS:

The integrating instruments shall be Static of reputed make and accuracy class of
1.0 to be specified by the bidder. The instruments shall be flush mounted and shall
comply with the latest conditions of IS: 13779.

1.15 DRAWINGS:

The following drawing should be furnished:

i). Detailed arrangement/layout drawing showing each equipment being

incorporated in the panel and the dimensions (also enclosed with bid
documents )
ii). Schematic diagram.
iii). Wiring diagram of connections with line diagram of power flows, bus bars,
metering protection & indicating instruments.
iv). Curves to show the discrimination in operating times between the incoming and
outgoing feeders. There is to be clear discrimination under worst conditions so
that the incoming breaker does not trip in case of fault on the outgoing feeder.

Apart from above write-up/publication of equipment/panel shall be furnished.

The bidder shall be responsible for any discrepancies/errors or omissions in the

drawings and other particulars supplied whether such drawings and particulars have
been approved by purchaser or not.

4
Technical Spec for LT Panel

The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the
Purchaser. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment
prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at the Supplier's risk.

Approval of drawings/work by Purchaser shall not relieve the Supplier of his

responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the
latest revision of applicable standards, rules and codes of practices.

1.16 MAKES OF BOUGHT OUT ITEMS:

Make of each components/bought out items shall be clearly and invariably indicated
in the GTP / bill of material.
Further only following makes of bought out items are acceptable to the Department:

1) Air circuit breaker - Schneider-CG / Control & Switchgear / ABB /

Alstom OR GE / L&T / SPACEAGE
2) MCCB - SPACEAGE / LSIS(LG) / L&T / HAVELLS /
SIEMENS / C&S
3) CT - Continental / Mehru / Perfect
4) Relay - JVS / ABB / Alstom / SIEMENS / ER / AVANA
5) Indicating instruments - AE / IMP / MECO
6) Integrating instruments - SEMS / L&T / ABB / SATEC / RISHABH /
ACCORD / HPL / POWERTRAC
7) Indicating lamps/LEDs - DAV / JVS / EASSUN / CONNECTWELL /
ALSTOM / TEKNIC / VAISHNO / SECO /
CRAFTECH
8) Annunciator scheme - Pradeep / JVS / Minilac / Instalarm / ALAN /
SECO / PROTON / ACCORD
9) Selector switch - Switron / Kaycee / Recom / HEMAADRI
10) Control Switch - Alstom / Recom / Switron / Kaycee / HEMAADRI
11) Hooter - Alan / JVS / Industrial Hooter / Target / ACCORD /
PROTON / SECO / CRAFTECH
12) Fuse HRC g-II - GE / Havells / C&S

1.17 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS/OTHER INFORMATION:

Guaranteed technical particulars as per Schedule-GTP shall be furnished.

1.18 INSPECTION AND TESTING:

The following tests shall be got conducted in presence of purchaser's representative.

The supplier will have to furnish valid calibration certificates of all testing equipments
issued from Govt./Govt. approved agency to purchaser representative before
offering the material for purchaser inspection.

i). Routine tests as per IS: 8623 shall be carried out in the presence of purchaser's
representative.
ii). The panels should also be physically examined for dimensional check up, sheet
thickness & Bill of material as per purchase order and drawing.
iii). Operational test for Air Circuit Breaker and Relay.
iv). Firm shall also submit manufacturer's test certificates for ACB, KWH meter, CT,
Relay, ammeter etc., to be supplied with the panel.

5
Technical Spec for LT Panel

v). The sampling plan shall be 25% (Nearest higher whole number ) of the offerwd
lot for established suppliers and 100% of the offered lot for un-established
suppliers.

1.19 TYPE TEST:

All the material offered, shall be fully type tested as per the relevant standards. The
type test certificate should not be older than 10 (ten) years as on the date of opening
of technical bid. The bidder must furnish following type test reports of similar rating
and design.

LIST OF TYPE TESTS:

(a) Temperature rise test.

(b) Short circuit test on bus bar fitted in the panel.
(c) Degree of enclosure protection equivalent to IP-51& IP-55(category-2) in
accordance with IS: 13947(Part-1) and IS/IEC: 60947-1& 2, 2004 on any panel
manufactured.

1.20 PACKING AND FORWARDING:

The equipment shall be packed in crates suitable for vertical/horizontal transport, as

the case may be and suitable to withstand handling during transport and outdoor
storage during transit. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the
equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate packing and handling. The
easily damageable material shall be carefully packed and marked with the
appropriate caution symbols. Wherever necessary proper arrangement for lifting
such as lifting hooks etc. shall be provided. Any material found short inside the
packing cases shall be supplied by the supplier without any extra cost.

Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the

following information:

a) Name of consignee.
b) Details of consignment.
c) Destination.
d) Total Weight of consignment.
e) Handling and unpacking instructions.
f) Bill of material indicating contents of each package.

1.21 LABLES:

Engraved lables shall be provided on all the incoming and outgoing

compartments. The exact legend to be engraved is furnished in appendix
enclosed herewith. It shall carry the information duly engraved/punched as
detailed hereunder:-

(i) Manufacturer’s Name.

(ii) [Link]/SE(Proc-II)/Ex. EN(VI)/A8/BN-……../D----- Dt……..

(iii)[Link]. of LT Switchgear and control panel

(iv) Month of dispatch.

6
Technical Spec for LT Panel

(v) Rating of LT Switchgear and control panel.

(vi) Contact e-mail address and Toll free No. for after sales service.

7
Technical Spec for LT Panel

APPENDIX-I
SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT FOR 400 AMP. L.T. SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROL
PANELS.

A) The LT switchgear panel shall be equipped as under:-

1) Incoming circuit consisting of the following:
(i) One ACB, Withdrawable type, triple pole 400Amp. with
interlocking arrangement, suitable for 415Volts AC, 50 cycle
per second having a rupturing capacity of 25 MVA at 415 volts
with spring charged closing mechanism. Facility shall be
provided for charging the spring with motor (240V AC, 50Hz)
as well as with manual spring charging handle, which shall be
supplied with the ACB. The ACB shall have the provision for
closing & tripping manually using push buttons and also
electrically using T-N-C switch.
(ii) Mechanical ON/OFF indicators.
(iii) One Shunt trip coil 110 V DC.
(iv) One closing coil 110 V DC.
(v) One Trip-Neutral-Close control switch.
(vi) One motor operated spring charging mechanism suitable for
220V AC, 50Hz. Facility of manual spring charging shall also
be provided.
(vii) One 8way auxiliary switch with 4NO and 4NC contacts.
(viii) One red lamp for ON indication.
(ix) One green lamp for OFF indication.
(x) One white lamp for tripped indication.
(xi) One Amber lamp for trip circuit healthy check alongwith push
button.
2. Bus Bars consisting of the following:
(i) One set of 3 phase 400 Amp. rating insulated copper bus bars.
(ii) One Neutral 200 Amp. rating insulated copper bus bars.
(iii) One bolted type neutral link.

3. Three ring type double core current transformers having 400/5-5Amp.

Ratio for protection &metering. Alternatively six single core CTs three for
metering and three for protection may also be acceptable. Class of
accuracy for protection shallbe5P10 and for metering 0.5.

4. One triple pole IDMT (2xover current+1x earth fault) self powered relay,
each O/C & E/F unit with HS element. Relay shall be draw out type. If
not, separate test terminal block shall be provided for testing the relay
without taking it out of service. Static/Numerical earth fault and over
current relays shall also be acceptable.

5. One 3 phase 4 wire CT operated Static KWH meter of class 1 accuracy

suitable for unbalanced load. (Flush mounting type) with test terminal
block.

6. One 144mm square flush mounting MISC ammeter scaled 0-200A/400

Amps. accuracy class1.

7. One ammeter selector switch.

8. One 144 mm square flush mounting MISC voltmeter scale0-500 Volts

accuracy class 1.

8
Technical Spec for LT Panel

9. One voltmeter selector switch. (6 position).

10. One no-volt relay (415 V AC) connected to the bus bars. (Fixed setting
between 70-80% of rated AC voltage)

11. Annunciation scheme for audio-visual alarm of AC supply Failure

alongwith push button for accepting the audio signal & failure indication
lamp with blue lens, suitable for 110 V DC.

12. One set of cable glands with cable lugs suitable for the reception of 2
Nos. of 3.5 core 300 [Link] PVC cables aluminium conductor PVC
cables & 2 Nos. of 2 core 2.5 [Link] copper conductor PVC cables.

(B) OUTGOING CIRCUITS OF EACH 400 AMPS. L.T. SWITCHGEAR AND

CONTROL PANEL CONSISTS OF FUSE SWITCH WITH HRC FUSES AS UNDER:
(i) One triple pole quick make quick break double break per Phase pullout
type fuse switch units 200 Amps. With neutral link and with HRC fuses
of 200 Amps with cable glands suitable for 2x3.5 core 185 [Link]
aluminium conductor PVC cable with a set of cable lugs.
The outgoing supply from this fuse switch unit shall be connected
through CT of ratio 200/5A & accuracy class 0.5 to a 3 phase 4 wire CT
operated static KWH meter of class 1 accuracy through test terminal
block. These CT', KWH Meter and TTB are also in the scope of supply.
LABEL: COLONY LIGHTING.

(ii) 3 Nos. triple pole quick make quick break MCCB 63 A with neutral link
and 6 Nos. cable glands suitable for 4 core 6 [Link] Copper conductor
PVC cable and 24 Nos. of cable lugs.
LABELS:
a) 132 KV CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
b) 33/11 KV CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
c) SPARE.

(iii) 8 Nos. triple pole quick make quick break MCCB 32 Amps. With neutral
link and 16Nos. cable glands suitable for 4 core 6 [Link] copper
conductor PVC cable and 64 Nos. of cable lugs.
LABELS:
a) YARD LIGHTING.
b) CONTROL ROOM LIGHTING.
c) 132/33/11 KV TRANSFORMERS.
d) TUBE WELL.
e) BATTERY CHARGER 110 V.
f) BATTERY CHARGER 48 V.
g) Spare.
h) Spare.

(iv) 2 Nos. single phase two pole quick make quick break MCCB 32 Amps.
with neutral link and 6 Nos. cable glands suitable for 2 Core 2.5 [Link]
copper conductor PVC cable and 12 Nos. of copper lugs.
LABELS:
a) CONTROL & RELAY PANELS
b) DC & RTCC PANELS.

9
Technical Spec for LT Panel

Schedule-GTP

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 400A, [Link] & CONTROL

PANELS

S. No. PARTICULARS 400 AMP.

1.0 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
a) Type make designation
b) No. of poles
c) Service voltage
d) Normal current
e)i) current carrying capacity at site conditions
ii) Temp. rise
f) Breaking capacity (MVA)
g) Short time current
h) [Link] break/pole
i) Type of main contacts
j) Type of arcing contacts
k) Working voltage of shunt
l) trip coil & VA burden
m) Opening time
n) Make time
o) Type test certificate (enclose copies) (specify type
tests conducted)
p) Drawing no.(enclose copies)
q) Details of motor operated spring charge mechanism
r) Details of short circuit release
2.0 STATIC METER
a) Type & Make.
b) 3 Phase 4 wire measurement
c) CT Operated static
d) Class of accuracy
e) Relevant standard
3.0 LT CTs
a) Type & Make
b) Ratio
c) Class of accuracy
d) Nos. core
e) Burden
4.0 MCCB
a) Make, Type & Rating
b) Rated Voltage.
c) Rated breaking capacity in KA.
d) Current setting range in Amp.
e) Type of tripping unit.
Whether MCCB is trip free.
f) If suitable for flush mounting.
g) Overload protection.
h) Short circuit protection.
i) Whether contacts for alarm indication provided
j) Number of Auxiliary contacts
k) Type of interlocking arrangement
l) Relevant Standard

10
Technical Spec for LT Panel

S. No. PARTICULARS 400 AMP.

m) Normal current carrying capacity
n) Short circuit rating
o) Characteristic of fuses
p) ISI Marked
5.0 INDICATING METERS
a) Type & Make
b) Size
c) Class of accuracy
d) Relevant Standard
6.0 DIMENSIONS OF THE PANEL
a) Width
b) Depth
c) Height
d) Gauge of CRCA sheet steel
e) Colour
7.0 BUS BAR
a) Material
b) Size
c) Current density (Max.)
8.0 TERMINAL
a) Cross section
b) Component of the material
c) Suitable for fixing of aluminium cable of size

11
 75 75 150 100
150

B US B A R CABLE
GLAND CABLE CABLE
PLATE
GLAND GLAND
(200MM X
200MM) PLATE PLATE
FOR I/C (400MM (400MM

700
A V
CABLES X X
200 AMP 200MM) 200MM)
AS VS
Technical Spec for LT Panel

FOR O/G FOR O/G

a b CABLES CABLES

63 AMP 63 AMP
A A 150
KWH KWH
I/C COLONY c a 1600

63 AMP 32 AMP
NOTES:
SPACE FOR b c 1. ALL OPENING SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH HINGED COVERS
CONTROL SWITCHES WHICH SHALL BE FITTED WITH CHANNEL RUBBER / NEOPRENE

2210
& INDICATING 32 AMP 32 AMP

12
GASKETS ALL AROUND AND LATCHES SUFFICIENTLY STRONG TO
LAMPS HOLD THEM IN PLACE WHEN CLOSED.
ACB d e 2. THE TERMINALS FOR OUTGOING CIRCUITS HAVING
OPENING TO BE PROVIDED INDIVIDUAL SWITCHES SHALL BE BROUGHT IN THE CABLE
FOR MECHANICAL ON/OFF 32 AMP 32 AMP COMPARTMENT MARKED 'A' AND SHROUDED FOR SAFETY.
INDICATORS, SPRING
CHARGING FACILITY & f g
MANUAL ON/OFF
A A
PUSH BUTTONS 32 AMP 32 AMP
A - OUTGOING CABLES COMPARTMENTS
h
O/C & E/F RALAY
32 AMP BLANK

a b
TTB TTB 32 AMP 32 AMP
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF EQUIPMENT
SPN SPN TO BE PROVIDED IN 400 AMP L.T. PANEL
FOR 132 KV GSS.
102

1600
 Tech Spec -Control & Power Cables

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR UN-ARMOURED NON-FRLS PVC

INSULATED MULTICORE CONTROL CABLES.

1.0 SCOPE:

The specification covers design, manufacturing, testing at the manufacturer’s works,

inspection, packing and delivery to the site of 1100 V grade multi core, each core containing
appropriate numbers of strands of annealed bare Copper conductor, PVC (Type-A) insulated
and PVC sheathed (Type-ST-1), Un-armoured NON-FRLS Control cables.

1.1 PVC INSULATED UN-ARMOURED NON-FRLS CONTROL CABLES:

The cables are required at various 132 kV Grid Sub-Stations for the control and
supervision of outdoor/indoor switchgears and power transformers including instrumentation
metering, indication and alarm on the control panels and electrical inter-locking between high
voltage equipments. With a view to achieve these multifarious requirements, the cables will
be laid between individual outdoor equipments and from there to control relay and other
allied panels located indoor. The reliability and long life of the control cables is of paramount
importance. All the control cables offered against the specification should be suitable for
climatic conditions prevailing at site.

2.0 STANDARDS FOR UN-ARMOURED NON-FRLS CONTROL CABLES:

1100V Grade multi core, each core containing seven strands of annealed bare Copper
conductor, PVC (Type-A) insulated and PVC sheathed (Type-ST-1), Un-armoured NON-
FRLS control cables, shall conform in all respects to the following relevant ISS with latest
editions and amendments.

[Link]. Standard Ref. No. Title

1. IS-1554/(Pt.-I)/1988 with latest PVC insulated (Heavy duty) Electric
amendment up to date. Cables for working voltage up to and
including 1100 Volts.
2. IS-8130/1984 with latest amendment Conductors for insulated Electric Cables
up to date. and flexible cords.
3. IS-5831/1984 with latest amendment PVC Insulation and sheath of Electric
up to date. Cables.
4. IS-3961/(Pt.-II)/1967 with latest Current ratings for cables:
amendment up to date PVC insulated & PVC Sheathed heavy-
duty cables.
5. IS-10418with latest amendment up to Drums for Electric Cables.
date.
6. IS-10810 with latest amendment up Methods of tests for cables.
to date.

3.0 GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA:

The Cables shall normally be laid in masonry/RCC trenches whether inside or outside
the control room building in groups in tier formation or otherwise, but at some places the
cables may be laid direct in ground or in air. The cable may even be laid in vertical

1
 Tech Spec -Control & Power Cables

formation and in steep gradients at some locations. The cables shall be physically strong to
withstand rough installation hazards and thermal /electrical/physical stresses during operation
under specified climatic conditions.

4.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES:

1100 Volts grade, multi-core, Un-Armoured NON-FRLS, PVC Type-A insulated

suitable for maximum rated conductor temp. of 70° Celsius, seven strands Annealed bare
copper conductor, PVC sheathed (Type-ST-1), control cables shall conform to the
requirements imposed in IS: 1554 (Part- I)/1988 and its latest amendments up to date. The
cable shall be suitable for use where combination of ambient temperature and temperature
rise due to load results in conductor temperature not exceeding 70° Celsius under normal
operation and 160° Celsius under short circuit conditions.
All the control cables shall bear ISI certification marks as per IS: 1554 (Part-I)/1988
with latest amendment up to date. The cables shall have PVC fillers to provide circular
cross-section before the inner sheath is applied. The fillers should be suitable for operating
temperature of the cable compatible with the insulating material.

4.1 CONDUCTOR:
The conductor shall be stranded (7 wires per core) annealed, non-compacted, un-tinned
high conductivity electrolytic copper conforming to class-II of IS: 8130 /1964 & IS: 613
/1964 with latest amendment up to date.

4.2 INSULATION:
The insulation shall be Polyvinyl Chloride compound (PVC) conforming to
requirement of Type-A compound of IS: 5831/1984 with latest amendment up to date. The
insulation shall be applied by pressure extrusion method. The insulation shall be applied in
such way that it fits closely on conductor and it shall be possible to remove it without damage
to the conductor. The thickness and tolerance on thickness of insulation shall be as per clause
9.2 & 9.3 of IS: 1554 (Part-I)/1988 with latest amendment up to date.

4.3 INNER SHEATH:

The inner sheath shall be of non-Hygroscopic, Polyvinyl Chloride compound (PVC)
conforming to requirements of IS: 5831/1984 with latest amendment up to date for type ST-1.
The inner sheath shall be softer than the insulation. The inner sheath shall be applied by
extrusion method & it shall be so applied that it fits closely on laid up cores and it shall be
possible to remove it without damage to the insulation. The thickness and tolerance on
thickness of inner sheath shall be as per clause 12.3 of IS: 1554 (Part-I)/1988 with latest
amendment up to date. The inner sheath shall be of colour of black.

4.4 FILLERS :
The fillers shall be of non-Hygroscopic, Polyvinyl Chloride compound (PVC)
conforming to requirements of IS: 5831/1984 with latest amendment up to date. The material
of fillers shall be softer than the insulation. It shall be ensured that the shape is as circular as
possible. The fillers should be suitable for operating temperature of the cable compatible with
the insulating material.

4.5 OUTER SHEATH:

The outer sheath shall be of Polyvinyl Chloride compound (PVC) conforming to
requirements of IS: 5831/1984 with latest amendment up to date for type ST-1. The outer

2
 Tech Spec -Control & Power Cables

sheath shall be applied by extrusion method. The thickness and tolerance on thickness of outer
sheath shall be as per clause 14.4of IS: 1554 (Part-I)/1988with latest amendment up to date.
The outer sheath shall be embossed at the interval of one metre length as per clause no. 7.0 of
this specification.

5.0 COLOUR SCHEME FOR INDENTIFICATION OF CORES:

The Colour of core insulation upto 5 Cores shall be as per clause 10.1 of IS-1554 (Part-
I) 1988 and for 6 Cores & above, cores shall be identified by the colour as per clause 10.1(f)
of IS-1554 ( Part-I) 1988 & its latest amendment up to date with Grey Colour base and also
individual cores of cable containing two or more cores shall be identified by different
colouring of PVC insulation in accordance with clause 10.0 of IS: 1554 (Part- I)/1988 with
latest amendment up to date. However, the PVC sheath may be black or grey. The colour
coatings employed in the formation of the cables for individual cores and sheath shall be
indicated in the bid.

6.0 LAYING UP OF CORES:

The cores shall be laid up together with the suitable right hand lay. The interstices
shall be filled with non-hygroscopic, PVC material.

7.0 EMBOSSING:

To enable identification of control cable the word RRVPNL, manufacturer’s name or

mark, BN No.& Year of manufacture, Type-Non-FRLS PVC , Electric voltage grade and
cable size shall be embossed on the outer sheath of cable at the interval of one meter length.

8.0 MARKING:

Every cable drum shall be clearly marked with indelible ink or with suitable weather
resistant paint and shall bear the following particulars:
a) Manufacturer’s name, brand name or trademark, if any.
b) ISI certification mark.
c) Customer’s name
d) Type of cable and voltage grade
e) Number of cores
f) Cable size
g) Drum number
h) Purchase order/Bid No.
i) Gross weight of the drum
j) Tare weight of the drum
k) Length of the cable on the drum
l) Direction of rotation of the drum (by means of an arrow).
m) Country of manufacture
n) Year of manufacture

9.0 CURRENT RATINGS:

The current ratings of the control cables shall correspond to the values recommended
as per IS: 3961 (Part- II)/1967 and its latest amendments up to date.

3
 Tech Spec -Control & Power Cables

10.0 LATENT DEFECTS ERRORS & OMISSIONS:

10.1 Any cable or part thereof that may develop defects during performance guarantee
period shall be promptly replaced by the supplier free of charge.

10.2 If the operation of the cable after installation during guarantee period proves to be
unsatisfactory, the purchaser shall have the right to operate the bank guarantee(s) until
defective articles are taken out of service, without loss of injury to the purchaser & correction
of latent defects, errors & omissions.

11.0 TESTS & INSPECTION:

11.1 TYPE TEST:

All Cables shall comply with the requirement of type tests as laid down in IS-1554
(Part-I)/1988 with its latest amendments up to date excluding optional tests. The purchaser
may at his option insist the manufacturer to carry out these tests also in presence of
purchaser’s representative at their works. In case the supplier would like to charge extra for
the type tests, the same should be indicated clearly in the bid. In case the offer does not
clearly lay down the extra charges for the tests it would be presumed that the same are
already included in the quoted price.
The details of type test are as under:

a) Test on Conductor
1. Annealing test (if applicable)
2. Conductor resistance test.
b) Tests for thickness of insulation and sheath.
c) Physical tests for insulation and outer sheath.
1. Tensile strength and elongation at break.
2. Aging in air oven.
3. Shrinkage test.
4. Hot deformation.
5. Loss of mass in air oven.
6. Heat shock test.
7. Thermal stability.
d) Insulation resistance test.
e) High voltage test (Water immersion test).
f) High voltage test at room temperature.
g) Flammability tests:

The purchaser reserves the right to get the material tested in any recognised test house and
reject the material if not found as per specification.

Note: The type test certificate from in-house laboratory of Bidding firm shall also be accepted
provided the lab. is accredited by National Accreditation Body of the country and tests
have been witnessed by a representative of NABL accredited laboratory / Power
Utility.

11.2 ROUTINE TESTS:

All routine tests as stipulated in the relevant IS-1554 (Part-I)/1988 with its latest
amendments shall be carried out by the supplier on each lot offered for inspection.

4
 Tech Spec -Control & Power Cables

11.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

All the acceptance tests as mentioned in relevant IS-1554 (Part-I)/1988 & its latest
amendments up to date shall be carried out on samples from a lot for the purpose of
acceptance test in presence of purchaser’s representative.
11.4 INSPECTION:
(i) The purchaser shall have access at all times to the works and all other places of
manufacture, where the material is being manufactured and the supplier shall provide all
facilities for unrestricted inspection of the supplier’s works, raw materials, manufacture of the
material and for conducting necessary tests at any stage.

(ii) The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance about the manufacturing
program so that arrangements could be made for inspection.

(iii) No material shall be dispatched from the point of manufacture unless the material has
been satisfactorily inspected and tested.

(iv) Inspection & acceptance of any quality of material shall in no way relieve the supplier
from the responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification and shall not
prevent subsequent rejection if such material is later found to be defective.

(v) The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine tests of
bought out items.

(vi) Material destroyed during testing shall not be counted against quantities to be
supplied against this contract and no payment whatsoever shall be made for such material.

11.5 VERIFICATION OF LENGTH:

The supplier/manufacturer shall provide all adequate facilities at his works for
inspection of at least two numbers of cable drums or five percent of the cable drums offered
for inspection, whichever is higher, selected at random by the authorized representative of the
purchaser for checking/verification of cable length/manufacturing defects by transferring the
cable from one drum to the another empty drum and at the same time measuring the length of
the cable so transferred by means of a meter. The difference in the average length thus
obtained from the declared length by the supplier in the packing list shall be applied to all the
drums if the cable is found short during checking the sample lot(s).
11.6 CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE:
The successful bidder shall have to furnish the latest calibration certificates of the
testing instruments/equipments used for the testing of material/equipment offered to
inspecting officer(s) at the time of inspection of material/equipment. The testing
instrument/equipment shall be got calibrated by the manufacturer of testing
instrument/equipment or from any Govt./Govt. recognized/NABL accredited testing
laboratory. The calibration certificate should not be older than one year at the time of
presenting the same to the Inspecting Officer.

11.7 GENERAL:
All aforesaid tests shall be made prior to despatch in the presence of representative of
the purchaser. In case of inspection waiver, test results must be sent for approval. No
material shall be despatched without prior inspection or approval of test certificate unless
otherwise agreed to in writing by the purchaser.

5
 Tech Spec -Control & Power Cables

12.0 GUARANTEED & OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

Guaranteed and other technical particulars shall be furnished in prescribed format.
Any additional information considered necessary by the bidder with a view of high light the
various technical aspects of his offer may also be supplied on a separate sheet. Technical
particulars which are subject to guarantee shall be clearly marked.

13.0 PACKING:
The cables shall be supplied in wooden drums with adequate barrel diameter and shall
be packed in such a manner that it shall be protected from any kind of damage during transit.
Wooden drums shall comply with IS: 10418. Not more than one length shall be wound on
one drum. Each end of the cable shall be firmly & properly secured to the drum. The ends of
each length shall be sealed before shipment. The supplier shall be responsible for damage, if
any on account of defective packing.

14.0 DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS:

The bidder shall supply the detailed instructions/drawings in regard to the storage of
cable and their laying in the sub-stations.

15.0 BIS LICENSE CERTIFICATE:

The bidder shall furnish the Notary attested copy of valid BIS License Certificateas
per IS: 1554 (Part-I)/1988 with latest amendment.

6
 Tech Spec -Control & Power Cables

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR NON-FRLS PVC INSULATED UN-

ARMOURED ALUMINIUML.T. POWER CABLES.

1.0 SCOPE:

The specification covers design, manufacturing, testing at the manufacturer’s works,

inspection, packing and delivery F.O.R. destination of 3½ core PVC(Type-A)(heavy duty)
Insulated, PVC sheathed (Type-ST-1), unarmoured NON-FRLS L.T. Power cable with
Aluminium conductor suitable for working voltage up to & including 1100 volts conforming
to IS:1554 (Part-I)/1988 with latest amendment up to date.

2.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT:

2.1 The PVC (Type-A) insulated (heavy duty),PVC sheathed (Type-ST-1), un-armoured
NON-FRLS L.T. Power cables shall conform to IS-1554(Part-I)/1988 with latest amendment
up to date and bear BIS certification mark. The material used for construction of the cables
shall be of best qualities complying with the requirement of IS-1554 (Part-I)/1988 with latest
amendment up to date and other relevant Indian standards with latest editions and
amendments. The cables shall be suitable for outdoor/indoor installation free in air and shall
be capable of withstanding the normal stresses associated with transportation, erection,
reeling and unreeling operations without getting deformed. The cables shall be physically
strong to withstand rough installation hazards and thermal/electrical/physical stresses during
operation under specified climatic conditions.

2.2 The cable shall be suitable for use where combination of ambient temperature and
temperature rise due to load results in conductor temperature not exceeding 70 degree C.
under normal operation and 160 degree C. under short circuit conditions.

2.3 The bidder should possess the valid license from Bureau of Indian Standards to
manufacture cables conforming to IS: 1554 (Part-I)/1988 with latest amendment up to date
working voltage up to and including 1100V and suitable for low temperature conditions.

3.0 MATERIAL:
3.1 CONDUCTOR:
The conductor shall be composed of plain E.C. grade Aluminium wires conforming to
class-II of IS: 8130/1984 with latest amendment up to date. The Aluminium conductor
material used shall be of H2 grade as per IS: 8130/1984 with latest amendment up to date.

3.2 INSULATION:
The insulation shall be Polyvinyl Chloride compound (PVC) conforming to
requirement of Type-A compound of IS: 5831/1984 with latest amendment up to date.

3.3 INNER SHEATH:

The inner sheath shall be of non-Hygroscopic, Polyvinyl Chloride compound (PVC)
conforming to requirements of IS: 5831/1984 with latest amendment up to date for type ST-1.
The inner sheath shall be softer than the insulation. The inner sheath shall be applied by
extrusion method& it shall be so applied that it fits closely on laid up cores and it shall be
possible to remove it without damage to the insulation. The thickness and tolerance on
thickness of inner sheath shall be as per clause No. 12.3 of IS:1554 (Part-I)/1988 with latest
amendment up to date. The inner sheath shall be of colour of black.

7
 Tech Spec -Control & Power Cables

3.4 FILLERS:
The fillers shall be of non-Hygroscopic Polyvinyl Chloride compound (PVC)
conforming to requirements of IS: 5831/1984 with latest amendment up to date. The material
of fillers shall be softer than the insulation. The filler material used should be suitable for
operating temperature of the cable and compatible with other components of the cable. It
shall be ensured that the shape is as circular as possible.

3.5 OUTER SHEATH:

The outer sheath shall be of Polyvinyl Chloride compound (PVC) conforming to
requirements of IS: 5831/1984 with latest amendment up to date for type ST-1. The outer
sheath shall be embossed at the interval of one metre length as per clause no. 9.0 of this
specification.

4.0 CONSTRUCTION:

4.1 CONDUCTOR:
The construction of the conductor shall be as per clause No. 8.1 of IS: 1554 (Part-
I)/1988 with latest amendment up to date. The reduced neutral conductor size shall be as per
table-1 of clause No. 8.2 of IS: 1554 (Part-I)/1988 with latest amendment up to date.

4.2 INSULATION:
The conductor shall be provided with PVC insulation applied by extrusion method.
The insulation shall be so applied that if fits closely on the conductor and it shall be possible
to remove it without damage to the conductor. The thickness and tolerance on thickness of
insulation shall be as per clause 9.2 & 9.3 of IS: 1554 (Part-I)/1988 with latest amendment up
to date.

4.3 CORE IDENTIFICATION:

The core shall be identified by different colouring of PVC insulation. The main cores
shall have red, yellow and blue colour. The neutral core will have black colour.

4.4 LAYING UP OF CORES:

The cores shall be laid up together with the suitable right hand lay. The interstices
shall be filled with non-hygroscopic, PVC material.

4.5 INNER SHEATH:

The laid up cores shall be provided with inner sheath applied by extrusion method. It
shall be ensured that, shape is as circular as possible. The inner sheath shall be so applied
that it fits closely on the laid up cores and it shall be possible to remove it without damages to
the insulation. The thickness of the inner sheath shall be as per clause No. 12.3 of IS:1554
(Part-I)/1988with latest amendment up to date.

4.6 OUTER SHEATH:

The outer sheath shall be applied by extrusion over the inner sheath. It shall be so
applied that it fits closely over inner sheath and it shall be possible to remove it without
damages to the insulation/ inner sheath. The colour of outer sheath shall be black. The
thickness and tolerance on thickness of outer sheath shall be as per clause 14.4 of IS:1554
(Part-I)/1988 with latest amendment up to date. The outer sheath shall be embossed at the
interval of one metre length as per clause no. 7.0 of this specification.

8
 Tech Spec -Control & Power Cables

5.0 STANDARDS FOR UN-ARMOURED NON-FRLS [Link] CABLES:

1100V Grade multi core, PVC insulated (Heavy duty), PVC sheathed, Un-armoured
Non-FRLS L.T. Power cable, shall conform in all respects to the following relevant ISS with
latest editions and amendments up to date.

S. Standard Ref. No. Title

No.
1. IS-1554/Part-I)1988 with latest PVC insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables
amendment up to date . for working voltage up to and including 1100
Volts.
2. IS-8130/1984 with latest Conductors for insulated Electric Cables and
amendment up to date. flexible cords.
3. IS-5831/1984 with latest PVC Insulation and sheath of Electric Cables.
amendment up to date.
4. IS-3961/(Part-II)/1967 with latest Current ratings for cables:PVC insulated &
amendment up to date . PVC Sheathed heavy-duty cables.
5. IS-10418with latest amendment up Drums for Electric Cables.
to date.
6. IS-10810 with latest amendment Methods of tests for cables.
up to date.

6.0 CURRENT RATINGS:

The current ratings of the power cables shall correspond to the values recommended
as per IS: 3961 (Part- II)/1967 and its latest amendments up to date.

7.0 EMBOSSING:
To enable identification of control cable the word RRVPNL, manufacturer’s name or
mark, BN No. & Year of manufacture, Type- Non-FRLS PVC , Electric voltage grade and
cable size shall be embossed on the outer sheath of cable at the interval of one meter length.

8.0 MARKING:
Every cable drum shall be clearly marked with indelible ink or with suitable weather
resistant paint and shall bear the following particulars:
a) Manufacturer’s name, brand name or trademark, if any.
b) ISI certification mark.
c) Customer’s name
d) Type of cable and voltage grade
e) Number of cores
f) Cable size
g) Drum number
h) Purchase order/Tender No.
i) Gross weight of the drum
j) Tare weight of the drum
k) Length of the cable on the drum
l) Direction of rotation of the drum (by means of an arrow).
m) Country of manufacture
n) Year of manufacture

9
 Tech Spec -Control & Power Cables

9.0 LATENT DEFECTS ERRORS & OMISSIONS:

Any cable or part thereof that may develop defects during performance guarantee
period shall be promptly replaced by the supplier free of charge.

10.0 TESTS & INSPECTION:

10.1 TYPE TEST:

All Cables shall comply with the requirement of type tests as laid down in IS-1554
(Part-I) 1988 with latest amendment up to date excluding optional tests. The purchaser may at
his option insist the manufacturer to carry out these tests also in presence of purchaser’s
representative at their works. In case the supplier would like to charge extra for the type tests,
the same should be indicated clearly in the bid. In case the offer does not clearly lay down the
extra charges for the tests it would be presumed that the same are already included in the
quoted price.

The details of type test are as under:

a) Test on Conductor
(i) Annealing test (if applicable)
(ii) Conductor resistance test.
b) Tests for thickness of insulation and sheath.
c) Physical tests for insulation and outer sheath.
(i) Tensile strength and elongation at break.
(ii) Aging in air oven.
(iii) Shrinkage test.
(iv) Hot deformation.
(v) Loss of mass in air oven.
(vi) Heat shock test.
(vii) Thermal stability.
d) Insulation resistance test.
e) High voltage test (Water immersion test).
f) High voltage test at room temperature.
g) Flammability tests

The purchaser reserves the right to get the material tested in any recognised test house and
reject the material if not found as per specification.

Note: The type test certificate from in-house laboratory of Bidding firm shall also be accepted
provided the lab. is accredited by National Accreditation Body of the country and tests
have been witnessed by a representative of NABL accredited laboratory / Power Utility

10.2 ROUTINE TESTS:

All routine tests as stipulated in the relevant IS-1554 (Part-I)/1988 with latest
amendment up to date shall be carried out by the supplier on each lot offered for inspection.

10.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

All the acceptance tests as mentioned in relevant IS-1554 (Part-I)/1988 with latest
amendment up to date shall be carried out on samples from a lot for the purpose of
acceptance test in presence of purchaser’s representative.

10
 Tech Spec -Control & Power Cables

10.4 INSPECTION:
(i) The purchaser shall have access at all times to the works and all other places of
manufacture, where the material is being manufactured and the supplier shall
provide all facilities for unrestricted inspection of the supplier’s works, raw
materials, manufacture of the material and for conducting necessary tests at any
stage.

(ii) The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance about the manufacturing
programme so that arrangements could be made for inspection.

(iii) No material shall be dispatched from the point of manufacture unless the material
has been satisfactorily inspected and tested.

(iv) Inspection & acceptance of any quality of material shall in no way relieve the
supplier from the responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this
specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such material is later
found to be defective.

(v) The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine tests
of bought out items.

(vi) Material destroyed during testing shall not be counted against quantities to be
supplied against this contract and no payment whatsoever shall be made for such
material.

10.5 VERIFICATION OF LENGTH:

The supplier/manufacturer shall provide all adequate facilities at his works for
inspection of at least two numbers of cable drums or five percent of the cable drums offered
for inspection, whichever is higher, selected at random by the authorized representative of the
purchaser for checking/verification of cable length/manufacturing defects by transferring the
cable from one drum to the another empty drum and at the same time measuring the length of
the cable so transferred by means of a meter. The difference in the average length thus
obtained from the declared length by the supplier in the packing list shall be applied to all the
drums if the cable is found short during checking the sample lot(s).

10.6 CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE:

The successful bidder shall have to furnish the latest calibration certificates of the
testing instruments/equipments used for the testing of material/equipment offered to
inspecting officer(s) at the time of inspection of material/equipment. The testing
instrument/equipment shall be got calibrated by the manufacturer of testing
instrument/equipment or from any Govt./Govt. recognized/NABL accreditedtesting
laboratory. The calibration certificate should not be older than one year at the time of
presenting the same to the Inspecting Officer.

10.7 GENERAL:
All aforesaid tests shall be made prior to despatch in the presence of representative of
the purchaser. In case of inspection waiver, test results must be sent in quadruplicate for
approval. No material shall be despatched without prior inspection or approval of test
certificate unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the purchaser.

11
 Tech Spec -Control & Power Cables

11.0 GUARANTEED & OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

11.1 Guaranteed and other technical particulars shall be furnished in prescribed format.
Any additional information considered necessary by the bidder with a view of high light the
various technical aspects of his offer may also be supplied on a separate sheet. Technical
particulars which are subject to guarantee shall be clearly marked.

12.0 PACKING:
The cables shall be supplied in wooden drums with adequate barrel diameter and shall
be packed in such a manner that it shall be protected from any kind of damage during transit.
Wooden drums shall comply with IS : 10418. Not more than one length shall be wound on
one drum. Each end of the cable shall be firmly & properly secured to the drum. The ends of
each length shall be sealed before shipment. The supplier shall be responsible for damage, if
any on account of defective packing.

13.0 DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS:

The bidder shall supply the detailed instructions/drawings in regard to the storage of
cable and their laying in the sub-stations.

14.0 BIS LICENCE CERTIFICATE:

The bidder shall furnish the Notary attested copy of valid BIS Licence Certificate as
per IS: 1554 (Part-I)/1988 with latest amendment.

12
 Tech Spec -Control & Power Cables

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR UN-ARMOURED NON-FRLS P.V.C.

INSULATED COPPER CONTROL CABLE
PARTICULARS CABLE SIZE in Sq. m m
18CX2.5 12CX2.5 6CX2.5 4CX4.0 4CX2.5 3CX2.5
1. Name & Address of manufacturer and trade
name, if any.
2. Nos. and cross section of cores.
3. No. of strands and diameter of each strand
per core.
4. Shape and material of conductor.
5. Continuous current carrying capacity
undersite conditions indicating the
[Link] conductor temperature.
6. Thickness and material of core insulation. (in
mm) Nominal
Min.
7. Thickness and material of inner sheath (mm)
8. Diameter over inner sheath (mm)
9. Thickness and Material of outer sheath (mm).
Nominal
Min.
10. Dia. over outer sheath i.e. overall dia. (mm)
11. Min. volume resistivity of PVC Insulation at
27deg.C/70 deg. C.
12. Max. Resistance of conductor per Km of
length at 20deg.C.(Ohm/Km)
13. Colour coding of cores.
14. Colour of inner and outer sheaths
15. Test voltages between Conductors and free
core(s) bunched together and earthed.
a) A.C.
b) D.C.
16. Standard length of cable per drum.
17. Min. weight (Kg/Km)
(I) Copper
(II) PVC
(III) Finished Cable
[Link] weight per drum length(approx.)
19. Gross weight per drum (approx.)
20. Current rating factors based on Variation in
a) Ambient air temperature.
b) Groups laid in air (Side by side).
c) Groups laid in ducts (Side by side).
21. Standards applicable.
22. Whether cable bears carry BIS Certification
Mark or not.
23. BIS license No. & its validity as per IS: 1554
(Part-I)/1988 with latest amendment.
24. Embossing on cable on every one meter
spacing (Yes/No):

13
 Tech Spec -Control & Power Cables

a) RRVPNL
b) Manufacturer’s name or Trade mark.
c) ISI certification mark.
d) Year of manufacture
e) Type and voltage grade
f) Cable size.
25. Marking Particulars On Drum.
a) Name of manufacturer/trade mark.
b) Cable size
c) Drum No.
d) Gross weight of drum
e) Tare weight
f) Length of cable
g) Direction of rotation
h) ISI certification
i) Year of manufacturing

Signature
Name &Designation withSeal
DATE:

14
 Tech Spec -Control & Power Cables

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF UN-ARMOURED NON-FRLS PVC

INSULATED ALUMINIUM L.T. POWER CABLE

S. Particulars Core & Size of cable

NO. 3½CX300 Sq.m
NON-FRLS
1 Name & address of manufacturer.
Standard specification to which the Material shall conform.
2
3 Type of cables (No. of core & size in [Link])
4 Voltage Grade
5 Conductor details.
(i)Nominal cross sectional area of cond.
a) Main
b) Neutral
ii) Min. No. & size of strands ([Link])
a) Main
b) Neutral
iii) Shape of conductor
iv) Whether compacted of non -compacted
6 Insulation
I) Type
ii) Thickness
a) Main
b) Neutral
iii) Colour of cores
a) Main
b) Neutral
7 Sheath
I) Inner sheath
a) Type of material
b) Application
c) Thickness in mm.
d) Colour Black
ii) Outer sheath
a) Type of material
b) Application
c) Thickness in mm.
d) Colour Black
8 Type of filler used
i) Material
ii) Shape and type in mm.
iii) Central filler (shape and size) mm
9 Minimum weight in (Kg./Km)
i) Aluminum (Min.)
ii) PVC (Min.)
iii) Finished cable (Min.)
10 Standard length of cable in meter & its tolerance.
11 No. of length of each cable on each drum.
12 Gross Wt. of each drum (Kg)
15
 Tech Spec -Control & Power Cables

S. NO. Particulars Core & Size of cable

3½CX300 Sq.m
NON-FRLS
13 Tare Wt. of each drum (Kg)
14 Max. Continuous current carrying capacity in Amp.
i) When laid directly in ground.
ii) When laid in covered trenches.
iii) When paid in air.
Short circuit current rating of cables in kilo Amp. for 1
15
second.
16 Recommended depth of laying (Cm)
17 Maximum cond. Temp. due to load.
a) In normal continuous operating condition.
i) When laid directly in ground.
ii) When laid in covered trenches.
b) In short circuit condition:
i) When laid in directly in ground
ii) When laid in covered trenches.
iii) When laid in air.
18 Whether material bears BIS certificate mark
BIS license No.& its validity as per IS: 1554 (Part-I)/
19
1988 with latest amendment.
Embossing on cable at every one meter spacing
20
(Yes/No):
a) RRVPNL
b) Manufacturer’s name or trademark.
c) ISI certification mark.
d) Year of manufacture
e) Type and voltage grade
f) Cable size.
21 Marking Particulars on Drum.
a) Name of manufacturer/trade mark.
b) Cable size
c) Drum No.
d) Gross weight of drum
e) Tare weight
f) Length of cable
g) Direction of rotation
h) ISI certification
i) Year of manufacturing

Signature
Name &Designation with Seal
DATE:

16
 Technical Spec for MK

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 132 kV & 2x33 kV MARSHALLING KIOSKS

1.01 SCOPE:
1.01 This specification covers the design, manufacture assembly, testing at
manufacturer’s works before dispatch. Supply and delivery of Switchyard Marshalling
Kiosk for 132 kV & 33 kV circuits to be erected, tested and commissioned (ETC) at
132 kV Grid Sub Stations of RVPN.

1.02 STANDARDS:
The equipment offered should conform to relevant Indian Standards or equivalent
IEC standards. The references of the relevant standardspecifications wherever
mentioned in the text of this specification have been given accordingly. Other
authoritative standards which ensure an equal or better quality than the standards
specified will also be accepted.

1.03 SPECIFICATION:
1.03.1 Marshalling kiosks (MKs) shall be installed out door on every 132 kV Grid substation
for marshalling the cables from equipments and other marshalling kiosks before they
are taken to the control room. For this purpose, pedestal mounted outdoor type
marshalling kiosks fabricated from CRCA sheet steel (not less than 2mm thick)
complete with double doors &Each doors shall be locked with upper & lower end with
keys for opening of doors and provide handle to each panes of door and general
arrangement as per drawings enclosed at Annexure- A & Annexure-B, shall be
offered. The bottom of the MK’s shall be of 3mm thick CRCA sheet steel and fitted
with 3mm thick gland fixing plate which shall be provided with knockouts for fixing
cable glands as under:

S. No. Knock Out Hole Size 132 kV MK’s 2x33 kV MK’s

1. 32 mm 2 2
2. 25 mm 25 18

The MK’s shall be mounted on an angle iron frame work of the material and size as
shown in the drawings. Foundation bolts shall also be supplied, each foundation bolts
contains with 2 nuts & 2 [Link] terminal blocks used in MK’s shall be similar to
that describe under clause 3.05 of the specification. Internalilluminationlamp. Heater
with ON/OFF switch, fuses and links, 3 pin 5/15 Amp. plugand socket shallbe
provided in each kiosk. These shall bear ISI mark. The terminal blocks shall be
arranged in such a way that a safe working place is available for carrying out wiring
etc. The exterior and interior finish shall be subject to the approval of the purchaser.
The wiring inside the marshalling kiosks shall be carried out with 2.5 mm Sq. PVC
insulated copper wire and the kiosks shall be fitted with suitable fuses and links as
necessary for the control circuit. The marshalling kiosks should have proper earthing
terminals to enable earthing to be made at two places. The fuses, links of G type are
marked and terminal blocks to be provided in each MK shall be as under:

S. No. Particulars of Equipment 132 kV MK’s 2x33 kV MK’s

1. HRC fuses 16 A 6 6
2. HRC fuses 10 A 6 6
3. HRC fuses 6 A 6 6
4. HRC Links 4 4
5. Disconnecting type terminal blocks 102 96
suitable for copper conductor
(Stud size M5)

1
 Technical Spec for MK

1.03.2 Fix canopy type cover shall be provided at the top of the M.K. with gaskets shall be
provided on MK’s with one set of double doors on both side, so as to enable access
to the front and rear of the equipment mounting panel and the wiring.

1.03.3 The dimensions and general arrangement of the marshalling kiosks shall be as per
drawings enclosed at Annexure-A for 132 kV bays & Annexure-B for 2x33 kV bays.

1.03.4 The marshalling kiosks shall be suitable for outdoor installation and shall be so
designed as to have maximum protection against indignant weather condition. It
should have compact construction with a minimum degree of protection IP55 as per
IS: 2147. The kiosk shall be dust, and vermin proof and shall be fully protected
against rain. All holes shall be blanked. The locking arrangement shall be with handle
and rod such that door is closed with three points of latching (top, middle and bottom)
as in case of Almirah. Three (03 Nos.) hinges per doors with the facility of 180°
degree door opening shall be of aluminium alloy casting with stainless steel pins so
that they do not rust in the adverse atmospheric conditions to which they are
subjected.

1.04 TERMINAL BLOCK:

1.04.1 Terminal block connectors shall be stud type of size M5 suitable for copper conductor
and built from cells of moulded dielectric and brass stud inserts shall be provided for
terminating the outgoing ends of the panel wiring and the corresponding incoming tail
ends of control cables. Insulating barrier shall be provided between adjacent
connections. The height of the barriers and the spacing between terminals shall be
such as to give adequate protection while allowing easy access to terminals.
Provision shall be made on each pillar for holding 10% extra connections. All blocks
shall be shrouded by easily removable shrouds of non inflammable moulded and
transparent dielectric materials.

1.04.2 The terminal blocks shall be suitable for 660 volts service and for connection with
copper wires. Vertical MS strips should be provided between rows and ends of
terminal blocks for tying the wire.

1.04.3 Terminal boards shall be mounted in such a manner as to afford easy access to
terminations and to enable ferrule number to be read without difficulty. Wire ends
shall be so connected to the terminals that no wire terminal number gets marked due
to succeeding connections. In other words ferrule numbering at the terminals should
be unambiguous and full proof. Terminal board rows shall be adequately spaced and
shall not be less than 100mm apart so as to permit convenient access to wires and
terminals Labels in the form of engraved plastic plates shall be provided on the fixed
portion of terminal boards.
The fittings shall be generally as per arrangements shown in the drawings at
Annexure-A and Annexure-B.

1.04.4 No live metal parts shall be exposed at the back of the terminal boards.

1.04.5 All studs, nuts, bolts screws etc. shall be threaded according to the latest relevant
Indian or equivalent International Standards.

1.05 HRC FUSES:

The high rupturing HRC fuses for MKs for the 132 kV and 33 kV bays shall fully
comply with and marked with the latest edition of IS: 13703 (Part-I) and shall be pull-
out type only. The links shall be of 1 mm thick tinned copper and fitted in fuse holders
as used for the HRC fuse links. The fuses shall be of G type/duty.

2
 Technical Spec for MK

1.06 PANEL WIRING:

1.06.1 The kiosk’s internal wiring shall be of switch board type 2.5 Sq. mm PVC insulated
copper conductor as provided in clause in 1.04.1 suitable for 660V service and in
accordance with relevant Indian Standards. Polyvinyl chloride used shall have
excellent resistance against burning, moisture, oil and vermin and shall be furnished
with clear colour. Rubber insulated wiring shall not be acceptable.

1.06.2 The wiring shall be supported by plastic cleats/PVC channels. Wires shall be
terminated on to the terminal blocks with annealed and tinned (not soldered) crimp
tag termination, separate termination being used for each wire, and the size of
termination suited to the size of wire terminated. Wiring shall in general be
accommodated on the sides of the cubicles.

1.06.3 Wires shall not be jointed or tied between terminated points. At the terminal
connections, washers shall be interposed between terminals and holding nuts. All
holding nuts shall be secured by locking nuts. The connecting studs shall be secured
by locking nuts, the connecting studs shall project at least 6 mm from the lock nuts
surface.

1.06.4 Wiring connected to the space heaters in the cubicle shall have porcelain beaded
insulation over a safe length from the heater terminals.

1.06.5 All wire shall be suitable for bending to meet the terminal studs at right angle with the
studs and they shall not be skewed. Metal cases of all apparatus mounted on panels
shall be separately earthed by means of flexible copper wire or strip.

1.07 FERRULES FOR PANEL WIRING:

1.07.1 Ferrules engraved with the same numbers, letters and symbols as indicated in the
connection and wiring diagrams shall be provided on the terminal ends of all wires for
easy identification of circuits for inspection and maintenance.

1.07.2 Ferrules shall be strong and flexible insulating material with glossy finish to prevent
adhesion. They shall be engraved and clearly and durably marked and shall not be
affected by dampness.

1.07.3 Ferrules numbering shall be in accordance with IS:375/1963. The same ferrule
number shall not be used on wires in different circuits on a panel.

1.07.4 All points of interconnection between the wiring carried out for equipments for
different suppliers, where a change of number cannot be avoided, double ferrules
shall be provided on each wire with appropriate numbers on the changing end. The
change of numbering shall be shown on the appropriate connection wiring diagram of
the equipment.

1.08 PAINTING:
All unfinished surfaces of steel panels and frame work shall be sand blasted to
remove rust, scale, foreign adhering matter and grease, a suitable rust resisting
primer shall be applied on the interior and exterior surface of steel, which shall be
followed by application of an under coat suitable to serve as base and binder for the
finishing coat.

(i) The powder coating process shall be applicable for Marshalling Kiosk, as per as
per IS: 13871 (1993).

3
 Technical Spec for MK

(ii) In order to achieve the best possible finish with powder coating, the surface of
the part must be prepared properly.

(iii) The process for preparing each part will depend on the base material, metals,
and other materials like fiberglass.

(iv) In general, the part will be thoroughly cleaned to remove any oil or grease on
the surface, and then rinsed. Next, the part is etched. This helps remove any
surface oxides and provides more surface area for the powder coating to stick
to. After etching, the part is rinsed once more.

(v) All sheet steel work shall be pre-treated in tanks, in accordance with IS: 6005
Degreasing shall be done by alkaline cleaning. Rust and scale shall be
removed by pickling with acid. After pickling, the parts shall be washed in
running water.

(vi) Then these shall be rinsed in slightly alkaline hot water and dried. The
phosphate coating shall be ‘Class-C’ as specified in IS:6005.

(vii) Welding shall not be done after powder coating. The powder coating shall be as
per IS: 13871 (1993).

(viii) The powder coated surfaces shall be rinsed and passivated prior to application
of stoved lead oxide primer coating. After primer application, the exterior colour
of powder coat shall be applied of shade 631 of IS-5.

(ix) The colour of the interior shall be white and the base /pedestal shall be painted
black.

1.09 SPACE HEATERS:

Tubular space heaters suitable for connection to the single phase 230 Volts A.C.
supply complete with switches located at convenient positions shall be provided at
the bottom of each cubicle to prevent condensation of moisture. The Watt loss per
unit surface of heater shall be low enough to keep surface temperature well below
visible heat. Each cubicle shall also be provided with a switch of appropriate rating
for control for space heater.
A thermostat (range 30 Deg.C. to 75 Deg.C.) shall be provided in the space heater
circuit for automatic control).

1.10 SWITCHBOARD LIGHTING:

The switch Board interiors shall be illuminated by incandescent lamps connected to a
230 Volts single phase A.C. Supply. The illumination of interior shall be free from
hand shadows and shall be planned to avoid any strain or fatigue to the wireman who
may be called upon to do work.

1.11 TITLE PLATES:

A title plate bearing the name and purpose of each marshalling kiosk shall be fixed
on the either side top of each marshalling kiosk. The name of manufacturer with PO
and date along with month of dispatch will be indicated on the [Link] shall carry the
information duly engraved/punched as detailed hereunder:-

(i) Manufacturer’s Name.

(ii) [Link]/SE(Proc-II)/Ex. EN(VI)/A8/BN-FFF/D----- Dt.

4
 Technical Spec for MK

(iii) [Link]. of Marshalling Kiosk

(iv) Month of dispatch.

(v) Rating of Marshalling Kiosk.

(vi) Contact e-mail address and Toll free No. for after sales service

1.12 SAFETY EARTHING:

Copper strips 25x6 mm with 4-5 holes of 3ø mm dia. at regular interval with Brass
earthing studs/bolts with nuts of size M12 shall be provided on both sides of the
marshalling kiosk for safety earthing and 2 Nos. Earth Bond shall be supplied along
each Kiosk.

1.13 INSPECTION AND TESTS:

1.13.1 The following tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s works after complete
assembling the marshalling kiosk in the presence of an Engineer. The test reports
shall be supplied and got approved from the purchaser before dispatching the
equipment.
(i) Visual inspection including verification of bill of material, general layout of
components, overall dimensions, paint, finish and overall appearance.
(ii) Checking of wiring of circuits and their continuity.
(iii) One minute 2 kV insulation withstand test at 50 cycles on all equipments on the
kiosks and wiring.
(iv) Insulation resistance of complete wiring, circuit by circuit with all equipments
mounted on the MKs.
(v) Operation test for heater, power socket, cubical illumination etc.
(vi) The sampling plan shall be 25% (Nearest higher whole number ) of the offerwd
lot for established suppliers and 100% of the offered lot for un-established
suppliers.

1.13.2 Type test certificates:

Bidders shall furnish the type test certificates for IP-55 test (IS/IEC 60529:2001). The
type test certificate should not be older than 10 (ten) years as on the date of opening
of technical bid.

1.13.3 BOUGHT OUT ITEMS:

All the accessories, space heaters, thermostats, HRC fuse, HRC links, terminal
blocks etc. shall be of “ISI MARK” for which bidders shall furnish attested Photostat
copies of ISI certificate for manufacturing the same along with bid or alternatively
bidder shall furnish original/attested Photostat copies of the latest type test certificate
of aforesaid items along with bid. The type test certificate should not be older than 7
years. In case the space heaters, thermostat, Disconnecting type terminal and stud
type terminal of under mentioned make are offered with the bid then the submission
of copy of ISI/ type test certificate will not be insisted upon. The make of space
heaters and thermostat are as under:

SPACE HEATER : KAYCEE / ELTER / AIREX / PRAVEEN / SOPHIA

THERMOSTAT : TEMPRAL / AIREX / GIRISHCO
DISCONNECTING TYPE TERMINAL: DEEPAL / HEMVIN
STUD TYPE TERMINAL : DEEPAL / HEMVIN

5
 Technical Spec for MK

1.14 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

Guaranteed technical and other particulars as asked for in Schedule-GTP shall be
supplied. Guaranteed technical particulars shall be clearly marked.

1.15 DRAWINGS:
In addition to any other drawings which the tenderer may like to enclose, to explain
the merits of his proposal, the following drawings shall be enclosed with the tender in
quadruplicate:
(i) Principal dimensional details of each MK.
(ii) Front & rear views with devices positions marked.
(iii) Schematic drawings.
(iv) Name plate informing the name of Manufacturer, S. No., Particular of material,
order No. LOA/PO No., Month of dispatch and Guarantee period.

The tenderer shall be responsible for any discrepancies/errors or omissions in the

drawings and other particulars approved by the purchaser or not. In the event of order
5 sets of such drawings would be supplied for each S/S along with the Marshalling
kiosks

6
 Technical Spec for MK

Schedule-GTP
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 132kV & 2x33kV MARSHALLING KIOSKS

S. Particulars 132 kV MK 2X33 kV MK

No.
1. Name of Manufacturer
2. Name and Work address
3. Type Designation
4. Reference No. of drawings
5. Size
6. Thickness of CRCA steel
7. Painting Procedure
8. Degree of protection
9. Type and make of HRC fuses
(i) Number of HRC fuse with base
(ii) 16 AMP
(iii) 10 AMP
10. 6 AMP
11. Number of HRC links/Neutral links
12. Type and make of terminal blocks
13. Number of disconnecting type terminal
blocks suitable for copper
conductor(stud size M5)
14. Thermostat type and make
15. Space heater type and make
16. Type of Earthing
i) Knock Out Hole Size 32 mm
17. ii) Knock Out Hole Size 25 mm
18. Make of Internal fittings (These shall
bear ISI mark)
19. Provisions for fitting 10 % extra
terminal blocks on each TB
20. Height of Bottom TB
21. Hinges of doors
22. Canopy
23. Foundation Bolts
24. Doors

7
Technical Spec for MK

8
Technical Spec for MK

9
 VOLUME-II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS FOR HARDWARE

CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS FOR 132 KV & 220 KV SUB-STATIONS

3.1 SCOPE :
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer's works before
dispatch, supply and delivery of hardware clamps & connectors suitable for use on various
220 KV and 132 KV Grid Sub Stations in RRVPNL.

3.2 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:

3.2.1 The hardware clamps and connectors for power conductor & ground wires shall be
suitable for being installed directly in air along with the Insulator string for 132 &
220 KV grid substations.

3.2.2 The climatic conditions at site under which the equipment shall operate satisfactory
are as under.
1) Max. ambient Air Temperature 50 Deg.C.
2) Max. daily average ambient temperature 45 Deg C
3) Max. yearly weighted ambient Temperature 35 Deg C
4) Minimum ambient Air Temperature (-) 5 Deg.C.
5) Maximum relative humidity(%). 90 %
6) Minimum relative humidity(%). 10 %
7) Height above main sea level. Less than 1000 meters
8) Dust storms are liable to occur during the period March to July
9) Average No. of thunder storm days/annum. 40 days
10) Average annual rainfall(mm). 10 to 100cm
(depending upon area)
11) Average No. of months of tropical monsoon conditions. 4 months
12) Seismic level horizontal acceleration 0.3g
13) Degree of Pollution Heavy
14) Intensity of solar radiation 1.0 kW/Sq.M
15) Max. Wind load 195kg/Sq.M

3.3 STANDARDS:
The hardware clamps & connectors should conform in all respect to the latest editions of IS-
2486 Part I to IV and power connectors to IS:5561/1970. All nuts shall be made of material
conforming to IS: 5561/1970. All nuts shall be made of material conforming to property
clause
4.8 of IS:1367/1980 ([Link]) (2nd revision) with regard to its mechanical properties. Cotter pins
should be made of forged steel conforming to clause 2 of IS:2004/1991 (3rd revision) with
latest amendments. All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized. Electro galvanized ferrous
fittings shall be checked in accordance with IS:1573/1986 with latest amendment. The
hardware fittings are required to be used with Disc Insulators string units containing insulators
of type-B as classified under clause 5 "Classification" of IS:731/1971 with latest amendment
and ACSR Panther and Zebra conductors specified in IS:398 /pt. II /1976.

3.4 REQUIREMENT:
The requirement of hardware clamp & connectors for EHV substations are as set out in the
preamble of the bid invitation.

The purchaser reserves the right to split the quantity & to entrust the order for the supplier on
one or more supplier. The Bidder shall agree to supply part quantity if ordered on him at the
rates/ prices mentioned in the tender and accepted by the purchaser.
3.5 HARDWARE CLAMPS & CONNECTORS :
3.5.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS :
(i) The insulator string Hardware Clamps & connectors shall be supplied complete in
all respect and shall include all fittings necessary for composing the insulator
strings and should include U-shackles, clevis or ball-links for attaching it to the
strain plate or hangers supplied with Sub-Station structures. Conductor
suspension or strain clamps should be suitable for attaching the specified
conductor to the string.

Suspension Hardware Clamps & connectors shall be suitable for ball & socket
type interconnection between top and bottom parts to be used with B&S type disc
insulators with 16mm dia ball pin and tension hardware with B&S type disc
insulators of 20 mm dia ball pin. In case of double suspension and double tension
strings, hardwares shall also include suitable yoke attachment.

The supplier shall ensure that the insulator fittings offered are complete in all
respect and are entirely suitable for the proposed attachment and for the sizes of
conductors indicated in Appendix -II.

All Bolts , nuts & screw heals shall be of with worth standard thread. Bolt heads
and nuts shall be hexagonal. Wherever required, nuts shall be locked in an
approved manner. The threads in nuts and tapped holes shall be cut after
galvanizing and shall be well lubricated or greased. All other threads shall be cut
before galvanizing. The bolt thread shall be undercut to take care of increase in
diameter due to galvanization.

ii) All forgings and castings shall be of good finish and free from flaws and other
defects. The edges on the outside of fittings, such as at the eye clevis and holes,
shall be rounded.

iii) All parts of different fittings which provide for interconnection shall be made
such that sufficient clearance is provided at connection point to ensure free
movement and suspension of the insulator string assembly. All eye and clevis
connections shall be free in this manner but care shall be taken that too much
clearance between eye and tongues of the clevis is avoided.

3.5.2 MATERIAL DESIGN AND TYPE :

i) The material for string insulator fittings (except those specified otherwise) shall
be either drop forged steel or heat treated malleable cast iron and shall be hot dip
galvanized after all machining and fittings have been completed. The material
used in fittings shall be corrosion resistant. All nuts shall be made of material
conforming to property clause 4.8 of IS : 1367-1980 (Pt. II) (2 nd revision) with
regard to its mechanical properties and cotter pins shall be made of forged steel
conforming to clause 2 of IS-2004-1991(3rd revision) with latest amendments.

The security clips shall be of phosphor bronze conforming to IS: 1385/1968 or of

brass of suitable temper with minimum hardness of 100 HV conforming to IS:
410- 1967 (second revision) with latest amendments. For galvanizing, zinc
conforming to grade Zn 98 of IS:209/1966 shall be used.

ii) The locking devices shall be resilient, corrosion resistant and of suitable
mechanical strength. The hardness and temper of the material are important for
their satisfactory operation.

The locking devices shall retain their locking ability after being operated from
the locking to the coupling position at least twenty times, at normal temperature.
They should be effective at the lowest temperature likely to be encountered in
service.
 All fittings shall be designed so that the harmful bimetallic corrosion is avoided
and effects of vibration both on conductor and fitting itself are minimized.

3.5.3 SUSPENSION CLAMPS :

The Bolted type suspension clamps offered shall be made of high strength aluminium
alloy and shall be suitable for use with conductor indicated in Appendix-III. The
composition of the alloy shall be declared by the Bidder giving reference to the
relevant ISS. The design of clamps shall be such that the effects of vibration both on
the conductor and fitting itself are minimized. Sharp radial of curvature, ridges etc.
which might lead to localized pressure or damage to the conductor in service, shall be
avoided. The clamps shall permit the conductor to slip before the failure of the
conductor occurs and shall have a sufficient slipping strength to resist conductor
tension under broken wire condition. The suspension clamps shall also be provided
with suitable socket or clevis eye (made of drop forged steel or cast iron) for
connecting it to the insulator string. The fittings shall have sufficient contact surface to
minimize damage due to fault currents.

3.5.4 TENSION CLAMP :

The bolted type clamps shall be made out of high strength aluminium alloy suitable
for conductor indicated in Appendix-III. The mechanical efficiency of tension clamps
shall not be effected by method of erection involving "Come- Along" or similar clamp
during or after assembly and erection of tension clamp itself. The strain clamp shall
have the same conductivity as the conductor, and shall be of a design that will ensure
unrestricted flow of current.

3.6. POWER CONNECTORS :

3.6.1 MATERIALS:
All materials used shall conform to the relevant ISS. All aluminium and aluminium
alloy used in the manufacture of the connector shall conform to designation A6 of
IS:617(1975) Latest amended and IS:1367 (latest amended). Non -ferrous alloy bolts,
nuts and spring washers shall conform to the relevant Standards.

3.6.2 DIMENSIONS AND TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS :

Various minimum dimensional and technical parameters should be met as indicated
in Appendix-I.

3.6.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS :

The power connectors shall be pressure die casting, smooth and free from cavities,
blow-holes, surface blisters, cracks and other defects like sharp radii of curvature,
ridges & excrescence which might lead to localized pressure or damage to conductor
in service. All sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off. Power
connectors shall be so designed and proportioned that they are capable of safely
withstanding stresses to which they may be subjected (including these due to short
circuit and climatic conditions) and that the effect of vibrations, both on the
conductor and the connector itself are minimized. Sufficient contact pressure should
be maintained at the joint by the provision of the required number of bolts or other
fixing arrangements. But the contact pressure should not be so great as to cause
relaxation of the joint by coil blow. The joint should be such that the pressure is
maintained within the range under all conditions of service. To avoid excessive local
pressure, the contact pressure should be evenly distributed by the use of pressure
plates, washers or suitable saddles of adequate area and thickness.

3.6.4 RATINGS :
i) Rated current: The rated current of power connectors
and clamps shall be 1250 amp for ACSR
Zebra & 800 amp for ACSR Panther.
ii) Rated frequency of the power connectors shall be 50 Hz.
 iii) Rated short time current: Rated short time current of the
connectors shall be as under:
Short time r.m.s. current for 1
sec. Connectors suitable for Panther 31.5 kA
Connectors suitable for Zebra 40.0 kA

3.6.5 LIMITS OF TEMPERATURE RISE :

The limits of temperature rise specified are based on the following reference ambient
temperatures:
a) Maximum ambient air temp 50.0 Deg.C
b) Maximum daily average ambient temp 45.0 Deg.C
c) Maximum yearly average ambient temp 45.0 Deg.C

The temperature rise of power connectors above a reference ambient temperature of

40 Deg.C. when carrying rated current as above shall not exceed 45 Dec.C to fulfil
the requirement of CL.6 IS:5561(1970).

3.6.6 PROTECTION AGAINST CORROSION:

All parts of power connectors shall either be inherently resistant to atmospheric
corrosion or be suitably protected against corrosion, both during storage and in
service.

All ferrous metal parts intended for outdoor use, except those made of stainless steel
shall be protected by hot-dip galvanizing in accordance with IS:2633 (1986). The
threads of nuts and tapped bolts shall be cut after galvanizing and shall be well oiled
or greased. All other threads shall be cut before galvanizing.

3.7 TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES :

The bidder shall submit duly signed and sealed copies of the following latest type test
certificates as given below, not older than seven years as on the date of bid opening, from a
NABL/ ILAC- MRA Accredited Laboratory, as per this Technical Specification or equivalent
International standards like IEC, IEEE etc. Bids without type test reports will not be
considered for evaluation. The drawing No. of the samples on which type tests were
conducted should be clearly stated in the test report. A copy of the relevant detailed drawing
indicating material, dimensions, weight etc. and duly signed and stamped by the testing
authority should also be enclosed with the test report. The test should have been conducted on
as many samples as specified in the ISS. The Bidder shall furnish a certificate to the effect that
the material offered is identical in quality and performance with those given in test reports.

3.7.1 Suspension Hardware Clamp:

a. Visual examination test

b. Verifications of dimensions
c. Slip strength test IS:2486 Part. I/1993)
d. Galvanizing test/Electroplating test with latest amendment
e. Ultimate Strength test/ Mechanical Strength test
f. Chemical composition test (on fitting)

3.7.2 On Tension Hardware Clamp

a. Visual examination test

b. Verifications of dimensions
c. Slip strength test IS:2486 Part. I/1993)
d. Galvanizing test/Electroplating test with latest amendment
e. Ultimate Strength test/ Mechanical Strength test
f. Chemical composition test (on fitting)
 3.7.3 Flexible Copper Earth bond
a. Visual examination test
b. Verifications of dimensions IS: 2121
c. Slip strength test ([Link]/1992)with latest
d. Galvanizing test/ Electroplating test amendment
e. Chemical composition test

3.7.4 Earth wire Tension Clamp Assembly

a. Visual examination test

b. Verifications of dimensions
c. Electrical resistance test IS: 2121 ([Link]/1992)
d. Ultimate Strength test/ Mechanical Strength test with latest amendment
e. Chemical composition test
f. Galvanizing test

3.7.5 T Clamp, PG Clamp, PI Clamp, Isolator Clamps, Solid Bus Bar Spacer & T
Spacer for conductor

a. Visual examination test

b. Verifications of dimensions
c. Tensile test IS: 5561 (1970) with
d. Resistance test (except PI clamp) latest amendment
e. Temperature rise test (-do-)
f. Short time current test (-do-)
g. Galvanizing/Electroplating test

3.7.6 PG Clamp for Earth wire

a. Visual examination test

b. Verifications of dimensions IS: 5561 (1970)with latest
c. Tensile test amendment
d. Galvanizing test/Electroplating test

3.8 ACCEPTANCE TEST

3.8.1 On both Suspension & Tension Hardware Clamps

a. Visual examination test

b. Verifications of dimensions
c. Ultimate Strength test/Mechanical Strength test IS:2486 Part. I/1993)
d. Slip strength test with latest amendment
e. Chemical composition test
f. Galvanizing test/Electroplating test

3.8.2 Flexible Copper Earth bond

a. Visual examination IS: 2121 ([Link]/1992)

b. Verification of dimension with latest amendment
c. Chemical composition test
 3.8.3 Earth wire Tension Clamp Assembly

a. Visual examination test

b. Verifications of dimensions IS: 2121
c. Ultimate /Mechanical strength test ([Link]/1992)with latest
d. Chemical composition test amendment
e. Galvanizing test/Electroplating test

3.8.4 T Clamp, PG Clamp, PI Clamp, Isolator Clamps, Solid Bus Bar Spacer & T
Spacer for conductor

a. Visual examination test

b. Verifications of dimensions IS: 5561 (1970)with
c. Tensile test latest amendment
d. Resistance test(except PI clamp)
e. Galvanizing test/Electroplating test

3.8.5 PG Clamp for Earth wire

a. Visual examination test

b. Verifications of dimensions IS: 5561 (1970)with latest
c. Tensile test amendment
d. Galvanizing test/Electroplating test

3.9 Routine tests

Test shall be carried out on each item by the supplier & to check requirements which are likely
to vary during production as per relevant ISS (with latest amendment)

3.10 MARKING :
3.10.1 ON CONNECTORS :
The connector shall be indelibly marked with rated current or any identifying mark to
enable full particulars of connector to be obtained. The material bearing ISI
certification mark shall be given preference.

3.10.2 ON HARDWARE CLAMPS :

Following shall be marked on caps, clamps & lugs:
i) Name of trade mark of the Manufacturer.
ii) Country of Manufacturer(s)
iii) Mark shall be forged or stamped with a steel die before galvanizing. The
mark shall be distinct, durable and conspicuous.

The material bearing ISI Certification mark shall be given preference.

3.11 PACKING :
For packing hardwares clamp & connectors in wooden case/double gunny bag shall be
employed. The packing should be able to withstand rough handling during transit and storage
at destination. The heads and threaded portions of pins and fittings shall be properly protected
against damage. The gross weight of each packing shall not normally exceed 50 Kgs.
Different fittings shall be packed in different cases and shall be completed with their minor
accessories provided in proper place. All nuts shall be hand tightened over the bolts and
screwed upto the farthest point. The list showing quantity of hardwares/ components, product
drawing and assembly / maintenance instructions for the users should be sent with each
consignments. One set of the approved drawings in respect of each item should be
sent to the respective
 consignee(s) while dispatching the material. 2.5% extra bolts, nuts, washers, split pins,
security clips etc shall be supplied without any extra cost.

3.12. INSPECTION :
i) The Purchaser shall have access at all times to the works and all other places of
manufacture, where power conductor and ground wire accessories and hardware fittings
are being manufactured and the manufacturer shall provide all facilities for unrestricted
inspection of the Supplier's works, raw materials, manufacture of all the accessories and
hardware and for conducting necessary tests as detailed herein.

ii) No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the material has
been satisfactorily inspected and tested.

iii) No acceptance of any quality of accessories and hardware shall in no way relieve the
Supplier of his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification and
shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such materials are later found to be defective.

iv) The inspection and testing shall be carried out as per clause No.1.27 of GCC.

3.13. DRAWINGS:
The Bidder should submit detailed drawing showing design and dimensions of the complete
hardware set along with design, weight and dimension of various parts. Full particulars of the
conductor clamps shall be given and the type of material used of various parts should be
clearly specified either on the drawing or in a separate statement.

The bid drawings should consist of :

i) Dimensioned assembly drawings of the complete hardware set with all fittings.
ii) Separate detailed dimensioned drawing for all hardware fittings such as conductor
suspension clamps, tension clamps, hook ball clevis socket clevis, yokes etc.
iii) Weight of Aluminium and steel portion separately.

3.14 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR HARDWARE CLAMP

& CONNECTORS
The number of discs used on suspension and tension strings and the EMS ratings have been
given in Appendix-II(A). Technical particulars of matching insulators are given in Appendix-
II(B) and that of conductor & earth wire in Appendix-III. The technical particulars of
Hardware Clamps & connectors shall be given by the Bidder in Schedule-GTP. Bids not
accompanied by Schedule-GTP are likely to be ignored.

3.15 DELIVERY:
The desired delivery of the material is indicated at Schedule-DEL of the specification. The
bidder is to confirm this delivery requirement in Schedule –DEL.

3.16. QUANTITIES :
The purchaser reserves the right to place repeat order for extra items or additional quantities
up to 50% of the quantity of the individual items on the rates and conditions in the contract.
The delivery period for such extra/ additional items shall be increased proportionately as per
delivery period indicated in Schedule- DEL of this specification.

3.17 TESTING FACILITIES :

The Bidder must indicate clearly about the various testing facilities for type tests as well as
routine, acceptance tests as per relevant ISS in respect of Hardware clamps and connectors as
are available at the Bidders works. In case no testing facilities are available at the Bidder’s
works, particulars of the place where such testing is proposed to be conducted during the
course of inspection must be indicated.
3.18 DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFICATIONS :
The technical specification contained in this section are for the guidance of the bidder. Any
deviation from the purchaser's specification will be considered on their relative merits in
respect of performance, efficiency, durability and overall economy consistent with the
purchaser's requirements. Such deviations shall be clearly entered by the Bidder in the form as
per Schedule- DEV of the specification.

3.19 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

The bidders are required to furnish the quality assurance plan alongwith their bid, which is to
be followed by the supplier during manufacturing of the material/equipment.

The manufacturing Quality Plan (MQP) shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and
approval. Manufacturing Quality Plan(MQP) will detail out for all the material, components
and equipment, various tests/inspections to be carried out as per the requirement of purchaser
specification and standards mentioned therein and quality practices & procedure followed by
manufacturer’s/suppliers/sub-suppliers quality control organization, the relevant reference
documents and standards, acceptance norms, inspection documents raised etc. during all
stages of materials procurement, manufacture assembly and final testing/performance testing.
 Appendix-I
DIMENSIONAL AND TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS OF POWER CONNECTOR
SUITABLE FOR EHV GRID SUB STATIONS CONFORMING to IS:5561

Minimum dimensions and Technical parameters:

1. PG clamp suitable a) Length................................................................................186 mm
for ACSR Zebra to b) Thickness of metallic parts...................................................12 mm
Zebra c) No. of bolts alongwith plain washer, spring washers or lock nuts3 N
d) Size of bolts..........................................16 mm dia X 65 mm length
2. PG clamp suitable a) Length .......................................................................................136.5 mm
for ACSR Panther b) Thickness of metallic parts...................................................10 mm
to Panther c) No. of bolts alongwith plain washer, spring washers or lock nuts3 N
d) Size of bolts..........................................12 mm dia X 60 mm length
3. PG clamp suitable a) Length................................................................................186 mm
for ACSR Zebra to b) Thickness of metallic parts...................................................12 mm
Panther c) No. of bolts alongwith plain washer, spring washers or lock nuts3 N
d) Size of bolts..........................................16 mm dia X 65 mm length
4. T clamp suitable a) Keeper length.......................................................................90 mm
for ACSR Zebra to b) Thickness of metallic parts...................................................12 mm
Zebra c) No. of bolts for each keeper alongwith plain washer, spring
washers or lock nuts..............................................................6 Nos.
d) Size of bolts..........................................10 mm dia X 65 mm length
5. T clamp suitable a) Keeper length.......................................................................80 mm
for ACSR Panther b) Thickness of metallic parts...................................................10 mm
to Panther c) No. of bolts for each keeper alongwith plain washer, spring
washers or lock nuts..............................................................6 Nos.
d) Size of bolts..........................................10 mm dia X 60 mm length
6. T clamp suitable a) Keeper length for Zebra.......................................................90 mm
for ACSR Zebra to b) Keeper length for Panther....................................................80 mm
Panther c) Thickness of metallic parts of Zebra.....................................12 mm
d) Thickness of metallic parts of Panther.................................10 mm
e) No. of bolts for each keeper alongwith plain washer, spring
washers or lock nuts.............................................................6 Nos.
f) Size of bolts:
i) Zebra........................10 mm dia X 65 mm length
ii) Panther....................10 mm dia X 60 mm length
7. Post Insulator clamp a) Keeper length.......................................................................90 mm
suitable for ACSR b) Thickness of metallic parts...................................................12 mm
Zebra (127 PCD) c) No. of bolts for each keeper alongwith plain washer, spring
washers or lock nuts.............................................................4 Nos.
d) Size of bolts:
i) Clamp..........................................12 mm dia X 60 mm length
ii) Base dia......................................................................165 mm
8. Post Insulator clamp a) Keeper length.......................................................................85 mm
suitable for ACSR b) Thickness of metallic parts...................................................10 mm
Panther (127 PCD) c) No. of bolts for each keeper alongwith plain washer, spring
washers or lock nuts.............................................................4 Nos.
d) Size of bolts alongwith plain washer, spring washers or lock nuts
i) Clamp..........................................12 mm dia X 60 mm length
ii) Base dia......................................................................160 mm
9. Post Insulator clamp a) Keeper length.......................................................................90 mm
suitable for ACSR b) Thickness of metallic parts...................................................12 mm
Twin Zebra (127 c) No. of bolts for each keeper alongwith plain washer, spring
PCD) washers or lock nuts.............................................................4 Nos.
d) Size of bolts alongwith plain washer, spring washers or lock nuts
i) Clamp..........................................12 mm dia X 60 mm length
ii) Base dia......................................................................165 mm
10. T Spacer suitable for a) Keeper length.......................................................................80 mm
ACSR Twin Zebra b) Thickness of metallic parts...................................................12 mm
c) No. of bolts for each keeper alongwith plain washer, spring
washers or lock nuts..............................................................4 Nos.
d) Size of bolts..........................................10 mm dia X 65 mm length
11. Bus Bar Spacers a) Thickness of metallic parts...................................................12 mm
suitable for Zebra b) Solid and rigid spacer bar dia...............................................25 mm
to Zebra (spacing c) Size of bolts.............................................12 mm dia X 65 m length
between Zebra to
Zebra will be 300
mm)
12. PG clamp for E/W a) Keeper length ............................................................................... 75 mm
size 7/3.15 mm b) Thickness of metallic parts .......................................................... 8 mm
Zebra c) No. of bolts for each keeper alongwith plain washer, spring
washers or lock nuts..............................................................2 Nos.
d) Size of bolts..........................................10 mm dia X 50 mm length
13. Isolator Clamp a) Keeper length...............................................................90 mm each
suitable for ACSR b) Thickness of metallic parts...................................................12 mm
Zebra c) No. of bolts for each conductor alongwith plain washer, spring
washers or lock nuts..............................................................4 Nos.
d) Size of bolts..........................................10 mm dia X 60 mm length
e) Terminal pad dimension..........................................75X75X12 mm
f) Bimetalic strip dimension...........................................75X75X1 mm
14. Isolator Clamp a) Keeper length...............................................................90 mm each
suitable for ACSR b) Thickness of metallic parts..................................................12 mm.
Twin Zebra c) No. of bolts for each conductor alongwith plain washer, spring
washers or lock nuts..............................................................4 Nos.
d) Size of bolts..........................................10 mm dia X 60 mm length
e) Terminal pad dimension..........................................75X75X12 mm
f) Bimetalic strip dimension...........................................75X75X1 mm
15. Isolator Clamp a) Keeper length...............................................................90 mm each
suitable for ACSR b) Thickness of metallic parts -................................................12 mm
Panther c) No. of bolts for each conductor alongwith plain washer, spring
washers or lock nuts..............................................................4 Nos.
d) Size of bolts..........................................10 mm dia X 60 mm length
e) Terminal pad dimension :........................................75X75X12 mm
f) Bimetalic strip dimension :........................................75X75X1 mm
 Appendix-II(A)
132 KV & 220 KV STRING INSULATOR HARDWARE

1 Power system 132KV/220KV 3 Phase 50 Cycles Effectively earthed.

2 Insulators:
Type Conventional B&S type
Diameter 255 mm
Spacing 145 mm
Colour Brown
Surface Glazed

3 Strings arrangements
Electro Mechanical
Nos. of Discs
S No. Strings arrangements strength
132 kV 220 kV 132 kV 220 kV
a) Suspension strings for normal 9 13 70 kN 70 kN
suspension location
b) Tension strings for normal 10 14 120 kN 120 kN
tension locations
c) Double suspension strings for 9x2 13x2 2x70 kN 2x70 kN
special location
d) Double tension strings for 10x2 14x2 2x120 kN 2x120 kN
special locations.
e) Minimum Failing load As above & relevant ISS

4 Accessories & Hardwares :-

(A) 132 kV Power Conductor Hardwares :
a) Clamps Suspension Tension
Slip strength (Max.) 1372 Kg. 8230 Kgs.
Ultimate strength 4500 Kg. 9144 Kgs.
Minimum failing load 4500 Kg. 9144 Kgs.
b) Other Hardware
Minimum failing load 4500 Kg. 9144 Kgs.
(B) 220 kV Power Conductor Hardwares :
a) Clamps Suspension Tension
Slip strength (Max.) 1993 Kg. 11985 Kgs.
Ultimate strength. 7000 Kg. 13289 Kgs.
Minimum failing load 7000 Kg. 13289 Kgs.
b) Other Hardware
Minimum failing load 7000 Kg. 13289 Kgs.
 Appendix-II(B)
132 KV & 220 KV STRING INSULATOR HARDWARES

132 kV STRING INSULATOR & HARDWARES

1 Power system 132 KV 3 Phase 50 cycle effectively
earthed.
2 Highest system voltage 145 KV(rms)
3 Visible discharge test (power frequency voltage) 105 KV(rms)
4 Wet power frequency with stand test 230 KV(rms)
5 Impulse voltage withstand test 550 KV(Peak)
6 Power frequency puncture withstand voltage 1.3 times the actual dry flash over
voltage
7 Minimum creepage distance of the insulator for 2250 mm
moderately polluted atmospheres (total)

220 KV STRING INSULATOR & HARDWARES

1 Power system 220 KV 3 Phase 50 cycle effectively
earthed.
2 Highest system voltage 245 KV(rms)
3 Visible discharge test (power frequency voltage) 154 KV(rms)
4 Wet power frequency withstand test 395 KV(rms)
5 Impulse voltage withstand test 900 KV(Peak)
6 Power frequency puncture withstand voltage 1.3 times the actual dry flashover voltage
7 Minimum creepage distance of the insulator for 3800 mm
moderately polluted atmospheres (total)
 A
ppendix-III TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CONDUCTOR AND
GROUND WIRE.

A. CONDUCTOR :
1 Material AAC conductor
2 Size 37/5.23 mm,794.46 mm sq. Code name
‘TARANTULA’
3 Minimum breaking load 123KN
4 Over all diameter 36.61 mm
5 Approx. mass (kg/km) 2191

1 Material ACSR Conductor

2 Size Aluminium 30/3.00 mm + Steel7/3.00 mm, 200
mm sq. Code name ‘Panther’
3 Minimum breaking load 9144 Kgs
4 Over all diameter 21.00 mm
5 Approx. mass (kg/km) 974

1 Material ACSR Conductor

2 Size Aluminium 54/3.18 mm + Steel7/3.18 mm, 420
mm sq. Code name ‘Zebra’
3 Minimum breaking load 13289 Kgs
4 Over all diameter 28.62 mm
5 Approx. mass (kg/km) 1621

B. EARTH/ GROUND WIRE :

1 Material Galvanised Steel
2 Size 7/3.15 Galvanised Steel Wire of 1100 N/[Link]
quality
3 Minimum breaking load 54KN
4 Over all diameter 9.45 mm

C. ACCESSORIES FOR EARTH/ GROUND WIRE :

Suspension Tension
A 7/3.15 mm size ground wire clamp
1 Slip strength (Max.) 1453 Kg 5520 Kg
2 Ultimate strength. 5810 Kg 5810 Kg
3 Minimum failing load 5810 Kg 5810 Kg
B Other hardwares
1 Minimum failing load 5810 Kg 5810 Kg
 Technical Specification of Galvanized Sub-Station Structure

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR FABRICATION, GALVANISING, TESTING AND

SUPPLY OF COMPLETE PACKAGE OF GALVANISED STEEL STRUCTURES ALONG
WITH REQUIRED G. I. BOLTS AND NUTS (ISI MARKED), SPRING WASHERS, ETC.
FOR 220 KV & 132 KV GRID SUB-STATIONS.

1.0 SCOPE:

1.1 This specification covers fabrication, galvanization testing & delivery of the structures as a
complete package along with required GI bolts with nuts (ISI marked) & Electro-galvanized spring
washers, etc. for 132 kV & 220 kV grid sub-stations, complete in all respect as per the structural
drawings to be provided by the purchaser to the successful bidder who in turn shall prepare model
assemblies after developing shop drawings. After approval of model assembly, the final bill of
material for the purpose of payment shall be prepared by the bidder and shall be submitted for
approval to the purchaser. The tentative steel sections generally used in each type of structure are
enclosed at Appendix-2.
The scope also includes loading at supplier‟s works and unloading & stacking at consignee‟s store /
site.

2.0 STANDARDS:

2.1 All materials shall comply in all respect with the requirements of the latest edition of the following
relevant Indian Standard except as modified by this specification. Where the relevant ISS is not
available, the material should comply the latest BSS.

S. No. Indian Standards Title

1. IS: 209 Specification for Zinc ingots.
2. IS: 802 Code of practice for use of structural steel in
overhead transmission line towers.
PART – I Material, Loads and permissible stress.
PART – II Fabrication, Galvanising, Inspection and packing.
PART – III Testing.
3. IS: 808 Dimensions for Hot Rolled Steel Beam, Column
Channel and Angle Sections.
4. IS: 1367 Technical supply conditions for threaded steel
fasteners.
PART – III Mechanical properties of Fasteners made of carbon
Steel and alloy Steel – Bolts, Screws and Studs.
PART – 6 Mechanical properties & test methods for nuts with
specified Proof loads.
PART – XIII Hot dip galvanised coatings on threaded Fasteners.
5. IS: 1573 Electro-plated coating for Zinc on iron and steel.
6. IS: 1852 Specification for Rolling and Cutting Tolerances for
Hot Rolled Steel products.
7. IS: 2016 Specification for Plain Washers.
8. IS: 2062 Steel for General Structural Purposes.
9. IS: 2629 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanising of Iron
and Steel.
10. IS: 2633 Method of testing uniformity of Coating of Zinc
coated articles.
11. IS: 3063 Fasteners: Single coil rectangular section Spring Lock
Washers.
12. IS: 4072 Specification for Steel for Spring Washers.
13. IS: 4759 Hot-dip Zinc coating on structural steel and other
allied products.
14. IS: 5369 General requirement for Plain Washer and Lock
Washers.
15. IS: 6610 Specification for heavy Washers for Steel Structures.
1
 Technical Specification of Galvanized Sub-Station Structure

16. IS: 6745 Methods of determination of mass of zinc coating on

zinc coated iron and steel articles.
17. IS: 6821 Method for sampling non threaded Fasteners
18. IS: 12427 Fasteners – Threaded Steel Fasteners – Hexagon
head Transmission Tower bolts.

3.0 MATERIALS:

3.1 The structure members should be made/fabricated from steel sections conforming to IS: 2062
(latest amended edition).

3.2 Procurement of zinc and all the steel material required for the fabrication of structures and
fasteners such as angles, plates, flats, channel, rods, etc. shall be arranged by the bidder at his cost.
The rate quoted for supply of structures shall include the cost of steel, fasteners and zinc also. The
procurement of steel section used in the fabrication shall be the responsibility of the bidder and the
purchaser will not be responsible for any extra cost of any type due to replacement of designed
section by higher section in case of non-availability of designed sections.

3.3 The bidder shall make his own arrangements for the procurement of steel sections before
commencement of works and of sufficient quantity of electrolytic zinc of proper quality for
galvanising structure members & fasteners. The purchaser shall be at liberty to have the samples of
steel and zinc used in structures & fasteners, test checked in any laboratory at his own cost and
reject the particular supply if it is observed below standard. However G. I. bolts and nuts should be
of ISI mark.

3.4 All raw materials required for the fabrication and galvanisation etc, and for complete execution of
work shall be stocked in adequate quantity by the bidder to ensure that the progress of the work is
not jeopardized. No relaxation in the delivery time shall be allowed on the pretext of non-
availability or short supply of raw materials / Bolts, nuts and spring washers etc. which may be
bought out items.

4.0 FASTENERS: G. I. BOLTS & NUTS AND WASHERS:

G. I. Bolts & Nuts, Pack Washers / Square Washers & Spring Washers shall be, used for joining
the columns & beam members & shall be arranged by the bidder, as per actual requirement.

4.1 All Bolts shall conform to IS: 12427 & nuts shall conform to IS: 1363 (Part – III). The G. I. Bolts
& Nuts should be ISI marked and shall be supplied from the approved vendors as per specification.

G. I. Bolts & Nuts shall be galvanised and shall have hexagonal heads and nuts, the heads being
forged out of solid steel rods and shall be truly concentric and square with the shank. The shank
shall be perfectly straight.

4.2 Fully threaded bolts shall not be used. The length of the bolts should be such that the threaded
portion shall not extend into the place of contact of the members.

4.3 All Bolts shall be threaded to take the full depth of the nut and threaded far enough to permit firm
gripping of the members, but not any further. It shall be ensured that the threaded portion of each
bolt protrudes not less than 3mm and not more than 8mm when fully tightened. All nuts shall fit
hand tight to the point where the shank of the bolt connects to the head.

4.4 Flat and tapered washers shall be provided wherever necessary. Spring washers shall be provided
for insertion under all nuts. These washers shall be of electro-galvanised steel and of the positive
lock type. Their thickness shall be 3.5 mm for 16 mm dia. bolts and 2.5 mm for 12 mm dia. bolts.
They shall be supplied from the approved vendors as per specification.

2
 Technical Specification of Galvanized Sub-Station Structure

4.5 The Nigam reserves the right to approve additional vendor(s) in the approved vendor list for the
items subject to meeting of following criteria:-

“Meeting of technical specification alongwith type test requirements as per specification/ relevant
standard.”

Note: “The Nigam however reserves right to approve additional vendor based on above criteria during
execution of order in case of unforeseen situation and in the interest of overall project.”

4.6 Insulator strings and earth wire clamp attachments: For attachment of tension / suspension
insulator strings a suitable swinging hanger on the structure (Beam) shall be provided so as to
obtain requisite clearance under extreme swinging conditions and free swinging of the string. The
hanger shall be designed to withstand load required as per design.

5.0 DETAILS OF STRUCTURES FOR FABRICATION:

The type of structures along with their unit weight and sections that shall be used are specified in
the Appendix-1 & 2 for 220 / 132 / 33 kV grid sub stations.

6.0 ----Deleted

7.0 WEIGHTS:

The weight of structure shall mean the weight of structures calculated by using standard sectional
weights of all steel structural members of the sizes indicated in the fabrication drawings and / or
subsequently revised drawings and bill of material without taking into consideration the reduction
in weight due to drilling of bolt-holes, skew cuts, chamfering etc. or the increase in weight due to
galvanisation.

The bidder shall quote per MT rate for complete package of structures along with its fasteners. The
weight of complete package shall be the sum of weight of structures and weight of fasteners viz.
bolts & nuts, spring washers and flat / pack washers.

8.0 DRAWING AND MODEL ASSEMBLY:

The structural drawings of each structure shall be given to the successful Bidders. The successful
bidders shall develop shop drawings of individual members based on these structural drawings &
shall offer one set of model assembly of ordered structures to them for checking / approval before
commencement of mass fabrication. Such model assembly shall form part of the supply.

After successful checking of model assembly of structure(s) the bidder shall furnish 03(THREE)
sets of drawings and Bill of Materials to the purchaser for approval. Out of which 01 (ONE) set
shall be returned after approval. After approval the supplier shall furnish 15 (FIFTEEN) sets of the
approved drawings and Bill of materials to this office. In addition the supplier shall furnish auto
positive / tracing for reproduction of these drawings. Instead of auto positive, CD duly loaded with
drawings & BOM in Auto CAD format may be furnished.

9.0 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP:

The fabrication of structures shall be in accordance with the following:

9.1 All parts of the structures shall be fabricated in accordance with the shop drawings to be developed
by the successful bidder as per the structural drawings to be provided by the purchaser and to be
approved by the purchaser.
Such shop drawing, containing complete information necessary for fabrication of the component
parts of the structures shall be prepared. These drawings shall clearly show the member sizes,
length and marks, hole positions, gauge lines, bend lines, edge distances, amount of chipping,
notching etc.
3
 Technical Specification of Galvanized Sub-Station Structure

9.2 In the case of members to be bent, the shop drawings will indicate provision for the variation in
length to be made.

9.3 Structures shall be of stub construction. Unless otherwise specified, welding at any point shall not
be permitted.

9.4 The structures shall be accurately fabricated to bolt together easily on the side without any undue
strain on the structure members or in the bolt, otherwise, the structure or part of it shall be
rejected.

9.5 No bolt holes shall be more than 1.5 mm bigger than the corresponding bolt diameter.

9.6 Workmanship and finish shall correspond to the best modern fabrication practice. All steel sections
before any work is done on them shall be carefully leveled, straightened and made true to method
which shall not injure the material so that when assembled the adjacent surfaces are in close contact
throughout. No rough edges shall be permitted anywhere throughout the work.

9.7 Cutting may be effected by shearing cropping, flame cutting or sawing. The surfaces so cut out
shall be clean, smooth, reasonably square and free from any distortion.

9.8 In general all fabrication work shall conform to provisions of IS: 802 (Part – I) – with latest
amendment. However the details given in this specification shall prevail in the specified items.

10.0 DRILLIING AND PUNCHING:

10.1 All steel sections, before any cutting work is started; shall be carefully straightened and trued by
pressure and not by hammering. They shall again be trued up after being punched and drilled. No
rough edges fresh from shear shall be left. All sheared and cut-ends shall be flaked off.

10.2 Holes for bolts shall be drilled or punched through jig but drilled holes shall be preferred. All holes
in material over 12 mm thick must be drilled through the plates and sections forming the joint in
one operation. The holes near the bend line of a bent member, on both sides of band line, shall be
punched/ drilled after bending and relative position of these holes shall be maintained with the use
of proper template/jigs and fixtures.

10.3 Punched holes must be square to the plates and the walls of the holes paralleled. The following
tolerance in accuracy of punched holes is permissible:-
i) Holes must be perfectly circular and no tolerance in this respect is permissible.

ii) The maximum allowable difference in diameter of the holes on the two sides of plates or
angle is 0.8 mm i.e. the allowable taper in a punched hole should not exceed 0.8 mm on
diameter.

iii) Holes must be square with the plates or Angles and slant holes will not be permitted.
All burrs left by drill or punch shall be removed completely. The bidder shall state clearly
the extent of punching covered by his bid. When the structure members are in position, the
holes shall be truly opposite to each other. Drifting or riming to enlarge defective holes shall
not be permitted. Minimum edge distance from the centre of any bolt holes shall not be less
than what has been indicated hereunder:

Diameter of Minimum flange width Minimum rolled edge Minimum sheared edge
bolts of sections distance distance
16 mm 45 mm 20 mm 23 mm

4
 Technical Specification of Galvanized Sub-Station Structure

11.0 ERECTION MARK:

Each individual structure member shall carry a code number conforming to the component
number given to it in the fabrication drawings/bill of material. The code number of approved sizes
shall be stamped with a metal die on the member before galvanizing and shall be legible after
galvanisation. The letters indicating the different types of structures shall precede the code number.
The name of the manufacturers in suitable code shall also be stamped with metal die. These
markings shall be with marking dies of 16 mm size.

12.0 GALVANISING:

All members of the structures shall be galvanised. Galvanising shall be done after all fabrication
work is completed. Galvanising of the members of the structure shall conform to IS: 4759; with
latest amendment.

13.0 PACKING:

The material shall be boxed or bundled for transport in the following manner:
13.1 Angles shall be packed in bundles securely wrapped four times around at each end and every foot
with No. 9 SWG gauge wire with ends twisted tightly. Gross weight of any bundle shall not exceed
approximately 450 Kg.

13.2 Cleat angles, brackets, filler plates and similar loose pieces shall be nested and bolted together in
multiples and securely wired together through holes, wrapped round at least four times with No. 9
SWG gauge wire and ends twisted tightly. Gross weight of each bundle shall not exceed
approximately 70 Kg.

13.3 The packing shall avoid losses / damages during transit.

13.4 Accessories such as Bolts & Nuts, spring washers, U-Bolts with nuts and flat washers / pack
washers shall be packed in double gunny bags duly tagged / labeled to show contents in them.

14.0 MARKING ON PACKING:

14.1 Each bundle or package shall have the following marking on it :

(i) The name and designation of the consignee (to be furnished by the purchaser).
(ii) Ultimate destination as required by the purchaser.
(iii) The relevant marks and number of members, or reference number of small components like
gusset plates, various attachments, etc. for each identification.

14.2 The marking shall be stencilled in indelible ink on the top members in the bundles of structures
steel.

15.0, 16.0, 17.0 ---Deleted

18.0 INSPECTION, TESTING & CHECKING:

18.1 The finished products before acceptance shall be subjected to inspection in respect of dimensional
check up and testing as per IS: 2062 (latest amended), if not supported by certificate from main
producer (viz. SAIL / TISCO / RINL). The certificate for type test (chemical composition &
mechanical properties test) shall be furnished to this office along with inspection call, otherwise
testing shall be arranged at independent / NABL accredited / Govt. approved Laboratory or shall
be witnessed by the Inspecting Officer. However the marking of prime producer shall be verified
physically by Inspecting Officer. If the same are in order then Inspecting Officer shall issue
clearance subject to other satisfactory tests.
18.2 The inspection shall be carried out as per Clause No.1.27 “Inspection and Testing” of Section-II
General conditions of contract

5
 Technical Specification of Galvanized Sub-Station Structure

19.0 SAMPLING:

For ascertaining the conformity of the lot to the requirement of this specification, the inspection
shall be carried out on each lot separately. The number of pieces selected at random shall be to the
extent as indicated below:-

(a) Workmanship & dimension : 3% sample taken from each type of finished
checking structure materials.
(b) Chemical test : One sample from every 50MT or part thereof
of each section.
(c) Tensile test : One sample from every 50MT or part thereof
of each section
(d) Bend test : One sample from every 50MT or part thereof
of each section.
(e) Galvanisation test : One sample from every 50MT or part thereof
of each section

20.0 & 21.0 ---Deleted

6
 Technical Specification of Galvanized Sub-Station Structure

Appendix -1

STATEMENT SHOWING UNIT WEIGHT OF VARIOUS STRUCTURES

S. NO. Type of Unit wt. of structure Wt. of Structure Wt. of G.I Bolts & Wt. of Spring
Structure along with G.I. Bolts & Nuts Washers
Nuts and Spring (MT)
Washers (MT) (MT) (MT)
1 AT1 2.560979 2.478000 0.077705 0.005274
2 AT3 1.694150 1.642370 0.048280 0.003500
3 AT4 3.436822 3.305000 0.123758 0.008064
4 AT6 0.980670 0.945800 0.032460 0.002410
5 AT8 1.618004 1.570000 0.044881 0.003123
6 AB 1.544000 1.468000 0.071029 0.004971
7 BT1 1.790798 1.712000 0.073731 0.005067
8 BT3 1.324292 1.266230 0.054183 0.003879
9 BT4 2.594846 2.483590 0.104407 0.006849
10 BT6 0.700938 0.669000 0.029760 0.002178
11 BT7 1.186982 1.132000 0.051418 0.003564
12 BB1 0.810010 0.760000 0.046500 0.003510
13 AO1 1.097214 1.072400 0.023131 0.001683
14 AO1(T) 0.236476 0.229000 0.006963 0.000513
15 AO3 0.265388 0.255100 0.009568 0.000720
16 AO4 0.231212 0.221400 0.009128 0.000684
17 AO5 0.196600 0.183000 0.012700 0.000900
18 BO1 0.593172 0.572900 0.018904 0.001368
19 BO1(T) 0.171392 0.164200 0.006697 0.000495
20 P 0.089500 0.081700 0.007296 0.000504
21 Q w/o Stub 0.632500 0.614500 0.016866 0.001134
22 Q with Stub 0.713328 0.688500 0.023226 0.001602
23 R 0.440964 0.428500 0.011672 0.000792
24 GD Beam 0.540270 0.513200 0.025170 0.001900
25 X 0.050282 0.044000 0.005859 0.000423
26 Y w/o Stub 0.332140 0.313000 0.017840 0.001300
27 Y with Stub 0.385220 0.365000 0.018850 0.001370
28 Z 0.298513 0.289000 0.008883 0.000630
29 GF 5.4 Meter 0.250000 0.230000 0.018780 0.001220
30 33 kV CT Str. 0.196030 0.190300 0.005330 0.000400
31 X-15 0.248720 0.241300 0.006916 0.000504
32 PIS 0.171382 0.164000 0.006887 0.000495

7
 Technical Specification of Galvanized Sub-Station Structure

Appendix -2
STATEMENT SHOWING STEEL SECTIONS TO BE USED IN VARIOUS GALVANISED
STEEL STRUCTURES FOR 220 KV AND 132 KV GSS
S. No. Type of Generally section involved
Structure M. S. Angle Unequal Angle Thickness Rod for Hanger /
of Plate Bolt / D-Shackle (in
(in mm.) mm)
1 AT1 150×12, 130×10, 110×8, 100×8, 45×30×5 12, 10, 8, 6 ---
75×6, 65×6, 50×6, 45×5.
2 AT4 150×16, 150×12, 130×12, 110×10, 45×30×5 12, 8, 6, 5, ---
65×6, 45×5, 100×8, 50×5, 75×6. 4, 2
3 AT3 110×12, 110×8, 100×6, 45×5 45×30×5 8, 6 ---
4 AT6 100×6, 100×8, 75×6, 45×5. 45×30×5 8, 6 ---
5 AT8 110×10, 65×6, 45×5, 100×8, 50×5, 45×30×5 12, 10, 8, 6 ---
75×6, 50×6
6 AB1 100×6, 100×8, 75×6 45×30×5 10, 8, 6 16/20
7 BT1 130×10, 100×8, 75×6, 65×6, 60×5, 12, 8, 6 ---
45×5.
8 BT3 110×10, 100×8, 100×6, 55×5, 45×5, 45×30×5 --- ---
65×6.
9 BT4 150×6, 100×6, 65×6, 50×5, 45×5, --- --- --
60×5
10 BT6 90×6, 75×6, 65×6, 50×5, 45×5 ---- 6 ---
11 BT7 110×10, 65×6, 75×6, 45×5, 50×6. 45×30×5 10, 8, 6 ---
12 BB1 65×6, 75×6, 45×5. 45×30×5 10, 6 16/20
13 AO1 80×6, 75×6, 65×6, 50×6, 45×5 45×30×5 6 ---
14 AO1(T) 80×6, 65×6, 50×6, 45×5 45×30×5 --- ---
15 AO3 75×6, 50×6, 45×5 --- --- ---
16 AO4 75×6, 50×6, 45×5 --- --- ---
17 AO5 75×8, 75×6, 45×5. --- 6 ---
18 BO1 100×8, 75×6, 65×6, 50×6, 45×5. --- 8, 6 ---
19 BO1(T) 65×6, 45×5. --- 10 ---
20 P 50×6, 45×5 45×30×5 10, 6 ---
21 Q with Stub 100×8, 90×6, 75×6, 50×6, 45×5. 45×30×5 6, 5 ---
22 Q w/o Stub 90×8, 75×6, 45×5 45×30×5 --- ---
23 R 110×10, 100×8, 45×5. ---- --- ---
24 GD Beam 75×6, 50×6, 45×5, 65×6. --- 6 16/20
25 X 45×6 45×30×5 12,6 ---
26 Y with Stub 90×6, 65×6, 55×5, 50×6. 45×30×5 --- ---
27 Y w/o Stub 90×6, 65×6, 50×6 45×30×5 --- ---
28 Z 100×8 45×30×5 --- ---
29 GF 5.4 mtr. 90×6, 75×6, 65×6, 50×6, 45×5. 45×30×5 10, 8, 6 16/20
30 33 kV CT Str. 90×6, 75×6, 65×6, 50×6, 45×5. 45×30×5 10, 8, 6 ---

31 X-15 75×6, 50×6, 65×6, 45×5 --- 6, 10 ---

32 PIS 65×6 --- --- ---

8
 Technical Specification of Galvanized Sub-Station Structure

Appendix -3

CHARACTERSTIC / PROPERTIES REQUIRED

S. No. Characteristics / Properties Required

A. PROPERTIES CLASS:
i) For Bolts: 5.6 as specified in IS:1367(Part-3)
ii) For Nuts: 5 as specified in IS:1367(Part-6)

B. CHEMICAL COMPOSITION:
i) For Bolts:
a) Carbon (% Max.) 0.55
b) Phosphorous (% Max.) 0.05
c) Sulphur (% Max.) 0.06
ii) For Nuts:
a) Carbon (% Max.) 0.50
b) Phosphorous (% Max.) 0.11
c) Sulphur (% Max.) 0.15

C. MECHANICAL PROPERTIES:
i) For Hexagonal Bolts:
a) Tensile strength (N / mm sq.) 500
b) Yield stress (N / mm sq.) 300
c) Stress under proof load (N / mm sq.) 280
d) Brinell Hardness (HB) Min. 147
e) Rockwell hardness (HRB) Min. 79
f) Vickers hardness (HV) Min. 155
g) Elongation after fracture (3 Min.) 20%
h) Strength under wedge loading 500
(N / mm sq.)
i) Head soundness No fracture
j) Cantilever Load (Kg.) 150
ii) For Hexagonal Nuts:
a) Proof stress (N / mm sq.) 490
b) Vicker‟s Hardness (HV) Max. 302

D. GALVANISING (HOT DIP MASS & EQT. THICKNESS OF COATING):

i) Max. average
a) Mass of coating (g / msq.) 375
b) Thickness of coating (Micrometer) 54
ii) Min. individual
a) Mass of coating (g / msq.) 300
b) Thickness of coating (Micrometer) 43

9
 Technical Specification of Galvanized Sub-Station Structure

Appendix -4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR FABRICATION, GALVANISING, TESTING AND SUPPLY
OF COMPLETE PACKAGE OF GALVANISED STEEL STRUCTURES ALONG WITH
REQUIRED G. I. BOLTS WITH NUTS (ISI MARKED), SPRING WASHERS, ETC. FOR 220 KV &
132 KV GRID SUB-STATIONS.

S. No. Technical specification to Name of IS / other standard / Other particulars,

which material confirm specification to which material if any.
should conform.
1. Fabricated, Galvanised
steel Structures
a) Structural Steel IS-2062 with latest Class `A'
amendments
b) Fabrication IS-802 with latest amendments
c) Rolling & Cutting IS-1852 with latest
tolerances amendments
d) Galvanisation IS-4759 with latest
amendments
2. G.I. Bolts & Nuts IS:12427 with latest The bolt shall be of
(ISI marked) amendments property class 5.6 and grade
„C‟.
IS:1363 with latest The nuts shall be of
amendments property class 5 and grade
„C‟.

3. Electro-galvanised Spring IS: 3063 & IS: 4072 with latest

washers amendments

10
Technical Specification of LED Lighting

SPECIFICATION OF LED LIGHTING IN GRID SUB STATIONS

1.0 SCOPE

This specification covers design & engineering of Sub-station lighting system using LED
lamps and accessories, tubular poles (for steel lighting) distribution pillar / panels / boxes,
PVC cables, Cable trays etc. which shall be supplied by the contractor for installation of
luminaries, their control gear and wiring on them at an appropriate height above gravel
level. The bidder will also design, supply and install lighting fixtures and accessories
required for Control Room building etc. The lights in switchyard shall be provided on
different types of Lighting mast at selected points.

2.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

The lighting system for outdoor and indoor areas of sub-stations shall be designed in such
a way that uniform illumination is achieved. In outdoor switchyard, only equipment/ bus bar
areas are to be illuminated and luminaries shall be aimed as far as possible towards
Transformers and circuit breakers. The wattage of LED Luminary is to be suitably decided
after conducting the detail engineering for the locations, where these Luminaries are to be
used. The Locations are generally in EHV grade Sub-station switch yard area, Street
Lighting, Control Room Building etc. Latest practices of adoption of these systems are to
be strictly followed. Details of design for adoption of LED Luminary system is to be
furnished for review, its acceptance and approval. The Contractor shall submit general
arrangement/ lighting layout and wiring diagram with all terminal details for approval of the
RVPN.

A. LIGHTING FIXTURE:

(a) All lighting fixtures complete with required LED lamps suitable to be fitted inside
switch yard & all street light and LED lights for indoors (adopted as per Govt. norms
for energy efficiency) and all required accessories shall be within the scope of the
bidder.

(b) Fixture shall conform to latest IS/ IEC and its latest amendment. All equipments and
accessories shall be suitable for continuous operation.

(c) LED lamp fixtures shall be complete with all necessary wiring and accessories.
These shall be mounted in the fitting assembly only. Flood lighting shall have
suitable base plate/ frame for mounting on switchyard structures.

(d) The emergency lighting fixtures shall be designed for use in 110 V ±10% DC system.

(e) Light fittings shall be so arranged that the required lux values specified are
maintained, with supply of required fixtures and supports.

(f) Each lighting fixture shall be provided with a suitable erthing terminal.

(g) All fixtures shall be designed for minimum glare. The finish of the fixture shall be
such that no bright spots are produced either by direct light source or by reflection.

1
Technical Specification of LED Lighting

(h) MCCBs, MCBs & Surge Protection Devices of reputed make complying with relevant
IS & IEC shall be used.

(i) All receptacles shall be of cast steel or aluminium, heavy duty type, suitable for fixing
on wall or column and complete with individual switch.

The different types of lighting fixtures to be provided shall be submitted for the approval of
RVPN.

B. LIGHTING MAST:

The lighting mast required for switchyard lighting shall be hot dip galvanised steel tubular
type having height of 20 mtrs and shall conform to the drawings approved by the RVPN.

C. LIGHTING POLES:

The lighting poles required for street lighting shall be hot dip galvanised steel tubular type
complete with fixing brackets and junction boxes and shall conform to the drawings
approved by the RVPN.

D. LIGHTING WIRES & CABLES:

The wiring used for lighting shall be of 1100 V grade, PVC insulated cable of standard
products of reputed manufacturers. Armoured PVC cables are to be used for the switch
yard lighting, street lighting and any other out door lighting system.

E. GROUNDING:

All lighting panels, junction boxes, fixtures, conduits etc. shall be grounded in compliance
with the provision of I.E. Rules.

3.0 LIGHTING LEVELS

3.01 The average LUX level of 20 is to be maintained in switchyard. However, a lux level of 50
is to be maintained in switchyard on main equipments such as transformer and circuit
breakers.

3.02 Lighting in other areas such as control room, office rooms, PLCC room and battery room &
other areas (i.e street light) shall be such that the average LUX level to be maintained
shall be as under :

S. No. Area LUX

1. Control Room 300
2. Office/PLCC room 150
3. Battery & other rooms 100
4. Other areas 30

2
Technical Specification of LED Lighting

3.03 The lighting level shall take into account appropriate light output ratio of luminaires,
coefficient of utilization maintenance factor (of 0.7 or less) to take into account
deterioration with time and dust deposition.

4.0 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

4.01 The Emergency Lighting shall operate automatically on failure of AC lighting supply.
Separate wiring and distribution board shall be provided for these lights. Light points using
LED lamps (DC) of 70W as per following requirement shall be provided by the contractor:

S. No. Place Quantity

1. Control Room 2 Nos.
2. Battery Room 1 No.
3. PLCC Room 1 No.
4. Office 1 No.
5. Corridor 1 No.

3
RVPN/SE (Proc.I)/E-3/A-5/BN-90150024XX 7/3.15mm GSS Wire

VOLUME-II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF GALVANISED STEEL STRANDED WIRE

OF SIZE 7/3.15 mm (1100 N / mm sq. quality)

1.0 SCOPE:
This specification provides for the manufacture, testing before despatch, supply and delivery of
Galvanized Steel Stranded Wire of size 7/3.15 mm (1100 N / mm sq. quality) on variable
prices for the purpose of earthing and protection of power transmission lines, as per the
particulars given in Appendix-A attached with this specification.

2.1 STANDARDS:
The Galvanized Steel Stranded wire shall comply in all respects with the latest edition of
Indian Standard Specification IS: 12776 / 2002 with its latest amendments and associated
Indian Standard Specifications as mentioned therein, in all respects except mentioned herein
otherwise.

2.2 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:

2.2.1 The hardware and accessories for power conductor & ground wires shall be suitable for
being installed directly in air along with the Insulator string, power conductor and
ground wire for 132KV/220KV S/C Transmission Lines.

2.2.2 The climatic conditions at site under which the equipment shall operate satisfactory are
as under.
1) Max. Ambient Air Temperature 50 Deg.C.
2) Max. daily average ambient temperature 45 Deg C
3) Max. yearly weighted ambient Temprature 35 Deg C
4) Minimum ambient Air Temperature (-) 5 Deg.C.
5) Maximum relative humidity (%). 90 %
6) Minimum relative humidity (%). 10 %
7) Height above main sea level. Less than 1000
meters
8) Dust storms are liable to occur during the period March to July
9) Average No. of thunder storm days/annum. 40 days
10) Average annual rainfall (mm). 10 to 100cm (depending
Upon area)
11) Average No. of months of tropical monsoon conditions. 4 months
12) Seismic level horizontal acceleration 0.3g
13) Degree of Pollution Heavy
14) Intensity of solar radiation 1.0 kW/Sq.M
15) Max. Wind load 195kg/Sq.M

2.2.3 TROPICAL TREATMENT: All the material covered in the specification shall be
suitable designed and treated for normal life and satisfactory operation under the Hot
and hazardous tropical climate conditions specified under clause 1.0 above shall be
dust and vermin proof. All the parts and surface which are subject to corrosion shall be
made of such material and shall be provided with such protective finish as would
protect the material covered in the specification installed from any injurious effect of
excessive humidity.

1|Page
RVPN/SE (Proc.I)/E-3/A-5/BN-90150024XX 7/3.15mm GSS Wire

3.0 MATERIAL:
3.1 The material offered shall be of best quality and workmanship. The steel wires shall be drawn
from carbon steel wire rods produced either by the acid or by the basic open hearth process, the
electric furnace process or the basic oxygen Process & shall have the following chemical
composition:

Element Percentage composition.

Carbon 0.55 Max.
Manganese 0.40 to 0.9
Phosphorous 0.04 Max.
Sulphur 0.04 Max.
Silicon 0.15 to 0.35

3.2 The Zinc coating shall conform to requirement of heavily coated wires as laid down in IS: 4826
/ 1979 with its latest amendments "Galvanized Coating on Round Steel Wire".

4.0 SIZES AND CONSTRUCTION:

The construction and lay ratio of GSS wire of size 7 / 3.15 mm shall be as per IS: 12776 /
2002with its latest amendments. The supplier shall, however, give necessary details in
Schedule – V.

5.0 LENGTH AND JOINTS:

5.1 STANDARD LENGTH:
The GSS wire of 7 / 3.15 mm size shall be supplied in the standard length of 1500
meters with + 5% tolerance.

5.2 RANDOM LENGTHS:

Not more than 10 % of the total quantity can be supplied in random lengths. However, each of
the random length should not be less than the 50 % of the standard length.

5.3 JOINTS:
Joints shall be permitted in individual wire during stranding but these stranding joints shall be
not less than 15 meters apart in finished strands.

5.4 DRUMS:
The GSS wire shall be supplied in non-returnable wooden drums generally conforming to IS:
1778 / 1980 with its latest amendments. In each wooden drum, two standard lengths shall be
supplied.

6.0 QUANTITIES:
This specification covers the requirement of 666 KM of GSS wire of size 7/3.15 mm (1100
N/mm sq. quality). The Nigam reserves the right to purchase GSS wire in any quantity as
considered necessary at the time of deciding the bids.
The purchaser reserves the right to place repeat order for extra items or additional quantities up
to 50% of the quantity of the individual items on the rates and conditions in the contract. The
delivery period for such extra/ additional items shall be increased proportionately as per
delivery period indicated in Delivery Schedule – DEL of the specification.

7.0 INSPECTION & TESTING:

2|Page
RVPN/SE (Proc.I)/E-3/A-5/BN-90150024XX 7/3.15mm GSS Wire

7.1 Galvanized steel stranded wire shall be subjected to various tests as specified in the latest
edition of IS: 12776 / 2002 with its latest amendments before despatch from the works.
The bidder shall furnish valid and authenticated Type test certificate conducted at laboratory
accredited by NABL/ International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation Mutual Recognition
Arrangement (ILAC-MRA) signatory agency (in case of foreign laboratory), accredited for the
tests conducted for same rating(s) / size(s) of Galvanized Steel Stranded Wire, as quoted by
him for Breaking load, Elongation and DC Resistance test as per relevant ISS. Such type test
certificate should not be older than 10 years as on the date of bid opening. For this purpose date
of conducting type test will be considered.

7.2 SCALE OF SAMPLING AND CRITERIA FOR CONFORMITY:

The scale of sampling and criteria for conformity shall be as per Clause 9.0 & 10.0 captioned
‘SAMPLING CRITERIA’ and ‘REJECTION AND RE-TEST’ respectively of IS: 12776 /
2002 with its latest amendments.

7.3 VERIFICATION OF LENGTH:

Ten Percent (10%) of the total drums of GSS wire offered for verification shall be subjected to
verification of length and manufacturing defects, if any, by way of rewinding. All facilities for
rewinding of the GSS wire drums shall be provided by the supplier.

7.4 The inspection shall be carried as per Clause No.1.27 ‘Inspection and Testing’ of Section – II
General Conditions of Contract.

8.0 DELIVERY:
The material shall be supplied as per Delivery Schedule mentioned in Schedule - DEL of this
specification.

9.0 PACKING AND MARKING:

9.1 The GSS wire shall be supplied in non-returnable wooden drums generally conforming to IS:
1778 / 1980 with latest amendments (except that requirement of seasonal wood shall not be
insisted upon). The drums shall be so constructed and made from such materials that they
satisfy the conditions specified in IS: 1778 / 1980 with its latest amendments. The flanges and
barrel shall be free from protruding material capable of damaging the wire or the hands of the
operator during rotation of the drum. The general constructional features of the drums shall be
as specified in IS: 1778 / 1980 with its latest amendments. The packing shall have to be done
as per standard practice worthy of Rail / Road transport. The wooden drums shall be strong
enough to ensure the delivery of GSS wire in the field without causing any damage or
deformation and should be able to withstand all stresses due to transportation and handling
during the stringing operation.

9.2 Each strand shall be individually welded to prevent parting of two lengths at a tension less than
15 kN. The two ends where the first length finishes and the second length starts shall be clearly
marked with adhesive tape or cut off. The length between the two marks shall be treated as
scrapped and shall not be taken into account for measurement purposes.

9.3 The GSS wire on each drum shall be securely fastened at each end. The outer end of the GSS
wire shall be fastened inside the drum against one of the sides of the flanges while it is under
tension. The inner end of the GSS wire shall be fastened outside the drum against one of the
sides of the flanges.

9.4 The GSS wire shall be tightly and uniformly spooled on the drum. The wrap shall be laid
snugly against the side of the preceding wrap. The first and last wrap in each layer shall fit

3|Page
RVPN/SE (Proc.I)/E-3/A-5/BN-90150024XX 7/3.15mm GSS Wire

snugly against the sides of the flanges. Drums shall be lagged with sufficiently strong wooden
laggings to support the full drum without crushing.

9.5 The manufacturer shall ensure that when the GSS wire is completely wound on the drum, a
space corresponding to 5 to 8 cm height between the last layer of the GSS wire and the ends of
the flanges is uniformly leftover. This is an essential requirement in order to ensure that the
GSS wire does not come closer to the ends and get damaged during transportation, reeling /
unreeling or rolling on the undulated grounds / fields. Waterproof paper shall be wrapped
round the barrel before winding the GSS wire and also wrapped round over the GSS wire
when completely wound.

9.6 The drum carrying the GSS wire, when lagged with strong wooden laggings shall be tied up
with 2 binders of steel wires of adequate size over the laggings enabling them to keep laggings
intact. The wooden drums shall be painted with Aluminium paint from the inside and outside
of the flanges of the drum.

9.7 The wooden drums shall be legibly marked with waterproof mark or provided with metal tags
securely attached to the reel to avoid possibilities of goods being lost or wrongly despatched.

9.8 All the wooden drums shall carry the following information:
i) Manufacturer's name or trade name & place of manufacturing in the country.
ii) Name of the consignee with full address.
iii) Destination station.
iv) Drum Number.
v) Size of GSS wire.
vi) No. of lengths in drum.
vii) Net weight of GSS wire.
viii) Gross and tare weight of drum.
ix) ISS certificate mark, if any.
x) Arrow marking for unwinding.
xi) Grade of Galvanized steel earth wire

10.0 SAG AND TENSION CHARTS:

The successful bidder shall be required to submit seven copies of stringing charts for GSS wire
showing initial and final sags and tensions for various temperatures and spans. One set of chart
should be in ink drawn on tracing cloth. The design data of lines on which the GSS wire will
be used shall be indicated in the detailed purchase order. It will however, be the responsibility
of the contractor to obtain / get such details timely from the purchaser.

11.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The bidder shall fill in the guaranteed technical particulars in the prescribed proforma at
Schedule - GTP and submit the same with his bid. The bids without schedule of guaranteed
technical particulars duly filled in are likely to be ignored.

12.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

The bidders are required to furnish the quality assurance plan alongwith their bid, which is to
be followed by the supplier during manufacturing of the equipment.

The manufacturing Quality Plan (MQP) shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and
approval. Manufacturing Quality Plan(MQP) will detail out for all the material, components
and equipment, various tests/inspections to be carried out as per the requirement of purchaser
specification and standards mentioned therein and quality practices & procedure followed by
manufacturer’s/suppliers/sub-suppliers quality control organization, the relevant reference
documents and standards, acceptance norms, inspection documents raised etc. during all stages
of materials procurement, manufacture assembly and final testing/performance testing.
4|Page
RVPN/SE (Proc.I)/E-3/A-5/BN-90150024XX 7/3.15mm GSS Wire

5|Page
RVPN/SE (Proc.I)/E-3/A-5/BN-90150024XX 7/3.15mm GSS Wire

APPENDIX "A"

PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF GSS WIRE OF SIZE

7 / 3.15 mm OF 1100 N / mm sq. QUALITY.

S. NO. DESCRIPTION 7 / 3.15 mm GSS wire

1. Construction 7 / 3.15 mm
2. Wire size (in mm)
a) Standard 3.15±2%
b) Maximum 3.21
c) Minimum 3.09
3. Min. tensile strength of wire (in N / Sq mm)
a) Before stranding 1100
b) After stranding 1050
4. Min. Torsion of wire on 100 D
a) Before stranding 20
b) After stranding 18
5. Zinc coating on wires
a) Amount of coating (in gm. / Sq. m.)
i) Before stranding 240
ii) After stranding 228
b) Uniformity of coating.
i) Before stranding 3 dips of a minute
ii) After stranding 2 dips of 1 minute& 1 dip of 30 s

6. Strand lay & lay length (in mm) RH 12 to 18 times the nominal
strand diameter of earth wire
7. Min. breaking force of Galvanized steel Earth strand 54.00
(in KN)
8. Approx Mass / Km of Galvanized steel earth strand 426
(in Kg)
9. Equivalent modulus of elasticity (in Kg / Sq mm) 19 × 103
10. Max. D.C. Resistance per KM of the Galvanized steel 3.41
earth strand at 20 Degree C. (in Ohms)
11. Coefficient of linear expansion per Deg. Cent. 11.5 x 10-6
12. Min. elongation of wire (on 200 mm gauge length)
(in percent).
a) Before stranding 4
b) After stranding 3.5
13. Density of high tensile galvanized steel wire at a temp. 7.8
of 20 Deg. C (in gm / cubic cm)

6|Page
 Technical Specification of Various Steel Sections New NIB

VOLUME-II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS FOR THE PURCHASE

OF VARIOUS STEEL SECTIONAGAINST BN-90150024XX).

1.0 SCOPE:-

1.1 This specification provides for manufacture, testing, inspection & testing before despatch,
supply and delivery of steel sections and it’s unloading at Consignee’s stores at anywhere in
Rajasthan for use in structural work and earthing purposes.

1.2 Steel sections shall also be suitable for welded, bolted and riveted structures and for general
engineering purposes and shall conform to Grade SAE 1018 or any other national,
international standard against which the quality of steel will conform to IS 226/2062 (latest
amended).

1.3 Where welding is employed for fabrication and guaranteed weld ability is required, welding
procedure should be as specified in IS:9595/1980 and steel section shall conform to Grade
SAE 1018 or any other national, international standard against which the quality of steel will
conform to IS 226/2062.

2.0 STANDARDS:

2.1 Except as modified in this specification, the material, and purpose of material covered under
"SCOPE" clause 1.1 to 1.3 shall confirm to the latest revision with amendments thereof the
following bureau of Indian Standards/ Other standards:

S. Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS)

Title
No. / Other standards
Grade SAE 1018, or any other
national, international standard
1. against which the quality of steel Steel for General Structural Purpose
will conform to IS 226/2062.
(Latest Amended)
Method of Chemical Analysis of Steel (Latest
2. 228
Amended)
Mechanical testing of metals: - Tensile
3. 1608 / 1995
Testing. (Latest Amended)
Steel-Conversion of elongation Values Part.I
4. 38.3 Part I / 1989
Carbon & alloy Steels. (Latest Amended)
Ground technical delivery requirements for
5. 8910/1978
steel & steel products.
Testing & evaluation procedure for Y Groove
6. 10842/1984
crack ability test.
7. 1599/1985 Method for bend test. (Latest Amended)
Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot Rolled
8. 1852/1985
steel products. (Latest Amended)

3.0 MATERIAL:

3.1 The steel sections shall conform to following:-

S.
Item Grade Designation Relevant Standard
No.
1. Steel for general E 250 A Grade SAE 1018, or any other
structural Purpose national, international standard
against which the quality of steel will
1|Page
 Technical Specification of Various Steel Sections New NIB

conform to IS 226/2062.

3.2 The bidders shall make their own arrangements for the procurement of the steel billets
(Purchase from prime producers only) from which the steel sections to be manufactured in
sufficient quantity. Steel sections manufactured from billets of prime producers shall only
be accepted and if it is observed below standard, the particular lot may be rejected.

3.3 The raw material i.e. billets, for manufacturing of steel sections shall be stocked in adequate
quantity by the bidder to ensure that the progress of the work is not jeopardised.

4.0 DETAILS OF STEEL SECTIONS:

The details of steel sections required is, as under which indicates only provisional qty. and
material should conform relevant IS in all respects. However the net qty. to be considered shall
be determined later on at the time of finalisation of bid.

S. Name of the Section Total Quantity Relevant IS/Standard Grade

No. (MT)
1 Various Steel Sections of 2996.000
following sizes
(i) M.S. Flat 75 x12mm

(ii) M.S. Flat 50 x12mm

(iii) M.S. Flat 50 x10 mm Grade SAE 1018, or any E 250 A

other national,
(iv) M.S. Flat 50 x 6 mm international standard
against which the quality
(v) MS Round 40 mm of steel will conform to IS
226/2062.
(vi) MS Round 28 mm

(vii) MS Round 25 mm

(viii) MS Channel 100x50x6 mm

(ix) MS Channel 100x50x5 mm

Total Qty. of MS Flat/MS

2996.000
Round/MS Channel(in MT.)

5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT:

The Technical parameters to which the steel sections shall confirm are as under:

5.1 Steel for Structural Purpose :

(i) Mechanical properties:
(a) Grade : A
(b) Designation : E 250 A
(c) Tensile strength min., mpa : 410
(d) Yield strength min. : <20mm; 20-40mm; >40mm
Mpa : 250, 240 230
(e) Elongation percent, min : 23

(f) Internal Diameter of Bend min. : 3t

(ii) Chemical Composition:

2|Page
 Technical Specification of Various Steel Sections New NIB

(a) Grade : A
(b) Designation : E 250 A
(c) Ladle Analysis, percent, Max.
C : 0.23
Mn : 1.50
S : 0.045
P : 0.045
Si : 0.40
(d) Supply condition : As rolled
(e) Carbon equivalent (CE), Max. : 0.42

(f) De-oxidation mode : Semi killed or killed

5.2 Mass & Standard length:

S. Name of Item Mass in Standard Grade

No. Kg/metre length
1. M.S. Flat 75 x12mm As per IS 10 M to 13 M E 250 A
2. M.S. Flat 50 x12mm As per IS 10 M to 13 M E 250 A
3. M.S. Flat 50 x10 mm As per IS 10 M to 13 M E 250 A
4. M.S. Flat 50 x 6 mm As per IS 10 M to 13 M E 250 A
5. MS Round 40 mm As per IS 10 M to 13 M E 250 A
6. MS Round 28 mm As per IS 10 M to 13 M E 250 A
7. MS Round 25 mm As per IS 10 M to 13 M E 250 A
8. MS Channel 100x50x6 mm As per IS 10 M to 13 M E 250 A
9. MS Channel 100x50x5 mm As per IS 10 M to 13 M E 250 A

5.3 Rolling and cutting Tolerances As per IS 1852

5.4 Packing & Marking:
(a) Packing: As per IS
(b) Marking The Steel sections shall be marked with colour code
as per IS and name of the Manufacturer duly
embossed during Manufacturing.

5.5 Workmanship:

i) All finished steel shall be well and clearly rolled to dimensions, sections and masses
specified. The finished material shall be reasonably free from surface flows, laminations,
rough/jagged and imperfect edges and other harmful defects.

ii) Minor surface defects may be removed by the manufacturer.

6.0 TESTS:

6.1 Tests before Despatch:

The various Steel sections shall be subjected at maker's Works before despatch to the following
tests as per IS:2062 latest amended.

Routine test / Acceptance Test :

1. Dimensional Checking & Visual Inspection.
2. Weight Checking
3. Chemical Composition Test
4. Mechanical Properties Tests
3|Page
 Technical Specification of Various Steel Sections New NIB

7.0 INSPECTION:

7.1 All the tests (as mentioned at Clause 6.1) and Inspection shall be made at the place of
manufacturer unless otherwise especially agreed upon by the bidder and purchaser at the time
of purchase. The bidder shall provide all reasonable facilities without charges to the inspecting
officer(s) representing the purchaser, to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in
accordance with this specification.

The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at his own cost by an independent
agency whenever there is a dispute regarding the quality of supply.

The Inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of manufacture/ before
despatch as per relevant standard.

Inspection and acceptance of any material under the specification by the purchaser shall not
relieve the bidder of his obligation of furnishing material in accordance with the specification
and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the material is found to be defective. The Bidder
shall keep the purchaser informed in advance, about manufacturing programme so that
arrangements can be made for inspection.

The Bidder shall give 15 days advance intimation to enable the purchaser to depute his
representative for witnessing the acceptance and routine tests. The inspection charges would
be to the purchaser's account.

7.2 Identification & Marking:

7.2.1 Each product shall carry a tag or be marked with the name or trade mark of the
manufacturer. Designation of Steel should also be marked on the product tag.

7.2.2 The ends of the rolled product shall be painted with a colour code "Green" for Grade `A' and
as per relevant IS.

8.0 PRICES:

The bidder shall quote all Adjusted F.O.R Destination rate including unloading of
material at site. The material is required to be delivered at Consignee’s stores anywhere
in Rajasthan.

9.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

The bidders are required to furnish the quality assurance plan alongwith their bid, which is to
be followed by the supplier during manufacturing of the equipment.

The manufacturing Quality Plan (MQP) shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and
approval. Manufacturing Quality Plan(MQP) will detail out for all the material, components
and equipment, various tests/inspections to be carried out as per the requirement of purchaser
specification and standards mentioned therein and quality practices & procedure followed by
manufacturer’s/suppliers/sub-suppliers quality control organization, the relevant reference
documents and standards, acceptance norms, inspection documents raised etc. during all stages
of materials procurement, manufacture assembly and final testing/performance testing.

10. QUANTITY:
4|Page
 Technical Specification of Various Steel Sections New NIB

The total ordered quantity of Various Steel Sections ordered on the supplier can be supplied
with a quantity tolerance of ± 2% (Two percent).

11. PACKING & FORWARDING:

The various sections of steel shall be packed in such a manner so that same should be able to
resist hazard involved in transportation, unloading, stacking etc.

5|Page
 VOLUME-II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS FOR ACSR PANTHER

1. SCOPE:
This specification provides for the manufacture, testing before dispatch, supply and delivery
of Aluminium Conductor galvanised steel reinforced code "PANTHER" in non-returnable
painted steel drums as per the details given in Appendix –A & B attached with this
specification.

2. CLIMATIC CONDITION:
The climatic conditions at site under which the equipment shall operate satisfactory are as under.
1) Max. ambient Air Temperature 50 Deg.C.
2) Max. daily average ambient temperature 45 Deg C
3) Max. yearly weighted ambient Temperature 35 Deg C
4) Minimum ambient Air Temperature (-) 5 Deg.C.
5) Maximum relative humidity(%). 90 %
6) Minimum relative humidity(%). 10 %
7) Height above main sea level. Less than 1000 meters
8) Dust storms are liable to occur during the period March to July
9) Average No. of thunder storm days/annum. 40 days
10) Average annual rainfall(mm). 10 to 100cm
(depending upon area)
11) Average No. of months of tropical monsoon conditions. 4 months
12) Seismic level horizontal acceleration 0.3g
13) Degree of Pollution Heavy
14) Intensity of solar radiation 1.0 kW/Sq.M
15) Max. Wind load 195kg/Sq.M

3. STANDARD SPECIFICATION:
The conductor shall comply in all respects except herein otherwise stated with the Indian
Standard Specification IS:398 (Part II) /1996 with latest amendments, if any.

4. MATERIAL:
4.1 The material offered shall be of best quality and workmanship. The conductor shall
be constructed of hard-drawn aluminium and galvanised steel wires. The density of
hard drawn aluminium should be 2.703 g/cm 3 at a temperature of 20 oC and that of
the galvanised steel wire be 7.80 gm/cm3 at 20 oC.

4.2 The steel wires shall be evenly and uniformly coated with zinc. The coating of zinc
on the steel wire may be applied by the hot process or the electrolytic process. The
uniformity of zinc coating and the weight of zinc coating shall be in accordance with
IS: 4826/1979 (Specification for Hot dipped galvanised coatings on round steel wires)
with latest amendments, if any.

4.3 The bidder shall be required to submit alongwith the bid the declaration by the
manufacturer or supplier revealing the actual source of aluminium wires, rod, and
ingots used for making the conductors/cables through a certification from their
Statutory Auditor/Cost Auditor.

5. QUANTITY:
The total ordered quantity of ACSR PANTHER conductor ordered on the supplier can be
supplied with a quantity tolerance of ± 2% (Two percent).

6. NOMINAL SIZES:
The aluminium and galvanised steel wires for the construction of ACSR "PANTHER"
conductor shall have the diameters, resistance and masses as specified in Appendix -B.
7. TOLERANCE ON NOMINAL SIZES AND RECOVERIES ON LESS WIEGHT:
The tolerance of  1 (one) percent and  2 (two) percent in the size of individual Aluminium
and galvanized steel wires respectively may be permitted in the nominal diameter as specified
in Appendix –B for the purpose of availing supplies of ACSR PANTHER Conductor. But for
the payment purposes, recoveries at the rate of maximum updated FORD prices approved by
RVPN during the entire supplies, on account of overall less weight (mass) if found in the
overall conductor supplied, shall be made from the supplier from their bills/financial holds
etc. while releasing last payments as per provisions of specifications/PO, by converting the
overall less weight found into length of the ACSR PANTHER Conductor considering the
standard nominal weight of 974 kg/km as quoted weight as indicated in the specification at
Appendix –A. For the purpose of computing overall less weight, the average net weight of
ACSR PANTHER Conductor as verified by the inspecting officer(s) of RVPN during
inspections shall be taken into consideration for entire supplied quantity irrespective of the
Drum wise weight of the conductor specified by the supplier in their packing list(s). No extra
payments shall be made to the supplier for the excess weight if found in the overall conductor
supplied.

8. TECHNICAL PROPERTIES:
The value of the modulus of elasticity for aluminum conductor galvanised steel reinforced as
specified in Appendix –A may be regarded as being accurate to within ±3GN/m 2. The
coefficient of linear expansion for the aluminium conductor galvanised steel reinforced as
specified in Appendix –A has been calculated on the basis of coefficient of linear expansion
of 23.0x10-6/C for aluminium & 11.5x10-6/C for steel.

These values shall, however be given by the bidder under the guaranteed technical particulars.

9. SURFACE CONDITIONS:
The wires shall be smooth and free from all imperfections such as spills and splits. The
surface of conductor shall be free from joints (except those allowed as per ISS), sharp edges,
abrasions or other departures from smoothness or uniformity of surface contour that would
increase radio interference and corona losses. When subjected to tension upto 50% of the
breaking load of the conductor, the surface shall not depart from its cylindrical form nor any
part of the component, parts or strands, move relative to each other in such a way as to get out
of place and disturb the longitudinal smoothness of the conductor.

10. JOINTS IN WIRES:

10.1 ALUMINIUM WIRES:
In the galvanised steel reinforced aluminium conductor code "PANTHER", joints in
individual aluminium wires are permitted, in addition to those made in the base rod
or wire before final drawing as prescribed in relevant clause of IS, but no two such
joints shall be less than 15 m apart in the complete stranded conductor. Such joints
shall be made by cold pressure butt-welding only. The manufacturer shall
demonstrate that proposed method of jointing is capable of meeting the specified
strength requirement.

10.2 GALVANISED STEEL WIRES:

No joints of any kind shall be made in the finished coated steel wires.

10.3 If it is established that there is manufacturing defect in the supplied ACSR

PANTHER Conductor i.e. joints in steel wire strands, supplier has to replace
complete un-utilized material free of cost and performance period of entire order will
be doubled from the date of receipt of replaced material. Recoveries towards
damaged material of RVPN/ contractor executing the work, due to failure of
conductor, shall also be recovered from the supplier alongwith labour charges for de-
stringing & re-stringing of the conductor, if any. Supplier has to offer the material for
replacement within a period of two months from the date of intimation for
replacement of material, otherwise RVPN reserve the right to forfeit the performance
bank guarantee against the order and to sever the business relation for a period of two
years.
11. STRANDING:
11.1 The wires used in the construction of ACSR "PANTHER" shall, before stranding,
satisfy all the relevant requirements of IS: 398 (Pt. II)/1996 with latest amendments.
The lay ratio of the different layers of the galvanised steel reinforced aluminium
conductor shall be within the limits given under Appendix –A.

11.2 The ratio of the nominal diameter of the aluminium wires to the nominal diameter of
the galvanized steel wires in the construction of galvanised steel reinforced
aluminium conductor code "PANTHER" shall confirm to the value given in
Appendix –A.

11.3 In all constructions, the successive layers shall have opposite directions of lay, the
outermost layer being right handed. The wires in each layer shall be evenly and
closely stranded.

11.4 The lay ratio of any aluminium layer shall be not greater than the lay ratio of the
aluminium layer immediately beneath it.

12. PACKING AND MARKING:

12.1 The conductor shall be supplied in non-returnable, painted steel drums of adequate
strength, constructed to protect the conductor against all damage and displacement
during transit, storage and subsequent handling and stringing operations in the field.
The supplier shall be responsible for any loss or damage during transportation,
handling and storage due to improper packing.

12.2 The drums shall be suitable for wheel mounting and for letting off the conductor
under a minimum controlled tension of the order of 5 KN.

12.3 The Bidder should submit their proposed drum drawings along with the bid.

12.4 For conductor, one standard length shall be wound on each drum. After preparation
of steel surface according to IS:9954, synthetic enamel paint shall be applied after
application of one coat of primer.

12.5 The ownership of the empty conductor drums shall lie with the Purchaser.

12.6 Solid Polypropylene sheet of minimum 2mm thickness shall be used for outer
covering of conductor. Outside the covering, there shall be minimum two binders
consisting of hoop iron/galvanised steel wire. Each protective lagging shall have two
recesses to accommodate the binders. As an alternative, supplier may use wooden
lagging of minimum 50 mm thickness for outer covering of conductor without any
extra financial implication to the purchaser.

12.7 Before reeling, card board or double corrugated or thick bituminised water-proof
bamboo paper shall be secured to the drum barrel and inside of flanges of the drum
by means of a suitable commercial adhesive material. After reeling the conductor,
the exposed surface of the outer layer of conductor shall be wrapped with water proof
thick bituminised bamboo paper/ self-adhesive plastic sheet to preserve the conductor
from ingress of water, dirt, grit and damage during transport and handling.

12.8 A minimum space of 50 mm for conductor shall be provided between the inner
surface of the external protective tagging and outer layer of the conductor. This is an
essential requirement to ensure that the conductor does not get closer to the edges and
get damaged during transportation, reeling/ un-reeling operation or rolling on the
undulated grounds/ fields.
 12.9 The conductor ends shall be properly sealed and secured on the side of one of the
flanges to avoid loosening of the conductor layers during transit and handling.

12.10 The conductor on each drum shall be securely fastened at each end. The length of the
conductor used for fastening the ends shall not constitute the part of the quantity
wound on drum and billed for.

12.11 The conductor shall be tightly and uniformly spooled on the drum. The wrap shall be
laid snugly against the side of the Preceding wrap. The first and the last wrap in each
layer shall fit snugly against the sides of the flanges.

12.12 All the drums shall carry the following particulars and shall be marked clearly to
avoid the possibility of goods being lost or wrongly dispatched:
i) Manufacturer's name or trade mark and place of manufacture in the country
ii) Name of the consignee with his full address
iii) Destination station
iv) Drum number
v) Size of the conductor with its code name
vi) Number of lengths with quantity of each length
vii) Total quantity of the conductor
viii) Net weight of the conductor
ix) Tare weight of the drum
x) Gross weight of the drum
xi) ISI certificate mark (if available)
xii) An arrow mark indicating the direction in which the drum should be unwound

As far as possible, the first three particulars appearing at (i), (ii) and (iii) above shall
be marked on one side of drum and the remaining particulars on other side of the
drum.

13. LENGTHS:
13.1 The conductor ACSR "PANTHER" shall be supplied in the standard length of 1400
meters with ± 5% (five percent) tolerance.
13.2 Number of lengths including random lengths, if any, in one drum shall not exceed one.
13.3 The random length, if any, shall not measure less than 50% of the standard length.
13.4 The total random length(s) shall not exceed 10% of the ordered quantity.

14. INSPECTION AND TESTING:

The inspection & testing shall be carried out by the purchaser's representative as per
provisions of IS: 398 (Part-II)/1996 with latest amendment if any. The packing list of the
material offered for inspection shall be furnished in duplicate for arranging the inspection. This
shall be governed by clause 1.27 entitled "INSPECTION AND TESTING" of Section-2"
General Conditions of Contract" except mentioned hereunder:

14.1 Individual wire and finished aluminium conductor galvanised steel reinforced shall
be subjected before dispatch from the works, to the tests as specified in the Indian
Standard Specification IS:398 (Part II)/1996 with latest amendments, if any.

14.2 The supplier/manufacturer shall provide all facilities at their works for inspection of
at least 5% (five percent) of conductor drums selected at random by the authorised
representative of the purchaser for checking/verification of conductor
length/manufacturing defects by transferring the conductor from one drum to another
empty drum and at the same time measuring the length of the conductor so
transferred by means of the meter.

In case the length is found short in any of the drum selected on rewinding then the
Purchaser shall be at liberty to check the entire drums offered for inspection in that
particular lot.
 14.3 In case the manufacturer does not have adequate facilities for getting all the required
tests conducted in his laboratory, the purchaser at his option may get these tests
conducted in any Government approved laboratory. All the expenses for such tests to
be conducted outside, shall be borne by the supplier.

14.4 Samples of individual wires (both aluminium and steel) for tests shall be taken before
stranding from the outer ends of not less than 10% (ten percent) of wire coils. If
samples are taken after stranding then they shall be obtained by cutting 2 m from the
outer end of the finished conductor from not more than 10% (ten percent) of finished
reels or drums. The sample length so cut and used/ consumed in testing shall not form
part of supply and shall not be billed for.

14.5 Coils offered for inspection shall be divided into equal lots, the number of lots being
equal to the number of samples to be selected, a fraction of lot being counted as a
complete lot. One sample coil shall be selected at random from each lot.

14.6 The instruments (particularly Tensile Machine, Kelvin Bridge & Weighing Machine)
deployed for inspection purpose shall be most accurate and should have been
calibrated by the manufacturer or a Govt. approved laboratory. Such calibration
certificates in any case, should not be older than one year and shall be furnished to
the inspecting officer at the time of inspection/ testing of the material.

14.7 In case shortage in length is found up to 10 meters in a drum during the course of
rewinding in pre-dispatch inspection even then the inspection will be carried out by
the inspecting officer by reducing this length from each drum of the lot offered for
inspection.

The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the Supplier of any of his
responsibilities for meeting all requirements of the Specification, and shall not prevent
subsequent rejection if such material is later found to be defective.

15. TESTS:
Various tests are as under:-
I) TYPE TESTS:
The bidder shall furnish the following type tests for ACSR PANTHER along with the
offer as per relevant IS: 398 (Part-II) with latest amendments.

I. Surface Condition Test

II. Test for ultimate breaking load on stranded conductor
III. Stress-stain test
IV. Measurement of diameter of individual aluminium and steel wires
V. Measurement of Lay ratio
VI. Breaking load of individual wires
VII. Ductility test
VIII. Wrapping test
IX. Resistance test
X. Galvanizing test

II) ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

The following shall constituted acceptance tests.
a) MEASUREMENT OF DIAMETER OF INDIVIDUAL ALUMINIUM AND
STEEL WIRE:
The test shall be carried out as per IS: 398 Pt.-II with latest amendments.

b) Measurement of Lay Ratio:

The test shall be carried out as per IS: 398 Pt.-II with latest amendments.
c) Breaking Load Test:
This test shall be made on both aluminum and galvanized steel wires.

The breaking load of the specimen cut from each of the sample taken under clause
14.4 above shall be determined by means of a suitable tensile testing machine.
The load shall be applied gradually and the rate of separation of the jaws of the
testing machine shall be not less than 25 mm/min and not greater than 100
mm/min. The ultimate breaking load of the specimens shall be not less than the
appropriate value specified in Appendix –B.

d) Ductility Test:
This test shall be made on galvanized steel wires only by either of the two tests
given in clause No.13.4.1 "Torsion Test" or 13.4.2 "Elongation Test" of the IS-
398(Part-II)/1996 and latest amendment if any.

The sample has to pass either the torsion test or elongation test i.e. if the
conductor is passing any of the two tests, the sample should be considered as
passing.

e) Wrapping Test:
This test shall be made on both aluminum and galvanized steel wires.

i) Aluminium Wires:
One specimen cut from each of the samples of aluminum wire taken under
clause 14.4 above shall be wrapped round a wire of its own diameter to form
a close helix of 8 turns. Six turns shall then be unwrapped and again closely
wrapped in the same direction as before. The wire shall not break or show
any crack.

ii) Galvanised Steel Wires:

One specimen cut from each of the samples of galvanized steel wire taken
under clause 14.4 above shall be wrapped round a mandrel of diameter equal
to 4 times the wire diameter to form a close helix of 8 turns. Six turns shall
then be unwrapped and again closely wrapped in the same direction as before.
The wire shall not break or show any crack.

f) Resistance Test:
This test shall be made on aluminum wires only. The electrical resistance of one
specimen of aluminum wire cut from each of the samples taken under clause 14.4
above shall be measured at ambient temperature. The measured resistance shall
be corrected to the value at 20 degree Centigrade by means of the following
formula:

RT
R20=
1 + α(T − 20)

Where:
R20= resistance corrected at 20oC.
RT= resistance measured at ToC.
α= Constant-mass temperature co-efficient of resistance, 0.004
and T = Ambient Temperature during measurement.

The resistance corrected at 20oC shall be not more than the maximum value
specified in Appendix –B.

g) Galvanising Test:
This test shall be made on galvanised steel wires only.
 i) This test shall be made on one specimen cut from each of the samples of
galvanized steel wires taken under clause 14.4 above.

ii) The uniformity of galvanizing and the weight of the coating shall be in
accordance with IS: 4826/ 1979 "Specification for hot dipped galvanized
coating on round steel wires" (first revision) with latest amendments, if any.

III) ROUTINE TESTS:

The routine tests shall be carried out before and after standing by the manufacturer
and shall be shown to the purchaser’s representative at the time of inspection.

16. REJECTION & RETESTS:

16.1 Should any one of the test pieces first selected fail to pass the tests, three further
samples from the same batch shall be selected for testing, one of which shall be from
the length from which the original test sample was taken, unless that length has been
withdrawn by the supplier.

16.2 Should all the three test pieces from these additional samples satisfy the requirements
of the tests, the batch represented by these samples shall be deemed to comply with
the standard. Should the test pieces from any of the three additional samples fail, the
batch represented shall be deemed not to comply with the Standard.

17. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The guaranteed technical particulars shall be furnished strictly in the proforma attached as
Schedule GTP.

18. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

The bidders are required to furnish the quality assurance plan alongwith their bid, which is to
be followed by the supplier during manufacturing of the equipment/material.

The manufacturing Quality Plan (MQP) shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and
approval. Manufacturing Quality Plan(MQP) will detail out for all the material, components
and equipment, various tests/inspections to be carried out as per the requirement of purchaser
specification and standards mentioned therein and quality practices & procedure followed by
manufacturer’s/suppliers/sub-suppliers quality control organization, the relevant reference
documents and standards, acceptance norms, inspection documents raised etc. during all
stages of materials procurement, manufacture assembly and final testing/performance testing.
 Appendix –A
STATEMENT OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND OTHER
PERFORMANCE DATA FOR SUPPLY OF ACSR PANTHER'

PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF ACSR "PANTHER" CONDUCTOR.

S. No. Particulars 'PANTHER'

1. Nominal Aluminium area 200 mm2
2. No. of strands and nominal diameter:
i) Aluminium 30/3.00 mm
ii) Steel 7/3.00 mm
3. Sectional area of aluminium 212.1 mm2
4. Total sectional area 261.5 mm2
5. Approximate overall diameter 21.00 mm
6. Approximate total mass 974 kg/km
7. Calculated resistance at 20 Degree C.(Max.) 0.139 Ω/km
8. Approximate calculated breaking load 89.67 kN
9. Lay ratio:
(a) Steel core(six wire layer) Max.– 28 Min.- 13
(b) Aluminium wire:
i) Outer most layer Max.– 14 Min.- 10
ii) Layer immediately beneath outermost layer Max.- 16 Min.– 10
10. Final Modulus of Elasticity 80 GN/ m2
11. Co-efficient of Linear Expansion 17.8 x 10-6/oC
12. Ratio of aluminium wire diameter to steel wire diameter 1.000
13. Standard Length 1400 m ± 5%
 Appendix–B
DETAILS OF SOLID ALUMINIUM AND GALVANISED STEEL WIRE USED IN
CONSTRUCTION OF ALUMINIUM CONDUCTOR GALVANISED STEEL
REINFORCED CODE "PANTHER".

S. No. Particulars ACSR "PANTHER"

1 ALUMINIUM WIRE
i) Nominal diameter 3.00 mm
ii) Maximum diameter 3.03 mm
iii) Minimum diameter 2.97 mm
iv) Cross Sectional area of nominal diameter wire 7.069 [Link]
v) Mass 19.11 kg/km
vi) Breaking load (Min.):
a) Before stranding 1.17 kN
b) After stranding 1.11 kN
vii) Resistance at 20 oC (Max.) 4.079 Ω/km
2. GALVANISED STEEL WIRE
i) Nominal diameter 3.00 mm
ii) Maximum diameter 3.06 mm
iii) Minimum diameter 2.94 mm
iv) Cross Sectional area of nominal diameter wire 7. 069 mm2
v) Mass 55.13 kg/km
vi) Breaking load (Min.)
a) Before stranding: 9.29 kN
b) After stranding: 8.83 kN
 Technical Spec. ACSR Zebra Conductor

VOLUME-II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS FOR ACSR ZEBRA

1. SCOPE:
This specification provides for the manufacture, testing before dispatch, supply and delivery of
Aluminium Conductor galvanised steel reinforced code "ZEBRA" in non-returnable painted steel
drumsas per the details given in Appendix –A & B attached with this specification.

2. CLIMATIC CONDITION:
The climatic conditions at site under which the equipment shall operate satisfactory are as under.
1) Max. ambient Air Temperature 50 Deg.C.
2) Max. daily average ambient temperature 45 Deg C
3) Max. yearly weighted ambient Temperature 35 Deg C
4) Minimum ambient Air Temperature (-) 5 Deg.C.
5) Maximum relative humidity(%). 90 %
6) Minimum relative humidity(%). 10 %
7) Height above main sea level. Less than 1000 meters
8) Dust storms are liable to occur during the period March to July
9) Average No. of thunder storm days/annum. 40 days
10) Average annual rainfall(mm). 10 to 100cm (depending
upon area)
11) Average No. of months of tropical monsoon conditions. 4 months
12) Seismic level horizontal acceleration 0.3g
13) Degree of Pollution Heavy
14) Intensity of solar radiation 1.0 kW/Sq.M
15) Max. Wind load 195kg/Sq.M

3. STANDARD SPECIFICATION:
The conductor shall comply in all respects except herein otherwise stated with the Indian Standard
Specification IS:398 (Part II) /1996 with latest amendments, if any.

4. MATERIAL:
4.1 The material offered shall be of best quality and workmanship. The conductor shall be
constructed of hard-drawn aluminium and galvanised steel wires. The density of hard drawn
aluminium should be 2.703 g/cm3 at a temperature of 20 [Link] that of the galvanised steel
wire be 7.80 gm/cm3 at 20 oC.

4.2 The steel wires shall be evenly and uniformly coated with zinc. The coating of zinc on the steel
wire may be applied by the hot process or the electrolytic process. The uniformity of zinc
coating and the weight of zinc coating shall be in accordance with IS: 4826/1979 (Specification
for Hot dipped galvanised coatings on round steel wires) with latest amendments, if any.
4.3 The bidder shall be required to submit alongwith the bid the declaration by the
manufacturer or supplier revealing the actual source of aluminium wires, rod, and
ingots used for making the conductors/cables through a certification from their
Statutory Auditor/Cost Auditor.

5. QUANTITY:

1|P ag e
 Technical Spec. ACSR Zebra Conductor

The total ordered quantity of ACSR ZEBRA conductor ordered on the supplier can be supplied with
a quantity tolerance of ± 2% (Two percent).

6. NOMINAL SIZES:
The aluminium and galvanised steel wires for the construction of ACSR "ZEBRA" conductor shall
have the diameters, resistance and masses as specified in Appendix -B.

7. TOLERANCE ON NOMINAL SIZES AND RECOVERIES ON LESS WIEGHT:

The tolerance of  1 (one) percent and  2 (two) percentin the size of individual Aluminium and
galvanized steel wires respectively may be permitted in the nominal diameter as specified in Appendix
–B for the purpose of availing supplies of ACSR Zebra Conductor. But for the payment purposes,
recoveries at the rate of maximum updated FORD prices approved by RVPN during the entire
supplies, on account of overall less weight (mass) if found in the overall conductor supplied, shall be
made from the supplier from their bills/financial holds etc. while releasing last payments as per
provisions of specifications/PO, by converting the overall less weight found into length of the ACSR
Zebra Conductor considering the standard nominal weight of 1621 kg/km as quoted weight as
indicated in the specification at Appendix –A. For the purpose of computing overall less weight, the
average net weight of ACSR Zebra Conductor as verified by the inspecting officer(s) of RVPN during
inspections shall be taken into consideration for entire supplied quantity irrespective of the Drum wise
weight of the conductor specified by the supplier in their packing list(s). No extra payments shall be
made to the supplier for the excess weight if found in the overall conductor supplied.

8. TECHNICAL PROPERTIES:
The value of the modulus of elasticity for aluminum conductor galvanised steel reinforced as specified
in Appendix –A may be regarded as being accurate to within ±3GN/m2. The coefficient of linear
expansion for the aluminium conductor galvanised steel reinforced as specified in Appendix –A has
been calculated on the basis of coefficient of linear expansion of 23.0x10 -6/C for aluminium & 11.5x10-
6/C for steel.

These values shall, however be given by the bidder under the guaranteed technical particulars.

9. SURFACE CONDITIONS:
The wires shall be smooth and free from all imperfections such as spills and splits. The surface of
conductor shall be free from joints (except those allowed as per ISS), sharp edges, abrasions or other
departures from smoothness or uniformity of surface contour that would increase radio interference
and corona losses. When subjected to tension upto 50% of the breaking load of the conductor, the
surface shall not depart from its cylindrical form nor any part of the component, parts or strands, move
relative to each other in such a way as to get out of place and disturb the longitudinal smoothness of
the conductor.

10. JOINTS IN WIRES:

10.1 ALUMINIUM WIRES:
In the galvanised steel reinforced aluminium conductor code "ZEBRA", joints in individual
aluminium wires are permitted, in addition to those made in the base rod or wire before final
drawing as prescribed in relevant clause of IS, but no two such joints shall be less than 15 m

2|P ag e
 Technical Spec. ACSR Zebra Conductor

apart in the complete stranded conductor. Such joints shall be made by cold pressure butt-
welding only. The manufacturer shall demonstrate that proposed method of jointing is capable
of meeting the specified strength requirement.

10.2 GALVANISED STEEL WIRES:

No joints of any kind shall be made in the finished coated steel wires.

10.3 If it is established that there is manufacturing defect in the supplied ACSR Zebra Conductor
i.e. joints in steel wire strands, supplier has to replace complete un-utilized material free of cost
and performance period of entire order will be doubled from the date of receipt of replaced
material. Recoveries towards damaged material of RVPN/ contractor executing the work, due
to failure of conductor, shall also be recovered from the supplier alongwith labour charges for
de-stringing & re-stringing of the conductor, if any. Supplier has to offer the material for
replacement within a period of two months from the date of intimation for replacement of
material, otherwise RVPN reserve the right to forfeit the performance bank guarantee against
the order and to sever the business relation for a period of two years.

11. STRANDING:
11.1 The wires used in the construction of ACSR "ZEBRA" shall, before stranding, satisfy all the
relevant requirements of IS: 398 (Pt. II)/1996 with latest amendments. The lay ratio of the
different layers of the galvanised steel reinforced aluminium conductor shall be within the
limits given under Appendix –A.

11.2 The ratio of the nominal diameter of the aluminium wires to the nominal diameter of the
galvanized steel wires in the construction of galvanised steel reinforced aluminium conductor
code "ZEBRA" shall confirm to the value given in Appendix –A.

11.3 In all constructions, the successive layers shall have opposite directions of lay, the outermost
layer being right handed. The wires in each layer shall be evenly and closely stranded.

11.4 The lay ratio of any aluminium layer shall be not greater than the lay ratio of the aluminium
layer immediately beneath it.

12. PACKING AND MARKING:

12.1 The conductor shall be supplied in non-returnable, painted steel drums of adequate
strength, constructed to protect the conductor against all damage and displacement during
transit, storage and subsequent handling and stringing operations in the field. The supplier
shall be responsible for any loss or damage during transportation, handling and storage due to
improper packing.

12.2 The drums shall be suitable for wheel mounting and for letting off the conductor under a
minimum controlled tension of the order of 5 KN.

12.3 The Bidder should submit their proposed drum drawings along with the bid.

3|P ag e
 Technical Spec. ACSR Zebra Conductor

12.4 For conductor, one standard length shall be wound on each drum. After preparation of steel
surface according to IS:9954, synthetic enamel paint shall be applied after application of one
coat of primer.

12.5 The ownership of the empty conductor drums shall lie with the Purchaser.

12.6 Solid Polypropylene sheet of minimum 2mm thickness shall be used for outer covering of
conductor. Outside the covering, there shall be minimum two binders consisting of hoop
iron/galvanised steel wire. Each protective lagging shall have two recesses to accommodate
the binders. As an alternative, supplier may use wooden lagging of minimum 50 mm thickness
for outer covering of conductor without any extra financial implication to the purchaser.

12.7 Before reeling, card board or double corrugated or thick bituminised water-proof bamboo
paper shall be secured to the drum barrel and inside of flanges of the drum by means of a
suitable commercial adhesive material. After reeling the conductor, the exposed surface of
the outer layer of conductor shall be wrapped with water proof thick bituminised bamboo
paper/ self-adhesive plastic sheet to preserve the conductor from ingress of water, dirt, grit
and damage during transport and handling.

12.8 A minimum space of 50 mm for conductor shall be provided between the inner surface of the
external protective tagging and outer layer of the conductor. This is an essential requirement
to ensure that the conductor does not get closer to the edges and get damaged during
transportation, reeling/ un-reeling operation or rolling on the undulated grounds/ fields.

12.9 The conductor ends shall be properly sealed and secured on the side of one of the flanges to
avoid loosening of the conductor layers during transit and handling.

12.10 The conductor on each drum shall be securely fastened at each end. The length of the
conductor used for fastening the ends shall not constitute the part of the quantity wound on
drum and billed for.

12.11 The conductor shall be tightly and uniformly spooled on the drum. The wrap shall be laid
snugly against the side of the Preceding wrap. The first and the last wrap in each layer shall fit
snugly against the sides of the flanges.

12.12 All the drums shall carry the following particulars and shall be marked clearly to avoid the
possibility of goods being lost or wrongly dispatched:
i) Manufacturer's name or trade mark and place of manufacture in the country
ii) Name of the consignee with his full address
iii) Destination station
iv) Drum number
v) Size of the conductor with its code name
vi) Number of lengths with quantity of each length
vii) Total quantity of the conductor
viii) Net weight of the conductor

4|P ag e
 Technical Spec. ACSR Zebra Conductor

ix) Tare weight of the drum

x) Gross weight of the drum
xi) ISI certificate mark (if available)
xii) An arrow mark indicating the direction in which the drum should be unwound

As far as possible, the first three particulars appearing at (i), (ii) and (iii) above shall be marked
on one side of drum and the remaining particulars on other side of the drum.

13. LENGTHS:
13.1 The conductor ACSR "ZEBRA" shall be supplied in the standard length of 1100 meters with
± 5% (five percent) tolerance.
13.2 Number of lengths including random lengths, if any, in one drum shall not exceed one.
13.3 The random length, if any, shall not measure less than 50% of the standard length.
13.4 The total random length(s) shall not exceed 10% of the ordered quantity.

14. INSPECTION AND TESTING:

The inspection & testing shall be carried out by the purchaser's representative as per provisions of IS:
398 (Part-II)/1996 with latest amendment if any. The packing list of the material offered for inspection
shall be furnished in duplicate for arranging the inspection. This shall be governed by clause 1.27
entitled "INSPECTION AND TESTING" of Section-2" General Conditions of Contract" except
mentioned hereunder:

14.1 Individual wire and finished aluminium conductor galvanised steel reinforced shall be
subjected before dispatch from the works, to the tests as specified in the Indian Standard
Specification IS:398 (Part II)/1996 with latest amendments, if any.

14.2 The supplier/manufacturer shall provide all facilities at their works for inspection of at least
5% (five percent) of conductor drums selected at random by the authorised representative of
the purchaser for checking/verification of conductor length/manufacturing defects by
transferring the conductor from one drum to another empty drum and at the same time
measuring the length of the conductor so transferred by means of the meter.

In case the length is found short in any of the drum selected on rewinding then the Purchaser
shall be at liberty to check the entire drums offered for inspection in that particular lot.

14.3 In case the manufacturer does not have adequate facilities for getting all the required tests
conducted in his laboratory, the purchaser at his option may get these tests conducted in any
Government approved laboratory. All the expenses for such tests to be conducted outside,
shall be borne by the supplier.

14.4 Samples of individual wires (both aluminium and steel) for tests shall be taken before stranding
from the outer ends of not less than 10% (ten percent) of wire coils. If samples are taken after
stranding then they shall be obtained by cutting 2 m from the outer end of the finished
conductor from not more than 10% (ten percent) of finished reels or drums. The sample

5|P ag e
 Technical Spec. ACSR Zebra Conductor

length so cut and used/ consumed in testing shall not form part of supply and shall not be
billed for.

14.5 Coils offered for inspection shall be divided into equal lots, the number of lots being equal to
the number of samples to be selected, a fraction of lot being counted as a complete lot. One
sample coil shall be selected at random from each lot.

14.6 The instruments (particularly Tensile Machine, Kelvin Bridge & Weighing Machine) deployed
for inspection purpose shall be most accurate and should have been calibrated by the
manufacturer or a Govt. approved laboratory. Such calibration certificates in any case, should
not be older than one year and shall be furnished to the inspecting officer at the time of
inspection/ testing of the material.

14.7 In case shortage in length is found up to 10 meters in a drum during the course of rewinding
in pre-dispatch inspection even then the inspection will be carried out by the inspecting officer
by reducing this length from each drum of the lot offered for inspection.

The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the Supplier of any of his
responsibilities for meeting all requirements of the Specification, and shall not prevent subsequent
rejection if such material is later found to be defective.

15. TESTS:
Various tests are as under:-
I) TYPE TESTS:
The bidder shall furnish the following type tests for ACSR ZEBRA along with the offer as
per relevant IS: 398 (Part-II) with latest amendments.

I. Surface Condition Test

II. Test for ultimate breaking load on stranded conductor
III. Stress-stain test
IV. Measurement of diameter of individual aluminium and steel wires
V. Measurement of Lay ratio
VI. Breaking load of individual wires
VII. Ductility test
VIII. Wrapping test
IX. Resistance test
X. Galvanizing test

II) ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

The following shall constituted acceptance tests.
a) MEASUREMENT OF DIAMETER OF INDIVIDUAL ALUMINIUM AND STEEL
WIRE:
The test shall be carried out as per IS: 398 Pt.-II with latest amendments.

b) Measurement of Lay Ratio:

The test shall be carried out as per IS: 398 Pt.-II with latest amendments.

6|P ag e
 Technical Spec. ACSR Zebra Conductor

c) Breaking Load Test:

This test shall be made on both aluminum and galvanized steel wires.

The breaking load of the specimen cut from each of the sample taken under clause 14.4
above shall be determined by means of a suitable tensile testing machine. The load shall
be applied gradually and the rate of separation of the jaws of the testing machine shall be
not less than 25 mm/min and not greater than 100 mm/min. The ultimate breaking load
of the specimens shall be not less than the appropriate value specified in Appendix –B.

d) Ductility Test:
This test shall be made on galvanized steel wires only by either of the two tests given in
clause No.13.4.1 "Torsion Test" or 13.4.2 "Elongation Test" of the IS-398(Part-II)/1996
and latest amendment if any.

The sample has to pass either the torsion test or elongation test i.e. if the conductor is
passing any of the two tests, the sample should be considered as passing.

e) Wrapping Test:
This test shall be made on both aluminum and galvanized steel wires.

i) Aluminium Wires:
One specimen cut from each of the samples of aluminum wire taken under clause
14.4 above shall be wrapped round a wire of its own diameter to form a close helix
of 8 turns. Six turns shall then be unwrapped and again closely wrapped in the same
direction as before. The wire shall not break or show any crack.

ii) Galvanised Steel Wires:

One specimen cut from each of the samples of galvanized steel wire taken under
clause 14.4 above shall be wrapped round a mandrel of diameter equal to 4 times the
wire diameter to form a close helix of 8 turns. Six turns shall then be unwrapped and
again closely wrapped in the same direction as before. The wire shall not break or
show any crack.

f) Resistance Test:
This test shall be made on aluminum wires only. The electrical resistance of one specimen
of aluminum wire cut from each of the samples taken under clause 14.4 above shall be
measured at ambient temperature. The measured resistance shall be corrected to the value
at 20 degree Centigrade by means of the following formula:

RT
R 20 =
1 + α(T − 20)

Where:
R20= resistance corrected at 20oC.
RT= resistance measured at ToC.

7|P ag e
 Technical Spec. ACSR Zebra Conductor

α= Constant-mass temperature co-efficient of resistance, 0.004 and

T = Ambient Temperature during measurement.

The resistance corrected at 20oC shall be not more than the maximum value specified in
Appendix –B.

g) Galvanising Test:
This test shall be made on galvanised steel wires only.

i) This test shall be made on one specimen cut from each of the samples of galvanized
steel wires taken under clause 14.4 above.

ii) The uniformity of galvanizing and the weight of the coating shall be in accordance
with IS: 4826/ 1979 "Specification for hot dipped galvanized coating on round steel
wires" (first revision) with latest amendments, if any.

III) ROUTINE TESTS:

The routine tests shall be carried out before and after standing by the manufacturer and shall
be shown to the purchaser’s representative at the time of inspection.

16. REJECTION & RETESTS:

16.1 Should any one of the test pieces first selected fail to pass the tests, three further samples from
the same batch shall be selected for testing, one of which shall be from the length from which
the original test sample was taken, unless that length has been withdrawn by the supplier.

16.2 Should all the three test pieces from these additional samples satisfy the requirements of the
tests, the batch represented by these samples shall be deemed to comply with the standard.
Should the test pieces from any of the three additional samples fail, the batch represented shall
be deemed not to comply with the Standard.

17. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The guaranteed technical particulars shall be furnished strictly in the proforma attached as Schedule
GTP.

18. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

The bidders are required to furnish the quality assurance plan alongwith their bid, which is to be
followed by the supplier during manufacturing of the equipment/material.

The manufacturing Quality Plan (MQP) shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and approval.
Manufacturing Quality Plan(MQP) will detail out for all the material, components and equipment,
various tests/inspections to be carried out as per the requirement of purchaser specification and
standards mentioned therein and quality practices & procedure followed by
manufacturer’s/suppliers/sub-suppliers quality control organization, the relevant reference
documents and standards, acceptance norms, inspection documents raised etc. during all stages of
materials procurement, manufacture assembly and final testing/performance testing.

8|P ag e
 Technical Spec. ACSR Zebra Conductor

9|P ag e
 Technical Spec. ACSR Zebra Conductor

Appendix –A
STATEMENT OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND OTHER
PERFORMANCE DATA FOR SUPPLY OF ACSR ZEBRA'

PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF ACSR "ZEBRA" CONDUCTOR.

S. No. Particulars 'ZEBRA'

1. Nominal Aluminium area 420 mm2
2. No. of strands and nominal diameter:
i) Aluminium 54/3.18 mm
ii) Steel 7/3.18 mm
3. Sectional area of aluminium 428.9 mm2
4. Total sectional area 484.5 mm2
5. Approximate overall diameter 28.62 mm
6. Approximate total mass 1621 kg/km
7. Calculated resistance at 20 Degree C.(Max.) 0.06868 Ω/km
8. Approximate calculated breaking load 130.32 kN
9. Lay ratio:
(a) Steel core(six wire layer) Max.– 28 Min.- 13
(b) Aluminium wire:
i) Outer most layer Max.– 14 Min.- 10
ii) Layer immediately beneath outermost layer Max.- 16 Min.– 10
iii) Inner most layer of conductors with 3 Al. wire layers Max.- 17 Min.– 10
10. Final Modulus of Elasticity 69 GN/ m2
11. Co-efficient of Linear Expansion 19.3 x 10-6/oC
12. Ratio of aluminium wire diameter to steel wire diameter 1.000
13. Standard Length 1100 m ± 5%

10 | P a g e
 Technical Spec. ACSR Zebra Conductor

Appendix–B
DETAILS OF SOLID ALUMINIUM AND GALVANISED STEEL WIRE USED IN
CONSTRUCTION OF ALUMINIUM CONDUCTOR GALVANISED STEEL REINFORCED
CODE "ZEBRA".

S. No. Particulars ACSR "ZEBRA"

1 ALUMINIUM WIRE
i) Nominal diameter 3.18 mm
ii) Maximum diameter 3.21 mm
iii) Minimum diameter 3.15 mm
iv) Cross Sectional area of nominal diameter wire 7.942 [Link]
v) Mass 21.47 kg/km
vi) Breaking load (Min.):
a) Before stranding 1.29 kN
b) After stranding 1.23 kN
vii) Resistance at 20 oC (Max.) 3.626 Ω/km
2. GALVANISED STEEL WIRE
i) Nominal diameter 3.18 mm
ii) Maximum diameter 3.24 mm
iii) Minimum diameter 3.12 mm
iv) Cross Sectional area of nominal diameter wire 7. 942 mm2
v) Mass 61.95 kg/km
vi) Breaking load (Min.)
a) Before stranding: 10.43 kN
b) After stranding: 9.91 kN

11 | P a g e
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery sets

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 48V MAINTENANCE FREE VRLA BATTERY SETS

1.0 SCOPE :

This specification covers design, manufacture, assembly, inspection & testing of

maintenance free battery sets along with accessories duly packed suitable for Indoor
installation at various Grid sub-stations in Rajasthan. These equipments are to be complete
in every respect, details of the functions designated to the entire satisfaction of the
purchaser. It is required that the supplier accepting the contract agrees to furnish all
apparatus, appliances and material whether specially mentioned or not but which may be
found necessary to complete to perform and testing any of the herein is specified
equipments for compliance with the requirement implied without extra charges. The
erection / maintenance tools and specific tools if any will also form part of supply.

2.0 GENERAL:

The battery sets to be supplied by the supplier shall meet the requirement of IS:15549:2005
/ TEC spec. GR/BAT -01/03, March-04, IEC-60896 and shall be suitable for continuous
operation for the climatic conditions specified in the specification. The batteries shall be
suitable for float quick charging. The floating voltage shall be regulated to be within (+/-)1%
of the normal voltage when the required load is discharged by the battery.

Battery sets shall be maintenance free, sealed type in thermoplastic containers with
minimum expected life of 15 years at 27 Deg.C. Temp. The batteries shall include battery
mounting racks and other equipment required to provide a complete operational battery
system. Battery sets shall be capable of operating at a peak ambient temperature of 50
Deg.C. The average ambient temperature shall be 35 Deg .C. The offered battery shall be
compact and shall require no regular maintenance. All safety equipment required for
installation shall be provided by the manufacturer.

3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT OF BATTERIES :

Depending upon the situation, the batteries may be required to provide a back-up for 8, 24
or 48 hours. The Bidder shall furnish detailed battery sizing calculations along with all
arrangements and supporting structures, for each type of DC supply units being proposed,
along with the bid. In all cases the battery is normally not allowed to discharge beyond 80%
of rated capacity of the battery at 10 hours rate of discharge.

The manufacturer supplying the cells/batteries as per this document shall be responsible
to replace/repair free of charge, the battery/cell becoming faulty, owing to defective
workmanship or material as per the provisions of the bid document.

4.0 All electrical and mechanical equipments shall be designed and manufactured so
that no damage will result in transportation, installation and operation of the equipment
under the climatic conditions to which it will be subjected.

5.0 STANDARD:

All material and equipments used for battery set shall comply in all respect with the
requirements of the latest edition of the relevant Standards. The bidder shall quote for
sealed stationary VRLA batteries complying to relevant IS:15549:2005 / TEC spec.
GR/BAT -01/03, March-04, IEC-60896.
In the event of an order, the bidder shall however furnish all the necessary type test
reports/literature and past performance reports of the type of batteries offered with the bid.

1
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery sets

6.0 MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION:

6.1 GENERAL:

The storage batteries should be fabricated with Flat pasted type positive plates and
Flat pasted type negative plates as per relevant Standards and shall be assembled in
hard containers of durable and robust construction.
The design of battery shall be as per field proven practices. Partial plating of cells is not
permitted. Paralleling of cells externally for enhancement of capacity is not permitted. The
cells shall be so designed as to be suitable for Horizontal/vertical Stacking.

6.2 CONTAINERS:

The containers material shall have chemical and electro- chemical compatibility and shall
be acid resistant. The material shall meet all the requirements of VRLA batteries and be
consistent with the life of battery. The container shall be fire retardant and shall have an
Oxygen Index of at least 28%. The porosity of the container shall be such as not to allow
any gases to escape except from the regulation valve. The tensile strength of the material
of the container shall be such as to handle the internal cell pressure of the cells in the worst
working condition. Cell shall not show any deformity or bulge on the sides under all working
conditions. The container shall be capable of withstanding the rigours of transport, storage
and handling. The containers shall be enclosed in a steel tray.

6.3 CELL COVERS:

The cell covers shall be made of suitable material compatible with the container
material and permanently sealed with the container. It shall be capable to withstand
internal pressure without bulging or cracking. It shall also be fire retardant and shall
comply with the provisions set forth in clause of 6.2 above. Fixing of Pressure
Regulation Valve & terminal posts in the cover shall be such that the seepage of electrolyte,
gas escapes and entry of electro-static spark are prevented.

6.4 PRESSURE REGULATION VALVE :

Each cell shall be provided with a pressure regulation valve. The valve shall be self re-
sealable and flame retardant. The valve unit shall be such that it can not be opened without
a proper tool. The valve shall be capable to withstand the internal cell pressure specified by
the manufacturer.

6.5 TERMINAL POSTS:

Both the positive and negative terminals of the cells shall be capable of proper termination
and shall ensure its consistency with the life of the battery. The surface of the terminal
post extending above the cell cover including bolt hole shall be coated with an acid
resistant and corrosion retarding material. Terminal posts or any other metal part which is
in contact with the electrolyte shall be made of the same alloy as that of the plates or of a
proven material that does not have any harmful effect on cell performance. Both
positive and negative posts shall be clearly and unambiguously / identifiable. All exposed
metal parts(connectors, terminals etc) shall be protected with heat shrinkable silicon
sleeves for reducing the environmental impact including a corrosive environment.

“terminal shall be clearly and unmistakable identifiable and marking shall be of permanent
nature”.

2
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery sets

6.6 CONNECTORS, NUTS & BOLTS, HEAT SHRINKABLE SLEEVES:

Where it is not possible to bolt the cell terminals directly to assemble a battery, separate
non-corroding lead or copper connectors of suitable size shall be provided to enable
connections of the cells. Copper connections shall be suitably lead coated to withstand
corrosion due to sulphuric acid at a very high rate of charge or discharge. The area of
cross-section of the connectors shall be rated at 2 Amp/[Link] minimum at 6 hour rate of
discharge.

Nuts and bolts for connecting the cells shall be made of copper, brass or stainless steel.
Copper or brass nuts and bolts shall be effectively lead coated to prevent corrosion.
Stainless steel bolts and nuts can be used without lead coating.

All exposed metal parts (connectors, terminals etc.) shall be protected with heat
shrinkable silicon sleeves for reducing the environmental impact including a corrosive
environment.

6.7 FLAME ARRESTORS:

Each cell shall be equipped with a Flame Arrestor to defuse the Hydrogen gas escaped
during charge and discharge. Material of the flame arrestor shall not affect the performance
of the cell. The valve regulated venting device shall be provided with flame arrestors to
prevent any sparking flame from entering the cells.

6.8 SEPARATORS:

The separators used shall be glass mat or synthetic material having high acid absorption
capability, resistant to sulphuric acid and good insulating properties. The design of
separators shall ensure that there is no misalignment during normal operation and handling.

6.9 STAND/SUPPORTING RACK:

Necessary stands/supporting racks for fixing and installing the batteries shall be
supplied with cell insulators and stand insulators. These racks/stands shall be so designed
that cells are placed within easy reach at convenient height to facilitate easy maintenance.
Minimum number of screw should be used primarily for anchoring. The joining of the frames
should not leave crevices and ensure proper and tight fit. Necessary screws [Link] be
supplied such that the racks can be fitted without any extra material. Racks shall be
constructed so as to permit free access to the floor directly beneath, thus cleaning of both
cells and floor is quick and simple task.
Racks shall be duly painted with two (2) coats of acid resistance paint and supplied in
assembled state with marking .

7.0 RATINGS :

The rating of battery cells shall be 10 hrs. rating corrected to 27 deg.C. The Ampere-
hour rating for 48 V/384V battery banks shall be 200 AH, 360AH & 600AH Each cell will be
of 2.23/2.25 volts under float operating condition. Thus the battery bank for 48V shall
consist of 24 cells and for 384V shall consist of 192 cells. So that the total battery voltage is
not excess of 10% of the rated voltage under float operating condition.

7.1 DESIGNATION:

The cell shall be designated by symbol as per relevant Standards.

3
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery sets

8.0 CAPACITY REQUIREMENT AND DIMENSIONS :

When the battery is discharged at 10 hour rate, it shall deliver 85% of C (rated capacity,
corrected at 27 Deg. Celcius) before any of the cells in the battery bank reaches 1.85
V/cell. The capacity (corrected at 27 Deg. Celcius) shall also not be less than C and not
more than 120% of C before any cell in the battery bank reaches 1.75 V/cell.

The battery shall be capable of being recharged from the fully exhausted condition
(1.75V/cell) at the specified float voltage. The battery design shall permit the charging of
the battery at 2.35V(For a short duration)/cell (when two cells shorted). All the cells in
a battery shall be designed for continuous float operation at the specified float
voltage throughout the life.
The battery voltage shall not be less than the following values, when a fully charged
battery is put to discharge at C/10 rate.

(a) After Six minute of discharge : 1.98V

(b) After Six hours of discharge : 1.92V
(c) After 8 hours of discharge : 1.85V
(d) After 10 hours of discharge : 1.75V

The bidder shall provide the Tables & Graphs showing relation of the closed circuit
voltage, impedance and the residual capacity of each cell in the battery, when it is
discharged to the end voltage of 1.75V/cell at C/10 and C/8 rate of discharge. A table and
graph showing the relation between theimpedance and residual capacity of each cell shall
also be provided by the bidder.
Loss of capacity during storage at an average ambient temperature of 35 Deg. Celsius for a
period of 6 months shall not be more than 60% and the cell/battery shall achieve 85% of
its rated capacity (corrected to 27 Deg. Celsius) within one charge/discharge cycles and
full rated capacity within another 4 discharges (i.e. total 5 discharges) after the storage
period of 6 months. Voltage of each cell in the battery set shall be within 0.05V of the
average voltage throughout the storage period.
Ampere hour efficiency shall be better than 90% and watt hour efficiency shall be better
than 80%.

9. EXPECTED BATTERY LIFE:

The battery for float applications shall be capable of giving more than 1200 DOD (upto
80%) cycles at an average temperature of 35 Deg.C Celsius. DOD (Depth of
Discharge) is defined as the ratio of the quantity of electricity (in Amphere-hour) removed
from a cell or battery on discharge to its rated capacity.

10. CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS:

Oxygen recombination efficiency of cell/battery shall not beless than 90% when tested
as per clause No. 12.9 of IS:15549: 2005/ Clause No. [Link] TEC spec. GR/BAT -01/03,
[Link] cell pressure shall be sufficient for 99% gas recombination when working
at C/10 rate of charge and ambient temperature of 27Deg. Celcius. Under normal
operating conditions grid corrosion shall not be more than 0.05 mm/year.

Throughout its life, in the operating condition of C/10rate of charge and C/8 rate of
discharge in average ambient temperature of 35 Deg. Celcius, shedding of battery
active material shall not lead to short circuit. The growth of positive plate shall be less than
8% of the total plate area throughout the specified life.

4
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery sets

While operating in the normal operating conditions, the cell or battery shall not lead to dry
out, throughout the life of the battery. Manufacturer shall supply the necessary data to
support the requirement. The battery shall not exhibit thermal runaway while working in
the average ambient temperature of 35 Deg.C, operating range of 0 to 50 Deg.C and at a
charge rate of C/10 and discharge rate of C/8.

11.0 MARKING AND PACKING :

11.1 MARKING :
The following information shall be indeligiblyand durably marked on the outside of
the cell.
a) Nominal voltage.
b) Manufacturer's name ,type and trade name.
c) Cell designation.
d) AH capacity at 10 hour rate.
e) Voltage for float operation at 20 deg. C. with tolerance of (+/-) 1%.
f) Month & Year of manufacture.
g) Country of origin.
h) [Link]. of cell/cell No.
i) Date of which charge given before dispatch.
j) Next due date for freshening charge.

11.1.1 The cells and batteries may also be marked with the ISI certification mark, if any.

11.2 PACKING :
The cells shall be suitably packed so as to avoid any loss or damage during transit.

12.0 INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL:

The manufacturer shall supply instructions manual for initial charging (if required) /
treatment, and routine maintenance during service, with each and every battery set. The
following information shall be provided on, the instruction cards.
a) Designation of cell or battery.
b) Ampere hour capacity.
c) Nominal voltage.
d) Manufacturer's instructions for charging.
e) Voltage for float operation at 20 deg.C. with tolerance (+/-)1 %.
f) Maintenance instructions.
g) Environmental & safety provisions required.

13.0 TYPE TESTS :

Valid Type test(s) of similar or higher rating of VRLA Battery set conducted at Government
Laboratory/ Laboratory accredited by NABL/ International Laboratory Accreditation
Cooperation Mutual Recognition Arrangement (ILAC-MRA) signatory agency (in case of
foreign laboratory), accredited for the tests conducted.

Type tests conducted Manufacturer’s own laboratory accredited by NABL for the test
conducted, duly witnessed by representative of CPRI/ERDA/ PGCIL/ RVPN/Govt. Agency
for offered material shall also be acceptable. Duly self-attested copies of Type test
certificate(s) not older than 7 years, as on the date of bid opening. For this purpose date of
issue of type test report shall be considered.

The following type tests should have been carried out on the battery sets offered.

5
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery sets

[Link]. Name of Test Clause No. Clause No.

(As per IS: (As per TEC
15549 : 2005) spec. GR/BAT -
01/03, March-04)
1 Visual examination 4.1 to 4.9 & 8.1 1.0, 2.0, 3.0 & 4.0
2 Checking of dimension as per 10.1.1(b) 1.0, 2.0, 3.0 & 4.0
manufacturer’s drawing.
3 Test for “C10” capacity and voltage 12.1 5.1 & [Link]
during discharge.
4 Test for C1 Capacity and voltage 12.2 Not available
during discharge rate.
5 Capacity test at other discharge rate. Table- 2 [Link].1
6 Ampere hour and watt hour efficiency 12.4 & 12.5 [Link] & [Link]
test.
7 Test for retention of charge. 12.6 [Link]
8 Acid retention capability & Wicking 12.7 [Link].2
test on separators.
9 Test on vent seal operation. 12.8 [Link].3
10 Test for oxygen recombination 12.9 [Link]
efficiency
11 Endurance life cycle test. 12.10 [Link]
12 Test for short circuit current and Not Available 5.10, 5.10.1 ,3.6 &
internal resistance. [Link]

The bidder will submit the complete type test certificates as per relevant standard
mentioned above (not older than 7 years as on the date of bid opening ) for battery sets.

If the bidder furnishes type tests as per TEC spec GR/BAT- 01/03 March-04, then type test
mentioned at Sr. No. 4 will not be insisted. If the bidder choose to furnish type tests as per
IS: 15549: 2005, then type test at Sr. No. 12 will not be insisted.

The type test(s) conducted at manufacturer’s works duly witnessed by representative of any
Electricity Board / Nigam / Govt. agency / PGCIL / NTPC will also be acceptable.

14.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

All the acceptance tests listed below shall be carried out as per relevant standards for
batteries in the presence of our inspecting officer.

S. Name of Test Clause No. Clause No.

No. (As per IS: 15549 : (As per TEC spec. GR/BAT-
2005) 01/03, March-04)
01 Visual Inspection 4.1 to 4.9 & 8 with 1.0, 2.0, 3.0 & 4.0
RVPN specification and with RVPN specification
GTP and GTP

02 Verification of 10.1.1 (b) with approved 1.0, 2.0, 3.0 & 4.0 with
Dimensions drawings approved drawings / GTP.
03 Test for C10 Capacity 12.1 5.1, [Link] & 5.4
and voltage during the
discharge.
15.0 DRAWINGS:

The bidder will submit the detailed dimensional drawings for battery sets including stands.

6
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery sets

16.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

Guaranteed Technical particulars shall be furnished in prescribed format alongwith the

requisite drawings / documents for approval.

17.0 ACCESSORIES:

Each battery set shallbe supplied complete with all necessary accessories viz. stand, inter
connections, cell No. plates with Sticker, battery voltage tester (digital multimeter) with
leads,torque spanner etc.

18.0 BILL OF MATERIAL:

The firm shall also have to furnish the bill of material used in battery set.

19.0 SAMPLING:

The sampling scheme and criteria for acceptance test for cells upto and including 600 AH
capacity shall be in accordance with clause 14 of 15549:2005.

7
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery sets

Schedule-GTP
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR VRLA MAINTENANCE FREE
BATTERY SETS- 48V/200AH

[Link]. Particulars of item RVPN Requirement

1 Manufacturer's name and address. Bidder to specify
2 Standard specifications to which material IS:15549:2005/ TEC Spec GR/BAT-
shall conform. 01/03 march 04
3 Maintenance free Valve regulated
(a) Type and make of Battery set.
Battery sets
(b) Capacity of Battery set at 10 Hr's
200AH
rating corrected to 27deg C.
4 No. of cells. 24
5 Battery design life expectancy in
i) Float application min 15 yrs at 27 deg C
ii) Cyclic operation. 1200 DOD(up to 80%) cycles
6 Ampere hour efficiency without negative
more 90%
tolerance.
7 Watt hour efficiency without negative
above 80%
tolerance.
8 not less than 90% when tested as
Oxygen recombination efficiency.
per clause 12.9
9 Type of negative plate. Bidder to specify
10 Type of positive plate Bidder to specify
11 Type & material of separators. Bidder to specify
12 Method of connections between cells. Nut bolt shall be made copper, brass,
i.e. Bolted or Burnt. or stainless steel
13 Recommended starting and finishing rates
of charge.
Not applicable , VRLA cells are
(a) Starting (A) supplied with electrolyte filled and
charged condition.
(b) Finishing (A) -do-
14
Voltage per cell at the end of charge at the
>2.00V
finishing rate.
15 Recommended trickle charging rates for
NA
(min. / max.) for different type of working.
16 shall have chemical and electro
Material of container.
chemical compatibility

8
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery sets

[Link]. Particulars of item RVPN Requirement

Max. allowable Ambient temperature at

17 Bidder to specify
which cell can safely operate.

18
Over all dimension of each cell in mm.

a) Length. Bidder to specify

Width Bidder to specify

Height Bidder to specify

19 Distance between the centers of each cell Bidder to specify

when erected (in mm)
20 Bidder to specify
Total weight of cell with acid in Kg.
21
Recommended maximum period of
Bidder to specify
storage.

22
Internal Ohmic resistance of each cell.

23 Bidder to specify
Recommended float charge.

24 Bidder to specify
Recommended Boost charge.

25
Voltage ripple allowable Bidder to specify

26 Time required for Boost charge from fully

Bidder to specify
discharged condition at 27 Deg.C.
27 Not applicable, VRLA cells are
Max. No. of charge / discharge cycles
supplied with electrolyte filled and
required to reach the rated capacity.
charged condition.
28 Whether cells and battery sets bear ISI
Bidder to specify
certification mark.

*****

9
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery Charger

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 48 VOLT SMPS BATTERY CHARGERS SUITABLE FOR

VRLA MAINTENANCE FREE BATTERY SETS

1. SCOPE:

This specification covers design, manufacture, fabrication, shop test and delivery of SMPS
battery chargers suitable for indoor installation at various Grid sub stations in Rajasthan.
These equipments are to be completed in every respect for the functions designated and to
the entire satisfaction of the purchaser. It is requested that the supplier in accepting the
contract agrees to furnish all apparatus, appliances and material whether specifically
mentioned or not, but which may be found necessary to complete perfect or test any of the
herein specified equipment in compliance with the requirements implied in this specification
without extra charges.

Consideration may be given by the purchaser to alternatives which the supplier considers
advisable by reason of his own manufacturing requirements and experiences provided
descriptive matter is submitted pointing out the recommended device or arrangement as
equal to or superior to that required by the accompanying specification with full justification.

2. STANDARDS:

All material and equipment shall comply in all respect with requirement of the latest addition
of the relevant IS/ IEC/TEC/RDSO. A set of standards adopted, translated in English, if it is
in language other than English, shall also be enclosed with the bid, to enable due
comparison, wherever a standard is specifically mentioned in these specification. It is
understood that the corresponding standard amongst the sources mentioned above shall
also apply.

3. GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT:

The battery chargers of 48V/50 Amp & 48V/100 Amp with N+1 configuration with ultimate
capacity 75 Amp & 125 Amp respectively shall be of SMPS type with +ve earth. The system
shall consist of a Distribution / Switching / Alarm arrangement (DSA) and Float Rectifier –
cum- Chargers (FR/FCs) in a rack. It shall employ modular configuration for flexible provision
of DC power. It shall employ menu driven Micro Processor Controlled Techniques for DSA
as well as module for control, monitoring and alarm to achieve better reliability of the system.
The SMPS battery chargers shall be capable of continuous operation with float voltage 2.23
to 2.25 volts per cell (at 27 Deg. C) and 2.3 volts per cell (at 27 Deg. C) for charge voltage
while supplying the constant DC load.

3.1 The SMPS battery chargers shall have constant voltage characteristics throughout
the range (from zero to full load) at the floating value of the voltage so as to keep the
maintenance free type VRLA batteries fully charged but without harmful overcharge.

The system shall employ a modular configuration to provide flexibility in view the future load
requirements of DC power. The modules shall be accommodated in a rack. Distribution/
Switching/ Alarm (DSA) shall be provided in first rack or in a separate rack as per
manufacturer’s design for the ultimate system capacity. All factory wiring for the rack shall be
for the ultimate capacity so that only plugging-in of FR/FC module shall enhance the DC
power output.

1
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery Charger

3.2 Principal Parameters.

Input Nominal voltage System rack having ultimate capacity of 75

Amp and 125 Amp & will be provided AC
three phase input power supply and each
module shall operate on individual phase of
three phase AC input power supply.

Input Voltage range 165 V to 260 V AC

Frequency 48 Hz to 52 Hz.

Power factor >0.95 at 50% and above load.

Efficiency >0.85 at 50% and above load.

Soft Start time 10 Secs. Min. output current ramp-up.

Output voltage adjustable 48V to 56V DC

Current limit adjustable

For 50 Amp. SMPS 5A to 50A

For 100 Amp. SMPS 5A to 100A

Regulation:

(i) Output voltage over shoot/ under shoot +/-5% of DC output voltage for any load of
when charger is switched on 25% to 100%.

(ii) DC output voltage over shoot for a step +/- 5% of DC out put voltage for any load of
change in AC voltage 165 V to 260 V single 25% to 100%.
phase.

(iii) D.C out put voltage for a step load +/- 5% of DC out put voltage for any load of
change of 25% to 100% 25% to 100%.

Ripple < 2mV RMS psophometric

Load sharing Better than +/- 5% active current sharing at

full load.

Cooling Convection

1.3 Main Features of SMPS Charger

3.3.1 Constructional features:

The rack structure shall be made up of rigid frame work of steel profiles and rear door may
be of hinged or removable type. The rear door shall be provided with ventilation

2
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery Charger

arrangement. Alternate design of aluminium and other rigid structure meeting the
requirements are also permitted.

The rack shall be free of sharp edges or sharp corners. The rack shall be designed for easy
maintenance & installation. The rack mounting arrangement shall be such as to provide easy
access from front, rear and top for installation and maintenance.

The individual FR/RC module shall be easily mounted to / removed from the front side of the
rack. The FR/FC module shall be designed to slide in to the rack on a suitable mechanical
arrangement. The associated AC input, DC output connections, control / systems & interface
cable connecting the modules shall be connected/ disconnected easily without causing any
interruption in the supply and damage to load or other working module.

Proper thermal engineering of hardware design shall be done by the manufacturer so as to

ensure the uninterrupted use of the equipment. The rack complete with all panels fitted shall
be designed to allow cooling by natural convection.

With the doors in position, all the common visual alarms and meters shall be clearly visible.
However, the fixtures on the door shall not restrict the movement of door in any way.

The FR/FC modules shall be cooled by natural convection. AC input to FR/FC shall be
through locking type arrangement. DC output shall be through hot plug in connector on the
FR/FC side and through lugged termination on the bus bar/ termination end. Control alarm
and monitoring connection shall be through connectors. The FR/FC module shall be
removable from the rack only. All AC input, DC output & alarm /control/ monitoring cables
interconnecting the modules and rack shall be easily disconnected by plugs or connectors.

AC Terminations:

The input terminals shall be single phase or three phases as the case may be clearly
marked as R Y B and N for AC three phases, L and N for AC single phase.

AC input termination shall be suitably protected against the accidental touch / contact with
the working staff for their protection and shall also have clear and prominent be “DANGER”
marking. Screening shall be provided between AC and DC components to prevent
accidents.

The AC input connection to the rectifier module shall be by means of locking type plug and
socket arrangement. All the connection between distribution and FR/FC shall be through
proper rated cables only. Fuses and circuit breakers for each FR/FC shall be easily
accessible and properly rated. Proper termination for the AC input of the circuit breakers and
its output to the FR/FC.

The system rack having ultimate capacity of 75 Amp and aboveshall be provided AC three
phase input power supply and each module shall operate on individual phase of three phase
AC input power supply.

3
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery Charger

DC Terminations:

The output of each rectifier in the negative load shall be taken through full rated ISI marked
MCBs of proper current ratings. All the AC, DC control & alarm cabling shall be supplied with
the rack. All DC +Ve and – ve leads shall be clearly marked.

Wiring:

All insulated conductors except those within the confines of a printed circuit board assembly
shall be of the rating enough to withstand the maximum current and voltage during fault and
overload. All the wires and cables used shall be fire retardant as per IS 1554 with
amendment I (June 94).

All wiring shall be neatly secured in position and accurately supported. Where wires pass
through any part of metal or cover the holes through which they pass shall be suitably
bushed.

Earthing:

Two power earth terminals shall be provided in the frame of the system.

Mounting off component & layout:

Components mounting and fixing methods shall be secured. Suitable mechanical structure/
arrangement for holding modules in position shall be provided so that the module is held firmly
by sliding through it.

The FR/FC modules shall be cooled convection. AC input to FR/FC shall be through locking
type arrangement. DC output shall be through hot plug in connector on the FR/FC side and
through lugged termination on the bus-bar termination end. Control, alarm and monitoring
connections shall be through connectors.

The FR/FC module shall be removable from the front of the rack only. All AC input, DC
output and alarm / control / monitoring cables interconnecting the modules and racks shall
be easily disconnected by plugs or connectors.

3.3.2 Distribution, Switching, Control, alarm & Monitoring (DSA)

The Distribution / Switching sub system of DSA shall preferably be in the modular from whereas
control, alarm & monitoring sub-system shall only be modular. The distribution / switching sub-
system may be accommodated in a rack with other FR/FCs or in a separate rack. These sub
systems shall be rack mountable. DSA shall preferably be housed in the upper portion of the
rack above the FR/FC modules. The unit shall be equipped to meet the ultimate system
capacity.

3.3.3 Battery Temperature Compensation

The charger shall be provided with the appropriate circuitry to interface with the temperature
probe assembly. With the probe, the charger shall automatically compensate gassing and
constant voltage setting inversely proportional to the probe’s temperature/ battery ambient
temperature, so that over charging at high temperature and under charging at low
temperature can be prevented.

4
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery Charger

3.3.4Current Limiting (Voltage Drop)

Current Limiting (Voltage Drop) shall be provided for float/ charge operation. The float /
charge limiting shall be continuously adjustable within 50% to 100% of rated output current
for output voltages range of 44.4 to 56 volt. For test purposes upper limit of 100% +5% and
lower limit of 50% - 5% shall be acceptable. The float and charge current limit adjustment
shall be provided on the front panel of the rectifier module. The FR/FC modules shall be fully
protected against short circuit. It shall be ensured that short circuit does not lead to any fire
hazard.

3.3.5 Fuses

All fuses shall be HRC Link type. Fuses shall be mounted on fuse carriers which are in turn
mounted on fuse bases. Wherever it is not possible to mount fuses on carriers, fuses shall
be directly mounted on plug-in type base. In such case one insulated fuse pulling handle
shall be supplied for each charger. Fuse rating shall be chosen by the Bidder depending on
the circuit requirement. All fuses in the chargers shall be monitored. Fuse failure
annunciation shall be provided on the failure of any fuse.

3.3.6 Blocking Arrangements

Blocking arrangement shall be provided in the positive pole of the output circuit of the
charger to prevent current flow from the DC battery into the charger.

3.3.7Monitoring, Alarm and Indicating Lamps

The visual indications/ display such as LEDs, LCDs or a combination of both shall be
provided on each FR/FC module to indicate:-

(A) Functional indications:

The following functional indications shall be provided on FR/FC and DSA:

a) Mains available.
b) FR/FC on Auto Float.
c) FR/FC on Auto charge.
Note: The functional indication (a) shall be provided on both DSA & FR/FC module.
While b and c may be provided either on DSA or both FR/FC & DSA.

(B) Alarm indications:

(i) On FR/FC
(a)FR/FC over voltage, under voltage or output fail.
(b)FR/FC over load (voltage drop)
Functional indications shall be extended as status and alarm indications as FR/FC fail to
Distribution / switching / control & alarm unit.

(ii) On DSA

(a) Load voltage high (above 56V /low (below 45.6V)

(b) FR/FC Fail.
(c) Mains out of range.
(d) System over load.
(e) Mains ON/ Battery Discharge.

5
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery Charger

(f) Temp. Compensation fail.

(g) Battery Fail or No Battery.
(h) Battery isolated from the load.

All alarm circuits shall be provided with suitable delay to ensure that they do not operate to
transients. All the protection / alarm shall be within tolerance of 0.25V in case of DC voltage
and 1% in case of current. For AC voltage it shall be +/- 5V.

Every alarm condition shall be accompanied with an audio alarm with audio cut off facility.

Potential free contacts two (one for alarm and one redundant) shall be provided for
extension of alarms to centralized display.

3.3.8 Radio Interference

The equipment shall be efficiently screened against interference to radio and also other
communication equipment, which may be installed in the same building. All sources of noise
shall be filtered if necessary with suppressors generally in accordance with relevant
standards.

3.3.9 Name plates and marking

The name plates shall be while with black engraved letters. On top of each charger, on front
as well as rear sides, larger and bold name plates shall be provided to identify the charger.
Name plates with full and clear inscriptions shall also be provided on and inside of the
panels for identification of the various equipments and ease of operation and maintenance.

A etched, engraved or anodized name plate shall be fitted on each SMPS battery charger
unit having following details inscribed.

Manufacture’s name :
P.O. No.& date :
[Link]. of SMPS unit :
Rating of SMPS charger :
Input voltage of SMPS charger :
Output voltage of SMPS charger :
Year of Manufacture :
[Link] & INSPECTION:

The bidder must furnish type test reports carried out on one of the SMPS battery charger
unit of similar /higher capacity which shall pass all the prescribed type tests for conformity of
relevant standards. These type test reports must be issued by Govt. Lab, Govt. approved
Lab, NABL accredited laboratory and must not be older than 7 years from the date of
opening of bid.

Battery chargers shall conform to all type tests as per TEC specification No. GP/SMPS-
01/04/ Feb.2001 or RDSO specification NoRDSO/SPN/TL/23/99 version–3 with all latest
amendments. Routine/ acceptance tests shall also be carried out on each SMPS Battery
Charger as per specification. Following type tests shall be carried out for compliance of
specification requirements:

6
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery Charger

TYPE TESTS:
(I) Visual Inspection.
(II) Insulation Resistance Test.
(III) Applied high Voltage test.
(IV) Performance test.
(V) Test for protection device.
(VI) Burn in test.
(VII) Climatic test.
(VIII) Vibration test.
(IX) Radio frequency Interference Suppression tests

1.1 ROUTINE & ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

On each of the SMPS battery chargers following routine and acceptance tests shall be carried
out at manufacturer’s works before dispatch.
(I) Visual Inspection.
(II) Insulation Resistance Test.
(III) Applied high Voltage test.
(IV) Performance test.
(V) Test for protection device & other tests shall be carried out as per requirement of
GTP in the presence of inspecting officer.

1.1.1 TESTS AT SITE :

The purchaser reserves the right to conduct all the tests on the equipment after arrival at site
and the supplier shall guarantee test certificate figures under actual service conditions.

5. PACKING & MARKING

i) All SMPS Battery Charger shall be packed in strong seasoned wooden crates to avoid
handling problem.
ii) The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough handling during transit,
strong at site and subsequent handling in the field.
iii) Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or dunnage or spacers shall be provided to
prevent damage or deformation during transit and handling.
iv) All packing cases shall be marked legibly with the appropriate caution symbol and
correctly so as to ensure safe arrival at their destination and avoid dispatched on
account of faulty packing and faulty or illegible markings stenciled on it in indelible
ink. Whenever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting hooks etc.
shall be provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall be
supplied by supplier without any extra cost.
v) Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the
following information:

a) Name of the consignee.

b) Details of consignment.
c) Destination.
d) Total weight of consignment.
e) Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.
f) Handling and unpacking instruction.
g) Bill of material indicating contents of each package.

6. DEPARTURE FROM SPECIFICATION:

Any departure from specification shall be clearly brought out in the bid along with detailed
justification.

7.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

7
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery Charger

Guaranteed Technical particulars shall be furnished in prescribed format alongwith the

requisite drawings / documents for approval.

8
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery Charger

Schedule-GTP
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR SMPS BASED BATTERY CHARGER 48
Volt, 50Amp &100Amp N+1 CONFIGURATION WITH ULTIMATE CAPACITY 75/125 AMP.

[Link]. Description Required Parameters

1 Name of Manufacturer and Company To be furnished by Bidder

2 Type & Model No. To be furnished by Bidder

3 Input Voltage System rack having ultimate Capacity of

75Amp and 125Amp will be provided AC
three phase input power supply and each
module shall operate on individual phase of
three phase AC input power supply.

4 Rated Input Voltage Tolerance 165 volt to 260 volt AC

5 Frequency Variation 48 to 52 Hz

6 Power Factor > 0.95 at 50 % and above load

7 Efficiency > 85% at 50% and above load

8 Soft Start Time 10 Secs. Min. output current ramp up

9 Output Voltage Adjustable 48volt to 56 volt DC

10 Current limit adjustable

For 50 Amp SMPS 5 to 50 Amp

For 100 Amp SMPS 5 to 100 Amp

11 Regulation

(i)Output voltage overshoot/undershoot ± 5% of DC output voltage for any load of

when charger is switched on 25% to 100%

(ii) DC output voltage overshoot for a step -------DO----------

change in AC voltage 165 v to 260 v

(iii) DC output voltage for a step load

change of 25% to 100% --------DO------------

12 Ripple < 2 mV RMS psophomatric

13 Output Load Sharing Better than ± 5% at full load

14 Protection Over Voltage – only faulty unit shuts down.

Over Current – can sustain short current

indefinitely

9
 Tech. Spec. 48 V Battery Charger

[Link]. Description Required Parameters

15 Monitoring Alarm and Indication FUNCTIONAL INDICATIONS :-

1. Mains available
2. FR/FC on auto float

3. FR/FC on auto charge

ALARM INDICATION

1. Over voltage
2. Under voltage
3. Over load
4. FR/FC fail
5. Main out of range
6. System over load
7. Battery discharge
8. Temp. compensation fail
9. Battery isolated from the load
16 Operating Temperature Range - 25 ºC to 50 ºC

17 Storage Temperature Range - 40 ºC to 70 ºC

18 Humidity 0-95% non condensing

19 Insulation Resistance

(a) AC input and Earth. > 2 mega Ohm.

(b) DC Output and Earth. > 1 mega Ohm.

(c) AC input and DC Output. > 5 mega Ohm.

20 Lightning and Surge Protection As per VDE 0675 & IEC 61643

21 Cooling Convection

22 Dimensions in mm (WxHxD) To be furnished by bidder.

23 Weight in Kg To be furnished by bidder.

24 Details of painting To be furnished by bidder.

10
 746

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
OF
TESTING/ MEASURING INSTRUMENTS, TOOLS/ TACKLES AND OTHER
MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

1. SCOPE OF WORK:

1.1 The following testing/ measuring equipments, tools & tackles shall be supplied in
the quantities as mentioned in the price schedule. For few instruments/ equipments
approved makes for the instruments/ equipments are mentioned elsewhere in the
specifications, however all the makes shall be of reputed makes having at least 2
Years in satisfactory operation with the user. The Nigam reserves the right of
final selection of make as per the specification requirements and accessing the
overall performance of the equipment.

1.2 CLAMATIC CONDITIONS: Refer clause 33.0 of GTC (Part-II, Volume-II)

1.3 Auxiliary Power Supply: Refer clause 24.0 of GTC (Part-II, Volume-II)

1.4 Successful bidder is required to impart training to Nigam Engineers on the supplied
Instrument/ Testing Equipment and other items, so that they can operate and
maintain the supplied equipment/ instrument/ item satisfactorily and safely. The
demonstration of testing equipment/ instruments as required shall be carried out
in the live switchyard of 765/400 kV, Nigam reserve the right for final selection
of testing equipment/ instrument based on its performance and meeting of
functional requirements.
1.5 The manufacturer/ supplier of the testing equipment/ instrument, other items shall
have established after sales service network and trained manpower to promptly
support
1.6 During the standard warranty period the testing equipment/ instruments requiring
shall
be carried out by the bidder/ manufacturer/ supplier on site/ their works. The
software upgrade during this period shall be supplied by manufacturer/ supplier
free of cost to Nigam. If the kit needs to be shifted to manufacturer/ suppliers works
for repairs, supplier will have to bear the cost of, spares, transportation, transit
insurance (to & fro), etc of kit for repair at test lab/works .kit after repairs, need to
be returned within thirty days from the date of despatch.
1.7 Whether or not explicitly defined, the testing equipment/ instrument and other
items shall be supplied with all standard accessories and tools & tackles for
satisfactory operation and meeting of the functional requirements. For the
testing equipments/ instruments and other items wherever the communication with
computer is applicable, the bidder shall supply all the necessary interfacing cables,
softwares etc. as standard with all the testing equipment/ instrument.

2. STANDARDS:

Except otherwise specified or implied herein the instruments/ equipments shall comply
with the relavent IS/ IEC/ASTM or any other equivalent standards.

It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and construction of
equipment. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of
 747

engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous

commercial operation. The offered equipment shall be complete with all components
necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such, components shall be deemed to be
within the scope of contractor's supply irrespective of whether those are specifically brought
out in this specification and / or the commercial order or not.

3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTS/ EQUIPMENTS:

3.1 Earth Tester

Sr. No. Description Specifications

1. General Requirement Shall be able to measure resistance of single
electrode, multiple electrodes mesh system, plates,
earth strips etc. and resistivity by four pole method, in
400 and 765 kV AC inductive area, portable battery
operated
2. Display 3&1/2 Digital
3. Range 0.01 ohm to 19.99, 199.9, 1999, 19.9Kohm at
different range.
4. Accuracy ±2% of reading,
5. Resolution 0.01 ohm or better
6. Power supply/Batteries Built in rechargeable 12 V batteries or Equivalent.
Auto switch off
7. Operating mode Resistance measurement by 4 terminal method,
Warning beepers/indication if circuit is not through.
Noise voltage measurement and rejection facility.
8. Accessories Battery charger, Voltage and Current spikes, Test
lead set of 30 ,15,8 mtr, length. Carrying case, manual
etc. required for carrying out specified measurement.
9. Calibration Certificate Calibration certificate from/traceable to, NABL
accredited lab or internationally reputed lab, shall be
submitted. Date of calibration shall not be older than
one month from the date of supply of Kit.
10 Repeatability Test results shall be repeated in charged switch yard
condition.
11 Additional Features The kit and accessories shall be robust and rugged
enough, so that it can be transported safely at different
locations .The transportation case and packing of the
kit shall be such that the transportation from one
station to other will not affect the performance and
accuracy of measurement of kit.
 748

3.2 Insulation Tester:

3.2.1 Mega-ohm meter 10KV Digital Battery operated.

Sr. No. Description Specifications

1. Type 10 KV Digital/Analog mains/ Battery
Operated.
2. Insulation test voltage 10 KV in steps of, 5, 10, KV DC or with
multiplier settings.
3. Short Circuit Current 5 mA minimum
4. Accuracy(test voltage) ±5% of nominal voltages or better
5. Range of Measurement 0 to 200 G Ohm minimum
6. Additional features Shall have an arrangement to be able to
compute Polarisation Index and Dielectric
Absorption Ratio as per Indian Standards.
AI R60/R15 & PI-R600/R60
7. Basic Accuracy(resistance) ±5% of reading±3 digits or better
8. Display & scale length Digital/ Analog or Analog in barographs,
9. Power Supply 230±10% ,50 Hz
10. Batteries 12 V/ 2 AH (min) Rechargeable or
equivalent.
11. Battery Charger Automatic Inbuilt for AC voltage 110 to 240
V
12. Capacitive Discharge Automatic, after insulation test is over,
13. Guard termination To be provided
14. Accessories Test leads (20 Meters), power supply leads,
charger leads, Carrying case, Manual ,etc
required for testing
15. Calibration Certificate Calibration certificate from/traceable to,
NABL accredited lab or internationally
reputed lab, shall be submitted. Date of
calibration shall not be older than one month
from the date of supply of Kit.
16. Environmental and statutory Shall conform EMI/EMC and environmental
requirement protection requirement as per relevant
International standard. Copy indicating
conformation shall be enclosed.
a. Temp- -5 to 50 deg C.
b. Humidity- Up-to 95% non condensing
 749

Sr. No. Description Specifications

17. Additional safety The kit and accessories shall be robust and
requirement rugged enough, so that it can be transported
safely at different locations .The transportation
case and packing of the kit shall be such that
the transportation from one station to other will
not affect the performance and accuracy of
measurement of kit.

3.2.2 Mega-ohm meter 5 kV Digital Battery operated.

Sr. No. Description Specifications

1. Type 5 KV Digital Battery Operated.
2. Insulation test voltage 5 KV in steps of 0.5,1,2.5,5 KV DC or
equivalent.
3. Short Circuit Current 5 mA
4. Accuracy(test voltage) ±5% of nominal voltages or better
5. Range of Measurement 0 to 200 G Ohm minimum
6. Additional features Shall be able to compute and display
Polarisation Index and Dielectric
Absorption Ratio as per Indian Standards.
AI R60/R15 & PI-R600/R60
7. Basic Accuracy(resistance) ±5% of reading±3 digits or better
8. Display & scale length Digital, Analog or Analog in barographs,
with auto switch off feature.
9. Power Supply 230±10% ,50 Hz or With Batteries
10. Batteries 12 V/ 2 AH (min) Rechargeable
11. Capacitive Discharge Automatic after insulation test is over,
12. Guard termination To be provided
13. Accessories Test leads(15 meter),power supply leads,
charger leads, Carrying case, Manual ,etc
required for testing
14. Calibration Certificate Calibration certificate from/traceable to,
NABL accredited lab or internationally
reputed lab, shall be submitted. Date of
calibration shall not be older than one month
from the date of supply of Kit.
15. Environmental and statutory Shall conform EMI/EMC and environmental
requirement protection requirement as per relevant
International standard. Copy
 750

Sr. No. Description Specifications

indicating conformation shall be enclosed.
a. Temp- -5 to 50 deg C.
b. Humidity- up-to 95% non
condensing
16. Additional safety The kit and accessories shall be robust and
requirement rugged enough, so that it can be transported
safely at different locations .The
transportation case and packing of the kit
shall be such that the transportation from one
station to other will not affect the
performance and accuracy of measurement
of kit.

3.2.3 Mega-ohm meter 15 kV Analog mains operated

Sr. No. Description Specifications

1. Type 15 kV Analog Mains Operated.
2. Insulation test voltage 15 kV in steps or with multiplier settings, and
adjustable
3. Short Circuit Current 12 mA minimum
4. Accuracy(test voltage) ±5% of nominal voltages or better
5. Range of Measurement 0 to 300G- Ohm minimum
6. Additional features Shall have high voltage interlock.
7. Basic ±5% of reading or better
Accuracy(resistance)

8. Display & scale length Analog for mego-ohm as well as for voltage
9. Power Supply 230±10% ,50 Hz
10. Protections Circuit Breaker or switch operated. Zero
Voltage Start.
11. Input Voltage regulator Shall have line regulator or stabilizer.
12. Capacitive Discharge Automatic after insulation test is over,
13. Guard termination To be provided
14. Accessories Test leads(20 Meters),power supply leads ,
Carrying case, Manual ,etc required for testing
15. Calibration Certificate Calibration certificate from/traceable to,
NABL accredited lab or internationally reputed
lab, shall be submitted. Date of calibration shall
not be older than one month from the date of
supply of Kit.
16. Environmental and Shall conform EMI/EMC and environmental
 751

Sr. No. Description Specifications

statutory requirement protection requirement as per relevant
International standard. Copy indicating
conformation shall be enclosed.
a. Temp- -5 to 50 deg C.
b. Humidity- upto 95% non
condensing
17. Additional safety The kit and accessories shall be robust and
requirement rugged enough, so that it can be transported
safely at different locations .The transportation
case and packing of the kit shall be such that the
transportation from one station to other will not
affect the performance and accuracy of
measurement of kit.
18. Additional Features The kit and accessories shall be robust and
rugged enough, so that it can be transported safely
at different locations .The transportation case and
packing of the kit shall be such that the
transportation from one station to other will not
affect the performance and accuracy of
measurement of kit.
3.3 Insulation Tester

3.3.1 Insulation Tester 2500 Volts.

Sr. No. Description Specifications

1. Type Digital, Low Voltage, Battery Operated hand held
instrument
2. Insulation test voltage 50-100-250-500-1000 and 2500 V DC
3. Accuracy for test voltage ±2%
4. Range of Measurement 200 G ohm or more.
Accuracy
50 Volts 10 ± 2% ±2 digits ±4.0% per
100 Volts 20 ± 2% ±2 digits ±2.0% per
250 Volts 50 ± 2% ±2 digits ±0.8% per
500 Volts 100 ± 2% ±2 digits ±0.4% per
1000 Volts 200 ± 2% ±2 digits ±0.2% per
2500 Volts 200 ± 2% ±2 digits ±0.2% per
Service Error: BS EN 61557-2 (2007).
50 V, ± 2.0% ±2d, 100 - 900 ±10.5%
100V, ± 2.0% ±2d, 100 - 900 ±10.3%
250V, ± 2.0% ±2d, 100 - 900 ±10.3%
500V, ± 2.0% ±2d, 100 - 900 ±10.3%
1000V, ± 2.0% ±2d, 100 - 900 ±11.5%
 752

Sr. No. Description Specifications

5. Short circuit current 2 mA minimum
Guard termina <5% error at 500 K ohm parallel circuit resistance
Performance with 100 M ohm load.
Result storage capacity >1000 test results
Data download Bluetooth wireless
Range Up to 10m
Power supply 6x 1.5 V cells type IEC LR6

Battery life 3000 insulation tests with duty cycle of 5 sec. on /

55 sec off @ 1000 V in to 1 M ohm
6. Operation Battery powered
7. Display Digital ,3 digits
8. Max Capacitive load 15nF on tests above 1000 V
9. Guard termination To be provided
Other features Designed for the electrical and industrial markets
Insulation testing up to 2.5 kV
in a hand held instrument
Guard terminal for high resistance accuracy
Adjustable insulation test voltage from 50 V
to2500 V
Stabilized insulation test voltage
Rechargeable options for mains and car charging

Polarization Index (PI) and Dielectric Absorption

Ratio (DAR)
600 V T rms AC and DC voltage measurement
New case design with optional magnetic hanging
strap
Test result storage and review and Bluetooth
download, Live circuit detection and protection
CAT IV 600 V applications & IP54.

10. Accessories Test leads(3 meter), power supply leads, Carrying

case, Manual ,etc required for all testing
13 Calibration Certificate Calibration certificate from/traceable to, NABL
accredited lab or internationally reputed lab, shall
be submitted. Date of calibration shall not be older
than one month from the date of supply of Kit.
 753

Sr. No. Description Specifications

14 Environmental and Shall conform IS 2992-1987 &IS 11994-1986 or
statutory requirement relevant international standard. Copy indicating
conformation shall be enclosed,
Temperature- 0 to 50 deg.
Humidity -90 %

15 Additional Features The kit and accessories shall be robust and rugged
enough, so that it can be transported safely at
different locations .The transportation case and
packing of the kit shall be such that the
transportation from one station to other will not
affect the performance and accuracy of
measurement of kit.

3.3.2 Insulation Tester 5 kV ANALOG / Digital

Sr. No. Description Specifications

1 Type 5KV Digital & Analog mains & Battery.
2 Insulation test voltage 5 KV in steps of 500, 1000, 2500 ,5000 V DC
with multiplier settings.
Lock test voltage 40 V to 1 Kv in 10 V steps
1 KV to 5 Kv in 25 V steps

3 Short Circuit Current 6 mA minimum

4 Accuracy (test voltage) +4%, ±10 V nominal test voltage at 1 G ohm
Load (0° C to 30° C) or better
5 Range of Measurement 10 K to 15 T Ohm
Capacitance Range 10 nF to 25 nF ( Test voltage above 500 v )
Capacitance accuracy 10 nF to 10 µF ±10% ±5 nF
Noise interference 8 mA
Software 4 filter Setting 10 s, 30 s, 100s, 200 s
Additional filters Adaptive filter for transient noise handling.
Negative nose current filter

6 Additional features Shall have an arrangement to be able to

compute Polarization Index, Dielectric
Absorption Ratio, Step voltage, Ramp Voltage,
Dielectric discharge test, as per Indian & IEC
Standards.
AI R60/R15 & PI-R600/R60
 754

Sr. No. Description Specifications

7 Basic Accuracy(resistance) ±5% up to 1 T ohm & ± 20 & up to 10 T ohm at
5 KV or better
30 V to 660 V AC or DC
Voltmeter Range

8 Display & scale length Digital range: 10 K ohm to 10 T Ohm

Analog Range: 100 K ohm to 10 T ohm
9 Power Supply 90 -264 V rms, 50 Hz
10 Batteries 11.1 V, 5.2 AH Meets IEC62133:2003
(Rechargeable
Battery life
4.5 hr. (typical) continuous Testing at 5 Kv with
a 100Mohm load )
11 Battery Charger Automatic Inbuilt for AC voltage 110 to 240 V
Remote control Remote control via USB Cable only
Real time output (V,I,R) reading at rate of 1Hz
Timer Range Up to 99 minutes 59 seconds, 15 second
minimum setting
5 rs logging @ 5 sec interval
Memory capacity

12 Capacitive Discharge Automatic, after insulation test is over,

13 Guard termination Guards out parallel leakage resistance down to

14 Accessories Test leads (20 Meters), power supply leads,

charger leads, Carrying case, Manual ,etc required
for testing
Interface
USB type B, Bluetooth Class 2

15 Calibration Certificate Calibration certificate from/traceable to, NABL

accredited lab or internationally reputed lab, shall
be submitted. Date of calibration shall not be older
than one month from the date of supply of Kit.
16 Environmental and statutory Shall conform EMI/EMC and environmental
requirement protection requirement as per relevant
International standard. Copy indicating
conformation shall be enclosed.
a. Temp- -5 to 50 deg C.
b. Humidity- Up-to 95% non
condensing
 755

3.4 Digital Micro Ohm Meter

Sr. No. Description Specifications

1. General Requirement The test kit shall be portable, lightweight, robust and
tropical to suit outdoor applications. The kit shall
have microprocessor-based operation and shall give
direct resistance measurement in LCD display for the
EHV circuit breaker, isolator contacts, bus bar
connectors, terminals etc. in the charged switchyard
environment (420 kV and 765 kV AC).
The kit shall perform accurately with grounding open
on both side of equipment and with grounding at one
end of equipment under test.

2. Ranges/Accuracy Range : 0.1 µ ohm - 1.999 ohm or better.

Resolution : 0.1 µ ohm
Accuracy :
Current setting# Resistance range accuracy
50 - 110 A 0 - 100.00 Typical ± (0.2% + 0.2 Max. ±
(0.2% + 0.8
11 - 49 A 10 - 100.00 Typical ± (0.2% + 0.5 Max.
± (0.2% + 2.0
10 A 10 - 1000.0 Typical ± (0.2% + 1.0 Max.
± (0.2% + 2.5

Test current : in ranges with Maximum 110 Amp DC.

3. IP rating IP54 Lid open / IP65 Lid Closed
Battery life 200 Single 100 A tests or up to 2 x 10 minutes
continuous 100 A output.
User replaceable Li-ion battery pack
Battery type

4. Power supply 230VAC±10%, 50Hz±5% with variations in voltage

and frequency respectively.

Battery charge time Full charge in 2.5 Hr. from flat

EMC & safety
IEC61326-1 & IEC61010 CAT IV 600 VAC / 500
VDC up to 2000m
Weight CATIV 300 V up to 4000 m
Less then 8 kg ( main unit)

Noise rejection Differential 100 mV @ 50-60 Hz on test leads

5. Accessories All standard accessories including test leads of 5 and

 756

Sr. No. Description Specifications

15 meters with suitable clamps / connectors (for
conductor size up to 35 mm dia) for EHV switch yard
fittings, carrying case, probes, test leads, spare fuses etc
those all required for measurement.
6. Repeatability It should offer repeatability of test results in charged
switchyard conditions with and without local
groundings applied on equipment under test.
7. Environment Temp- 0 to 50 Deg C.
Humidity 95 % non Condensing
The test kit shall be compatible for EMI / EMC
environment as per relevant IEC
8. Calibration Certificate Calibration certificate from/traceable to, NABL
accredited lab or internationally reputed lab, shall be
submitted. Date of calibration shall not be older than
one month from the date of supply of Kit.
9. Additional Features The kit and accessories shall be robust and rugged
enough, so that it can be transported safely at
different locations .The transportation case and packing
of the kit shall be such that the transportation from one
station to other will not affect the performance and
accuracy of measurement of kit.

3.5 Multi-function Transformer Test Set

Functional Multi-functional kit for transformer testing which should have

Requirement inbuilt display to perform all test with two interlock switch for
safety purpose. There should be single software for all testing all
different assets and different tests.

Tan Delta testing AC Voltage 0-12 kV, 500 mA for short period, 100 mA for
continuous Tip-up testing
Frequency range 1-505 Hz.
Individual temperature correction of tan delta measurements (ITC)
which enables a correct temperature correction of tan delta
measurements taken at high and low temperatures and also with
standard Correction tables. An intelligent temperature correction
means that certain tan delta measurement at a certain frequency and
temperature corresponds to a measurement made at a different
temperature at a different frequency. The conversion calculations
describing how the
insulation properties are changing over temperature. So the unit
should be capable to derive individual temperature correction by
taking tan delta at wide frequency from 1 to 500Hz and then
deriving Individual temperature correction factor according to
actual condition of apparatus.
 757

Automatic tan delta voltage dependence detection (VDD) will

automatically detect if the dissipation factor is suspected to be
voltage dependent and suggest a tip-up test.

Winding Output Current 100A (Single phase) and 16A (Three Phase)
Resistance Compliance Voltage 50V
Adaptive demagnetization - Kit should be capable of automatically
demagnetization by injecting an alternating and decreasing DC
voltage / current to magnetize the core in two directions and finally
reduce the remanence to negligible level. Kit should have 100A
current source for same. Kit should have capability to measure the
remaining remanence regularly so that next cycle reducing current
can be decided based on pending remanence and time can be
reduce to demagnetization. Kit should have capability to measure
the remanence in percentage/absolute value before and after the test.
Auto Discharge
Dynamic OLTC Measurement (Resistance, Voltage, Current) with
provision of remote changing of the taps automatically and
manually from system itself and software should be capable to
display transient resistance value (parallel) of OLTC.

Turns Ratio Test voltage 250V and 2.2KV

Excitation current
Magnetic Balance
FRSL testing

Contact Resistance Contact Resistance upto 100A with Dual Ground Testing

Current Ratio, burden and polarity by voltage method

Transformer Phase and magnitude error
Excitation curve (knee - point) upto 2.2KV
Winding resistance
Secondary burden
Dielectric withstand voltage

Voltage Ratio and polarity by voltage method

transformer Phase and magnitude error
Secondary burden
Dielectric withstand voltage

Primary Current Current injection upto 800A.

Injection

General properties Mains input 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz (± 10%)

Short-term up to 30 A < 60s

Kit should have Output voltage source 2.2kV/1A (1min), 250V/10A
AC and also have auxiliary dc source output 0-300V DC
 758

Display
XGA

Measurement External AC / DC voltage and current 0.05% of reading + 0.05%

accuracy FS
Internal DC current 0.1% of reading + 0.1% FS
Internal AC current 0.2% of reading + 0.2% FS
Internal AC voltage 0.2% of reading + 0.2% FS

PC Connectivity Ethernet port for running the instrument from an external PC or

connect it to an external network.
USB 3 USB ports for multipurpose use

Temperature Operating -20°C to +55°C (-4°F to +131°F)

Storage -20°C to +70°C (-4°F to +158°F)
Humidity < 90%RH, non-condensing

Standards CE- marking

EMC 2004/108/EC
LVD 2006/95/EC

3.6 Fully Automatic Capacitance & Tan Delta Measurement Kit

The equipment shall be suitable to measure capacitance and tan delta of EHV class
transformers (1/2/3 windings), bushings CT, windings of shunt reactors, bus & line
The
kit should have the feature of suppression of electrical and magnetic interference due to line
frequency and it should also have the feature of measuring tan delta and capacitance at
different frequencies than line frequency.
The kit shall be capable of measuring capacitance and tan delta of each winding of 500 MVA
transformers in suitable switching mode so that capacitance of other windings does not affect
the reading etc.
An optional arrangement if available for measurement of inductance, transformer turns
ratio, transformer leakage reactance and loss etc. may be included in offer, However the
tech/financial evaluation will be made for the basic kit which have facility of
measurement of tan delta and capacitance with induction suppression feature as detailed
above in para-1
The kit shall be able to measure the ambient temperature and relative humidity with
inbuilt/optional arrangement. The cost towards optional accessories shall be separately
quoted
The equipment shall be complete with measuring bridge, HV power supply unit of 12
KV, Standard Capacitor etc. The effects of induced voltage on instrument during testing for
getting final measurement should be compensated automatically. The kit shall be capable of
measuring excitation current of transformer winding at 12 kV.
The kit should have the facility of generation of test frequency independent of power line
frequency for measurement of tan delta and capacitance
 759

The equipment shall be robust enough to sustain the jerks during the transportation in
local condition.
The kit should be light weight, its packing and transportation cases/trolley shall be such that
the shifting of kit from one substation to other will not affect its performance and accuracy
in measurement of the kit

S, No Description Specification
1. Output Voltage and 0 - 12 KV and 100 mA (Min) continues and
300mA& above intermittent @ frequency range 45
Current
Hz max to 70 Hz minimum, at 4 Kv from 15-
400 Hz , at 250 V from 1-505 Hz
2. Tan Delta (DF) Range - 0 to 100%min
Accuracy -0.5 % or better, of the reading
Resolution - 4 digit or better
3. Power Factor Range - 0 to 100%min
Accuracy - 0.5 % or better of the reading
Resolution - 4 digit or better
4. Capacitance Range - 1pf to 100 µf min
Accuracy - 0.5 % min + 1 pf of the reading.
Resolution - 6 digit
5. Power supply(Input) 230V±10% AC, 50Hz±5%
Out put power 3.6 KVA
6. Noise immunity Elec 15mA induced noise into any test lead with no loss
static at maximum interference to specimen current of
20:1
7. Display/Operation/desi VGA LCD, Front panel/keypad mounted on
gn control unit or through Laptop. The tan delta kit
should be in two units ( control unit and HV unit
) for easily movement in substation.
8. Laptop In case kit is laptop operated, The Laptop shall
be Industrial grade machine of reputed brand
with latest specifications such as Core 2 Duo
processor or better, 2GB DDR RAM 320GB HDD

.Preloaded with MS Windows /XP,VISTA

[Link] CDs etc
9. Data Store Facility for data storing in the kit & down
loading to PC
 760

10. Safety features Short circuit protection

Over voltage protection
Interlock for HV output.
Reliable ground connections etc.

11. Indications HV supply ON, Ground open, Power supply ON

etc.
12. Software Data analysis software in windows XP/Vista/latest
version with the features of
Storing and downloading of files in data base
for further analysis in PC.
Facility of drawing graphs between voltages

values, frequencies etc.

Comparing of different value of same
parameter at different period/time
13. Repeatability It should offer repeatability of test results in
charged switchyard.
14. Environment The kit shall be compatible for EMI /
EMC/Vibration requirement as per relevant IEC
.The copies of relevant certificate shall be enclosed.
15. Operating conditions Shall operate at Temperature -5 to 50 deg C,
Humidity not condensing up to 95%,

3.7 Universal Computerized Relay Test Kit:

The instrument shall be suitable for testing all types of three phase relays (static,
numerical and electromagnetic type). It shall be portable and handy for easy
transportation to be carried by one person. It should be able to test all protection relays based
on impedance, voltage, current, frequency, harmonics, and synchronization. The equipment
must be capable of efficiently testing all types of electronic and electromechanical relays
with a high degree of accuracy. The testing system shall be able to simulate all the wave
forms and transients as recorded on the disturbance recorder. The system should be operable
manually, semi-automatic and automatic and should meet the following specifications:-

3.7.1 The testing system must generate at least 4 voltage sources and 10 currents (6
Independent channels + 4 voltage channels convertible as a current channel), with
the facility to control their amplitudes and phase angles independently

3.7.2 i). Voltage and current outputs: The test kit shall specify the VA rating of output
sources as per the requirement of relay protection scheme. However it can have the
following output quantities.
Four phase voltage outputs : (0-150) V
Six phase current outputs : (0-60) A without external Amplifier in three
phase mode. Additional 3 current source
 761

(3x15A) are also required to test Bus bar

protection testing.
Three phase output power : 75 VA or better
(for voltage) for each phase.
Three phase output power : 150 VA or better
(for current) for each phase.
Output Distortion : Less than 0.5 %.

ii). All voltage and current amplifier should be protected against overload and short
circuit.
iii) Kit should test all types of electromechanical relay without the help of adding
any External amplifiers or boosters. Say kit should inject 200VA @4A atleast to test
all types of electromechanical relays

3.7.3 Power supply requirements to the instrument shall be as follows: Independent of

mains supply fluctuations, variations and distortions available so that its accuracy is
not dependent due to inherent mains supply features.
Nominal input voltage : 230 V +/- 10% , AC
single phase
Frequency : 50 Hz +/- 5%
Power consumption : 1800 W Max.
3.7.4 Timer selection :
There should be at least 10 inputs (binary) in 2 groups of 5 independent contacts
each with voltage more than 220 V DC and AC. The two groups should be
galvanically separated.
Measuring time : 0-1 hour.
Resolution : 0.1 ms.
Time measurement accuracy : 0.02 % or less
3.7.5 To ensure extra protection of relay, the relay testing kit must incorporate
auxiliary DC voltage with range (5 V 250 V) and output power of min.100 W.

3.7.6 Phase angle :

Variation in phase angle shall be possible in each output channel independently
with following specifications:
Phase Angle Range : 0-360 Degree
Phase Resolution : 0.1 Degree or lower
Phase Accuracy : 0.05 Degree or lower

3.7.7 Frequency Generator Range :

Continuous signals : 0.1- 1000 Hz.
Transient signals : DC -10000 Hz
Frequency error : 25ppm
Frequency Resolution : 1 ms or better
Phase error : ±0.25 deg
3.7.8 Weight of the instrument should not be more than 50 kg in not more than two units.
3.7.9 The relay testing kit offered must be computer compatible. It should be capable
of being operated with a computer. Manual operation of the equipment should be
possible for variation of all parameters either by key provided on equipment or
through the laptop/ computer under the scope of supply. A laptop computer pre
 762

loaded with the easy to use relay testing software should be provided for fully
automatic operation of the relay testing set.
3.7.10 Software :
The software shall be user friendly and shall have the standard test plans for the
majority of the relays under test and shall have flexibility to modify by the user
as per specific requirement. The software should be easy to use without the
requirement of extensive computer literacy and should be possible to use in manual.
semi-automatic and fully automatic mode. It should be possible to automatically
create the IEC and IEEE standard waves and /or create other characteristics using
the standard circular lens and linear elements. It should be capable to perform
dynamic and transient test with band width of 5 to 1200 Hz by fault simulation
or pre-recorded event.
The software should also contain an automatic test plan editor to create automatic
test plans for new unknown relays easily and without programming knowledge.

Software should have complete package (All advance software) at free of cost with
the supply of kit for the life time with multiple installations in PC. All advanced
software should be supplied along with the supplied relay test kit to check the relays
automatically for life time with multiple installations license in multiple PC so that
distance, differential, frequency, transplay, powerswing feature can be tested.

The same test kit shall be upgradable for IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus testing in
future.

The kit should have the capability to accept transient fault data recorded by

should be able to perform both static and dynamic testing such as fault and prefault
generation, simultaneous ramping of quantities and editing wave forms etc. The kit
offered must have provision for generating COMTRADE. Microprocessor :
The kit should employ minimum 32 bit DSP technology or better.
3.7.11 Calibration :
Apart from self- calibration (software), the system should also be provided with an
independent calibration box as an independent external means of verifying the
relevant parameters. It should be possible to calibrate the calibration box and,
therefore, the kit to relevant international traceable standards.
3.7.12 Interface: Kit shall have 3 nos of Ethernet ports & USB for communication. Kit
should have a capability to convert the voltage source as a current source & capable
to inject atleast 5A. All facilities should be in single unit.
3.7.13 Protection: All current and voltage outputs shall be independent and should
have overload and short circuit protection.
3.7.14 The equipment should be designed to operate under the adverse conditions of
external influence like electrostatic discharge, magnetic field, Electro- magnetic
field induction, RF interference, input wave form distortion and harmonics,
input voltage and frequency variation.
3.7.15 Environment :
Temp. operating range : 0-50 C
Relative humidity: 95% , Non condensation
3.7.16 Standards :
Protection: IP20 or equivalent
 763

Safety: IEC 61010 or EN 6100-3-3 or Equivalent.

EMC Emissions: EN 50081-2 Industrial or equivalent IEEE.
Calibration: Traceability to relevant International standard.
3.7.17 certificate for all the parameters alongwith
calibration certificate having traceability to national/ international laboratory/
standard should be furnished with offer.
3.7.18 Accessories: The testing kit shall include all required suitable testing leads, test
software, laptop computer, case, instruction manual, tools and spare fuses
etc.
3.7.19 The kit shall be supplied with the Lap-Top having following specification:
Make: Reputed Indian /International Manufacturer having ISO 9001
certification (Design & Mfg.)
Intel Core 2 Duo Higher Configuration
a. Processor: Mobile Intel Core 2 DUO Processor, T 7200, 2.0 GHz
with 4 MB L2 Cache 667 MHz FSB or higher
b. Motherboa rd & Chipset: 945 PM or higher Chipset on OEM
Motherboard
c. Memory: 1 x 1 GB DDR2 SDRAM expandable up to 4 GB
d. HDD: 80 GB 5400 rpm (minimum)
e. Display: 39.1 cm TFT Active Matrix Display (1280x800 WXGA
Resolution)
f. Video controller : Integrated PCI Express Graphics Card with 128 MB
dedicated memory
g. Modem: Integrated 56 KBPS Modem (Fax/Data) and 10/1001/000
Gigabit Fast Ethernet
h. Wireless Connectivity : Integrated Wireless 3945 a/b/g, integrated
Blue Tooth
i. DVD Writer : Integrated DVD writer 8X and integrated stereo
speaker
j. Key Board : Keyboard with Touch Pad
k. Expansion Port : 2 USB, Gigabit Ethernet Card, RGB or S-Video or
VGA, PCI MCI slot, Connector for port replicator/ Docking Station
and Travel Battery, microphone, stereo head phone and other standard
features.
l. Operating system: Microsoft Windows Vista Business and
& other software Norton/McAfee/e-trust Antivirus Software latest pre
installed version with license, Recovery Solution
m. Power Supply : 230V, 50 Hz AC Supply with Rechargeable Battery
Pack Comprising of Li-Ion Batteries suitable for approx. 4 hours operation
complete with battery charger/adaptor (voltage and capacity of battery pack
to be indicated in the offer)
n. Carry case: To be provided

3.8 DC Ground Fault Tracking Device

The instruments should be designed to analyze and locate DC ground faults on ungrounded
DC battery multi-feeder distribution systems. The design should be capable of quickly
track these DC ground faults.

The tracking device should have following features:

 764

Should NOT require system interruption.

Locate DC ground faults with this hand held portable instrument
Protect sensitive electronic equipment
Unique design to reduce system outages
Should detect how much fault exist on each branch

Minimum specification of the system:

Source Voltage Variable from 0-15 V rms in low voltage and

variable from 0-50 V rms in high range
Source Current : load dependent from 0 to 1.7 A rms
Source frequency : 20 Hz +/- 2 %
Fault resistance : 1 K ohm to 399 K ohm at 50 V, Bridge
accuracy +/- 10 %
Line capacitance : 0.01 to 11.1 micro F,
Display : transmitter separate 3-digit LCD for volts and
current Accuracy +/- 5 % ,
Receiver : Digital meter display uo tp 1.999 ( three gain selections )
Environmental. 0 to 50 Degrees C
Power adapter input + 12- 18 VDC
Internal battery operation More than 24 hr (Rechargeable)
Display Alphanumeric 16 characters
Dimensions x x
Weight approx. 4 Lb.
Case Rugged case should be included

3.9 Transformer Oil Breakdown Voltage Test Set

The equipment offered shall be suitable for determination of electrical strength

(breakdown voltage) of insulating oil conforming to ASTM D 1816-04 , BS EN 60156-
96 ,SABS EN60156 ,ASTM D 877A-02 ,CEI EN 60156-95 ,VDE0370 part 5 ,ASTM
D 877B-02 ,IRAM 2341 , AS1767.2.1, IEC 60156-95 ,UNE EN 60156 , PA SEV
EN60156 and 3 or more custom test sequences.

1. The unit should be fully automatic, microprocessor controlled with built in color
display and printer & shall be complete with test cell stirrer and necessary gauges
for adjusting the gap.
2. The test cell shall be as per IEC/IS suitable for BDV up to 100 kV without external
flash over.
3. HV chamber interlocking and zero start interlocking shall be provided.
4. The unit shall have motorized drive to increase voltage linearly as per the rate
specified as per various testing standards namely IEC156, ASTM etc. Provision
should also be available for user settable tests. The unit shall be automatic and
complete with test cell, stirrer and "GO (2.5 mm)" and "NO GO (2.54 mm)"
gauge for adjusting the gap.
5. Parameters for test specification as defined by different standards like
IEC156,ASTM and other standard mentioned should be preprogrammed in the
instrument. The user needs to just select the standard used for test.
6. Specification
 765

i) Test Voltage: 0-100KV, 0.1KV resolution

ii) Accuracy of Voltage 1 KV
iii) Temperature measuring range : 10 C to 65 C with resolution of 1 C
iv) Breakdown detection should perform in terms of both and

v) Trip time should be less then 10micoSec

vi) The short-circuit current of the transformer and associated trip time required
as per IEC156 shall be 4mA for 5ms and 1ms in case of Silicon oils. Normal
breakdown detection speed shall be within 10msec.
vii) The HV switch off time shall be <10us automatically if an established
arc of 4mA occurs for 5ms as per IEC156.
viii) The equipment shall be suitable for operation at 85 to 265 volts 50
Hz. Single phase A.C. input supply.
ix) Instrument should have automatic Oil temperature measurement facility
with a resolution of 1 C
x) Protection : dual safety micro switch on chamber cover

7. Instrument have Built in printer and RS232 / USB port for data transfer to
computer
8. Instrument should have in-built memory and USB stick memory facility for easy
transportation of results without a need to carry instrument near to computer.
9. Instrument should have alphanumeric keypad to facilitate entry of test ID notes
etc.
10. Instrument should have spill oil drain facility in the instrument.
11. The test set should give all the test results with standard deviation, average of reading
and a pass/ fail message wherever necessary on screen and a built in printer.
12. Instrument should meet EMC requirement in accordance with IEC61326-1 Class B,
CISPR22, CISPR 16-1 and CISPR 16-2.
13. Instrument should meet the safety requirement of IEC1010-1 (1991)
14. Weight of the instrument should not be more then 34Kgs.
15. Instrument should come with standard software for report generation.
16. A suitable calibrator should be provided with the set Calibration meter suitable
for verifying the calibration of oil test sets upto 100 kV .The meter should enable
the high voltage output to be checked, traceable to national standards. The
calibration meter should fit in the oil test set chamber in place of a standard
vessel. The design should ensure that the load to the transformer is similar to the
load during an oil dielectric strength test. The voltage indication on the calibrator
meter viewed should be on an analogue display marked from 0 to 100 kV with 2 kV
divisions.
17. The meter should be supplied in a protective bag.

3.10 Battery Impedance Test Kit

1) Scope of Work:

Supply of Battery Impedance Test Kit, which is required for Diagnosis of Battery condition
in electrical interference atmosphere up to Battery String Voltage of 220 V DC on line.

2) Type :
 766

The instrument should be lightweight, Portable and Operate on live DC Battery Bank
without any down time.

General:

1) The test set should able to determine the healthiness of Lead Acid Batteries upto
2000AH/& above.
2) The test set shall be capable of on line testing of batteries with Pass/
Warranty/Fail Calculation.
3) The test set shall able to measure float current and ripple current without CT.
4) Instrument should have on-board data analysis including % change from the last test,
cell % deviation from the string average and % variation from the baseline
impedance value. The data should be displayed in numerical form with status, in
% deviation impedance graph and in ascending % deviation impedance graph for
superior evaluation of battery condition.
5) The test set should be capable of testing of many battery configurations in Single
Rack to complex parallel strings in combined space.
6) The test set should able indicate measuring status (LED/buzzer/Display).
7) The test set should able to measure the impedance, inter-cell resistance and float
voltage on line, without disconnecting the battery/charger from system.
8) The test set should be protected against Over Voltage and reversed leads.
9) As soon as the measurement is taken Instrument should immediately display cell
comparisons to make quick cell analysis.
10) The test instrument should be able to store more than 2000 sets of reading.
11) Battery Impedance Tester should have RS232 port for taking direct printout.
12) Necessary Computer Hardware and Software shall be supplied for Archival,
Analysis and reporting.
13) The data analysis software should be Window based with No programming skills
required. The software should have ability to import images such as IR
thermographs, diagrams or photographs to help to document visual inspection,
String configurations, installations techniques, or other aspects of battery
systems. Images and data should be stored together to provide convenient and easy
access.
14) Any future Firmware and software upgrade should be free through the Internet or
CD without a need to send instrument to factory/service center.

Other Specification:

I) Transmitter Part:

Supply Voltage: 230V 50Hz 200VA (Max.) at 50Hz Operation.

Output Current - 2A Peak

Display ¼ VGA LCD.

Analysis, Reporting
and Archivel

Setting time 3 Sec (Max.)

per reading
 767

II) Receiver Part:

Impedance Range and Resolution:

0.05 to 1.000 m - 1 resolution.

1 to 10 m - 10 resolution.
10 to 80 m - 0.1 m resolution.

Voltage Range and Resolution:

0 - 15 V dc across probes.
1 - 2.5 V dc - 1 mV resolution
2.5 15 V dc - 10 mV resolution

Current Range and Resolution:

0 - 90 A dc : 0.1 A resolution
0 - 90 A ac : 0.2 A resolution

Accuracy:

DC Voltage : + 1% of Rdg. + 1 lsd.

DC Impedance : + 3% of Rdg. + 1 lsd.
a/c dc Current (internal) : + 1% of Rdg. + 1 lsd.

Battery Pack: 3 Hrs. Continuous 4.8 V dc, 7000 mAH, Ni mH Battery

pack with charger and output 6.5 V dc @ 1.1 A dc (Charging).

Charger Supply : 230V AC, 50 Hz.

Voltage

Temperature : 0 to 55 C.

Humidity : 20 to 90% RH non-condensing

Standards : The equipment shall be conform to relevant per

IEC/IEEE/Indian Standards and able to carry out the testing as per IEC/IS
recommended practice.

Compatibility : Electromagnetic and Electrostatic inference

Compatibility.

3.11 Circuit Breaker Operational Analyzer

3.11.1 General: Main Equipment

 768

(i) The Computer Aided CB Analyzer system comprising of CB operation unit,

programme unit, travel analyzer unit & analysis software should be capable to
perform close, open, close-open, open-close, open-close, open operation on CB
under test, with a facility to introduce time delays between composite operation.
(ii) The CB Analyzer should be capable to measure, record and analyze the CB
operation timing.
(iii) Kit should be able to measure timing of circuit breaker by keeping both side of
circuit breaker grounded.
(iv) The instrument should be suitable for measuring the operation timing of main, PIR
and Auxiliary contacts (Wet & Dry) as well as Individual coil currents, coil
resistance & Control voltage of coil with PIR value (Resistance value of parallel
contact) in single operation. The analyzer should record PIR value & CRM value in
numerical form.
(v) The CB Analyzer should be able to measure and record current rise and fall of
tripping coils as well as of closing coils of all three poles of CB simultaneously.
There should be minimum six coil current measurement channels.
(vi) The CB Analyzer should be capable to measure and record travel and speed of
movement of operating mechanism of CB.
(vii) The CB Analyzer should be capable to measure and record dynamic contact
resistance of main and arcing contacts of CB with injection of minimum 200 Amp.
DC current for minimum six breaks simultaneously.
(viii) The CB Analyzer should be capable to measure and record static contact resistance
of breaker.
(ix) The CB Analyser should be able to perform Timing as well as static and dynamic
resistance measurement in a single setup with out the need of changing connections.
(x) The CB Analyzer should be capable to measure pole discrepancy timing.
(xi) The CB Analyzer should be capable of measuring contact closing & opening timing
up to four (04) main and four (04) no. PIR contact of all three phases together.
(xii) Channel requirement of CB analyzer

Main Contact Channels: 12 Binary channels to measure 2Main+ 2 PIR contacts

of 3 poles simultaneously with 6 channels to measure PIR value simultaneously with
timing measurement.

Auxiliary Contact Channel: 12Binary (6 Wet + 6 Dry/Wet i.e. configurable

channels)

DCRM /Test Current Channel: 6 set (6 Channels for resistance +6 Channels for
Current).

Travel Channel: minimum 3 separate or using DCRM channels.

Coil Current: 6 Channel for coil current measurement. It shall measure and plot the
graph of individual Coil current of all (3 Close + 3 Trip) coils simultaneously with
timing measurement without changing connection at marshaling box.

Coil Resistance: 6 Channels

 769

Control Voltage: Minimum 2 Channel separate or via control module.

(xiii) Measurement accuracy

Timing: ±0.01% of reading ±1sample interval
Coil Current: ±2% of reading
R: ±2% of reading
Travel: ±0.01% of reading ±1sample interval
(xiv) Measuring ranges:
Trigger options - O, C, C-O, O-C, and O-C-O
Sampling speed - Min 40kHz
Plot Length - Selectable up to 200 Sec at 20KHz.
Trigger - Shall be through control module.
Non bouncing switch, Max Current
60A AC/DC
Display - Trans-reflecting
Operating Temperature - 0 to +50 deg. C
Relative Humidity Max- 90 % non-condensing
Communication Interfaces- Universal Serial Bus, serial & Ethernet.
Mains Input (nominal) - 100-240VAC, 50+/-10%HZ
(xv) It should also be possible to measure motor current with optional current clamps.
(xvi) The CB Analyzer should be capable to calculate, save and print all contact
closing & opening tuning in tabular form also.
(xvii) Suitable mounting kits for transducers and sensors, along with sensor cable of
suitable length should be supplied with CB analyzer system.
(xviii) Test leads with suitable clamp and connectors and having length suitable for
leads with suitable clamp and connectors and having length suitable for connection
to EHV CBs should be supplied with CB Analyzer system for
(xix) Kit should be able to carry out motion testing upto three poles simultaneously.
(xx) One set (three quantity) of Necessary travel transducer both linear and rotary should
be supplied with the kit. Necessary fixtures suitable for mounting on
BHEL/ABB/CGL/Siemens/ALSTOM (132 KV and above) makes of CBs, to
monitor travel related parameters like contact gap. Contact insertion, over travel etc.
should be supplied with CB Analyzer.
(xxi) rd and
trackball/mouse. It should be able to operate the instrument with unit itself without
use of laptop. It should also be possible to store test results on unit itself and those
results should be able to be retrieved later for viewing.
(xxii) It should also be possible to operate the instrument with laptop by a user friendly
software.
(xxiii) It should be possible to upgrade the unit for vibration measurement of circuit
breaker in future.
(xxiv) It should be possible to upgrade the unit for 1st Trip measurement of circuit breaker
in future.
(xxiv) A standard laptop with Win 10 and MS office 10 should be supplied.

3.11.2 System Operation hardware/software, peripherals and analysis software.

(i) The test report for recording motion should provide test results both in form of curve
and tables. The tables should consist of calculated CB parameters such as
closing/opening speed etc.
 770

(ii) The entry of various data/parameters (pertaining to CB) be possible sing built in
display of menu.
(iii) Real time clock should be provided for automatic date and time functions.
(iv) a) The computer aided analysis software should have sampling frequency upto 40
KHz or more.
b) The analyzer should be capable to record transient phenomenon for duration at
least 8 sec at 40kHz.
(v) The binary channel accuracy and analogue channel accuracy should be suitable meet
all desired functions (stated above).
(vi) The CB analyzer should be provided with facility of down loading data to a
laptop/PC.
(viii) The computer aided CB analysis software should be supported with suitable
report generation.
(ix) It should be possible to change scale factor of time axis to enable enlarged view
of part of diagram.
(x) It should be possible to change amplitude scale to make best use of available space.
(xi) It should be possible to study on speed curve, the damping and speed variations
at CB opening and closing time.
(xiv) It should be possible to compare present results with previous one. The feature
of zooming the graph and moving the cursors on graph, thereby indicating
instantaneous values of test parameters should also be provided.
(xv) The latest version of CB analyzer system (hardwares and softwares) to be
supplied and time to time updating of software should be offered.
(xvi) As and when required, technical support for analysis of critical test result to be
offered, on regular basis.

3.11.3 Other Essential Requirements.

(i) The CB analyzer should operate on power supply of 220 volts (± 10%) at 50 Hz
(± 5%) frequency .
(ii) The CB analyzer should be capable of working in high electro-magnetic and
electrostatic conditions.
(iii) The CB analyzer should be capable of functioning accurately in environmental
condition of temperature 0° to 50° C and humidity (RH) up to 95 %( non-
condensing).
(iv) The CB analyzer should be portable so as to facilitate moment from one site to other
and supplied with suitable transportation case.
(v) The supplier should have adequate after sale service facility.
(vi) As per ISO: 9001 requirement, celebration certificates for each instrument should
be supplied.
(vii) Installation:
a) Indoor/outdoor
b) The equipment should be portable easy to handle robust and sturdy, for field
applications.

3.12 SF6 Gas Leakage Detector

The detector shall be portable, battery operated, hand held type and having a minimum
SF6 gas leakage sensitivity of 5gm/year. The sensor shall be connected through a
 771

flexible wand for easy accessibility to joints, seals and couplings in GIS equipment
and provided with a protection filter. The equipment shall have on/off switch &
suitable indicating lamps/LEDs, variable pitch audible signal for leakage indication. The
equipment shall have automatic zeroing of background signals suitable for detecting
SF6 gas leakage in charged switchyard. The test kit shall be compatible for EMI/EMC
environment as per IEC 1000.

3.13 Dew Point Meter

The meter shall be capable of measuring the dew point of SF6 gas of the circuit breaker/GIS
equipment. It should be portable and adequately protected for outdoor use. The meter shall
be provided with dew point hygrometer with digital indication to display the dew point
temperature in degree C, degree F or PPM. It should be capable of measuring the
corresponding pressure at which dew point is being measured.
The measurement and use of the instrument must be simple, direct without the use of any
other material /chemical like dry ice/acetone etc. It should be battery operated with
rechargeable batteries.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION:

1. Measuring Range: Upto-100 º C dew point.

2. Accuracy: ± 2 º C.
3. Display: 4 digit LCD, 0.5 inch high.

3.14 Gas filling and evacuating plant: (Gas Processing unit)

The plant necessary for filling and evacuating the SF6 gas in the switchgear
shall be supplied to enable any maintenance work to be carried out. This shall
include all the necessary gas cylinders for temporarily storing the evacuated
SF6 gas. The capacity of the temporary storage facilities shall at least be sufficient
for storing the maximum quantity of gas that could be removed from at least
one phase of one complete bay (switchgear and associated equipment).
Where any item of the filling and evacuating plant is of such a weight that it cannot
easily be carried by maintenance personnel, it shall be provided with lifting
hooks for lifting and moving with the overhead cranes.
The minimum capacity parameters of evacuation plant will be as under :

3
Oil Free Suction (Recovery) Pump: 30 M /Hour
3
Compressor (Two Stage): 15 M /Hour
3
Oil Free Vacuum Pump: 100 M /Hour
The evacuation equipment shall be provided with all the necessary pipes,
couplings, flexible tubes and valves for coupling up to the switchgear for
filling or evacuating all the gases.
Details of the filling and evacuating plant that will be supplied, as well as the
description of the filling and evacuating procedures shall be furnished
 772

3.15 SF6 gas analyzer:

The SF6 gas analyser should be of portable type and instruments shall have
following features:
a. In-built calibration facility.
b. Sensitivity of the equipment shall not be affected by any atmospheric conditions
like dust, humidity, heat, wind etc.
c. Equipment shall work on zero gas loss principle i.e. gas should be pumped
back to the compartment after measurement without any exposure to the
atmosphere.
d. Equipment shall be supplied with suitable regulator which can be used to connect
SF6 cylinder if required.
e. Following acidic/impurities products should be detected as per IEC 60480 and IEC
60376
i) SF6 purity Range: 0-100 % & Accuracy: +/- 2 deg
ii) Dew point - Range : -60 to +20 deg C & Accuracy: +/- 4 deg C
iii) SO2 - Range : 0-150 ppm & Accuracy : +/- 2 %
iv) HF - Range : 0-10ppm & Accuracy : +/- 10 %
f. Instrument should work on AC source as well as on rechargeable battery
g. Input pressure: upto 10 bar
h. It should be housed in a robust IP67 case with wheels

3.16 Portable Partial Discharge (PD) monitoring system (Shall generally applicable for
220kV&132 kV)
The equipment shall be used for detecting different types of defects in Gas Insulated
Stations (GIS) such as Particles, Loose shields and Partial Discharges as well as
for detection of Partial discharges in other types of equipment such as Cable Joints,
CTs and PTs.
It shall be capable for measuring PD in charged GIS environment as EHV
which shall have bandwidth in order of 100 MHz 2GHz with possibility to
select a wide range of intermediate bandwidths for best measurement results.
The principle of operation shall be based on UHF principle of detection. The
instrument should also be able to detect partial discharges in cable joints and
terminations.
Detection and measurement of PD and bouncing particles shall be displayed on built
in large LCD display and the measurement shall be stored in the instrument and
further downloadable to a PC for further analysis to locate actual source of PD such
as free conducting particles, floating components, voids in spacers, particle on
spacer surfaces etc. Software for display and diagnosis of PD signals and an
expert software system for accurate interpretation of cause of PD shall also be
supplied and installed by the contractor.
The equipment shall meet the following requirements
1. Measurement shall be possible in noisy environment.
2. Stable reading shall be possible in presence of vibrations within complex
GIS assemblies, which can produce signals similar to PD.
 773

3. Equipment should have necessary synchronizing circuits to obtain PD

correlation with power cycle and power frequency.
4. The equipment shall be battery operated with built-in-battery charger. It
shall also be suitable for 230V AC/50 Hz input.
5. Measurement shall be possible in the charged switchyard in the presence
of EMI/EMC. Supplier should have supplied similar detector for GIS
application to other utilities. Performance certificate and the list of users
shall be supplied along with the offer.
6. Instrument shall be supplied with standard accessories i.e., re-locatable sensors
with mounting arrangements, connecting cables (duly screened) to sensors, Lap-
top PC, diagnostic and expert interpretation software, carrying case,
rechargeable battery pack with charger suitable for 230V AC, 50Hz supply
connecting cables (duly screened) to view in storage.
7. The function of software shall be covering the following:
a) Data recording, storage and retrieval in computer
b) Data base analysis
c) Template analysis for easy location of fault inside the GIS
d) Evaluation of PD measurement i.e, Amplitude, Phase Synchronization etc.
e) Evaluation of bouncing/loose particles with flight time and estimation
on size of particle.
f) Expert software system for accurate interpretation of cause of PD.
g) Report generation.
8. To prove the suitability in charged switchyard condition, practical
demonstration shall be conducted before acceptance.
9.
provide the document in support of this.
10. Necessary training may be accorded to personnel to make use of the kit for
locating PD sources inside the GIS
11. Instrument shall be robust and conform to relevant standard.
Calibration: The UHF Couplers have to be first calibrated as per CIGRE Document
No. 654 as part of factory acceptance tests to guarantee detection sensitivity of 5pC
or better. The GIS of same design shall be used as test specimen during the
coupler calibration. The pulse injection level determined through above factory
calibration tests shall only be used as reference for site sensitivity checks during
commissioning of PDM system. The data sheet/frequency response characteristics
shall be submitted for reference.
Pulse generator, same type as that of used during factory testing for UHF
sensor sensitivity test shall be supplied as a standard accessory.

3.17 Online Partial Discharge Monitoring System (Applicable for 765kV& 400 kV
GIS)
GIS equipment shall be designed so as to minimize partial discharge or other
electrical discharge. A state-of-the art Partial Discharge Monitoring system
shall be provided to monitor the entire GIS installation.
 774

An on-line continuous Partial Discharge Monitoring (PDM) system shall be

designed to provide an automatic facility for the simultaneous collection of PD
data at multiple points on the GIS & its associated GIB ducts and Voltage
Transformers adopting UHF technique. The data stored shall provide a
historical record of the progress of PD sources and shall identify the areas of
maximum activity.
On-line continuous Partial Discharge Monitoring (PDM) system shall be
capable for measuring PD in charged GIS environment as EHV which shall
have bandwidth in order of 100 MHz 2GHz with possibility to select a
wide range of intermediate bandwidths for best measurement results. The
principle of operation shall be based on UHF principle of detection.
The scope shall cover Engineering, supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of partial discharge continuous monitoring system, with
all necessary auxiliaries and accessories to make a complete system as per
technical specification, including site demonstration of successful operation.
Any items/accessories necessary to make the system fully functional for the
trouble free online PD monitoring of complete GIS installation shall be
considered as included in the scope.
The PDM system shall be provided with all its hardware and software, with
readily interfacing to the UHF PD couplers installed in the GIS of present bays
and future bays as shown in SLD plus 20% additional as extra. Details of
this shall be submitted during engineering stage for approval.

The integration of UHF PD coupler in future GIS bays shall be done in

respective package. The number of UHF PD coupler for future bays shall
be decided based on GIS layout finalized under present scope (considering
present GIS equipment with future provision).

The PD Monitoring PC Work Station shall be housed in a lockable cabinet with

duplicate keys and shall be located in the control room of the GIS substation.
Workstation PCs shall be pre-loaded with all necessary Hardware &
Software. The PCs shall have each Combo drive & Retrievable disk drive
(1 TB), Ethernet port 100Mbps, printer. The workstation PC shall be powered
by suitable dedicated UPS and same is included in the present scope.
Design of on-line PDM System
1. The technical proposal for PDM system along with detailed design

engineering stage.
2. To guarantee that sufficient coverage is available for complete GIS installation
to monitor PD activity all design details shall be submitted as part of the
above for review.
3. The sensitivity of the offered system shall be in accordance with CIGRE
Document No. 654 that will be verified as part of site sensitivity tests.
4. UHF attenuation data of GIS shall be submitted for the switching devices,
spacers, bends etc.
 775

5. The signal attenuation level of co-axial cable per meter length and justification
for the length of cable connection between the couplers and detector units
shall be furnished.
6. The overall sensitivity of PD detection system shall take into account the
spacing between couplers and the associated cabling, filters, amplifiers, etc.
7. The Sub-station GIS layout as a separate drawing indicating position
of spacers, spread over of PD sensors with distance, sensor identification, the
detector unit identification etc. shall be submitted during engineering stage for
approval.
8. The PD sensors shall be identified / coordinated with the corresponding
detector unit etc. with proper identification labeling and indicated in the
substation PDM SLD.
9. Internal arrangement/wiring diagram is to be submitted for detector
units/control cabinet etc. All internal items are to be identified / labeled to
facilitate troubleshooting.
10. Supply requirement (AC & DC) to be specified for the complete monitoring
system.
11. Power supply to PDM PC shall have protection against surges, overload
and short circuit. A dedicated on-line UPS system shall also be provided
as a backup during supply interruption, to ensure trouble-free & reliable
running of the PDM System for a minimum of 15 minutes duration.
Ratings of UPS shall be proposed for the approval of
shut down of the PDM
PC and the peripherals after this 15-minute period if normal supply fails to
resume. The PDM PCs shall restart automatically on resumption of normal
supply. The UPS shall not generate spikes during changeover of supply. UPS
shall automatically give indication / alarm when it requires battery
replacement. Potential Free Contacts shall be generated to signal these events.
These contacts shall be wired out to Annunciation / Monitoring systems.
Alternately, inverter of suitable capacity is also acceptable. Critical Process
and Status alarms of the PDM system shall be displayed.
12. PDM System shall be provided with a user security for accessing the
system with a log-on and password entry procedure. The user levels shall
be defined as a Master User and other users for the modification of system,
update, and entry of parameters or manual operation. System shall be able
to generate 3D point on wave pattern whenever any PD activity detected
by the system. System shall be able to give online 3D point on wave
pattern, online PRPD (phase resolved PD) and online short time trend etc.
System shall be able to generate the all the logs related to system fault,
system access, PD event, and any changes in system setting etc.
13. Method of electrical isolation/protection provided between PD sensor
and detector circuitry in case of flashover/high potential stress inside GIS
should be furnished.
14. The selected mode of propagation of PD signal (electromagnetic wave) inside
GIS for the design of sensors shall be furnished.
15. The protection available for electronics against transient over voltages caused
by switching operations shall be furnished.
 776

16. The capacity of each detector unit to be specified to accommodate as

many numbers of PD sensors signal.
17. The applicable standards to meet IEC & IEEE requirements for
electromagnetic compatibility shall be specified. The offered system should
have been tested for the same for working in a 400kV & above substation
environment. The necessary documentation has to be submitted in this
regard.
18. Guaranteed technical particulars & data sheet for various components used
in the system shall be submitted.
Calibration: The UHF Couplers have to be first calibrated as per CIGRE
procedure TF 15/330305 as part of factory acceptance tests to guarantee
detection sensitivity of 5pC or better. The GIS of same design shall be used as
test specimen during the coupler calibration. The pulse injection level
determined through above factory calibration tests shall only be used as
reference for site sensitivity checks during commissioning of PDM system. The
data sheet/frequency response characteristics shall be submitted for reference.
Every Day Use & Maintenance: The system shall be designed suitable
for an unmanned s/s and operate automatically. The system shall generate
alarms if suspected partial discharge activity is noticed or the system itself
is in failure, thereby eliminating the necessity of periodic system access by
the user and one such alarm shall be connected to Substation automation system
(SAS). The alarms shall be configured coupler wise.
Computers and Peripherals: The PC operating system shall be the latest
version of MS Windows. It should be suitable for continuous process
application and should have been tested for the same. The hardware
configuration of PC should be the latest available in the market of industrial
type subject to / Engineer approval. For storing the historical
PD database, sufficient storage facility in the form of hard disc and retrievable
hard disk drive of 1TB as specified shall be available in the substation. The

Filtering Facility: The filtering facility has to be provided in order to

distinguish real PD from internal/external noise such as switching operations,
self-test signal, radio, communication signal etc. The PDM system itself shall
be able to discriminate the noise from real PD. The exposed gas barriers of
the GIS shall be shielded effectively against noise interference & tested. The
gas barrier shields/belts shall be suitable for outdoor use also & able to
withstand high ambient temperature. Site measurements have to be performed
after installation of the PDM system in order to identify the various sources
of external noise to incorporate the same in the filtering facility. This
filtering will preferably be through software by band pass, which can be
manually activated (as an option) to filter out noise signals in the trend plot
display. If hardware filtering is employed then adequate measures have to be
taken to avoid masking of other signals, which may lie in the same frequency
range. The method adopted for the above shall be specified taking into account
the sensitivity requirement of PDM system as per CIGRE document. The
noise filters shall be selectable individually coupler-wise.
 777

Self-Test (Diagnostic) Facility: Built-in self-checking facility shall be

incorporated in the control system which will continuously verify the correct
operation of the whole monitoring system with the simulated PD signal viz.
checking of the sensitivity of individual detector units, response of PD sensors
in addition to the checking of the system functioning. The periodicity of such
self-check operation shall be specified. In case of system failure this shall
trigger an alarm for communication to SAS. External check facility: Propose
the arrangement/device available for externally checking the healthiness of PD
sensors by pulse injection in addition to built-in monitoring facility.
Detector Units: The sensitivity of each detector unit shall be furnished. The
sensitivity level of individual detector units shall be selectable depending
on the site background noise level.
Trend Plot: The trend plot facility shall be available with the update period
of hourly/daily/weekly/monthly/yearly. It shall be possible to view the
historical trends for the complete archived data accumulated over several
years.
PD Monitoring modes: There shall be two different modes of system operation
viz. a dedicated Continuous PD Monitoring mode for the normal day today
operation of the system & a dedicated HV commissioning test mode which
is exclusively for PD monitoring during HV commissioning test. The HV
commissioning mode shall also operate as an independent feature.
In the HV Commissioning mode the real time display shall be possible for a
minimum of two complete bays with associated bus bars and at with one second
update period. The HV test software shall automatically record the HV voltage
information along with PD so as to check PD inception & extinction voltages
precisely. The complete HV & PD data recorded during HV test shall be
possible to be reviewed in replay mode after the HV test.
Alarm Facility: The PDM system shall generate alarm when action is required;
viz. a) PD alarm (abnormal PD activity indicating a risk of failure) & b)
PD system fail alarm to be connected to SAS.
Real Time Display: The PDM system should have the facility of Real Time
display, which will give an instant indication of PD activity coupler wise, with
one-second-update period. The PDM system shall be able to capture the PD
data triggered by associated switching operations of CBs & isolators.
Schematics: The PDM system should have GIS schemes bay-wise
incorporating PD sensor identification and location along with spacer location.
The sectional view of typical bay arrangement of GIS showing active parts
shall also be included as part of the PDM software.
Print Option/Facility: PDM system should have the option/facility of printing
all trend plots/reports/POW patterns/displays, etc. Laser Colour printer shall
be provided for this purpose at substation.
Data Archives: This is to provide access to historical data and file
 778

storage with date and time stamp. Sufficient storage facility shall be
available to review historical data updated for the lifetime of switchgear.
The substation & headquarters PCs shall have a backup device in the form
of a retrievable disk drive of 1TB capacity for this purpose.
PD Fault Identification & Location/Pattern Recognition/Predictive
Maintenance
Diagnostic Software: In order to interpret various types of PD defects, intelligent
diagnostics software (expert system) shall be built- in as part of the PDM
software capability. This is mainly to reduce the dependence on PD
specialist. The bidder shall also make available typical point-on-wave patters as
library pictures to train the user.
Software Updates: It shall be possible to upgrade / update the system
software throughout the lifetime of the system with the ongoing development
/ refinement in PD technology.
Fault investigation : In case of any indication of suspected PD activity by the
on line system, further investigation has to be carried out by the contractor
for the PD defect identification and location during the warranty period
Special Tools / equipment, Spare Parts, software packages

Special Tools: Special tools for cutting and crimping of coaxial cable with

Spare parts: The contractor has to supply critical spares with replacement
procedure for the trouble free operation of the system during its expected
lifetime as part of the contract. A detailed list shall be included in the
tender and also submitted for
engineering stage.
Software Packages: The complete software package shall be supplied as part of
a back-up facility in the form of DVD/CDs viz. Windows operating system
with end user license, PDM Software including HV Test, Drivers for
modems etc., software for remote access, printer etc. The list shall be submitted
for reference.
Pulse generator for UHF sensor sensitivity test shall also be supplied as a
standard accessory.
Operation & Maintenance Manual :A complete O&M manual covering all
aspects of trouble shooting of PDM system in six sets in original shall be

provided. A step-by-step procedure for spare parts replacement shall also be

included.
Factory / Site Test Formats: The factory & site tests format to be submitted for
approval. The format shall cover all possible tests to confirm healthiness of the
system and to record the test values.
 779

List of References: The bidder shall provide a reference list of PD monitoring

system, which is supplied by them and in successful operation worldwide in a
power utility.

3.18 Thermo-Vision Scanning Camera

Item Specification
Functional 1. The Instrument shall be thermal imaging based on principle
Requirements of infrared radiation detection. It should be suitable for
following measurement in live substations and transmission line
up to 765 kV Level.
1.1 The Absolute value of Hot Spot temperature
1.2 Color thermal as well as visual image focus object
1.3 Isotherm
2. The test results should have repeatable, consistency & immunity
to electromagnetic interference in live switchyard upto 765 kV
level.
3. The measurement of ambient temperature.
Measurement Temperature: 0-500 Deg. C
Range
Detector Type/ 640x 480 pixels (uncooled)
Infrared pixels Infrared pixels to be captured by the camera and not enhance after
image capturing
Accuracy T: ± 2ºC or 2% of Reading
IFOV or Spatial Standard Lens: 0.7 mrad or better
Resolution Tele-photo Lens: 0.35 mrad or better

Lens Normal Lens: 24º , Telephoto Lens: 7º Max.

Min. Focus Standard Lens: 30 cm
Distance Telephoto Lens: 1.2 m

Focus Auto as well as Manual

Voice annotation Minimum 60 seconds voice recording with image
Text annotation Predefined by user and should be stored with image
Digital video 1.3 MP (min) color or with target illuminator
Spectral Range 7.5 µm to 13 µm
Sensitivity Min 45 mK at 30ºC
Emissivity Automatic temp. correction for emissivity with on line help
Correction (variable from 0.01 to 1.0)

Thermal Fusion Merging visual and thermal image

Accessories One complete set of lens i.e. normal as well ass telescopic lens,
removable memory card (Min. 1 GB), PC communication cable,
window based software, battery set with adaptor (02 set) etc.
compatible with the instruments should be provided for successfully

Additionally all the required accessories, drawing and documents,

tools etc. should be provided for the smooth functioning of kit.
Further hard carrying case (which should be robust enough) for
ensuring proper safety of the kit during transportation shall have to
be provided.
Design/ Engg. The complete equipment along with complete accessories must be
designed/ engineered by original equipment manufacturer.
Power Supply It shall work on single phase 230 Volts ± 10 %, 50 Hz ±5%
 780

supply with standard socket and Re-chargeble Battery.

Operating 0 to + 50ºC
Temperature

Protection/ Control Against short circuit, over voltage, improper ground connection over
load & transient surges, the instrument should have alrm/ cut-off
features to protect the instrument.
Mounting The necessary tripod mounting arrangement should be provided
Arrangement for long distance measurement.

Weight The weight should be preferably less than 2.5 kg for easy portability.
Software The software should be suitable for report generation and
temperature analysis on windows based platform. The instrument
should have facility to store, in standard formats, and communicate
with windows based computer for exploring the test data.
Display/ Control LCD Display
Tiltable View Yes
Finder

Environment The test kit shall be compatible for EMI/EMS/Safety environment

requirement as per IEC.
Calibration Unit shall be duly calibrated before supply and the date of
certificate calibration shall not be older than two month from the date of supply
of kit.

3.19 Digital Multi-meter:

1 The Contractor shall supply digital multimeters with auto ranging features
complete with carrying case, test leads, probes and clips.
i) AC/DC voltages 0-1000 V
ii) AC/DC amps 0-10 amp
iii) Resistance range 0-500 K ohms
iv) Continuity range 0-5 ohms with audible indication
2 The equipment shall
i) be portable
ii) have LCD display of 4 1/2 digits
iii) have excellent response time
iv) be provided with full protection against inadvertent overload.

3.20 Digital Clamp Meter

1 The Contractor shall supply digital Clamp Meters with auto ranging features
complete with all accessories and carrying case.
2 The equipment shall
i) be portable
ii) have LCD display of 4 digits
iii) True RMS Measurements
iv) AC/DC Amp., Ohm, Diode and Continuity measurements
v) have current range up to 1000 A.
vi) have excellent response time with accuracy
vii) be provided with full protection against inadvertent overload.
 781

3.21 Analog Multi-meter:

The Contractor shall supply analog Multi-meters

complete with durable and weather proof carrying
case, test leads, probes and clips.
i) AC/DC Voltage 0 1000V
ii) AC/DC Current 0 10 Amps
iii) Resistance Range 0-2kohms-200kohms-20Megaohms
iv) shall be able to read low range AC currents (milli Amps range)
v) shall have good resolution and accuracy.

B. TOOLS, TACKLES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

3.22 VACCUM CLEANERS:

i. The instrument shall be heavy duty (wet &

dry) suitable for cleaning of Control &
Relay Panels
ii. shall operate on 230V single phase AC supply
iii. Air flow shall be 59 lit/sec or better
iv. shall have thermal cut off feature
v. shall have suction capacity of 2200mm bar water column or
better
Tech Spec for Mech foam type fire extinguisher

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PORTABLE FOAM TYPE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

MECHANICAL

1.01 SCOPE:
This specification covers manufacture, design, material, shape, construction, charge, anti
corrosive treatment and Inspection and testing before despatch and delivery of mechanical
foam type fire extinguishers of 9 Ltr. capacities .

1.02 REQUIREMENT AND CAPACITY:

The ISI marked mechanical foam type fire extinguishers are required.

1.03 STANDARDS:

The mechanical foam type fire extinguishers of 9 Ltr. capacities shall fully conform to the
requirement of IS-10204 : 2001 with its latest amendments .

1.04 MATERIAL AND SHAPE :

The shape of the body of mechanical foam type fire extinguishers of 9 Ltr. capacities shall be
cylindrical with an outside diameter of 175+/-5mm. The material for construction of various
parts of mechanical foam type fire extinguishers of 9 Ltr. capacities shall be as under:

S. No. Component Material Requirements, relevant to IS

1 Body Mild steel sheet Any grade of IS 513
2 Neck ring Leaded tin bronze Grade LTB2 of IS 318
3 Cap Leaded tin bronze Grade LTB2 of IS 318
4 Cap washer Rubber Conforming to the requirement of
hardness as applicable to type –3 of
IS:5382 and also acid and alkali resistant.
5 Spring Spring steel Grade –1 of IS 4454(Pt.I)
6 Siphon tube Brass Alloy No.2 of IS 407
7 Discharge Brass Grade-2 of IS 291 or type –1 of IS319
fittings
8 Foam making Leaded tin bronze Grade LTB2 of IS 318
branch pipe
9 Gas cartridge ---- IS 4947
10 Hose Braded rubber plastic Having bursting pressure of not less than
50 Kg. / [Link]
11 Piercer Stainless steel IS:6528
12 Check nut Brass IS 6912
13 Sniffer valve Brass Type –1 of IS 319

Any other combination of material of above components used in the manufacturing of fire
extinguishers may also be considered acceptable provided the combination made does not
affect the performance of the fire extinguishers. The purchaser reserves the right to insist
upon the supplier to supply the above components of his choice which are indicated at table-
I of IS 10204 .

1.05 BODY AND CONSTRUCTION:

The construction of the body shall be of welded type and thickness of the mild steel shall not
be less than 1.6 mm. The top end (dome) and bottom end (dish) of the body shall be dished
outwards (convex) without reverse curvature to a radius not exceeding the maximum outside
diameter of the body to which they are to be fixed or of which one or both forms a part in

1
Tech Spec for Mech foam type fire extinguisher

case of solid drawn construction. All non ferrous parts shall be welded or soldered to the
body. The thickness and other sizes of the supported fittings and the welding used in
construction shall be as per relevant IS.

All the components of the extinguishers shall have smooth finish and shall be free from
burrs, sharp edges and other visual defects that may cause injury to the users.

1.06 ACCESSORIES AND DISCHARGE FITTINGS:

The neck ring, cap, cartridge holder, piercing mechanism and cap joint washers shall be
provided as per provision of IS:10204: 2001. The discharge fittings such as hose, nozzle and
syphon tube shall be supplied as per relevant IS. The Gas cartridge shall conforms to IS
4947 and the CO2 Gas cartridge shall be of minimum 60 gm. The liquid level indicator be
also provided to indicate that the level is correct .

1.07 CHARGE:

The charge (AFFF Refill) shall consist of foam concentrate conforming to IS:4989 ([Link]) and
quantity not less than 540 ml., if foam concentrated is 6% and 270 ml, if foam concentrate is
3 % and balance quantity of water.

1.08 ANTI CORROSIVE TREATMENT.

All the internal surfaces of the body shall be completely quoted with plastic or rubber lining
by centrifuge and curing by heat process to a minimum thickness of 0.5 mm . The internal
lining shall be subjected to the tests prescribed at clause 9.1 (a) & (b) of IS . The external
surfaces of the body shall be applied with phosphating as per provision of IS-3618 . The
surfaces of component i.e. siphon tube etc. shall be either lead tin alloy quoted or plastic or
rubber lined quoted.

1.09 PAINTING:

Each extinguisher shall be painted , providing of large size picture and marked with letter ‘A’
& ‘B’ as per provision of clause 10 of IS with latest amendments

1.10 MARKING:

Each extinguisher shall be provided with the marking as per provision of clause 13 of IS with
latest amendments. In addition to the marking the name of purchaser i.e. RRVPNL and
purchase order No. shall also be provided .

1.11 INSPECTION AND TESTING:

The inspection and testing shall be carried out at the works of the manufacturer by an
authorised inspecting officer/ inspecting agencies nominated by the purchaser before
despatch. The inspection shall be carried out as per the provisions of relevant ISS. The
inspecting officer shall select samples as per the provision of relevant IS 10204 :2001. The
purchaser reserves the right to get the material tested in any laboratory before despatch.

1.12 ISI MARKING :

Only ISI marked mechanical foam type fire extinguishers of 9 Ltr. capacities shall be
purchased . The supplier shall have to furnish valid copy of ISI licence for the same.

2
Tech Spec for Mech foam type fire extinguisher

1.13 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS.

The bidder shall furnish the complete guaranteed technical particulars in prescribed format
Schedule-GTP.

3
Tech Spec for Mech foam type fire extinguisher

Schedule-GTP

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF MECHANICAL FOAM TYPE FIRE

EXTINGUISHERS

Name of the firm:

S. No. Name of item/ particular 9 Ltr. Capacity

(A) Material of
1. Body IS:513
2. Neck ring Gr.LTB2 of IS:318
3. Cap Gr.LTB2 of IS:318
4. Cap washer IS:5382 Type-3
5. Spring IS:4454 (Part.1)
6. Siphon tube Alloy No.2 of IS:407
7. Discharge fittings Gr. 2 of IS:291
8. Foam making branch pipe Gr.LTB2 of IS:318
9. Gas cartridge IS:4947
10. Hose Having bursting pressure of not less than
50 Kgf/Cm2
11. Piercer IS:6528
12. Check nut IS:6912
13. Sniffer valve Brass type 1 of IS:319
(B) Jet range (In meters) 6m
(C) Jet maintain for min. meter sec. 6mf of 25 seconds.
(D) Discharge time – Sec. 60 S
(E) Min. percentage of discharge. 90 %
(F) Empty weight in Kg. [Link].
(G) Full weight in Kg. [Link].
(H) Whether ISI marked Yes

4
Tech Spec for Dry Power type fire extinguisher

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR DRY POWDER CARTRIDGE TYPE FIRE

EXTINGUISHER

1.01 SCOPE:

This specification covers manufacture, design, material, shape, construction , charge,

anti corrosive treatment and Inspection and testing before despatch and delivery of
Dry Powder Cartridge type fire extinguishers.

1.02 REQUIREMENT AND CAPACITY:

The following quantity of ISI marked Dry Powder Cartridge type fire extinguishers
are required.

a) Fire extinguishers 5 Kg.

b) Fire extinguishers 10 Kg.

1.03 STANDARDS:

The Dry Powder Cartridge type fire extinguishers of capacities 5 Kg and 10 Kg.
shall fully conform to the requirement of IS-2171:1999 with its latest amendments .

1.04 MATERIAL AND SHAPE :

The shape of the body of Dry Powder Cartridge type fire extinguishers of capacities
5 Kg and 10 Kg. shall be cylindrical .The material for construction of various parts of
Dry Powder Cartridge type fire extinguishers shall be as under:

S. No. Component Material Requirements, relevant to IS

1 Body Mild steel sheet Any grade of any IS 513,IS 2062, IS
6240.
2 Inner shell Mild steel sheet Grade any of IS 513, IS 3074 or IS
3601
3 Neck ring Brass forging Grade FLB of IS 6912
4 Cap including Brass forging Grade FLB of IS 6912
cartridge holder
5 Cap washer Rubber Requirement in respect of hardness as
applicable to type 3 of IS 5382 and also
acid/ alkali resistant .
6 i) Plunger Brass Grade 2 of IS 291 or type –1 of IS 391.

ii) Cartridge holder Brass -do-

7 Piercer Stainless steel IS6528
8 Spring Carbon steel Grade –1 of IS 4454(Pt.I)
9 Siphon tube Brass Alloy No.2 of IS 407
10 Nozzle and Brass Grade-2 of IS 291 or type –1 of IS319
Discharge fittings
11 Cartridge Steel IS 4947
12 Hose Braded PVC/ rubber IS 14933
13 Safety clip Steel Grade-1 of IS 2507
14 Squeeze grip Plastic IS 7328
handle

1
Tech Spec for Dry Power type fire extinguisher

Any other combination of material of above components used in the manufacturing of

fire extinguishers may also be considered acceptable provided the combination made
does not affect the performance of the fire extinguishers. The purchaser reserves the
right to insist upon the supplier to supply the above components of his choice which
are indicated at table-I of IS 2171.

1.05 BODY AND CONSTRUCTION:

The construction of the body shall be of welded type and thickness of carbon steel
body shall be as per clause 7.2. of IS. All supporting fittings shall be welded or
brazed to the body. The thickness and other sizes of the supported fittings and the
welding used in construction shall be as per relevant IS.

All the components of the extinguishers shall have smooth finish and shall be free
from burrs , sharp edges and other visual defects that may cause injury to the users.

1.06 ACCESSORIES AND DISCHARGE FITTINGS:

The expansion space, neck ring , cap, gas cartridge and cartridge holder, plunger rod
and piercing mechanism , cap joint washers, hose, squeeze grip type nozzle, siphon
tube and bottom rings shall be provided as per provision of IS:2171:1999 .

1.07 DRY POWDER CHARGE:

The dry chemical powder sodium bicarbonate based used for B C class shall
conform to IS 4308: 2003.

1.08 ANTI CORROSIVE TREATMENT.

All the internal surfaces of the body shall be completely quoted with lead tin alloy
applied by hot dipping process to a thickness of not less than 0.012mm . The
external surfaces of the body and both surfaces of components i.e. inner shall (if any)
spring etc. whichever applicable shall also be subjected to the anti corrosive
treatment. There shall be no visible un quoted area both internally or externally .
Phosphating and epoxy polyester powder quoting shall be done as per clause 9.1.1
and 9.1.2 of IS 2171 respectively.

1.09 PAINTING:

Each extinguisher shall be painted , providing of large size picture and marked with
letter ‘B’ & ‘C’ as per provision of clause 10 of IS with latest amendments

1.10 MARKING:

Each extinguisher shall be provided with the marking as per provision of clause 13 of
IS. In addition to the marking the name of purchaser i.e. RRVPNL and purchase
order No. shall also be provided .

1.11 INSPECTION AND TESTING:

The inspection and testing may be carried out at the works of the manufacturer by an
authorised inspecting officer/ inspecting agencies nominated by the purchaser before
despatch. The inspection shall be carried out as per the provisions of relevant ISS.
The inspecting officer shall select samples as per the provision of relevant IS 2171 :

2
Tech Spec for Dry Power type fire extinguisher

1999. The purchaser reserves the right to get the material tested in any laboratory
before despatch.

1.12 ISI MARKING :

Only ISI marked Dry Powder Cartridge type fire extinguishers of capacities 5 Kg and
10 Kg shall be purchased . The supplier shall have to furnish valid copy of ISI licence
for the same.

1.13 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS.

The bidder shall furnish the complete guaranteed technical particulars in prescribed
Schedule-GTP.

3
Tech Spec for Dry Power type fire extinguisher

Schedule-GTP

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF DRY CHEMICAL POWDER FIRE

EXTINGUISHERS

Name of Firm:

S. No. Name of item/ particular 5 Kg DCP 10 Kg DCP

(A) Material of
1. Body IS:513 IS:513
2. Inner shell IS:513 IS:513
3. Neck ring IS:6912 GR-FLB IS:6912 IS:513
4. Cap including cartridge holder -DO- -DO-
5. Cap washer IS:5382 IS:5382
6. Plunger Cartridge holder GR.2 OF IS:291 GR.2 OF IS:291
7. Piercer IS:6528 IS:6528
8. Spring IS:4454 IS:4454
9. Siphon tube Alloy 2 of IS:291 Alloy 2 of IS:291
10. Nozzle and Discharge fittings GR.2 OF IS:291 GR.2 OF IS:291
11. Cartridge IS:4947 IS:4947
12. Hose Having bursting pressure not less than 50
Kg. F/Cmt.
13. Safety clip IS:2507 IS:2507
14. Squeeze grip handle Plastic Plastic
(B) Jet range (In meters) 4m 6m
(C) Jet maintain for min. meter –II 15 Sec.4m 23 Sec.6m
(D) Discharge time – Sec. 20 Sec 30 Sec
(E) Min. percentage of discharge. 85% 85%
(F) Empty weight in Kg. 5 Kg Approx. 9 Kg. Approx.
(G) Full weight in Kg. 10 Kg Approx. 920 Kg. Approx.
(H) Whether ISI marked Yes Yes

4
Tech Spec for CO2 type fire extinguisher

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PORTABLE CARBON DIOXIDE TYPE

FIRE EXTINGUISHER.

1.01 SCOPE:

The specification covers manufacturer, design, materials, construction, performance, method

of operation, inspection and testing, and delivery up to our stores of portable carbon dioxide
type Fire Extinguishers of capacity 4.5 Kg. wall mounted type and of 9 Kg. capacity trolley
mounted type complete with all accessories. All extinguishers shall be supplied duly filled
ready to use.

1.02 REQUIREMENT:

The following types of ISI marked CO2 type fire extinguishers duly charged are required:

a) Fire extinguisher 4.5 Kg. (Mild steel body, wall mounted type)

b) Fire extinguisher 9 Kg. (Mild steel body, trolley mounted type)

1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

The ISI marked CO2 type fire extinguishers duly charged suitable for fire fighting of oil,
petroleum products and gas substances under pressure and also for fires involving electrical
equipments are required. The fire extinguishers of capacity 4.5 Kg. shall be wall mounted
with brackets and screws and the fire extinguisher of capacity 9 Kg shall be trolley mounted
type with solid rubber trolley wheels. The capacity shall be the weight of carbon dioxide
when it is filled in the container to the filling ratio of not more than 0.667 +/- 0.033 %, the
quantity shall be determined by weighing. The filling ratio is the ratio of mass of the
liquefiable gas that is allowed to filled in to the container in view of safety considerations to
the mass of water required to fill the container at 15 Deg.C. The carbon dioxide gas shall
conform to IS:15222 with latest amendment. The extinguisher shall be cleaned internally
and shall be filled with liquefied carbon dioxide.

1.04 SHAPE, BODY AND MATERIAL :

The shape of the body of the extinguisher shall be cylindrical as per figure 1 of IS2878 and
have concave base . and constructed in seamless carbon steel conforming to IS: 7285:1982
or latest version thereof and the external surface of the body shall be completely coated with
epoxy powder of min. 0.050mm thickness.

The seamless drawn steel cylinder which are approved by the Chief Controller of
Explosives, Government of India, and supply of carbon dioxide extinguisher should be
certified with explosive certificate and actual manufacturers test certificate. The type of
discharge valve shall be squeeze grip type which conform to the requirement given in
IS:3224 or latest version thereof. The valve shall be provided with a safety device which
conforms to IS:5903 or latest version thereof. The extinguishers shall be supplied complete
with all discharge fittings and accessories required for smooth operation as per provisions of
IS.

Siphon tube shall be either Brass tube as per alloy No.2 of IS:407-1966 or copper tube
conform to IS:1545 . The discharge fittings shall be provided as per provision of clause 6.4
of IS 2878/2004 . The trolley required for 9 Kg CO2 type fire extinguishers shall comply the
requirement of clause 6.5 of IS.

1
Tech Spec for CO2 type fire extinguisher

1.05 ANTI CORROSIVE TREATMENT

The external surface of the body shall be completely coated with epoxy powder of minimum
0.05 mm thickness . The thickness of coating shall be measured as per the procedure in IS
3203 .

1.06 PAINTING:

Each extinguisher shall be painted ‘Fire Red’ or post office red conforming to shade No.536
or 537 of IS:5. A picture showing operation of the extinguisher in the correct manner shall be
provided on the body of the extinguisher. The extinguisher shall be marked with the letters
‘B’ and ‘C’ indicating their suitability for respective classes of fires as laid down in IS:2190.
All the letters ‘B’ and ‘C’ shall be 2.5 cm size printed in white colour centrally contained in a
square of 4 cm size and a circle of 2 cm radius respectively and shall be coloured in black.

1.07 MARKING:

Each extinguisher shall be clearly and permanently marked in accordance with clause No.10
of IS: 2878-2004 with latest amendments. In addition to the marking the name of purchaser
i.e. RVPNL and BN shall also be provided.

1.08 ISI MARKING :

Only ISI marked CO2 type fire extinguishers of capacities 4.5 Kg and 9 Kg shall be
purchased. The supplier shall have to furnish valid copy of ISI licence for the same.

1.09 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The bidder shall furnish the complete guaranteed technical particulars in Schedule-GTP.

1.10 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

It should comply with the discharge duration test, intermittent operation test and leakage test
conform to IS:2878-2004 with latest amendments.

1.11 INSPECTION AND TESTING:

The inspection and testing may be carried out at the works of the manufacturer by an
authorised inspecting officer/ inspecting agencies nominated by the purchaser before
despatch. The inspection shall be carried out as per the provisions of relevant ISS. The
inspecting officer shall select samples as per the provision of relevant IS 2878: 2004. The
purchaser reserves the right to get the material tested in any laboratory before despatch.

2
Tech Spec for CO2 type fire extinguisher

Schedule- GTP

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CO2 TYPE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

Name of Firm:

S. No. Name of item/ particular 4.5 Kg Capacity 9 Kg. Capacity

(A) Material of.
1 Body IS:7528 IS:7528
2 Discharge valve (Squeeze grip type.) IS:3224 IS:3224
3 Safety device IS:5903 IS:5903
4 Siphon tube Alloy No. 2 of Alloy No. 2 of
IS:407 IS:407
5 Hose IS:2878 IS:2878
6 Discharge horn IS:2878 IS:2878
(B) Jet range (In meters) -- --
(C) Jet maintain for min. meter sec. -- --
(D) Discharge time – Sec. 8 8
(E) Min. percentage of discharge. 95% 95%
(F) Empty weight in Kg. 13 Kg. Approx. 22 Kg. Approx.
(G) Full weight in Kg. 17.5 Kg Approx. 31 Kg. Approx.
(H) Whether ISI marked Yes Yes
(I) Whether the cylinder approved by Yes Yes
Chief Controller of Explosives
Govt. of India
(J) Dimension of trolley wheel and rubbers As per IS:2878 As per IS:2878
type .

3
Tech Spec for Fire Buckets

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR FIRE BUCKETS

1.01 SCOPE

This specification covers design, dimension, manufacture & fabrication, finish, inspection
and testing before despatch and delivery of galvanised mild steel fire buckets of approx. 10
litres capacity.

1.02 STANDARDS

The fire buckets shall generally conform to the requirement of IS : 2546-1974 with its latest
amendments i.e. Specification for galvanized mild steel fire buckets.

1.03 MATERIAL

The mild steel black sheets shall be used for manufacturing of buckets which shall conform
to Grade St 34 or Grade St 42 of IS : 1079-1968. The mild steel rod used for the top and
bottom handles shall conform to the requirement IS:226-1969. The mild steel wire used for
stiffening the top rim shall conform to the requirement IS:280-1962. The enamel finish paints
shall be used for painting of fire buckets which shall conform the requirement of IS :2932-
1964 with latest amendments if any.

1.04 SHAPE AND ESSENTIAL DIMENSIONS

The shape and the essential dimensions of fire buckets shall conform to the requirement of
figure-1 of IS:2564-1974 with its latest amendments. (Annexure-A)

1.05 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT (MANUFACTURING OF BUCKETS)

a) Body – The body of bucket shall be made in two halves which shall be joined
together by butt welding. The top rim of body shall be wired and uniformly beaded.
The beading shall be fully formed without gaps. The thickness of body shall be 1 mm
and diameter of beading wire shall be 3.55 mm.
b) Bottom – The bottom shall be dished and shall be joined to the body by butt welding
so that there is no raw edge or crevice on the inside of the buckets. The thickness of
the bottom sheet shall be 1mm.
c) Ears – The ears shall be made of mild steel sheet and shall be fitted to the body at
the top by means of welding with the flat head on the side. The thickness of sheet for
ears shall be 2.8 mm.
d) Top handle – The top handle shall be of mild steel rod of 10 mm in diameter with its
ends bent up as per figure-1 of IS:2546-1974.
e) Bottom handle – The bottom handle shall be of mild steel rod of 10 mm in diameter
and it shall be joined to the bottom by welding as per figure-1 of IS:2546-1974. The
grip shall have no sharp edge.
f) General – All gas welds shall be free from porosity, blow holes and brittleness.

1.06 FINISH

a) All parts of the buckets shall be finished smooth and sharp edges rounded off.
b) The bucket shall be galvanized after manufacture as per IS:2629-1966. The
thickness of coating of zinc on any portion shall be not less than 0.06 g/cm2 (Both
sides inclusive)
c) Bucket shall, in addition to galvanizing, be painted with two coats of white paint on
the inside and two coats of red paint on the outside. The handles and the ears shall
be painted with two coats of black paint.

1
Tech Spec for Fire Buckets

d) The word “FIRE” shall be painted in black centrally on the outside, its letters shall be
75mm high, and approximately 12mm wide.
e) The buckets shall be water tight and tested for leakage as per performance
requirement of relevant IS.

1.07 MARKING AND PACKING

a) Each bucket shall be stamped or embossed on its side with the manufacturer’s name
or trade-mark, year of manufacture and its capacity. The word “RRVPNL” and “BN-
_______” shall also be stamped on the bucket. Embossing shall be sufficiently deep
so that the marking remains quite legible after galvanizing.
b) The packing shall be done as per manufacturer’s standard packing in order to have
safe delivery of material.

1.08 INSPECTION AND TESTING

The inspection and testing may be carried out at the works of manufacturer by an authorised
inspecting officer / inspecting agencies nominated by the purchaser before despatch. The
inspecting officer shall select samples for inspection as per the provisions of relevant
IS:2546 / Purchaser order. The purchaser the reserves the right to get the material tested in
any laboratory before despatch.

1.09 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

The bidder shall furnish the complete Guaranteed Technical Particulars in prescribed format
at Schedule – GTP.

2
Tech Spec for Fire Buckets

Schedule-GTP

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR FIRE BUCKETS

Name of Firm:

S. No. Particulars To be confirmed by

bidder
1 Capacity of fire buckets(in ltrs) 10 0 Ltrs.
2 Thickness of bucket body(in mm) 1 mm
3 Thickness of bottom body of bucket (in mm) 1 mm
4 Diameter of beading wire used at top rim of 3.55 mm
bucket(in mm)
5 Thickness of sheet for ears (in mm) 2.8 mm
6 Diameter of top handle rod(in mm) 10 mm
7 Diameter of bottom handle rod(in mm) 10mm
8 Size of word “FIRE” 75 mm high & 12 mm wide
9 Whether marking is as per specification Yes
10 Whether Fire bucket meets the requirement of Yes
IS-2546 and specification.

3
Tech Spec for Fire Buckets

Annexure-A

4
DESKTOP COMPUTER SPECIFICATIONS
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
BN-9016002304 _Spec Insulating Rubber Mat

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF INSULATING RUBBER MAT FOR ELECTRICAL PURPOSE

(5MX1MX3MM SIZE-CLASS-C) UNDER BN-90160023XX

1.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the manufacture, testing, before despatch and delivery
at our stores.
1.02 SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Specification for purchase of High voltage insulation mats as per latest

IS:15652/2006.
ISI Marked insulating mats for electric purposes, as per IS: 15652/2006 for use as
floor covering for the protection of workers on AC and DC installations. The typical
features of new insulation mats shall be as under:
i) High dielectric strength.
ii) Insulation resistance upto 1,00,000 Mega Ohms.
iii) Good mechanical properties to withstand load and movement of breaker
trolleys and associated electric equipment.
iv) No adverse effect to acid, alkalies and transformer oil.
v) Manufactured without any metallic derivatives Anti skid.
vi) Suitable for both AC and DC electric installations.
vii) Easy to install, can be pasted.
viii) Water, Moisture proof, does not decay.
ix) High tensile strength and elongation properties.
x) Fire retardant.
xi) Tested by CPRI/ERDA/Govt. Lab/NABL Lab.
xii) ISI Marked
xiii) Mat should have one side colored strip having clearly mentioned
voltage rating of the mat eg. 33 kV etc., logo of the concerned
department (embossed), Name & CML no. of the Manufacturer &
Brand.
xiv) Mat should have Safety Glow Band both side across the width 2”
wide. Glow band seamless laminated on the surface which shall
absorb light and glow like in EMERGENCY SITUTAION when
lighting is not available for a period of at least 3 hours.

1.03 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PARTICULARS.

The Bidder shall furnish complete guarantee and other particulars of material
offered by him.
1.04 SAMPLES:

Bidders shall furnish one sample along with their bid for approval failing which
their offer is liable to be ignored.
1.05 TYPE TESTS:

The bidders shall furnish the complete type test reports of offered insulating rubber
mats as per latest IS: 15652/2006 and its latest amendments as per requirements
BN-9016002304 _Spec Insulating Rubber Mat

of Annexure-PQR of the specifications failing which their offer is liable to be

rejected,

1.06 Testing:

The RVPN store officer shall select & seal one no. sample out of the Ist
supplied lot and will be sent for testing as per latest IS:15652/2006 at
CPRI/ERDA Testing Laboratory. The testing charges will be borne by the
supplier. The payment of supplied material bills will be made after
successful receipt of test report.

1.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING :

Inspection & testing shall be carried out as per provision of relevant IS/IEC and
specification. The supplier should satisfy themselves that equipments/items to
be supplied is in accordance with the terms of the contract and fully confirm to
required specification by carrying out a through pre-inspecting of each item
before offering the same for inspection to the inspecting officer/ inspecting
agency nominated by the purchaser. Such pre inspection on the part of the
suppliers would minimize the chances of rejection in inspection.

The material shall be checked and inspected by an authorized inspecting officer/

inspecting agency nominated by the purchaser before dispatch. The purchaser
reserves the right to get the material tested in any laboratory before dispatch.

1.08 DEPARTURE FROM SPECIFICATION:

Should the bidder wish to depart from the specification in any respect, he should
clearly state such departure indicating the reasons thereof. Unless this is done ,
the departmental specification will hold good and shall be binding on the
supplier unless the departures have been approved by the purchaser.
BN-9016002304 _Spec Insulating Rubber Mat

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PARTICULARS FOR SUPPLY OF INSULATING

RUBBER MAT FOR ELECTRICAL PURPOSE (5MX1MX3MM SIZE-CLASS-C) UNDER BN-
90160023XX
Name of Firm:
Work’s Address:

S No. Characteristics Standard Offered

1. Minimum Thickness 3mm

2. Tensile Strength (N/mm²) 15

3. Elongation (%) 250

4. Insulation Resistance with water at 1,000,000 MΩ/

500V/ Insulation Resistance with water
at 5000V 1,00,000 MΩ

5. Leakage Current at 11KV 10mA

6. Dielectric Strength 65KV

7. Flame Retardance 5.0sec

8. Effect to Acid, Alkali, Transformer Oil % Change from Original

Value
Acid: Tensile Str.(N/mm²) Elog(%)

Alkali: Tensile Strength (N/mm²) Tensile Strength

Elongation(%)
20%
Diesel: Tensile Strrength (N/mm²)
Elongation(%) Elongation

Transformer Oil: Tensile Strength 20%

(N/mm²) Elongation(%)

9. Ageing Properties at 70 ±1 (°C) for % Change from Original

168 hrs. Value
Tensile Strength T.S 25%
(Elongation %)

(Signature)
Name & Designation
With seal of the bidder
 1
Rubber Hand Gloves & Others
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF RUBBER HAND GLOVES (CLASS- 0) AGAINST
BN-901600XXXX
1.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the manufacturing with testing before dispatch and delivery at
RVPNL stores of insulated rubber hand gloves. To provide protection while working on
electrical transmission, distribution lines and switchyard for safety of workers from electric
shock. These gloves are intended for working on low voltage or induced voltage on off lines
and equipments.

1.02 SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION:

Rubber hand gloves shall be manufactured & tested in accordance with the
following specification/standard.

A) STANDARDS FOR MATERIAL:

1. Electrical Insulated Rubber Hand Gloves shall be manufactured and proof tested voltage
5000 Volt & Max working potential up to 1000 Volts in accordance with the relevant
standard for working on low voltage or induced voltage on off lines/equipments.
2. Insulated Rubber Hand Gloves of superior quality are required for use in Rural / Urban
areas of Utility for protection of workmen from electric shock due to induced voltage
while working on de-energized lines /equipments.
3. Rubber hand gloves shall be of soft quality, seamless latex, flexible, shock proof and
manufactured & tested in accordance with Class-0 as per IS 13774:2021 (with latest
amendments) or IEC 60903-2014 (with latest amendments) are required.
4. Hand gloves shall be made from natural or synthetic rubber by dipping process.
5. There should be no joints in the gloves.
6. Hand Gloves shall have a smooth surface and both inner & outer surfaces shall be free
from visual defects like patches, blisters, porosity, embedded, foreign matter or other
physical defects.
7. The hand gloves shall be of cream color.
8. The hand gloves shall be of gauntlet type and cuff edges shall be finished with a roll or
rubber re-enforcing strip.
9. The hand gloves shall be of curve finger type.
10. It’s length & thickness:-
Standard length (mm)-410
Maximum Thickness (mm)-1.0

B) MARKING Each hand gloves shall be marked with the following :

a) Size and Class of gloves.

b) Maximum working potential (1000V) following by word “working” in brackets.
c) Manufactures name or recognized trade mark.
d) Month & Year of manufacture.
e) BN No.
f) Word “RVPNL”
g) Conforming to IS 13774:2021(with latest amendments) or IEC 60903:2014 (with latest
amendments)
h) Contact e-mail address and Toll free No. for after sales service.

The marking should be at the backside of the glove, shall be legible and permanent and
shall not impair the quality of gloves.
 2
Rubber Hand Gloves & Others
C) WORKMANSHIP

1. The material shall be of latest design and conforms to the best engineering practices
adopted in the field. Bidder shall offer only such Electrical Insulating Rubber Hand
Gloves for H.V. as guaranteed by them to satisfactory performance and suitable for
continued good services.
2. The Design, manufacturing process and material control at various stages shall be
such as to give maximum use ac voltage, highest mobility, flexibility, dexterity,
good finish and lamination of sharp edge and corners.
3. The design of Electrical Insulating rubber Hand Gloves for H.V. shall be such that
stress due to electrical contact should not expand or contract in any part of the
gloves.
4. Manufacturing process: The gloves made from liquid rubber by dipping process shall
be acceptable. The gloves should be seamless, soft and flexible to allow easy
movement of hands.
5. Physical properties: The allowable value of Tensile strength, Elongation at break,
Tension set, Ageing properties shall be as stipulated in the IS 13774:2021(with latest
amendments) or IEC 60903:2014 (with latest amendments).

D) PACKING
Each pair of hand gloves shall be suitably and properly packed in polyethylene bags. Any
other mode of packing superior to above as per manufacturer standard practice may also be
agreed to 100 – 150 pairs of gloves shall be packed in one wooden box / container or as per
manufacturer standard practice.

E) Hand gloves shall be purchase directly from the manufacturers /Dealers / traders only.

1.03 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL & OTHER PARTICULARS:

The bidder shall furnish complete guaranteed and other particulars of material offered by
him.

1.04 SAMPLES :

Bidder shall furnish one pair of Rubber Hand Gloves along with their bid for approval failing
which their offer is liable to be ignored.

1.05 TYPE TEST CERTIFICATE:

a) Necessary latest test certificate from any Govt./ Govt. approved/ NABL accredited
laboratory like CPRI / ERDA or test reports showing results of tests carried out as per
IS 13774:2021 (with latest amendments) or IEC 60903-2014 (with latest amendments)
at the time of bid. The design and type test reports shall not be more than 5 years
old.
b) In addition to the tests specified above, the purchaser reserves the right of carrying
out any another test at our end, at manufacturers works or at any reputed laboratory.
 3
Rubber Hand Gloves & Others
Schedule-GTP
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PARTICULARS OF INSULATED RUBBER HAND
GLOVES (CLASS-0) UNDER BN-901600xxxx

Name of the Firm:

Work’s Address:

[Link]. PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED BY THE BIDDER

1 Rated potential (rms)

2 Test potential (rms)

Maximum leakage current (r.m.s.) in mA for
3
Rated Potential
Maximum leakage current (r.m.s.) in mA for
4
Test Potential
5 Size of Insulated Rubber Hand Gloves
6 Thickness in mm
Material used for insulated rubber hand gloves
7 are ISI/CE marked and copy of ISI/IEC license
enclosed.
Standard specification to which this material
8
shall conform
Dimension (from the tip of second finger to the
9
edge of the cuff.)
10 Any other information

(Signature)
Name & Designation
With seal of the bidder
 1
Rubber Hand Gloves & Others
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF RUBBER HAND GLOVES (CLASS- 2)
AGAINST BN-901600XXXX
1.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the manufacturing with testing before dispatch and delivery at
RVPNL stores of insulated rubber hand gloves. To provide protection while working on
electrical transmission, distribution lines and switchyard for safety of workers from electric
shock. These gloves are intended for working on low voltage or induced voltage on off lines
and equipments.

1.02 SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION:

Rubber hand gloves shall be manufactured & tested in accordance with the
following specification/standard.

A) STANDARDS FOR MATERIAL:

1. Electrical Insulated Rubber Hand Gloves shall be manufactured and proof tested voltage
20000 Volt & Max working potential up to 17000 Volts in accordance with the relevant
standard for working on low voltage or induced voltage on off lines/equipments.
2. Insulated Rubber Hand Gloves of superior quality are required for use in Rural / Urban
areas of Utility for protection of workmen from electric shock due to induced voltage
while working on de-energized lines /equipments.
3. Rubber hand gloves shall be of soft quality, seamless latex, flexible, shock proof and
manufactured & tested in accordance with Class-2 as per IS 13774:2021 (with latest
amendments) or IEC 60903-2014 (with latest amendments) are required.
4. Hand gloves shall be made from natural or synthetic rubber by dipping process.
5. There should be no joints in the gloves.
6. Hand Gloves shall have a smooth surface and both inner & outer surfaces shall be free
from visual defects like patches, blisters, porosity, embedded, foreign matter or other
physical defects.
7. The hand gloves shall be of cream color.
8. The hand gloves shall be of gauntlet type and cuff edges shall be finished with a roll or
rubber re-enforcing strip.
9. The hand gloves shall be of curve finger type.
10. It’s length & thickness:-
Standard length (mm)-410
Maximum Thickness (mm)-2.3

B) MARKING Each hand gloves shall be marked with the following :

a) Size and Class of gloves.

b) Maximum working potential (17000V) following by word “working” in brackets.
c) Manufactures name or recognized trade mark.
d) Month & Year of manufacture.
e) BN No.
f) Word “RVPNL”
g) Conforming to IS 13774:2021(with latest amendments) or IEC 60903:2014 (with latest
amendments)
h) Contact e-mail address and Toll free No. for after sales service.

The marking should be at the backside of the glove, shall be legible and permanent and
shall not impair the quality of gloves.
 2
Rubber Hand Gloves & Others
C) WORKMANSHIP

1. The material shall be of latest design and conforms to the best engineering practices
adopted in the field. Bidder shall offer only such Electrical Insulating Rubber Hand
Gloves for H.V. as guaranteed by them to satisfactory performance and suitable for
continued good services.
2. The Design, manufacturing process and material control at various stages shall be
such as to give maximum use ac voltage, highest mobility, flexibility, dexterity,
good finish and lamination of sharp edge and corners.
3. The design of Electrical Insulating rubber Hand Gloves for H.V. shall be such that
stress due to electrical contact should not expand or contract in any part of the
gloves.
4. Manufacturing process: The gloves made from liquid rubber by dipping process shall
be acceptable. The gloves should be seamless, soft and flexible to allow easy
movement of hands.
5. Physical properties: The allowable value of Tensile strength, Elongation at break,
Tension set, Ageing properties shall be as stipulated in the IS 13774:2021(with latest
amendments) or IEC 60903:2014 (with latest amendments).

D) PACKING
Each pair of hand gloves shall be suitably and properly packed in polyethylene bags. Any
other mode of packing superior to above as per manufacturer standard practice may also be
agreed to 100 – 150 pairs of gloves shall be packed in one wooden box / container or as per
manufacturer standard practice.

E) Hand gloves shall be purchase directly from the manufacturers /Dealers / traders only.

1.03 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL & OTHER PARTICULARS:

The bidder shall furnish complete guaranteed and other particulars of material offered by
him.

1.04 SAMPLES :

Bidder shall furnish one pair of Rubber Hand Gloves along with their bid for approval failing
which their offer is liable to be ignored.

1.05 TYPE TEST CERTIFICATE:

a) Necessary latest test certificate from any Govt./ Govt. approved/ NABL accredited
laboratory like CPRI / ERDA or test reports showing results of tests carried out as per
IS 13774:2021 (with latest amendments) or IEC 60903-2014 (with latest amendments)
at the time of bid. The design and type test reports shall not be more than 5 years
old.
b) In addition to the tests specified above, the purchaser reserves the right of carrying
out any another test at our end, at manufacturers works or at any reputed laboratory.
 3
Rubber Hand Gloves & Others
Schedule-GTP
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PARTICULARS OF INSULATED RUBBER HAND
GLOVES (CLASS-2) UNDER BN-901600xxxx

Name of the Firm:

Work’s Address:

[Link]. PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED BY THE BIDDER

1 Rated potential (rms)

2 Test potential (rms)

Maximum leakage current (r.m.s.) in mA for
3
Rated Potential
Maximum leakage current (r.m.s.) in mA for
4
Test Potential
5 Size of Insulated Rubber Hand Gloves
6 Thickness in mm
Material used for insulated rubber hand gloves
7 are ISI/CE marked and copy of ISI/IEC license
enclosed.
Standard specification to which this material
8
shall conform
Dimension (from the tip of second finger to the
9
edge of the cuff.)
10 Any other information

(Signature)
Name & Designation
With seal of the bidder
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF SAFETY HELMETS AGAINST BN-9016002310

1.01 SCOPE

This specification covers the manufacturing, requirement regarding material construction,

workmanship, finish and performance requirement with testing before despatch and delivery
at our stores anywhere in Rajasthan, of safety helmets to provide protection against head
injuries which may be caused by falling objects and other hazards encountered during
working on electrical transmission, distribution lines and switchyards.

1.02 STANDARDS:

The safety helmets shall be ISI marked and shall meet the requirement of following
standards .

i) IS-2925:1984 (with latest amendments).

ii) Director General Mines & Safety (DGMS) approved.

1.03 SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

(A) REQUIREMENT

The safety helmets shall strictly conform to the requirement of IS:2925/1984 with latest
amendments. The helmets shall consists of shell, nape strap and headband having smooth
finish, free from burrs and sharp edges. All components used shall have high degree of
shock absorption, penetration resistance & shall also have high degree of flammability and
electrical resistance. No metal parts shall be used anywhere in the helmet. The helmets
shall have peak and ratchet fit .

(B) MATERIAL

i) SHELL:
The material of shell of the helmet shall be confirming to the provisions of IS-2925
and its latest amendments. The material shall not be made up with recycling process.
It shall conform to the performance test requirements given in clause 8 of IS.

ii) HARNESS:

The criteria for selection of material for the head band , anti concussion tape etc.
shall be sweat resistance, non irritant and shall not cause skin disease .

iii) HEADNBAND/NAPE STRAP:

The length of the headband or nape strap shall be adjustable in increments of not
more than 5 mm.

iv) COMFORT BAND OR SWEAT BAND:

Forehead comfort band consisting of textile laminated foam sheet shall be provided
to have extra softness and comfort to the user. Comfort band shall cover the inner
front surface of the headband for a length of not less than 100 mm each side of the
centre of the forehead. Further, comfort band shall have a width not less than that of
the headband over the length which it covers. The comfort band shall be non skin
resistant.

1
 v) CHIN STRAP:
Either helmet shell or the headband shall be fitted with a chin strap.

(C) SIZE

Helmets shall be of size suitable for medium sizes as per provisions for IS with replaceable
harness .

(D) CONSTRUCTION:

The helmets shall be constructed as per provisions of various clauses of IS: 2925 /1984
with latest amendments .

(E) Colour: The helmet shall be of florescent orange / lime yellow colour.

(F) Mass: The mass of the complete helmet without attachment shall not exceed
400 gm.
(G) PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: The following tests shall be carried out at
manufacturer’s works to ascertain the performance requirements as per provisions of IS:
2925 / 1984 with latest amendments:.

i) Shock absorption resistance test :

ii) Penetration resistance test.
iii) Flammability resistance test.
iv) Electrical resistance test.
v) Water absorption test.
vi) Heat resistance test.

The manufacturer must have all above test facilities at their works., for this the supplier shall
furnish list of testing facilities /equipments available at their works otherwise their offer shall
be ignored.

(H) PACKING AND MARKING

The helmet shall be suitably packed as per requirement of IS. The safety helmets and
harness shall be legibly and indelibly marked by any suitable method not having a harmful
effect the following information.

a) Name of manufacturer .
b) Year of manufacturer
c) BN-___________
d) Word “RVPN”.
e) ISI certification mark.
f) Contact e-mail address and toll free No. for after sale service.

1.04 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PARTICUARS

The bidder shall furnish complete Guaranteed and other particulars of material offered by
him in Schedule-GTP .

1.05 SAMPLES

2
The bidder shall deposit one sample of Safety Helmet alongwith dimensional drawing
indicating all dimensions and weight alongwith Bid to XEN-VI, RVPN, Jaipur under intimation
to this office i.e. Purchaser.
The sample shall be checked thereafter for visual examination /verification of dimension ,
weight etc. as per specification /GTP/Drawing.

1.06 INSPECTION & TESTING

Inspection & testing shall be carried out at manufacturer’s work as per provision of IS: 2925/
1984 with latest amendments and approved GTP.

The supplier should satisfy themselves that the helmets to be supplied are in accordance
with the terms of the contract and fully confirm to required specification by carrying out a
thorough pre-inspection of each item before tending the same for inspection to the
inspecting officer / inspecting agency nominated by the purchaser. Such pre-inspection on
the part of the suppliers would minimize the chances of rejection in inspection.

The material may be tested and inspected by an authorized inspection officer of the RVPN
before despatch. Samples shall be drawn for inspection / testing as per provisions of
relevant IS / purchase order. The purchaser reserves the right to get the material tested in
any testing laboratory before despatch.

1.07 PRICES

The prices are on FIRM Basis . The bids offered with prices on variable basis are
likely to be ignored.

1.08 PREFERENCE

The bidder should be manufacturer and/or authorized distributor /Sole selling agent /dealer
of the tendered item. Only ISI Marked Safety Helmets shall be purchased as such, the
bidder should have BIS license of offered item.

1.09 DEPARTURE FROM SPECIFICATION

Should the bidder wish to depart from the specification in any respect, he should clearly
state such departures indicating the reasons thereof. Unless this is done, the departmental
specification will hold good and shall be binding on the supplier unless the departures
have been approved in writing by the purchaser.

1.10 BIDS:

Bidder shall furnish complete particulars of the material offered by them in regard to this
specification and submit the same with their bid in triplicate. Failure to do so or any
incomplete entry therein may prevent a bid from being considered.

1.11 GENERAL

The tenders received without complete details required as per enclosed forms/schedules
are liable to be rejected.

3
Schedule-GTP

TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF SAFETY HELMETS UNDER BN-9016002310

Name of Firm:

S. No. PARTICULARS GTP FURNISHED BY FIRM

1. Name & Address of the
Manufacturer
2. Work’s Address
3. Safety Helmets consist of items
4 Safety Helmets type
5. Size of Safety Helmets
6. Material of Safety Helmets items
wise.
7. Weight of helmet.
8 Whether helmets are DGMS
approved and copy of approval
enclosed .
9. Whether helmets are ISI marked
and copy of ISI license enclosed.

4
Tech Spec for Ladder

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR WALL SUPPORT TYPE FIBRE GLASS

EXTENDABLE LADDER (PLASTIC MOULDED LADDERS)

1.01 SCOPE:

The specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer’s works before
despatch, supply and delivery of Wall support type Fibre Glass Extendable Ladder.

1.02 SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENT:

The following is the requirement for wall support type Fibre Glass Extendable Ladder:

[Link]. Particulars
1. Wall support type fibre glass Extendable ladder in two sections having
working length 6.0 meters.

1.03 STANDARDS:

The Material shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the following IS / ANSI
with latest amendments.

S. No. Indian Standard Particulars

1 IS:10661/1983 or Specification of Fibre Glass
ISO:1172
2 IS:6746:1994 Unsaturated Polyester Resin systems.
3 IS:4571-1977 Specification of [Link].
4 ANSI-A 14.5-92 Dielectric Strength for Portable Reinforced Plastic
5 IS 2071 (Pt.I)/1974 High Voltage tests.
6 IEC-60243-1-1998 Electric Strength
7 EN-131-Part I & Specification for ladders .
II/1993.
8 IS-14887 For UV Resistance tests.

1.04 SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION:

The Wall support type Fibre Glass extendable Ladder shall be manufacture and tested in
accordance with the following specification / standards:

i) The Wall support type Fibre Glass extendable Ladder shall be made from
good quality of UV Resistant terepthalic Polyester resin, used with polyester
surfacing veil, fibre glass roving and fibre glass mat containing minimum 60%
of glass content conforming to relevant IS and shall be manufactured by
PULTRUSION process.

ii) The two section extension ladder shall be interlocking sliding ladder having
gravity type locking arrangement. The working length of ladder shall be 6.0
Meters, the overlapping between sections of the ladder shall be 900mm (min).

iii) The Fibre glass ladder shall have smooth surface finish and cut cross section
shall give homogeneous appearance.

iv) The section to be used in the ladders must be of FGRP side rails having very
good tensional strength and having no wobbing or twisting.

1
Tech Spec for Ladder

v) It should be 100% shock proof and totally safe to work at electrical live line.

vi) It should be strong, durable, lightweight and easy to carry.

vii) It should be 100% rust proof and waterproof.

viii) Both side support shall be completely made up from fibre glass section for
high electrical insulation and safe in working on 11 kV & 33 kV lines and on
Grid substations upto 400 kV level and confirming to IS:2071 (Part-I & II)
1974.

ix) To support the ladder on Electric pole / Bus bar, the Pole lash for tying the
ladder with the pole/ Bus bar hook for support to Bus bar shall be provided.

x) Antiskid swivel type rubber shoes with rubber coating on 10 mm thick with
aluminium coated shoe shall be provided at bottom of the side support of
ladder .

xi) “Polyster surfacing veil” should be provided on outer surface of side supports
to make it ‘UV resistant.

xii) “Fluted Pipe” having 32 mm (min.) outer diameter should be provided for anti
skid step. “Fluted Pipe” should be fixed properly with the side supports by
means of plastic mould and pins. Pins shall be applied in such a manner that
makes Fluted pipe anti rotational .

xiii) Rubber shoes and M.S. sheet (At least 50 mm wide) should be provide on top
side as well bottom side of the ladder (on both side supports) for proper
strength and durability.

1.05 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The wall support type fibre glass ladder should confirm to the following technical particulars:-

[Link] Description Technical parameters

1 Material used FGRP
2 Length of ladder working length 6.0 meters +/- 3%
3 Inside width of side support 350mm
4 Shape & size of side support FRP side rail, 60mm x 30mm x 4mm
(minimum)
5 Shape & size of steps(rungs) FGRP Round rungs; Steps should be
anti skid having 32 mm outer dia.
6 Distance between steps 300mm (approximately)
7 Suitable for load (approximately) Tested for 150 Kg. when ladder is 75
degree inclined from ground.
8 Dielectric strength 25 kV per inch.
9 Insulation strength More than 1 Gohms.
10 Glass content 60%
11 Colour Cream/Yellow

2
Tech Spec for Ladder

1.06 MARKING:

Each wall support type fibre glass ladder shall be marked with the following:
i) Name of manufacture/ supplier.
ii) Month and year of manufacturer
iii) Lot/Bath No.
iv) RRVPNL.
v) BN-___________.

1.07 TESTS:

The wall support type Fibre glass single ladder shall be subjected to the following test.

1.07.1 TYPE TEST: The following tests shall constitute the type tests:

1) Mechanical tests:
Ladder shall meet the requirement of IS: 4571 / 1977 of aluminium ladder for
the following test.
a) Load deflection test: 60% deflection for ladder having rectangular pipe
side support shall be acceptable.
b) Strength of rungs test.
c) Sway test.
2) Electrical test:
a) A.C. Dielectric strength test: Conforming to Cl.7.10.1 of ANSI-A 14.5-92.
b) Test for insulation strength as per ASTM-257.
3) Glass content: Glass content test conforming to IS: 10661/ 1983.
4) Water absorption test as per ASTM-D-570.
5) UV resistance test as per IS: 14887.

The bidder shall furnish the complete type test reports of offered ladder before supply.

1.07.2 ACCEPTANCE & ROUTINE TEST:

The following tests shall constitute the Acceptance & Routine tests:
a) Visual inspection.
b) Dimensional check
c) Load deflection test.
d) Glass content test
e) Strength of rungs test.

The routine and acceptance tests shall be performed on one sample chosen at
random out of every 20 sample.

1.08 INSPECTION & TESTING:

Inspection & testing may be carried out as per provision of relevant IS and specification. The
supplier should satisfy themselves that the Fiber glass single ladder to be supplied are in
accordance with the terms of the contract and fully confirm to required specification by
carrying out a thorough pre-inspection of each item before tending the same for inspection
to the inspecting officer / inspecting agency nominated by the purchaser. Such pre-
inspection on the part of the suppliers would minimize the chances of rejection in inspection.

3
Tech Spec for Ladder

The material shall be checked and inspected by an authorised inspecting officer / inspecting
agency nominated by the purchaser before despatch. The purchaser reserves the right to
get the material tested in any testing laboratory before despatch.

1.09 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The bidder shall furnish complete Guaranteed and other Technical Particulars of material
offered by him as per Schedule-GTP.

1.10 DIMENSIONAL DRAWING:

Bidder shall furnish dimensional drawing / browsers showing complete details of offered
ladder for approval.

1.11 SAMPLES:

Should the bidder wish to depart from the specification in any respect, he should clearly
state such departures indicating the reason thereof. Unless this is done, the departmental
specification will hold good and shall be binding on the supplier unless the department have
been approved in writing by the purchaser.

4
Tech Spec for Ladder

Schedule- GTP

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL & OTHER PARTICULARS FOR SUPPLY OF WALL

SUPPORT TYPE FIBRE GLASS EXTENDABLE LADDER (PLASTIC MOULDED
LADDERS)

S. No. PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED BY THE BIDDER

1 Maker’s Name & Address.
2 Material used
3 Length of Ladder. working length 6.0 meters +/- 3%
4 Inside width of side support 350mm
5 Shape & Size of side support FRP side rail, 60mm x 30mm x
4mm (minimum)
6 Shape & Size of steps (Rungs) FGRP Round rungs; Steps should
be anti skid having 32 mm outer
dia.
7 Distance between steps. 300mm (approximately)
8 Suitable for load (Approximately) Tested for 150 Kg. when ladder is
75 degree inclined from ground.
9 Dielectric Strength 25 kV per inch.
10 Insulation strength. More than 1 Gohms.
11 Glass content 60%
12 Colour Cream/Yellow
13 Standard specification to which this
material shall conform
14 Whether material bears ISI certification
mark.
15 [Link]. of ISI license and its validity
16 Any other information.

5
spec-Earthing Rod for Transmission Line

VOLUME-II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR FIBRE GLASS DISCHARGE ROD

WITH EARTHING CONDUCTOR (EARTHING ROD FOR TRANSMISSION
LINE)

1.01 SCOPE:

The specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer’s works before
dispatch, supply and delivery of (EARTHING RODFOR LINE) Fiber Glass discharge rod
with Earthing Conductor (Lead) , at our Nigam stores.

1.02 STANDARD:

The material used for manufacturing of Earthing Rod alongwith their accessories and fittings
shall conform to the latest editions of the following standards (as amended upto date) except
where specified otherwise in this specification.
Reference
Sl.
Name of Item Materials Standard
No.
IEC/IS
1. Earth Clamp:
Clamp for tower structure/ High strength Copper FLAT IS – 617,
Earth strip/ Tools & Plants. IS - 228
Line Clamp:
2. -Do- -Do-
Clamp for conductor.
Earthing Pole:
Epoxy rod/Glass fiber
(a) Telescopic/Detachable IEC-855,
(Reinforced)
3. type pole IEC-1235
IS – 617,
(b) Operating Socket High strength SS
IS - 228
Lead/Cable:
IEC-1138
(a) Flexible conductor strands
Copper IS – 8130,
(Cu)
IS – 694,
IEC-1138
4.
(b) Protective sheath. PVC/Silicon sheath IS – 694,
IS – 6831
IEC-1138
(c) Cable /lead terminations High strength Electroplated
IS – 617,
Lugs (AI), (Cu). copper.
IS – 8309

1.03 SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION:

The Fiber Glass discharge rod shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the
following specification /standard:-
1 IS:10661/1983 & or ISO:1172 (Latest Specification of
amended) Fiber Glass
2 IS:6746:1994 (Latest amended) Unsaturated
polyester Resin.
1
spec-Earthing Rod for Transmission Line

3 IS:2071(Part I & II)1974 (Latest amended) High voltage tests.

i) The Fiber Glass discharge rod shall be made in 2 section having total extension length of 4
meters, Fiber Glass (FGRP) tubes sliding one inside other for telescopic extension and
provided with extension lock such as to provide extension and any length between minimum
and maximum opening. The sections of the rod should not detach from each other. The
insulation properties of FGRP tubes shall be suitable for EHVtransmission system and shall
be manufactured with terepthalicPolyester resin and by PULTRUSION process.

ii) The fibre glass discharge rod shall have smooth surface finish and cut cross section shall give
homogeneous appearance.

iii) It should be 100% shock proof and totally safe to work at electrical live line.

iv) It should be 100% rust proof and waterproof.

v) It should be strong, durable, light weight and easy to carry.

vi) The outer diameter of 2 section poles shall be 32mm and 25mm respectively.

vii) 35 Sqmm size, 6meter long Earthing Conductor (Lead) with braided copper shall be provided
with each Fiber Glass discharge [Link] copper cable used shall be ISI marked.

viii) Line End clamp and Earth End Clamp shall be of high strength Copper FLAT (as per
attached drawing and design suitable for EHV transmission line) shall be provided with
each Fiber Glass Operating Rod.

1.04 DETAILS OF COMPONENTS OF EARTHING DEVICE :

1. Earth End Clamp

(i) Clamp for attachment to tower structure of transmission lines (Earth Clamp).
This clamp shall also be used for Earth bonding scheme i.e. to bond various EHV
transmission line tools and plants with steel angle sections of tower.

(ii) The earth clamp shall be suitable for application by hand to tower structure/Earth
strip/bonding to tools and plants under any natural condition. The large thumb screw
of this clamp shall have pointed end, which can penetrate through the
painted/galvanized surface into steel parts or large flat surface ensuring a strong and
efficient connection to the structure/Earth/ strip/tools and plants should be upto 25
mm thickness. The Earth clamp shall also be equipped with a permanent or
detachable coupling for connecting the Earthing cable/lead.

2. Clamp for Attachment to Conductor of Line (Line Clamp):

i. Clamp for attachment to line conductor, Bus bar or other current carrying conductor.
The clamp shall be suitable for conductor diameter 30 mm to 40 mm

2
spec-Earthing Rod for Transmission Line

ii. The line clamp shall be suitable for application by means of an operating socket
attached to an “Insulated Glass Fiber Earthing Pole” in either upward or downward
directions. For such applications “G type clamp” shall be required to enable the
clamp easily slip over the conductor and retain the clamp in position while operating
screw is being tightened/ loosened. The clamp shall provide reliable contact
performance. These clamps can be fixed on the conductor from downward as well as
upward side through Earthing Poles.

3. Light weight Detachable/Telescopic Type Earthing Pole including socket for fixing
Conductor Clamps (Earthing Pole):
i. Light weight, 2 section Telescopic/ Detachable type insulating pole .The outer
diameter of 2 section poles shall be 32 mm and 25 mm respectively with a
detachable coupling for line clamp and conductive cable/lead.

ii. The glass fiber insulated Telescopic type Earthing Pole shall have a overall length of
approximate 4 mtrs. Telescopic type Earthing Pole shall have easy and free
movement of the component pieces for suitably increasing or decreasing the overall
length of the Earthing Pole. When fully extended to its maximum length, it shall
form a single stable and sturdy pole. The top part of the pole shall be provided with
a metallic socket for holding the line-end clamp and for easy and smooth fixing of
the line- end clamp to the conductor and also for removing the same (line-end
clamp) from the conductor. The earthing Pole shall be capable of being easily
removed after fixing the line end clamp to conductor.

4. Copper Lead/Cable:
“Flexible Stranded Cable/Lead” of Copper of 35 sq. mm cross-sectional area having 6
meter length required for connection between Line End clamp and Earth End clamp shall
be used.

5. Termination Lugs:
The cable /lead shall be connected to Earth Clamp and Line clamp by means of High
strength Electroplated copper lugs with large contact areas having double crimping and
shall have the required electrical, mechanical and sealing [Link] size of Copper
stranded flexible cable/lead, including terminations lugs, suitable for minimum cross –
sectional area of Copper cable shall not be less than 35 sq. mm

1.05 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS.

[Link] Description Technical parameters

1 Material used FGRP
2 Length of operating rod 4 Mtr.
3 Outer dia of 2 sections of pole 32mm and 25mm
4 Dielectric strength 8KV per mm flat wise.
5 Wet power frequency withstand 100kV rms
voltage.
6 Dry power frequency withstand 100kV rms
voltage.
7 Arc resistance As per ASTM D-495 of min. 120
sec.

3
spec-Earthing Rod for Transmission Line

8 Fire Retardancy As per IS: 6746 (latest amended)

9 Glass contents 60% min.
10 Colour Cream/Yellow.

1.06 MARKING:

Each Fiber Glass Discharge Rod shall be marked with the following:-
i) Name of manufacture/ supplier and trade mark.
ii) Month & year of manufacturer.
iii) Batch No.
iv) Size -4meter.
v) Word “RVPNL”
vi) BN NO.
vii) Contact No & E-mail Address and toll free No for after sales service.

1.07 TESTS:

1.07.1 The following tests shall constitute the type tests.

i) Electrical tests:

a) AC Dielectric strength test Conforming to ANSI-A14.5 1992(Latest amendment)

b) Wet power frequency withstand test conforming to IS 2071. (Part-I) 1993(Latest
amendment.)
c) Dry power frequency withstand test conforming to IS 2071. (Part-I) 1993(Latest
amendment.)
d) Lightning impulse voltage withstand test conforming to IS 2071(Part-.I)1993 (Latest
amendment)
e) Test for insulation strength as per ASTM-D 257-2007.
f) Glass content: Glass content test conforming to IS: 10661/1983 (Latest amended)
g) Water absorption test as per ASTM-D-570-98
h) UV resistance test as per IS: 14887:2000.
i) Arc Resistance test as per ASTM-D-495-99.

1.07.2 ACCEPTANCE & ROUTINE TEST:

The following test shall constitute the Acceptance & Routine tests:

a. Visual inspection.
b. Dimensional check.
c. Glass content test.
d. Insulation Resistance Test for one min. at 5 kV
e. H V Test at 100kV

The routine and acceptance tests shall be performed on one sample chosen at random out of
every 20 samples.

1.08 INSPECTION AND TESTING :

4
spec-Earthing Rod for Transmission Line

Inspection & testing shall be carried out as per provision of relevant IS and specification.
The supplier should satisfy themselves that the Fibre Glass Operating Rod to be supplied is
in accordance with the terms of the contract and fully confirm to required specification by
carrying out a through pre-inspecting of each item before tendering the same for inspection
to the inspecting officer/ inspecting agency nominated by the purchaser. Such pre inspection
on the part of the suppliers would minimize the chances of rejection in inspection.

The material shall be checked and inspected by an authorized inspecting officer/ inspecting
agency nominated by the purchaser before dispatch. The purchaser reserves the right to get
the material tested in any laboratory before dispatch.

1.09 CARRYING BAG:

The Fiber Glass Operating Rod shall be packed in appropriate carry bag. The carry bag
shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name trademark rating, size, month and year of
manufacturer lot/batch number RVPNL and BN No. it should have a shoulder strap.

1.10DRAWING AND DESIGN:

The Glass Operating Rod shall be as per drawing, design and dimensions enclosed with bid.

1.11 SAMPLES:

Bidder shall furnish one sample one sample of ordered item as per specification within 15
days of receipt of purchase order. The sample of ordered item as per specification alongwith
dimensional drawing indicating all dimensional and weight shall be furnished to the ACOS
(T&C), RVPN, Heerapura Jaipur for visual examination and checking / verification of
dimension, weight etc as per specification / GTP / Drawing.

1.12 DEPARTURE FROM SPECIFICATION:-

Should the bidder wish to depart from the specification in any respect, he should clearly
state such departures indicating the reason thereof. Unless this is done, the departmental
specification will hold good and shall be binding on the supplier unless the department have
been approved in writing by the purchaser.

5
spec-Earthing Rod for Transmission Line

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR SUPPLY OF EARTHING ROD

FOR TRANSMISSION LINE

[Link] Description TO BE FILLED BY THE

BIDDER
1 Name of Manufacturer
2 Work’s address
3 Material used
4 Length of operating rod
5 Outer dia of 2 sections of pole
6 Dielectric strength
7 Wet power frequency withstand voltage.
8 Dry power frequency withstand voltage.
9 Arc resistance
10 Fire Retardancy
11 Glass contents
12 Colour

(Signature)
Name & Designation

6
 VOLUME-II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR WAVE TRAPS FOR USE ON 220 KV

AND 132 KV TRANSMISSION LINES AGAINST BN-901500_____

3.0 SCOPE :
This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing before
despatch at manufacturers works, in respect of tendered material/items and
suitable packing fo all the material for transportation by road on F.O.R.D basis up
to the consignee's point any where in Rajasthan. The line traps shall constitute a
part of outdoor PLCC equipment. Line traps are to be inserted in series of
transmission line and therefore it should contribute negligible insertion loss to
power frequency and at the same time high impedance to PLCC signals. Wave
traps are required to full fill specified technical parameters as laid down in this
specification.

3.1 STANDARDS: The design, manufacture and testing of various equipment

covered by this specification shall comply with the latest issue of the following
standard.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

[Link]. Indian Standard Title

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. IS: 8792/1978 Line traps for AC Power System.

(With latest amendments)

2. IS: 3070(Pt.I)/1974 Lightning arresters for alternating

(with latest amendments) current systems Part.1 Non-Linear

resistor type Lightning Arresters

(Second revision).

3. ISS: 8793/1978 Methods of test for line traps

(With latest amendment)

4. IEC: 353 IEC specification for line Trap.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3.2 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:

The equipment to be supplied under the specification shall be suitable for

satisfactory operation under the following tropical humid conditions:-

(i)Location Rajasthan State

(ii) Max. ambient temperature of air 50.00 Deg.C.

(iii) Average daily amb. air temp. 32.20 Deg.C.

(iv) Min. Amb. temperature (-)5.0 Deg.C.

(iv)Max. relative humidity. 100%

(v)Min. Relative humidity. 10%

(vi)Seismic level (Horizontal/Acceleration) 0.08g

(vii)Number of rainy days per annum 70

(viii) Average rain fall per annum 100 mm to 1000mm

(ix) Max. wind pressure. 195 Kg/Cm2.

(x) Altitude above mean sea level (MSL) Less than 1000metre.

(xi) Isoceraunic level per annum 40 days

The atmosphere is to be considered as laden with industrial and toxic gas and dust
in suspension during dry months. Fog smoke and mild acids are also present.
Heavy lightning may be also present during the months from June to October.

3.3 MANUFACTURER’S PRACTICE:

(i) Special attention shall provide to the design, arrangement and assembly of
equipment to ensure ease of maintenance and replacement of parts.

(ii) All material used in the construction of the equipment shall be originally
new and unused and will comply with the standards and codes specified above
and shall be selected from the best available considering strength, durability and
best engineering practice, it will not deteriorate or distort under the prevailing
extremes of atmospheric conditions. The workmanship & design shall be in
accordance with the best Engineering practice and shall be such as have been
proved suitable for the intender purpose and for giving satisfactory performance
under the prevailing climatic conditions and proposed system of supply liberal
factors of safety shall be used throughout the design and special consideration shall
be given on parts subject to alternating stresses or shocks or more severe operating
conditions.

3.4 MINOR ACCESSORIES FITTINGS:

The contractor shall supply all such minor accessories, fittings, apparatus required
for the completion of supply which have not been specifically mentioned in this
specification or tender offer but which are usual or necessary for completeness of
equipment.

3.5 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:

3.5.1 WAVE TRAP:

(i) Wave traps shall be inserted in series with the high voltage transmission lines to
prevent undue loss of high frequency carrier signal for all power system conditions.
Its impedance shall be negligible at power frequency (50 C/s) so as not to disturb
the power transmission, but shall be relatively high over any frequency band
appropriate to carrier transmission i.e. 50 Kc/s to 500 KC/s.

(ii) Line trap shall consists of a single phase, air cored inductor of dry type with
natural air cooling, main coil designed to carry continuously the rated power
frequency current at the max ambient temperature. It shall be supplemented with
a protective and tuning device. It should meet the requirements of IS-8792-1978
with latest amendments.
(iii) Line traps are to be tuned for a carrier frequency band which will depend upon
the operational carrier frequency pair chosen for transmission line section in
question. The relative component of impedance of the line trap within its band
width shall not be less than 570 Ohms. The tuning device shall be arranged to
permit inter-change without removing the line trap.

(iv) Line trap shall be provided with a protective device which shall be so designed
and arranged that neither significant alteration in its protective function nor
physical damage shall result from either the temperature rise or from the magnetic
field of the main coil at rated continuous current or rated short time current. The
protective device shall neither enter into operation nor remain in operation following
transient actuation, at the power frequency voltage developed, across the line trap
by the rated short time current.

(v) The protective device shall be a non linear resistor type arrester complying with
the requirements of latest issue of IS-3070(Part-I)-1974 and shall be shunt
connected to the main coil and the tuning device for proper coordination with the
lightning arresters installed in the sub-stations, the line traps shall be
provided with protective device with nominal discharge current of 10 KA.

(vi) The line traps should be suitable for outdoor suspension mounting and
mechanically strong to withstand the stress due to maximum wind pressure of 195
KG/Cm2. Necessary suspension arrangement for hanging the wave traps from
gantry (except insulator string) should also be provided by the successful bidder.
Any suspension system of a line trap shall be designed for a tensile strength at least
twice the weight of the line trap plus 200 Kg.

(i) Line traps shall conform to the following technical particulars:

Nominal system voltage ---------- 220KV 132 KV

(a) Max system voltage on which line traps 245 145

are to be used(KV).

(b) Rated continuous current (Amps). 1250 1000

(c) Rated short time current duration 40 31.50

1second (KA).

(d)Asymetrical peak value of the first half 102 80.325

wave of rated short time current(KA peak)

(e) Minimum resistive components of impedance 570 570

within the band width (Ohm).

(f) Nominal discharge current of protective 10 10

device(KA).

(g) Inductance of main coil (mH) 0.5 0.2

(h) Maximum Tapping Loss (dB) 2.6 2.6

(i) Attenuation at tuned frequency (dB) 8.0 8.0

(j) Blocking band details (KHz) 150-500 260-500

(k) System frequency(c/s) 50 50

(l) Line Characteristic impedance (Ohms) 400 400

(Phase to Earth for single Conductor line.)

3.6 GENERAL PARAMETERS:

3.6.1 WAVE TRAP:

(i) The bidder shall offer 0.5 mH line traps for 220 KV system & 0.2 mH line traps
for 132 KV system and shall specify various band width for which min. resistive
components of impedance will not be less than 570 Ohms.

(ii) The bidder shall also specify the band width of the untuned line trap within
which the tapping loss shall not exceed 2.6dB. For this tapping loss, the
characteristic impedance of the H.T. Line(the phase to earth impedance of a single
conductor line) may be assumed to be 400 Ohms.

(iii) Bidder should offer set of Y - clamps suitable for ACSR Zebra /Panther for
connecting Jumpers to terminals of line traps to high tension line or station
equipment.

3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTING:

The tenderer shall furnish along-with tender following type test reports conforming
to relevant standards to meet the qualification requirements as laid down in
schedule I of this specification. These type test reports must be issued by a NABL
accredited laboratory / ILAC-MRA International Laboratory Accredation Corporation
(in case of foreign laboratory) for similar/ higher rating & design of tendered
material /equipment. The type test certificate(s) from in house laboratory of
tendering firm even if it is NABL accreditation /ILAC-MRA accredited shall not be
accepted in case of their own tender. This will not be applied if tendering firm is
Govt. Company/ Public Sector under taking. Such type test certificates must not be
older than 7 years as on the date of bid opening.

3.7.1 TYPE TESTS FOR WAVE TRAP :

(a) Measurement of the inductance of the main coil

(b) Measurement of blocking impedance

(c) Measurement of tapping loss

(d) Measurement of the temperature rise

(d1) Measuremant of the temperature of the cooling air

(d2) Measurement of the temperature of the line trap

(d3) Duration of test

(d4) Loading

(e) Insulation test:-

 (e1) Power frequency voltage test on the tuning device

(e2) Impulse voltage tests

(f) Short time current tests.

(g) Corona extinction voltage test.

(h) RIV measurement.

3.7.2 The wave traps shall be subjected at manufacturer’s works before despatch to
the following routine /acceptance test on each unit as per relevant standards in the
presence of purchasers inspecting officer /representative.

3.7.3 (i) ROUTINE TESTS FOR WAVE TRAPS:

(a) Measurement of blocking impedance.

(b) Measurement of tapping loss.

(c) Measurement of the rated inductance of the main coil.

(d) Measurement of power frequency inductance of the main coil.

(e) Measurement of dimensions.

3.7.4 INSPECTION:

The inspection of the equipment shall be carried out by the purchaser's

representatives in accordance to the relevant standards As per provision of GCC.

(i) The purchaser shall have access at all times to the works and all other places of
manufacture, where the equipment are being manufactured and the supplier shall
provide all facilities for unrestricted inspection of the supplier's works, raw
materials, manufacture of the material and for conducting necessary tests at any
stage.

(ii) The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance about the
manufacturing programme so that arrangements could be made for inspection.

(iii) No equipment shall be despatched from its point of manufacture unless the
material has been satisfactorily inspected, tested and cleared.

(iv) Inspection and acceptance of any quantity of equipment shall in no way relieve
the supplier from his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this
specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such equipment is later
found to be defective.

(v) The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance /
routine tests of brought out items.

3.8 DRAWINGS, LITERATURE AND MANNUALS :

In addition to any other drawing which the tenderer may like to submit to show the
arrangement & merits of the offered equipment.

The following drawings shall be supplied with the tender:-

(i) General installation lay out of PLCC equipment showing position of all
associated equipment.
(ii) Detailed dimensional drawings and descriptive literatures of all the associated
equipment separately.

(iii) Circuit wiring diagram & schematic diagram.

(iv) Literature/pamphlets manuals of equipment and its associated

accessories.

Illustrative & descriptive literature of Wave traps and coupling devices shall also be
enclosed with the tender.

3.9 PACKING& MARKING:

(i) All wave traps shall be packed in strong seasoned wooden crates to avoid
handling problem.

(ii) The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough handling during
transit, strong at site and subsequent handling in the field.

(iii) Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or dunnage or spacers shall be

provided to prevent damage or deformation during transit and handling.

(iv) All packing cases shall be marked legibly with the appropriate caution symbols
and correctly so as to ensure safe arrival at their destination and avoid despatched
on account of faulty packing and faulty or illegible markings stencilled on it in
indelible ink. Whenever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting
hooks etc. shall be provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases
shall be supplied by supplier without any extra cost.

(v) Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list

containing the following information:

(a) Name of the consignee.

(b) Details of consignment.

(c) Destination.

(d) Total weight of consignment.

(e) Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.

(f) Handling & unpacking instruction.

(g) Bill of material indicating contents of each package.

 Schedule-GTP
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR SUSPENSION TYPEWAVE TRAP 0.5mH/1250
Amps and 0.2mH/1000 Amps
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
S. NO. PARTICULARS 220KV 132KV
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. NAME & ADDRESS OF
MANUFACTURER
2. TYPE
(i) RATED VOLTAGE 220KV 132KV
(ii) MAX. SERVICE VOLTAGE 245KV 145KV
3. CONTINUOUS CURRENT CARRYING 1250A 1000A
CAPACITY.
4. RATED INDUCTANCE 0.5mH 0.2mH
5. MIN. RESISTIVE COMPONENT 570 Ohm 570 Ohm
OF BLOCKING IMPEDENCE
6. RATED SHORT TIME CURRENT 40KA 31.5KA
DURATION 1 SEC.(KA)
7. ASYMMETRIC PEAK VALUE OF THE FIRST 102KA 80.325KA
HALF WAVE OF RATED SHORT TIME
CURRENT(KA) PEAK
8. MAX. TAPPING LOSS.2.6 dB 2.6 dB
9. ATTENUATION AT TUNED FREQUENCY. 8.0 dB 8.0 dB
10. BLOCKING BAND DETAILS.(KHz) 150-500 260-500
11. CHANGE IN IMPEDENCE DUE TO ---Bidder to specify---
AMBIENT [Link].
12. CHANGE IN RESONANT FREQUENCY ----Bidder to specify---
DUE TO AMBIENT [Link].
13. WHETHER LIGHTENING ARRESTOR ----Bidder to specify---
HAS BEEN PROVIDED OR NOT.
14. DTAILS OF LIGHTENING ARRESTOR. ----Bidder to specify---
(i) MAKE
(ii) TYPE
(iii) RATED VOLTAGE
(iv) NOMINAL DISCHARGE CURRENT.
15. WHETHER BIRD GUARD HAS BEEN ----Bidder to specify---
PROVIDED OR NOT.
16. TYPE OF MOUNTING. -------Suspension---------
17. WHETHER CORONA RINGS HAVE ----Bidder to specify---
BEEN PROVIDED OR NOT.
18. DETAILS OF TERMINAL CLAMP. -----Bidder to specify---
19. ULTIMATE TENSILE Twice the [Link] wave trap + 200Kg
STRENGTH.
20. DIMENSIONS OF EQUIPMENTS : ----Bidder to specify----
(i) HEIGHT
(ii) DIAMETER
(iii) WEIGHT
21. STANDARD TO WHICH EQUIPMENT IEC353/IS 8792
CONFORMS.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Signature(s) with seal.

 VOLUME-II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR COUPLING DEVICES FOR USE ON 220 KV

AND 132 KV TRANSMISSION LINES

3.0 SCOPE :

This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing before despatch
at manufacturers works, in respect of tendered material/items and suitable packing
for all the material for transportation by road on F.O.R.D basis up to the consignee's
point any where in Rajasthan. The coupling device shall constitute a part of outdoor
PLCC equipment are to be inserted in series of transmission line and therefore it
should contribute negligiable insertion loss to power frequency and at the same
time high impedance to PLCC signals. Coupling devices is required to full fill
specified technical parameters as laid down in this specification.

3.1 STANDARDS: The design, manufacture and testing of various equipment covered
by this specification shall comply with the latest issue of the following standard.

[Link]. Indian Standard Title

1. IS: 8997/1978 Coupling device for PLC systems.

2. IS: 8998/1978 Methods of tests for coupling devices for PLC systems.
3. IEC: 481:1974 Specification for coupling devices for PLCC system.
4. IS: 3070(Pt.I)/1974 Lightning arresters for alternating
(with latest amendments) current systems Part.1 Non-Linear
resistor type Lightning Arresters
(second revision)

3.2 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:

The equipment to be supplied under the specification shall be suitable for

satisfactory operation under the following tropical humid conditions:-
1) Max. ambient Air Temperature 50 Deg.C.
2) Max. daily average ambient temperature 45 Deg C
3) Max. yearly weighted ambient Temprature 35 Deg C
4) Minimum ambient Air Temperature (-) 5 Deg.C.
5) Maximum relative humidity(%). 90 %
6) Minimum relative humidity(%). 10 %
7) Height above main sea level. Less than 1000 meters
8) Dust storms are liable to occur during the period March to July
9) Average No. of thunder storm days/annum. 40 days
10) Average annual rainfall(mm). 10 to 100cm (depending upon area)
11) Average No. of months of tropical monsoon conditions. 4 months
12) Seismic level horizontal acceleration 0.3g
13) Degree of Polution Heavy
14) Intensity of solar radiation 1.0 kW/Sq.M
15) Max. Wind load 195kg/Sq.M

3.3 MANUFACTURER’S PRACTICE:

(i) Special attention shall provide to the design, arrangement and assembly of
equipment to ensure ease of maintenance and replacement of parts.

(ii) All material used in the construction of the equipment shall be originally new
and unused and will comply with the standards and codes specified above and shall
be selected from the best available considering strength, durability and best

1
engineering practice, it will not deteriorate or distort under the prevailing extremes of
atmospheric conditions. The workmanship & design shall be in accordance with the
best Engineering practice and shall be such as have been proved suitable for the
intender purpose and for giving satisfactory performance under the prevailing
climatic conditions and proposed system of supply liberal factors of safety shall be
used throughout the design and special consideration shall be given on parts subject
to alternating stresses or shocks or more severe operating conditions.

3.4 MINOR ACCESSORIES FITTINGS:

The contractor shall supply all such minor accessories, fittings, apparatus required
for the completion of supply which have not been specifically mentioned in this
specification or tender offer but which are usual or necessary for completeness of
equipment.

3.5 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:

3.5.1 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS OF COUPLING DEVICES :

3.5.1 Coupling Devices for power line carrier circuits are devices interposed between
the coupling capacitors and PLC transmitter/receiver and shall be designed:
(a) To assure efficient transmission of carrier frequency signals between the carrier
frequency connection and the power line and vice versa.

(b) For safety of personnel and to protect the low voltage part of the installation
against the effects of the power frequency voltage and transient over voltages.

(i) COUPLING FILTER:

Coupling filter in conjuction with the capacitance of the coupling capacitor shall
constitute an electric filter of band pass type. It shall match the characteristic
impedance of the high tension line with impedance of the connecting PLC
transmitter/receiver. The phase to earth characteristic impedance of the high tension
line may be assumed to be 400 Ohms.
The coupling device shall be so designed that the impedance at power frequency
between the primary terminal and the earth terminalis as low as possible and in no
case in excess of 20 Ohms. This low impedance shall be ensured by a device such as
a drain coil or matching transformer.

(ii) DRAINAGE OF CHARGING CURRENT:

The primary of the coupling unit shall have a low impedance for the operating
frequency of the power line (50Hz) so that charging current of the coupling
capacitor is grounded. The drain coil winding shall:-
(a) Offer a maxium guarantee of countinuity of connection to the earth terminal.

(b) With-stand any over voltages which may occur on the power line, taking into
account the effect of the main arrestors.
(c) Insulation.

(iii) EARTHING SWITCH:

An earthing switch shall be provided for making a temporary direct connection
between the primary and earth terminals. The method of operating the earthing
switch shall take due regard of requirements of safety with the I.E. rules. In case
earthing switch is enclosed, an indication of `ON' & `OFF' position of it be clearly
visible.

(b) MAIN ARRESTOR:

A lightning arrestor shall be connected as directly as possible between the primary
and earth terminals and shall be capable of protecting the coupling device and the

2
carrier frequency connection. The lightning arrester shall be of nonlinear resistor type
and should meet the requirements of IS-3070(Part-I)-1974 with latest amendments.

(c) The input and output circuits of the coupling units shall introduce a galvanic
insulation into a coupling unit and should be able to withstand a test voltage of at
least 10 KV for one minute.

3.5.2 The coupling unit shall be provided with the lightning arrestors as above, to
protect the carrier equipment against excess voltage which may occur when the
coupling capacitor becomes defective or the ground load connected to the coupling
unit is interrupted.

3.5.3 The coupling unit shall conform to the following carrier frequency operating
characteristics:-
(a) Primary impedance. 640 Ohms, for Phase to Phase coupling.
(b) Secondary impedance. 75/125 Ohms for unbalance secondary circuit
150 Ohms balanced secondary circuit.
(c) Max. composite loss. 2 dB.
(d) Transmission band. 50 to 500 KHz.
(e) Earthing switch rating - 400 A
(f) Drainage coil
(i) Continuous current - 1A
(ii) Short time current - 50A for 0.2s
(iii) Inductance -  63.6 mH.

(g) Lightning arrestor:-

(i) Rated voltage - 1 KV
(ii) Impulse sparkover voltage - 4 KV
(iii) Discharge current - 10 KA
(h) NominalPeak Envelop Power. - 600 W upto1000W at 100 KHz

3.6 GENERAL PARAMETERS OF COUPLING DEVICE:

3.6.1 The bidder may note that composite loss is the power loss occuring in the
carrier signal after passing through the coupling unit complete with coupling
capacitors. Coupling unit is supposed to be loaded with its primary and secondary
impedance while capacitor is assumed to have no loss. The composite loss shall be
the least possible compatible with the bandwidth and design requirement called for
by safety considerations and shall be not greater than 2dB over the whole of the
available bandwidth of the coupling device. The return ose of the coupling device i.e.
the line side and equipment side return loss shall preferably be not less than 12 dB
over the whole of the available bandwidth of the coupling device. The bidders will
furnish the data of composite loss and return loss.

3.6.2 The capacitance of the coupling capacitors with which the coupling units may
be used for the above transmission band is 4400 pf.

3.6.3 Two Nos. phase to earth coupling units should be capable of being used to form
inter phase or inter line coupling. In case any separate matching transformer or
matching units is required the same shall be offered.

3.6.4 The bidder shall also offer suitable earthing switches for grounding the low
voltage terminal of the coupling capacitor for carrying out maintenance or any other
work on coupling unit and it should be of at least 400 A rating.

3.6.5 The coupling units should be housed in an insulated fibre glass re-inforced
polyster enclosure to make it weather proof and tropicalized corrossion free and
should be suitable for installation the steel pedestal structure used for mounting coupling
capacitors/CVT.

3
 3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTING:
The tenderer shall furnish alongwith tender following type test reports conforming to
relevant standards to meet the qualification requirements as laid down in schedule-
PQR of this specification. These type test reports must be issued by a NABL
accredited laboratory / ILAC-MRA i.e. International Laboratory Accredation
Corporation (in case of foreign laboratory) for same design of tendered material
/equipment. The type test certificate(s) from in house laboratory of tendering firm
even if it is a NABL accredited /ILAC-MRA accreditated shall not be accepted in case
of their own tender. This will not be applied if tendering firm is Govt. Company/
Public Sector under taking. Such type test certificates must not be older than 7 years
as on the date of bid opening.

.
3.7.2 TYPE TEST FOR COUPLING DEVICE:
(a) Composite loss measurement at several frequencies.
(b) Measurement of return loss at several frequencies.
(c) Distortion and inter modulation test.
(d) Impulse voltage test.
(e) Test on arrestors.
(f) Power frequency voltage test.
(g) Test on drainage coil or matching transformer winding.
(i) Measurement of the impedance at power freq.
(ii) Current carrying capacity at power freq.
Permanent current 1 A r.m.s - Short-time current 50 A r.m.s. for 0.2 seconds

3.7.3 The coupling devices shall be subjected at manufacturer’s works before

despatch to the following routine /acceptance test on each unit as per relevat
standards in the presence of purchasers inspecting officer /representative.

3.7.3 (i) ROUTINE TESTS FOR COUPLING DEVICES:

(a) Measurement of composite loss.
(b) Measurement of return loss.
(c) Power freq. voltage test.

3.7.4 INSPECTION:
The inspection of the equipment shall be carried out by the purchaser'srepresentatives
in accordance to the relevant standards and as per provision of GCC.
(i) The purchaser shall have access at all times to the works and all other places of
manufacture, where the equipment are being manufactured and the supplier shall
provide all facilities for unrestricted inspection of the supplier's works, raw
materials, manufacture of the material and for conducting necessary tests at any
stage.

(ii) The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance about the
manufacturing programme so that arrangements could be made for inspection.

(iii) No equipment shall be despatched from its point of manufacture unless the
material has been satisfactorily inspected, tested and cleared.

(iv) Inspection and acceptance of any quantity of equipment shall in no way relieve
the supplier from his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this
specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such equipment is later
found to be defective.

(v) The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance / routine
tests of brought out items.

4
 3.8 DRAWINGS, LITERATURE AND MANNUALS :

In addition to any other drawing which the tenderer may like to submit to show the
arrangement & merits of the offered equipment.

The following drawings shall be supplied with the tender:-

(i) General installation lay out of PLCC equipment showing position of all associated
equipment.

(ii) Detailed dimensional drawings and descriptive literatures of all the associated
equipmentseperately.

(iii) Circuit wiring diagram & schematic diagram.

(iv) Literature/pamphalates manuals of equipment and its associated

accessories.

Illustrative & descriptive literature of Wave traps and coupling devices shall also be
enclosed with the tender.

3.9 PACKING& MARKING:

(i) All coupling devices shall be packed in strong seascond wooden crates to avoid
handling problem.

(ii) The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough handling during
transit, strong at site and subsequent handling in the field.

(iii) Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or dunnage or spacers shall be provided

to prevent damage or deformation during transit and handling.

(iv) All packing cases shall be marked legibly with the appropriate caution symbols
and correctly so as to ensure safe arrival at their destination and avoid despatched
on account of faulty packing and faulty or illegible markings stencilled on it in
indelible ink. Whenever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting
hooks etc. shall be provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall
be supplied by supplier without any extra cost.
(v) Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list
containing the following information:
(a) Name of the consignee.
(b) Details of consignment.
(c) Destination.
(d) Total weight of consignment.
(e) Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.
(f) Handling & unpacking instruction.
(g) Bill of material indicating contents of each package.

5
 Schedule - GTP
[Link]. DESCRIPTION DESIRED SPECIFICATION

1. NAME OF MANUFACTURER AND PLACE.

2. TYPE, MODEL, CATALOG NO.

3. (A) WHETHER PASS BAND CAN BE BIDDER TO SPECIFY THE PROCESS

PROGRAMMED AT SITE ?
(B) IF YES PLEASE PROVIDE THE
DETAILS.

4. NOMINAL IMPEDANCE PLC SIDE. 75/125 OHMS UNBALANCED

OR 150 OHMS BALANCED
5. NOMINAL IMPEDANCE LINE SIDE. 320 OHMS (PHASE TO
GROUND)
640 OHMS (PAHSE TO PHASE)
6. RANGE OF COUPLING CAPACITANCE. 1.5 TO 13 nF

7 . C O M P O S I T E LOSS WITHIN THE PASS BAND  2dB

 LOSS WITHIN THE PASS BAND .  12Db

9. AVERAGE CONTINUOUS POWER (TYPICAL) 200 WATTS

[Link] PEAK ENVELOPE POWER :

(A) AT 50KHz.  400 WATTS
(B) AT 100KHz.  1000 WATTS

[Link]. BIDDER TO SPECIFY

[Link] FREQUENCY TEST VOLTAGE. TRANSFORMER ( PRIMARY/

SECONDARY 10KVrms, 1Min
HYBRID(WINDINGS/WINDINGS) 5KVrms, 1 MIN.
DRAIN COIL
[Link].  63.6 mH

[Link] AT M A I N S FREQUENCY.  20 OHMS

15.(A) CONTINUOUS CURRENT.  1.0Arms.

(B) SHORT TIME CURRENT.  50A, O.2S

EARTHING SWITCH
16 (A) RATED CURRENT. 400 RMS CONTINUOUSLY
(B) SHORT TIME CURRENT. 16KA, 1 Second
SURGE ARRESTOR :

17.(A) RATED VOLTAGE. 1KV

(B)IMPULSE SPARK OVER VOLTAGE 4KV
(C)RATED DISCHARGE CURRENT. 5KA

[Link] SUITABLE FOR MOUNTING BIDDER TO SPECIFY

DIRECTLY ON STRUCTURE OF CC/CVT
WITHOUT ANY NECESSITY OF BASE PLATES.

Signature(s) with seal.

6
 VOLUME-II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 75 OHM HF CO-AXIAL CABLE

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.0 SCOPE:

This specification covers manufacture, assembly, testing before despatch at manufacturers works,
suitable packing for supply &Delivery on F.O.R. destination basis up to consignee point by road.

3.01 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :

The climatic conditions at site under which the equipment shall operate satisfactory are as under.

1) Max. ambient Air Temperature 50 Deg.C.

2) Max. daily average ambient temperature 45 Deg C
3) Max. yearly weighted ambient Temprature 35 Deg C
4) Minimum ambient Air Temperature (-) 5 Deg.C.
5) Maximum relative humidity(%). 90 %
6) Minimum relative humidity(%). 10 %
7) Height above main sea level. Less than 1000 meters
8) Dust storms are liable to occur during the period March to July
9) Average No. of thunder storm days/annum. 40 days
10) Average annual rainfall(mm). 10 to 100cm (depending
upon area)
11) Average No. of months of tropical monsoon conditions. 4 months
12) Seismic level horizontal acceleration 0.3g
13) Degree of Polution Heavy
14) Intensity of solar radiation 1.0 kW/Sq.M
15) Max. Wind load 195kg/Sq.M

3.02 MANUFACTURER PRACTICE:

All material used in the construction of the material shall be originally new, unused and shall comply
with the standards and codes specified in the specification and shall be selected from the best available
considering strength,durability and best engineering practice,it will not deteriorate or distort under the
prevailing extremes of atmosphere conditions. The workmanship and design shall be in accordance
with the best engineering practice and shall be such as have been proved suitable for the inbid
purpose and for giving satisfactory performance under the prevailing climatic conditions and proposed
system of supply. Liberal factors of safety shall be used through out the design and special consideration
shall be given on parts subject to alternating stresses or shocks or most severe operating conditions.

3.03 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 75 OHM (UNBALANCED) H.F. COAXIAL

CABLE WITH POLYETHYLENE (SEMI-SOLID, AIR-SPACED) INSULATION.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.03.01 GENERAL:
This specification provides for manufacture, testing before despatch at manufacturer's works, suitable
packing for supply and delivery on F.O.R. Destination basis 75 Ohms (unbalance) H.F. Co-axial Cable
with Polyethylene (Semi Solid- Air spaced) Insulation shall be used for interconnections of indoor and
outdoor PLCC equipments.

3.03.02 This specification requires reference to the following specification with latest amendments.
(i) BS: 2316 (Part-1&2) -1968. Specification for RF Cable, Part-1 General requirement & tests.
Part-2 British Government Service requirements'. British
Standard Institution.
(ii) IS : 10579-1983. Specification for polyethylene (PE)
insulation and sheath of
telecommunication cables.

(iii) IS : 10673-1983. Sampling plans & procedure for

inspection by attributes for
electronic terms.

(iv) IEC 96-1-1986 R.F. Cables Part-1: General

requirements & Measuring methods'. International Electro
technical Commission.

(v) MIL-C-17F-1983 `Cable' RF, Flexible, and semi-rigid General Specification for
Department of Defence, USA.

(vi) JSS 51100-1974 `Specification for Cables, R.F. Directorate of standardisation,

Ministry of Defence.

(vii) BS: 6234:1969 Polythene insulation and sheath of electric cables.

(viii) ITD S/WT-108 Cable drum's specification
(latest issue).
(ix) IS: 5026:1987 General requirement and tests for radio
frequency cables.
(x) IS: 11967 (Pt-II) Specification for R.F. Coaxial cable
Sec.I/1989
(xi) IS: 3975-1988 Specification for mild steel wires,
formed wires and tapes for armouring of Cables.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3.03.03 The H.F. Coaxial cable shall be offered to connect coupling unit installed in the switch yard to
the PLCC terminal installed indoor. The H.F. Cable to be offered shall be suitable for being laid directly
on the ground or in trenches or in ducts without being deformed. The cable shall be braided tinned
copper & galvanized steel wire.

3.03.04 The capacitance of the cable shall be low so as to minimize attenuation at the carrier
frequency range, the impedance of the cable shall be so as to match with the output impedance of
PLCC terminals and secondary impedance of the coupling units.

3.03.05 The H.F. Coaxial Cable having impedance of 75 Ohms unbalanced with solid hard drawn
copper wire as central conductor, air space dielectric by means of a composite helical thread of
polyethylene in a polyethylene tube and tinned copper braid, PVC sheath black, Non Hygroscope
layer, galvanised steel wire braid and outer PVC sheath of blue colour, generally confirming to BSS -
2316 and IS:11967 (Part.2 Sec.1)1989 with latest amendments.

3.03.06 Essential Requirement : The 75 Ohms (unbalance) high frequency Coaxial Cable with
Polyethylene (semi solid Air spaced) Insulation shall confirm to type R 75-5-B100 IS:11967 (Part-
2/Sec.1)-1989 or latest amendment thereof & IS:5026-1987 General requirement and tests for H.F.
Cables or latest amendment thereof.

3.03.07 Construction:
The constructional details of the cable shall be as
(a) Inner Conductor: The inner conductor of the cable shall solid plain hard drawn copper with
diameter 1.22 ± 0.03 mm.

(b) Dielectric: The material used in the cable for dielectric core shall be Polyethylene semi-air spaced,
with diameter over dielectric 5.30 ± 0.15 mm, of Uniform thickness consistent with the electrical,
environmental, physical, mechanical, and dimensional requirement. The material used for the core shall
be of type A-3.
(c) Outer Conductor: The outer conductor of the cable shall be single braided, 0.20 mm tinned
copper wire with a minimum coverage 90%. The Braids shall be applied with the maximum tension
possible so as to prevent loosening or creeping but not to cause broken ends. Braids shall have no
irregularities or loose unwoven strands. There shall be no splices of the completed braid.

(d) Sheath: The sheath material of the cable shall be tough, flexible, and non Hygroscopic. The sheath
shall cover the cable tightly and evenly in a manner consistent with the physical, Mechanical,
environmental and dimensional requirements. The sheath material shall be of type 2 with diameter over
sheath 8.0 ± 0.25 mm

(e) Non Hygroscopic layer: The Non Hygroscopic layer shall be applied tightly and ride
smoothly over the sheath. The material shall be of the type K.

(f) Armour: The armouring shall be of a galvanised steel wire braiding wire diameter 0.30 mm with a
minimum coverage 70%. The armouring shall be of rugged, tough, and flexible. The individual strands
shall be soft or annealed low carbon, steel wire. The tensile strength of the individual strands shall be
460 N/mm2 minimum. The braid shall be applied with the maximum tension possible so as to prevent
loosening or creeping but not to cause broken ends. Braids shall have no irregularities or loose unwoven
strands. There shall be no splices of completed Braid.

(g) Jacket: The Jacket material of the HF cable shall be tough, flexible and non hygroscopic. The jacket
shall cover the cable tightly and evenly in a manner consistent with the physical, Mechanical,
environmental and dimensional requirements and coloured blue. The Jacket material shall be of type 2
with diameter over the sheath 12.50 ± 0.50 mm.

3.03.08 Essential requirements:

The technical parameters of the HF cable shall be as:

1. Dielectric strength : 4500 V (rms)

2. Spark test:
(a) Dielectric : 6000 V (rms)
(b) Sheath : 3000 V (rms)

3. Insulation resistance : 10,000 M Ohm. /Km (Min.)

4. Capacitance : 54 PF/m, Nominal

5. Attenuation:
At 10KHz : 1.2 dB/Km
At 60KHz : 1.8 dB/Km
At 300KHz : 3.9 dB/Km
At 500KHz : 5.5 dB/Km

6. Characteristic Impedance : 75 Ohm ± 10%

7. Weight (Approx.) : 200 gm/m

3.03.09 Engineering Information:

The Engineering information of the cable shall be as:

(a) Operating voltage : 1.5 KV rms, Max.
(b) Operating frequency : 500 KHz, Max.
(c) Power rating : 150 Watt, nominal;
(d) Operating Temp. range : (-) 15 to 85 Deg. C.
(e) Max. Conductor resistance : 16 Ohms/Km at 20 Deg. C.
(f) Tensile strength of the Conductor : 460 N/mm2.
(g) Elongation of the Conductor : 1% Min, and
(h) Minimum bending radius 12 D, where D is the overall diameter of the cable.
3.04. TESTS & INSPECTION:

3.04.01 TYPE TEST:

The bider at the time of submitting bid shall furnish the following type test reports conforming to
relevant standards to meet out the qualification requirement laid down in schedule I of this
specification.

[Link] TYPE TEST FOR HF CO-AXIAL CABLE:-

The type test of HF Co-axial cable as per IS: 11967-87 & (Sec-II)-1989 & IS: 5026-1987
S. No. Nature of Test Clause No.
1. Insulation resistance test 6.8 / IS:5026-1987

2. Physical dimensions IS:5026-1987 & IS:11967

(a) Diameter of inner Conductor (Part-2/Sec-2-1989)
(b) Diameter of Dielectric
(c) Diameter of outer Conductor
(d) Diameter of outer Sheath
(e) Diameter of armour
(f) Diameter of Jacket
3. Characteristic Impedance 6.10 / IS:5026-87

4. Attenuation 6.11 / IS:5026-87

5. Capacitance 6.13 / IS:5026-87

6. Conductor resistance 6.1 / IS:11967

(Part-2/Sec-2-1989)

7. Tensile Strength & Elongation of -do-

Conductor
8. Dielectric Strength Table-2 of IS:11967
(Pt-2/sec-2) -1985
9. Bending Radius Test 6.1 / IS:11967
(Part-2/Sec-2-1989)

3.04.02 ROUTINE TESTS:

The HF Co-axial cable and telephone cables shall be subjected to at manufacturer’s works before
despatch to the following routine/acceptance test on each uNIB as per relevant standards in the
presence of purchaser’s inspecting officer/representative.

[Link] ROUTINE/ACCEPTANCE TESTS FOR HF CO-AXIAL CABLE

Routine /acceptance tests for HF Coaxial Cable as per IS: 11967 part-2/sec.-1 /1989 with latest
amendments & IS 5026- 1987 & PO specification / GTP

S. No. Nature of Test Clause No.

1 Conductor inner AS per IS 11967 part-2/sec.-1/1989

(a) Material with latest amendments & IS 5026-
(b) Diameter 1987 & PO specification / GTP
(c) No. of Strand
(d) Conductor resistance at 20 Deg C
(e) Tensile Strength
(f) Elongation
 2 Dielectric
(a) Material
(b) PE Semi solid, Air spaces
(c) Diameter
3 Copper Braiding Outer Conductor
(a) Diameter of wire
(b) Coverage
4 PVC inner Sheathing
(a) Diameter over inner sheath
5 Taping (Non Hydroscopic Layer)
(a) Material
(b) Thickness
6 Armouring
(a) Material
(b) Wire Diameter
(c) Coverage
7 PVC Outer Sheathing
(a) Type of material
(b) Diameter
(c) Color
8 Electrical Test
(a) Diameter Electric Strength
(b) Insulation resistance M. Ohm (Min.)
(c)) Nominal Capacitance at KHZ
(Nom.)
(d) Impedance
(e) Attenuation (insertion test)
At 10KHz
At 60KHz
At 300KHz
At 500KHz
9 Packing
10 Embossing
11 Visual Inspection
12 Continuity test (For all drums)
(a) Conductor
(b) Shield

3.04.03 INSPECTION:

The inspection of the equipments shall be carried out by the purchaser's representatives in accordance
to the relevant standards.

(i) The Purchaser shall have access at all times to the works and all other places of manufacture, where
the equipments ar being manufactured and the Supplier shall provide all facilities for unrestricted
inspection of the Supplier's works, raw materials, manufacture of the material and for conducting
necessary tests at any stage.
(ii) The Supplier shall keep the Purchaser informed in advance about the manufacturing programme
so that arrangementscould be made for inspection.
(iii) No equipments shall be despatched from its point of manufacture unless the material has been
satisfactorily inspected, tested and cleared.
(iv) Inspection and acceptance of any quantity of equipment shall in no way relieve the Supplier from
his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification and shall not prevent
subsequent rejection if such equipment is later found to be defective.
(v) The purchaser reserves the right to insist for wiBNessing the acceptance / routine tests of brought
out items.

3.04.04 VERIFICATION OF LENGTH:

The supplier/manufacturer shall provide all adequate facilities at his works for inspection of at least
two numbers of cable drums or five percent of the cable drums offered for inspection, whichever is
higher, selected at random by the authorized representative of the purchaser for checking/verification
of cable length /manufacturing defects by transferring the cable from one drum to the another empty
drum and at the same time measuring the length of the cable so transferred by means of the meter.
The difference in the average length thus obtained from the declared length by the supplier in the
packing list shall be applied to all the drums if the cable is found short during checking the sample
lot(s).

3.04.05 GUARANTEED & OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

Guaranteed and other technical particulars as called for in schedule-GTP attached to this specification
shall be furnished with the bid. Any additional information considered necessary by the bidder
with a view of highlight the various technical aspects of his offer may also be supplied on a separate
sheet. Technical particulars which are subject to guarantee shall be clearly marked.
Any bid lacking in the requisite guaranteed technical particulars, as called for, may be rejected.

3.04.06 DEPARTURE FROM SPECIFICATION:

Any departure from specification shall be clearly brought out in the bid along with detailed justification.
 Schedule-GTP

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 75 OHMS

(UNBALANCED) H.F. CO-AXIAL CABLE WITH POLYETHYLENE (SEMI-
SOLID, AIR-SPACED) INSULATION

S. PARTICULARS RVPN
No. REQUIREMENT
1 Type : 75 Ohms H.F. Co-
axial cable
2 Confirmation to IS: 11967 (Part 2/Sec-1)-1989: To be furnished by
Yes/No and IS: 5026-1987 or latest amendment bidder
thereof.
3 Continuity :
(a) Conductor (Continuous or not) -do-
(b) Shield (Continuous or not) -do-

4 Spark test
(a) Dielectric 6000V (RMS)
(b) Sheath 3000V (RMS)
5 Voltage withstanding (Dielectric strength) 4500V (RMS)

6 Insulation Resistance 10000MegaOhms/Km

7 Nominal Capacitance at 1KHz 54pF /M (Nominal)

8 Attenuation (Insertion less)

At 10KHz 1.2dB/Km
At 60KHz 1.8dB/Km
At 300KHz 3.9dB/Km
At 500KHz 5.5dB/Km
9 Characteristic Impedance 75 Ohm +/- 10%

10 Inner Conductor
(a) Solid plain hard drawn copper (Yes/No) Hard drawn copper
(b) Diameter 1.22 (+/- 0.03 mm)
11 Dielectric :
(a) Polyethylene, low density type, MFI2 To be furnished by
(Yes/No) bidder
------------do-----------
(b) Polyethylene, Semi-solid, Air-spaces) 5.30 mm +/- 0.15
(Yes/No) mm
(c) Diameter Type A-3
(d) Dielectric core type
12 Outer Conductor
(a) Single braid (Yes/No) To be furnished by
(b) 0.2 mm tinned copper wire (Yes/No) bidder
(c) Minimum coverage 90% (Yes/No) ------------do-----------
------------do-----------
13 P.V.C. Sheath :
(a) Type Type-2
(b) Diameter 8.00mm (+/-
0.25mm)
14 Non Hygroscopic layer : Type-K
(a) Type To be furnished by
(b) Diameter bidder
15 Armour :
(a) Galvanized Steel Wire braiding (Yes/No) ------------do-----------
(b) Wire dia. 0.3 mm (Yes/No) ------------do-----------
(c) Minimum coverage 70% (Yes/No) ------------do-----------
16 Jacket :
(a) Type Type-2
(b) Diameter 12.5 mm( +/-0.5 mm)
(c) Colour Blue
17 Maximum operating voltage (Continuous 1.5KV (RMS)
working voltage)
18 Maximum operating Frequency 500KHz

19 Nominal power rating 150Watt ( Nominal)

20 Maximum operating temp. range (-)15 Deg C to (+ ) 85

Deg. C
21 Maximum Conductor Resistance at 20 Deg. C 16 Ohms/Km

22 Tensile strength of conductor 460N/Sq. mm

23 Min. Elongation of the conductor 1%

24 Min Bending radius 12 times of diameter

of cable
25 Weight of cable 200g/m

26 Marking To be furnished by
bidder
27 Workman ship ------------do-----------

28 Net weight of cable in one drum for 500mtrs ------------do-----------

length
29 Tare weight of empty drum ------------do-----------

30 Gross weight of the drum ------------do-----------

31 Dimension of the drum :

(a) Flange diameter (mm) ------------do-----------
(b) Barrel diameter (mm) ------------do-----------
(c) Transverse (mm) ------------do-----------
(d) Thickness of flange (mm) ------------do-----------
(e) Material ------------do-----------
 (Signature)

Name & Designation with seal of

the bidder.
 VOLUME-II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 40W SINGLE CHANNEL (SINGLE SIDEBAND

SUPPRESSED CARRIER) PLCC CARRIER SET SUITABLE FOR SPEECH AND DATA
TRANSMISSION WITH FOUR WIRE EXPRESS TELEPHONE SETS WITH REMOTE
SUBSCRIBER FACILITY AND EMERGENCY CALLING SET WITH PROTECTION COUPLER
HAVING FOUR COMMANDS AND WITHOUT PROTECTION COUPLER

3.0 SCOPE :

This specification covers design, manufacture, assembly, inspection & testing of PLCC terminal &
Protection coupler at manufacturers works before despatch, suitable packing, supply and delivery anywhere
in Rajasthan by road.

The PLCC system /equipment shall be used for speech, protection and control signals, SCADA,
computer data traffic and fax messages etc. PLC terminals shall be fully coordinated to match with the
specific requirements of high speed of transmission , security, reliability and efficient operation of
protection channel alongwith carrier terminal. Bidder shall ensure complete foolproof coordination of the
PLC and protection equipment. It shall therefore be necessary to have a provision of mounting protection
coupler in the same rack of PLC terminal without any mismatch or necessity of any wiring or any
interconnecting unit .

3.1 STANDARDS :

[Link]. Standards Title

1. IS:9482/1980 Characteristics values of inputs and outputsof single
side band PLC terminals.
2. IS:10706/1983 Methods of tests for single side band PLC
terminals.
3. IEC-834-1(PT-I&II) IEC for Performance and testing of tele-protection
equipment of power system.
4. IEC-495/1993 IEC for tests for PLC terminals.

The equipment conforming to other internationally recognised standards which ensure quality equal to
or better than the Indian Standards mentioned above shall also be acceptable. In case the tenderer wish to
offer equipment conforming to other standards they shall furnish an English translation of relevant
standards along-with salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the specific standards.

3.2 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :

The equipment to be supplied under the specification shall be suitable forsatisfactory operation
under the following tropical humid conditions :-

1) Max. ambient Air Temperature 50 Deg.C.

2) Max. daily average ambient temperature 45 Deg C
3) Max. yearly weighted ambient Temperature 35 Deg C
4) Minimum ambient Air Temperature (-) 5 Deg.C.
5) Maximum relative humidity(%). 90 %
6) Minimum relative humidity(%). 10 %
7) Height above main sea level. Less than 1000 meters
8) Dust storms are liable to occur during the period March to July
9) Average No. of thunder storm days/annum. 40 days
10) Average annual rainfall(mm). 10 to 100cm (depending upon area)
11) Average No. of months of tropical monsoon conditions. 4 months
12) Seismic level horizontal acceleration 0.3g
13) Degree of Pollution Heavy
14) Intensity of solar radiation 1.0 kW/Sq.M
15) Max. Wind load 195kg/Sq.M

1
3.3 MANUFACTURER PRACTICE :

i) Special attention be provided to the design, arrangement and assembly of equipment to ensure
ease of maintenance and replacement of parts/assembly.

ii) All material used in the construction of the equipment shall be originally new and unused and
will comply with the standards and codes specified above and shall be selected from the best available
considering strength, durability and best engineering practice, it will not deteriorate or distort under the
prevailing extremes of atmosphere conditions. The workmanship and design shall be in accordance with
the best engineering practice and shall be such as have been proved suitable for the intender purpose
and for giving satisfactory performance under the prevailing climatic conditions and proposed system of
supply, liberal factors of safety shall be used through out the design and special consideration shall be
given on parts subject to alternating stresses or shocks or most severe operating conditions.

3.4 MINOR ACCESSORIES FITTINGS :

The contractor shall supply all such minor accessories, fittings, appratus required for the completion of
the supply which have not been specifically mentioned in this specification or tender offer but which are
usual or necessary for the equipment.

3.5 SPARE PARTS :

The tenderers shall quote the FIRM Prices of all mandatory spare parts (Modules) required for 5 year
satisfactory operation of terminals & couplers. These offered prices should be valid for a period of five years
from the date of opening of price bid. RVPN at his discretion may procure these spares at any time & in
any quantity during the validity period of five years.

3.6 PRACTICAL TRAINING :

The successful tenderer have to arrange practical training for 5-6 Engineers of the RVPN free of cost
for a duration as deemed appropriate by the bidder so as to acquainted them with the operation /
maintenance requirements of the equipment.

DETAILS OF EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:

3.7(A) POWER LINE CARRIER COMMUNICATION TERMINALS :

3.7.1 SCOPE :
(a) The PLCC equipment shall be suitable for transmission of, speech, data protection, fax
message etc. The PLC terminals shall use Amplitude modulation with suppressed carrier, single side
band, multipurpose, 4 KHz and shall be site programmable for audio frequency, carrier frequency, pilot
frequency and transit band pass filters. The equipment shall be suitable for duplex working and shall use
the latest technology using Digital Signal Processor. The PLC terminal shall have remote subscriber
facility and loop testing facilities.

b) The PLCC terminal shall have common AF bus so that protection coupler, VFT equipment
can be inserted in reserve slots of PLC terminal in future without any necessity of wiring or any
intermediate unit.

c) The PLCC terminal shall conform to the latest IEC 495/1993. The type test report
conforming to this shall be enclosed alongwith the offer. The equipment shall conform to the Voltage
withstand and electromagnetic compatibility test alongwith other prescribed tests as per latest IEC 495
standards. The type test report conforming to this conducted in NABL/ILAC-MRA accredited Lab.
shall be enclosed alongwith the offer.

3.7.2 The PLCC terminals shall confirm to the following electrical characteristics. These
characteristics referred to single side band PLCC terminals.

1) Mode of transmission. Single side band with suppressed carrier.

2) High frequency range. 50 KHz to 500 KHz site programmable.

2
 3) Nominal carrier frequency band 4
KHz.
4) Effectively transmitted 300 to 2000 Hz.
speech freq. band.
5) Effectively transmitted Suitable for transmitting data at a data
signal freq. band for signaling rate of 50,200,300,600,1200 baud
transmission of data, as per CCITT standards.
carrier protection and
for other signals.

6) NOMINAL IMPEDANCE :
a) Carrier freq. side. The nominal impedance at the frequency
output shall be 75 Ohms or 125 Ohms
unbalanced or 150 Ohms (balanced).

b) Voice freq. side. The speech & signal output circuits shall
be balanced & have a nominal impedence of 600
Ohms

7) Nominal carrier power. Programmable from 20 to 40 [Link] above

power should be peak envelope power
available at the line output terminals at a
resistive load equal to the nominal load.
impedance for single tone keying Tenderer
should furnish justification if higher
/lower power is recommended.
8) Stability of carrier +/- 5Hz.
freq. from its nominal value.

9) Relative levels (VF side):

a) 4-wire transmit. 0 dBr to - 17 dBr.

b) 4-wire receive - 3.5 dBr to + 8 dBr.
c) 2-wire transmit. 0 dBr.
d) 2-wire receive. -7 dBr.
10) Level regulation
Automatic gain control shall be (Automatic
gain control) that
AF output should remain constant
within +/- 0.5 dB for a +14/-26 dB
variation in the RF input level.
11) Return loss
a) The return loss within the nominal carrier frequency band in
the transmit direction shall not be less than 12 dB.

b) The return loss within the effectively transmitted freq.

band shall not be less than 12 dB.

12) Telephone signalling The pulse distortion of the

channel. signalling channel
when operated at signalling
speed of 10 impulses per
second and with a mark to
space ratio of
1 2
40/60 or 33- / 66- shall
3 3
not exceed 3 ms for a pair of
PLCC terminals in back to back
operation

3
 13) Permissible limits for the variation of overall loss attenuation of
the speech channels relative to 800 Hz for back to back operation of
one pair of terminal without compander.
.
300-400 Hz - 0.87 dB to + 3 dB
400-600 Hz - 0.87 dB to + 1.74 dB
600-1200 Hz - 0.87 dB to + 0.87 dB
1200-1600 Hz - 0.87 dB to + 1.74 dB
1600-2000 Hz - 0.87 dB to + 3 Db

14) Service conditions:

a) Supply voltage with battery operation.
48 V DC +20% -10%
b) Carrier set should have `miniature circuit breaker' to
provide safeguard against `over current', `Over voltage' etc.
separate fuses for protection against these hazards shall not
be preferred.
c) All the generated frequencies in the carrier set viz
HF, IF & AF should be derived from a single high frequency
crystal to ensure stability.
d) The procured PLCC terminals shall be operated with
SLDC scheme to transmit various data to SLDC. At some places the
data will be transmitted by repeating at 3 to 4 stations. Thus
to ensure correct data transmission, the difference between the
transmit and receive frequency in one link should be 0 (Zero).
The bidder should explain in detail as to how this shall be
achieved in the carrier sets offered by him and enclose a
certificate of test conducted to check difference between
transmit and receive frequency to be zero under all climatic
conditions as per clause 3.2.

3.8 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS IN THE DESIGN OF THE PLCC TERMINAL:

The carrier terminal should be of latest design, technique employing integrated circuits and CMOS
technique so as to have minimum power consumption. The terminal should be provided with built-in
indicating instrument/ device to facilitate checking of important voltage and current values in different parts
of the PLC terminal. All test points in the PLC terminal should be easily accessible and be provided in the
front of each module. Wiring on the rear side of each stage of the carrier set should have 'loop test facility'
to test the local reciever/ transmitter without the help of remote end carrier set. This facility should be
explained in detail by the bidder. Protection of important transistors/ IC /Components should be provided
in all important circuits and the protection media should be clearly explained with the help of circuit
drawings. The carrier set should also be provided with suitable supervision and alarm facilities.

3.8.1 CARRIER TRANSMITTER RECEIVER SETS :

a) The carrier transmitter and receiver set shall be contained in a heavy gauge steel in door cabinet
made of 2mm/14 SWG MS sheet having robust construction suitable for floor mounting. Suitable entry
holes for cables shall be provided at the bottom of the cabinet. Necessary mounting channel shall also
be provided. The components shall be liberally rated. The bidder will mention the rating of components
to prevent the overheating of the above components during normal operation of the carrier sets under
ambient temperature specified in Clause 3.2(climatic condition) of this specification. For all circuits
containing transistors, temperature compensation shall be adopted to give a constant output without any
frequency variation at the desired ambient temperature specified in [Link] tenderer shall
clearly state the details of compensation adopted in the above circuits. Silicon type transistors
shall preferably be used in theconstruction which is easily available in market in India.

b) The power transformers, rectifiers and choke utilised in the main power supply unit shall be
liberally rated (the rating be mentioned). Keeping in view the high ambient temperatures prevailing in
4
Rajasthan. The output stage shall be designed to give output of 20/40 Watt(Minimum) and
necessary arrangements shall be made to cool the output stage for preventing the transistors from over
heating. Any special cooling arrangement necessary for this shall be stated in the tender and shall form
part of the equipment. The set shall be equipped with commercial type of transistors normal to trade,
which shall be of special long life and be operated at partial loads.

c) The cabinet shall be properly cleaned and spray painted with two coats of synthetic enamel
paint. Exterior of the cabinet shall be painted with smoke Grey glossy finish and shall confirm to a
colour shade of 693 of ISS. Interior of the cabinet shall be painted with white enamel paint with glossy
finish. All the panels shall be earthed with the switchyard earthings.

d) All cabinets having PLC terminal shall be provided with lamps of sufficient wattage for interior
illumination with switch.

e) A name plate shall be provided on the front door of each cabinet indicating channel function,
transmitter frequency and direction etc.

f) Each PLC terminal for speech as well as for protection purpose shall be provided with a plug in
type service telephone(handset) and buzzer. The handset shall be suitable for mounting at a suitable
location provided in the cabinet itself and shall be used for speech communication on point to point
basis.

g) The PLC terminal shall be provided with remote subscriber facility with telephone instruments.

h) The carrier set shall be of single side band type with amplitude modulation principle and
comprise individual chasis for transmitter, receiver, various filters, call signal generator, receiver hybrid
unit, electronic four wire through connecting device, power supply unit etc. which shall preferably of
the drawout or swinging type to facilitateeasy inspection and maintenance.

3.8.2 RECEIVER SETS :

a) The receiver shall have 2 wire /4 wire interface. The nominal output level for 2 wire should be -
7dBr across 600 Ohms balanced. It shall be possible to adjust this level from
-16dBr to + 6dBr.

b) The nominal output level for 4 wire shall be - 3.5dBr across 600 Ohms balanced and shall be
adjustable from -20dBr to +10dBr.

c) The near and far end cross talk should be less than and equal to -50 dBm Op. The group delay
distortion shall conform to IEC 495.

d) The compander shall be of built in function and shall have the characteristics as per ITU - TG162.

e) Automatic gain control shall be provided so that AF output should remain constant within
±0.5dB for a +14/-26dB variation in the RF input level.

f) The local loop test facility shall be provided so that the equipment can be tested locally. The remote
loop test facility shall be provided so that equalisation can be done at site from one end by looping
back the signal at the other end without deputing an engineer at other end.

g) The receiver shall be sufficiently sensitive to provide full audio frequency power output with a
minimum input carrier frequency signal when normally modulated. The receiver shall be provided with
self input adjusting attenuation and automatic gain control circuits which will hold the audio frequency
output level variation in limit of ± 0.5 dB within +14/-26dB/RF level. The provision shall also be
5
made to accommodate change in the input level due to change from phase to phase operation to phase
to ground operation. The level of automatic control shall be stated in the tender together with a
description of the pilot equipment employed.

3.8.3 (a) The receiver input circuit shall comprise of band pass filter giving discrimination against all
unwanted frequencies including those of the adjacent carrier transmitter. A curve showing the selectivity
of the receiver shall be included with the tender. The audio output speech circuit will be adjustable and
capable of delivering an audio signal upto atleast -7 dBr across 600 Ohms load impedance balanced to
ground. Provision shall be made in the transmitter and receiver for compander operation on the speech
portion of the channel, provision shall be made to disconnect them automatically in case of a through
dialling at the intermediate station. Provision shall be made for blocking of unwanted frequency for data
transmission in the band more than 2000 C/s.

b) The carrier set shall be suitable for operation with private automatic exchange. Any incoming call shall be
capable of being diverted to the desired subscriber through the exchange, and any of the subscriber
connected to the exchange, shall be able to contact the required station through the dialling units
provided in the carrier sets.

3.8.4 A seperate telephone set shall be provided in the carrier set for testing purpose. Each PLC
terminal will be supplied with 4 mm to 2 mm adopters for facilitating testing.

3.8.5 Sub-divisions of the audio frequency band of the channels:-

Filters shall be provided in the carrier sets to provide the following Sub-divisions ofthe band.

a) 300 C/S to 2000 C/S for speech.

b) 2000 C/S and above for transmission of data, tele-printing and remote control signals. The
standard channel frequencies shall be spaced according to CCITT standards. It shall be possible to
accommodate at-least 5 channels of 240 bits/[Link] the above spectrum.

c) A signalling tone for the telephone circuit should be provided on the upper side of the control
and telemetering channel viz -3600 C/S.

3.9 TRANSMITTER CHARACTERISTICS :

i) Amplitude modulated single side band carrier system shall be adopted, the output power measured
with a matching resistive load shall be 20/40 Watts in single channel carrier set. For the Speech section
of the channel, max. working modulation of the carrier shall be obtainable with an audio input level of
atleast -17dBr across 600 Ohms balanced to ground input terminal. Attenuators shall be included to
accept working input level upto +8 dBr. A built in meter shall be provided to enable checking of the
working conditions of transistors used in the set.

ii) Oscillators used may either be of crystal controlled or magnetostriection type, Stability of the
oscillator shall not be worse than ±20 cycle for a change in temperature of ±20 Deg.C. and voltage
variation of ±10%. The tenderer shall clearly give the details of temperature compensation adopted
in the above circuit.

iii) The overall distortion of the channel to 400 cycles tone with control set to accept, max. input level
and to deliver max. output level shall not exceed 5%.

iv) The transmitter shall have 2 wire /4 wire interface. The nominal level for 2 wire shall be 0dBr
across 600 Ohms balanced impedance. The input range shall be adjustablefrom -16dBr to +6dBr.

v) Nominal input level for 4 wire should be -3.5dBr across 600 Ohms balanced impedance. The input
level range shall be adjustable from -16dBr to +6dBr.

6
 All the PLCC terminals shall be equipped for transit band pass filter so as to bypass the data signals at
the intermediate stations. The transit band pass filter should be suitable for programming at site so that the
required pass band can be selected at site.

3.10 [Link] SUPERVISION :

The D.C. voltage relating to the output side of the transmitter and receiver shall be continuously
supervised and in case the mains voltage fails or [Link] fails or drops below the pre-determined value
an alarm shall be available in the control panel. Necessary auxiliary relay required shall be incorporated in
the cabinet.

3.11 SIGNAL SUPERVISION :

a) Provisions shall be made to supervise audio carrier frequency signal at the receiving station. If
the signal falls below the predetermined value due to reduced transistor emissions or due to failure of
mains supply voltage alarm shall be available at the control panel.

b) The supervision facility shall be provided for supervising the PLC terminal so that it can
automatically check the functioning of the PLC terminal and incase of any failure of module or any
other condition affecting the correct operation of individual components shall be displayed on the front
panel with suitable error code. Alarm shall be given underfollowing conditions :-

i) Loss of transmitter signal

ii) Loss of receiver signal
iii) Low SNR in speech and telecontrol channels
iv) Loss of auxiliary supply
v) Excessive impulse interference.

3.12 EMERGENCY CALL ARRANGEMENT :

Emergency call sets shall be provided in all terminals of the carrier link to provide communication
between each station in case the automatic dialling system breaks down. It shall be possible by pressing
button in the telephone set, the station at the other end is automatically connected and call signal is given to
the other station. The circuit shall be so arranged that the emergency set can interrupt existing conversation.
The emergency set may be connected at any time. The emergency set shall be supplied as normal table
model.

3.13 CO-ORDINATION WITH THE EXISTING EQUIPMENT :

The offered carrier set should also function with existing ABB / WS / BPL / PUNCOM make carrier
terminals for extending the express link by making back to back connection

3.14 FACILITIES :
i) Built in indicating instruments should be easily accessible and clearly marked as test points at all
important places in the circuit. The terminals should be brought onfront panel to facilitate checking
of working condition with the aid of test oscillator and Audio test equipment for quick test and level
adjustment.

ii) Loop test facility of the local transmitter and receiver should be possible.

iii) Indication & alarms for all type of fault in equipment should be provided.

iv) Provision of protective device in the form of Zener diode or surge suppressor in order to
eliminate the surge transfer through coupling device in the connection path of HF cable. Automatic
protection with monitoring facilities against over current under voltage and over voltage in all
important circuit. Suitable arrangements of protection of immediate switching off for power supply
unit in the event of short circuitat its output be provided to avoid any damage of the equipment.
7
v) Change over provision of termination of PLCC terminal and dummy load should be provided.

vi) Terminal blocks for power supply telephone cable and two HF cable connector (In parellel)
should be provided.

vii) Suitable cable glands for entry of cable shall be provided.

viii) Position of each module may be marked at the back side of the chasis also.

ix) The equipment shall be constructed such that operational reliability of protection channels may
be checked over the carrier link by means of local and remote loop test. It shall be possible to carry out
the above test from either end of the carrier link. During healthy condition of the transmission line the
loop test shall not initiate a tripping command. In the event of a system fault while loop test is in
progress protection signal shall over ride the test signal. The test procedure must not initiate tripping
command. The remote loop test shall be initiated either automatically after a particular time interval or
manualy by means of test buttons.

3.15 PROTECTION COUPLER :

3.15.1 The bidder shall offer voice frequency transmission equipment which shall work on frequency
shift or coded signal principle for transmission / reception of protection signals. The equipment is to be
used together with the PLC equipment. The equipmentshall be suitable for permissive, blocking signals
as well as direct trip signal.

The equipment shall be designed in accordance with IEC834-I&II. The type test report conforming
to this shall be enclosed alongwith the bid.

The protection coupler shall be suitable for transmission/reception of four commands and it shall
be possible to programme them as two coded and two uncoded commands.

Irrespective of whether coded or uncoded transmission the trip signal frequency should fall within
the speech band without any necessity of separate band for protection commands. Whenever the protection
coupler receives the command, it shall disconnect the speech. This interruption will continue for a short
period of the teleprotection command after which the normal operation of the carrier equipment will be
restored. During transmission of tele protection signals or when a fault has been detected by the protective
relays the entire output power of the carrier will be made available for transmission of teleprotection
signals. Bidder shall specify the transmitting frequenciesfor uncoded as well as coded transmission.

The total transmission time for teleprotection signals shall not exceed 20 ms for permissive trip and
30 ms for direct trip.

The protection coupler shall use microprocessor based technique with digital signal processing to
meet the stringent requirements for commands transmission over PLC links even under adverse channel
conditions. The Digital Counters/suitable devices shall be provided (inside the cabinet of Carrier set) for
counting of transmitted & received commands.

3.15.2 The tenderer shall offer suitable VFT and interface equipment for this. The equipment
offered shall be co-ordinated with the distance relays, phase comparison scheme.
Directional/comparison relays shall be purchased separately. The details of the protective scheme
employed/ being employed shall be furnished to the successful tenderer and the responsibility of co-
ordination for a satisfactory performance rests with him. The equipment offered for carrier protection
shall have immunity against impulse type of noise which is quite common in the power system. The
equipment shall be complete with built in counters for counting number of trip commands sent and and
number of trip commands received.

8
3.15.3 The equipment to be provided under this section is required to initiate or receive a tripping
signal which will enerzise the trip coil of selected breaker for single pole tripping and reclosing or three
pole releasing, the appropriate type of tripping being selected by the distance relays and auto reclosing
relays incorporated in the control equipment.

3.15.4 (a) The transfer trip channel shall provide the transmission path for either trip or guard for
blocking signal by transmitting one or the other of two possible tone but never both. A signal to noise
ratio detector associated with the logic circuits shall be provided, so that when a high signal to noise
conditions exist in the system, the trip and guard output are blocked and an annunciations given for
this. The circuit breaker shallbe prevented from tripping under these conditions, the equipment shall be
so arranged that both tripping and guard signals be present or absent in the channel as a result of noise
or a break in transmission line and the equipment is held in guard or blocking conditon, as the case may
be. An alarm shall be given by a set of contact provided in circuit for indicating the blocking condition.

b) The trip signal shall be initiated by a mercury vetted relay or solid state gate associated with the
trip circuit of the line breaker. The contacts of this relay shall key the transfer trip transmitter initiating the
shift frequency of its transmitted tone from guard to trip frequency. On reception of the trip tone at the
remote terminal a relay will be energised, closing three contacts. These contacts in conjuction with the local
linerelaying equipment will trip the proper breaker. Other method of initiating tripping at the remote end
may be included by the tenderer in his tender, But the same shall provide the facilities mentioned above.

3.15.5 The tenderer shall offer variable frequency transmission equipment for the protection signal.
During transmission of line protection signals or when the fault has been located by the protective
relays, speech channel in the carrier set and other unimportant supper imposed signals shall be
disconnected and the entire power of the carrier set will be made available for transmission of line
protection signals. The carrier protection channel shall be provided in such a manner that the time
interval that elapses between the instant command is received from protection relays from the
transmitting side and the time this command is passed to the protection relays at the distance side shall
be less than 20 milli seconds.

3.15.6 The carrier protection equipment shall be offered for transmission of single or double circuit
protection depending on whether the HT line is single circuit or double circuit. The protection
equipment shall be provided with interconnection unit suitable for connection to the protective relays. It
should be possible to test operational reliability of the protection channel over the carrier link. It should
be possible to test the protection link from either of the two ends. During healthy conditions of the
transmission line this test procedure must not initiate any tripping command.

3.15.7 Due to acute shortage of PLCC frequency that can be made available for new channels it
shall be preferable if the speech channels and the line protection signals are arranged in such a manner
that the superimposed signalling frequency band is kept free for telemetering and teleprinting. In other
words, transmission of line protection signal should be placed within the speech band of equipment but
not in superimposed signalling band.

3.15.8 The equipment offered should not only be insensitive to corona noise which exists on high
tension lines but also against impluse type of noise which is created by operation of circuit breakers,
isolators, speech and electrical surges. Bidders shall explain clearly in their bids to how their equipment
has been rendered insensitive to corona noise and impluse type of noise. The equipment shall be
uneffected by spurious tripping signals .

3.16 TRANSFER TRIP TRANSMITTER :

The transfer trip transmitter shall operate on the frequency shift principle and the channels shall
be spared in the frequency band 2200 c/s to 3400 c/s or 300 to 2000 c/s as the case may be such that
there is no significant mutual interference between channels. The transmitter shall have an output amplifier
followed by filter network to ensure a minimum harmonic content and to provide a high impedance to
any adjacent channel.

3.17 TRANSFER TRIP RECEIVER :

9
 The transfer trip receiver shall operate in conjuction with the transfer triptransmitter as described in
this section. The receiver shall be sufficiently sensitive to accept and maintain proper operation,
performance with an input of 40dBm for full limiting. The line attenuation for the signals shall be such
that the average signal to noise ratio of the receiver should be more than 20 dB during fault conditions
and the AVC circuit shall be designed for obtaining this value. The transfer trip receiver shall have an
associated output relay with three separate contacts which shall close/open in response to the receiver
output signal. These contacts will each be required to carry trip current of approx.10 Amps. but not to
break.

3.18 SUPERVISORY DEVICE :

A continuous carrier supervision at the receiving end and the sending ends shall be incorporated
for the carrier c h a n n e l s . As soon as the carrier level drops below a reliable transmission level the breaker
shall be prevented from tripping as a result of interference from impulse. The visual as wellas audible alarm
shall be available for this supervision.

Equipment better or similar to those indicated above may also be quoted by the tenderers giving full
details of the equipment.

3.19 TESTS & INSPECTION

3.19.1 TYPE TESTS : The following type tests should have been carried out on theCarrier Terminals
/ Protection Coupler offered:-

3.19.1.A LIST OF TYPE TESTS FOR CARRIER TERMINAL:-

S. No Test Reference as per IEC Reference as per

495:1993 IS9482-
1996
Carrier Frequency Side
1. Nominal Impedance return loss clause No. 5.2.2 clause No. 6.2.2
andtapping loss
2. Balance to ground clause No. 5.2.3 clause No. 6.2.3
3. Spurious emission clause No. 5..2.4 clause No. 6.2.4
4. Carrier frequency levels clause No. 5.2.5 clause No. 6.2.5
5. Frequency accuracy test clause No. 5.2.6 clause No. 6.2.6
Voice Frequency Side
6. Automatic gain control clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
7. Transmitter/Receiver clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
frequencydifference
8. Noise generated within terminal clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
9. Harmonic distortion clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
10. Selectivity clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
11. Nominal Impedance and return loss clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
12. Balance to ground clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
13. Telephone signaling clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
channel(Distortion)
14. Limiter action clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]

10
 15. Voltage withstand test Table-2 Table-2
(clause [Link])
Standard Equipment
16. Attenuation distortion clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
17. Group delay distortion clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
18. Near-end and far-end cross talk due to clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
signals channels above 3400 Hz

Speech-Plus Equipment
19. Attenuation distortion clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
20. Group delay distortion clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
21. Near-end and far-end cross talk due to clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
signals channels above 3400 Hz

Common requirements
22. AC power supply Clause 3.2.1 Clause 4.2.1
23. DC power supply Clause 3.2.2 Clause 4.2.2
24. Temperature and humidity Clause 3.1 Clause 4.1

11
 3.19.1.B LIST OF TYPE TESTS FOR PROTECTION COUPLER:
[Link] T Reference
e
s
t
1 General equipment interface tests: IEC 834-1
.

a. Insulation test Clause 20.1

b. Impulse withstand level test. Clause 20.2
c. High frequency disturbance level test. Clause 20.3
2 Specific power supply tests; IEC 834-1
. a. Tests for power supply variations. Clause 21.1
b. Tests for power supply interruptions. Clause 21.2
c. Tests for reflected noise. Clause 21.3
d. Test for Protection from reverse polarity. Clause 21.4

3 Tele-protection system performance tests: IEC 834-1

. a. Test for security. Clause 22.1
b. Test for dependability. Clause 22.2
c. Test for transmission time Clause 22.3
d. Test for interference by discrete frequency. Clause 22.4
e. Test for interference by frequency deviation. Clause 22.5

4 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY TEST (EMC TEST)

. a. High frequency disturbance test IEC-61000-4-12
b. Impulse withstand capability IEC-255-4
c. Electric fast Transient Immunity Test IEC-61000-4-4
d. Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test IEC-61000-4-2
e. Radiated Susceptibility test IEC-61000-4-3

3.19.2 ROUTINE TESTS

The PLCC terminals / protection couplers shall be subjected (at manufacturer’s works
before dispatch) to stipulated routine / acceptance tests as per following list.

3.19.2.A LIST OF ROUTINE & ACCEPTANCE TESTS FOR CARRIER TERMINAL:

[Link] Test Reference Reference

1. Verification of engineering information and RVPN specification/PO/GTP /
construction details Approveddrawings
2. Physical verification of items & components RVPN specification/PO/GTP /
fitted in the carrier terminals Approveddrawings
Carrier frequency side As per IEC 495 As per IS 9482-1996
3. Carrier frequency levels clause No. 5.2.5 clause No. 6.2.5
4. Frequency accuracy test clause No. 5.2.6 clause No. 6.2.6
Voice frequency side
5. Automatic gain control clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
6. Transmitter/Receiver frequency difference clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
7. Voltage withstand test Table-2 Table-2
(clause6.3.1.11)
Standard equipment

12
 8. Attenuation distortion clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]
Speech-Plus equipment
9. Attenuation distortion clause No. [Link] clause No. [Link]

10. Checking of features of the carrier terminals: RVPN specification /PO/ GTP/
a. Alarm indications (Major Alarm & Minor Approveddrawings
Alarm).
b. Switch operation (Express call button,
Local loop & remote loop).
c. Feature test (Remote subscriber
extension, Hot line/Express, Service
Telephone, Local loop, Remote loop).
d. Test points readings (Receive pilot,
Transmit Pilot, supply voltage DC,
800/1000 Hz Test Tone, Tx level data, Rx
level data).
11. Check making on rating plate of Carrier Purchase order, GTP & Specification
Terminal

3.19.2.B LIST OF ROUTINE & ACCEPTANCE TESTS FOR PROTECTION

COUPLER:

S. No. Test Reference as per

IEC 834-1
1. Verification of engineering information RVPN specification /PO
and construction details /GTP/Approved
drawings
2. Physical verification of items & RVPN specification /PO
components fitted in the carrier /GTP/Approved
terminals drawings
3. Insulation test Clause 20.1
4. Test for Protection from reverse polarity Clause 21.4
5. Test for transmission time Clause 22.3
6. Checking of alarm functions Clause 22.6
7. Testing of multi-command equipment Clause 22.7
8. Additional tests as per RVPN specification/GTP & clause
GTP/specifications. 22.8
9. Check marking on rating plate of Purchase order, GTP &
Protection coupler specifications

3.19.3 INSPECTION:

The inspection of the equipment shall be carried out by the purchaser's representatives in
accordance to the relevant standards.

(i) The Purchaser shall have access at all times to the works and all other places of manufacture,
where the equipment are being manufactured and the Supplier shall provide all facilities for
unrestricted inspection of the Supplier's works, raw materials, manufacture of the material and for
conducting necessary tests at any stage.

(ii) The Supplier shall keep the Purchaser informed in advance about the manufacturing programme
so that arrangements could be made for inspection.
13
(iii) No equipment shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the material has been
satisfactorily inspected, tested and cleared.

(iv) Inspection and acceptance of any quantity of equipment shall in no way relieve the Supplier
from his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification and shall not prevent
subsequent rejection if such equipment is later found to be defective.

(v) The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance / routine tests of
brought out items.

3.19.4 TESTS AT SITE :

The purchaser reserves the right to conduct all the tests on the equipment after arrival at site and the
Contractor shall guarantee test certificate figures under actual service conditions.

3.20 DRAWINGS, LITERATURE AND MANUALS :

In addition to any other drawings which the tenderer may like to submit to show the arrangement &
merits of the offered equipment. The following drawings shall be supplied with the tender.

(i) General installation lay out of PLCC equipment showing position of all associatedequipment.

(ii) Detailed dimensional drawings and descriptive literatures of all the associatedequipment separately.

(iii) Circuit wiring diagram & schematic diagram.

(iv) Literature/ pamphalates/ manuals of PLC scheme & its associated equipment.

Illustrative & descriptive literature of PLCC terminals & protection couplers shallalso be enclosed
with the tender.

3.21 PACKING & MARKING:

i) All PLCC equipment shall be packed in strong seasoned wooden crates to avoid handling
problem.

ii) The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough handling duringtransit, strong
at site and subsequent handling in the field.

iii) Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or dunnage or spacers shall be provided to prevent damage
or deformation during transit and handling.

iv) All packing cases shall be marked legibly with the appropriate caution symbol and correctly so
as to ensure safe arrival at their destination and avoid dispatched on account of faulty packing and faulty
or illegible markings stencilled on it in indelible ink. Whenever necessary, proper arrangement for
lifting, such as lifting hooks etc. shall be provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases
shall be supplied by supplier without any extra cost.

v) Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the following
information :
a) Name of the consignee.
b) Details of consignment.
c) Destination.
d) Total weight of consignment.
e) Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.
14
f) Handling & unpacking instruction.
g) Bill of material indicating contents of each package.

3.22 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

The bidders are required to furnish the quality assurance plan alongwith their bid, which is to be
followed by the supplier during manufacturing of the material/equipment.

The manufacturing Quality Plan (MQP) shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and
approval. Manufacturing Quality Plan(MQP) will detail out for all the material, components and
equipment, various tests/inspections to be carried out as per the requirement of purchaser
specification and standards mentioned therein and quality practices & procedure followed by
manufacturer’s/suppliers/sub-suppliers quality control organization, the relevant reference
documents and standards, acceptance norms, inspection documents raised etc. during all stages of
materials procurement, manufacture assembly and final testing/performance testing.

15
 Schedule-GTP
(i) Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 40W Single channel (single side band suppressed carrier)
PLCC carrier set with protection coupler (four commands), suitable for speech & data
transmission with four wire express telephone set with remote subscriber facility and emergency
calling set.

S. DESCRIPTION DESIRED : FURNISHED

NO . :BY TENDERER

1. NAME OF MANUFACTURER AND

COUNTRY. :
:
2. TYPE, MODEL, CATALOG NO. :
:
3. TYPE OF MODULATION. AMPLITUDE MODULATION :

:
:
4. MODE OF TRANSMISSION. SINGLE SIDE BAND :
WITH SUPPRESSED
CARRIER :
5. DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING(DSP) AVAILABLE? (Y/N):

6. CARRIER FREEQUENCY RANGE. :

A) OVERALL RANGE.50- 500 KHz :
B) PROGRAMABLE :
:
7. A) NOMINAL CARRIER FREQUENCY BAND 4 KHz :
IN EITHER DIRECTION OF :
TRANSMISSION. :
B) USEFUL AF BANDWIDTH. 300 TO 3480 Hz :
:
8. RETURN LOSS WITHIN THE NOMINAL > 12 dB :
CARRIER FREQUENCY BAND. - :
:
9. MAXIMUM LINE ATTENUATION. 60 dB :

[Link] NOISE LEVEL EFFECTIVE 35 TO 40 dB

:LINE ATTENUATION SHOULD NOT EXCEED. :
[Link] GAP BETWEEN CHANNEL OF :
SEVERAL ELEMENTS OPERATING IN :
PARALLEL ON A COMMON LINE.
A) TRANSMITTER TO ADJACENT > 8 KHz :
TRANSMITTER - :
B) TRANSMITTER TO ADJACENT > 4 KHz :
RECEIVER. - :
:
12. NOMINAL OUTPUT IMPEDANCE. 75 OR 125 OHMS :
UNBALANCED OR :
150 OHMS BALANCED
:
13. A) IS EQUIPMENT CONFORMS BIDDER TO SPECIFY :
THE IEC 495 STANDARDS. :
B) IF YES, WHETHER TYPE TEST :
REPORT CONFORMING TO THIS :
IS ENCLOSED. :
:
14. A) RANGE OF PROGRAMMING FOR 300-2000 Hz :
SPEECH
B) RANGE OF PROGRAMMING FOR DATA. 2280-3480 Hz :
15. ATTENUATION DISTORTION 300 TO 2000 KHz :
OF THE AF CHANNEL AS PER FIG 10 :
SPEECH BAND WITHOUT OF IEC 495 :
COMPANDER.

16
 GTP FOR POWER LINE CARRIER TERMINAL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S. DESCRIPTION DESIRED : FURNISHED
NO . : BY TENDERER
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16. A) CARRIER FREQUENCY :
STABILITY. ± 5 Hz :
B) HOW THE SYNCHRONISATION :
IS DONE BETWEEN BIDDER TO SPECIFY :
TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER, PLEASE DESCRIBE :
. :
17. PEAK ENVELOPE POWER UNDER PROGRAMMABLE FROM :
NOMINAL LOAD CONDITIONS 20W TO 40W :
AT COAXIAL TERMINAL.
:
18. DETAILS OF HF OSCILLATOR. BIDDER TO SPECIFY :
:
19. WHETHER REMOTE SUBSCRIBER BIDDER TO SPECIFY :
APPLICATION POSSIBLE ? :
:
20. WHETHER FREQUENCY USED FOR BIDDER TO SPECIFY :
SINGALING IS SAME AS PILOT :
FREQUENCY OR DIFFERENT ?

21. A) MAXIMUM DATA RATE 600 BAUD :

POSSIBLE WITH SPEECH :
BAND OF 2000 Hz. :
B) MAXIMUM DATA RATE POSSIBLE 1200 BAUD :
WITHOUT SPEECH BAND.
:
22. WHETHER PROTECTION COUPLER BIDDER TO SPECIFY :
CAN BE MOUNTED IN THE SAME
CABINET AS THAT OF PLC TERMINAL. :

23. WHETHER VFT EQUIPMENT FOR BIDDER TO SPECIFY :

DATA CAN BE MOUNTED IN :
THE SAME CABINET AS :
THAT OF PLC TERMINAL.
:
24. WHETHER MAXIMUM BAUD :
RATE FOR VFT EQUIPMENT BIDDER TO SPECIFY :
CAN GO UPTO 1200 BAUD :
WITH OR WITHOUT EXTERNAL MEDIUM. :

25. WHETHER COMPANDER. BIDDER TO SPECIFY :

IS PROVIDED.

26. AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL AF OUTPUT SHALL :

RANGE AT REGULATION. REMAIN WITHIN :
+ 0.5dB FOR A :
+14/-26dB :
VARIATION OF RF :
INPUT LEVEL :

17
 GTP FOR POWER LINE CARRIER TERMINAL

S. DESCRIPTION DESIRED : FURNISHED

NO. : BY
TENDERER

27. LEVEL OF SPURIOUS :

SIGNAL ATTENUATION. :
A) AT THE LIMITS OF THE BANDWITH > = 60dB :
B) 4.0 KHz FROM THE BAND LIMITS > 65 dB :
- :
C) 8.0 KHz FROM THE BAND LIMITS > 77 dB :
TRANSMITTER PATH : :
------------------ :
28. A) NOMINAL INPUT LEVEL :
FOR 2 WIRE. 0 dBR.600 OHMS BALANCED
B) INPUT LEVEL RANGE. -16dBR TO +6dBR :
:
29. A) NOMINAL INPUT LEVEL :
FOR 4 WIRE. -3.5 dBR,600 OHMS BALANCED
B) INPUT LEVEL RANGE. -16 dBR TO +6dBR :
:
30. BALANCED REFERRED TO GROUND. > 56 dB :
- :

31. TWO WIRE RETURN LOSS. > 14 dB :

- :
RECEIVER PATH : :
--------------- :
32.A) NOMINAL OUTPUT LEVEL :
FOR 2 WIRE. -7 dBR.600 OHMS BALANCED
B) OUTPUT LEVEL RANGE. -16dBR TO +6dBR :
:
33. A) NOMINAL OUTPUT LEVEL :
FOR 4 WIRE. -3.5 dBR.600 OHMS BALANCED

B) OUTPUT LEVEL RANGE. -19 dBR TO +9dBR :

:
[Link] AND FAR END CROSS :
TALK DUE TO TELEPHONE < -50 dBmOP :
SIGNALING CHANNEL IN A - :
PAIR OF PLC TERMINALS. :
:
35. PULSE DISTORTION. +\- 1.5 ms :
- :
36. GROUP DELAY DISTORTION. AS PER IEC 495 :
:
37. IMAGE REJECTION.
< 400 KHz : >80dB :
- :
< 500 KHz : >70dB :
- - :

38. SELECTIVITY.
i)0.3 KHz FROM THE BAND LIMITS
(WITH THE INJECTION OF 10dBmo) -55dBmo :
ii)4 KHz FROM THE BAND LIMITS
(WITH THE INJECTION OF 20dBmo) -55dBmo :

18
 GTP FOR POWER LINE CARRIER TERMINAL

S. DESCRIPTION DESIRED : FURNISHED

NO. : BY TENDERER

39. RF SENSITIVITY. AT 24 KHz : -38 dBm :

AT 496 KHz : -24 dBm :

40. ALARM SHOULD BE GIVEN :

UNDER FOLLOWING CONDITIONS :
a. LOSS OF TRANSMITTER SIGNAL. :
b. LOSS OF RECEIVER SIGNAL. :
c. LOW SNR IN SPEECH AND :
TELECONTROL CHANNELS. :
d. LOSS OF POWER SUPPLY :
:
41.A) HAVE YOU EVER CONDUCTED BIDDER TO SPECIFY :
COMPUTER STUDY FOR FREQUENCY :
PLANNING ? :
B) IF YES PLEASE ENCLOSE THE :
REPORT FOR A LINK CONDUCTED EARLIER.

42. POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS :

a. VOLTAGE. 48 V DC POSITIVE EARTH :
b. PERMISSIBLE VOLTAGE VARIATIONS. +20%, -
10% :
c. POWER CONSUMPTION, NORMAL :
OPERATION BIDDER TO SPECIFY :
:
43. INSTALLATION. BIDDER TO SPECIFY :
:
44. IS EQUIPMENT SUITABLE TO BIDDER TO SPECIFY :
WORK IN DUST LADEN ATMOSPHERE. :
:
45. WHETHR INTERIOR LAMPS WITH BIDDER TO SPECIFY :
DOOR SWITCH PROVIDED IN CABINETS. :
:
46. CABINET COLOR SHADE. As per ISS :
:
47. OVERALL DIMENSIONS. BIDDER TO SPECIFY :
:
48. WEIGHT. BIDDER TO SPECIFY :
:
49. EARTHING DETAILS OF PLC BIDDER TO SPECIFY :
CABINETS.
:
50. WHETHER TX/RX LOOP BACK BIDDER TO SPECIFY
FACILITY IS AVAILABLE FOR :
TESTING LOCALLY. :
:
51. CABINET [Link] SIZE THICKNESS 2MM/14 SWG :
& THICKNESS :

Signature(s)
with seal.

19
 GTP FOR PROTECTION COUPLER HAVING FOUR COMMANDS

S. DESCRIPTION | DESIRED |FURNISHED BY

NO. | |TENDERER

1. NAME OF MANUFACTURER AND PLACE. |

|
2. TYPE, MODEL, CATALOG NO. |
|
3. WHETHER CONFIRMS TO IEC:834 - I | BIDDER TO SPECIFY
|
4. IF YES WHETHER TYPE TEST REPORT IS|
ENCLOSED. |
5. WHETHER DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR | BIDDER TO SPECIFY
IS PROVIDED. |

6. [Link] CODED & UN-CODED COMMANDS | BIDDER TO SPECIFY

|
7. WHETHER PROGRAMMABLE FOR CODED AS | BIDDER TO SPECIFY
WELL AS UNCODED.
|
8. WHETHER THE TRIP SIGNAL FREQUENCY | BIDDER TO SPECIFY
LIES WITHIN THE SPEECH BAND FOR |
COADED AS WELL AS UNCODED COMMANDS|
WITHOUT ANY NECESSITY FOR SEPARATE|
BAND OVER SPEECH BAND. SPECIFY |
FREQUENCY FOR CODED AS WELL AS |
UNCODED COMMAND. |
|
9. NOMINAL TRANSMISSION TIME. |<20 MS FOR PERMISSIVE TRIP
|<30 MS FOR DIRECT TRIP

[Link] POWER SUPPLY IS DERIVED | BIDDER TO SPECIFY

FROM PLCC TERMINAL OR SEPARATE |
POWER SUPPLY IS REQUIRED. |
|
11. SPURIOUS SIGNAL SUPPRESSION. |
a) 0.3 - 5KHz | >36 dB
b) > 5KHz | >60 dB
|
12. GUARD SIGNAL FREQUENCY | SHALL BE SAME AS PILOT
(PROGRAMMABLE) | FREQUENCY

13. A) WHETHER REMOTE LOOP TEST IS | BIDDER TO SPECIFY

POSSIBLE UNDER WORKING
CONDITION |
|
B) WHETHER GENUINE TRIPPING | BIDDER TO SPECIFY
COMMAND IS ALWAYS GIVEN
PRIORITY OVER ALL TESTS

C) WHETHER TEST SIGNAL FREQUENCY | BIDDER TO SPECIFY

FALLS WITHIN THE SPEECH BAND. |
SPECIFY THE FREQUENCY. |

14. ALARMS SHOULD BE GENERATED UNDER |

FOLLOWING CONDITIONS |

20
 GTP FOR PROTECTION COUPLER

S. DESCRIPTION |DESIRED IN | FURNISHED BY

NO. |SPECIFICATION | TENDERER

A) GUARD SIGNAL LEVEL. |

B) SNR ALARM. |

C) LOOP TEST ERROR. |

D) CHECKSUM ERROR. |

E) TX SINGLE COMPONENT FAILURE. |

F) RX SINGLE COMPONENT FAILURE. |

|
15. FOLLOWING ALARM OUTPUTS SHOULD BE |
PROVIDED : |
A) 2 COMMON ALARM 250V DC, 150W. |YES

B) 1 TRANSMITER ALARM 250V DC,150W |YES

C) 1 RECEIVER ALARM 250V DC, 150W. |YES

|
16. WHETHER PROTECTION COUPLER IS |BIDDER TO SPECIFY
SUITABLE FOR INSERTING IN A RACK |
OF PLC TERMINAL IN FUTURE BY JUST |
INSERTION OF MODULES WITHOUT ANY |
NEED FOR WIRING BETWEEN PLC |
TERMINAL AND PROTECTION COUPLER. |
|
17. RATING FOR COMMAND INPUTS. |

a) METHOD OF TRIPPING |OPTOCOUPLER(CONTACT+BATTERY)

b) RATED BATTERY VOLTAGE |48V DC TO 250V DC

c) CONTACT BURDEN | <10 mA

d) OPERATING TIME |<750 micro sec.

|
18. RATING FOR COMMAND OUTPUT. |

a) SOLID STATE OUTPUT CONTACT |N/O BOUNCE FREE CONTACT

|SHOULD BE PROVIDED

b) TRIPPING COMMAND |250V DC,<[Link]/OFF ratio 1/3

c) CONTINUOUS COMMAND |250V DC, < 1A.

19. RATING FOR AUXILIARY OUTPUT. |NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT WITH

|250V DC, 10W SHOULD BE
|PROVIDED PER COMMAND OUTPUT.

20. COMMAND PROLONGATION (TRIP EXTENTION) |IN STEPS OF 5,20,100ms). (+/-

30%)

Signature(s)
with seal.

21
 822

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF OFFICE & MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENTS/ ITEMS

OFFICE & MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENTS / ITEMS

[Link]. Item Description

1. Furniture for Control Room building

i) Junior executive table with three drovers on right side One

Cup board left side with prelaminated decolam top 20mm
thick over painted M.S. Frame
( 4 ½ feet x 2½ feet x 2½ feet) )

ii) Control Desk Type Table for Control room accommodating

the Main and Redundant Computer System monitors,
Workstations, printer, Logger, Maintenance / Engineering
Terminal, telephone etc.(Size, Shape, Colour etc. to be got
approved from Owner)

iii)
14 gauge pipe, cane seat backing, teak wood with quality
cane.

iv) Five Leg Revolving Chair with arms

v) Steel Almirah of size 6½ feetx3 feet x 19 inch with four

shelves making five compartments in 18 guage with three
way locking system

vi) Steel Almirah (With Glass door) of size 6½ feetx3 feet x 19

inch with four shelves making five compartments in 18 guage
with three way locking system

vii) Minor Almirah of size 4½ feet x 30 inch x 17 inch with three

shelves making four compartments in 18 guage with three
waylocking system

viii) Steel rack of size 5 feet x 3 feet x 16 inches with six shelves
making five compartments (22 guage)

x) Steel stools of size 15 inch x 15 inch x 18 inch square pipe 16

guage

xi) Steel waste paper baskets of size 12 inch x 10 inch x 10 inch

xii) Short bench of 4 feet x 14 inch x 1 ½ inch with laminated top.

A. Refrigerator:
Supply of 210 Ltr capacity (Minimum), Single Door, 5 star rating Refrigerator. Digital Inverter
Compressor,Built in Stabilizer.

B. Microwave:
Part-27_solar Panels Page 2 of 22
 823

Supply of 20 Ltr capacity Conventional type Microwave - Oven.

C. Water cooler:
SITC of self contained drinking water cooler with energy efficient hermetic sealed type
compressor, non CFC refrigerant suitable for operation on 230V/1pH/50Hz ac supply. Full
stainless steel (S304) body and tank, stainless steel water tray, minimum two nos. faucets and
suitable drainage system complete in all respect
with 300mm height MS fabricated and painted platform, complete in all respect of the
following capacity. Cooling capacity 80 Ltr./Hr. and storage capacity 120 Ltrs.
Make:- Blue Star/USHA/VOLTAS/Sidwal.

D. RO water purifier:
SITC of RO water system with Filtration stage = particular filter Membrane life enhancer filter
- sediment filter - Pre carbon filter - RO Membrance filter - Post carbon filter, Input power
Rating - 230 V AC, 50 HZ, Percentage of Rejections TDS
- 90% or better having following features:
(a) Double purification by RO with ESS or latest technology with TDS indicator.
(b) Spin welded RO Membrane Housing to prevent tempering.
(c) Push fit components for leak proof performance.
(d) Fully automatic operation with auto start and auto off.
(e) SS/ABS construction for corrosion free lifespan.
(f) Equally suitable for water from all bore wells, overhead storage tanks, water tankers and
even municipal taps.
(g) RO Membrance Flushing - Auto Flush @ Every Start, Every Stop and every One Hour of
working for one minute. Complete in all respect with following capacity. Purification
capacity - 25 LPH, Duty Cycle 170-250 liters/day.
Make:- Kent/Eureka Forbes/Ion Exchange/Electrolux/Voltas.

E. Induction Cook Top.(1800 W minimum)

Type: Induction Cooktop

Worktop Material:Glass
Color: Black
Push Button Controls
F. Golf Cart.

Vehicle Capacity 6 SEATER

Vehicle Type Light Vehicle
Color White
Seating Capacity 6
Material STEEL + GRP
Drive Motor 48V AC Motor
Number Of Battery 6
Electrical System 48 V
Charger 48V
Steering RHS

Part-27_solar Panels Page 3 of 22

 824

Park Break Yes

Instrumentation Battery discharge
Indicator
G. Canopy with chairs
WATERPROOF: Should be water resistant PORTABLE: This canopy comes with a great
carry bag. The canopy frame is foldable so it can be easily carried to different places.
HEAVY DUTY FRAME: Alloy Steel, Powder coated iron frame
UTILITY: 2-3 people be comfortably seated inside.
Item Shape Square
Carry Bag.

Outdoor chair
Lightweight tubular steel frame folds open in a scissor style
Durable polyester canvas seat with wide armrests
Chair measures H85cm x W80cm x D50cm (approx.) and weighs 2.3kg with a max weight
capacity of 100kg.

Part-27_solar Panels Page 4 of 22

 825

General Specification for mobile (Battery operated manual push type)

Scissor lift
Maximum platform height : 11 meter to 12 meter
Loading capacity : 350 to 450 kg
Platform dimension : 2.1 meter (length) * 1 to 1.5 meter (width)
Overall weight : 1380 kg to 1600 kg
Lifting time : 80 to 90 seconds
Material of Scissor lift : Mild steel structure
Main features
Pointing control of lifting up and down.
Steel lifting arm in high strength with rectangle shape.
Working platform flooring shall be anti-skid flooring.
Control panels shall be available on the platform and ground.
Fine grinding cylinders in good sealing performance.
Neatly folding guardrails make it easy to maneuver through doorways. Safety precautions
Operation voltage on working platform : 24 volts (MINIMUM)
Emergency stop button on the platform and ground.
Telescoping legs on the chassis.
Hose burst valve safety.
Rain-proof design electric cabinet.
Fence on the platform.

Terms and conditions

Test certificate shall be supplied with the equipment.
The supplier shall guarantee for free replacement; repair if parts found faulty or defective
material, bad workmanship and efficient performance of scissor lift for designed loading.
ISO Certification.
Pre-dispatch inspection shall be done.
Training: - Technical training for operation and maintenance should be arranged at GSS
premises. Training shall be given by experts who are having full knowledge about design,
manufacturing, erection & commissioning of scissor lift.
Vendor must submit the following documents,
o Details covering all the technical specifications Catalogue/GA drawings
o Wiring and control schematic and detail diagrams.
o Electrical requirements.
o Outline of the dimensions of the equipment.
o Equipment and component layout.
Part-27_solar Panels Page 5 of 22
 826

o Details of equipment and controls.

o Installation details.
o Manufacturers name and catalogue number of any equipment number to be furnished
o Price list of Critical spare to be submitted, which may be reviewed for the period of
next 3 years.

Detailed specifications
1. Hydraulic unit : Hydraulic unit shall consist of in of inclined hydraulic cylinders with
internal honed pipe having hard chrome plated piston and hard chrome plated piston rod
with power pack unit.
The power pack shall consists of
a. Hydraulic tank - capacity shall be specified by the vendor
b. Gear pump
c. Electric motor with suitable capacity
d. Electrically operated solenoid valve
e. Manifold block
f. Flow control valve
g. Pressure gauge
h. Pressure relief valve
i. Suction filters
j. Pilot operated check valve
k. Required high quality hoses of suitable size
l. Any other fittings and accessories required for the operation

2. Electrical System : The continuous running power pack unit shall have motor of suitable
capacity, starter with suitable length cables. The cylinder unit shall be provided with
limit switch and push button control with panel board. The electric panel shall have
starter contactors, MCB's, push buttons, limit switches and terminal strip. The control
panel/cabinet is to be mounted in the power pack at the ground level.
3. Controls : UP, DOWN and Emergency stop to be controlled through push buttons
provided outside the plat form. The lift shall stop automatically when the platform
reaching the desired floor level by actuation of pre adjusted leveling limit switches.
4. All the hydraulic components shall be of ISO 9001 certified company make which are
acceptable to IIA.
5. The supplier shall provide the complete hydraulic circuit of power pack with bill of
materials giving specifications and make of the components used along with the offer.
6. Stability: - Eight supporting points (four outriggers and four wheels) shall ensure the
stability of the machine and level gauge shall be provided on the chassis to indicate the
Part-27_solar Panels Page 6 of 22
 827

balance of the machine

7. Deflection: - it shall not be more than 5cm when lifting, at maximum height with full
weight the deflection shall not be more than 2cm at 3 to 4 meter height.

Part-27_solar Panels Page 7 of 22

 BIRD FLIGHT DIVERTER (DYNAMIC TYPE)
1. SCOPE
The scope broadly covers general technical requirement, major
design parameters, requirement of certification, type tests & test
procedures and installation guide of Bird Flight Diverter required to
avoid the chances of collision of birds with transmission lines. The
Bird Flight Diverter shall be placed in identified stretches as per the
conditions stipulated for statutory clearance.

2. GENERAL TECHNICAL PARAMETERS

Bird Flight Diverter must be dynamic type and shall consist of
warning disc (2-D or 3-D in design) and associated clamps &
connectors and shall be suitable for efficient working and shall retain
good physical characteristics under all weather conditions. Bird
Flight Diverter shall be suitable for installation on live line. The iron,
steel or other metal parts used in the diverter must be corrosion
proof and should withstand all weather conditions.

3. DESIGN PARAMETERS
The design particulars to be adhered by the contractor/
manufacturer are furnished in below:
S.
Parameter Description
No.
1. Type Dynamic (Non-LED Type &
Solar Powered LED Type)
2. Service Life At least 15 years
3. Weight Max. 800 gram
4. Length(from connection Should not be more than
point to end) 430mm
5. Warning Disc Shall have glow in dark
feature.
a) Glow in dark Feature Glow in dark shall remain
activated for at least 12 hours
after exposure to sun light. If
Glow in dark stickers are used,
the same shall be of high
quality with strong adhesive
property, laminated and
suitable for all weather
conditions. The warning disk in
the BFD should have strong
luminescence properties that
emit immense light to provide
enhanced visibility to the birds
at night.
b) Glow in dark area Should not be less than

1
 7500mm2
c) Surface Contrasting coloured
(combination of any two colours
from Red, Yellow, Orange,
White, Black) retro-reflective
surface with Sun and Moon
light reflectors on both faces.
Since, warning disc is to be
designed to rotate, the colour
change, while revolving, shall
provide significant forewarning.
d) Shape Circular/ quadrilateral/
trapezoid or any other shape.
The warning disc shall be
aerodynamically stable so that
diverter faces minimum
amount of drag force which
provide swing and rotation
effect under medium/strong
wind speed.
e) Material
i) Disc UV stabilized plastic
ii) Bearing swivel Stainless steel
f) Dimension The warning disc shall have
diameter not less than 150mm
for circular disc.
If warning disc is quadrilateral
or trapezoid or of any other
shape, then shortest arm
length shall not be less than 90
mm.
g) Total Surface Area Not less than 15000mm2
(including air vents)
h) Thickness Not less than 3 mm
i) Reflective area on each Not less than 3500mm2
face
Note:
 Warning disc shall swing, sway and rotate easily and be
resistant to all weather conditions. Must not flip on the
powerline in high wind velocity.
 The warning disc shall be suitable for hanging on
conductor/earth wire (or OPGW), by means of clamp &
hardware. Be made of a sealed bearing to avoid
deposition of sand and/or soil particles and helps in
smooth rotation.
 Bearing swivel should allow free spinning in minimum
wind speed of 1 km/hour.
6. Clamp & Hardware
2
 a) Clamp type Spring type
b) Clamp material i. UV stabilized engineered
composite plastic (polymer) or
metal or carbon fibre and
shall be suitable for live line
installation by hot stick or
drone.
ii. All metal hardware used in
Bird Flight Diverter
including bearing must be
made of corrosion free
material.
iii. All plastic (polymer) parts
must be UV stabilized.
iv. Rubber/polyurethane lining
shall be used in gripping
area of clamp as per
requirement of conductor
type.
c) withstand temperature From -150C to +850C for
range (for parts of the conventional conductors
clamp touching
conductor)
c) Mechanical Strength The clamp must be able to bear
pulling load of at least 50 kg
and it is to be tested on
Universal Testing Machine by a
NABL accredited laboratory.
d)Contact of clamp More than 50%
gripping area with
Conductor/ Earthwire/
OPGW
e)Grip retaining strength The clamp should not slip
beyond permissible limit as per
IEC 61854 and as specified in
test procedure in Annexure-A,
when pulled by a force of 25kg
in the direction parallel to
conductor/earth wire/OPGW.
Note:
 Clamp must be suitable for gripping the conductor/ OPGW/
earth wire strongly, otherwise due to Aeolian vibrations/high
wind speed diverters may shift and move from its original
position and get collected at mid span (lowest sagging point).

 Clamp shall be free from sharp ends or edges, abrasions,

projections, grit or materials, and shall not cause chafing or
damage to the conductor/ earthwire OPGW, during fitting or

3
 during continued operation.

 The clamp shall have smooth and permanent grip to keep the
Bird Flight Diverter in its original position on the
conductor/earth wire/OPGW without damaging the strands or
causing premature fatigue failure of the conductor/earth
wire/OPGW due to clamping pressure.

 In case of metallic bird diverters, the parts of clamp, touching

conductor/earth wire/OPGW must be made of material, which
is bad conductor of electricity.
7. Additional requirement for Solar Powered LED type diverter
a) Colour LED shall be of Orange or white
colour or a combination of both
(one white followed by one orange
arrangement system) with adequate
light intensity so that it is clearly
visible to GIB/birds from a distance
(>300 m) even during foggy / dusty
weather/under low intensity of
light.
b) Battery life Battery shall be guaranteed for
service life of 5 years and shall be
suitable for at least 100 hrs of
flashing operation by single charge.
c)Weight Max. 1000 gram
d) Glow in dark area Should not be less than 3500mm2
Note:
 An automatic power cut-off electronics circuit shall be provided
to improve battery life so that during day time (due to high
intensity of light from sun), the circuit gets cut off & stops flashing
and the circuit switches on automatically under 1ow intensity light
condition.
 Position of solar cell shall be such that it gets sunlight
irrespective of direction of the diverter face and the dust & snow
does not decrease its efficiency.

4. TESTS & CERTIFICATIONS:

I. Type Tests

The reports/certificates for following type tests conducted by

the testing laboratory accredited by NABL or any accreditation
body as per relevant ISO/IEC/IS standards shall be submitted
to the purchaser. All of the following tests shall be conducted
on the same sample. However, No. of Samples for type tests
shall be as per relevant standard or procedure specified in
Annexure-A. Type test report shall be valid for 10 years from
the date of successful completion of tests.
4
 a) Mechanical Strength test:
 Direct Pull Test (50 kg by Universal Testing Machine)
 Clamp Slip Test/Grip Retaining Strength Test (25 kg force)

b) Vibration test
c) Temperature cycle test
d) Heating cycle test
e) Radio Interference Voltage and Visual Corona Test
(applicable for bird diverters for use on transmission lines
at 220 kV and above)
f) Corrosion Resistance Test: Salt fog (at 5% salt solution) and
Humidity test (at 90% Rh) as per procedure in accordance
with MIL-STD 810F (method 509.4 and Method 507.4)
g) Ageing tests - solar radiation test & sand and dust test as
per procedure in accordance with MIL-STD 810F (Method
505.4 proc II and 510.4 proc I)

Note: The Mechanical Strength Tests shall be carried out before and
after Ageing Test.
II. Acceptance tests:
Following acceptance tests shall be carried out on at least 20
samples or 5% of the offered quantity (whichever is greater) in
presence of the representative of the purchaser:
a) Visual Examination Test
b) Verification of Dimensions
c) Mechanical Strength test*:
 Direct Pull Test (50 kg by Universal Testing Machine)
 Clamp Slip Test/Grip Retaining Strength Test (25 kg force)
*Only one of the 20 samples or 20% of the aforesaid sampled
quantity (whichever is greater), shall be subjected to ultimate
failing load.
5. WARRANTY PERIOD:

All the bird diverters should come with a warranty period of at least
5 years. The warranty shall cover all components of the diverter. Any
defect/damage/failure, if noticed during the warrantee period, the
diverter shall be liable for replacement.

6. INSTALLATION GUIDE:

Bird Flight Diverter should be installed on all conductors and earth

wire/ OPGW in identified stretches as per the requirement stipulated
by forest authority or other appropriate authority to avoid the
chances of collision of birds with transmission lines (single/multi-
5
circuits). For Great Indian Bustard habitats and potential areas, as
identified by WII/ MoEF&CC, one bird flight diverter shall be
installed at every 10 m on the earthwire/OPGW and one bird flight
diverter shall be installed at every 15 m on phase conductors in a
staggered way such that as a whole, the power line will have
effectively one diverter at every 5m to 6m. In case of bundled
conductors, bird flight diverters may be installed on the lower
conductor of the bundle in staggered manner.

A mixer of LED and non-LED BFD i.e. at least one in five (20 % of total
BFDs) shall be installed on power lines as per above or as suggested by the
committee.

6
 Annexure-A

Test Procedures

1. Visual Examination Test:

Bird diverter assemblies shall be visually examined for general finish and
good workmanship.

2. Verification of Dimensions
The dimensions of the bird diverter assembly, including area of warning disc,
reflective area and glow-in-dark area, shall be checked against approved
drawings and requirements given in the technical specification.

3. Vibration Test

The tests shall be conducted in a laboratory set up with a minimum effective

span length of 30m for conductor, earthwire and OPGW separately. The
conductor/ earthwire/ OPGW shall be tensioned at 25% of its Ultimate Tensile
Strength(UTS). Constant tension shall be maintained within the span by means
of lever arm arrangement. The span shall be equipped with vibration inducing
equipment suitable for producing steady standing vibration. The inducing
equipment shall have facilities for stepless speed control as well as stepless
amplitude arrangement. Equipment shall be able to measure the frequency,
cumulative number of cycles and amplitude of vibration at any point along the
span.

Four numbers of Bird Diverters shall be clamped to the conductor/ earthwire/

OPGW in and around the middle of the test span. These bird diverters shall be
free to vibrate and shall not be re-torqued or adjusted between the tests. The
frequency of vibration is so chosen as to get an odd number of loops. The
shaker shall be positioned at least two loops away from the test specimens to
allow free movement of the conductor/ earthwire/ OPGW close to the test
specimens. The conductor/ earthwire/ OPGW shall be connected to the shaker
and vibrated to an amplitude such that

f1.8 Ymax > 1000 mm/sec.

Where Ymax being the antinode displacement (mm) and f is the test frequency
(Hz).

7
 The test frequency shall be greater than 24Hz and the total number of cycles
shall be more than 10 million. The bird diverter shall withstand the vibration
test without slipping on the conductor/ earthwire/ OPGW, loosening,
damage or failure of component parts.

After the completion of test, the same bird diverter shall be subjected to
mechanical strength test (direct pull test & clamp slip test) as per the
procedure given and the sample shall be able to withstand the tests without
damage/ deformation.

A representative diagram of test assembly is given below.

4. Temperature Cycle Test

The complete bird diverter assembly shall be quickly and completely

immersed, without being placed in an intermediate container, in a water bath
maintained at a temperature of 85°C and left submerged at this temperature
for 15 minutes. The sample then shall be withdrawn and quickly &
completely immersed, without being placed in an intermediate container, in
the cold water bath maintained at a temperature of -15°C where it shall
remain for 15 minutes. The sample shall be subjected to 10 such cycles.

The time taken to transfer from either bath to the other shall be as short as
possible and never exceed 30 seconds. The quantity of water in the test tanks
shall be sufficiently large for the immersion of the samples so as not to cause
a temperature variation of more than ±5°C in the water.

After completion of 10 cycles, the sample shall be examined to verify that

the sample has not deformed/damaged.

8
5. Heating Cycle Test:

The heating-cycle test shall be carried out on an assembly of conductor & bird
diverters and heated by passing a current through the assembly. The conductor shall
be tensioned at 20 percent of its Ultimate Tensile strength (UTS) and shall be erected
indoors so that the conductor is roughly horizontal. Air shall be able to circulate freely
around the assembly which shall not however be exposed to draughts.

The sample shall be connected on the conductor in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations. The minimum length of conductor used for
determining this current shall be 2 m. The test current shall be that power frequency
current which raises the surface temperature of the conductor to the specified
maximum operating temperature of the conductor and maintains the temperature at a
steady value. The test current shall be passed continuously through the assembly for a
period of 30 min or such longer period as may be necessary to bring the reference
conductor to the specified maximum operating temperature of conductor ±2.5°C. The
current shall then be interrupted and the conductor shall be allowed to cool to within 5
°C above the ambient temperature. The conductor temperature shall be measured near
the centre of the test length.

This sequence of operation shall be repeated so that 250 cycles of heating and cooling
are applied. The sample shall not be tightened or adjusted during the test. The sample
shall afterwards be opened and there shall be no sign of local heating, burning or fusing
of any part of the sample or of the conductor, as a result of the test.

6. Mechanical Strength Test

Following Mechanical Strength Tests shall be carried out on the bird diverter after
completion of Vibration Test, Temperature Cycle Test, Heating Cycle Test, Corrosion
Resistance Test and Ageing Test.

a) Direct Pull test:

The clamp of the completely assembled Bird diverters shall be subjected to a load
equal to 50% of the specified load of 50 kg (using Universal Testing machine) which
shall then be increased at a steady rate to 67% of the specified load. The load shall be
held for five minutes and then removed. After removal of the load, the assembly and
its components shall not show any visual deformation and it shall be possible to
disassemble them. The clamp shall then be reassembled and loaded to 50% of
specified load. The load shall be further increased at a steady rate to the maximum
load of 50 kg and shall be held for one minute. No damage/ deformation should occur
during this period. The applied load shall then be gradually increased until the failing
load is reached and the value shall be recorded.

b) Clamp Slip Test/Grip retaining strength test:

The test shall be carried out as per IEC 61854 (Fig. 1a). The tests shall be performed
separately using conductor, earthwire, and OPGW. The conductor/earthwire/OPGW,
free of any defects or damage, shall be tensioned to 20% of its rated tensile strength.

9
 By means of a suitable device (see fig. 1a of IEC 61854), load shall be applied to the
clamp along the axis of the conductor/ earthwire/OPGW and shall be gradually
increased (not faster than 100 N/s or 10 Kgf/s) until it reaches the specified minimum
slip load of 250 N or 25 Kgf. The load shall be kept constant for one minute. The
movement of the clamp relative to its original position on the conductor/
earthwire/OPGW shall be observed. The clamp should not slip more than 10 mm and
there should not be any damage / deformation of the bird diverter and the
conductor/earth wire/OPGW. Thereafter, the load shall be increased gradually in steps
of 25 N or 2.5 kgf and shall be kept constant for one minute at each step. The slippage
at each step shall be recorded. The process shall be continued till the slippage is
observed to be more than 10 mm from its previous position and the corresponding load
shall be recorded.

7. Corona Extinction Voltage Test (Dry)

The sample, when subjected to power frequency voltage, shall have a corona extinction
voltage of not less than that stipulated in the Table below. The test shall be carried out
as per IEC:61284. The atmospheric condition during testing shall be recorded and the
test results shall be accordingly corrected with suitable correction factor as stipulated
in IEC 60060-1.

8. Radio Interference Voltage Test (Dry)

Under the conditions as specified above, Radio Interference Voltage (RIV) level of
the sample shall be less than the values stipulated in the Table given below. The test
procedure shall be in accordance with IEC 61284.

Sl. Voltage Minimum Corona Maximum radio

No. level Extinction Voltage interference voltage (at
(kV) 1MHz under dry
condition (micro volts)
1000
1 765kV 508
(at 508 kV rms)
1000
2 400kV 320 (at 320 kV rms)
220kV/ 1000
3 156 (at 156 kV rms)
230kV

10
1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT

1.0 General
The Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) shall be installed at Substations to acquire
analog data, device status and events. RTU shall also be used for control of
station devices from Master station (s). The supplied RTUs shall be interfaced
with the Control & Relay (C&R) panels, Transducers, lEDs, Metering
Equipment, Communication equipment, Power supply distribution boards; for
which all the interface cables shall be supplied by the Contractor.
This document describes the specifications for the Remote Terminal Unit
(RTU). Contractor shall supply RTU, associated equipment such as
transducers, relays, weather sensors, modems, cabling etc. and required
number of panels for housing of all the hardware envisaged for the RTU and
system interface cubicle (SIC).
The contractor shall be responsible for supplying all hardware, software,
installation, cabling and field implementation for RTU as defined in this
Specification. The contractor shall also be responsible for integration of
supplied RTUs with the SCADA/EMS System as per the specified protocols
and interoperability profile annexed at Annexure V2-P3-1(1). The contractor shall
also provide complete documentation, training and testing to fully support the
hardware and software provided. The RTU shall be used for real-time
supervision and control of substation/ power plant through SCADA system.
RTU configuration/ point count, MFT/MFM count, modems and requirement of
weather sensors quantity is given as per price Schedule-BOQ-B.
Should the Contractor elect to subcontract manufacturing, installation, testing
& commissioning or any work defined herein, it shall remain the Contractor's
responsibility to complete the assigned work.
It is Owner's intent that the Contractor uses as much standard hardware and
soft- ware as possible; cabling should be minimised; system design should be
as much modular as possible and CMRs should be used only when absolutely
essential. However, the system supplied by the vendor should satisfy all the
functional requirements of this Specification. The Contractor shall supply all
the necessary items and provide a complete RTU design that meets all of the
Owner's functional requirements defined in this Specification.
Owner may not initially procure all capabilities specified in this document.
Regardless of the RTU configuration purchased, the RTUs shall be capable of
all functions specified herein with the addition of the necessary hardware and
software modules in the field when required by Owner. Each function is
presented in sufficient detail to provide the Contractor with as much insight as
possible into both the initial and future requirements of the RTUs.

The weather Sensors to be supplied under the project shall be field proven
and shall have been in successful operation for meteorological application for
at least one year as on date of Bid opening. The Bidder shall furnish the
documentary evidence in support of the above and submit the same along
with the bid.
1.1 Design Standards
The RTUs shall be designed in accordance with applicable International
Electro- technical Commission (IEC), Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineer (IEEE), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), and National
Equipment Manufacturers association (NEMA) standards, unless otherwise
specified in this Technical specification. In all cases the provisions of the latest
edition or revision of the applicable standards in effect shall apply.
1.2 RTU Functions

All functional capability described herein shall be provided by the Contractor

even if a function is not initially implemented. The term master station is used to
denote the SCADA systems. As a minimum, the RTUs shall be capable of
performing the following functions:
(a) Collecting and processing the digital status inputs, analog inputs, event
records, accumulated values and transmitting to master station(s).
(b) Receiving and processing digital & analog control commands from
the master station(s).
(c) Accepting polling messages from at least four master station(s)
simultaneously using separate logical databases for each master
station.
(d) Communication simultaneously on all Communication ports and
using multiple concurrent protocols including IEC 60870-5-101,
60870-5-104, IEC 61850, MODBUS (Serial & TCP/IP) and DNP 3.0
(Serial & TCP/IP).
(e) Data transmission rates from 300 to 9600 baud for serial ports (for
both IEC 60870-5-101 & MODBUS) and 10/100 Mbps for TCP/IP
Ethernet ports.
(f} RTU shall be compatible with protocol 61850 for communication
with lEDs.
(g) RTU shall have the capability of automatic start-up and initialisation
following restoration of power after an outage without need of
manual intervention. All restarts shall be reported to the connected
master station(s).
(h) RTU shall have dual redundant CPU and Power Supply unit.
(i) RTU shall support time synchronization through messages received
from master station using IEC 60870-5-101 protocol.
(j) RTU shall support downloading of RTU database from the master
station using the IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 60870-5-104 protocol.
(k) RTU shall support SOE (Sequence of events) feature.
(I) Acting as a data concentrator for acquiring data from Slave RTUs,
MFMs /MFTs and exercising supervisory control on slave RTUs,
MFMs/MFTs using IEC 60870-5-101, IEC 60870-5-104, MODBUS
and
(m) DNP 3.0 protocols.
RTU shall support acquisition of real time and accumulated real &
(n) reactive power values from Energy Meters using MODBUS protocol.
RTU shall be equipped with advanced Cyber Security Features such
as Integrated Firewall, User Access Control and Data Encryption
(o) etc., implemented as per NERC-CIP.
Harsh environmental coating.

2
1.3 Communication ports

The RTUs shall support simultaneous communications with multiple

independent master stations (SCADA system), maintenance and configuration
terminal (Laptop PC), a local logger (printer), Multi-function transducers and
Local Data Monitoring System (LDMS)/Logger).
The RTUs shall have the following minimum number of communication ports:
1. Four Ethernet ports for connectivity to Master Station on IEC 60870-
5- 104.
2. Required number of Ethernet ports (minimum two) for
communication with lEDs on IEC 61850, Energy Meters on
MODBUS TCP/IP and DNP 3.0 TCP/IP etc.
3. Minimum 4(Four) Nos Serial ports for communication on IEC 60870-
5-101 in dual standby mode (with single master) or active/active
mode (with dual master).
4. Port(s) required for Cellular Data Communication.
5. One port for the RTU maintenance and configuration terminal.
6. One port for Local Data Monitoring System (LDMS)
7. Required number (minimum two) RS485 ports and/or TCPIP ports
for polling Multi-function Meters, Multi-function Transducers using
MODBUS, IEC 60870-5-101 protocol in multi-drop (party line) mode
or IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. In multi-drop mode maximum 8 No
MFTs/MFMs shall be connected to a single port.
It shall be possible to increase the number of communication ports in the RTU
by addition of cards, if required in future. The RTU shall respond to
independent scans and commands from Master Station, LDMS and
Configuration & Maintenance Terminal simultaneously. The RTU shall support
the use of a different communication data exchange rate (bits per second) and
scanning cycle on each port. The RTU shall be capable of being configured
into point to point and party-line communication mode.

1.4 CPU and Power Supply

The RTU shall have redundant CPU and Power Supply unit so that the RTU
can communicate with the Master Stations even when one of the redundant
units fails. A failover process shall cause the assignment of all the functions of
the failed unit to the healthy unit. The failover between the two redundant
units shall not require any manual intervention and shall not cause any
interruption in the functioning of RTU. The failover process of the CPU shall
not take more than 30 seconds after the failure of primary CPU. All the
functions of RTU shall be operational within 30 seconds of the failover
operation i.e, within one minute from the time of failure of primary CPU. (With
optional dual chassis).
1.5 Modems

The modems can be used for establishing communication between RTU and
master station over IEC 60870-5-101 protocol. The Contractor shall supply
requisite number of PLCC modems to establish communication between RTU
and master station(s) (multiple masters including main & backup), if specified
in Scheduled- BOQB.

The modems for control centre end, complete in all respects including power
supply unit & rack shall be supplied. These modems can be located either in the

3
FEP at Control Centre end or at other Communication nodes (Stand Alone
Modem).

The modems shall meet the following requirements:

a) Use CCITT Standards including V.24, V.28.
b) Use frequency shift keying (FSK) modulation.
c) Communicate at data rates of 300, 600 and 1200 bps.
d) Use CCITT R.38a, and R.38b standard tones for the selected RTU
data rate.
e) Use PLCC bandwidth upto 4 kHz and shall accommodate multiple
data channels over and above voice channels.
f) Use both 2-wire and 4-wire communication lines.
g) Receive level adjustable from -8 to -40 dBm @ 600 ohms.
h) Transmit level adjustable from 0 to -24 dBm @ 600 ohms.
i) Have a minimum sensitivity of -48 dBm.
j) Shall operate on 48 VDC power supply
k) Compatible with IEC 60870-5-101 protocol.

1.6 CelIular (GPRS/3G/4G) Modem and Gateway

The RTU shall be capable for data communication with Master Station over
IEC 60870-5-101/104 with Cellular Modem. In case PLCC or Optical Fibre
network is available at RTU Station, the Cellular Communication Modem will
provide a manually switchable redundant communication link to Master Station,
which may be enabled by the owner's personnel in the event of failure of
PLCC/Optical Fibre network. In such case Cellular Communication will use
the same protocol as is used for PLCC or Optical Fibre network. However, in
case no PLCC/Optical Fibre network is available at RTU Station, the Cellular
Communication will act as main communication link with Master Station. The
RTU port used for Cellular communication shall be adequately protected and
firewalled to avoid any cyber security attacks.
The provision of PLCC or Optical Fibre Network or IP/MPLS Link between
RTU and Master Station is in the scope of owner, however the supply,
installation and commissioning of necessary cabling and Integration of RTU
with Master Station(s) using the owner's communication system will be in the
scope of contractor.
The contractor shall also provide, if envisaged in the Schedule BOQ-B and
integrate the GRPS Gateway at Master Stations (Main & backup). The
Gateway shall be equipped with requisite number of RS 232 Ports (minimum
10) for IEC- 101 and Ethernet Ports (minimum six) for IEC-104 communication.
The Gateway shall have at-least 50% spare ports of each type for future
expansion. Provision of Internet connectivity with Static IP address at Master
Station end shall be in the Owner's scope. The communication between RTU
and Master Station using Cellular Communication shall be point to point and
no intermediate hub shall be used by the contractor to route the Cellular traffic
between RTU and Master Station(s). The Gateway shall be equipped with a
firewall to avoid any cyber security threat emanating from public Interface used
for Cellular traffic.

4
1.7 LocaI Configuration & Maintenance Interface

The RTUs shall include the interface to support the portable configuration and
maintenance terminal (PCMT). The interface shall provide easy access to
allow owner to use the maintenance terminal at the RTUs installed in the field.
1.8 LocaI Data Monitoring System (LDMS) Interface (NOT ENVISAGED)

The LDMS shall be used for local data acquisition, monitoring and control of
substation parameters through RTU. The LDMS shall be a mini SCADA
system providing MMI capability for use in the sub-station control room
building. The LDMS software shall include following functions:
a) data acquisition for analog, digital, events and pulse accumulator type data
b) data processing — Conversion to engineering units, limit monitoring,
data validity test, calculated data
c) Calculated data (such as maximum, minimum, average values
with associated time-stamping etc.) of all the station parameters.
d) Sequence of Events Processing
e) Supervisory control
f) Alarm, tagging, trending, quality codes etc.
g) Single Line Diagrams, Trends, daily, weekly, monthly reports etc. shall be
prepared by the bidder and integrated on LDMS system. The LDMS shall
also have capability to generate additional displays, single line diagrams,
reports and trends.
The LDMS shall store all real-time telemetered & calculated data after every 1
minutes (adjustable to 5, 15,30,45,60 minutes). The software and hardware
shall be sized for storage of all the above data after every 1 minutes for at
least one year duration. All alarms, events, SOE etc. shall also be stored on
regular basis. It shall be possible to define daily, weekly, monthly Sub-Station
reports on LDMS. It shall be possible to generate reports highlighting the
maximum, minimum, average with associated time-stamping etc. of all the
station parameters. The historical data stored on the storage medium shall be
in standard format and necessary tools for its export to standard spreadsheet
programs (Excel and .csv) shall be provided.
The LDMS shall update analog data from RTU by exception or cyclically after
every five to sixty seconds (programmable) and status data by exception. The
SOE status data shall be recoded with resolution of 1 mS timestamp.
The contractor shall supply separate license for each copy of LDMS software.
1.9 Communication between RTU & MFT/MFM

The MFT/MFMs will act as slave to the RTU. The RTU shall communicate
with MFT/MFMs to acquire real time analog data, digital data, and time
stamped events and execute control commands issued by the master station.
The RTU shall acquire analog data from MFT/MFMs cyclically and digital data
by exception. All data from the devices connected on a single port shall be
acquired within 5 seconds. The RTU shall have the ability of issuing retry scan
to acquire data from the MFT/MFMs in case of communication failure between
RTU and MFT/MFMs.
1.10 Communication Protocol between RTU & lEDs
The RTU shall use the IEC 61850 protocol for communication with lEDs over
Sub-station LAN. The RTU shall act as a Client and collect digital data and

5
events from the lEDs. [Event recording & DR collection is to be achieved
through Numerical IED integration to RTU and DCU of RAS system (for
which technical details are provided elsewhere in the specification) to
meet the data collection of available/ approved soft inputs].
1.11 Master Station Communication Protocol
The Contractor shall provide a communication protocol for communicating
with SCADA master stations using the IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 60870-5-
104 communication protocol standard. The communication protocol shall
support all the requirements of this standard. The communication protocol
shall be non- proprietary and the Contractor shall provide complete
description and documentation of the protocol to Owner.
The RTU shall perform as a slave to SCADA master station when using the
IEC 60870-5-101 protocol. All communication shall be initiated by the SCADA
master stations. RTU must notify the master stations of unusual conditions at
the RTU (such as a power fail/restoration or RTU malfunction), the transfer of
changed data etc. All the notifications shall be accomplished within the
framework of the periodic data acquisition exchanges.

The RTU shall store the data acquired from the MFT/MFMs & lEDs in its
database and do processing like change detection/deadband processing on
the data for optimizing its transmission to the Master Station (SCADA Control
Centre). The processing shall include requirements of mapping of information
from the protocol of MFT/MFM/lEDs to the protocol requirement for
communication with Control Centre.
The RTU shall process the various messages/commands for communication
to the Master station using the following priority.

a) Control command
b) Status data by exception
c) Analog data by exception
d) Analog data periodic
e) Status data integrity scan

The communication interface to the master station(s) shall allow scanning and
control of defined points within the RTU independently for each master station
using a separate logical database in the RTU. It shall be possible to pick
points from the RTU database randomly and assign it for reporting to a Master
station. Further, the RTU shall support the use of a different communication
data exchange rate (bits per second), scanning cycle, and/or communication
protocol to each master station.

1.11.1 Scan groups

Analog and digital input points (including points reported by exception) shall
be assignable to scan groups. A scan group shall be a specified set of data
points within the RTU central database which will be communicated to a
master station when requested by a specific (addressed) scan request. A scan
group size shall only be limited by the communication protocol message
length. Any RTU input point shall be assignable to any scan group. The RTUs
shall support at least sixteen scan groups and all scan groups per
communication port (i.e. master

6
station/ LDMS interface). The Contractor shall provide a convenient and
flexible scheme for assigning points in the RTU to scan groups.

1.11.2 Reporting of status points

The RTU communication protocol shall be configured to report digital status
changes by exception to master station. Digital status data shall have higher
priority than the Analog data. All the digital status data shall also be assigned
to scan groups for integrity check by Master stations at every 10 minutes.
1.11.3 Reporting of Analog points
The analog data shall be reported periodically to update all the values at the
master station within 10 seconds (configurable from 5 to 20 seconds). Analog
data shall also be reported by exception if the analog value exceeds its
previous value by more than 20% (configurable from 1% to 20% in the RTU).
1.11.4 Digital control commands
The RTU shall follow the select-and-execute sequence for operation of digital
control commands from the master station. The RTU shall reset its control
logic upon any error in the sequence.
1.12 Data Concentrator Communication Protocol
The RTU shall have the functionality to act as a IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC
60870-5-104 protocol master and collect data and also perform supervisory
control from/on the slave RTUs and communicate it to the Control Centre. The
Master protocol implementation shall be such that the data polling
requirements mentioned at section 1.11 is at least accomplished.
In case the RTU is proposed to be used as a Data concentrator, it shall be
provided with at least four (4) IEC 101 input ports/cards and shall have
capability to report to two master stations on IEC 104 interface. Data
concentrator shall support at least 1,500 (fifteen hundred) data points. The
RTU as a Data Concentrator shall have capability to synchronize through
GPS/ Time Synchronizing equipment for time stamping of Data concentrator
which in turn shall synchronize the IEC 101 protocol connected RTU/device.
The RTU as a Data Concentrator shall come complete with built in monitoring
mechanism to avoid loss of any data, especially the one reported by
exception. The data concentrator shall have dual CPU and dual Power supply
unit. The overall data update requirement from any Sub-RTU to Control centre
should not affect the functionality defined elsewhere in the specification.
The Data concentrator shall have the provision for remote login from Control
centre. The SLDC/ Master Station (s) computer system shall be able to
configure and poll health of Data concentrator from remote on 104 connected
interface after due authentication of the users.
It shall support diagnostic & maintenance activities remotely. Individual RTU
configuration shall be possible from Data Concentrator including accommodating
devices from heterogeneous suppliers. The RTU as a Data Concentrator shall
have following communication ports & support for protocols:
i. IEC 104 for SCADA control centres.
ii. IEC101/104 for Sub-RTUs.
iii. IEC 104 for local SCADA

7
 The other requirements given for RTU elsewhere in the specification shall be
applicable to RTU as a Data concentrator also.

1.13 Analog Inputs

The RTU shall accommodate analog inputs which are unipolar or bipolar, 2-
wire ungrounded differential signals. All analog inputs are of +4 to +20 mA.
However, the RTU shall be capable of accepting other standard analog input
ranges (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 0 to 10mA, -10 to +10 mA).
The RTU shall make all appropriate signal level conversion and conditioning
to allow full utilization of analog inputs and meaningful reasonability checking.
The analog-to-digital converter shall have a minimum resolution of 32767 counts
(sign plus 15 data bits). Each type of analog input shall be converted with full
resolution. The RTU shall monitor the drift in characteristics of its ADC and
mark the analog points with a drift quality code if a drift is detected. This drift
quality code shall be sent to the master station also.

The RTU accuracy, for analog input measurement, shall be 99.8% or better at
25 degree C ambient temperature. Mean accuracy shall drift no more than
0.002% per degree C within the temperature range of —5 to +55 degree C.
Determination of accuracy shall be made while the analog multiplexer is
operating at rated speed.

Each input shall have suitable protection and filtering to provide protection against
voltage spikes and residual current at 50 Hz, 0.1 ma (peak-to-peak) and
overload. Loading upto 150% of the input value shall not sustain any failures
to the RTU input. The total input impedance offered by the RTU shall not be
greater than 250 (for +4 to +20 mA range).
All analog inputs shall be scanned by the RTU from the field at least at 1
second periodicity.
1.14 Status Inputs
RTU shall be capable of accepting isolated Dry Contacts, internally wetted @
48VDC or Wet contact @ 220VDC or 110VDC (+30%) for status inputs. All
status inputs shall be wired by the contractor to MFT/MFM or RTU through
220VDC or 110VDC or 48VDC (+30%) Wet Contact wired directly from
semaphores in the C&R panels. In case the contacts are wired to MFT/MFM,
the status input data shall be reported to RTU with time stamp using IEC —
101/104 or DNP 3.0 protocol. It is the owner's intent to minimise the use of
Contact Multiplying Relays (CMRs), in order to minimise the number of
components and its associated failures. The contactor shall use CMR to
convert wet contact to isolated dry contact only when it is absolutely
necessary for satisfactory performance of the system.
For dry contacts, the RTU shall provide necessary sensing voltage, current,
optical isolation and de-bounce filtering independently for each status input.
The sensing voltage shall not exceed 48 V DC. The sensing voltage source
shall be isolated from that of the RTUs logic power so that any noise or a
short circuit across the sensing supply of a digital status input terminals would
not disrupt the RTU operation other than the shorted digital status input.

The RTU shall be set to capture contact operations of 20 ms or more duration.

Operations of less than 20 ms duration shall be considered no change (contact

8
bounce condition). The RTU shall accept two types of status inputs i.e. Single
point Status inputs and Double point status inputs.
Single point status input will be from a normally-open (NO) or normally-closed
(NC) contact which is represented by 1-bit in the protocol message.
Double point status input will be from two complementary contacts (one NO
and one NC) which is represented by 2-bits in the protocol message. A
switching device status is valid only when one contact is closed and the other
contact is open. Invalid states shall be reported when both contacts are open
or both contacts are closed.
All status inputs shall be scanned by the RTU from the field at 1 millisecond
periodicity. The RTU shall store all status changes detected for retrieval by
the master stations. For communication delays or short-term failure of
communications with a master station, the RTU shall store a minimum of 300
status change events. The RTU shall report any overflow of this status
change buffer to the master stations.
1.14.1 Contact Multiplying Relay
Contact multiplying relays (CMRs) may be required to multiply the auxiliary
contacts of breaker/isolators etc. The contacts of these relays shall be used to
provide status input to the RTUs. The relays shall be of self reset type. The
relay shall have a minimum of two changeover contacts each with minimum
current carrying capacity of 5 A at 110V/220 V DC.

The relays shall conform to the following requirements:

a) Power frequency withstand voltage: 2 kV for 1 minute as per
IEC standards.
b) Insulation resistance of 100 M ohms at 500 V DC.
c) 5 KV Impulse test as per IEC standards

The CMRs shall have a LED indication which shall light up when the CMR is
energized (picked up) condition. The CMR coil shall be rated for the voltage
existing at the site. The CMRs shall be generally mounted in existing control &
Relay panel but in case of non-availability of space, it shall be accommodated
in the System Interface Cabinets (being supplied by the Contractor).

1.14.2 Momentary Change Detection

Two-state status input points with momentary change detection shall be used
by Owner for points where multiple operations (changes of state) can occur
between scans from the master station (such as breakers with auto-reclosing
devices that operate faster than the master station scan rate). The RTU shall
capture and maintain all of the momentary changes, up to 4 per MCD digital
status point. The MCD status input points shall be set to capture operations of
greater than 20 ms duration.
Alternatively, the RTU can store and report the multiple state changes of a
digital input as discrete events. It shall be ensured that all the changes are
reported to the Master station in the sequence in which they occur in the RTU.

1.15 Sequence of Events (SOE) feature

9
 SOE is the time-stamped digital status data. SOEs will enable Owner's
personnel to determine the sequential operation of digital status input devices
for their state changes. The RTU shall time-stamp the digital status data with
a time resolution of one millisecond.
Initially, all breakers, protection contacts digital status input points in the RTU
& events captured from lEDs shall be configured as SOE points. However it
shall be possible to assign any digital status input data point in the RTU as
SOE point.
Each time a SOE status input point changes state, the RTU shall time-tag the
change and send it to the Master station. The RTU shall maintain a SOE
buffer within the RTU for communication delays and communication failure.
SOE buffer shall be sized to store, as a minimum, of 5000 events. The RTU
shall transmit the SOE data stored in its buffer to master station. An
acknowledgement of receipt by the master station shall be made prior to the
loss of any data in the RTU SOE buffer. Data not received at the master
station shall be retransmitted. The RTU shall send a message to the master
station to indicate the RTU SOE data buffer overflow condition.
1.16 Control Outputs

The RTU shall provide the capability for a master station to select and change
the state of digital output points either directly or through MFT/MFM. In case
the Control Output is provided through MFT/MFM, the communication between
RTU & MFT/MFM shall also support select before operate functionality. Device
control will be used by owner to control power system devices including:
(a) Two-state Devices: Circuit breakers, motor-operated switches,
auto/manual switches, relay disable/enable, and other two-state
devices
(b) Variable Output Devices: Raise/lower control of generators,
transformer load-tap-changers (LTC), and other variable output
devices.

The RTUs shall have the capability for control outputs as described in the
following sections

1.16.1 Two State Momentary Control

A pair of outputs shall be supplied for each two-state (open/close) control
output point that drive control relays. One output shall be supplied for open, the
other for close. Upon command from a master station using the check-before-
execute sequence, the appropriate control output shall be operated for a
preset (momentary) time period. The operation period shall be adjustable for
each point from 0.1 to 2 seconds.
16.2 Raise/Lower Pulse Output
A pair of outputs shall be supplied for each (raise/lower) control output point
that drive control relays. One output shall be supplied for raise, the other for
lower. When commanded from the master station, the appropriate raise or
lower output shall be operated for the selected time interval. The closure time
interval for raise/lower pulse output points shall be specified in the operate
command from the master station. The raise/lower output for each point shall
operate over a range of 0.1 to 4 seconds in a minimum of eight equal
increments.
1.16.3 Timed Supervisory Control

10
The RTU shall store Timed Supervisory control command received from the
SCADA system. This supervisory control command from the SCADA system
shall contain the ’time’ up to a resolution of milliseconds and the type of
control Operation.
The RTU shall then perform the supervisory control command at the specified
time. The SCADA system shall be able to cancel this command prior to the
occurrence of the specified Time of Operation.
1.16.4 Control Output Interposing Relays (Double Contact Digital Output)
Control output interposing relays shall be supplied by the Contractor for each
control output specified in Schedule-BOQB. Each control relay shall consist of
two isolated single-pole double-throw contacts. The output contacts shall be
rated to carry minimum current of 10 amps at 220 V DC, and shall provide arc
suppression to permit interruptions of an inductive load. Relay coils shall be
shunted with diodes to suppress inductive transients associated with
energizing and de-energizing of the relay coils. The relays shall conform to
the IEC standards.
1.16.5 Latching (Dummy Breaker) Relay
The Contractor shall provide a latching relay to be used to simulate and test
supervisory control from the RTU. The simulation relay shall accept the
control signals to open and close from the RTU, and shall provide the correct
indication response through a single contact indication input point. This point is
not included in the RTU point count in Appendix - B.
1.16.6 Control Security and Safety Requirements
The RTU shall include the following security and safety features as a
minimum for control outputs:
(a) Select-and-execute sequence for control output.
(b) No more than one control point shall be selected at any given time.
(c) The control selection shall be automatically cancelled if after
receiving the "control selection" message, the "control execute"
command is not received within the set time period.
(d) The control selection shall be automatically cancelled if after
receiving the "œntrol selection" message, the "operate" command is
not the next received message and is not received within the set
time period.
(e) No control command shall be generated during power up or
power down of RTU.
1.16.7 Local/Remote selector switch
A manual Local/Remote selector switch shall be provided for each RTU to
disable all control outputs by breaking the power supply connection to the
control outputs. When in the "Local" position, the Local/Remote switch shall
allow testing of all the control outputs of RTU without activating the control
outputs to field devices. A status input indication shall be provided for the
Local/Remote switch to allow the SCADA system to monitor the position of the
switch. This point is not included in the RTU point count defined in Schedule-
BOQ-B.
1.17 Time facility
The RTU shall have an internal clock with the stability as defined in Table-1.
The RTU shall be synchronised through synchronisation message from master
station

11
at every 10 minutes using IEC 60870-5-101 protocol. The RTU shall support
the calculation of the propagation delay dynamically by the Master station.
However, all the RTUs shall have a suitable interface for receiving
synchronization signals from a local GPS receiver.
The RTUs communicating over IEC-60870-5-104 shall be supplied with a
GPS receiver (As quantified in BOQB and technical details provided
elsewhere in the specification) for synchronization of RTU clock.
The RTU shall synchronize its internal clock with the master station system
clock when time synchronization messages are available and shall mark all
the time stamped information/data as invalid when the RTU clock is not
synchronised with the Master station.
1.18 Diagnostic features
The RTU design shall facilitate isolation and correction of all failures. The
following features which promote rapid problem isolation and replacement of
failed components shall be provided:
a) Self-diagnostic capabilities within each RTU which can be initiated
at the RTU site. The diagnostic software shall check for memory,
processor, and input/output ports errors and failures of other
functional areas defined in the specification of the RTU.
b) On-line error detection capabilities within the RTU and detailed
reporting to the connected master station of detected errors. It shall
be possible to choose the errors to be sent to the Master station
within the framework of the communication protocol.
c) Local indication of major RTU failures
d) A non-volatile event buffer that shall record all fatal errors/restarts/ faults.

1.19 Input DC Power Supply

The RTU will be powered from a 48 V DC (+ve earthed) system. The RTU
shall not place additional ground on the input power source. The characteristics
of the input DC power supply shall be
(a) Nominal voltage of 48 V DC with operation between 41 and 60 V DC.
(b) Maximum AC component of frequency equal to or greater than 100
Hz and 0.012 times the rated voltage peak-to-peak.

The RTU shall have adequate protection against reversed polarity, over
current and under voltage conditions, to prevent the RTU internal logic from
being damaged and becoming unstable causing mal-operation.

1.20 Environmental Requirements

The RTU will be installed in control room buildings with no temperature or
humidity control. The RTUs shall be capable of operating in ambient
temperature from -5 to +55 degree C with rate of temperature change of 20
degree C/hour and relative humidity less than 95%, non-condensing. At some
locations, environmental temperature may go below —5 degree C for which
the contractor shall take suitable measures for successful operation of RTU.
1.21 Noise level

12
The audible noise generated by the RTU equipment shall not exceed 50 dbA
one meter from the enclosure.
1.22 RTU Size and Expandability
The software and the database shall be sized to accommodate growth within
the ultimate sizing parameters as defined in this specification for the RTU
without requiring software or database structure regeneration. The typical I/O
counts as per typical/ average size and type of substations with expansion
requirements is mentioned below for bidder's reference:

Type of Substation Typical RTU

Sizing
1 kV Substation 36 Nos.
320 Nos.
77 Nos.
2 132 kV Substations (for more than 5 Nos. AI: 24 Nos.
132 kV Bays)- Type-A DI: 160
Nos.
DO: 56 Nos.
3 132 kV Substations (for less than and equal 24 Nos.
to 5 Nos. of 132 kV Bays)- Type-B 128 Nos.
36 Nos.

The point counts for the RTUs have been defined in the Schedule-BOQB
on consolidated basis for the quantities of RTUs specified therein.
The number of l/O points at each substation RTU proposed in the project
shall be decided based on the detailed survey by contractor and
approval of Nigam for designated l/O Points based on the present and future
expandability requirements of the substation.
The I/O cards in each RTU shall be calculated based on the I/O Point count
approved by Nigam based on the card capacities of the manufacturer of
RTU. The decimal count of card shall be rounded to next whole number.
At each RTU, over and above approved I/O count by Nigam, the AI & DO
shall be rounded off to next number fully divisible by 8 and for DI it shall be
rounded off to next number fully divisible by 16 for the payment purposes
for the l/O (Al, DI & DO) quantities mentioned in Schedule BOQ-B.
Over and above the approved I/O count by Nigam, each RTU shall contain
atleast 20°/ spare capacity for every I/O point type, as wired spare capacity
which can be used without any hardware additions in the RTU/SIC Panels
including TBs, wiring etc. In addition to the above, the RTU shall have the
capacity to add additional I/O modules to expand the overall point count of the
RTU by a minimum of 50% of the approved l/O capacity. All the I/O points
available in the modules/cards supplied in the RTU shall be wired to TBs.
1.23 RTU and SIC panels
The Contractor shall provide RTU & System Interface Cabinet (SIC) panels.
The SIC shall primarily house all MFTs, interposing control relays and
interface terminal blocks. However, the owner may at his discretion prefer to
install the MFTs/MFMs in the C&R panels and interposing control relays &
interface terminal blocks etc., in the RTU panel. In such case no SIC panel
may be required. Generally, the SIC shall be mounted adjacent to the
RTU panel.

13
However, in a few cases, the SIC may be mounted separately at a different
locations. The panels shall meet the following requirements:

(a) Shall be free-standing, floor mounted and height shall not exceed 2100

(b) Shall have maintenance access to the hardware and wiring

through lock-able full height doors.
(c) Shall have the provisions for bottom cable entry
(d) The safety ground shall be isolated from the signal ground and shall
be connected to the ground network. Safety ground shall be a
copper bus bar. The contractor shall connect the panel's safety
ground of to the Owner's grounding network. Signal ground shall be
connected to the communication equipment signal ground.
(e) AII panels shall be supplied with 230 Vac, 50 Hz, single-phase
switch and 15/5A duplex socket arrangement for maintenance.
(f) AII panels shall be provided with an internal maintenance lamp,
space heaters and gaskets.
(g) AII panels shall be indoor, dust-proof with rodent protection, and
meet IP41 class of protection.
(h) There shall be no sharp corners or edges. AII edges shall be
rounded to prevent injury.
(i) Document Holder shall be provided inside the cabinet to keep
test report, drawing, maintenance register etc.
(j) AII materials used in the enclosures including cable insulation or
sheathing, wire troughs, terminal blocks, and enclosure trim shall be
made of flame retardant material and shall not produce toxic gasses
under fire conditions.
k) The structural frame of the panels shall be of cold rolled sheet steel
of thickness not less than 3 mm for the weight bearing members of
the panels such as base frame, front sheet & door frames and 2mm
for sides, door, top and bottom portions.
(I) AII sheet steel work shall be degreased, pickled, phosphated in
accordance with IS6005. The phosphate coating shall be sealed
with application of two coats of ready mixed, stoving type zinc
chromate primer. Two coats of synthetic enamel paint (RAL7032
shade) shall be applied both in the exterior and the interior of the
panel.

1.24 Interconnections
All cabling between component units of the RTU, RTU to interface cabinet,
RTU to MFTs/MFMs and to the Owner control and relay panels (located in the
substation control room) shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor and
shall be shown on Contractor supplied drawings. Plug-type connectors with
captive fasteners or compression type connectors shall be used for all internal
interconnections. The connectors shall be polarized to prevent improper
assembly. Each end of interconnection cables shall be identified by a marker
which includes the cable number and the identifying number and location of
each of the cable's terminations. This information shall match with the
Contractor's drawings.
Adequate space and hardware shall be provided for routing of the field wiring
within the enclosures. Contractor wiring within enclosures shall be neatly
arranged and shall not be directly fastened to the enclosure frame. All internal
interconnection wiring and cables shall be routed separately from field wiring
to the RTU terminals & power wiring. All wiring shall use copper conductors
and

14
have flame retardant insulation. Conductors in multi-conductor cables shall be
individually colour coded.
The use of non-flammable, self-extinguishing, plastic wire troughs is
permissible. Metal clamps must have insulating inserts between the clamps
and the wiring. Wiring between stationary and movable components, such as
wiring across door hinges or to components mounted on extension slides,
shall allow for full movement of the component without binding or chafing of
the wiring.
1.25 Wiring/Cabling requirements
Shielded (screened) cables shall be used for external Cabling from the RTU/
SIC panels. These external cables (except communication cables) shall have
the following characteristics:
a) All cables shall have stranded copper conductor.
b) Minimum core cross-section of 2.5 mm2 for PT cables, 4 mm° for
CT cables and 2.5 mm2 for Power & Control outputs and 1.5mm2 for
Digital Status inputs, transducer mA current output
c) Rated voltage Uo/U of 0.6/1.1KV
d) External sheathing of cable shall have oxygen index not less than 29
& temperature index not less than 250. Cable sheath shall meet fire
resistance test as per IS 1554 Part- I.
e) Shielding, longitudinally laid with overlap.
f) Dielectric withstand 2.5 kV at 50 Hz for 5 minutes
g) External marking with manufacture's name, type, core quantity,
cross- section, and year of manufacture.
The Communication cable shall be of shielded, twisted pairs and of minimum
0.22sq mm size.
1.26 Terminal Blocks
Terminal blocks shall be having provision for disconnection (isolation), with
full- depth insulating barriers made from moulded self-extinguishing material.
Terminal blocks shall be appropriately sized and rated for the electrical
capacity of the circuit and wire used. No more than two wires shall be
connected to any terminal. Each analog input signal, digital status input and
digital output signals shall require two terminals per point plus a common
shield termination for each cable.
All terminal blocks shall be suitably arranged for easy identification of its
usages such as CT circuits, PT circuits, analog inputs, status inputs, control
outputs, auxiliary power supply circuits, communication signals etc.
Terminal Blocks for CT circuits shall have feature for CT shorting (on CT side)
& disconnection (from load side) to facilitate testing by current injection.
Similarly, TBs for PT circuit shall have feature for disconnection to facilitate
voltage injection for testing.
1.27 System Architecture
Bidder has the option to offer RTUs having following system architectural design:
a) Centralized RTU design where all I/O modules are housed in RTU
panel and communicating with master station through communication
port.

15
 b) Distributed RTU design where I/O modules are contained in the
respective MFT/MFM and are housed in respective bay C&R
panels. The RTU shall acquire analog and digital data from these
MFTs/MFMs over standard protocols such as IEC — 101/104 or
DNP 3.0 for further communication with master station.
The bidder shall asses the requirement of RTU/SIC panels based on
the system design and supply panels accordingly.
1.28 VOID
1.29 Portable Configuration and Maintenance Terminal (PCMT)
Contractor shall supply a Portable Configuration and maintenance Terminal
(Laptop PC) which shall provide followings capabilities:
1. RTU Data base configuration & Maintenance
2. Local Operator Interface & RTU Diagnostics
3. Master Station and RTU simulator cum protocol analyzer
(a) RTU Data base configuration
The RTU database Configuration software being supplied with the PCMT shall
have the following features
i) Full graphics windows User Interface
ii) Standard editing capabilities e.g. cut, paste, copy, sorting etc.
iii) Capable of controlling revisions of various RTU database files
and storing multiple versions of databases for all the RTUs.
iv) Capable of uploading database from the RTU and compare
that with another version of database stored in the PCMT.
v) Provide standard template for database modelling required for
I/O modules, MFTs & lEDs, communication setting.
vi) Provide mapping of the individual data points acquired from
one protocol to another protocol for transmission.

The database configuration software shall use the same terminology for
configuration of the various protocol parameters as specified in the
communication protocol standard i.e. it shall be possible to define these
parameters by the user discreetly. Also it shall be possible to select an ASDU
type to be used for transmission of a measurand e.g. measured value to be
transmitted as ASDU 9 or ASDU 11.
(b) Local Operator interface and RTU diagnostics
The Local Operator interface software shall support operator inquiries to demand
current status and data values of various RTU points, or an overall substation
snap-shot, or of the status change buffer.
The local operator interface software shall provide the following reports:

i) Status Reports: Display of all substation status indications, of all

tele- metered values, and the RTU's status.
ii) Event Report: Display all the stored events in the event buffer of the RTU.
iii) Print Request: Provide user interface for requesting print out of
the Reports on the Logger
iv) Maintenance activities: User interface for interacting with the RTU
for maintenance activities like diagnostics, database online
requests.

16
The RTU shall have inbuilt features for monitoring the healthiness of the RTU
modules and detecting the type of error. The diagnostics software shall have
diagnostics for the RTU's processor(s), memory, l/O ports, and any other
functional areas of the RTU. It shall list the errors recorded by the RTU and
provide troubleshooting tools for the RTU.

(c) Master station-cum-RTU simulator & protocol analyzer software tool

The Master station and RTU simulator cum Protocol Analyser software shall
be used to monitor and test the RTU's operation using the master station
communication protocol. It shall have the following features
i) capable of emulating both the master station and the RTU
messages in all the communication protocols used in the RTU,
subject to the minimum of IEC 60870-5-101, 104 & MODBUS.
When the Master station and RTU simulator cum Protocol Analyser
software has received or transmitted a message, it shall be possible
to immediately "turn around" and transmit or receive a response
message.
capability of interfacing to digital side of the RTU for the above
purpose. capable of receiving single and repeated messages using
the supplied RTU communication protocol. Each received message
shall be checked for validity, including the checksum code. The
messages shall be displayed in HEX format or in the ’interpreted
form’ as desired by the user. It shall maintain and display error
counters so that the number of errors during a period of unattended
testing can be accurately determined.
iv) capable of formatting and transmitting, both as one-time and periodic
transmissions, any master station-to-RTU command.
v) capable of preparing illegal messages, such as messages
having invalid check codes, for transmission.

The Master station and RTU simulator cum Protocol Analyser software shall
also be capable of passively monitoring all communication traffic on a channel
without interfering with channel operation.
Channel traffic captured in the active or passive modes of operation shall be
displayed. All fields of a message shall be displayed. A pass/fail indication for
the security check code shall be included with each code displayed.
1.30 Cyber Security

1 The RTU shall support secure communication protocols such as TLS, SSH, or
IPsec to protect data in transit.
2 Role-based access control and strong user authentication must be enforced for
all local and remote access.
3 The system must allow secure firmware updates and support timely vulnerability
patching.
4 Audit logs for user activity, access, and system events must be generated and
exportable for centralized monitoring.
5 The solution must comply with relevant cybersecurity standards such as IEC
62443, CERT-In guidelines, and CSIRT-Power advisories.

17
 1.31 TESTING
1.31.1 RTU/SIC Testing
(a) Type Testing

A complete integrated unit shall be type tested to assure full compliance with
the functional and technical requirements of the Specification. The testing
sample shall include at least one of each type of cards/modules and devices.
The list of Type tests to be performed on the RTU/SIC is mentioned in Table-2
& type test requirements are mentioned in Table-3.

The contractor may optionally submit type test reports for all the EMI/EMC
tests conducted at accredited laboratory for review & approval by Owner.
However, in the event, the type test reports are not meeting the specification
requirement,

Owner may ask for the type testing of any or all of the above tests as required
at no additional cost to the owner.
The type test of RTU w.r.t. functional tests shall be carried out in all cases.
Contractor shall commence commercial production of RTUs/SICs after
successful completion of all type tests and approval from Owner.

Further, type test reports for meters, transducers and relays shall be submitted
as per relevant standards. All weather sensors shall be calibrated as per
Indian Metrological Department standards and certificate shall be submitted in
this regard.
(b) Routine Testing
Each complete unit shall undergo routine testing. The list of Routine tests to be
performed in the factory is mentioned in Table-2.

Field Tests
After RTU/SIC panel installation and interface cabling with C&R panels and
communication equipment, the Contractor shall carry out the field-testing. The
list of field tests is mentioned in Table-2.
(d) Availability Tests

After field testing, RTU/SIC shall exhibit 98% availability during test period of
500 hours. Availability tests shall be performed along with Master station. The
RTU/SIC shall be considered available only when all its functionality and
hardware is operational. The non-available period due to external factors such
as failure of DC power supply, communication link etc., shall be treated as
hold-time & availability test duration shall be extended by such hold time.

18
 Table-1: Technical Particulars of RTU

Item Description Value Remarks

Data transmission rate 33O to 36OO bps for serial Configurable

part & 10/100 Mbps for
Ethernet port.
2 Communication ports Minimum following ports:
• 4 Ethernet port for
comm. faith master
stations on IEC-104
• 2 Ethernet ports for
comm. with lEDs,
Energy Meters.
• 4 RS232 ports for
comm. with master
stations on IEC-101
• 1 Port for Cellular data
Communication.
• I Pest for RTU
configuration &
Maintenance tool
• 1 port for LDMS
• 1 Optical comm. Port
• 2 RS-485 ports for
polling MFMs/MFTs/
Energy Meters
3 communication protocol with IEC 63870—5-101/ 104
Master stations
Communication Protocol with IEC 60870-5-104
LDMS
5 Communication Protocol with MODBUS/ I EC 60870-5-
MFTs/MFMs/Energy Meters 101/104 or DNP3.0
6 Communication Protocol with IEC 61850
lEDs

19
7 Status data transfer to Master by exception
station
Analog data transfer to Master Normally Periodic For
station major change - by
exception
9 No. of Scan Groups suppoi1ed 16
10 No. of Separate Logical 4
Database for each Master
Station
11 RTU shall be able to capture of 20 mS or more
contact operations duration.
12 SOE buffer size at least 5000 events
13 Time stamping accuracy 1 ms
for SOE
14 Supporting Control of Devices Two state & OLTC
capacitors
15 Downloading of RTU database Supported
from master station
16 Nominal Power supply voltage 48V DC
17 Compliance to cl. 1.28.1 Yes
- Transducer Protection
18. Advanced Cyber Security Supported
Features such as Integrated
Firewall, User Access Control
and Data Encryption etc.,
as per NERC-CIP.

20
 Table-2: List of Tests on RTU/SIC

DESCRIPTION OF THE TYPE ROUTINE

TEST TEST TEST

✔ ✔

✔ ✔

21
 Damp heat test as per IEC60068-2-78 ✔
Cold test as per IEC60068-2-1 ✔

Table -3: RTU Type Test Requirements

Test Name EUT

Test
Nos.

CM DM CM

1 Surge immunity ON 2kV 1 kV 2 kV A

test Level

2 Electrical fast ON Level 2 kV - 1 kV A

3 Damped ON Level 2.5 kV 1 kV 2.5 kV A

4 Electrostatic ON Level

5 Radiated ON Level 10 V/m electric field strength A

6 Damped ON Level

7 Power Frequency ON Level

22
8 Power Frequency OFF - 1kVrms for 1 minute

9 1.2/50uS impulse OFF -

10 Insulation OFF - Measure Insulation resistance

11 Dry Heat Test ON - Continuous operation at 55

deg.C for 16 hrs

12 Damp Heat Test ON - At 95% RH and 40 deg. C for

16 hrs

13 Cold test ON - Continuous operation at 0

deg. C for 96 hrs.

23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF REMOTE ACCESS SYSTEM WITH DCU

FOR DISTURBANCE RECORD COLLECTION

1. Introduction

This Technical Specification details the requirements of a Disturbance Records

Collection and Remote Accessibility system (RAS) for automatic collection of
Disturbance Records from numerical relays/IEDS installed at various 132 kV and above
level substations of RVPN from a main control centre in the state. The system shall
enable automatic Disturbance Records Collection from the Numerical relays/lEDs
installed in these substations and store in a central location for easy access and
analysis. The system shall also be used for the remote parameterisation of numerical
relays from one or more regional centres and from a main control centre. The system
shall have a Disturbance Record Collector installed at each of the substations and RAS
servers installed at the main control centre. Clients to the server application shall allow
access to users from main/ other regional centres/ locations based on their assigned
access rights. It is expected to collect disturbance records from numerical relays
installed at voltage level of 132 kV and above from Main I and Main II protection relays
of Line/Feeder bays and Differential protection relays of Transformer/Reactor bays. The
system shall also manage settings/configuration of these devices from central/remote
locations. The scope of work and general requirements are included in this part of the
Technical specification.

In general, following are the functional requirements of this system:

a) Remote and/or Centralized collection of Disturbance Record (DR) files from

IEDs/numerical relays installed in 132 kV and above bays at 220kV and above
level substations.
b) Access to the IEDs/numerical relays installed in 132 kV and above bays at
220kV and above level in these Substations from main control center and from a
regional control center or desired location for Remote setting/ configuration.
c) The System shall provide access to the IEDs/Numerical relays, which are
equipped with serial port (RS232/RS485) and on TCP/IP, for setting and
configuration.

2. System Architecture

The Main control centre shall consist of a redundant system of servers in Hot-
Standby mode that can store/manage the DR files and setting data from the Protection
Numerical relays/IEDs from all the connected substations. This shall enable
configuration/settings management of the numerical relays/IEDs and disturbance
records collection.

There shall be client access to the central server from control centre as well as from
other remote centres. The system shall allow grouping of substations to regions or
as desired for access by a user or group of users. All the substations and the control
centre shall be connected via a WAN network.
2

There shall be a Substation DCU for DR collection which shall be automatically

collecting the disturbance records from the IEDs/numerical relays. The relay specific
OEM application shall be used for the purpose of setting /configuration.

The Numerical relays/lEDs are equipped with communication ports on IEC 61850
protocol, IEC 60870-5-103 or other open protocol or in a proprietary protocol. The
Contractor shall collect all the necessary details, which are necessary for designing
the system during the site survey post order.

The IEDs/Numerical relays provide disturbanœ record files in COMTRADE format or

in some cases a proprietary format. The software in the Substation DCU for DR
collection shall convert thèse files to COMTRADE format as required, for further
transmission to the Central Server. The files shall be identified as per IEEE naming
standards before they are stored. COMTRADE files shall be transferred to the RAS
server using a secure protocol like SFTP.

3. Security Features

Provided the level of importance of configuration file and risk in unintended change
in configuration, the solution shall include measures to secure the data exchange
process. The Station DCU for DR collection and the RAS server application shall
support the following security features.

a) Integration of Protection and Control IEDs in the substation will be carried out in
a secured manner in compliance with relevant NERC CIP Cyber Security
standards particularly CIP-005-1
b) User management in Configuration utility to prevent unauthorized configuration
c) End to end SSL encrypted VPN to avoid tampering of data transferred in the
network. Remote Access to the IEDs in the substation shall be restricted through
VPN provided by the System Integrator. It shall create an electronic perimeter
that manages communication to all the electronic devices e.g. lEDs/ Numerical
relays etc. from unauthorized access.

4. Protocol Requirements of DCU for DR collection

All necessary protocol drivers needed to exchange data with the numerical
relays/IEDs shall be supported by the Station DCU for DR collection. As a minimum,
substation protocols such as IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, SPA, Courier and SEL
Fast Message shall be supported by the SDC for collecting the DR files.

5. Remote Configuration of Data Concentrator

There shall be provision for user to remotely configure the DCU for DR collection.
The key configurable parameters include:

a) Downstream channel information such as COM port, baud rate, parity, data
bits, stop bits, flow control where applicable.
b) Upstream channel information such as IP address, TCP port number
3

c) Passwords for different clients such as Local PC Web client, Web client
session timeout.
d) DR Polling interval in absolute time (in seconds)
e) Timeouts and retries — User can specify the device reading timeouts and number
of retries before declaring a read as failed.

6. System Sizing

The DCU for DR collection shall be sized in such a way that, it can accommodate
50% expansion in the number of devices connected to it at the substation level. The
DCU for DR collection shall be sized to store relay data for at least one month in non
volatile memory considering one DR file per day from each connected Relay. All
status and configuration information which is to be retained during power failure shall
be stored in non volatile memory.

The central server system shall be designed to store the data generated by the
numerical relays for a minimum period of 1 year with built in storage device without
the need of any external storage device.

It shall be possible to include future Numerical relays and lEDs in the existing
substations to automatic DR collector system and RAS without the need for
proprietary items of supplier. All necessary training and tools for integrating future
numerical relays and lEDs to the automatic DR collector system and RAS should be
provided to RRVPN engineers for the subject project.

7. System Time Synchronization

The time of the RAS computers shall be synchronized with the Time synchronization
systems available in the control rooms. The various time synch signals which are/
shall be available include RS232, SNTP, IRIG-B (modulated/ un-modulated), PPS
etc. The time of the station DCU for DR collection shall also be synchronized by
signals from existing GPS receivers at the substations. This shall be finalized based
on the availability of timing signals at each location during the site survey. However
the DCU for DR collection shall support IRIG-B (modulated BNC type connector) and
SNTP for time synchronization.

8. Hardware Requirements

The hardware as proposed in the system architecture is described here. Any other
hardware required to meet the requirements of this technical specification as per the
vendor's design shall be considered in their bid.

The DCU for DR collection used in the substations shall be substation grade suitable
for operation with high degree of reliability. The DCU for DR collection at the
substation shall be compliant with the requirements of IEC 61850-3 for operation in a
transmission substation. Refer Clause 17 for the type test requirements. The power
supply of the equipments shall be either 220V/110V DC or 230VAC, 50Hz (nominal).
This will be finalized during the detailed engineering based on the availability of power
supply at the
 substation. The hardware (DCU for DR collection, interface converters etc.) shall be
provided with the configuration tools for defining the various parameters of
communication, IP addresses, device name etc. and diagnostic tools for identifying
problems with the devices. Servers used at control centre shall be suitable for
operation in Hot Standby mode.

The requirements of various hardware are listed below.

8.1 Server Requirements

The servers at the central location have to be redundant, operating in Hot

Standby mode. The specification for Servers with technical details is specified
elsewhere in the specifications.

8.2 Client Workstation Requirements

The specification for workstations with technical details is specified elsewhere in

the specifications.

8.3 DCU for DR collection requirements

The DCU for DR collection shall have adequate sizing to meet the required
response time and shall be of industrial grade suitable for working in the
substation environment complying with the requirements of IEC 61850-3. Refer
Clause 17 for the type test requirements. The equipment shall be 19inch rack
mountable and shall have a fan-less design. Use of industrial PCs as DCU for DR
collection will not be accepted.

Each DCU for DR collection shall have the following minimum configuration.

a) Four LAN Ports (10/100) Mbps (2 Nos. Copper & 2 Nos. Fiber)

b) Twelve Serial ports for RS232/RS485 devices, at least 4 ports shall be

configurable as RS232/RS485 ports. It shall be possible to have 8 number
RS485 ports or 8 numbers RS232 when needed.

c) At least 1GB of RAM

d) Minimum 4GB Flash memory for non volatile storage

e) IEC 61850-3 Compliant hardware.

9. Optical fiber cables

Fiber optic cables within the control room shall be of armoured type for protection
against rodents and physical stresses. Fiber optic cables, if required to be laid in the
switchyard shall also be of armoured type.

4
10. Copper cables

The copper cables used for communication shall be of shielded twisted pair type
(STP). Each of the pair of wires shall be individually shielded as well as have overall
shielding to work in the substation environment with the high electromagnetic
interference. These wires shall be used for RS232/RS485 communication in the
Substations.

11. Functional Requirements

Functional requirements of the various components in the DR Collection and RAS

system are described below.
11.1 Functional requirement of DCU for DR collection

The DCU for DR collection is responsible for automatic DR collection from the
numerical relays/IEDs, conversion to COMTRADE format, local storage and transfer
to the central server. It shall support web server functionality for Remote access with
a web browser for monitoring. All the functions/routines of the DCU for DR collection
shall start automatically upon power up or restart of the equipment. The availability of
the DCU for DR collection shall be monitored by the central server.

a) Data Acquisition - Acquisition of Disturbance data records from Numerical

relays/lEDs
The disturbance records are stored in IEDs/numerical relays in
COMTRADE or in some cases a proprietary format. The access to the
devices will be on communication protocols like IEC 60870-5-103, IEC
61850, or in proprietary protocol such as SPA, Courier, SEL Fast
Message, etc. The Numerical relays/lEDs shall be polled periodically and
immediately in case of occurrence of a disturbance (in case of IEC 61850
based IEDs which support this feature), so that the DR files are available in
the SDC on occurrence of the disturbance. The SDC shall also monitor the
communication status/health and inform the loss of communication with a
device to the remote server as an event. All device communication failures
shall be logged and stored in the SDC.

b) Data Conversion: Format Conversion of Disturbance Records

Some of the older numerical relays may be capturing and storing records
in a proprietary format. The proprietary DR data shall be converted to
COMTRADE format in Binary type to optimize the file size. The
COMTRADE files shall be renamed as per IEEE naming convention.

c) Remote Accessibility Software (RAS) at Control Centre

The RAS software shall be installed on the central server at the control
centre. The software shall manage secure communication to the DCUs for

5
DR collection and it shall provide remote access for relay
setting/configuration.
RAS shall have a Client application to offer user interface for the complete
DR collection and IED Setting Management system. The user interface
shall have features to view status of DR collection and view events in the
communication system.
DR File transfer from the DCU for DR collection to the RAS application
software shall be using Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP). The DCU
for DR collection shall act as SFTP client where as RAS application shall
be an SFTP server. The client-server communication shall be encrypted
using SSL. DR files collected from each relay shall be stored in separate
folders grouped under each substation folder. The RAS application shall
make the DR files available as and when the DR files are stored in the
central server.
The RAS client interface tool shall provide remote accessibility of the
devices in the substation. This navigation software shall present the user
with the devices configuration in a structured tree and link the vendor
specific relay configuration application software along with the
configuration settings (port no., protocol, communication parameters) for
communication to each of the devices. A simple click on the device icon in
the structure tree shall launch the device specific application and allow
connection to the device. The user interface shall have features to allow
configuration change using Relay specific tool, view status of DR
collection, alarms or events in the communication system. The settings
access shall be limited to all IEC 61850 IEDs and other lEDs whose
settings can be accessed via the rear port. Front port connection of relays
for setting/configuration access is not expected.
The RAS software shall log all user initiated activities performed along
with necessary information such as time stamp and user/administrator
comments needed as part of maintaining audit trails. It shall also generate
communication logs to identify communication errors.

The RAS tool shall have the following components:

i. Graphical User Interface: The user interfaœ shall provide options for
the user to login, to select the device that is to be configured. The user
shall be able to select the device based on unique identification tag
consisting of Station, Feeder names, relay type which provides a user
friendly manner to identify devices without the need of operator
entering any IP address/port number. The application will have a
database of all the access parameters for the available deviœs in the
network. Vendor specific configuration tools provided by the device
manufacturers shall be installed in each client work station.

The user interface for RAS shall offer:

• Tree view of all substations, bays and lEDs
6
• Communication Events display

7
 • Customized display of devices i.e. devices view shall be
enabled/disabled for access as per the user rights assignment
• Add, modify and remove access rights to the lEDs from a
central location
• View the status of all devices connected through DCU for DR
collection in the substation
• Enable and disable the pass-thru connections at the DCU for
DR collection
• Manage device configuration files, IED software versions and
access history

ii. Serial port multiplexing service: The multiplexing service assigns the
manufacturer provided tool with the IP and port number of the designated
device as configured in the DCU for DR collection at the remote substation
and makes sure that the vendor specific tool gets connected to the selected
device and enables the uploading and downloading of information from the
selected device.

i. Database to store configuration in central server: There shall be a

database which stores all the configuration related database and associated
revisions. It shall also hold all relevant events and alarms.

12. Security

The system deployment architecture shall meet the requirement for robust, secured
and state of the art solution. The proposed communication system and infrastructure
shall ensure secure operation environment to the operator. The security and
protection measures shall be deployed at different layers of proposed system with
features as per the relevant international standards. There shall be security measures
at user level and network level as described below.
a. User Level
The RAS server software shall be installed at the Central Monitoring centre and RAS
clients shall be installed in all workstations (local/remote clients) along with the
required configuration tools provided by the device vendors. User configuration
modules in the RAS application shall provide mechanism for creating and managing
user accounts.
The RAS tool shall have configurable authentication and user privileges. The
common user privilege includes Full and No control. A user with full control privilege
shall be able to perform change, edit and download functions. A user with 'No
control' privilege can only view the RAS tool, but should not establish a connection
with any of the device. It shall also be possible to assign control rights to selected
devices for selected users.
The RAS system shall provide audit trails, through which the system's security can
be monitored.
b. Network Level
8
When the master station open up to WAN networks, more and more users might need to
access the information stored in network control systems. Specific IT security
functions

9
 and integration with security infrastructure products shall be a critical part of the
solution. Since RAS system is split into several geographical sites, the different local
area networks need to be connected over a Wide Area Network (WAN).
Secure Zone: The RAS Secure Zone subnet is an IP network used for
communication between operator stations and Remote Access servers. This zone is
completely entrenched such that it requires authenticated and protected
communication, and implements intrusion detection/prevention system using VPN.
Remote Access: DCUs connected to the RAS are used to collect data and are
considered to be located in an insecure zone. The proposed system shall have
different mitigation techniques considering standardization initiatives that address
such remote access vulnerabilities. The solution shall use tunnelling through SSL
based VPN, and an authentication scheme that will protect the payloads. The system
shall use Secure FTP protocol for communication between substation DCU and RAS.
Virtual Private Network (VPN) technology is appropriate for these links to provide
encryption and authentication over the WAN. Security policies shall be set
restrictively, allowing only the minimum number of rights for the minimum number of
remote users/applications that are necessary.

13. Time Synchronization

The Time synchronization equipment shall receive the co-ordinate Universal Time
(UTC) transmitted through Geo Positioning Satellite System (GPS) and synchronize
equipments in substations to the Indian Standard Time.
A time accuracy of 1ms shall be achieved for all the devices time synchronized by
the GPS device.

The Specification of GPS/ Time Synchronization equipment is provided elsewhere in

the specification.

14. Ethernet Switch

The Specification of Ethernet Switch is provided elsewhere in the specification.

15. Panels
Indoor type, floor mounted, swing frame for housing equipments, outer glass door
and completely wired simplex panels shall be provided for mounting DCU for DR
collection/Disturbance Collectors and switches.

Media convertors shall be accommodated in the existing panels based on available

space. In case space is not available in existing panels for the media converters then
new panels conforming to specification as given below shall be provided to house these
devices.

Construction of new panel:

Free standing simplex type, Metal enclosed with swing frame to house the devices
and an outer glass door. The gland and plate assembly shall be vermin proof. The
panel shall be designed for wiring access from front of the panel. Cable entries to
10
the panel shall be from the bottom. The design of the interior of the panel shall allow
sufficient

11
 access to the terminals of all devices for removal and repair. The design shall ensure
that the heat generated by various apparatus mounted in the panel shall not affect
the performance of any of the devices.
Dimension: Depth x width x height: 800 x 800 x 2312 (or more including base frame)
in mm
Degree of protection: IP-41 as per IEC 60529 / IS 12063
Thickness of metal: Minimum 3mm for planes housing the devices and for bottom
plates. Minimum 2mm for all other sides.
Swing frame:
Play of Swing frame: 120 degree or above capable of opening in the opposite direction
to glass door.
No of hinges : 3nos (minimum)
Door stopper : 1 No.
Protective Glass door: Splinter proof and transparent tempered glass of minimum
thickness 3mm.
Bottom plates: Knock slots shall be provided in the bottom plates for facilitating cable
entry at site.
b) Painting:

Powder coated cabinets shall be minimum 70microns thickness of paint.

Paint process shall conform to IS-6005. The colour of the panel shall match with
the existing panel colour of subject station and normally of following choice
for new station.
Exterior - stoved enamel grey
Interior - stoved enamel white
Finish - glossy surface treatment shall be done as per BIS.
Accessories: All necessary accessories shall be provided.
Heater with thermostat and manual switch for control, CFL/LED Lamp, AC Socket
5A&15A with switch for auxiliary 230V AC supply, MCBs and fuses as required for
AC supply distribution circuits and DC supply distribution circuits.

16. General Specification for DR view and analysis software

The software shall have the facility to display vector diagram, impedance diagram,
harmonic bar chart etc.

It shall offer a graphic display of the data recorded during the fault event and use the
values measured to calculate further variables, such as impedances, outputs or
R.M.S. values, which shall facilitate easier analysis of the fault record.

It shall represent these variables in all of the following diagrams of the views

• Time Signal diagrams

• Vector diagrams

• Circle diagrams

12
 • Harmonics

• Table view

• Fault location

It shall be possible to choose the display of the signals of a fault record as either
Primary values or Secondary values irrespective of the method of recording the
measured values in the fault recorder.

Apart from the actual signals it shall be possible to display the fundamental
component as well as the harmonics of each signal and thus even better recognize
special features of the signal curves.

In addition to its graphical display options, the software shall provide the following
tools to support fault record analysis:

1) Cursor 1 / Cursor 2
Cursor 1 and cursor 2 are assigned to the time axis. If the cursor is moved along the
time axis the values of signals at the cursor positioning instants shall be displayed in
the corresponding tables in all views.

In the Time Signal view, cursor 1 and cursor 2 shall be shown as vertical lines across
all diagrams of the view.

2)Table
In order to know the exact value of a particular signal at a defined instant, it shall be
possible to assign a cursor to this signal. The table of the selected view then shall
display the signal name, the values at the instant specified by the cursor Position.

The structure of the table shall be configured in the View Properties dialog. The type
of displayed values, such as RMS value, extreme value, phase, etc., shall be
changed at any time.

3) Zoom

Zoom facility to define the ideal display size for the value profile in each view shall be
provided. Facility to either maximize or minimize the whole diagram or selected
sections, or optimize the display scale is required.
The Zoom - Optimize function shall be used separately for the X-axis and the Y-axis.

4) Tooltip
If the mouse pointer is moved onto a signal of a diagram, a tooltip shall pop up which
displays the signal name and value(s) of the respective sampling instant.

5) Parameter settings of the analysis

It shall be possible to assign measured or calculated values to the individual
diagrams of the graphical views or tables using the Assign Signals matrix or by
simply using the drag-and-drop function.

13
 Parameters defining the fault record display, such as the distribution of signals to
specific diagram views and tables, colour, line and font styles, etc. shall be possible
to be saved permanently in the form of User Profiles. These can then be assigned
to other fault records by simply selecting the profile.

6) Importing fault records/ Compression of COMTRADE files

The software shall support merging multiple COMTRADE files, atleast two files in to
one so as to view all the signals in one COMTRADE for fault record analysis.
7)Comment

The Comment dialog lets to enter the file notes relevant to the fault record, such as
the analysis results or notes for the planning dept., etc. Furthermore, it shall facilitate
to add comments at any position of the curve representation of the fault record.
These comments shall be stored with the fault record.

8) Data Export

The COMTRADE Export function shall allow export data of a fault record, complete
with calculated values, in COMTRADE format. To export diagrams or tables to other
applications, such as Word, Excel, Powerpoint, simply drag and drop them or use
the Windows Clipboard (Copy/Paste).

17. Type Test Requirements

Type Test Requirements of the DCU for DR Collection:

The DCU for DR Collection shall meet the test requirements as mentioned in IEC
61850-3, as mentioned in the table below.

Port Test
Test Standard Specification
applied

Impulse IEC AC Power

1 voltage 6.3 5kV, 0.5 joule
60255-5 Line
withstand
Frequency range 0.15 -
Power Line ,
Conducted CISPR22 30 MHz for serial and
2
Emission
5.8 EN55022 Ethernet port and
Serial &
Ethernet port
power port +/-3.248 dB
Frequency range 30 - Power Line ,
Radiated CISPR22
3
Emission
5.8 EN55022
1000 MHz at 10meter, Serial &
+/-4.088 dB Ethernet port
IEC Contact discharge +/-
Electro Static
4 5.7 61000-4- 8kV Enclosure
Discharge
2, Air discharge +/- 15kV

14
 Radiated 80-1000MHz: 10V/m
5 Susceptibility 5.7.2 IEC 80% AM, 1kHz sine Enclosure
Test 61000-4-3 wave
Electric IEC Power Line,
Fast 5.7.1.
6 61000-4- +/-4 kV, 5/50ns Serial &
Transient 4 4, Ethernet port
+/-2kV 1.2/50ps for
common mode for
serial and Ethernet port
IEC +/-1kV 1.2/50ps for Power Line,
7 High Energy 5.7.1. 61000-4- differential mode for Serial &
Surge Test 2 5, serial port Ethernet port
+/-2kV 1.2/50ps for
common mode for
power port

IEC Power Line,

Conducted RF 5.7.1. 0.15 - 80MHz: 10Vrms
8 1 61000-4- 1kHz, 80%AM Serial &
immunity 6, Ethernet port

9 Power
Frequency 5.7.3 IEC 40A/m & 1000 Aim Enclosure
disturbances 61000-4-8

T rise : 75 +/- 20%

Oscillation frequency
1MHz : +/- 10%
Damped
IEC Repetition rate : 400 /s
Oscillatory for 1 MHz +/- 10%
10 Magnetic field 5.7.3 61000-4-
10, Burst duration : Not
Immunity Test less than 2s
Continuous magnetic
field strength : 30
Aim
Ripple level: 3
on DC
IEC61000- 10% of the nominal DC
11 power line 4-17 voltage AC line
immunity test frequency: 50 Hz

0% short interruption
Voltage for 0.03 sec
DC dip
IEC61000- 40% & 70°/« dips for 0.3
12 and interruption 4-29 sec
test 80% & 120% variation
for 3 sec

0% short interruption
for 250 cycles
Voltage AC IEC 0% of AC mains for 0.5
13 dip and 61000-4- cycles AC power port
Interruption test 11 40% dips for 5 cycles
70% dips for cycles
80% dips for 250
cycles

15
 +/-2.5 kV, Oscillatory
Wave: 1 MHz for AC
power
+/-2.5 kV 75ns
1MHz IEC common mode, +/-1 Ethernet,
Oscillatory 5.7.1.
14 61000-4- kV 75ns, 1MHz Serial and
waves 3 12, differential mode for DC power port
power
+/-2.5 kV 75ns 1MHz
common mode for
serial and Ethernet port
Immunity to
IEC frequency range 0- POWER Line,
conducted 5.7.1.
15 common Mode 3 61000-4- 150kHz, 3V / 30V test Serial &
16, voltage Ethernet
port disturbance

Vibration: Frequency
range 5 Hz to 500Hz,
displacement 3mm
peak from Shz to 9Hz,
Vibration and IEC60870- acceleration 1g peak Enclosure
16 & Shock 2-2 from 9 to 200HZ, 1.5g all ports
peak from 200Hz to
500Hz
Shock: 10g for 11msec
on three axis (X,Y,Z)

Amplitude: 0m (101.3
kPa) to 3000m (70 o
Barometric IEC60870- kPa) Enclosure &
17 5.4
pressure 2-2, 3.3.2 all
ports Temp: 25°C, Altitude
ramp rate: 10 m/s

Relative humidity 95°/»

RH, temp set point
IEC60870- +55°C and + 25°C, Enclosure &
18 Humidity 5.3 2-2, Dwell period six hours all ports
Table-1 at +55°C and eight
hour at 25°C

IEC60870- 0
Operation -40 C to Enclosure &
19 Temperature 5.2 2-2, 0
70 C all ports
Table-1
IEC60870-
Voltage range 6.2, 176Vac(-20%) to 253
20 2-1, AC power port
& tolerance 6.3 Vac (+15%)
Table-5

16
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

SECTION-III

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ERECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF GRID

SUB-STATIONS

1
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

INDEX

S. No. PARTICULARS PAGE NO.

ANNEXURE - A WORK OF LAYING OF SUB-STATION EARTHING 4
ANNEXURE - B WORK OF LAYING OF CABLES 11
ANNEXURE - C WORK OF ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT 16
STRUCTURES AND SUB-STATION STRUCTURES
AND BEAMS
ANNEXURE - D WORK OF STRINGING OF BUS BAR AND 18
EARTHWIRE AND JUMPERING
ANNEXURE - E WORK OF ERECTION OF GRID SUB-STATION 21
EQUIPMENTS

2
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF

132/33 KV GRID SUB-STATIONS

This section covers the general practice adopted by RVPN in erection and commissioning of
various structures/ equipments for construction of EHV Sub Stations. This is for the purpose
of general guidance. However, this will not absolve the contractor from their responsibility to
follow practice laid down in various national/ international standards and the erection and
installation manual of manufacturer of various equipments towards successful erection
testing & commissioning of Switchyard.

1.0 Principal Parameters

The disposition of various bay equipments is shown in layout drawings enclosed in the
specification.

2.0 The bus bar material used in the 132/33 kV Grid Sub-station shall be suitable for
following bus bar parameters:

S. No. Description BUS / BAY Configuration

1. 132 kV Main Bus Twin ACSR ZEBRA
2. 132 kV Auxiliary Bus Single ACSR ZEBRA
3. 132 kV Line Bay Single ACSR PANTHER
4. 132 kV Transformer I/C Bay Single ACSR PANTHER
5. 132 kV Bus-coupler Bay Single ACSR PANTHER
6. 33 kV Main Bus Twin ACSR ZEBRA
7. 33 kV Auxiliary Bus Single ACSR ZEBRA
8. 33 kV Line Bay Single ACSR PANTHER
9. 33 kV Transformer I/C Bay Twin ACSR ZEBRA
10. 33 kV Bus-coupler Bay Twin ACSR ZEBRA
11. Transformer Jack Bus Twin ACSR ZEBRA

3.0 Various erection and commissioning activities shall be carried out as detailed in
enclosedAnnexure-A to E.

3
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

ANNEXURE-A
WORK OF LAYING OF SUB-STATION EARTHING

(A) EARTHING

(I) The contractor will develop the detailed drawing (supported with calculations) for laying
of earthmat at Grid Sub-Stations as per system requirement and fulfilling the
provisions of Electricity Act and will submit the same to RVPN for necessary approval.
It shall beensured that the following parameters are achieved as per requirement of
IEEE-80:
(a) Grid resistance should be as low as possible but it should not exceed 1.0 Ohm.
(b) The Step Potential and Touch Potential should be within safe limits.
(c) Ground Potential Rise should be less than 5 kV

(II) Earthing and lightning protection system installation shall strictly be in accordance with
the latest editions of Indian Electricity Rules, relevant Indian standards and Codes of
practice and Regulations, except where specifically increased/ enhanced in these
specifications.

(a) Code of practice for Earthing IS : 3043.

(b) Code of practice for the protection of Building and allied structures against
lightning IS: 2309.
(c) Indian Electricity Rules 1956 with latest amendments.
(d) National Electricity Safety Code IEEE - 80.

(III) All equipments and structures are required to be earthed by two separate and distinct
connections with earth as per Rule 61 of the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.

The neutrals of all voltage levels of Transformers shall be earthed through

independent earthing. All these earthing points should be interconnected with the sub
station earth mat. Each earthing lead from the neutral of the power transformer shall
be directly connected to two earth electrodes separately which, in turn, shall be
connected to the earth mesh. The transformer tanks as well as associated accessories
like separate cooler banks shall also be connected to the earthmat at two points.

Capacitor Voltage Transformers & Lightning Arresters shall be earthed through two
independent risers directly connected to earth electrodes which should in turn be
connected to the sub station earthmat. The distance between the electrodes should
not be less than 4.0 meters.

All other equipments such as Circuit Breakers, CTs, PTs, Isolators, Post Insulators,
etc. shall also be earthed at two points.

Bus Bar structures and equipment structures shall be earthed at two points.

Marshalling boxes, cubicles, C&R Panels and all other metallic enclosures, which are
normally not carrying any current, shall also be earthed.

All the earthing connections to the earthmat shall be by 2 Nos. direct earthing risers
free from kinks and of the shortest length. The two earthing connections/ risers should
be connected to the different sides of the earthmat enclosing the structure/ equipment
to be earthed.

4
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

For equipment earthing (including isolators), the earthing risers should be connected to
the earthing terminal/ pad of equipment and brought down along the leg/ main member
of structure and connected to the earth mat. The structure shall not be used as a part
of the earthing.

(IV) Details of Earthing System

S. No. Item Size & Material Remarks

a) Main Earthing Conductor to be 25 / 28 mm dia Size to be taken as per earth
buried in ground MS Round mat design of Sub Station.
b) Earthing Conductor above 50x10 mm Size to be taken as per earth
ground & earthing leads (for M.S. flat mat design of Sub Station.
equipments) i.e. Risers
c) Earthing Conductor above 50x10 mm Size to be taken as per earth
ground & earthing leads (for M.S. flat mat design of Sub Station.
columns & aux. Structures) i.e.
Risers
d) Earthing of indoor LT panels, 50x10 mm --------
D.C. Panel, control & relay M.S. flat
panels and outdoor
marshalling boxes, MOM
boxes, junction boxes &
lighting Panels etc.
e) Rod Earth Electrode 25 / 28dia, 3250 Size to be taken as per earth
mm long MS mat design of Sub Station.
Rod

(V) EARTHING CONDUCTOR LAYOUT

a) Earthing conductors in outdoor areas shall be buried at least 600 mm below finished
ground level unless stated otherwise.

b) Wherever earthing conductor crosses cable trenches, underground service ducts,

pipes, tunnels, railway tracks etc., it shall be laid minimum 300 mm below them and
shall be re-routed in case it fouls with equipment/ structure foundations by forming „U-
loops. The average spacing for East West rows and North South rows of earthmat
shall however be kept as near as possible to the spacing indicated in earthmat design.

c) Tap-connections from the earthing grid to the equipment/ structure to be earthed, shall
be terminated on the earthing terminals of the equipment structure as per “Earthing
Details”.

d) Earthing conductors along their run on ladder columns, beams, walls etc. shall be
supported by suitable welding/ cleating at intervals of 750 [Link] it passes
through walls, floors etc. galvanised iron sleeves shall be provided for the passage of
the conductor and both ends of the sleeve shall be sealed to prevent the passage of
water through the sleeves.

e) Earthing conductor around the building shall be buried in earth at a minimum distance
of 1500 mm from the outer boundary of the building. In case high temperature is
encountered at some location, the earthing conductor shall be laid minimum 1500 mm
away from such location.

5
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

f) Earthing conductors crossing the road shall be laid 300 mm below road or at greater
depth to suit the site conditions.

g) Earthing conductors embedded in the concrete shall have approximately 50 mm

concrete cover.

h) Earthing conductors shall be clamped with the equipment support structure at 1000mm
interval.

(VI) EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURE EARTHING

a) Earthing pads shall be provided for the apparatus/ equipment at accessible position. In
case earthing pads are not provided on the item to be earthed, same shall be provided
in consultation with Purchaser.

b) Metallic conduits shall not be used as earth continuity conductor.

c) A separate earthing conductor shall be provided for earthing lighting fixtures,

receptacles, switches, junction boxes, lighting conduits etc.

d) Railway tracks within switchyard area shall be earthed at a spacing of 30 m and also at
both ends.

e) Independent Earthing conductor for earthing of fencing shall be buried at a depth of 0.6
meters and shall be provided 2000 mm outside the switchyard fence. All the gates and
every alternate post of the fence shall be connected to this earthing conductor at the
corners and at every 20 meters.

f) Flexible earthing connectors shall be provided for the moving parts such as earthing,
switches and operating handles of isolators, etc.

g) All lighting panels, junction boxes, receptacles fixtures, conduits etc. shall be grounded
in compliance with the provision of Indian Electricity Rules.

h) Earthing conductor shall be run from the peaks of structures to the main earth mesh.
The earthing bonds of the earth wire tension hardware shall be connected at the top of
this earthing riser with bolts and nuts.

(VII) JOINTING

a) Earthing connections with equipment earthing pads shall be bolted type. Contact
surfaces shall be free from scale, paint, enamel, grease, dust or dirt. Two bolts shall
be provided for making each connection. Equipment bolted connections, after being
checked and tested, shall be painted with anticorrosive paint/ compound.

b) Joint connection between equipment earthing lead and main earthing conductors and
between main earthing conductors shall be welded type and shall be as per drawing
approved byRVPN. For rust protections, the welds should be coated with bitumen
compound and covered with bitumen impregnated tape to prevent corrosion.

c) Steel to copper connections shall be first bolted and then brazed and shall be coated
with bitumen tape to prevent moisture ingression.

d) All joints in the steel earthing system, except those where earth mat may have to be
separated from equipment, etc. for testing, shall be made by electric arc welding.

6
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

Welded surfaces should be painted with bitumen compound and afterwards coated
with bitumen tape to protect them from rusting and corrosion.

e) Joints in the earthing conductor between the switchgear units and such other points
which may be required to be subsequently opened for testing should be bolted type.
The bolted connections, after being checked and tested, shall be painted with
anticorrosive paint / compound. These joints should be accessible and suitable for
being frequently supervised.

f) All welded joints shall be allowed to cool down gradually to atmospheric temperature
before putting any load on it. Artificial cooling shall not be allowed.

g) Bending of earthing rod shall be done preferably by gas heating.

h) All arc welding with large dia conductors shall be done with low hydrogen content
electrodes.

(VIII) POWER CABLE EARTHING

Metallic sheaths and armour of all multi core power cables shall be earthed at both
equipment and switch gear ends. Sheath and armour of single core power cables shall
be earthed at switch gear end only.

(B) EARTHING PROCEDURE

Clearance of material, its transportation and distribution at site, placing/ driving of earth
electrodes, laying of earth mesh and connection of earthing risers from equipment,
base of structures, and earth shield wire from the peak of the structures.

(I) GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS:

a) For reference, a drawing showing the details of the electrode as well as the different
types of joints and the method of jointing may be provided by RVPN. The work shall
have to be done as detailed therein and as prescribed / finalized by the work In-charge.

b) Minimum joints shall be made in the laying of the earth mesh as well as in preparing
and laying of the risers.

(II) EARTH ELECTRODES:

a) Cutting of M. S. Rod to approximate lengths of 3.25 meters or more and preparation of

one end as spike, if required, for placing / driving into the ground.

b) Excavation of the ground as required for placing / driving the electrode.

c) Driving of above prepared electrode into the earth by hammering or placing it in the
excavated pit, as applicable, such that the top of the electrode is 0.55 meter below the
foundation top level.

d) Joint of MS Rod to MS Rod at earth electrode and at mesh crossings.

e) After welding apply bituminous compound to the hot joints & cover the joints with
bitumen impregnated tape.

7
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

f) Backfilling and compaction of the excavation after the completion of the work of
placing/ driving the electrode, its welding to the earth mesh and its inspection by the
work In-charge.

(III) LAYING OF EARTH MESH:

(a) Digging of trench along the specified alignment to a depth of 0.80 metres below the
foundation top level.

(b) Laying of earth mesh of M. S. Rod in the excavated trench.

(c) Straight Joints of M. S. Rods in the Earth Mat:

(i) Place the rods so that they overlap each other by 4 times their diameter, e.g., 100
mm in case of MS Rod of 25 mm diameter. Clamp/ hold these two lengths of
M.S. Rods together and weld them on both sides.

(ii) Thereafter, place two pieces of M. S. Flat of size to be used for earthing risers
and length 4 times the diameter of the rods on both sides of this joint, and weld
these pieces on the rods. JOINT OF M.S. ROD TO M.S. ROD IN EARTH MAT.

(iii) After welding, apply bituminous compound to the hot joints, and cover the joints
with bitumen impregnated tape.

(d) Joint of MS Rod and Earth Electrode:

(i) Clamp/ hold together the M.S. Rod and the earth electrode. First weld these
together at the crossing point.

(ii) Fabricate two cleats in the shape of M. S. Angles from M. S. Flat of size to be
used for earthing risers and of length equal to 10 times the diameter of the M. S.
Rod. Weld these at the joint. JOINT OF M.S. ROD TO M.S. ROD AT EARTH
ELECTRODE.

(iii) After welding, apply bituminous compound to the hot joints, and cover the joints
with bitumen impregnated tape.

(e) Cross Joints of M. S. Rods in the Earth Mat:

(i) Clamp/ hold together the two M. S. Rods crossing each other. First weld these
together at the crossing point.

(ii) Fabricate four cleats in the shape of M. S. Angles from M. S. Flat of size to be
used for earthing risers and of length equal to 10 times the diameter of the M. S.
Rod. Weld these at all the corners of the joint. JOINT OF M.S. ROD TO M.S.
ROD AT EARTH ELECTRODE AND AT MESH CROSSINGS.

(iii) After welding, apply bituminous compound to the hot joints, and cover the joints
with bitumen impregnated tape.

(f) After completion of the work and its inspection by the work In-charge, the backfilling of
the excavation and its compaction to original condition shall be done.

8
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

(IV) PREPARATION AND FITTING OF RISERS:

a) Digging of trench to a depth of 0.80 metre below the foundation top level from the
equipment / structure foundation to the nearest rod of the earth mesh.

b) Cut MS Flat of the required length and form/ bend it, by heating if required, to form a
smooth and regular shape to match with the shape/ form of the equipment/ structures/
foundation. The shape of the risers should be same/ similar for the same type of
equipment/ structure.

c) Lay the prepared MS flat riser from the equipment/ structure/ peak of the structure to
the rod of the earth mesh in the excavated trench and then connect it to the equipment
or structures or structure peak. The fitting to the equipment/ structure may be bolted
type (earthing terminal/ pad of the equipment) or welded type (structure). For bolted
type fitting, drill necessary holes in the riser and fix it with bolts & nuts. For welded type
fitting, weld a length equal to at least twice the width of the M. S. Flat.

d) In case joints are required to increase the length of the M. S. Flat risers, the two
lengths of the MS Flat should overlap each other by twice the width of the M. S. Flat.
After placing the M. S. flats one above the other as above, clamp/ hold them together
to provide good surface contact. Weld the two sides of the joint as well as the part
between the flats on the top surface. JOINT OF MS FLAT TO MS FLAT.

e) Weld the MS Flat riser to the rod of the earth mat after fitting/ welding it to the
equipment/ structure/ structure peak. Place the MS Flat below the rod, clamp/ hold
them together, and weld on both sides of the rod. Then form a piece of MS Flat 50 × 6
mm into a stirrup and place on the joint of the rod and flat. Alternatively, cut two pieces
of MS Angle 50 x 50 x 6 mm of length equal to the width of the MS Flat and place
these on both sides of the joint of the rod and flat. Weld these to both the rod and the
flat. JOINT OF MS FLAT TO MS ROD OF EARTHMAT.

f) After welding apply bituminous compound to hot joint and cover the joints with bitumen
impregnated tape.

g) After completion of the work and its inspection by the work In-charge, the backfilling of
the excavation and its compaction to original condition shall be done.

h) The portion of the risers above ground level shall be painted with red oxide paint and
green enamel paint.

(V) PROTECTION:

a) Lightning protection (DSLP) shall be provided in the switchyard by shield wires. There
may be some modifications in final arrangement.

b) The lightning protection system shall not be in direct contact with underground metallic
service ducts and cables.

c) M.S. Flat shall be run as down conductor from the peak of towers/columns to the earth
mesh to connect the shield wire to the earthing system of the sub-station.

d) Conductors of the lightning protection system shall not be connected with the
conductors of the safety earthing system above ground level.

9
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

e) Down conductors used for above lightning protection shall be cleated on the structures
at 2000 mm interval.

f) Connection between earth shield wire and each down conductor shall be made
through the earth bond of the earth wire tension clamp.

g) Lightning conductors shall not pass through or run inside G.I. conduits.

h) All metallic structures within a vicinity of 2000 mm in air and 5000 mm below ground
shall be bound to the conductors of lightning protection system.

10
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

ANNEXURE-B
WORK OF LAYING OF CABLES

(I) CABLE TAGS AND MARKERS:

a) Each cable run shall be tagged with numbers that appear in the cable [Link]
numbering of cables on the tags shall be done as per cable schedule and got approved
from the Engineer. Generally cable size,identification of initial point and terminating
end of equipment/panel, and a cable numbers are punched on cable tag/marking strip.

b) The tag shall be of 1.0 mm thick aluminium with the number punched on it and
securely attached to the cable by not less than two turn of 20 SWG GI wire conforming
to IS:280. Cable tags shall be of rectangular shape for power cables and control
cables.

c) Location of cables laid directly underground shall be clearly indicated with cable
marker made of galvanized iron plate.

d) Location of underground cable joints shall be indicated with cable marker with an
additional inscription "Cable joints".

e) The marker shall project 150 mm above ground and shall be spaced at an interval of
30 meters and at every change in direction. They shall be located on both sides of
road and drain crossings.

f) Cable tag shall be provided on all cables at each end (just before entering the
equipment enclosure), on both sides of a wall / floor crossing & on each duct entry.
Cable tags shall be provided inside the switchgear, motor control centers, control and
relay panels etc., wherever required for cable identification.

(II) STORAGE AND HANDLING OF CABLE DRUMS

Cable drums shall be unloaded, handled and stored in an approved manner and rolling
of drums shall be avoided as far as possible. For short distances, the drums may be
rolled provided they are rolled slowly and in proper direction as marked on the drum.
In absence of any indication the drums may be rolled in the same direction as it was
rolled during winding of the cables.

(III) CABLE SUPPORTS AND CABLE TRAY; MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS :

a) The contractor shall provide embedded steel inserts on concrete floors/ walls to
secure supports by welding to these inserts or available building steel structures,
for the purpose of casting in the control room.
b) The supports shall be fabricated from standard structural steel members.
c) Insert plates will be provided at an interval of 750 mm wherever cables are to be
supported without the use of cable trays, such as in trenches, while at all other
places these will be at an interval of 2000 mm.

(IV) LAYING OF CABLES IN TRENCHES:

The cables are placed in the racks in cable trenches. Power and control cables shall
be laid in separate tiers. The order of placing cables (other than those directly buried)
in cable trenches shall be as follows:

11
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

(a) Bottom tiers: Power Cables/ Cables having A. C. supply.

(b) Middle tiers: Cables from CT/ CVT/ PT.
(c) Upper most tiers: Cables having DC supply.

The cables are securely fixed on the racks in the cable trenches. Particular care shall
be taken when cables are laid in vertical & inclined cable trenches/ galleries/ vaults or
supports.

Pulling out of cables from stationary drums shall not be permitted. Rollers may be used
while pulling cables, if required.

(V) CABLE TERMINATION AND CONNECTIONS :

a) The termination and connection of cables shall be done strictly in accordance with
cable and termination kit manufacturer's instructions, drawing and / or as directed by
the Purchaser.

b) The work shall include all clamping, fittings, fixing, plumbing, soldering, drilling, cutting,
taping, heat shrinking (where applicable), connecting to cable terminal, shorting and
grounding as required to complete the job.

c) Supply of all consumable material shall be in the scope of contractor.

d) The equipment will be generally provided with undrilled gland plates for cables entry.
The contractor shall be responsible for drilling of gland plates, painting and touching
up. Holes shall not be made by gas cutting.

e) Control cable cores entering control panel/ switchgear/ MCCB/ MCC/ miscellaneous
panels shall be neatly bunched, clamped & tied with nylon strap or PVC perforated
strap to keep them in position.

f) The contractor shall tag/ ferrule control cable cores at all terminations, as instructed by
the Purchaser. In panels where a large number of cables are to be terminated and
cable identification may be difficult, each core ferrule may include the complete cable
number as well.

g) Spare cores shall be similarly tagged with cable numbers and coiled up.

h) All cable entry points shall be sealed and made vermin and dust proof. Unused
openings shall be effectively closed.

i) Single compression type nickel plated (coating thickness not less than 10 microns)
brass cable glands as per IS:12943 shall be provided by the contractor for all power
and control cables to provide dust and weather proof terminations.

j) The cable glands shall be as per IS:12943. They shall comprise of heavy duty brass
casting, machine finished and nickel plated, to avoid corrosion and oxidation. Rubber
components used in cable glands shall be neoprene and of tested quality.

k) If the cable-end box or terminal enclosure provided on the equipment is found

unsuitable and requires modification, the same shall be carried out by the contractor,
as directed by the purchaser.

12
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

l) Cable lugs shall be insulated tinned copper solder less crimping type conforming to
relevant ISS. Supply of same shall be in the scope of the contractor.

m) Solder less crimping of terminals shall be done using appropriate crimping tool. The
cable lugs shall suit the type of terminals and size of cable provided.

(VI) DIRECTLY BURIED CABLES :

a) The contractor shall construct the cable trenches required for directly buried cables.
The scope of work shall include excavation, preparation of sand bedding, soil cover,
supply and installation of brick or concrete protective covers, back filling and ramming,
supply and installation of route markers and joint markers. The bidder shall ascertain
the soil conditions prevailing at site, if he feels, before submitting the bid.

b) The cable (power and control) between LT station, control room, shall be laid in the
buried cable trenches. In addition to the above, for lighting purpose also, buried cable
trench can be used in outdoor area, where cable trenches are not provided.

c) Cable route and joint markers and RCC warning covers shall be provided wherever
required. The voltage grade of cables shall be engraved on the marker.

(VII) INSTALLATION OF CABLES:

(i) Cabling shall be on cable racks, in built-up trenches, vertical shafts, excavated
trenches for direct burial, pulled through pipes and conduits laid in concrete ducts, run
bare and clamped on wall / ceiling / steel structures etc. as shown in the drawings in
detailed Engineering stage. Where specific cable layouts are not shown on drawings,
contractor shall route these as directed by the Purchaser. Cables in cable vault
provided below control room shall be laid in cable trays.

(ii) The contractor shall fabricate and install mounting arrangements for the support and
installation of all the cables on angles at 750 mm spacing in the trenches. These
mounting structures / cable racks shall be fabricated from structural steel members
(channels, angles and flats) of the required size. The fabrication, welding and erection
of these structures shall conform to the relevant clauses of chapter for Structures, in
addition to the specification given herein.

(iii) Cable racks and supports shall be painted after installation with two coats of metal
primer (comprising of red oxide and zinc chromate in a synthetic medium) followed by
two finishing coats of aluminium paint. The red oxide and zinc chromate shall conform
to IS:2074. All welding works inclusive of the consumables required for fabrication and
installation shall be in the scope of the Contractor.

(iv) All cables from bay cable trench to equipment including all Interpole cables (both
power and control) for all equipment, shall be laid in cable trenches / pipes of
appropriate size. The scope shall include all labour, material, equipment for
transporting, laying, burying etc.

(v) Cables shall be generally located in cable trench / pipes adjoining the electrical
equipment. In all these cases necessary bending radius as recommended by the cable
manufacturer shall be maintained.

(vi) Suitable arrangement should be used between fixed pipe / cable trays and equipment
terminal boxes, where vibration is anticipated.

13
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

(vii) Single core cables in trefoil formation shall be laid with a distance of three times the
diameter of cable between trefoil centre lines. All power cables shall be laid with a
minimum centre to centre distance equal to twice the diameter of the cable.

(viii) Trefoil clamps for single core cables shall be of pressure die cast aluminium (LM-6),
Nylon-6 or fibber glass and shall include necessary fixing GI nuts, bolts, washer etc.
These are required at every 2 meter of cable runs.

(ix) Power and control cables shall be securely fixed to the trays. Vertical and inclined
cable runs shall also be secured.

(x) Cables shall not be bent below the minimum permissible limit. The permissible limits
are as follows :
Type of cableMinimum bending radius

Power cable 12 D
Control cable 10 D
(D is overall diameter of cable)

(xi) Where cables cross roads, drains and rail tracks, these shall be laid in cable trenches
with reinforced walls and reinforced covers suitable for taking the load of the vehicles
(including transformer) passing over them.

(xii) In each cable run some extra length shall be kept at a suitable point to enable (one for
LT cables / two for HT cables) straight through joint(s) to be made in case the cable
develop fault at a later date.

(xiii) Selection of length of cables on cable drums shall be so planned as to avoid necessity
of any straight through joints. Cable splices will not be permitted except where called
for by the drawings, unavoidable or where permitted by the Purchaser. If straight
through joints are unavoidable, the contractor shall use the straight through joints kit of
reputed make as approved by the purchaser.

(xiv) Control cable terminations inside equipment enclosures shall have sufficient lengths so
that changing of termination in terminal blocks can be done without requiring any
splicing.

(xv) Metal screen and armour of the cable shall be bonded to the earthing system of the
station, wherever required by the Purchaser.

(xvi) Rollers may be used while pulling cables, if required.

(xvii) All due care shall be taken during unreeling, laying and termination of cable to avoid
damage due to twist, kinks, sharp bends etc.

(xviii) Cable ends shall be kept sealed to prevent damage.

(xix) Inspection on receipt, unloading and handling of cables shall generally be in

accordance with IS:1255 and other Indian Standard Codes of Practices.

(xx) Wherever cable pass through floor or through wall openings or other partitions, wall
sleeves with bushes having a smooth curved internal surface so as not to damage the
cable, shall be supplied, installed and properly sealed by the Contractor at no extra
charges.

14
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

(xxi) Contractor shall remove the RCC/ steel trench covers before taking up the work and
shall replace all the trench covers after the erection work in that particular area is
completed or when further work is not likely to be taken up for some time.

xxii) In case the outer sheath of a cable is damaged during handling/ installation, the
contractor shall repair it at his own cost to the satisfaction of the purchaser. In case any
other part of a cable is damaged, the total length of the cable shall be replaced by a
healthy cable at no extra cost to the purchaser, i.e. the contractor shall not be paid for
installation and removal of the damaged cable.

(xxiii) All cable terminations shall be appropriately tightened to ensure secure and reliable
connections.

15
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

ANNEXURE-C
WORK OF ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT STRUCTURES AND SUB-STATION
STRUCTURES AND BEAMS

SCOPE OF WORK:

Clearance of material, its transportation & distribution at site and assembly, setting including
fixing of template, levelling, grouting, erection, tightening & punching of nuts and bolts of
equipment / sub – station structures / columns and beams complete in all respects.

(I) ERECTION TOOLS AND PLANTS:

The contractor shall arrange at his own expense all necessary erection tools & plants
such as levelling instruments, tackles, spanners, jacks, winches, ropes, and any other
T & P required for the erection of the structures / beams.

(II) SETTING, LEVELLING AND GROUTING:

(a) In case of structures with foundation bolts, the template, alongwith the foundation bolts
tightened on it with nuts on both sides, shall be placed on the foundation and levelled &
centered with reference to its location on the foundation. The length of the foundation
bolts above the template shall be sufficient so that all parts of the base plate assembly
of the structure and washer, nut and lock nut can be tightened fully and 2 –3 threads
are left above the lock nut. The template is levelled and centered with reference to its
location on foundation. The foundation bolts shall thereafter be grouted ensuring that
there is no displacement during the casting of the concrete and use of vibrator.

(b) In case of structures with stubs or structures with the lowest member being also used
as a stub, the template or the assembled lower part of the structure with stubs shall be
placed on the foundation and levelled & centered with reference to its location on the
foundation. The stubs shall thereafter be grouted ensuring that there is no
displacement during the casting of the concrete and use of vibrator.

While leveling and centering the structure / template, the following points should be
checked:

(i) Level of structure/ template with reference to the finished foundation level or the
ground level.
(ii) The level of the structure/template with reference to level of other similar
structures.
(iii) Distance of centre line of the structure from the center line of other structures or
from a reference point.
(iv) Centre to centre distance between structures, particularly structures which are to
be connected together, for example, by a common beam.

(c) The difference in the elevation between the top of the foundation bolts or identical parts
of any two stub angles / structure lower members shall not exceed 1 / 1000 of the
horizontal distance between them.

(III) ERECTION OF STRUCTURES AND BEAMS:

(a) The method of erection shall be left to the Contractor subject to the condition that the
method used does not damage RVPN material and subject to observance of safety
regulations.

16
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

(b) The work of erection of structures/ beams shall include erection of all the steel
members, nuts & bolts, pack washers, spring washers, step bolts, U-bolts, &
accessories, etc.

(c) The columns shall be truly vertical & the beams truly horizontal after erection. The
columns shall not be out of vertical by more than 1 in 360 before stringing is carried
out. The equipment structures shall also not be out of vertical by more than 1 in 360
before erection of equipment is carried out. No straining of structure members shall be
permitted to bring them to verticality / horizontality.

(d) Whenever asked to do so, the contractor shall get checked the verticality of the
columns in the presence of RVPN Engineer.

(e) The work of erection of beams on erected columns and erection of equipment on
erected structures shall not be taken up until these have been inspected by the Work
In-charge and cleared by him for taking up further erection activities.

(f) All bolted connections shall be well tightened using spring washers & then punched at
three points on the circumference of the bolt.

(IV) DRAWINGS/ BILL OF MATERIAL:

The drawings and bills of material of the structures/columns/ beams shall be kept
available by the contractor at site for inspection of RVPN Engineer.

17
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

ANNEXURE-D

WORK OF STRINGING OF BUS BAR AND EARTHWIRE AND JUMPERING

SCOPE OF WORK:

The scope of work includes transportation of conductor, earthwire, disc insulators,

suspension and tension hardware for conductor/ earthwire and distribution at site, stringing
of conductor bus bars & shield earthwire, fixing of earth bonds, jumpering at beams and
peaks, jumpering between equipment, fixing of spacers, etc. as required at site.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS :

a) Care shall be taken during sagging operations so that no damage or deformation is

caused to the structures.

b) The ends of the cut piece of conductor shall be tied with atleast two rounds of binding
wire so that the strand do not open out. The tying of the binding wire shall be done
such that the binding wire does not get tightened in the groove of the T-Clamp or PG
Clamp or the terminal connectors of the equipments.

c) Work at sending end sub-stations may be required to be done where the adjacent or
overhead or parallel portions may be energized. The Contractor shall therefore take
adequate and sufficient safety measures to ensure that no electrical accident is caused
during execution of this work. The Contractor shall also arrange effective earthing for
safety against induced voltages so that work can be carried out without any danger/
hazard to his workmen.

d) Wherever it is necessary to avail shutdowns of energized circuits for carrying out the
work, the Contractor shall submit a requisition to the work In-charge stating the date
and time and duration of the shutdown and the section/portion which is to be isolated.
The shutdown shall be arranged by the work In-charge and the Contractor shall ensure
that the work is completed within the requisitioned time. The Contractor shall also carry
out the effective earthing of the portion under shutdown.

(I) STRINGING OF CONDUCTOR BUS BARS:

a) The conductor shall be handled with utmost care to prevent scratches on it or damage
to the strands of the conductor. The conductor shall be paid out after placing the
conductor drum on a turn-table or after jacking it up on a suitable size of shaft. During
paying out, the conductor shall not be allowed to get damaged by touching or rubbing
on the sides of the drum or on stones or any other metallic or hard object lying on the
ground.

b) Disc insulators shall be cleaned and examined. Disc insulators having any hair cracks
or chipping or defective glazing or any other defect shall not be used.

c) The disc insulators shall be assembled on the ground to form the suspension and
tension strings as given below. After assembly of the strings, the mouth of the W –
clips/ R – clips shall be widened to prevent any inadvertent removal during service.

Suspension String Tension String

[Link]. System Voltage
Nos. E & M Strength(kN) Nos. E & M Strength (kN)
1. 132 kV 9 70 10 120
2. 33 kV 3 70 4 120

18
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

d) The suspension & tension hardware shall be assembled as per their respective
drawings alongwith the fitting of the relevant insulator string.

e) For stringing of bus bars, the conductor shall be fixed and tightened in the clamp of the
tension hardware on one side of the bus. Thereafter, the complete hardware assembly
with the conductor shall be hoisted up and fixed on the beam at this end. Sagging
arrangement shall be made on the other end of the bus and the conductor shall be
tensioned.

f) Measurement of length of conductor required for the bus shall be made thereafter and
the conductor shall be released so that it returns to the ground. The conductor shall be
cut to the marked length after deducting the length of the tension hardware with
insulators and fixed on the clamps of the tension hardware. The conductor along with
tension hardware set shall then be again pulled up and connected to the beam.

g) Equalizing of tension in the different sub – conductors of the same phase and in the
different phases shall be done, if required, to ensure equal sag of all the sub –
conductors or between phases of the bus section as well as that of adjacent or parallel
sections.

h) The spacers shall be fitted on the twin conductor bus bars. The spacers shall also be
provided at points where jumpers are taken from the bus bar using T- clamps and/or
PG clamps. Spacers are not used at jumper points in case T - Spacers are used for
taking jumpers from multi conductor bus bars.

(II) STRINGING OF SHIELD EARTHWIRE:

a) The earthwire shall be handled with utmost care to prevent scratches on it or damage
to the strands of the wire. The earthwire shall be paid out after placing the earthwire
drum on a turntable or after jacking it up on a suitable size of shaft. During paying out,
the earthwire shall not be allowed to get damaged by touching or rubbing on the sides
of the drum or on stones or any other metallic or hard object lying on the ground.

b) The tension hardware shall be assembled as per its relevant drawing.

c) The shield / earth wire shall be fitted and tightened in the clamp of the tension
hardware on one side. Thereafter, the complete hardware assembly along with the
shield / earth wire shall be hoisted up and fixed on the peak of the structure at one end.

d) Sagging arrangement shall be made on the other end and the shield / earth wire shall
be tensioned. Measurement of length of shield / earth wire required shall be made
thereafter and the shield / earth wire shall again be released so that it is returned to the
ground. The shield / earth wire shall be cut to the marked length after adding the length
of the wire required for jumpering and fitted in the clamp of the tension hardware at the
marked point. The shield / earth wire along with tension hardware set shall then be
pulled up again and connected to the peak of the structure.

e) Adjustment of tension in the earthwire shall be done to ensure equal sag of all the
earthwires in adjacent or parallel sections.

(III) JUMPERING OF CONDUCTOR AT BEAMS:

a) The suspension hardware shall be hoisted and fixed on the beams.

19
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

b) The appropriate length of the conductors shall be first cut and straightened so that
kinks are removed.

c) The length of the conductor used and its natural curve should be such that a neat and
proper curve is obtained in the jumper without any kinks or bends. The clamp of the
suspension hardware shall be tightened after ensuring proportional lengths of the
conductor on both the sides.

d) The jumpers from conductors shall be Y- type. The jumper shall be first connected to
the conductor using a T- clamp suitable for the main conductor and the conductor
being used for the jumpering. Thereafter, the main conductor shall be connected in
parallel with the jumper conductor at the point of jumpering by using a piece of properly
curved & shaped conductor and 2 Nos. PG - clamps, one on each side.

e) For jumpers from conductor to equipment, the conductor side jumper shall be
connected as given above at at item (c) above. The other side of the jumper shall then
be connected to the terminal connector of the equipment.

(IV) JUMPERING OF SHIELD EARTHWIRE:

a) The lengths of the earthwire which remain outside the tension hardware on the peak of
the structures shall be cut if required so that these lengths when joined together form a
smooth and proper curve. These shall be connected together using a PG - clamp.

b) The earth bond provided with the earthwire tension clamp shall be connected to the
specified point on the peak of the structure and / or the M. S. Flat riser which is used
as a down conductor from the peak for the purpose of connecting the shield earthwire
to the earth mesh of the sub – station.

c) The tying of the binding wire on the ends of the earthwire shall be done such that the
binding wire is not tightened in the groove of the PG - clamps.

(V) CONDUCTOR JUMPERING BETWEEN EQUIPMENT:

a) The appropriate length of the conductors shall be first cut and straightened so that
curves and kinks are removed.

b) The jumper conductor shall then be connected to the terminal connectors of both the
equipments and straightened or shaped as per site condition and as directed by the
work In-charge to give a neat and proper look.

c) Vertically supported insulators of equipments and post insulators should be checked

for verticality again after jumpering on both sides.

20
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

ANNEXURE-E

WORK OF ERECTION OF GRID SUB-STATION EQUIPMENTS

1.0 EQUIPMENT ERECTION GENERAL NOTES:

1.1 Erection of equipment shall be carried out as per and in the manner prescribed in the
erection, testing & commissioning manual/ instructions procedures of the
manufacturer. For transformer & circuit breakers the services of the Manufacturer‟s
Engineer shall be utilized, any charges on this account shall be borne by the
contractor.
1.2 All the equipment shall be perfectly levelled and vertical .
1.3 Adjustment/alignment of isolators including setting of limit switches, Aux. switches
should be checked before and again after jumpering at both side.
1.4 Verticality of support insulators of equipments and bus PIs should be checked again
after jumpering on both side, and corrected, if required.
1.5 All support insulators, circuit breaker interrupters and other fragile equipment shall
preferably be handled with cranes having suitable booms and handling capacity.
1.6 The slings shall be of sufficient length to avoid any damage to insulator due to
excessive swing, scratching by sling ropes etc.
1.7 Handling equipment, sling ropes etc. should be tested periodically before erection for
strength.
1.8 Bending of compressed air piping if any should be done by a bending machine and
through cold bending only. Bending shall be such that inner diameter of pipe is not
reduced.
1.9 Cutting of the pipes wherever required shall be such as to avoid flaring of the ends.
Hence only a proper pipe cutting tool shall be used. Hack saw shall not be used.
1.10 Mulmul or leather cloth shall be used for cleaning the inside and outside of hollow
insulators.
1.11 All the equipment, instruments and auxiliaries required for testing and commissioning
of equipment shall be arranged at site by the Contractor.

2.0 STORAGE:

2.1 Contractor shall provide and construct adequate storage shed for proper storage of
equipments, where sensitive equipments shall be stored indoors. All equipments
during storage shall be protected against damage due to acts of nature or accidents.
The storage instructions of the equipment manufacturer / purchaser shall be strictly
adhered to.

(I) TRANSFORMERS:

a) All tools and plants whatsoever, such as oil filtration plant, oil storage tank(s), crane,
etc. shall be arranged by the Contractor.
b) The work shall have to be carried out under the supervision of RVPN/ Manufacturer‟s
Engineer and as per instructions given by him/ them.
c) The erection work shall be got done generally as per instructions/ procedures given in
the following documents:

21
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

(i) Manufacturer‟s Erection & Installation Manual

(ii) Manufacturer‟s Erection drawings.
(iiii) IS:10028;1981: Indian Standard code of Practice for Selection, Installation and
Maintenance of [Link]: Installation.
(iv) Transformer Manual (Technical Report No.1) issued by the Central Board of
Irrigation & Power.

(A) Initial oil filling in Transformers received gas filled:

(i) Oil Preparation:

The oil supplied in oil drums (for first filling, topping up &OLTC) shall be first filled into
oil storage tank(s) through filter machine. This oil shall then be filtered in the tank(s).

(ii) The following oil values shall be attained so as to facilitate early and effective
dehydration of transformer:
(a) Break Down Voltage: 70 kV (Minimum)
(b) Moisture Content: 10 ppm (Maximum)

(B) Vacuuming of the Transformer (if required):

(i) Provide equalizing connections between main tank and OLTC Diverter Switch
chamber(s) and isolate those parts of the Transformer which are not designed for
vacuum.

(ii) Erection of the part of the pipeline between the tank and the conservator up to the
Buchholz relay.

(iii) Connect breather to any valve above the tank oil level through a suitable pipe.

(iv) Connect a transparent plastic pipe ( suitable for withstanding vacuum) between the top
and bottom valves of the transformer to check the oil level.

(v) Apply vacuum to the transformer. The vacuum pipe is generally connected to the
pipeline between transformer tank and conservator. The extent of vacuum and the time
duration of its application shall be as per Manufacturer's recommendations.

(C) Initial Oil Filling (if required):

(i) The treated oil shall then be filled into the transformer tank under vacuum until the oil
level reaches 250 mm below the top cover level. The oil level can be seen in the
transparent plastic pipe provided.

(ii) The vacuum in the tank is then slowly released by slightly opening the valve on which
the breather is connected so that only moisture free air goes inside the tank. The rate
of release of vacuum should be kept very slow so that the silica gel in the breather
does not get sucked into the tank.

(D) This oil is filtered in the tank until the values given at A (ii) are attained.

(E) Transformers with tank mounted cooler bank/ radiators:

(i) Erection of headers, if provided.

(ii) Erection of radiators on headers / tank.

22
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

(F) ERECTION OF ACCESSORIES:

(i) Erection of main conservator & On Load Tap Changer (OLTC) conservator along with
their supports.

(ii) Erection of HV & LV turrets, when supplied separately.

(iii) Erection of HV, LV & neutral bushing(s) and making their connections inside the tank,
as required.

(iv) Fitting of Pressure Relief Devices along with pipes, if provided.

(v) Assembly and fitting of equalizing pipeline between tank cover, turrets, inspection
covers, etc. as provided.

(vi) Assembly and fitting of Buchholz pipeline, fitting of valves, expansion joints as provided
and Buchholz relays, and connecting it to the equalizing pipeline and the main
conservator. The arrow marks on the Buchholz relays should point towards the
conservator.

(vii) Assembly and fitting of pipelines for breathers of main and OLTC conservators and
fixing of breathers after checking the silica gel (to be replaced/ regenerated, if not of
blue colour), and also filling of oil in the oil cup. Ensure that the sealing provided on the
air passage of the breathers has been removed.

(viii) Assembly and fitting of pipeline for the OLTC Diverter Switch including valves and oil
surge relay and connecting it to the OLTC conservator. The arrow marks on the oil
surge relays should point towards the conservator.

(ix) Assembly & fitting of cooler fans, including fitting of supports, if provided. The levelling,
centering and grouting of ground mounted supports is to be got done before erection.

(x) Erection/ placing of fan control cubicle/ marshalling box &OLTC drive mechanism. In
case these are ground mounted, then these are to be placed on the foundation,
levelled, centered and then grouted.

(xi) Filling of topping up oil in the transformer tank and conservator. During this process,
the air release valves/ plugs provided on the top of the conservator should be kept
open. The oil shall be filled up to 1/3rd level in the conservator.

(G) Dehydration of Transformer by Hot Oil Circulation until specified/ recommended

values of insulation resistance and oil quality are attained .

(H) Pressurizing of air cell in the main conservator.

(I) Filling of oil in OLTC and its Dehydration.

(J) Release air from all air release points till there are no air bubbles in the oil coming out
from these air release points.

(K) Assembly of OLTC Drive Mechanism & Operating System:

(i) Fix the brackets, gear boxes and operating shafts between OLTC drive mechanism
and OLTC diverter switches, if provided separately. When connecting the operating

23
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

shaft(s), ensure that the tap position indicated in the OLTC drive mechanism and at the
head of OLTC diverter switch(es) are the same. Lock the bolts & nuts of the coupling
brackets of the operating shaft(s), if provided.

(ii) Check the operation of the OLTC manually and make adjustments so that there are
equal numbers of free turns of the operating handle after each tap change in the
diverter switch both during Raise & Lower operations.

(L) Cabling on the Transformer:

(i) Carry out laying of control cables from fans, protective relays, bushing/ WTI CT‟s, etc.
to the fan control cubicle/ marshalling box/ Temperature meter box.

(ii) Prepare the cables at both the ends and fit into cable glands.

(iii) Fix the cables on these cable gland plates and connect the wires as per schematic
drawing.

(M) Fix/ fit the minor accessories.

(N) Specific checks/ tests prescribed by the manufacturer are to be carried out.

(O) PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECKS: It is to be ensured that:

(i) All equipments are mounted in position as per General Arrangement drawing of the
manufacturer.

(ii) Minimum clearances between live parts and between live parts to earth are as per
General Arrangement drawing.

(iii) Arrow on the Buchholz Relays & Oil Surge Relays is pointing towards the Conservator.

(iv) Inspect the transformer all over and check all flanged joints and fittings for oil leakages.
If found necessary, re-tighten the bolts.

(v) Isolating valves in Buchholz pipe line and all the radiators and any valve, if provided in
the breather pipeline are fully opened and locked in the open position.

(vi) Oil level in the main conservator and OLTC conservator is as per the oil temperature.

(vii) Oil level in the condenser bushings is upto the mark.

(viii) The thermometer pockets provided for oil and winding temperature indicators are filled
with oil.

(ix) The colour of silica gel in the breathers is blue and that oil is filled up to correct oil level
mark in the oil cup.

(x) Buchholz relay contacts are not locked and these are in „SERVICE‟ position.

(xi) The transport locks provided in equipment such as the MOLG, OTI, WTI, etc. have
been removed.

(xii) Setting of all the mercury switches for Alarm, Trip and Cooler control in the Oil and
Winding Temperature Indicators.

24
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

(xiii) The Transformer neutral is connected to earth at two separate earth pits/ electrodes
which in turn are connected to the earth mat.

(xiv) The Transformer tank, OLTC drive mechanism, cooler bank, marshalling box, cooler
control cabinet, temperature meter box, etc., as provided, are earthed.

(xv) Proper connections and tightness of terminal connectors provided on Bushings.

(xvi) Bolts & nuts of the coupling brackets of the operating shaft(s) of the OLTC have been
locked.

(xvii) No oil is visible in Explosion Vent sight glass, if provided.

(xviii) Setting of overload/ protection relays/ MCBs for fans & pumps and for OLTC motor as
per their rating.

(P) PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS: Checking of:

(i) Operation of the corresponding auxiliary relays, Master Trip relays and alarm
annunciation on actual operation of the transformer mounted protective Relays and
supervisory equipments.

(ii) Tripping of HV circuit breaker & inter tripping of LV circuit breaker on operation of
Master Trip Relays. This may be checked for operation of each Master Trip Relay for 2
or 3 protective relays.

(iii) Phase sequence of the AC supply to the Cooler Control Cubicle (CCC)/ Fan Control
Cubicle (FCC)/ Marshalling Box.

(iv) Direction of rotation of fans.

(v) Operation of fans as per settings made in the winding temperature indicators.

(vi) Operation of stand by fans on failure of each fan.

(vii) Lamp indications on RTCC Panel for fans.

(viii) Testing of alarm annunciations, such as “Fan Fail: Group-1 & 2”, “Cooler Control
Supply Fail”, “Stand by Fan Fail: Group-1 & 2” etc., as provided, in the RTCC Panel.

(ix) Manual operation of OLTC.

(x) Electrical operation of OLTC.

(xi) Reading of Oil & Winding temperatures on Remote Temperature indicators provided in
RTCC Panel with reference to the OTI &WTI fitted on the transformer.

(xii) Testing of Transformer:

(a) Magnetizing current measurement of all three phases of LV winding with single
phase supplyapplied between phase and neutral one by one keeping HV winding
open.

25
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

(b) Magnetizing current measurement of all three phases of HV winding at Tap No. 1
with single phase supplyapplied between phase and neutral one by one keeping
LV winding open.

(c) Magnetic balance test on all three phases of LV windingby applying single phase
voltage one by one between phase and neutral of one phase and measuring the
induced voltage on the other two phases.

(d) Short circuit current measurement of all three phases of HV winding at Tap no. 1
with single phase supply applied between phase and neutral one by one with LV
winding short – circuited.

(e) HV & LV WTI CT testing by measuring the current in the leads from the WTI CT
terminals to the winding temperature indicator(s) during the above short circuit
current measurement tests.

(f) Checking of continuity of contacts in diverter switch:

(g) Transformer Turns ratio measurement between HV & LV using turns ratio
measuring instrument.

(h) Insulation resistance measurement between HV-Earth, LV-Earth & HV-LV using
5 kV Insulation tester.

(i) Winding resistance measurement of all three phases of HV (at Tap No. 1) &LV
windings.

(j) Measurement of Capacitance and Tan  of condenser bushings and transformer

windings.

(k) Checking of Vector Group of the transformer.

(l) Complete testing of Transformer oil (Test results shall be within limits as
recommended in IS 1866:2000.)

The following tests are generally desired to be got carried out on transformer oil as per
IS 1866:2000 -Code of Practice for Electrical Maintenance and Supervision of Mineral
Insulating Oil in Equipment.

S. No. Property of Oil

1. Appearance
2. Density at 29.5ºC
3. Neutralization value.
4. Water Content
5. Dielectric dissipation factor at 90ºC and 40 Hz to 60 Hz.
6. Resistivity (90ºC)
7. Breakdown Voltage
8. Dissolved Gas Analysis
9. Viscosity at 27ºC
10. Flash Point
11. Pour point.
12. Interfacial Tension
13. Oxidation Stability of uninhibited oil
(i) Neutralization Value
(ii) Sludge

26
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

S. No. Property of Oil

14. Oxidation Stability of inhibited oil
(i) Induction Period

(m) Other tests as prescribed in IS 10028-1981:

(n) Other tests as prescribed in the Operation and Maintenance Manual of the
Manufacturer.

(II)CONTROL & RELAY PANELS/ DC PANEL/RTCC PANEL/ LT PANEL:

(A) ERECTION AND INSTALLATION:

(i) The panels shall be placed at their designated locations in the Control Room as
approved by the work In-charge.

(ii) The panels shall be fixed / bolted on the trench provided in the floor of the Control
Room or on the base frame as provided.

(iii) In the case of Duplex type of panels, the control panel is to be connected to the relay
panel across the corridor and bolted together. Corridor covers shall be fitted thereafter.

(iv) The panels which form a Board or are to be placed adjacent to an existing Board shall
be placed side by side and bolted together.

(v) The panels shall be levelled and arranged properly. There shall be no gaps between
panels which are to be placed adjacent to each other.

(vi) Bus wiring/ interconnecting wiring shall be done between the Duplex type control &
relay panels and between control panel to control panel and/ or relay panel to relay
panel which form a Board or are to be connected to an existing Board/Panel as per
their relevant schematic drawings.

(B) PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS:

- Checking of tightening of all terminal connections.

- Checking of earthing of the panels to the earth mesh.

- Testing of individual relays, protection schemes, transducers, ICT‟s, indicating meters,

integrating meters, etc. for conformity of their characteristics to the specifications and
to the technical information/ details/ particulars intimated by the manufacturer.

- Testing and verification of individual relays, protection schemes, transducers, ICT‟s,

indicating meters, integrating meters, etc. for their performance at the applied voltage/
current/ operating supply and at the settings selected for their service conditions, and
making necessary changes in the settings if and as required.

- Testing of protection scheme logics for alarm and trip as per approved schematic
drawings.

- Testing of Annunciation scheme by actuating individual alarms from the initiating

equipment such as relays, protection schemes, circuit breakers, transformer, etc.

27
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

- Testing of stability of protection schemes such as differential protection scheme for

transformer, etc.

- Testing of tripping & inter-tripping of associated circuit breakers on the operation of

relays/ protection schemes and their closing interlocks, etc. as provided in the scheme
logic.

- Checking of operation of equipment from the control switches/ push buttons provided
for them.

- Verification of indication lamps/ semaphores by operating the relevant equipment.

- Testing of internal illumination system including operation of the door switches.

- Testing of functioning of space heaters and sockets, etc.

(C) POST-COMMISSIONING CHECKS :

- Measurement of voltage & current in the relevant circuits, and checking their readings
in the relays, protection schemes, meters, etc.

- Checking of phase sequence of the voltage in the control and relay panels.

- Checking of stability of transformer differential protection on load.

- Checking and verification of directional feature of over current, earth fault, and distance
protection schemes, as applicable.

(III) ISOLATORS:

(A) ERECTION AND INSTALLATION:

(i) Levelling of already erected structure and minor fabrication work as required for
erection of the Isolator & operating mechanism.

(ii) Erection of the 3 Nos. base frames of individual phases on the already erected and
leveled structure.

(iii) Levelling and centering of the base frames.

(iv) Fixing of link pipes on the rotating parts on the base frames of the individual phases.

(v) Assembly of the polycone insulator/ insulator stack as applicable, fixed contacts (6
Nos.) and moving contact (3 Nos.) in case of double break Isolator, and then erection
of the above assemblies on the base frames.

(vi) Adjustment/ alignment of individual phases for smooth and complete opening and
closing operation.

(vii) Fixing of operating lever, male and female contacts and counterweights, etc. of the
earth switches, where required, and their adjustment/ alignment for smooth and
complete opening and closing operation.

28
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

(viii) Fitting of operating mechanism box for the Isolator and earth switch as applicable.

(ix) Fitting of inter-phase operating pipes between the base frames of the individual
phases.

(x) Fixing of main operating down pipes to operating mechanism for main Isolator and the
earth switch, including fixing of operating levers.

(xi) Final adjustment/ alignment of main Isolator and earth switch for their smooth,
synchronized and complete operation of all the three phases as a complete unit.

(xii) Adjustment and setting of mechanical interlock between main Isolator and earth switch
to ensure that earth switch does not close if main Isolator is closed, and that main
Isolator does not close if earth switch is closed.

(xiii) Adjustment and setting of auxiliary switches and mechanical end stoppers for both the
end positions of closing and opening operations. Adjustment of interlocking coil &
plunger in closed and open positions.

(xiv) Fixing of arcing horns (make before & open after the main contacts), terminal
connectors, earth bonds and other accessories, etc. as provided.

(xv) Laying of cables and wiring.

(B) PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS & CHECKS:

- Measurement of insulation resistance with 5 kV Insulation tester between each phase

to earth in the Isolator closed position.

- Checking of operation of Isolator and earth switch for smooth functioning, complete
insertion and making of contacts in closed condition, functioning of mechanical
interlock between main Isolator and earth switch, setting of end stoppers and operation
of auxiliary switches.

- Checking of semaphore indications in C&R panel for Isolator and earth switch open
and closed conditions .

- Checking of operation of inter locking coil in isolators and earth switches.

- Earthing of the main Isolator and the earth switch.

(IV) CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

(A) ERECTION AND INSTALLATION:

(i) Erection of the support structure along with operating mechanism on the foundation, its
levelling and centering and grouting, if applicable.

(ii) Erection of the common base channel, or the base channel along with breaker poles,
on the support structure, as applicable.

(iii) Levelling of the top of the already erected support structure(s).

29
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

(iv) Cleaning of breaker poles or breaker poles assembly as applicable.

(v) Erection of the breaker poles or breaker poles assembly on the support columns /
support structure / common base channel as applicable.

(vi) Fitting of SF6 gas pipeline between poles, and filling of SF6 gas in the three poles to
the prescribed pressure including checking of the operation of the alarm and lockout
contacts provided in the density monitor during this filling. The SF6 gas shall be filled in
one pole at a time to ensure that gas is being filled in all the three poles. Leakage of
SF6 gas shall thereafter be checked and attended if detected.

(vii) Laying of cables between operating mechanisms of individual phases and to control
cubicle, or from common operating mechanism to control cubicle, as applicable and as
provided, fixing of cables in cable glands, fixing of cable glands on cable gland plates,
and making connection of the cables as per schematic diagram of the circuit breaker.

(viii) Dressing and fixing of cables in cable trays / trenches / supports / brackets / pipes.

(ix) Fitting of terminal connectors on the three phases of the breaker.

(x) Operational checks of the circuit breaker as per erection and installation manual /
instructions of the manufacturer.

(B) PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS& CHECKS:

- Measurement of insulation resistance with 5 kV Insulation tester in all the three phases
between lower terminal to earth and between upper and lower terminals with the
breaker in the open position.

- Checking of SF6 gas leakage.

- Checking of closing, opening and protection tripping operation of breaker from local
and remote, operation of anti-pumping relay, pole discrepancy relay, if provided,
annunciations of alarms, operation counter, resistance of closing and tripping coils, as
applicable.

- Measurement of closing, opening and close – open operating timings of the breaker.

- Operation of the emergency tripping arrangement.

- Operation of auxiliary switch.

- Checking of space heater and internal illumination circuits.

- Earthing of the poles, control cubicle, operating mechanism, compressor &

structure(s), as applicable.

(V) CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:

(A) ERECTION AND INSTALLATION:

(i) Levelling of already erected structure(s) and minor fabrication work as required for
erection of the current transformers.

30
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

(ii) Measuring IR values of primary terminals to earth with 5 kV Insulation tester.

(iii) Erection of the current transformers on the already erected and leveled structure(s).

(iv) Fitting of terminal connectors on the current transformers.

(v) Laying of cables from secondary terminal box to the bay marshalling kiosks/ junction
box, dressing and fixing of cables in cable trays/ trenches/ supports/ brackets / pipes.

(vi) The cores of current transformers which are not used must be shorted and earthed in
the Marshalling Kiosks/ Junction Box.

(vii) Checking of the oil level in current transformer.

(B) PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS & CHECKS:

- Measurement of insulation resistance between primary winding to earth, primary

winding to all the secondary windings and all secondary windings to earth.

- Checking of all the current ratios between the primary winding and all the secondary
windings.

- Checking of polarity between the primary winding and all the secondary windings.

- Checking of knee point voltage of all the protection cores.

- Checking that the star/ neutral point of the secondary windings of the three phases of
the current transformers has been made correctly and earthed in the junction box/
marshalling kiosk.

- Checking of the tightness of the connections of the wiring of the secondary windings in
the secondary terminal box and in the junction box/ marshalling kiosk.

- Checking of the earthing of the current transformers & marshalling kiosks/ junction box.

- Checking of use of the secondary windings as per their accuracy class/ knee point
voltage/ burden (protection/ metering), continuity of the current circuit of the secondary
windings and the correct phases (R, Y, B) by applying current through primary injection
in each current transformer and measuring the current in the respective equipment in
the control room, such as meters and relays, etc., for each core at a time by shorting
all the other cores in the current transformer.

(VI) CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS/ POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS:

(A) ERECTION AND INSTALLATION:

(i) Levelling of the already erected structure(s) and minor fabrication work as required for
erection of the Capacitive Voltage Transformers / Potential Transformers (CVT/ PT).

(ii) Assembly of the different units of the same serial number of the CVT, if applicable.

(iii) Erection of the CVT / PT on the already erected and leveled structure(s).

31
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

(iv) Fitting of the covers on the joint between different units of the CVT, if applicable.

(v) Fitting of terminal connectors on the CVT‟s / PT‟s.

(vi) Laying of cables from secondary terminal box to the bay marshalling kiosks/ junction
box, dressing and fixing of cables in cable trays/ trenches/ supports/ brackets/ pipes.

(B) PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS & CHECKS:

- Measurement of insulation resistance between primary winding to earth, primary

winding to all the secondary windings, and all secondary windings to earth.

- Checking of all the voltage ratios between the primary winding and all the secondary
windings.

- Checking of polarity between the primary winding and all the secondary windings.

- Checking that the formation of the star/ neutral point or open delta connections of the
secondary windings of the three phases of the CVT‟s/ PT‟s has been made correctly
and that the neutral/ one end of the open delta has been earthed in the junction box/
marshalling kiosk.

- Checking of the tightness of the connections of the wiring of the secondary windings in
the secondary terminal box and in the junction box/ marshalling kiosk.

- Checking of the earthing of the CVT‟s/ PT‟s.

- Checking that there is no shorting in the wiring of the secondary circuit of the VTs.

- Checking of use of the secondary windings as per their accuracy class/ burden
(protection/ metering), connections of the voltage circuit of the CVT/PT secondary
windings and the correct phases (R, Y, B) by applying voltage through variac in each
wire of the control cable from the CVT/ PT to the control room, and measuring the
voltage at all points in the respective equipment in the control room, such as meters
and relays, etc., for each core at a time while keeping all the other cores in the CVT/
PT disconnected.

- Earthing of HF Terminal of CVT if it is not used for PLCC system.

(VII) LIGHTNING ARRESTERS:

(A) ERECTION AND INSTALLATION:

(i) Levelling of the already erected structure(s) and minor fabrication work thereon, or
making mounting arrangements on the beams of the already erected sub-station
structures, for erection of the Lightning Arresters and Surge Counters, as applicable &
as required.

(ii) Assembly of the different units of the same serial number of the Lightning Arresters, as
applicable.

32
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

(iii) Erection of the Lightning Arresters on the already erected and leveled structure(s), or
on the already prepared arrangement on the beams of the sub-station structures.

(iv) Fitting of the Surge Counter on the structure and making connection to the lowest unit
of the Lightning Arrester above the base insulator, as applicable.

(v) Fitting of corona/ grading ring on the Lightning Arrester, as applicable.

(vi) Fitting of terminal connectors on the Lightning Arresters.

(B) PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS& CHECKS:

- Measurement of insulation resistance between line end to earth, and of individual units
of the Lightening Arrester, as applicable.

- Checking of clearance from earth of the connection between the Lightening Arrester
and the Surge Counter.

- Checking of the tightness of the connection between the Lightening Arrester and the
Surge Counter and from the Lightening Arrester/ Surge Counter to earth, as applicable.

- Checking of healthiness of the Surge Counter using a Surge Counter Testing

Instrument.

(VIII) BATTERY SET:

(A) ERECTION AND INSTALLATION:

(i) Battery charging and discharging and all activities related to the erection and
installation of the Battery set are to be carried out as per the recommendations/
directions/ procedure given in the Erection & Installation Manual of the Battery
Manufacturer.

(ii) Assembly and installation of the mounting frame / stand in the battery room .

(iii) Erection of modules containing the cell on the mounting frame/ stand as per
Manufacturer's manual and drawing.

(iv) Making intercell connections as per manufacturers general arrangement drawing and
tightening of inter-cell connectors to a torque as mentioned in the manufacturers
erection manual.

(v) Laying of cables for connecting the battery set to the battery charger

(vi) Connecting battery set to battery charger.

(vii) Giving a freshening charge to the battery set.

(viii) The rate & duration of freshening charge at which the battery set is to be charged with
reference to the ambient temperature, shall be as per manufacturer's manual.

33
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

(B) DISCHARGE/ CAPACITY TEST:

(i) The Battery Set shall be discharged after keeping it open circuit for not less than 2
hours and not more 24 hours from the completion of full charge.

(ii) Discharging the Battery Set at its 10 hour rate, i.e., at a current equal to 10 % of its
rated ampere hour capacity as per instruction and precautions mentioned in the
manufacturer's manual.

(iii) Recording the voltmeter and ammeter readings every 5 minutes for the first 15
minutes, and thereafter every 15 minutes up to the end of discharge cycle.

(iv) Noting the time in hours elapsing between the beginning and end of the discharge.
This shall be taken as the period of discharge.

(v) The average temperature of the electrolyte during discharge shall be the average of
the temperature readings noted at hourly intervals during discharge.

(vi) The capacity of the Battery Set is obtained by multiplying the discharge current in
amperes by the time in hours as observed above. This capacity is corrected to 27 Deg.
C by the formula:

C27 = Ct + Ct × 0.43 × ( 27 – t )
--------------------------
100
where:
't‟ is the average ambient temperature of the battery room,
„C27‟is the Capacity of the Battery Set at 27 Deg. C, and
„Ct‟ is the measured Capacity of the Battery Set at „t‟ Deg. C.

(vii) If 100% or more capacity is achieved at any time during the above discharge test,
finally charge the Battery Set and put it in operation in the floating mode..

(viii) The minimum acceptable capacity of the Battery Set (corrected to 27°C) which is to be
achieved during the above discharge test is 85 % of the rated capacity. If it is not
achieved, follow the instructions of manufacturer's manual

(ix) Charge and discharge the Battery Set until 100 % capacity is achieved. If 100%
capacity is achieved within another four discharges, finally charge the Battery Set and
put it in operation in the floating mode.

(ix) The 100 % capacity of the Battery Set shall be achieved within these 5 discharges .

(IX) BATTERY CHARGERS

(A) ERECTION AND INSTALLATION:

(i) Placing of the battery charger at its designated location in the control room as per
layout.

(ii) Fixing/ bolting of the battery charger on the trench provided in the floor of the control
room.

34
Vol-II, Sec-III; Technical specification for Erection, Testing & Commissioning

(B) PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECKS:

- Checking of tightening of all terminal connections.

- Checking of the earthing of the battery charger to the earth mat.

(C) PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS:

- Connect only the AC supply cable from the LT Panel. The cables to the Battery Set
and the DC panel should not be connected.

- Switch on the AC supply and check the voltages on the terminals of the incoming
cable.

- Keep the Auto- Manual switch in Manual position. Switch on the Float charger. Raise
the voltage manually to the required output value and check the voltage and polarity on
the laod and battery terminals, Lower the voltage manually to check operation of the
control circuit.

- Calibrate the DC voltmeter.

- Keep the Auto Manual switch in Auto position. Set the output voltage to the required
value.

- Put the switch in the manual position and lower the voltage. Put the switch in Auto
position. The output voltage should increase to the set value. Repeat the above test
by increasing the voltage. The output voltage should decrease to the set value. Adjust
the voltage setting if required.

- Check the annunciations such as AC supply fail”, “DC earth fault”, “Fuse failure”, etc.
as provided.

- Switch off the Float Charger.

- Keep the Boost Charger voltage selecting taps (Coarse and Fine)/ voltage setting at
the minimum position. Switch on the Boost charger.

- Check the voltage and polarity on the battery terminals. Raise the voltage to the
maximum output value and check the voltage on the battery terminals.

- Set the voltage to the rated value. Put the keyed push button (Boost as Float) in the
ON position, Check that the rated voltage is available on the load terminals.

- Switch off the Boost charger.

- Connect the cables to the Battery set and the DC panel.

35
Vol-II, Sec-IV; Drawings

SECTION-IV

DRAWINGS

1
Vol-II, Sec-IV; Drawings

INDEX

S. No. PARTICULARS
1.0 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
2.0 ELECTRICAL LAYOUT
3.0 CIVIL DRAWINGS:
3.1 FOUNDATION DRAWING FOR 132 KV STRUCTURE TYPE BT1/BT3, BT4
and BT6/BT7
3.2 FOUNDATION DRAWING FOR 33 KV STRUCTURE TYPE XYZ/YZ and
XY/Y.
3.3 WELDED MESH FENCING
3.4 CABLE TRENCH
3.5 CONTROL ROOM
3.6 FOUNDATION DRAWING FOR 132 KV EQUIPMENT STRUCTURE TYPE
BO1
3.7 FOUNDATION DRAWING FOR 132 KV EQUIPMENT STRUCTURE TYPE
AO5
3.8 FOUNDATION DRAWING FOR 132 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER
3.9 FOUNDATION DRAWING FOR 33 KV EQUIPMENT STRUCTURE TYPE X-
15
3.10 FOUNDATION DRAWING FOR 33 KV EQUIPMENT STRUCTURE TYPE
'33 kV CT'
3.11 FOUNDATION DRAWING FOR STRUCTURE TYPE 'PI'
3.12 FOUNDATION DRAWING FOR MK
3.13 FOUNDATION DRAWING FOR 33 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER
3.14 FOUNDATION DRAWING FOR ISOLATOR MECH. HANDLE
3.15 DETAILS OF GROUND LEVEL RESERVOIR (GLR)
3.16 FOUNDATION DRAWING FOR 132/33 KV TRANSFORMER
3.17 COW CATCHER
4.0 EARTHING DRAWINGS

2
 o!
ol
--F
-1
DF
n6a I
p

o
u)
Y
i
.1
oj-
I

nd-
: I

I
a
U
F
o
+
tO.
u:.
o_.
+F

t :
.*,v
Hl+
2

E'I z
J a
u
E cl |
-i-_:
irr
tr d
ul t-
-lx ,L

a'1
|-6
;
(u q,
o
d
l-
-,
lj
l!1
lt
>: ltr
<tn a)
U lrl
N.
d= t, E --l
o,,>
ulf,
Eii
d
IJ
F
t-
$l:
Ll+
@
'. .E r-.r z
.E
-T :lt!
I ll;
r.J - t-
=Ea
--i J r.j
a., -:..-- I F
I -'

eEJri
.a
t:+J r4
f4J
_a,zd.
._ Ld

E*B#
I * 19r',
8b=E
b H,ElE
i E [Link]
==-<
c) 4.F Ea
trt

f.-.-- a.. ----t

trJ
ft,
.:)
l-
r-)
=)
D'
F
U)
[r-
t=l
tn
t:l-
:>--
F--
 l0 srsr.
[Link]

- +$?.r.!r-.
tricr,elrp , ' I
bcf, t{
I
I

I
I

om
o|,
E'8,,

a
.$
d
c,
E
H
 F.Q.L

N01E:-
1. AlL DIMENSIONS ARE WRITTEN IN mm
2. IN SIDE SURFACE SHAU BE FINISHED Willi PLASTER 20 mm THICK IN CM 1:6
c.cll4<1 3. 20 mm THICK CEMENT PLASTER C .• 1.6 SHAlL BE DONE ON OUT SIDE EXPOSED
FACE OF CABLE TRENCH/DRAIN FROM TOP UP TO 150 mm BELOE F.G.l.
4. THE BASE OF CABLE TRENCH WILL REST ON FIRM GROUND 500 mm BElOW N.S.L IN CASE OF
FILLED UP GROUND. THE EARTH SHAlL BE COMPACTED TO THE REQUIRED PROCTOR
DENSITY. IN CASE OF EXPANSIVE SOIL PROPER FOUNDATION DESIGN TO BE FOLLOWED
5. LONGITUDINAL SLOPE OF 1:500 IS TO BE PROVIDED FOR EFFECTNE DRAINAGE OF RAIN WATER
CABLE TRENCH TYPE 'A' CABLE TRENCH TYPE '8'
6 AT LAST END OF CABLE TRENCHES. DRAINAGE TRENCH WITH COVER OR HUME
PIPE SHOULD BE PROVIDE FOR EFFECTIVE DiSPOSAl OF RAIN WATER TO
LOWING AREA OUT SIDE SWITCH YARD OTHERWISE SUITABlE SCHEME FOR
C.C.ILOCK1:2>4-- PROPER DISPOSAL SHOULD BE GOT APPROVED FROM COMPETENT AUTHORITY.
_1011X1CIII(TYP.)
C.C.ILOCK1:2>4 -_. 7. FERROW CEMENT COVERS LIGHT/HEAVY DUTY SHAU BE PROVIDED AS PER APPROVED
1011X1011X1CIII(TYP.) : DRG. BASED ON 1.5. SPECIFICATION ACCORDING TO SITE REQUIREMENT.

_, OF GRAVEL 6. SECTION INDICATES MIN. DEPTH BUT ACTUAl DEPTH OF

1tlP OF GRAVEl. TRENCH AS PER REQUIRED SLOPE IS TO BE PROVIDED
9. WROK SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT AS PER APPROVED ELP PLAN OF GSS
10. THE OTHER DETAILS SHALL BE REMAIN SAME AS PER PREVIOUS APPROVED DRG FROM PPD

~ ... + + + ...+ +/ .,.+ + ......+ J-- C.C1* OFFICE OF THE CHIEF ENGINEER (CIVIL)
-ownj 8mm.4NO
RR.V.P.N.L. JAlPUR
AV.40 _ n. C.C""*G 1:2>4 L AV.40... n.c.c""*Gl:2:4 - 300 DETAILS OF CABLE -mENCHES FOR 1321220 KV G8S
/
j"~::::'--:====;:(j;;r.l . 8 mm • 4 NO DRAWAN BY :- CHECKED ~ [Link].
CABLE TRENCH TYPE 'C' CABLE TRENCH TYPE '0' 8mm@2~~ SCALE :- N.T.S.
'-L:P.G8~kN
~1' ~~"~
R.P. TIWARI. XEN DATE:- 04.04.2019
_ _(~'IIl::,",_CELL) !_A_T()_C:~(C:I'II_Ll
RCC M-2O GRADE DETAILS TYPICAL 'A'

APPROVED BY :-
~
AruL ~ CE (CML)
 0 A C E G I KM O
26505
26205
L VL L ET NI L OT LLI S N O

L VL L ET NI L OT LLI S N O
3803 3803 3803 3803 3803 3487 903 2800
900

I TI T RAP DEZ AL G

I TI T RAP DEZ AL G
HTI WL L A WT H G

HTI WLL A WT H GI E H WOL

900
5 C-1
W
C-2
W
C-3
W
C-4
W
C-5
W
C-6
W
C-7
W 5
I EH L L UF
2000
5105

5105
W
2100
1050

RAMP
HD2 LD2
1 2 3 D C-9
4 C-11
4
1500

CONTROL ROOM C-10 D4

300 1200 18.79m X 10.50m D1
2420

2420
TOILET
1050

RAMP PVC PIPE 150 MM DIA

2.50M X2.38 M
900
EX EX
3 C-12
C-13
3 SCHEDULE OF GROUND FLOOR DOOR & WINDOW
18010

18010
17485

17485
1125
W [Link]. DESCRIPTION D/W SIZE SILL NO'S
2835

2835
01 ALUMINIUM W 1800 X 1700 900 14
11
02 ALUMINIUM W1 1500 X 1700 900 01
2000

9 03 1350 X 1700 900 01

ALUMINIUM W2

275
04 ALUMINIUM W3 1000 X 1700 900 01
7
05 ALUMINIUM DW 3800 X 1700 900 01
C-17 W
2 D2

C-15 C-16 WARDROBE WARDROBE WARDROBE

C-18 D C-19
5
3
1125 2 06
07
STEEL(MUMTY)
ALUMINIUM
DW1
V
2400 X 1200
750 X 500
900
2100

01
04
2625

2625
1125 250 08 ALUMINIUM V1 1200 X 500 2100 01
DW1 1 09 01
ALUMINIUM V2 500 X 500 2100
FOR MUMTY
W1 23 W2 10
ALUMINIUM D 2500X 2600 - 02
D2 11 ALUMINIUM D1 1200 X 2600 - 01
12 WOODEN D2 1050X 2100 - 05
C-24 D2 D4 D6 13 HD2 1050X 2600 - 01
D2 D2 D3 WARDROBE WARDROBE ALUMINIUM
14 ALUMINIUM LD2 1050X 2100 - 01
TOILET 15 WOODEN D3 900 X 2100 - 02
1.80m X2.18m
16 WOODEN D4 825 X 2100 - 04
TOOLS ROOM
2.00m X 4.75m

17 WOODEN D5 750 X 2100 - 01

D4
4500

4500
W3 18 D6 1000 X 2600 - 01
D3 REST ROOM ALUMINIUM
MALE STAFF
2.75mX4.50m
D4
GENERAL DRAWING FOR 132 KV GSS CONTROL
DW ROOM BUILDING.
W D W
900 W C-32 W
0 C-30
4
3
300

C-35
0 GROUND FLOOR PLAN
900

900
D 2
2751 750 413 300 1800 1413 750 363 1800 1019 900

113
1

300

900
4050
OFFICE OF THE CE (CIVIL) JAIPUR
4900
D.M AEN (CIVIL) XEN (CIVIL) SE (CIVIL) CE (CIVIL)
4138 3576 3988 4300 3525 3026 1189 2463 DATE :- 14-2-2019 SCALE : N.T.S DWG. NO. -
26205
26505
0 D F H J N O ARCHITECTS, INTERIORS & ALLIED SERVICES
 450
C-12 C-13
450
450

2400
DW1

450
 950

EX
 950
3650

STAFF ROOM FEMALE TOILET PLCC ROOM

TOOLS ROOM WATER SPACE REST ROOM TOILET REST ROOM
FEMALE STAFF MALE STAFF ENTRANCE LOBBY
600 MIN.
VARIABLE AS PER SITE

SECTION AT -AA
1600

2550
950

900
3650 600 MIN.
VARIABLE AS PER SITE

SECTION AT -BB
950

900
3650 600 MIN.
VARIABLE AS PER SITE
SECTION AT -CC
EPLO
S SLO PE
EPLO
S SLO PE
EPLO
S SLO PE
R.W.S R.W.S
 GEYSER
H.T - 2175mm
NOTES:-
T-1
525

377

525
D4 LVL -20mm
1. ALL DIMENSION ARE IN MILIMETERS.
TOILET 2. NO DIMENSION SHALL BE MEASURED FROM
1.80mX2.18m THIS DRAWING, ONLY WRITTEN DIMENSIONS
BE FOLLOWED.
T-2 3. FOR OTHER SPECIFICATIONS / CONST. DETAILS
600

LVL -20mm REFER MANNUAL& GUIDE LINE ISSUED

BY THE CHIEF ENGINEER ( CIVIL) OFFICE.
450

4. IF ANY DIFFICULTY / DISCRIPENCY FOUND AT

SITE , REFER THIS OFFICE IMMEDIATELY.
5. FITTING & FIXTURES SHALL BE FIXED
D4
600

AS PER STANDARD NORMS.

450
GEYSER
H.T - 2175mm
REST ROOM MALE TOILET
REST ROOM FEMALE TOILET
600
D3
T-4
LADIES TOILET
LVL -20mm
900

GENTS TOILET
600
2.91mX2.32m
GENERAL DRAWING FOR 132 KV GSS CONTROL
ROOM BUILDING.
W.C T-3
1.05mX1.16m D5

T. N
250 TOILET LAYOUT & DETAIL

900
450

N.T
600
OFFICE OF THE CE (CIVIL) JAIPUR.
CE (CIVIL)
GENTS TOILET D.M AEN (CIVIL) XEN (CIVIL) SE (CIVIL)
DATE :- 14-2-2019 SCALE : N.T.S DWG. NO. -
JEN & AEN ROOM TOILET ARCHITECTS, INTERIORS & ALLIED SERVICES
 TO RAIN WATER
HARVESTING
/
WATER COLLECTION TANK Ø10 0 PIPE SIZES
AS PER AREA
C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6 C-7
Ø15 0 PIPE SIZES
S.W.C
SEPTIC TANK SOAK PIT

SEZI S EPI P 0 51 Ø
C-9
C-11
C-10 N.T

G.T
250
C-12 C-13
C-15 C-16 C-17 C-18 C-19
C-24

377
525

600
250
T-2
N.T

525
N.T
T-1

600
N.T
T-3 N.T

900
600
450
C-32 C-35

250
C-30
RAIN WATER CHAMBER SIZE AS STANDARD
MAN HOLE / SOIL WASTE CHAMBER SIZE AS STANDARD
GULLY TRAPS CHAMBER SIZE AS STANDARD
SEPTIC CHAMBER SIZE AS STANDARD
SOAK PIT CHAMBER SIZE AS STANDARD
RAIN WATER HARVESTING SIZE AS STANDARD
Ø100 W.W.P SIZES
Ø100 R.W.P SIZES
Ø150 S.W.P SIZES
 500
1700
1200

1200
900
SCHEDULE OF GROUND FLOOR DOOR & WINDOW
[Link]. DESCRIPTION D/W SIZE SILL NO'S
01 ALUMINIUM W 1800 X 1700 900 14
02 ALUMINIUM W1 1500 X 1700 900 01
03 ALUMINIUM W2 1350 X 1700 900 01
04 ALUMINIUM W3 1000 X 1700 900 01
05 ALUMINIUM DW 3800 X 1700 900 01
06 STEEL(MUMTY) DW1 2400 X 1200 900 01
07 ALUMINIUM V 750 X 500 2100 04
08 ALUMINIUM 1200 X 500 2100 01
V1
09 ALUMINIUM 500 X 500 2100 01
V2
10 D 2500X 2600 - 02
ALUMINIUM
11 ALUMINIUM D1 1200 X 2600 - 01
12 D2 1050X 2100 - 05
WOODEN
13 ALUMINIUM HD2 1050X 2600 - 01
14 ALUMINIUM LD2 1050X 2100 - 01
15 D3 900 X 2100 - 02
WOODEN
16 D4 825 X 2100 - 04
WOODEN
17 WOODEN D5 750 X 2100 - 01
18 ALUMINIUM D6 1000 X 2600 - 01

2100
 NOTE -
1. Grade of Concrete M-20
2. Grade of steel Fe - 415
600

230
8. ALL DWG READ WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING.
9. ALL CENTRE LINE IS CONSIDER FROM 115MM
IN COLUMN
2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT
+1#16EXT +1#16EXT +1#16EXT +1#16EXT +1#16EXT +2#20EXT +2#20EXT
900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 1000 1000 900
2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT
+1#20EXT
2#16CONT
2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT
+1#16EXT +1#16EXT +1#20EXT +1#20EXT +1#20EXT +1#16EXT +1#16EXT +1#16EXT
900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900

600
2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT
+1#16EXT +1#16EXT
C-29 C-32 C-33 C-34
230
3#20CONT 3#20CONT 3#20CONT
+4#25EXT +4#25EXT
2600
5#25CONT
2#16CONT 2#16CONT
2#16CONT 2#16CONT 3#20CONT 3#20CONT 3#20CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT
+2#20EXT +2#20EXT +4#25EXT +4#25EXT +2#20EXT +2#20EXT
1200 1200 2600 1200 1200
92- C

450

450
3#16CONT 3#16CONT
5#25CONT
230 230
3#20CONT 3#20CONT 3#20CONT 3#20CONT 3#20CONT 3#20CONT
+4#25EXT +4#25EXT +4#25EXT +4#25EXT
2600 2600
5#25CONT 5#25CONT
3#16CONT 3#16CONT 3#16CONT 2#16CONT 2#16CONT
+1#20EXT +2#20EXT
1400 1400 1200

43- C
600
3#16CONT
3#16CONT 3#16CONT
300
 2#16CONT
+1#16EXT
2#16CONT
900 900
C-12 C-13
8. ALL DWG READ WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING.
9. ALL CENTRE LINE IS CONSIDER FROM 115MM
IN COLUMN
C-29 C-32 C-33 C-34
 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450
GROUND FLOOR ROOF

FIRST FLOOR ROOF

2#25 2#25 2#25 2#25

2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16
MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20
TO

4#25 4#25 4#25 4#25 4#16 4#16 4#16 4#16

REINF. 8#20 REINF.
+4#20 REINF.
+4#20 REINF.
+4#20 REINF.
+4#20 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12
2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16
2#25 2#25 2#25 2#25
RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c
GROUND FLOOR ROOF

SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450
2#25 2#25 2#25 2#25
2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16
M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20
FOOTING

MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX.

TO

4#25 4#25 4#25 4#25 4#16 4#16 4#16 4#16

REINF. 8#20 REINF.
+4#20 REINF.
+4#20 REINF.
+4#20 REINF.
+4#20 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12
2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16
2#25 2#25 2#25 2#25
RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c
COLUMN C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6 C-7 C-8 C-9
8. ALL DWG READ WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING.
SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X600
GROUND FLOOR ROOF

9. ALL CENTRE LINE IS CONSIDER FROM 115MM

FIRST FLOOR ROOF

2#25 2#25 2#25 2#25

2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16
MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 IN COLUMN
TO

4#16 4#16 4#16 4#16 4#25 4#25 4#25 4#25

REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. 8#20 REINF.
+4#20 REINF.
+4#20 REINF.
+4#20 REINF.
+4#20
2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16
2#25 2#25 2#25 2#25
RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c
GROUND FLOOR ROOF

SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X600 SIZE 300X600
2#25 2#25 2#25 2#25
2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16
M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20
FOOTING

MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX.

TO

4#16 4#16 4#16 4#16 4#25 4#25 4#25 4#25

REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. 8#20 REINF.
+4#20 REINF.
+4#20 REINF.
+4#20 REINF.
+4#20
2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16
2#25 2#25 2#25 2#25
RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c
COLUMN C-10 C-11 C-12 C-13 C-14 C-15 C-16 C-17 C-18

SPECIAL CONFINING
REINFORCEMENT
SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450
GROUND FLOOR ROOF

FIRST FLOOR ROOF

2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16

hc
MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20
TO

4#16 4#16 4#16 4#16 4#16 4#16 4#16 4#16 4#16

REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12
2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16
RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c
GROUND FLOOR ROOF

SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450
2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16
M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20
FOOTING

MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX.

TO

SPECIAL CONFINING
REINFORCEMENT
4#16 4#16 4#16 4#16 4#16 4#16 4#16 4#16 4#16
REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12

#8@100C/C
2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16

#8@200C/C
RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c

hc
COLUMN C-19 C-20 C-21 C-22 C-23 C-24 C-25 C-26 C-27
FLOOR FINISH LEVEL.
SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450
GROUND FLOOR ROOF

FIRST FLOOR ROOF

SPECIAL CONFINING
Ldt = DEVELOPMENT LENGTH
2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 IN TENSION
REINFORCEMENT
MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 MIX. M-20 Ø = BAR DIAMETER
TO

300
4#16 4#16 4#16 8#16 8#16 4#16 4#16 4#16
REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. REINF. REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12 REINF. +4#12

Ldc
2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 50 Ldt
RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c
300
GROUND FLOOR ROOF

SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 SIZE 300X450 MIN.
2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16
TYPICAL COLUMN TRANSVERSE
M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20 M-20
FOOTING

MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX. MIX.

REINFORCEMENT DETAIL
TO

REINF.
4#16 REINF.
4#16 REINF.
4#16 REINF. 8#16 REINF. 8#16 REINF.
4#16 REINF.
4#16 REINF.
4#16
+4#12 +4#12 +4#12 +4#12 +4#12 +4#12
2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16 2#16
RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c RINGS #8@200c/c
COLUMN C-28 C-29 C-30 C-31 C-32 C-33 C-34 C-35
NOTE -
1. Grade of Concrete M-20
2. Grade of steel Fe - 415
3. SBC of Soil = 75 KN / m2
at 1.20m below N.G.L.
3200 3200
2850 IN TERN AL PLINTH BEAM
2500
1 1 1 1 PCC
1 1 RAMMED EARTH
1 1
3500

3350

INTERNAL PLINTH BEAM

3000

2650

FOOTING F-1 FOOTING F-2 FOOTING F-3 FOOTING F-4

FOR COL - (C-1,C-2,C-3,C-4,C-5,) FOR COL - (C-9,C-31,C-32) FOR COL - (C-7,C-29,C-30) FOR COL - (C-6,C-8,C-28,C-33,C-34,C-35)
#12@150C/C B/W #12@160C/C B/W 8. ALL DWG READ WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING.
#12@160C/C B/W
#12@150C/C B/W
9. ALL CENTRE LINE IS CONSIDER FROM 115MM
500

500

500
250

250

250
600
250

IN COLUMN
P.C.C [Link] P.C.C [Link] P.C.C [Link]
P.C.C [Link]
150

150

150
3200 2850 2500
150

3200 [Link] F-2(1-1) [Link] F-3(1-1) [Link] F-4(1-1)

[Link] F-1(1-1)
1600 1600 1600 1600
1600 1600
1500 1500

1750

1750
1700

1700
450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal
1700

450 Pedestal 1700

1300

1300

450 Pedestal 1 1 1 1
450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal
1 1 450 Pedestal
1 1
1500

1500

1500

1500

1500

1500
1300

1300
1500 1500 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600
FOOTING F-5
FOR COL - (C-10,C-11,C-12,C-13) FOOTING F-6 FOOTING F-7 FOOTING F-8
FOR COL - (C-14,C-20) FOR COL - (C-15,C-21) FOR COL - (C-16,C-22)
300

300

300

300

300
450 450 #10@200C/C B/W 450 #10@200C/C B/W 450 #10@200C/C B/W 450 #10@200C/C B/W
Ped. Ped. Ped. Ped. Ped.
450

450

450

450
P.C.C [Link] P.C.C [Link] P.C.C [Link] P.C.C [Link]
150

150

150

150
1500 [Link] F-5(1-1)
1500 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600
#12@160C/C B/W #12@150C/C B/W #12@150C/C B/W #12@150C/C B/W
[Link] F-6(1-1) [Link] F-7(1-1) [Link] F-8(1-1)
1600 1600 1600 1600
1500
1700

1700

1700

1700
450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal

1400
1 1 1 1 450 Pedestal
1 1
FOOTING DETAIL(TYPE-1) 75 KN / m2
1700 1700

1700

1700
F-10 450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal
1 1
450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal

1700

1700
F-4

1300

1300

1300

1300

1300
1600 1600 1600 1600 1000 1700 1700
FOOTING F-9 FOOTING F-10 FOOTING F-11 FOOTING F-12
FOR COL - (C-17,C-23) FOR COL - (C-18,C-24) FOR COL - (C-19,C-25) FOR COL - (C-26,C-27)

300

300

300

300

300
450 #10@200C/C B/W 450 #10@200C/C B/W 450 #10@200C/C B/W 450 450 #10@200C/C B/W
Ped. Ped. Ped. Ped. Ped.

450

450

450

450
P.C.C [Link] P.C.C [Link] P.C.C [Link] P.C.C [Link]

150

150

150

150
1600 1600 1600 1600 [Link] F-11(1-1) 1700 [Link] F-12(1-1)
1700
#12@150C/C B/W #12@150C/C B/W #12@160C/C B/W #12@160C/C B/W
[Link] F-9(1-1) [Link] F-10(1-1)
 2700 2800 NOTE -
1. Grade of Concrete M-20
2450
2. Grade of steel Fe - 415
1 1 1 1 3. SBC of Soil = 100 KN / m2
1 1 at 1.20m below N.G.L.
3000

2950

2600

FOOTING F-1 FOOTING F-2 FOOTING F-3

FOR COL - (C-1,C-2,C-3,C-4,C-5,) FOR COL - (C-9,C-31,C-32) FOR COL - (C-7,C-12,C-13,C-19,)
FOR COL - (C-14,C-17,C-18) FOR COL - (C-29,C-30) 8. ALL DWG READ WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING.
9. ALL CENTRE LINE IS CONSIDER FROM 115MM
#12@150C/C B/W #12@160C/C B/W IN COLUMN
#12@150C/C B/W
500

500
250

250
600
250

P.C.C [Link] P.C.C [Link]

P.C.C [Link]
150

2800 150 2450

150

2700 [Link] F-2(1-1) [Link] F-3(1-1)

[Link] F-1(1-1)
2700
2700 1183
450 Pedestal
1500 1400 1400
2100 1 1

1475

1475
1 1
1 1
2250

5425

1475

1475
1400 1400
FOOTING F-4 FOOTING F-6
FOR COL - (C-6,C-8,C-10,C-11,C-20,C-23,) FOR COL - (C-26,C-27)

1300

1300
FOR COL - (C-24,C-25,C-28,C-33,C-34,C-35)
INTERNAL PLINTH BEAM
#12@160C/C B/W
1518 1183 #10@200C/C B/W
500
250

2700 PCC

450
RAMMED EARTH
P.C.C [Link] FOOTING F-5
FOR COL - (C-15,C-16,C-21,C-22) INTERNAL PLINTH BEAM
P.C.C [Link]
150

2100

150
[Link] F-4(1-1) [Link] F-5(1-1)
#12@150C/C B/W

300
450 #10@200C/C B/W
Ped.

450
P.C.C [Link]

150
2700
[Link] F-5(1-1) #12@150C/C B/W
 NOTE -
1. Grade of Concrete M-20
2. Grade of steel Fe - 415
2500 2550 3. SBC of Soil = 125 KN / m2
at 1.20m below N.G.L.
1 1 1 1
2800

2700

8. ALL DWG READ WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING.

FOOTING F-1 FOOTING F-2 9. ALL CENTRE LINE IS CONSIDER FROM 115MM
FOR COL - (C-1,C-2,C-3,C-4,C-5,) FOR COL - (C-9,C-26,C-27,C-31,C-32) IN COLUMN
FOR COL - (C-14,C-15,C-16,C-17,C-18)
#12@150C/C B/W
#12@150C/C B/W
500
250
600
250

P.C.C [Link]
150
P.C.C [Link]
2550
150

2500 [Link] F-2(1-1)

[Link] F-1(1-1)
2250
2000
1 1
2400

2150
FOOTING DETAIL(TYPE-3) 125 KN / m2
FOOTING F-3 FOOTING F-4
FOR COL - (C-7,C-12,C-13,C-19,) FOR COL - (C-6,C-8,C-10,C-11,C-20,C-23,)
FOR COL - (C-21,C-22,C-29,C-30) FOR COL - (C-24,C-25,C-28,C-33,C-34,C-35)
#12@160C/C B/W
#12@160C/C B/W INTERNAL PLINTH BEAM

500

500
250

250
PCC
P.C.C [Link] P.C.C [Link] RAMMED EARTH

150

150
2250 2000 INTERNAL PLINTH BEAM
[Link] F-3(1-1) [Link] F-4(1-1)
 2350 2400
NOTE -
1. Grade of Concrete M-20
1 1 1 1 2. Grade of steel Fe - 415
3. SBC of Soil = 150 KN / m2
2650

2550

at 1.20m below N.G.L.

FOOTING F-1 FOOTING F-2
FOR COL - (C-1,C-2,C-3,C-4,C-5,) FOR COL - (C-9,C-26,C-27,C-31,C-32)
8. ALL DWG READ WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING.
FOR COL - (C-14,C-15,C-16,C-17,C-18)
9. ALL CENTRE LINE IS CONSIDER FROM 115MM
IN COLUMN
#12@150C/C B/W
#12@150C/C B/W
500
250
600
250

P.C.C [Link]
150

P.C.C [Link]
2400
150

2350 [Link] F-2(1-1)

[Link] F-1(1-1)
2100
1850
1 1
1 1
2250

2000
FOOTING DETAIL(TYPE-4) 150 KN / m2
INTERNAL PLINTH BEAM
FOOTING F-3 FOOTING F-4
FOR COL - (C-7,C-12,C-13,C-19,) FOR COL - (C-6,C-8,C-10,C-11,C-20,C-23)
PCC
FOR COL - (C-21,C-22,C-29,C-30) FOR COL - (C-24,C-25,C-28,C-33,C-34,C-35) RAMMED EARTH
INTERNAL PLINTH BEAM
#12@160C/C B/W
#12@160C/C B/W

500

500
250

250
P.C.C [Link] P.C.C [Link]

150

150
2100 1850
[Link] F-3(1-1) [Link] F-4(1-1)
 NOTE -
2200 1. Grade of Concrete M-20
2250 2. Grade of steel Fe - 415
1 1
3. SBC of Soil = 175 KN / m2
1 1
at 1.20m below N.G.L.
2500

2400

8. ALL DWG READ WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING.

FOOTING F-1
FOR COL - (C-1,C-2,C-3,C-4,C-5,) FOOTING F-2 9. ALL CENTRE LINE IS CONSIDER FROM 115MM
FOR COL - (C-14,C-15,C-16,C-17,C-18) FOR COL - (C-9,C-26,C-27,C-31,C-32) IN COLUMN
#12@150C/C B/W #12@150C/C B/W
600

500
250
250

P.C.C [Link] P.C.C [Link]

150

150

2200 2250
[Link] F-1(1-1) [Link] F-2(1-1)
1950
1700
1 1
1 1
2100

1850
FOOTING DETAIL(TYPE-5) 175 KN / m2
FOOTING F-3 FOOTING F-4
FOR COL - (C-7,C-12,C-13,C-19,) FOR COL - (C-6,C-8,C-10,C-11,C-20,C-23)
FOR COL - (C-21,C-22,C-29,C-30) FOR COL - (C-24,C-25,C-28,C-33,C-34,C-35)
#12@160C/C B/W
#12@160C/C B/W INTERNAL PLINTH BEAM

500

500
250

250
PCC
P.C.C [Link] P.C.C [Link] RAMMED EARTH

150

150
1950 1700 INTERNAL PLINTH BEAM
[Link] F-3(1-1) [Link] F-4(1-1)
 0 A C E G I KM O
26505
26205
3803 3803 3803 3803 3803 3487 903 2800
3200 3200 3200 3200 3200
3000
2500 2500
C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6 C-7

2850
2650

2650
3500

3500

3500

3500

3500

5 F-1 F-1 F-1 F-1 F-1

F-4
F-3
F-4 5
8. ALL DWG READ WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING.
5105

5105
9. ALL CENTRE LINE IS CONSIDER FROM 115MM
IN COLUMN
3350
1500 1500

1300

1300
450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal
C-9 C-10 C-11

3200
4 F-2 4
2420

2420
F-5
450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal
C-12 C-13
3 3

1500

1500
18010

18010
17485

17485
1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600
2835

2835
1500
1750

1750
1500 1500
1700

1700
1700

1700

1700

1700
1700

1700
450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal

1400
C-14 C-18 450 Pedestal
C-15 C-17
C-19
2 C-16 2
1700 1700
2625

2625
F-6
F-7 F-8 F-9 F-10 F-11

1700

1700
450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal
C-20 C-21 C-23 C-24 C-25 C-26
C-22 F-12
1300

1300

1300

1300
1300

1300

1300
1500

1500

1500

1500

1700

1700
1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1000
1600 1600 1600 1600
4500

4500
1700 1700
3200 3200
2850 2850 FOOTING PLAN(TYPE-1) 75 KN / m2
2500 2500 2500 2500
2650

2650

2650

2650
3000

3000

3350

3350
0 F-4 F-3 F-3 F-2 F-2 F-4 F-4 F-4
0
4138 3576 3988 4300 3525 3026 1189 2463
26205
26505
0 D F H J N O
 0 A C E G I KM O
26505
26205
3803 3803 3803 3803 3803 3487 903 2800
2700 2700 2700 2700 2700 2600
2100 2100
C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6 C-7

2450
2250

2250
3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

5 F-1 F-1 F-1 F-1 F-1

F-4
F-3
F-4 5
8. ALL DWG READ WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING.
5105

5105
9. ALL CENTRE LINE IS CONSIDER FROM 115MM
IN COLUMN
2950
2250 2250
C-9 C-10 C-11

2800

2100

2100
4 F-2 F-4 F-4 4
2420

2420
C-12 C-13

2600

2600
3 F-3 F-3
3
18010

18010
17485

17485
2700 2700
2835

2835
2700 2700 1183 2700 1183 2700 2700
2600 2450 2450
1500

1500
450 Pedestal 450 Pedestal
C-14 C-15 C-17 C-18
3000

3000

3000
C-19
2

2450
F-1 C-16 F-1 F-1 F-3 2
2625

2625
1400 1400
5425

F-5 5425 F-5

1475

1475
C-20 C-23 C-24 C-25 C-26
2250

2250

2250

2250
C-21 F-6
F-4 C-22
1300

1300
1300

1300
F-4 F-4 F-4

1475

1475
2100 2100 2100 2100
1517 1183 1518 1183
1400 1400
4500

4500
2700 2700
FOOTING PLAN(TYPE-2) 100 KN / m2
2800 2800
2450 2450
2100 2100 2100 2100
2250

2600

2600

2950

2950

2250

2250

2250
0 F-4 F-3 F-3 F-2 F-2 F-4 F-4 F-4
0
4138 3576 3988 4300 3525 3026 1189 2463
26205
26505
0 D F H J N O
 0 A C E G I KM O
26505
26205
3803 3803 3803 3803 3803 3487 903 2800
2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2400
2000 2000
C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6 C-7

2250
2150

2150
2800

2800

2800

2800

2800

5 F-1 F-1 F-1 F-1 F-1

F-4
F-3
F-4 5
8. ALL DWG READ WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING.
5105

5105
9. ALL CENTRE LINE IS CONSIDER FROM 115MM
IN COLUMN
2700
2150 2150
C-9 C-10 C-11

2550

2000

2000
4 F-2 F-4 F-4 4
2420

2420
C-12 C-13

2400

2400
3 F-3 F-3
3
18010

18010
17485

17485
2835

2835
2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
2250 2250
2400
C-14 C-15 F-1 C-17 C-18
2800

2800

2800

2800

2800
C-19
2

2250
F-1 F-1 C-16 F-1 F-1 F-3 2
2625

2625
2550 2550
C-20 C-21 F-3 C-23 C-24 C-25 C-26
2150

2400

2400

2150

2150

2150

2700

2700
F-4 F-3 C-22 F-4 F-4 F-4 F-2
F-2
2000 2250 2250 2000 2000 2000
4500

4500
FOOTING PLAN(TYPE-3) 125 KN / m2
2250 2250 2550 2550
2000 2000 2000 2000
2150

2400

2400

2700

2700

2150

2150

2150
0 F-4 F-3 F-3 F-2 F-2 F-4 F-4 F-4
0
4138 3576 3988 4300 3525 3026 1189 2463
26205
26505
0 D F H J N O
 0 A C E G I KM O
26505
26205
3803 3803 3803 3803 3803 3487 903 2800
2350 2350 2350 2350 2350 2250
1850 1850
C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6 C-7

2100
2000

2000
2650

2650

2650

2650

2650

5 F-1 F-1 F-1 F-1 F-1

F-4
F-3
F-4 5
8. ALL DWG READ WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING.
5105

5105
9. ALL CENTRE LINE IS CONSIDER FROM 115MM
IN COLUMN
2550
2000 2000
C-9 C-10 C-11

2400

1850

1850
4 F-2 F-4 F-4 4
2420

2420
C-12 C-13

2250

2250
3 F-3 F-3
3
18010

18010
17485

17485
2835

2835
2350 2350 2350 2350 2350 2100 2100
2250
C-14 C-15 F-1 C-17 C-18
2650

2650

2650

2650

2650
C-19
2

2100
F-1 F-1 C-16 F-1 F-1 F-3 2
2625

2625
2550 2400
C-20 C-21 F-3 C-23 C-24 C-25 C-26

2400
2000

2250

2250

2000

2000

2000

2550
F-4 F-3 C-22 F-4 F-4 F-4 F-2 F-2
1850 2100 2100 1850 1850 1850
4500

4500
2100 2100 2400 2400
1850 1850 1850 1850
2000

2250

2250

2550

2550

2000

2000

2000
0 F-4 F-3 F-3 F-2 F-2 F-4 F-4 F-4
0
4138 3576 3988 4300 3525 3026 1189 2463
26205
26505
0 D F H J N O
 0 A C E G I KM O
26505
26205
3803 3803 3803 3803 3803 3487 903 2800
2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 2100
1700 1700
C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6 C-7

1950
1850

1850
2500

2500

2500

2500

2500

5 F-1 F-1 F-1 F-1 F-1

F-4
F-3
F-4 5
8. ALL DWG READ WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING.
9. ALL CENTRE LINE IS CONSIDER FROM 115MM
5105

5105
IN COLUMN
2400
1850 1850
C-9 C-10 C-11

2250

1700

1700
4 F-2 F-4 F-4 4
2420

2420
1950 1950
C-12 C-13

2100

2100
3 F-3 F-3
3
18010

18010
17485

17485
2835

2835
2200 2200 2200 2200 2200
2100
C-14 C-15 F-1 C-17 C-18
2500

2500

2500

2500

2500
C-19
2

1950
F-1 F-1 C-16 F-1 F-1 F-3 2
2625

2625
2400 2250
C-20 F-3 F-3 C-23 C-24 C-25 C-26

2250
2100

2100

2400
1850

1850

1850

1850
C-22 F-2
F-4 C-21 F-4 F-4 F-4 F-2
1700 1950 1950 1700 1700 1700
4500

4500
FOOTING PLAN(TYPE-5) 175 KN / m2
1950 1950 2250 2250
1700 1700 1700 1700

2100

2100

2400

2400
1850

1850

1850

1850
0 F-4 F-3 F-3 F-2 F-2 F-4 F-4 F-4
0
4138 3576 3988 4300 3525 3026 1189 2463
26205
26505
0 D F H J N O
 0.5 AS 1 Ldt
DISTRIBUTION BAR
AT TOP (MIN. TWO BAR) A S2
1 1 2
0.5 AS 2
1 2
SHEAR
STIRRUPS
EDGE BEAM AS 1 INTERMEDIATE BEAM U TYPE BAR
0.5AS 1
1 2 COLUMN TIES
1
1 2
SIMPLIFIED RULES FOR BAR BENDING IN TWO WAY SLAB

SPECIAL CONFINING
REINFORCEMENT
FIXED ENDLdt
JOINT IN A COLUMN
0.5 AS 1 DISTRIBUTION BAR
AT TOP (MIN. TWO BAR) AS 2

hc
1 1 2
0.5 A S2
EDGE BEAM AS 1 INTERMEDIATE BEAM
0.5AS 1
1 2
1
1 2
SIMPLIFIED RULES FOR BAR BENDING IN ONE WAY SLAB

24"
SPECIAL CONFINING
1 1 2 TERMINATION OF COLUMN BARS

REINFORCEMENT
1 1 2 INSIDE A BEAM
100% 60% 25% 60% 100% 100% 60% 25%

#8@4"C/C

#8@8"C/C
Ldt

hc
30% 100% 30% 30% 100%
Ldt
1 1 2
1 2

24"
Ldt
END SUPPORT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT
(RESTAINED) * 0.15 L1 SHOULD NOT BE LESS THAN Ldt FLOOR FINISH LEVEL.
SIMPLIFIED CURTAILMENT RULES FOR CONTINUOUS BEAM SPECIAL CONFINING
U TYPE BARS REINFORCEMENT
MINIMUM TWO BARS
Ldt = DEVELOPMENT LENGTH
IN TENSION

12"
Ø = BAR DIAMETER

Ldc
50% 100% 50%
ANCHORAGE OF BEAM BARS 2" Ldt
Ldt = DEVELOPMENT LENGTH IN AN EXTERNAL JOINT (DETAIL-A)
IN TENSION
LAP, SPLICE IN BEAM
BRICK WALL SUPPORT 12"
BARS TO HAVE THE REQUIRED MIN.
SIMPLIFIED CURTAILMENT RULES FOR SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM ANCHORAGE VALUE ON
0.5 Ast Ast
BOTH SIDES TYPICAL COLUMN TRANSVERSE
Ø0 REINFORCEMENT DETAIL GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR REINFORCEMENT DETAILING.
1
CONTINUOUS BARS NOT
Ldt

10Ø
LESS THAN 1/4 AREA OF
BARS AT COLUMN FACE 0.25 Ast (MIN.) SUBJECT
TO MINIMUM TWO BAR
Ldt

HOOP SPACING
SIMPLIFIED CURTAILMENT RULES FOR A CANTILEVER BEAM FOR 135° HOOK FOR 180° HOOK
<=d/4 AND 8Ø PROJECTING FROM A BEAM OVER A COLUMN
Ø = DIAMETER OF LONGITUDINAL BAR
TYPICAL DETAIL OF HOOKS
TYPICAL BEAM TRANSVERSE REINFORCEMENT DETAIL(SMRF)
GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR REINFORCEMENT DETAILING.
 NOTE -
1. Grade of Concrete M-20
2. Grade of steel Fe - 415
450

450
8. ALL DWG READ WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING.
9. ALL CENTRE LINE IS CONSIDER FROM 115MM
230 230 IN COLUMN
 NOTES:-
150 1. ALL DIMENSION ARE IN MM.
150 9500 2. NO DIMENSION SHOULD BE MEASURED FROM THE DRAWING. ONLY
150 MM Φ AC PIPE CONNECTED TO
MENTIONED DIMENSIONS ARE TO BE FOLLOWED.
B OIL DRAIN TENTATIVE POSITION OF 3. USE CONCRETE OF M-20 GRADE ASPER IS-456 AT ALL PLACES EXCEPT
HV SIDE OIL TANK WHEREVER MENTIONED.
4. THE REINFORCEMENT SHALL CONSIST OF TOR STEEL BARS

150
CONFIRMING TO IS-1786-1985 OF GRADE FE 415/FE500.
B P P

$ OF TRANSFORMER
1000x1000x 5. THE DESIGN IS BASED ON THE SAFE BEARING CAPACITY VALUE OF 7500
1050 (Deep) KG/M2 OF SOIL AT SITE. IN CASE S.B.C AT SITE IS LESS THAN THIS
VALUE, THE SAME SHOULD BE REFERRED TO THIS OFFICE FOR
REVISING THE DRAWINGS ACCORDINGLY.
6. THIS DRAWING SHALL BE READ INCONJUCTION WITH TERMS &
OIL COLLECTION

1500
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION & BILL OF
CHAMBER QUANTITIES (B.O.Q.)
7. IN CASE OF ANY DISCREPENCY IN THE DRAWING OR DIFFICULTY AT
SITE, THIS OFFICE SHOULD BE REFER IMMEDIATELY.
8. NUMBER OF REINFORCEMENT BARS SHALL NOT BE COUNTED FROM THE
DRAWING.
9. A COMMON REMOTE OIL COLLECTING PIT OFCAPACITY AT LEAST EQUAL
TO OIL QUANTITY IN THE LARGEST SIZE TRANSFORMER/REACTOR IS TO

3500
1328 600 1136 600 1328 BE PROVIDED FOR A GROUP OF TRANSFORMERS/REACTORS. BOTTOM
OF THE SOAK PIT BELOW THE TRANSFORMER/REACTOR SHOULD BE
CONNECTED TO THE COMMON OIL COLLECTING PIT WITH DRAIN PIPE
(TWO OR MORE HUME/CONCRETE PIPES) OF MINIMUM 150 MM DIAMETER
STOPPER WITH A SLOPE NOT LESS THAN 1/96 FOR FAST DRAINING OF OIL AND
(SEE DETAIL AT 'B' WATER THROUGH GRAVITY FROM SOAK PIT TO THE BURNT OIL
2000

OLD DRG.) COLLECTING PIT, WHICH IS GENERALLY LOCATED AWAY FROM

TRANSFORMERS/REACTORS.

1500
10. THE COMMON REMOTE OIL COLLECTING PIT (MINIMUM CAPACITY 25850
LTR FOR 80 MVA TR ) SHOULD BE PROVIDED WITH SUITABLE AUTOMATIC
PUMPING FACILITY, TO ALWAYS KEEP THE PIT EMPTY AND AVAILABLE
FOR AN EMERGENCY.
A $ OF TRANSFORMER
A 11. THE DISPOSAL OF TRANSFORMER OIL SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT IN AN
ENVIRONMENTAL FRIENDLY MANNER BY CONCERNED T&C WING.
7300

7000
150 6 MM THK. 150

150
1500

CHQ. PLATE
100 MM GI PIPE 10 Φ @ 200 C/C 150
F.G.L.
(TYP.) 10 Φ @ 200 C/C F.G.L.
GI PIPE

850
10 Φ LUGS

150
(TYP.)
RCC WALL

1050

150
300
P.C.C. [Link]

3500

100
200
1676 50
P.C.C. [Link] SECTION B-B
TOE WALL

100
150 1000
RAILGAUGE 150
2000

SECTION P-P
OIL COLLECTION CHAMBER

3644

150
LV SIDE

50 67

144
70

100
50

4816 4816

3644 2346 3644

150
600
150
600 600
150

150
250

700
4 Φ 25 4 Φ 25

150
300

100
TRANSFORMER SPECIFICATION OF 80 MVA TR RAJASTHAN RAJYA VIDYUT
(Technical Associates Make) PRASARAN NIGAM
5000
SE (DESIGN), JAIPUR

(FOUNDATION DRG. FOR 132/33

KV, UPTO 80 MVA TRANSFORMER)
R1:-MS Grating removed and provision of Remote burnt oil pit to be provided.

CHECKED BY
DRAWN BY AEN CIVIL

2743/R1 16.06.2025
DRG NO : EHV/.................../.........................
REVIEWD & RECOMMENDED BY
XEN CIVIL
APPROVED BY
SE DESIGN JPR
Scanned by CamScanner
Earthing Drawings

1
Earthing Drawings

2
Earthing Drawings

3
Earthing Drawings

4
Earthing Drawings